Chevrolet - Equinox Fwd - Workshop Manual - 2005 - 2005

Factory Workshop Manual Make Chevrolet Model Equinox Fwd Engine and year V6-3.4L VIN F (2005) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Accessory Delay Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 16 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 17 Accessory Delay Module: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 18 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 19 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 20 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 21 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 22 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 23 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 24 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 25 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 26 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 27 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 28 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 29 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 30 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 31 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 32 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 33 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 34 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 35 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 36 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 37 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 38 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 39 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 40 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 41 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 42 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 43 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 44 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 45 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 46 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 47 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 48 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 49 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 50 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 51 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 52 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 53 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 54 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 55 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 56 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 57 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 58 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 59 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 60 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 61 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 62 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 63 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 64 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 65 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 66 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 67 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 68 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 69 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 70 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 71 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 72 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 73 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 74 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 75 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 76 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 77 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 78 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 79 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 80 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 81 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 82 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 83 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 84 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 93 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 94 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 95 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 96 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 97 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 98 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 99 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 100 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 101 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 102 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 103 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 104 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 105 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 106 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 107 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 108 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 109 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 110 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 111 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 112 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 113 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 114 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 115 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 116 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 117 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 118 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 119 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 120 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 121 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 122 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 123 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 124 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 125 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 126 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 132 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 137 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 142 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 143 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 149 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-46-001 Date: 090409 OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-46-001 Date: April 09, 2009 Subject: Servicing Vehicles Upgraded to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital‐Capable System (Follow Information Below) Models Attention: This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and the procedures to diagnose an upgraded OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Program Overview Since it was launched in 1996, OnStar® has relied on an analog wireless network to provide communication to and from OnStar-equipped vehicles. As part of an industry wide change in the North American wireless telecommunications industry, wireless carriers are transitioning to digital technology and will no longer support the analog wireless network beginning early 2008. Effective January 1, 2008, OnStar(R) service in the United States and Canada will be available only through vehicles that are capable of operating on the digital network. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006H for information about upgrading certain vehicles to digital service. Details were covered in both the November 2006 and December 2007 issues of TechLink, which are available in the Archives of the TechLink website. Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within the OnStar(R) Canada Online Enrollment site that can be accessed from the OnStar(R) Brand Resources in GlobalConnect. Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 158 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 159 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 160 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 161 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 162 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 163 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 164 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 165 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 166 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 167 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 168 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 169 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 170 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 171 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 172 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 173 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 174 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 175 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 176 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 177 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 178 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 179 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 180 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 181 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 182 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 183 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 188 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 189 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 190 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 191 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 192 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 193 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 194 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 195 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 196 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 197 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 198 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 199 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 200 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 201 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 202 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 203 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 204 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 205 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 206 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 207 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 208 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 209 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 210 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 211 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 212 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 213 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 214 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 215 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 216 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 217 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 218 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 219 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 220 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 221 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006Q Date: 081028 OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-006Q Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Information on Upgrading Certain OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready Systems to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable System Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the upgrade kit installation information for the 2001 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006P (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and procedures to follow should an owner wish to upgrade their OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready system to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Disclaimer Program Overview Program Overview To upgrade their vehicle to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system, all that a customer must do is: ^ Take their vehicle to their dealer for the system upgrade. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 226 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 227 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 228 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 229 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 230 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 231 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 232 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 233 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 234 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 235 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 236 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 237 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 242 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 255 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 260 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 261 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 267 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-46-001 Date: 090409 OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-46-001 Date: April 09, 2009 Subject: Servicing Vehicles Upgraded to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital‐Capable System (Follow Information Below) Models Attention: This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and the procedures to diagnose an upgraded OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Program Overview Since it was launched in 1996, OnStar® has relied on an analog wireless network to provide communication to and from OnStar-equipped vehicles. As part of an industry wide change in the North American wireless telecommunications industry, wireless carriers are transitioning to digital technology and will no longer support the analog wireless network beginning early 2008. Effective January 1, 2008, OnStar(R) service in the United States and Canada will be available only through vehicles that are capable of operating on the digital network. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006H for information about upgrading certain vehicles to digital service. Details were covered in both the November 2006 and December 2007 issues of TechLink, which are available in the Archives of the TechLink website. Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within the OnStar(R) Canada Online Enrollment site that can be accessed from the OnStar(R) Brand Resources in GlobalConnect. Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 281 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 282 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 283 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 284 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 285 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 286 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 287 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 288 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 289 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 290 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 291 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 292 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 293 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 294 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 295 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 296 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 297 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 298 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 299 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 300 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 301 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 302 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 303 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 304 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 305 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 306 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 311 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 312 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 313 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 314 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 315 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 316 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 317 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 318 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 319 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 320 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 321 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 322 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 323 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 324 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 325 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 326 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 327 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 328 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 329 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 330 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 331 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 332 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 333 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 334 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 335 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 336 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 337 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 338 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 339 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 340 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 341 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 342 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 343 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 344 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006Q Date: 081028 OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-006Q Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Information on Upgrading Certain OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready Systems to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable System Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the upgrade kit installation information for the 2001 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006P (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and procedures to follow should an owner wish to upgrade their OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready system to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Disclaimer Program Overview Program Overview To upgrade their vehicle to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system, all that a customer must do is: ^ Take their vehicle to their dealer for the system upgrade. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 349 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 350 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 351 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 352 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 353 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 354 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 355 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 356 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 357 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 358 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 359 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 360 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 365 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations VCIM Location Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 377 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 378 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 379 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 380 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fastener located on the bottom of the OnStar(R) bracket. IMPORTANT: The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) has a specific set of unique numbers that tie the module to each vehicle. These numbers, the 10-digit station identification and the 11-digit electronic serial number, are used by the National Cellular Network and OnStar(R) to identify the specific vehicle. Because these numbers are tied to the vehicle identification number of the vehicle, you must never exchange these parts with those of another vehicle. 2. Tilt the module inboard to the center of the vehicle and pull down the communication interface module (CIM) 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 381 4. Remove the bolts from the OnStar(R) bracket assembly. 5. Lower the bracket and remove the CIM from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. If replacing the VCIM, record the 10-digit STID number, and the 11-digit ESN number from the labels on the new module. 2. Install the OnStar(R) CIM bracket. 3. Connect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. 4. Tilt the CIM inboard and install the CIM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 382 5. Install the CIM fastener. Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Refer to OnStar Reconfiguration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning IMPORTANT: After replacing the vehicle communication interface module, you must reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. In addition, pressing and holding the white dot button on the keypad will NOT reset this version of the OnStar(R) system. This action will cause a DTC to set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 391 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 392 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 393 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 399 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 400 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 401 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 407 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-008B Date: November 11, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Groan/Hiss/Grind Noise While Turning Steering Wheel at Low Speeds OR Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Replace Necessary Components) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to VIN Breakpoints 56073267 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information to correct the front suspension noise concerns. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition The purpose of this bulletin is to address various front suspension noises. Some customers may comment on a groan, hiss or grind type noise while turning the steering wheel at low speeds or when the vehicle is stopped. Or, some customers may comment on a popping noise from the front suspension while driving over bumps. The type of noise will determine the corrective action to be taken. Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Noise While Turning at Low Speeds": 1. Install Chassis Ears (J 39570) to the following locations on the vehicle (refer to diagram): 1. Front Spring 2. Wheel-Well 3. Stabilizer Bar Link 2. Drive the vehicle, simulating parking lot maneuvers/turns, to determine the source of the noise. If the noise is heard most predominantly through: ^ the Front Spring, refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. ^ the Wheel-Well ,the noise is caused by a body creak and no repair is available at this time. A field product report should be submitted to document the concern. ^ the Stabilizer Shaft Link, refer to the Stabilizer Shaft Link in the "correction" section of this bulletin. Note, to confirm replacing the stabilizer link will correct the customer's concern, disconnect the links to verify the noise is eliminated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 412 Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Popping Noise From Suspension While Driving Over Bumps". 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events and the technician should refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. 5. To confirm the noise source, hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 6. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram and repeat steps 1 - 4. Correction Important: Repair only the affected side. Strut Replacement: Replace the strut assembly. Important: The complete strut assembly part number has been revised from bulletin 04-03-08-008. Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement: Replace the front stabilizer link. Part Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 413 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-012A Date: January 04, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Refer to Bulletin # 04-03-08-008A) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being replaced by Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-012 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may notice a "popping" noise while driving over bumps. The popping noise typically occurs over a sharp bump or a large road swell that could unload the front suspension. Cause To verify this bulletin pertains to the customer's concern, try to reproduce the concern using the following procedure: Replication Procedure: 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. 5. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events. 6. If no noise is heard, continue to diagnose the customer's concern using the diagnostic information found in SI. Engineering has determined that the noise comes from "rubbing contact" between the lower spring seat and the front suspension spring. To confirm the noise source, do the following steps: Confirmation Procedure 1. Hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 2. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram. Repeat the "replication" procedure to confirm the isolator prevented the noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps > Page 418 Correction Refer to bulletin 04-03-08-008A for repair procedure. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 424 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 429 Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Popping Noise From Suspension While Driving Over Bumps". 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events and the technician should refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. 5. To confirm the noise source, hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 6. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram and repeat steps 1 - 4. Correction Important: Repair only the affected side. Strut Replacement: Replace the strut assembly. Important: The complete strut assembly part number has been revised from bulletin 04-03-08-008. Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement: Replace the front stabilizer link. Part Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 430 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps > Page 435 Correction Refer to bulletin 04-03-08-008A for repair procedure. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Driver Heated Seat Module - Driver C1 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 442 Heated Seat Module - Driver C2 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 443 Heated Seat Module - Driver C3 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 444 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C1 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 445 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C2 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 446 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C3 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Control Module: Procedures HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 449 3. Remove the module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 450 Seat Heater Control Module: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Control Module Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 451 3. Remove the module. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Bulletin No.: 05-08-67-010A Date: October 18, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof will Not Close from Vent, Partly Opened, or Fully Opened Position (Replace Sunroof Control Module) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2005 Saturn VUE with Sunroof (RPO CF5) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-67-010 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the sunroof will no longer respond to the control switch while in a vented, partially opened, or fully opened position. Cause A software issue with the sunroof control module may cause the sunroof control module to incorrectly indicate a "closed" position, which may result in no power to the sunroof motor. Correction Verify the customer concern. If a condition is present, replace the sunroof control module with a new sunroof control module, P/N 15847643. Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure 1. Verify the customer concern by opening and closing the sunroof. ^ If the sunroof will not open , check the power windows. - If the power windows are also inoperative, check the fuse. If the fuse has opened, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-004 to install 30A circuit breaker. - If the power windows are fully functional, refer to "Power Sunroof Inoperative" diagnostics (SI Document ID# 1392967) in the Body section of the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. ^ If the sunroof will open (or is already open), but will not close proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the sunroof control module. 3. Open and close the sunroof in order to confirm that the customer concern has been resolved. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions > Page 460 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Bulletin No.: 05-08-67-010A Date: October 18, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof will Not Close from Vent, Partly Opened, or Fully Opened Position (Replace Sunroof Control Module) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2005 Saturn VUE with Sunroof (RPO CF5) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-67-010 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the sunroof will no longer respond to the control switch while in a vented, partially opened, or fully opened position. Cause A software issue with the sunroof control module may cause the sunroof control module to incorrectly indicate a "closed" position, which may result in no power to the sunroof motor. Correction Verify the customer concern. If a condition is present, replace the sunroof control module with a new sunroof control module, P/N 15847643. Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure 1. Verify the customer concern by opening and closing the sunroof. ^ If the sunroof will not open , check the power windows. - If the power windows are also inoperative, check the fuse. If the fuse has opened, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-004 to install 30A circuit breaker. - If the power windows are fully functional, refer to "Power Sunroof Inoperative" diagnostics (SI Document ID# 1392967) in the Body section of the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. ^ If the sunroof will open (or is already open), but will not close proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the sunroof control module. 3. Open and close the sunroof in order to confirm that the customer concern has been resolved. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions > Page 466 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 467 Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 468 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 469 Sunroof Control Module C2 (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 470 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Depress the tab on the side of the control module. 3. With the tab depressed, slide the sunroof control module toward the sunroof motor. This will release the control module from the sunroof module. 4. Remove the control module from the sunroof module and disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 471 1. Connect the electrical connector to the sunroof control module. 2. Insert the control module tabs into the sunroof module slots. 3. Slide the sunroof express module away from the sunroof motor until it is fully engaged. 4. Verify the proper operation of the sunroof before securing the headliner. 5. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Component Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 477 Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 478 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 479 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EBCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 480 5. Disconnect the pump motor electrical connector. 6. Remove the EBCM attaching screws. 7. Separate the EBCM from the BPMV by carefully pulling apart. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the sealing surface of the BPMV, with denatured alcohol and a clean shop cloth. 2. Install the EBCM to the BPMV. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the EBCM-to-BPMV attaching screws. Tighten the bolts in a cross pattern. ^ Tighten the bolts to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the pump motor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 481 5. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start the engine. 8. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Component Locations Engine Cooling System Components Cooling System Component Views 1 - Cooling Fan - Left 2 - Cooling Fan - Right 3 - Cooling Fan S/P Relay 4 - Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 487 Front Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 488 Cooling Fan S/P Relay Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 493 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 494 HVAC Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Behind The Center Of The I/P - Turn Signal Relay Location Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 499 Turn Signal Relay Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 505 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 506 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 507 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 508 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 509 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 520 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 521 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 527 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 528 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Bulletin No.: 04-08-47-001 Date: March 02, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: BCM, PSCM and On-Star DTC's B1372, B1377, B1382, U10001, U1016, U1096, U1064, C0000, U1500 Stored in History Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician of DTCs that may be stored in history for the Body Control Module (BCM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and/or On-Star Module. The DTCs shown will not affect functionality of the vehicle and will not turn on the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) light. Diagnostics and/or repairs for any other DTCs that may be set should be made based on the appropriate Strategy Based Diagnostic information found in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's > Page 533 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Bulletin No.: 04-08-47-001 Date: March 02, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: BCM, PSCM and On-Star DTC's B1372, B1377, B1382, U10001, U1016, U1096, U1064, C0000, U1500 Stored in History Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician of DTCs that may be stored in history for the Body Control Module (BCM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and/or On-Star Module. The DTCs shown will not affect functionality of the vehicle and will not turn on the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) light. Diagnostics and/or repairs for any other DTCs that may be set should be made based on the appropriate Strategy Based Diagnostic information found in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's > Page 539 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 540 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 543 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 544 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 545 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 546 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 547 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 548 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 549 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 550 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 551 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 552 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 553 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 554 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 555 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 556 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 557 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 558 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 559 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 560 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 561 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 562 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 563 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 564 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 565 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 566 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 567 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 568 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 569 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 570 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 571 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 572 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 573 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 574 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 575 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 576 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 577 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 578 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 579 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 580 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 581 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 582 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 583 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 584 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 585 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 586 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 587 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 588 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 589 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 590 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 591 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 592 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 593 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 594 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 595 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 596 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 597 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 598 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 599 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 600 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 601 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 602 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 603 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 604 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 605 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: - The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 606 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 607 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 608 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 609 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 610 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 611 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 612 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 613 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 614 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 615 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 616 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 617 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 618 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 619 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 620 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 621 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 622 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 623 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 624 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 625 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 628 The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 629 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The communication among modules is performed through the class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time communication are attached to the high speed GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the networks. The purpose of the gateway is to transfer information from one network to another. The gateway will interact with each network according to that network's transmission model. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for more information about the gateway. GMLAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500 Kbps. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohm resistors, one is internal to the ECM and the other is internal to the BCM. The resistors are used to reduce noise on the high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level which is approximately 2.5 volts is considered a recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to their extremes adds 1 volt to high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts 1 volt from high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. This dominant state is interpreted as a logic 0. GMLAN network management supports selective start up and is based on virtual networks. A virtual network is a collection of signals started in response to a vehicle event. The starting of a virtual network signifies that a particular aspect of the vehicles's functionality has been requested. A virtual network is supported by virtual devices which represents a collection of signals owned by a single physical device. So, any physical device can have one or more virtual devices. The signal supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not. Failsofting is the ability to substitute a signal with a default value or a default algorithm, in the absence of a valid signal. Some messages are also interpreted as a "heartbeat" of a virtual device. If such a signal is lost, the application will set a no communication code against the respective virtual device. This code is mapped on the Tech 2 screen as a code against the physical device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The interaction between high speed GMLAN and class 2 is assured by BCM, which is the gateway. Any message from the class 2 modules to the high speed GMLAN modules is translated by BCM without carrying the original transmitter ID. Therefore the GMLAN modules consider the BCM as being the originator of all class 2 messages that they receive. CLASS 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the class 2 serial data circuit. Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 Kbps. The bus is active at 7.0 volts nominal and inactive at ground potential. Each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the body control module (BCM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1064. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The BCM emulates the GMLAN modules on the class 2, embedding the original transmitter ID in GMLAN messages to class 2. Therefore the class 2 modules can set specific non communications DTCs against GMLAN modules. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 signal at terminal 2 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) at terminal 6 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) at terminal 14 GMLAN SERIAL DATA LINE The GMLAN serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a linear topology. The following modules are connected to the link, in order from DLC to the end of the linear configuration: The body control module (BCM) - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The transmission control module (TCM) - The engine control module (ECM) VCIM communicates functionally and physically on class 2 only. The high speed GMLAN circuits just pass through the module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 630 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a star configuration. The star has one splice pack, located nearby the DLC. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: The body control module (BCM) - The digital radio receiver (DRR) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The power steering control module (PSCM) - The radio - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 631 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 634 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 635 Steps 1 - 6 Steps 1 - 6 Power Mode Mismatch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 636 POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The body control module (BCM) is the power mode master responsible for sending the power mode message on the data buses. The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run) and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) in order to determine the present power mode. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1 - 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 637 Steps 8 - 14 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 6. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 7. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 8. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 9. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 638 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS Battery 1: The scan tool displays 0-25.5 volts. The state of the battery voltage supplied to the body control module (BCM). Driver Door Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the driver door switch. Ignition 1 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 1 Run/Crank input to the BCM. Ignition 2 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 2 Acc/Run input to the BCM. Ignition 3 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 3 Run input to the BCM. Key In Ignition: The scan tool displays Yes/No. The BCM receives an input from the ignition switch indicating whether the key is in the ignition or not, with Yes meaning the key is in the ignition. Liftgate Ajar Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the liftgate switch. Pass Door Switches: The scan tool displays the status of the passenger doors switches. Scan Tool Data List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION The procedures below are designed to set-up the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: 1. Programming the BCM. 2. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components. 3. Program Key Fobs Programming the BCM IMPORTANT: The BCM can be programmed using only Pass-Thru procedure. - After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Pass-Thru programming allows the scan tool to remain connected to the terminal and to the vehicle throughout the programming process. The vehicle must be in close proximity to the terminal while using Pass-Thru. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup for more information. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the PASSLOCK system. - The engine will not crank or start. Program Key Fobs Refer to Transmitter Programming in Keyless Entry for the proper procedure. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 641 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 645 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 646 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Technical Service Bulletin # 05539A Date: 050427 Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Product Emission - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage-Replace PCM # 05539A - (Apr 27, 2005) Models: 2005 CHEVROLET MALIBU, UPLANDER, EQUINOX, CLASSIC, SILVERADO 2005 GMC SIERRA 2005 PONTIAC SUNFIRE, GRAND AM, G6, GRAND PRIX, MONTANA SV6 2005 BUICK LACROSSE / ALLURLE, TERRAZA 2005 SATURN RELAY 2006 PONTIAC G6 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD 2005 AND 2006 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES TO THE RECALL. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 05539. Condition General Motors has decided to conduct a Voluntary Emission Recall involving certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6. Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles. The Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM/ECM) in these vehicles may have been manufactured with damaged internal IC chips, which may affect the Fuel Pump Control and EGR outputs of the PCM; or the Fuel Pump Control and Variable Nozzle Turbo Control (VNTC) outputs of the Diesel ECM. Customers may experience illumination of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or driveability complaints. Correction Dealers are to replace the Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM / ECM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6, Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles and built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: GM Dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning recall repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 655 Important: Saturn U.S. retailers must verify recall involvement by running a National Vehicle History (NVH) prior to performing repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Recall claims will only be paid on involved vehicles. For US and Canada For GM dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report (CIDR) containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld (US) Recall Information, GMinfoNet (Canada) Recall Reports. For U.S. Saturn Retailers only, the involved vehicles are provided in a Facility VIN List attachment to the Saturn Bulletin, located on DealerWorld. Dealers/Retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. For Export For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers will not receive a report with the recall bulletin if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Parts required to complete this recall are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" prior to ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. An emergency requirement should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Parts Information (Saturn US Only) A pre-shipment of the required parts to perform this program has been sent to involved Saturn U.S. retailers from Saturn Service Parts Operations (SSPO). Service Procedure Important: The labor time allowance listed in this recall is different than that currently published in the labor time guide for performing the same operation. In the near future, the labor time guide will be updated with this new information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 656 Prep the vehicle for PCM / ECM replacement. Refer to PCM / ECM replacement in the appropriate vehicle SI service manual and replace the PCM / ECM. The SI document numbers are shown for your reference. CALIFORNIA, MASSACHUSETTS, MAIN, VERMONT VEHICLES ONLY: Install a Recall Identification Label. Also, for California vehicles complete a "Proof Of Correction" certificate upon recall completion. Recall Identification Label -- California, Massachusetts, Maine & Vermont Vehicles Only Place a Recall Identification Label on each vehicle corrected in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Recall Bulletin. Each label provides a space to include the recall number and the five-digit dealer code of the dealer performing the recall service. This information may be inserted with a typewriter or a ballpoint pen. Put the Recall Identification Label on a clean and dry surface of the radiator core support in an area that will be visible to people servicing the vehicle. When installing the Recall Identification Label, be sure to pull the tab to allow adhesion of the clear protective covering. Important: (GM Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels for US dealers can be obtained from Dealer Support Materials. Request Item Number S-1015 when ordering. Important: (Saturn U.S. Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels may be ordered from Saturn publications. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada (GM Only) The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 657 Claim Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Claim Information (Saturn US Only) Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 658 Customer Notification -- For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the sample letter. In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Dealer Recall Responsibility -- All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is shown in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. * * *THE FOLLOWING 2 PARAGRAPHS ARE NOT FOR CANADA OR EXPORT* * * When a California emissions recall is completed by a GM dealer, the dealer must provide the vehicle owner a "Proof Of Correction Certificate" which the owner may need to present to the California Department Of Motor Vehicles (DMV) when renewing their vehicle registration. Without this correction certificate, the owner may be unable to renew their vehicle registration. Additional Certificates can be obtained, at no charge, from Dealer Support Materials. Ask for GM Item Number 1825 when ordering. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 659 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 660 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 661 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 667 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Technical Service Bulletin # 05539A Date: 050427 Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Product Emission - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage-Replace PCM # 05539A - (Apr 27, 2005) Models: 2005 CHEVROLET MALIBU, UPLANDER, EQUINOX, CLASSIC, SILVERADO 2005 GMC SIERRA 2005 PONTIAC SUNFIRE, GRAND AM, G6, GRAND PRIX, MONTANA SV6 2005 BUICK LACROSSE / ALLURLE, TERRAZA 2005 SATURN RELAY 2006 PONTIAC G6 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD 2005 AND 2006 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES TO THE RECALL. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 05539. Condition General Motors has decided to conduct a Voluntary Emission Recall involving certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6. Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles. The Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM/ECM) in these vehicles may have been manufactured with damaged internal IC chips, which may affect the Fuel Pump Control and EGR outputs of the PCM; or the Fuel Pump Control and Variable Nozzle Turbo Control (VNTC) outputs of the Diesel ECM. Customers may experience illumination of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or driveability complaints. Correction Dealers are to replace the Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM / ECM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6, Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles and built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: GM Dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning recall repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 676 Important: Saturn U.S. retailers must verify recall involvement by running a National Vehicle History (NVH) prior to performing repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Recall claims will only be paid on involved vehicles. For US and Canada For GM dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report (CIDR) containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld (US) Recall Information, GMinfoNet (Canada) Recall Reports. For U.S. Saturn Retailers only, the involved vehicles are provided in a Facility VIN List attachment to the Saturn Bulletin, located on DealerWorld. Dealers/Retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. For Export For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers will not receive a report with the recall bulletin if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Parts required to complete this recall are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" prior to ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. An emergency requirement should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Parts Information (Saturn US Only) A pre-shipment of the required parts to perform this program has been sent to involved Saturn U.S. retailers from Saturn Service Parts Operations (SSPO). Service Procedure Important: The labor time allowance listed in this recall is different than that currently published in the labor time guide for performing the same operation. In the near future, the labor time guide will be updated with this new information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 677 Prep the vehicle for PCM / ECM replacement. Refer to PCM / ECM replacement in the appropriate vehicle SI service manual and replace the PCM / ECM. The SI document numbers are shown for your reference. CALIFORNIA, MASSACHUSETTS, MAIN, VERMONT VEHICLES ONLY: Install a Recall Identification Label. Also, for California vehicles complete a "Proof Of Correction" certificate upon recall completion. Recall Identification Label -- California, Massachusetts, Maine & Vermont Vehicles Only Place a Recall Identification Label on each vehicle corrected in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Recall Bulletin. Each label provides a space to include the recall number and the five-digit dealer code of the dealer performing the recall service. This information may be inserted with a typewriter or a ballpoint pen. Put the Recall Identification Label on a clean and dry surface of the radiator core support in an area that will be visible to people servicing the vehicle. When installing the Recall Identification Label, be sure to pull the tab to allow adhesion of the clear protective covering. Important: (GM Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels for US dealers can be obtained from Dealer Support Materials. Request Item Number S-1015 when ordering. Important: (Saturn U.S. Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels may be ordered from Saturn publications. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada (GM Only) The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 678 Claim Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Claim Information (Saturn US Only) Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 679 Customer Notification -- For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the sample letter. In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Dealer Recall Responsibility -- All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is shown in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. * * *THE FOLLOWING 2 PARAGRAPHS ARE NOT FOR CANADA OR EXPORT* * * When a California emissions recall is completed by a GM dealer, the dealer must provide the vehicle owner a "Proof Of Correction Certificate" which the owner may need to present to the California Department Of Motor Vehicles (DMV) when renewing their vehicle registration. Without this correction certificate, the owner may be unable to renew their vehicle registration. Additional Certificates can be obtained, at no charge, from Dealer Support Materials. Ask for GM Item Number 1825 when ordering. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 680 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 681 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 682 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 688 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 693 LF Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 696 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 697 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 698 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 699 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 700 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) (1) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The PCM is in the engine compartment. The PCM is the control center of the engine controls system. The PCM controls the following components: - The fuel injection system - The ignition system - The emission control systems - The on-board diagnostics - The A/C and fan systems - The throttle actuation control (TAC) system The PCM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the PCM detects a malfunction, it stores a DTC. The condition is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. PCM Function The powertrain control module (PCM) can supply 5 volts or 12 volts to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the control module. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 megaohms input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The PCM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 703 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. PCM Service Precautions The powertrain control module (PCM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: Hydrocarbons (HC) - Carbon monoxide (CO) - Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) - Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system, powertrain control module (PCM), detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the PCM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment NOTE: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. - Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 704 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage IMPORTANT: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the control module, DO NOT touch the connector pins on the control module. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the effect of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection IMPORTANT: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. - Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. - Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Basic Knowledge Required NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in incorrect diagnostic performance or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary in order to effectively use this section. You must be familiar with some of the basics of engine operation and electrical diagnosis in order to use this section. - Basic electrical circuits-You should have an understanding of basic electricity and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire, and you should be able to identify a shorted or open circuit by using a DMM. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram. - Use of digital multimeter-You should be familiar with the DMM, particularly the essential tool. You should be able to use the meter in order to measure the voltage (volts), the resistance (ohms), the current (amps), intermittents (min/max), and frequency (Hertz). - Use of circuit testing tools-You should not use a test lamp to diagnose the engine controls system unless you are specifically instructed to do so. You should know how to the use jumper wires in order to test the components and allow the DMM readings without damaging the terminals. You should know how to use the J 35616-B connector test adapter kit and use the kit whenever the diagnostic procedures call for front probing any connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 705 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Ignition (EI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The powertrain control module (PCM) controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensor (KS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 706 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (Tac) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 707 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. Record the remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. IMPORTANT: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. - It is necessary to record the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid will need to be changed at 83000 km (50,000 mi) from the last automatic transmission fluid change. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) (1) and PCM bracket (2) from the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 708 3. Remove the PCM bracket (2) from the PCM (1). 4. Disconnect the PCM wire harness (4) from the battery box cover. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the PCM connectors (2) from the PCM (3). 7. Remove the PCM (3) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the PCM (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the PCM connectors (2) to the PCM (3). 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 709 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (4) to the battery box cover. 5. Install the PCM bracket (2) to the PCM (1). 6. Install the PCM bracket (1) to the battery box cover. 7. Reprogram the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ignition Control Module: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 714 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 715 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 716 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils mounted to the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the IC control circuit of the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 719 Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 720 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Control Module Bracket Replacement IGNITION CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 3. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (1) from the ignition control module bracket. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Position the ignition coil/control module aside out of the way. 6. Remove the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve fresh air tube retainer. 7. Remove the engine wire harness retainers from the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 8. Remove the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 721 9. Lift pipe up slightly to gain access for the removal of the 2 ignition control module bracket bolts. 10. Remove the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). 11. Remove the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). 12. Remove the ignition control module bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 722 3. Install the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Tighten Tighten the nut to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the engine wire harness retainers to the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 6. Install the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and PCV valve fresh air tube retainer. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 8. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wire retainer (1) to the ignition control module bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 723 10. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 11. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection IGNITION RELAY DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ignition relay is normally an open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. When the ignition switch is turned to the Run or Start position, current will flow through the relay coil. A wire connected to the other end of the relay coil completes the path to ground. The electromagnetic field created by the relay coil overcomes the spring tension and moves the armature, allowing the relay contacts to close. The closed relay contacts allow current to flow from the battery to the following fuses: The Eng Controls fuse - The Fuel INJ fuse - The Elec Eng fuse - The O2 Sensors fuse - The Trans Sol fuse - The ABS fuse - The AWD fuse When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, the electromagnetic field collapses. This action allows the spring tension to move the armature away from the relay contacts, which interrupts current flow to the fuses. If the ignition relay fails to close, the engine will crank but will not run. The class 2 communications will be available with the use of a scan tool. The ignition relay table assumes that the vehicle battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test in Starting and Charging. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 727 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 728 Steps 8-18 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 729 Steps 19-28 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 730 Steps 29-37 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 731 Steps 38-44 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 736 I/P Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 737 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 738 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 739 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at strategic locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM compares the signals from the internal and external sensors to a value stored in memory. When the generated signals exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags or seat belt pretensioners. If the force of the impact is not sufficient to warrant inflator module deployment, the SDM may still deploy the seat belt pretensioners. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator located in the IPC ON. As soon as three distinct deployment commands (representing different events) have been issued to any belt pretensioner, or the SDM commands any front and side air bag to deploy once, the SDM shall be considered to not be reusable. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON, notifying the driver that a malfunction exist. In the event that ignition positive voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 740 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the console assembly. 3. Remove the retainers from the connector position assurance (CPA) and disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the nuts and remove the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM to the vehicle with the nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the console assembly. 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. 5. Reprogram the BCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning IMPORTANT: If you do NOT perform the BCM programming procedure, the vehicle option content information which is read by the BCM may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 741 incorrect and a DTC B1001 Option Configuration Error will set in both the SDM and the BCM. This will illuminate the AIR BAG telltale. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 760 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 761 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 762 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 767 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 772 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 773 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 778 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 779 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 780 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 785 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 790 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 791 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 792 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 802 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 803 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 804 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 809 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 814 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 815 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 820 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 821 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 822 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 827 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 832 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 833 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 834 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Steering Column Control Module: Diagrams Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 844 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 845 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, I/P Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 868 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 878 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 884 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 885 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 886 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 887 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 888 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 894 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 895 Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 904 Door Lock Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 905 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push inward to seat the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 906 3. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 910 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 911 3. Remove the power mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 912 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 916 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (With RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Seat Switch Bezel Replacement SEAT SWITCH BEZEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Seat Switch Replacement - Power Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 919 SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 920 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 921 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 922 Seat Switch Replacement - Power Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 923 Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 924 2. Remove the lumbar cable from the actuator: 1. Adjust the knob until the lumbar basket is in the position of least support. 2. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 3. Remove the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly on the knob. 4. Drill out the rivets from the lumbar actuator, if necessary. 5. Remove the lumbar actuator screws. 6. Remove the actuator from the seat. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 925 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the lumbar actuator to the seat cushion frame with screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 2. Install the lumbar knob. 3. Install the lumbar cable in the actuator: 1. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 2. Install the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Adjust the knob to ensure that the cable is properly installed. 4. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Liftgate Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 932 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Heated Seat Switch - Driver (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 933 Heated Seat Switch - Front Passenger (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Switch: Procedures HEATED SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat outer trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 936 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 937 Seat Heater Switch: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Switch Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 938 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof Switch (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Procedures SUNROOF SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 947 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 948 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Removal and Replacement Sunroof Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 949 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Component Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 955 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 956 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 960 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 961 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Left Side of the I/P Left Side of the I/P 1. Ambient Light Sensor 2. Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Traction Control (TC) Switch (JM4) 5. Hazard Switch 6. Fog Lamp Switch (T96) 7. Radio 8. HVAC Control Module 9. Power Window Switch - Main 10. Transmission Range Indicator 11. Horn Switch/Pad - Part of the Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 12. Headlamp Switch 13. Dimmer Switch 14. Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 15. Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 965 Traction Control Switch (JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 966 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Traction Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. 2. Carefully release the retaining tabs and remove the traction control switch from the trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 967 1. Install the traction control switch to the trim bezel. Ensure that the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 2. Install the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Component Locations LF Suspension LF Suspension 1 - C104 Left Shown, C105 Right Similar 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF, RF Similar Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 972 Under the Rear of the Vehicle 1 - Fuel Tank Harness 2 - C406 3 - Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Harness 4 - C404 5 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Shown, LR Similar Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 973 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 974 Under The Rear Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 975 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 976 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 977 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 978 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake rotor. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 981 1. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the brake rotor. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 982 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake shoes. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 983 1. Install the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Seat the wheel speed sensor harness grommet into the backing plate. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the brake shoes. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 989 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 990 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 991 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 992 Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams Cruise/Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 997 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Adjustments CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch harness connector. NOTE: Improper cruise control release switch adjustment may cause brake damage such as brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 998 5. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 7. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 999 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch connector. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Gently compress the locking tabs on the cruise brake retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access of the retainer locking tabs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1000 1. Install the cruise brake switch retainer into the upper hole of the brake pedal assembly with the retainer arrow pointing in the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the indexing arrow is facing to the right and the ears on the retainer are fully extended on the back side of the bracket to prevent the retainer from being pushed out. 2. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the cruise brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal during the cruise brake switch installation will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1001 3. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 4. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 5. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the switch assembly from the steering wheel. 2. Disconnect the cruise switch electrical harness connector from the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the switch electrical harness connector to the switch. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 2. Insert the cruise switch into the steering wheel and gently apply pressure to fasten the switch in the opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the oil pressure indicator switch from the engine block. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1009 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or the equivalent to the oil pressure indicator switch threads. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pressure indicator switch. ^ Tighten the switch to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1013 Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the blower motor control knob by pulling rearward off shaft. 3. Press the blower motor switch retention prongs and remove the switch from the HVAC control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the blower motor switch to the HVAC control module. Press to engage the retention prongs. 2. Install the center trim bezel. 3. Install the blower motor control knob. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1021 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1022 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1026 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1027 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1028 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the refrigerant pressure sensor. 3. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the compressor hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the refrigerant pressure sensor O-ring with mineral oil. IMPORTANT: Use R-12 refrigerant oil (mineral) to lubricate O-rings. Use of R-134a polyalkylene glycol (PAG) oil will cause premature corrosion of fitting joints. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1029 2. Hand start the refrigerant pressure sensor to the compressor hose, taking care not to pinch the O-ring and tighten. Tighten the pressure sensor to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the electrical connector to the refrigerant pressure sensor. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design Refrigerant Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Second Design AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (SECOND DESIGN) REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the location of the temperature sensor. The temperature sensor is retained with a screw to the evaporator pipe. 1. Disconnect the thermal expansion valve (TXV) temperature sensor from the engine harness. 2. Remove the temperature sensor screw from the evaporator pipe. 3. Remove the temperature sensor from the evaporator pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Fill the temperature sensor housing in the TXV with the thermal grease included with the service kit. IMPORTANT: The TXV cavity for temperature sensor must be packed with thermal grease to ensure functionality. 2. Install the temperature sensor and wipe away the excess grease. 3. Install the temperature sensor screw. Tighten the screw to 8.5 N.m (75 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the temperature sensor to the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 1034 Refrigerant Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair First Design AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (FIRST DESIGN) REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the location of the temperature sensor. The temperature sensor is retained with a screw to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). 1. Disconnect the thermal expansion valve (TXV) temperature sensor from the engine harness. 2. Remove the temperature sensor from the TXV. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 1035 1. Fill the temperature sensor housing in the TXV with the thermal grease included with the service kit. IMPORTANT: The TXV cavity for temperature sensor must be packed with thermal grease to ensure functionality. 2. Install the temperature sensor and wipe away the excess grease. 3. Install the temperature sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 5 N.m (44 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the temperature sensor to the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Superheat Switch: Service and Repair COMPRESSOR THERMAL PROTECTION SWITCH REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 44020Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Cut the wire harness leads (1) to the clutch coil. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the clutch coil bracket. 4. Remove the thermal protection switch (TPS) retainer bolt from the compressor. 5. Remove the TPS retainer from the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1039 6. Using a flat-bladed tool, gently pry the TPS from the compressor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Measure and cut the new TPS assembly to the proper length. IMPORTANT: To ensure proper routing and retention, be sure the new TPS assembly is cut to the same length as the original TPS assembly. 2. Remove 9.5 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from the ends of the TPS assembly and the wire harness. 3. Position the stripped ends of wire in the appropriate splice sleeve found in J 44020. 4. Crimp the splices using an approved crimping tool. 5. Gently tug on the wires to ensure proper crimping. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1040 6. Apply heat source (1) to the splice joints until glue (2) flows from the splice sleeves. 7. Clean the TPS pocket of any foreign material. 8. Apply thermal conductive sealant P/N 22681632 to the TPS pocket. IMPORTANT: Use thermal conductive sealant P/N 22681632 to ensure the TPS functions properly. 9. Install the TPS to the TPS pocket on the compressor. 10. Remove any excess sealant from around the switch. 11. Install the TPS retainer to the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1041 12. Install the TPS retainer bolt to the compressor. Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 13. Install the electrical connector to the clutch coil bracket. 14. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046 Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1047 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) DIMMER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side air deflector from the instrument panel (I/P). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the dimmer switch. 3. Remove the screw from the I/P dimmer switch. 4. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dimmer switch to the left side air deflector panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1048 Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Install the electrical connector to the dimmer switch. 3. Install the left side air deflector panel to the I/P. 4. Test the dimmer switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1052 Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (With RPO Code DH3/DF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1056 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Remove the push-in retainer that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Remove the sensor from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient air temperature sensor. 2. Install the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar and with the push-in retainer. 3. Install the front fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1060 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1061 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1066 Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1067 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the access panel covers from the upper trim pad. 2. Remove the I/P cluster trim panel. 3. Remove the windshield garnish moldings. 4. Remove the upper trim pad bolts. 5. Lift the upper trim pad to disengage the clips. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1068 6. Twist the ambient light sensor to remove the sensor from the upper trim pad. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient light sensor. 2. Align the sensor to the upper trim pad and twist into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1069 3. Align the upper trim pad to the I/P and fasten the bolts in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the windshield garnish moldings. 5. Install the I/P cluster trim panel. 6. Install the access panel covers to the upper trim pad. 7. Test the ambient light sensor for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Switches Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1073 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1074 Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1075 Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1076 Brake Light Switch: Adjustments STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 2. Rotate the switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. 5. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1077 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the stop lamp switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Gently compress the locking tabs on the switch retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access to the locking tabs on the stop lamp retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1078 1. Connect the electrical connectors on the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. - Inspect the retainer to insure that the locking tabs have locked into position and the retainer is in place. 2. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. 3. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1082 Fog Lamp Switch (With RPO Code T96) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1083 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel from the center stack. 2. Remove the screw that retains the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. Remove the air deflector assembly. 3. Use a flat-bladed tool to release the fasteners on the fog lamp switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1084 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fog lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the fog lamp switch with the center air deflector assembly and snap into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1085 2. Install the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the fog lamp switch. 4. Install the I/P trim bezel. 5. Test the fog lamp switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1089 Hazard Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1090 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD FLASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws that retain the hazard flasher switch to the I/P center stack. Remove the switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the hazard flasher switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1091 1. Align the switch with the trim bezel and fasten in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the hazard flasher switch. 3. Install the I/P center trim bezel. 4. Test the flasher switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1095 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1096 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the steering column trim covers. 2. Disconnect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the multifunction turn signal switch to the steering column. 2. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Connect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1108 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1109 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1110 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1111 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1115 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1118 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1119 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1125 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1126 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1130 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1132 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1133 Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1137 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1140 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 3. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF.Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool and perform the following: - Accelerate to WOT. - Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 7. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 1143 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 1144 Tighten Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1148 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the CAN serial data to the body control module (BCM). The instrument panel cluster (IPC) displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - PRIMARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: NEW fuel tank module seals are necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain NEW seals for both the primary and secondary modules prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector from the underside of the top of the pump module. 4. Release the retaining tabs (1, 2) and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 1151 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place (1, 2). 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 1152 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Secondary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - SECONDARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: A NEW fuel tank module seal is necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain a NEW seal prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 4. Release the retaining tabs and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 1153 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place. 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1157 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. As FTP increases, FTP sensor voltage decreases, high pressure, = low voltage. As FTP decreases, FTP sensor voltage increases low pressure or vacuum = high voltage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1158 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump module harness electrical connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Position 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers, one on each side of the sensor, near the vacuum port. 4. Carefully use the screwdrivers to lift and release the sensor from the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1159 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor to the fuel pump module assembly. Ensure that the sensor grommet is fully seated to the pump module. 2. Connect the pump module electrical connector to the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1163 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1164 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1168 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1169 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1170 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1173 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1174 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1175 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1179 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1180 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1181 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure which gives an indication of the engine load. The MAP sensor has a 5-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit and provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit, which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. With low MAP, such as during idle or deceleration, the PCM should detect a low MAP sensor signal voltage. With high MAP, such as ignition ON, engine OFF or wide open throttle (WOT), the PCM should detect a high MAP sensor signal voltage. The MAP sensor is also used in order to calculate the barometric pressure (BARO) when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively low, DTC P0107 sets. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively high DTC P0108 sets. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Poor idle characteristics may be caused by uncontrolled fueling due to an open or high resistance in the HO2S 1 low signal circuit. Before replacing any component, ensure that this condition does not exist. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1182 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1183 Steps 7-14 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1184 Steps 15-22 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1185 Steps 23-31 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests the MAP sensor's ability to correctly indicate BARO. 12. The measurement noted in this step will be used in subsequent steps if the measurement does not exceed the specified value. 15. This step calculates the resistance in the 5-volt reference circuit. 16. This step calculates the resistance in the low reference circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1186 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining bolt (3) and bracket (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (1) and the MAP sensor port seal if it is still retained in the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAP sensor (1) to the intake manifold. 2. Install the MAP sensor retaining bracket (2) and bolt (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1187 3. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1191 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1194 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) 1 REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the HO2S 1 harness connector. 2. Remove the HO2S 1 from the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. 2. Install the HO2S 1 to the exhaust manifold. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the HO2S 1 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 1197 3. Connect the HO2S 1 harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 1198 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Replacement HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) 2 REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). 3. Use a liquid penetrate before removing the sensor. IMPORTANT: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. DO NOT use products containing silicone on or near the HO2S. 4. Remove the HO2S 2 (2) from the exhaust pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 1199 2. Install the HO2S 2 (2). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the HO2S 2 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Ensure the HO2S 2 harness pigtail connector is secure to the chassis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1203 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1204 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1207 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1208 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1209 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1210 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1211 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Of The Transmission, Left Side Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1219 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1220 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1221 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1222 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1226 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1229 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1230 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1237 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1238 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1242 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1245 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 3. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF.Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool and perform the following: - Accelerate to WOT. - Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 7. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 1248 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 1249 Tighten Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1259 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1260 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1261 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1267 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1268 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1269 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1273 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1274 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1275 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1278 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1279 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1280 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Left (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 1287 Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Right (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 1288 Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Front End Sensor INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END SENSOR The front end sensor, also known as the electronic frontal sensor (EFS), is equipped on vehicles to supplement the SIR system performance. The EFS is an electronic sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The EFS can assist in determining the severity of some frontal collisions. The SDM contains a microprocessor which performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the frontal deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor > Page 1291 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Side Impact Sensor (SIS) INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SIS) The side impact sensor (SIS) contains a sensing device which monitors vehicle acceleration and velocity changes to detect side collisions that are severe enough to warrant air bag deployment. The SIS is not part of the deployment loop, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The SDM contains a microprocessor that performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the side air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Replacement Caution: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. Preliminary Procedure: Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. 1. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Tip: Loosen the TORX head bolt in order to remove sensor. The bolt has left hand threads. Tighten 8 N.m (71 lb in) 2. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Assembly. Procedure: 1. Slide the sensor towards the front of vehicle to guide the sensor bolt out of release slot. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1294 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. CAUTION: When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint side impact sensor (SIS). Before applying power to the SIS make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedures could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the center pillar lower molding. 3. Loosen the fasteners on the side impact sensor (SIS). 4. Remove the SIS by sliding the module up and out of the key slots in the sheet metal. 5. Disconnect the SIS electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Connect the SIS electrical connector and insert into the connector position assurance (CPA) to secure. 3. Place the SIS through the access hole in the lock pillar. 4. Slide the module down and locate the captured fastener in the key slots of the lock pillar. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1295 Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the center pillar lower molding. 6. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Component Views Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1299 Seat Belt Switch - Left Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1314 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1315 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1316 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1322 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1323 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1324 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Top Of The Transmission, Left Side Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 1334 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Locations Component Locator Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1346 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1347 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1350 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1351 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1352 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1353 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 1354 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1358 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1359 Transmission Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 1362 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle . 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 1363 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 1364 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1368 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1369 Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations RF Of The Passenger Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1376 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1377 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1378 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1379 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1380 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1381 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1382 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1383 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1384 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1385 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1386 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1387 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1388 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1389 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1390 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1391 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1392 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1393 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1394 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1395 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1396 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1397 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1398 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1399 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1400 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1401 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1402 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1403 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1404 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1405 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1406 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1407 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1408 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1409 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1410 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1411 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1412 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1413 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1414 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1415 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1416 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1417 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1418 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1419 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1420 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1421 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1422 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1423 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1424 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1425 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1426 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1427 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1428 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1429 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1430 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1431 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1432 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1433 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1434 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1435 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1436 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1437 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1438 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1439 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1440 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1441 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1442 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1443 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1444 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1445 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1446 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1447 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1448 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1449 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1450 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1451 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1452 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1453 Power Window Switch: Connector Views Power Window Switch - Main Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1454 Window Switch - LR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1455 Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Trim Bezel Replacement - Center) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 1458 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. Installation Procedure 1. Position the switch assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 1459 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Trim Bezel Replacement - Center) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 1460 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch.. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 1461 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push in the switch to seat. 3. Install the door trim panel assembly. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1466 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1467 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1471 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1477 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1478 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1479 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1480 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1481 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1482 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1483 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications > Page 1486 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications > Page 1487 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1488 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear . Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1489 Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. Lead/Pull Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1490 At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors: ^ Tire construction ^ Wheel alignment ^ Unbalanced steering gear The way in which a tire is built may produce lead/pull. The rear tires will not cause lead. Torque Steer Description A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the other direction during deceleration. The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle: ^ A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar, change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the most significant effect on torque steer correction. ^ A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure ^ Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to level ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan (shown on the left side of the illustration) has the most downward sloping axle angle. Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1491 compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment Alignment: Service and Repair Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1494 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1495 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. 2. Important: ^ Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first ^ Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation ^ If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1496 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. ^ Tighten the nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1497 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. 3. Important: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts. ^ Tighten the jam nuts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1498 Alignment: Service and Repair Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification. Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1499 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. 2. Important: ^ Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first ^ Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation ^ If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1500 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. ^ Tighten the nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1501 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. 3. Important: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts. ^ Tighten the jam nuts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Rear Camber Adjustment Rear Camber Adjustment 1. Loosen the upper control arm-to-frame fastener enough to allow movement. 2. Important: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, turning the cam nut will move the camber in to the designated location. Rotate the upper control arm-to-frame fastener in the direction necessary to the correct the camber measurement. 3. Snug the upper control arm-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear camber specifications and adjust as necessary. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the nut and tighten the upper control arm-to-frame bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 1502 Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. Loosen the toe link-to-frame fastener enough to allow for movement. 2. Important: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, a cam nut is available for service if required. Rotate the toe link cam nut in the direction necessary to correct the toe angle. 3. Snug the toe link-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear toe specifications and adjust as necessary. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the nut and tighten the link-to-frame fastener bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1509 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1510 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1511 Steps 7-13 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1527 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1533 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1534 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1535 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1536 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1542 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. ......................5,600 ohm per meter (1,707 ohm per ft) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1546 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Refer to the list below for items to be inspected. 1. Inspect for correct routing of the spark plug wires. Improper routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Inspect each wire for any signs of cracks or splits in the wire. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or terminal, both the wire and the component connected to the wire should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1547 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the left side spark plugs. NOTE: Twist the spark plug boot one-half turn in order to release the boot. Pull on the spark plug boot only. Do not pull on the spark plug wire or the wire could be damaged. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 4. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the right side spark plugs. 5. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 6. Remove the spark plug wires from the ignition coil/control module. 7. Remove the spark plug wires from the engine. 8. If you are replacing the spark plug wires, transfer any of the following components: - Boot heat shields - Spark plug wire conduit - Spark plug wire retaining clips Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1548 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the ignition coil/control module. 2. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the right side spark plugs. 3. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 4. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the left side spark plugs. 5. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 6. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 15 Nm (11.0 lb ft) Spark Plug Gap ................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 1.52 mm (0.060 in) NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1552 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type ................................................................................................................................................... GM P/N 12568387 (AC Delco # 41-101) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1553 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE - Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. - Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION - Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. - Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. - Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1554 - Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION - Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. - Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: Rich fuel mixtures Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. - Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1555 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Observe the following service precautions: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove spark plugs from a hot engine can cause the spark plugs to seize. This can damage the cylinder head threads. - Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so can result in engine damage due to dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or in contamination of the cylinder head threads. Contaminated threads may prevent proper seating of the new spark plug. - Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs (1) from the cylinder head. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Gap the spark plugs to the specifications. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. NOTE: It is important to check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. Pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round wire feeler gauge to be sure of an accurate check, particularly on used plugs. Installing plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 2. Install the spark plugs to the cylinder head. NOTE: Be sure plug threads smoothly into cylinder head and is fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean threads in cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat spark plug can cause overheating of plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Follow the recommended torque specifications carefully. Over or under-tightening can also cause severe damage to engine or spark plug. - Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1556 IMPORTANT: ONLY when the cylinder head is replaced with a NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Install the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1560 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves, and the head gasket. 1. Important: Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the ignition fuses from the I/P fuse block. Disable the ignition. 2. Disable the fuel systems. 3. Remove the spark plugs from all the cylinders. 4. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 5. Block the throttle plate in the open position. 6. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Firmly install the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 2. Have an assistant crank the engine through at least 4 compression strokes in the testing =cylinder. 3. Record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 4. Disconnect the gauge. 5. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 7. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. ^ The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. ^ No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). 8. The following list contains examples of the possible measurements: ^ When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression on each cylinder. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach the normal compression, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ If the compression improves considerably with the addition of three squirts of oil, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and does not build up in the following strokes, the valves may be the cause. ^ The addition of oil does not affect the compression, the valves may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on two adjacent cylinders, or coolant is present in the crankcase, the head gasket may be the cause. 9. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 10. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 11. Install the spark plugs. 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) fuse. 13. Install the ignition fuse to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 1568 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 1569 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1570 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1571 Drive Belt: Description and Operation Drive Belt System Description The drive belt system consists of the following components: ^ The drive belt ^ The drive belt tensioner ^ The drive belt idler pulley ^ The crankshaft balancer pulley ^ The accessory drive component mounting brackets ^ The accessory drive components ^ The power steering pump, if belt driven ^ The generator ^ The A/C compressor, if equipped ^ The engine cooling fan, if belt driven ^ The water pump, if belt driven ^ The vacuum pump, if equipped ^ The air compressor, if equipped The drive belt system may use one belt or two belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. There also may be a V-belt style belt used to drive certain accessory drive components. The drive belts are made of different types of rubbers (chloroprene or EPDM) and have different layers or plys containing either fiber cloth or cords for reinforcement. Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth. The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft. The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys. Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is not equipped with the accessory. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1574 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1575 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1576 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Excessive Wear Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1577 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1578 grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1579 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1580 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1581 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1582 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1583 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Drive Belt Excessive Wear Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1584 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Drive Belt Falls Off Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1585 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Drive Belt Rumbling Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1586 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Drive Belt Squeal Drive Belt Squeal Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the squeal noise. If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1587 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the squeal noise is the drive belt(s) or an accessory drive component. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. This test is to verify that an accessory drive component does not have a seized bearing. With the belt remove test the bearings in the accessory drive components for turning smoothly. Also test the accessory drive components with the engine operating by varying the load on the components to verify that the components operate properly. 5. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. 6. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 7. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 8. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. Drive Belt Vibration Drive Belt Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1588 The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Such as but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom such as the exhaust system, or the drivetrain. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) or accessory drive components may be causing the vibration. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. The drive belt(s) may cause a vibration. While the drive belt(s) is removed this is the best time to inspect the condition of the belt. 6. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 8. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smoothness and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 9. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1589 Drive Belt Whine Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1590 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Provided the vehicle will not be raised or lifted to perform additional work. Utilizing a floor jack and a wood block, support the front of the engine using the following procedure. 1. Place the wood block between the lift point of the floor jack and the bottom of the engine oil pan. 2. Raise the jack until the wood block comes into contact with the engine oil pan and is capable of supporting the weight of the engine. 7. If the vehicle is to be raised or lifted in order to perform additional work. Support the engine using the engine support fixture. 8. Remove the right engine mount. 9. Remove the drive belt from the remaining pulleys. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1591 1. Install the drive belt to all the pulleys except the right idler pulley. 2. Install the right engine mount. 3. Depending on which method was used to support the engine. Remove the floor jack from under the engine oil pan or remove the engine support fixture. 4. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 5. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 6. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 7. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 8. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all pulleys (1-8). 9. Install the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1605 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1611 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1612 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1613 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1614 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER The Passenger compartment air filter is located in the RH engine compartment, near base of windshield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER HOUSING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the RH air inlet panel. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 1620 4. Remove the RH air inlet panel. 5. Remove the LH air inlet panel. 6. Remove the filter housing nuts from the vehicle. 7. Remove the filter housing from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 1621 1. Inspect the foam seal. If the seal is damaged, replace the seal using Kent Industries adhesive back foam tape P/N 46485 (or equivalent). 2. Install the filter housing to the vehicle. 3. Install the new seal nuts to the filter housing. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: New seal nuts must be used when installing passenger compartment air filter housing to prevent leaks. 4. Install the LH air inlet panel. 5. Install the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 1622 6. Install the push pins to the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. 7. Close the hood. 8. Install the push pins to the rear of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 1623 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the RH air inlet panel. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 1624 4. Remove the RH air inlet panel. 5. Remove the filter from the filter housing by depressing the release tab at the inboard edge of the filter housing. 6. Remove the filter from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 1625 1. Install the filter to the vehicle. 2. Install the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 1626 3. Install the push pins to the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. 4. Close the hood. 5. Install the push pins to the rear of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. IMPORTANT: The evaporative emission (EVAP) canister filter cover must also be replaced when the EVAP filter is replaced to ensure proper operation of the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the EVAP canister from the vehicle. 3. Carefully release the canister filter cover rear retaining tabs. 4. Carefully release the canister filter cover forward retaining tabs and remove the cover from the EVAP canister. 5. Discard the EVAP canister filter cover. 6. Remove the filter from the canister and discard the filter. 7. Clean the inside of the EVAP canister filter housing with a clean shop towel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1630 1. Install a NEW filter to the canister filter housing. 2. Install a NEW EVAP filter cover to the EVAP canister. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the seal is properly seated in the NEW EVAP filter cover. 3. Install the EVAP canister to the vehicle. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1636 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1641 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position the oil drain pan under the engine oil drain plug. 3. Remove the engine oil drain plug. 4. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug, replace if necessary. 5. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug sealing surface on the oil pan, repair or replace oil pan if necessary. 6. Remove the oil filter. 7. Clean and inspect the oil filter sealing area on the oil filter adapter, repair or replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lightly oil the replacement oil filter gasket with clean oil. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1642 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the new oil filter. ^ Tighten the filter to 3/4 to 1 full turn, after the oil filter gasket contacts the oil filter mounting surface. 3. Install the engine oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the oil drain pan. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1643 6. Remove the oil fill cap from the rocker arm cover. 7. Fill the engine with new engine oil. 8. Install the oil fill cap to the rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Coolant Line/Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1653 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1654 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1655 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Coolant Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1661 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1662 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1663 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (2). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the heater outlet hose in order to ease installation. 2. Install the heater outlet hose (2). 3. Install the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 4. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 1666 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the heater core inlet hose clamp away from the heater inlet pipe connection. 3. Disconnect the heater core inlet hose from the heater inlet pipe. 4. Remove the heater inlet pipe nut (2). 5. Remove the heater inlet pipe (1). 6. Remove the seal (3) from the heater inlet pipe (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal (3) to the heater inlet pipe (1). 2. Apply engine coolant to the heater inlet pipe seal (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 1667 3. Install the heater outlet pipe (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater inlet pipe nut (2). ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the heater core inlet hose to the heater inlet pipe. 6. Position the heater core inlet hose clamp over the heater inlet pipe connection. 7. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 1668 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the air cleaner air intake duct. 4. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor bolt (3) and bracket (2). 5. Rotate the MAP sensor out of the way of the heater outlet pipe. 6. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) pipe from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 8. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical connector. 9. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 10. Disconnect the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 1669 11. Release and slide the heater core outlet hose clamp away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 12. Disconnect the heater core outlet hose from the heater outlet pipe. 13. Remove the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. 14. Remove the two nuts (3) and bolt (4) securing the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body. 15. Remove the heater outlet pipe (2) from the engine. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 1670 1. Install the heater outlet pipe (2) to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body nuts (3) and bolt (4). ^ Tighten the nuts and bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the heater core outlet hose to the heater outlet pipe. 5. Position the heater core outlet hose clamp over the heater outlet pipe connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 1671 6. Connect the heater outlet hose (2) to the heater outlet pipe. 7. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the heater outlet pipe connection. 8. Connect the electrical connector to the EGR valve. 9. Connect the electrical connector to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 10. Connect the EVAP pipe to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 11. Reposition the MAP sensor. 12. Install the MAP sensor bracket (2) and bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 13. Install the air cleaner air intake duct. 14. Fill the cooling system. 15. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Heater Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1680 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1681 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1682 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1688 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1689 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1690 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Hose - Inlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - INLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater inlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose from the engine. 6. Remove the heater inlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 1693 1. Install the heater inlet hose to the vehicle. 2. Install the heater inlet hose to the engine. 3. Install the heater inlet hose hose to the engine. 4. Install the heater inlet hose to the heater core. 5. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 6. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 1694 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Hose - Outlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose from the engine. 6. Position the loose end of the heater inlet hose outboard to ease in the removal of the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 1695 7. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 8. Disconnect the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 9. Remove the surge tank bolts from the surge tank. 10. Lift the surge tank to gain access to the heater outlet hose. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the surge tank. 13. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. 14. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the hose. This will aid in routing the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. 15. Remove the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 1696 1. Install the heater outlet hose to the vehicle. Route the hose into position for attachment to the surge tank. 2. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the hose. 3. Install the heater outlet hose to the surge tank. 4. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. 5. Install the surge tank bolts to the surge tank. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Connect the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 7. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 1697 8. Install the heater outlet hose to the engine. 9. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the engine. 10. Install the heater outlet hose to the heater core. 11. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 12. Fill the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Hose Assembly COMPRESSOR HOSE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURES 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the compressor hose retainer nut from the battery box. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1702 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. 6. Install a protective cap to the evaporator outlet hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 7. Remove the compressor hose nut from the condenser. 8. Remove the compressor hose from the condenser. 9. Install a protective cap to the condenser to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 10. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector from the pressure transducer. 12. Remove the compressor hose bolt at the compressor. 13. Remove the compressor hose from the compressor. 14. Install a protective cap to the compressor to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1703 15. Remove the compressor hose from the vehicle. 16. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the compressor hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove protective cap from compressor end of the compressor hose and the compressor. 2. Install new seal washers to the compressor hose. 3. Position the compressor hose in the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1704 4. Install the compressor hose to the compressor. 5. Install the compressor hose bolt to the compressor. Tighten the bolt to 27 N.m (20 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Connect the electrical connector to the pressure transducer. NOTE: Refer to Compressor Hose Clearance to the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Pipe Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install a new sealing washer to the evaporator outlet hose. 9. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 10. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1705 Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 11. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose at the condenser. 12. Install the compressor hose to the condenser. 13. Install the compressor hose nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 14. Install the compressor hose retainer nut to the battery box. Tighten the nut to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 15. Install the left headlamp. 16. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 17. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1706 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Liquid Line (First Design) LIQUID LINE REPLACEMENT (FIRST DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV independently using nuts. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the surge tank. 4. Remove the washer bottle. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut from the wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1707 8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent hose retainers from the liquid line. 10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1708 12. Remove the liquid line nut from the TXV. 13. Remove the liquid line from the TXV. 14. Remove the liquid line nut from the receiver dehydrator. 15. Remove the liquid line from the receiver dehydrator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1709 16. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 17. Route the liquid line above the battery box and the ground lug. 18. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 19. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 20. Install protective caps to the receiver dehydrator and the TXV to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the receiver dehydrator and the liquid line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1710 2. Install the new sealing washer to the receiver dehydrator. 3. Route the receiver dehydrator end of the liquid line into position. 4. Install the liquid line to the receiver dehydrator. 5. Install the liquid line nut to the receiver dehydrator. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1711 6. Remove the protective cap from the TXV and the liquid line. 7. Install a new sealing washer to the liquid line at the TXV. 8. Install the liquid line to the TXV. 9. Install the liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 10. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 11. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1712 12. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug. 13. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse. Tighten the nut to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 14. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 15. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (86 lb in). 16. Install the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1713 17. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 18. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower. Tighten the nut to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 19. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 20. Install the surge tank. 21. Install the washer bottle. 22. Install the left headlamp. 23. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 24. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1714 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Liquid Line (Second Design) LIQUID LINE REPLACEMENT (SECOND DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV as a pair using a single nut. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the surge tank. 4. Remove the washer bottle. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut from the wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1715 8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent hose retainers from the liquid line. 10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1716 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 12. Remove the liquid line nut from the receiver dehydrator. 13. Remove the liquid line from the receiver dehydrator. 14. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 15. Route the liquid line above the battery box and the ground lug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1717 16. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 17. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 18. Install protective caps to the receiver dehydrator and the TXV to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the receiver dehydrator and the liquid line. 2. Install the new sealing washer to the receiver dehydrator. 3. Route the receiver dehydrator end of the liquid line into position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1718 4. Install the liquid line to the receiver dehydrator. 5. Install the liquid line nut to the receiver dehydrator. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the line. 6. Remove the protective cap from the TXV, the liquid line, and the evaporator outlet hose. 7. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1719 8. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 9. Install the liquid line and evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1720 10. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug. 11. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse. Tighten the nut to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 12. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 13. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (86 lb in). 14. Install the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1721 15. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 16. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower. Tighten the nut to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 17. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 18. Install the surge tank. 19. Install the washer bottle. 20. Install the left headlamp. 21. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 22. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1722 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Hose - Outlet (First Design) EVAPORATOR HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET (FIRST DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV independently using nuts. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1723 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the TXV. 6. Remove evaporator outlet hose from the vehicle. 7. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the evaporator outlet hose and the compressor hose. 8. Install protective caps to the TXV and the compressor hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the TXV and the compressor hose. 2. Install new sealing washers to the evaporator outlet hose and the compressor hose. 3. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 4. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1724 5. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 6. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 7. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 8. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1725 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Hose - Outlet (Second Design) EVAPORATOR HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET (SECOND DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV as a pair using a single nut. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1726 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 6. Remove evaporator outlet hose from the vehicle. 7. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the evaporator outlet hose and the compressor hose. 8. Install protective caps to the TXV and the compressor hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the TXV and the compressor hose. 2. Install new sealing washers to the evaporator outlet hose, liquid line, and the compressor hose. 3. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 1727 4. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 6. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 7. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 8. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Radiator Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1736 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1737 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1738 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Radiator Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1744 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1745 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 1746 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1752 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1753 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1754 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1760 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1761 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 1762 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the coolant. 2. Remove the upper fascia retainers from the radiator support. 3. Remove the upper radiator bracket bolt from the radiator support. 4. Remove the upper radiator bracket from the radiator. 5. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 6. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 1765 7. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the engine. 8. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator inlet hose to the engine. 2. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the engine. 3. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 1766 4. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. 5. Install the upper radiator bracket to the radiator. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the upper radiator bracket bolt to the radiator support. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 7. Install the upper fascia retainers to the radiator support. 8. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 1767 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the coolant. 2. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the engine. 3. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the engine. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the radiator. 6. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the radiator. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 1768 1. Install the radiator outlet hose to the radiator. 2. Install the radiator outlet hose clamp to the radiator. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Install the radiator outlet hose to the engine. 5. Install the radiator outlet hose clamp to the engine. 6. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the vehicle manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1774 Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-002B Date: January 18, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: DEX-COOL(R) Coolant - New Leak Detection Dye J 46366 - Replaces J 29545-6 Models: 1996-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light/Medium Duty Trucks* (including Saturn) 1997-2008 Isuzu T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models Built in Janesville and Flint 1999-2008 Isuzu N-Series Medium Duty Commercial Models with 5.7L or 6.0L Gas Engine 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X *EXCLUDING 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Epica, Optra, Vivant and Pontiac Matiz, Wave Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-002A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Leak detection dye P/N 12378563 (J 29545-6) (in Canada P/N 88900915) may cause DEX-COOL(R) coolant to appear green in a black vessel making it appear to be conventional (green) coolant. This may cause a technician to add conventional coolant to a low DEX-COOL(R) system thus contaminating it. The green DEX-COOL(R) appearance is caused by the color of the leak detection dye which alters the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. A new leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (J 46366) (in Canada P/N 89022220) has been released that does not alter the appearance of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. When adding the new leak detection dye the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant will not change. For detecting leaks on any system that uses DEX-COOL(R) leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (in Canada P/N 89022220) should be used. The new leak detection dye can be used with both conventional and DEX-COOL(R) coolant. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 1779 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 1780 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 1781 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 1782 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 10.6 quart (10.0 liter) NOTE: ALL capacity specifications are approximate. When replacing or adding fluids, fill to the recommended level and recheck fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1785 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL extended life coolant. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant will: ^ Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). ^ Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). ^ Protect against rust and corrosion. ^ Help keep the proper engine temperature. ^ Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. WHAT TO USE Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, check your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant, you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 1790 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 7.1L (7.5 Qt) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1793 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ......................... T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Description Inspection of the transaxle fluid level, correct type of fluid, and the condition of the fluid for accurate operation of the transaxle. Procedure 1. Important: Routine inspection of the transaxle fluid is not required. Transaxle fluid inspection is only required if there is a symptom indicating a concern with the fluid. Park the vehicle on a flat level surface. 2. Operate the vehicle in order for the transmission fluid temperature to reach the normal operating range. Transaxle normal temperature: 60 - 70°C (140 - 158°F) 3. With the engine at idle, manual shift through all transaxle ranges and return to the PARK position. Leave the engine idling. 4. Clean any dirt or debris away from the area of the transaxle fluid level indicator. 5. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator bolt (1) from the transaxle. 6. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator (2). 7. Wipe away any transaxle fluid from the indicator. 8. Insert the indicator into the transaxle until fully seated. 9. Important: Inspecting transaxle fluid level when not at normal temperature can give an incorrect measurement. The transaxle fluid expands when warm. Remove the indicator and inspect the level and the condition of the oil on the indicator: ^ Transmission fluid level at normal operating temperature (1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 1796 ^ Transmission fluid level if cold (2) 10. If the fluid level is incorrect inspect for the following conditions: ^ Fluid below level, inspect for a leak. ^ Fluid above level, inspect for contamination of the fluid. 11. Important: The transaxle uses T-IV fluid, GM P/N 88900925 (Canadian P/N 22689186). The fluid is normally red in color. The oil may darken in color with more miles on a vehicle. Inspect the condition of the fluid for the following conditions: ^ Excessively dirty with particles in the fluid ^ If there are no DRIVEABILITY concerns, replace the fluid. ^ If DRIVEABILITY concerns are present disassemble and inspect for a cause. ^ Burnt smell ^ Inspect for the correct fluid. ^ Inspect for conditions that may of cause overheating of the transmission fluid. ^ If there are no DRIVEABILITY concerns, replace the fluid. ^ If DRIVEABILITY concerns are present disassemble and inspect for cause. ^ Inspect the transmission oil cooler system for functioning properly. ^ Black in color ^ Disassemble the transaxle and inspect for components that may have over heated. ^ Inspect the transmission oil cooler system for functioning properly. ^ Milky or white tint in color from coolant or water ^ Inspect for failure of the transaxle oil cooler. ^ Inspect for missing or improperly routed vent hose. ^ Inspect for missing fill plug. 12. Install the fluid level indicator. 13. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the fluid indicator bolt. ^ Tighten the fluid indicator bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 1797 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid Checking Procedure TRANSAXLE FLUID REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain fluid. Allow at least 5 minutes for the fluid to drain completely. 3. Remove the gasket from the drain plug and discard. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new gasket on the drain plug. NOTICE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the drain plug. TIGHTEN Drain plug to 40 Nm (30 lb ft) 3. Make sure vehicle is level. IMPORTANT: Dexron III automatic transmission fluid is NOT compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 1798 4. Remove the fluid level indicator located behind the front transaxle mount. NOTICE: Do not remove the 3rd gear anchor band bolt located on top of the transmission for checking fluid or adding fluid. Removing the bolt will dislocate internal components and require the transmission to be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for repair. 5. Add approximately 3.1L (3.3 quart) of GM T-IV fluid to the transaxle, using the fluid level indicator location. IMPORTANT: If the check is necessary at a low oil temperature of 30°-40°C (86°-104°F), perform check using the "COLD" range on the level gage. However, the fluid must be re-checked at the proper fluid temperature. 6. Start engine and operate vehicle until transaxle fluid temperature reaches 60°-70°C (140°-158°F). 7. Apply parking brake. 8. Depress brake pedal and move shift lever slowly through all gear ranges from park (P) to low (liter), pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Return shift lever to park (P) range at idle condition. 9. Pull level gauge out again and check if fluid level is within the "HOT" range. a. If fluid is not within the correct level, adjust accordingly: b. If fluid is below the "HOT" range, add enough to bring it up to the correct level. c. If fluid is above "HOT" range, drain excess fluid. 10. Install the fluid level indicator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 1799 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Fluid Replacement Transaxle Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain fluid. Allow at least 5 minutes for the fluid to drain completely. 3. Remove the gasket from the drain plug and discard. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new gasket on the drain plug. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug. ^ Tighten the drain plug to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Make sure vehicle is level . 4. Remove the fluid level indicator located behind the front transaxle mount. 5. Important: Dexron(R)III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron(R)III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Notice: Do not remove the 3rd gear anchor band bolt located on top of the transmission for checking fluid or adding fluid. Removing the bolt will dislocate internal components and require the transmission to be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for repair. Add approximately 3.1 L(3.3 Qt) of GM T-IV fluid to the transaxle , using the fluid level indicator location. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 1800 6. Important: If the check is necessary at a low oil temperature of 30° - 40°C (86° - 104°F), perform check using the COLD range on the level gage. However, the fluid must be re-checked at the proper fluid temperature. Start engine and operate vehicle until transaxle fluid temperature reaches 60° - 70°C (140° 158°F). 7. Apply parking brake. 8. Depress brake pedal and move shift lever slowly through all gear ranges from park (P) to low (L), pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Return shift lever to park (P) range at idle condition. 9. Pull level gauge out again and check if fluid level is within the HOT range. 10. If fluid is not within the correct level, adjust accordingly: 1. If fluid is below the HOT range, add enough to bring it up to the correct level. 2. If fluid is above HOT range, drain excess fluid. 11. Install the fluid level indicator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Oil Capacity Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 750 ml (25.4 Oz.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1805 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Fluid Type ................................................................................................................................................ VersaTrak Fluid GM P/N 12378514 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Inspection Procedure 1. Important: In order to obtain an accurate indication of the fluid level, the rear drive module priming procedure must be performed prior to fluid level inspection. Prime the rear drive module in the service stall: 1. Raise and support the vehicle so that all wheels are off of the ground. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Start the engine and place transmission in a forward gear. 3. Slowly apply the park brake until the rear wheels stop rotating. 4. Carefully accelerate the engine until the rear wheels begin to rotate. 5. Important: Do not exceed 5 seconds of park brake apply while vehicle is in gear and the engine is running to avoid overheating of the rear drive module. Continue allowing the rear wheels to rotate for 5 seconds. 6. Release the accelerator and apply the brakes. 7. Place transmission in park or neutral and turn the engine OFF. 8. Release the park brake. 9. Raise the vehicle fully. 2. Alternatively, prime the rear drive module by driving the vehicle on a flat, paved surface in a tight, 360 degree circle for 3 consecutive revolutions at 8 km/h (5 mph). 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Clean the area around the fluid fill plug. 5. Remove the fluid fill plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 1808 6. Using a length of heavy mechanics wire or equivalent, position a 90 degree bend approximately 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the wire. 7. Place the angled end of the wire into the fluid fill plug hole. 8. Rest the wire squarely on the threads of the fill plug hole. 9. Remove the wire and measure the distance between the bend and the fluid level as indicated by the witness mark. The distance from the bend to the witness mark should be 8 - 17 mm (0.32 - 0.68 inch). 10. Adjust the fluid level as required by adding or removing fluid GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045). 11. Thoroughly clean the fill plug threads and apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the threads. 12. Install the rear drive module fill plug. ^ Tighten the fill plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 13. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 1809 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Draining Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan below the rear drive module. 3. Remove the drain plug from the front of the rear drive module, below the input flange. 4. Drain the fluid. Filling Procedure 1. Thoroughly clean the threads of the drain plug. 2. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the drain plug threads. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug to the rear drive module. ^ Tighten the drain plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the rear drive module fill plug. 5. Fill the rear drive module with fluid GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045). Fill initially with 750 ml (25.4 oz) of fluid. 6. Inspect the fluid level. 7. Thoroughly clean the threads of the fill plug. 8. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the fill plug threads. 9. Install the fill plug to the rear drive module. ^ Tighten the fill plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 1810 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1815 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1816 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1817 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Engine Oil Capacity INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-007 Date: March 14, 2008 Subject: Updated Engine Oil Capacity for 3.4L Engine (RPO LNJ) Models: 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) The purpose of this bulletin is to update the Engine Oil Capacities for the 3.4L V6 Engine (RPO LNJ) found in the Chevrolet Equinox and Pontiac Torrent. The engine oil capacity with an oil filter replacement has been revised to 4.3 L (4.5 qts). The original capacity was 3.8L (4.0 qts). This revision has been made in the Maintenance and Lubrication, Approximate Fluid Capacities and Engine Mechanical- 3.4L, Engine Mechanical Specifications sections of SI. This change also applies to the Owners Manual. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1818 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Oil Capacity Bulletin No.: 05-06-01-024 Date: August 10, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Information on 3.4L V-6 Engine Oil Capacity Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V-6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) This bulletin is being published to advise technicians of a change to the engine oil capacity. The engine oil capacity with filter is listed in the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Owners Manual as 4.5 quarts (U.S) or 4.3 Liters (Canada). This is being revised to an initial fill of 4.0 quarts (U.S) or 3.8 Liters (Canada), (approximate) with filter and top-off as necessary. The 4.5 quarts (U.S) or 4.3 Liters (Canada) recommendation was an initial volume fill for a completely dry engine at the assembly plant. The change in oil quantity will not be realized in the field by the customer during an engine oil change. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter Change ............................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 4.3L (4.5 Qt) NOTE: ALL capacity specifications are approximate. When replacing or adding fluids, fill to the recommended level and recheck fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1821 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil API Classification ................................................................................................................................. ........................................ Look for Starburst Symbol Grade ............................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................ 5W-30 Below -29° C (-20° F) ................................................................................................................................................. 5W-30 synthetic (preferred) , 0W-30 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1822 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position the oil drain pan under the engine oil drain plug. 3. Remove the engine oil drain plug. 4. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug, replace if necessary. 5. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug sealing surface on the oil pan, repair or replace oil pan if necessary. 6. Remove the oil filter. 7. Clean and inspect the oil filter sealing area on the oil filter adapter, repair or replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lightly oil the replacement oil filter gasket with clean oil. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1823 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the new oil filter. ^ Tighten the filter to 3/4 to 1 full turn, after the oil filter gasket contacts the oil filter mounting surface. 3. Install the engine oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the oil drain pan. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1824 6. Remove the oil fill cap from the rocker arm cover. 7. Fill the engine with new engine oil. 8. Install the oil fill cap to the rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1829 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Bulletin No.: 08-01-38-001 Date: January 25, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information On New GE-48800 CoolTech Refrigerant Recovery/Recharge Equipment Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin is being issued to announce the release of GM approved Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Equipment that meets the new Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2788 Refrigerant Recovery Standards. The ACR2000 (J-43600) cannot be manufactured in its current state after December 2007 and will be superseded by GE-48800. The new J2788 standard does not require that GM Dealers replace their ACR2000 units. ACR2000's currently in use are very capable of servicing today's refrigerant systems when used correctly and can continue to be used. Details regarding the new SAE J2788 standard are outlined in GM Bulletin 07-01-38-004. Effective February 1 2008, new A/C Refrigerant Recovery/Recharging equipment (P/N GE-48800) will be released as a required replacement for the previously essential ACR2000 (J-43600). This equipment is SAE J2788 compliant and meets GM requirements for A/C Refrigerant System Repairs on all General Motors vehicles, including Hybrid systems with Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil. This equipment will not be shipped as an essential tool to GM Dealerships. In addition, this equipment is Hybrid compliant and designed to prevent oil cross contamination when servicing Hybrid vehicles with Electric A/C Compressors that use POE refrigerant oil. The ACR2000 (J-43600) will need to be retrofitted with a J-43600-50 (Hose - ACR2000 Oil Flush Loop) to be able to perform Hybrid A/C service work. All Hybrid dealers will receive the J-43600-50, with installation instructions, as a component of the Hybrid essential tool package. Dealerships that do not sell Hybrids, but may need to service Hybrids, can obtain J-43600-50 from SPX Kent Moore. Refer to GM Bulletin 08-01-39-001 for the ACR2000 Hose Flush procedure. The High Voltage (HV) electric A/C compressor used on Two Mode Hybrid vehicles uses a Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil instead of a Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oil. This is due to the better electrical resistance of the POE oil and its ability to provide HV isolation. Failure to flush the hoses before adding refrigerant to a Hybrid vehicle with an electric A/C compressor may result in an unacceptable amount of PAG oil entering the refrigerant system. It may cause a Battery Energy Control Module Hybrid Battery Voltage System Isolation Lost Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC P1AE7) to be set. Additionally, the A/C system warranty will be voided. Warranty Submission Requirements The Electronically Generated Repair Data (snapshot summary) and printer functions have been eliminated from the GE-48800. The VGA display and temperature probes were eliminated to reduce equipment costs. As a result, effective immediately the 18 digit "Snapshot/Charge Summary" code is no longer required for Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant system repairs that are submitted for warranty reimbursement. The charge summary data from before and after system repairs will continue to required, but documented on the repair order only. Both high and low pressures and the recovery and charge amounts should be noted during the repair and entered on the repair order. If using ACR2000 (J-43600), the "Snapshot/Charge Summary" printouts should continue to be attached to the shops copy of the repair order. The labor codes that are affected by this requirement are D3000 through D4500. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 1834 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Contaminated R134A Refrigerant Bulletin No.: 06-01-39-007 Date: July 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Found on Market for Automotive Air-Conditioning Systems Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin should be directed to the Service Manager as well as the Parts Manager. Commercially Available Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Impurities have been found in new commercially available containers of R134a. High levels of contaminates may cause decreased performance, and be detrimental to some air-conditioning components. Accompanying these contaminates has been high levels of moisture. Tip: Excessive moisture may cause system concerns such as orifice tube freeze-up and reduced performance. Industry Reaction: New Industry Purity Standards Due to the potential availability of these lower quality refrigerants, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), and the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry (ARI) are in the process of instituting reliable standards that will be carried on the labels of future R134a refrigerant containers. This identifying symbol will be your assurance of a product that conforms to the minimum standard for OEM Automotive Air-Conditioning use. How Can You Protect Yourself Today? It is recommended to use GM or ACDelco(R) sourced refrigerants for all A/C repair work. These refrigerants meet General Motors own internal standards for quality and purity, insuring that your completed repairs are as good as the way it left the factory. Parts Information The part numbers shown are available through GMSPO or ACDelco(R). The nearest ACDelco(R) distributor in your area can be found by calling 1-800-223-3526 (U.S. Only). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 1835 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 1.75 lb. (0.79 kg.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1838 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ....................................................................................................................... R134a P/N 12356150 U.S. (10953485 Canada) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1839 Refrigerant: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RECHARGING TOOLS REQUIRED J 43600 ACR 2000 Air Conditioning Service Center CAUTION: Avoid breathing the A/C Refrigerant 134a (R-134a) and the lubricant vapor or the mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose, and throat. Work in a well ventilated area. In order to remove R-134a from the A/C system, use service equipment that is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J 2210 (R-134a recycling equipment). If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. - For personal protection, goggles and gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant system. If R-134a comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical help should be obtained. NOTE: R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure. - To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C system. - Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result. - R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest of amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to the manufacturer instructions included with the service equipment before servicing. The J 43600 is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The ACR 2000 recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically. The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg (12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant. The ACR 2000 has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If foreign gases are present, the ACR 2000 will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system. The ACR 2000 also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain. Refer to the J 43600 ACR 2000 manual for operation and setup instruction. Always recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities for the correct amount. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - New PAG Oil Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New PAG Oil Bulletin No.: 02-01-39-004B Date: November 16, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: New PAG Oil Released Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Built With R-134a Refrigeration System All Air Conditioning Compressor Types (Excluding R4 and A6 Type Compressors) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the PAG oil part number used for R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-01-39-004A (Section 01 - HVAC). All General Motors vehicles built with R-134a refrigerant systems shall now be serviced with GM Universal PAG Oil (excluding vehicles equipped with an R4 or A6 compressor). R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems shall use PAG OIL, GM P/N 12356151 (A/C Delco part number 15-118) (in Canada, use P/N 10953486). Important: The PAG oil referenced in this bulletin is formulated with specific additive packages that meet General Motors specifications and use of another oil may void the A/C systems warranty. Use this new PAG oil when servicing the A/C system on the vehicles listed above. Oil packaged in an 8 oz tube should be installed using A/C Oil Injector, J 45037. Refer to the HVAC Section of Service Information for detailed information on Oil Balancing and Capacities. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITIES ABRUPT REFRIGERANT LOSS ......................................................................................................................................................... 103 ml (3.5 oz) NOTE: Abrupt refrigerant loss due to a large leak, hose rupture, collision, or pressure relief valve opening. Conditions that allow the refrigerant to seep or bleed off over time do not cause this oil loss. Upon replacement of a component that caused a large refrigerant loss, also add the required amount of oil for the particular component. COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT The Visteon model SC100V service compressor is precharged with the specified amount of PAG oil. ................................................... 120 ml (4.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. CONDENSER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................ 30 ml (1.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. EVAPORATOR REPLACEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................... 30 ml (1.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR REPLACEMENT ................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE REPLACEMENT ........................................................................................................................ 20 ml (0.75 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. TOTAL SYSTEM PAG OIL CAPACITY .......................................................................................................................................... 207 ml (7.00 oz) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1846 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL Polyalkylene glycol (PAG) Oil ................................................................................................................ GM P/N 12378526 (Canadian P/N 88900060) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1847 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C REFRIGERANT SYSTEM OIL CHARGE REPLENISHING If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component replacement, the oil must be replenished. Oil can be added to the system by pouring the correct amount into the replaced component or into an open refrigerant line. For the proper quantities of oil to add to the A/C refrigerant system, refer to Refrigerant System Capacities . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: ^ Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel ^ Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred ^ Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure 1. Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: ^ If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle, and diagnose the appropriate DTC. ^ If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1852 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Ensure the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level.Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 19. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 20. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 21. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1853 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) ^ Tools Required J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent - J 44894-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal becomes firm, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 44894-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 44894-A. 7. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 8. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 9. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 10. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 11. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 12. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 13. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 15. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 20. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 44894-A. 21. Remove the J 44894-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 22. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 23. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1854 may have been trapped in the BPMV. 24. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 25. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1855 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the cap from the hose nipple on the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 6. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 inch), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 7. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 8. Remove the transparent hoses from the reservoir. 9. Install the cap to the hose nipple on the reservoir, to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 10. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 11. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1860 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1861 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1862 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1863 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1864 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1865 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1866 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1867 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1868 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1869 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1870 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1871 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1872 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1873 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1874 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1875 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1876 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1877 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1878 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1879 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1880 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1881 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1882 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1883 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1884 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1885 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1886 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1887 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1888 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1889 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Locations Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1897 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1898 Application Table Part 2 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1899 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1900 Fuse: Locations I/P Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1901 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1902 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1905 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1906 Application Table Part 2 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1907 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1908 Fuse: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1909 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 1910 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1916 Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1917 Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1918 Fuse Block - I/P C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1919 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1920 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1921 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1922 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1923 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1924 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1925 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1926 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1927 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1928 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1929 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1930 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1931 Fuse Block - Underhood C4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1932 Fuse Block - Underhood C5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1935 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1936 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1937 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1938 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1939 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1944 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1945 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1946 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1947 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1948 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation SERVICE VEHICLE SOON INDICATOR Also known as "SERVICE", "SERVICE VEHICLE" or "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON" lamps, these lamps are used to inform the technician that a Non-Emissions releated malfunction of the Computerized Engine Control System or Body Control System has occurred, (a DTC has occurred). The "SERVICE TELLTALE" lamps are checked for proper operation while the engine is cranking, and will turn off after the engine is running. Depending on the trouble code set, the "SERVICE TELLTALE" lamp will come on and stay on while the malfunction is taking place. If a malfunction is intermittent, the service lamp that came on will go out when the malfunction is no longer detected by the computer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ALWAYS ON CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the diagnostic. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS If the problem is intermittent, refer to Intermittent Conditions. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Strategies/Intermittent Conditions TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1-7 The number refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 1955 2. This step determines if the condition is with the MIL control circuit or the PCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 1956 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Inoperative MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) INOPERATIVE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the PCM. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 1957 Steps 1-12 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 1958 Steps 13-16 The number refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests for a short to voltage on the MIL control circuit. With the fuse removed there should be no voltage on the MIL control circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1959 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair SERVICE VEHICLE SOON INDICATOR The "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON" light will come on if there are certain non-emission related vehicle problems. These problems may not be obvious and may affect vehicle performance or durability. The light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly. This light does NOT come on at certain mileage intervals. There is probably a PCM or a BCM Code set that will aid you in diagnosis. RESET PROCEDURE The only way to get the light to go off is to clear the PCM or BCM code(s). This light can NOT be reset or shut off any other way. PCM/BCM codes should be read & repaired before clearing them. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM WHEN TO CHANGE ENGINE OIL Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A change engine oil light will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1963 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM HOW TO RESET THE ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil light being turned on, reset the system. 1. Turn the ignition key to "RUN" with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. The "change engine oil" light will flash while the system is resetting. 3. Turn the key to "LOCK". If the change engine oil light comes back on and stays on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. WHAT TO DO WITH USED OIL Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points Vehicle Lifting: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points Bulletin No.: 05-00-89-027 Date: April 28, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Information Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This bulletin is being issued to revise the Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle information in the General Information sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The following information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Note: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: ^ Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. ^ The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. ^ The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. ^ Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points > Page 1969 ^ Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points shown. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1970 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB 05-00-89-027. LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1971 vehicle with a jack. Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting - Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approxately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 1986 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2000 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Spare Tire: Customer Interest Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Bulletin No.: 06-08-66-005A Date: September 13, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Rear of Vehicle (Replace Spare Tire Well) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information under Correction and Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-66-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise in the rear of the vehicle over rough roads. Correction Raise the vehicle. Inspect the sheet metal above the muffler for a sheet metal crack in the spare tire well. This crack will run left to right, just under the spare tire hold down bracket. Do not attempt to repair or reinforce the floor area around the spare tire hold-down bracket. It is recommended that the entire Panel, Spare Tire Well be replaced to maintain the integrity of the spare tire hold-down bracket Procedure Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear fascia, energy absorber, and impact bar. Remove the trailer hitch if equipped. Remove the exhaust. Open the rear hatch and remove the spare tire cover and cargo net. Remove the rear sill plate. Remove the rear seat. Remove the right and left door sill plate. Remove the right and left rear quarter trim. Remove the rear speakers. Pull the rear carpet forward. Move the rear harness. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the spare tire well area. Locate and drill out all the factory welds that attach the spare tire well. Note the number and location of the welds for the installation of the new part. Remove the damaged part. Drill out the welds around the perimeter of the spare tire well. Fit the new tire well in the vehicle. Mark the location of the welds. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 2010 Remove the panel and drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in all the marked locations on the new panel. Apply weld-thru coating to all mating surfaces. Position the new panel in the vehicle. Plug weld accordingly. Clean and prepare all welding surfaces. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials as necessary per the GM 4901M-D-2006 Approved Refinish Materials online at: Go to www.gmgoodwrench.com. Click on GM Parts & Accessories link. Click on GM Technical Repair Information. Click on Paint Shop. Refinish the inside using materials compliant to GM4901M standards. Clean the back side of the repair and apply an epoxy undercoat per GM4901-D-2006. Reinstall the rear harness. Reinstall the rear carpet forward. Reinstall the rear speakers. Reinstall the right and left rear quarter trim. Reinstall the right and left door sill plate. Reinstall the rear seat. Reinstall the rear sill plate. Reinstall the spare tire cover and cargo net. Reinstall the exhaust. Reinstall the trailer hitch if equipped. Reinstall the rear fascia. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 2011 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Spare Tire: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Bulletin No.: 06-08-66-005A Date: September 13, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Rear of Vehicle (Replace Spare Tire Well) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information under Correction and Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-66-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise in the rear of the vehicle over rough roads. Correction Raise the vehicle. Inspect the sheet metal above the muffler for a sheet metal crack in the spare tire well. This crack will run left to right, just under the spare tire hold down bracket. Do not attempt to repair or reinforce the floor area around the spare tire hold-down bracket. It is recommended that the entire Panel, Spare Tire Well be replaced to maintain the integrity of the spare tire hold-down bracket Procedure Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear fascia, energy absorber, and impact bar. Remove the trailer hitch if equipped. Remove the exhaust. Open the rear hatch and remove the spare tire cover and cargo net. Remove the rear sill plate. Remove the rear seat. Remove the right and left door sill plate. Remove the right and left rear quarter trim. Remove the rear speakers. Pull the rear carpet forward. Move the rear harness. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the spare tire well area. Locate and drill out all the factory welds that attach the spare tire well. Note the number and location of the welds for the installation of the new part. Remove the damaged part. Drill out the welds around the perimeter of the spare tire well. Fit the new tire well in the vehicle. Mark the location of the welds. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 2017 Remove the panel and drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in all the marked locations on the new panel. Apply weld-thru coating to all mating surfaces. Position the new panel in the vehicle. Plug weld accordingly. Clean and prepare all welding surfaces. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials as necessary per the GM 4901M-D-2006 Approved Refinish Materials online at: Go to www.gmgoodwrench.com. Click on GM Parts & Accessories link. Click on GM Technical Repair Information. Click on Paint Shop. Refinish the inside using materials compliant to GM4901M standards. Clean the back side of the repair and apply an epoxy undercoat per GM4901-D-2006. Reinstall the rear harness. Reinstall the rear carpet forward. Reinstall the rear speakers. Reinstall the right and left rear quarter trim. Reinstall the right and left door sill plate. Reinstall the rear seat. Reinstall the rear sill plate. Reinstall the spare tire cover and cargo net. Reinstall the exhaust. Reinstall the trailer hitch if equipped. Reinstall the rear fascia. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 2018 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Spare Tire: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Evaporative Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Bulletin No.: 08-06-04-008 Date: February 04, 2008 TECHNICAL Subject: Clicking Type Noise Heard Under Vehicle (Replace EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid Valve) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment on a clicking type noise coming from under the vehicle. Some may comment that there are always three clicks while others may refer to the noise as being three bangs. Cause The clicking or banging type noise may be caused by the cycling of the evaporative canister vent valve, when the valve is cycling there may be three clicks or bangs heard. The cycling of the valve is determined and controlled by the PCM. Correction Explain to the customer that the sound they are hearing is a normal function of the vehicle's evaporative emission system and that no repairs are needed. If the customer still feels the condition is not acceptable the canister vent solenoid valve can be replaced with P/N 15788844. This is a quieter operating valve. Before replacing the valve, please advise the customer that this will only reduce the sound level (volume) of the valve and will not eliminate the sound completely. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Spare Tire: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle > Page 2024 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Spare Tire: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle > Page 2030 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 2039 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 2040 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 2041 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 2046 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 2051 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 2052 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 2053 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 2059 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 2060 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 2061 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 2066 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 2071 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 2072 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 2077 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 2078 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 2079 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 2084 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 2089 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 2090 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 2091 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 2101 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 2102 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 2103 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 2108 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 2113 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 2114 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2119 Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel exhibits excessive runout ^ The wheel is bent ^ The wheel is cracked ^ The wheel is severely rusted ^ The wheel is severely corroded ^ Important: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. The wheel leaks air Caution: If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new Saturn original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-Saturn original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Notice: The use of non-Saturn original equipment wheels may cause: ^ Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel ^ Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components ^ Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius ^ Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance ^ Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel has elongated bolt holes. ^ The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Steel Wheel Repair Description Notice: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Notice: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 2125 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 2126 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 2127 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 2128 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. On vehicles with all-wheel drive, remove the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 2129 4. Important: Do not damage the wheel drive shaft joint seal. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the suspension knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 2130 3. On all-wheel drive vehicles, install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped, route the wheel speed sensor electrical harness through the backing plate and seat the grommet. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the rear brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: Customer Interest Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 2139 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 2140 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 2146 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 2147 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 07-06-01-020 > Sep > 07 > Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Oil Pan: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-020 Date: September 17, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Knock Type Noise Coming from Engine Compartment or Underneath Vehicle (Check for Missing Rear Oil Pan Bolts and Perform Necessary Repair) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment about a loud rattle/knock type noise coming from the engine compartment or from underneath the vehicle. Upon inspection, you may find that the noise is coming from the rear of the engine in the transmission bell housing/flexplate area. Cause The bolt(s) that attach the rear of the oil pan to the engine block may have come out and fallen down into the transmission bell housing. Correction Replace the bolt that came out with a new bolt, P/N 11570082. Prior to installing the new bolts, apply thread locker, P/N 12345382 (in Canada, P/N 10953489), to the threads. Install the bolt and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Then remove the left rear oil pan bolt, clean the threads, apply thread locker, install and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Verify that the other (vertical) oil pan bolts are also tightened to the same specification and that the side (horizontal) oil pan bolts are tightened to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Inspect the flexplate (flywheel) and other components for damage caused by the movement of the bolt. Warranty Information Use appropriate labor operation number based on repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Install the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. Tighten the nut to ......................................................... ........................................................................................................................ 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Wheel Fastener: Customer Interest Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Bulletin No.: 01-03-10-009A Date: July 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Missing and/or Loose (Replace Missing Covers and Add Sealant to All Covers) Models: 2005 and All Prior Passenger Cars (Except All Cadillac Models and Pontiac GTO) with Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-03-10-009. Condition Some customers may comment that the plastic wheel nut covers are missing and/or loose. Correction Important: ^ DO NOT USE a silicone-based adhesive. ^ Do not apply the *permatex(R) around the threads in a circular pattern. ^ Apply a single bead across the threads approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) in length, 5 mm (0.2 in) in height and 5 mm (0.2 in) in width. Replace any missing plastic wheel nut covers with the appropriate covers and apply Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) to the threads of all the plastic wheel nut covers. Tighten finger tight plus a 1/4 turn with a hand wrench. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any other such items which may be available from other sources. Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) part numbers (available at your local parts supplier) ^ P/N 80009 (2A/2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80015 (2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80010 (2B/2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80016 (2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80011 (2C) - 325 ml (11 oz) tube boxed Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing > Page 2170 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 05-03-10-014 > Oct > 05 > Wheels - Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Wheel Fastener: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-014 Date: October 05, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE This bulletin is being issued to revise wheel nut torque in the Fastener Tightening Specifications in the Tires and Wheels sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The following information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. The revised wheel nut torque is 140 N.m (100 lb ft). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Wheel Fastener: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Bulletin No.: 01-03-10-009A Date: July 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Missing and/or Loose (Replace Missing Covers and Add Sealant to All Covers) Models: 2005 and All Prior Passenger Cars (Except All Cadillac Models and Pontiac GTO) with Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-03-10-009. Condition Some customers may comment that the plastic wheel nut covers are missing and/or loose. Correction Important: ^ DO NOT USE a silicone-based adhesive. ^ Do not apply the *permatex(R) around the threads in a circular pattern. ^ Apply a single bead across the threads approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) in length, 5 mm (0.2 in) in height and 5 mm (0.2 in) in width. Replace any missing plastic wheel nut covers with the appropriate covers and apply Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) to the threads of all the plastic wheel nut covers. Tighten finger tight plus a 1/4 turn with a hand wrench. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any other such items which may be available from other sources. Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) part numbers (available at your local parts supplier) ^ P/N 80009 (2A/2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80015 (2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80010 (2B/2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80016 (2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80011 (2C) - 325 ml (11 oz) tube boxed Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing > Page 2180 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 05-03-10-014 > Oct > 05 > Wheels - Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Wheel Fastener: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-014 Date: October 05, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE This bulletin is being issued to revise wheel nut torque in the Fastener Tightening Specifications in the Tires and Wheels sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The following information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. The revised wheel nut torque is 140 N.m (100 lb ft). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2186 Wheel Fastener: Specifications The contents of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB 05-03-10-014 Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-014 Date: October 05, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE The revised wheel nut torque is 140 Nm (100 lb ft). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2187 Wheel Nut Torque Sequence Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2188 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: ^ The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. ^ The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. ^ M = Metric ^ 12 = Diameter in millimeters ^ 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 4. Using the J 43631 , press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2191 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2192 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Using the J 43631 , press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2193 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installed. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions Jump Starting: Service Precautions CAUTION: - Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. - Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. - Do not connect a jumper cable directly to the negative terminal of a discharged battery to prevent sparking and possible explosion of battery gases. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2197 Jump Starting: Service and Repair JUMP STARTING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. NOTE: This vehicle has a 12 volt, negative ground electrical system. Make sure the vehicle or equipment being used to jump start the engine is also 12 volt, negative ground. Use of any other type of system will damage the vehicle's electrical components. 1. Position the vehicle with the booster battery so that the jumper cables will reach. - Do not let the 2 vehicles touch. - Make sure that the jumper cables do not have loose ends, or missing insulation. 2. Place an automatic transmission in PARK. If equipped with a manual transmission, place in NEUTRAL and block the wheels. 3. Turn OFF all electrical loads on both vehicles that are not needed. 4. Turn OFF the ignition on both vehicles. 5. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the battery positive (+) terminal (2) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal (1) of the booster battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Connect the black negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal (3) of the booster battery. 8. The final connection is made to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part (4) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.This final attachment must be at least 46 cm (18 in) away from the dead battery. CAUTION: Do not connect a jumper cable directly to the negative terminal of a discharged battery to prevent sparking and possible explosion of battery gases. 9. Start the engine of the vehicle that is providing the boost. 10. Crank the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. NOTE: Never operate the starter motor more than 15 seconds at a time without pausing in order to allow it to cool for at least 2 minutes. Overheating will damage the starter motor. 11. The black negative (-) cable must be first disconnected from the vehicle that was boosted (4). 12. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the negative (-) terminal (3) of the booster battery. 13. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the positive (+) terminal (1) of the booster battery. NOTE: Do not let the cable end touch any metal. Damage to the battery and other components may result. 14. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the remote positive (+) terminal (2) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points Vehicle Lifting: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points Bulletin No.: 05-00-89-027 Date: April 28, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Information Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This bulletin is being issued to revise the Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle information in the General Information sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The following information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Note: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: ^ Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. ^ The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. ^ The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. ^ Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points > Page 2202 ^ Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points shown. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2203 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB 05-00-89-027. LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2204 vehicle with a jack. Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting - Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approxately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2210 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves, and the head gasket. 1. Important: Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the ignition fuses from the I/P fuse block. Disable the ignition. 2. Disable the fuel systems. 3. Remove the spark plugs from all the cylinders. 4. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 5. Block the throttle plate in the open position. 6. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Firmly install the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 2. Have an assistant crank the engine through at least 4 compression strokes in the testing =cylinder. 3. Record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 4. Disconnect the gauge. 5. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 7. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. ^ The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. ^ No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). 8. The following list contains examples of the possible measurements: ^ When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression on each cylinder. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach the normal compression, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ If the compression improves considerably with the addition of three squirts of oil, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and does not build up in the following strokes, the valves may be the cause. ^ The addition of oil does not affect the compression, the valves may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on two adjacent cylinders, or coolant is present in the crankcase, the head gasket may be the cause. 9. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 10. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 11. Install the spark plugs. 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) fuse. 13. Install the ignition fuse to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Bearing: Service and Repair Camshaft Rear Bearing Hole Plug Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine flywheel. 2. Remove the camshaft rear bearing hole plug. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Inspect plug bore for old sealant. Ensure bore is clean and free of nicks and burs. Apply sealer GM P/N 12377901 (Canadian P/N 10953504) or equivalent to the camshaft rear bearing hole plug. 2. Install the camshaft rear bearing hole plug. 3. Ensure that the camshaft rear bearing plug is installed to specifications. 4. Install the engine flywheel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the valve rocker arms and pushrods. 4. Remove the lifter guide bolts. 5. Remove the lifter guide. 6. Important: Place the valve lifters in an organized order to ensure that they are installed in the same location from which they were removed. Remove the lifters. Installation Procedure 1. Coat the valve lifters using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. 2. Install the valve lifters in their original locations. 3. Install the lifter guide. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or the equivalent to the lifter guide bolt threads and install the bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 5. Install the valve rocker arms and pushrods. 6. Install the lower intake manifold. 7. Install the valve rocker arm cover. 8. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair Push Rod: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover(s). 2. Remove the rocker arm bolt(s). 3. Remove the valve rocker arm(s) and the pushrod(s). Installation Procedure 1. Coat the ends of the push rods using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. 2. Important: The intake valve push rods measure 146.0 mm (5.75 inch) in length. The exhaust valve push rods measure 152.5 mm (6.0 inch) in length. Install the push rods in their original location. 3. Coat the rocker arm friction surfaces using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2221 4. Important: Shims may be required under the valve rocker arm pedestals if reconditioning has been performed on the cylinder head or its components. Install the valve rocker arms in their original positions. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 42 Nm (31 ft. lbs.) . 6. Install the valve rocker arm cover(s). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover(s). 2. Remove the rocker arm bolt(s). 3. Remove the valve rocker arm(s) and the pushrod(s). Installation Procedure 1. Coat the ends of the push rods using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. 2. Important: The intake valve push rods measure 146.0 mm (5.75 inch) in length. The exhaust valve push rods measure 152.5 mm (6.0 inch) in length. Install the push rods in their original location. 3. Coat the rocker arm friction surfaces using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2225 4. Important: Shims may be required under the valve rocker arm pedestals if reconditioning has been performed on the cylinder head or its components. Install the valve rocker arms in their original positions. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 42 Nm (31 ft. lbs.) . 6. Install the valve rocker arm cover(s). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance .............................................................................................................................. 0.18-0.062 mm (0.0007-0.017 inch) Connecting Rod Bore Diameter ................................................................................................................................ 53.962-53.978 mm (2.124-2.125 inch) Connecting Rod Bore Out-of-Round ................ 0.008 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Length - Center to Center 144.75-144.81 mm (5.69-5.70 inch) Connecting Rod Side Clearance ....................................................................................................................... 0.25-0.37 mm (0.010-0.015 inch)Crankshaft Connecting Rod Journal Diameter ........................................................................................................................ 50.768-50.784 mm (1.9987-1.9994 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round ................................................. 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Width ..................................................................................................................................... 21.92-22.08 mm (0.863-0.869 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance .............................................................................................................................. 0.18-0.062 mm (0.0007-0.017 inch) Connecting Rod Bore Diameter ................................................................................................................................ 53.962-53.978 mm (2.124-2.125 inch) Connecting Rod Bore Out-of-Round ................ 0.008 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Length - Center to Center 144.75-144.81 mm (5.69-5.70 inch) Connecting Rod Side Clearance ....................................................................................................................... 0.25-0.37 mm (0.010-0.015 inch)Crankshaft Connecting Rod Journal Diameter ........................................................................................................................ 50.768-50.784 mm (1.9987-1.9994 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round ................................................. 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Width ..................................................................................................................................... 21.92-22.08 mm (0.863-0.869 inch) Rod Bearing Cap Bolt First Pass ......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................... 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) Final Pass .................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................... 75 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft End Play .......................... 0.060-0.210 mm (0.0024-0.0083 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Width 23.9-24.1 mm (0.941-0.949 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance Except #3 ...................................................................................................... 0.019-0.064 mm (0.0008-0.0025 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance - #3 Thrust Bearing ......................................................................................... 0.032-0.077 mm (0.0012-0.0030 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter ....................................................................................................................... 67.239-67.257 mm (2.6473-2.6483 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round ............................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Rear Flange Runout .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.04 mm (0.0016 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Bolt/Stud First Pass ............................................................................. ....................................................................................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Final Pass ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 77 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft End Play .......................... 0.060-0.210 mm (0.0024-0.0083 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Width 23.9-24.1 mm (0.941-0.949 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance Except #3 ...................................................................................................... 0.019-0.064 mm (0.0008-0.0025 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance - #3 Thrust Bearing ......................................................................................... 0.032-0.077 mm (0.0012-0.0030 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter ....................................................................................................................... 67.239-67.257 mm (2.6473-2.6483 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round ............................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Rear Flange Runout .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.04 mm (0.0016 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap Bolt/Stud First Pass ............................................................................. ....................................................................................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Final Pass ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 77 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the coolant heater cord (2) from the coolant heater (1). 2. Disconnect the coolant heater cord (1) from the cord retainers (2). 3. Remove the coolant heater cord (1) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Cord Replacement > Page 2243 1. Route the coolant heater cord (1) as illustrated, in the engine compartment. 2. Connect the coolant heater cord (1) to the cord retainers (2). 3. Connect the coolant heater cord (2) to the coolant heater (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Cord Replacement > Page 2244 Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Replacement Coolant Heater Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the coolant heater cord from the heater (2). 3. Important: Do not score the surface of the engine block hole when removing the coolant heater. Remove the coolant heater from the block. Installation Procedure 1. Remove any burrs, sealer, paint or other foreign material from the threads/sealing surface of the engine block and from the old coolant heater if the heater is to be reused. 2. If reusing the old coolant heater, apply thread sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent to the threads. 3. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the coolant heater to the engine block. ^ Tighten the coolant heater to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the coolant heater cord to the heater (2). 5. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Balancer Bolt First Pass .................................................................................................... ................................................................................................ 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.) Final Pass ............. .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................... 72 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2248 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Balancer Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader - J 41816-A Crankshaft Balancer Remover - J 29113 Balancer and Crank Sprocket Puller - J 45059 Angle Meter - EN 46359 Puller End Protector Removal Procedure 1. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 2. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 3. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 4. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. Remove the right front wheel. 7. Remove the wheelhouse liner. 8. Remove the crankshaft balancer bolt and washer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2249 9. Notice: The inertial weight section of the crankshaft balancer is assembled to the hub with a rubber type material. The correct installation procedures (with the proper tool) must be followed or movement of the inertial weight section of the hub will destroy the tuning of the crankshaft balancer. Notice: Do NOT use a power-assisted tool with the special tool in order to remove or install this component. You cannot properly control the alignment of this component using a power-assisted tool, and this can damage the component. Remove the crankshaft balancer using the J 41816-A along with EN 46359. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12378521 (Canadian P/N 88901148) or the equivalent, to the keyway of the crankshaft balancer. 2. Place the crankshaft balancer into position over the key in the crankshaft. 3. Notice: Do NOT use a power-assisted tool with the special tool in order to remove or install this component. You cannot properly control the alignment of this component using a power-assisted tool, and this can damage the component. Install the J 29113 onto the crankshaft. 4. Rotate the hex nut on the J 29113 to install the crankshaft balancer onto the crankshaft. 5. Remove the J 29113 from the crankshaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2250 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the crankshaft balancer bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). Turn the bolt an additional 70 degrees using the J 45059. 7. Install the wheelhouse liner. 8. Install the right front wheel. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 11. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 12. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 13. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 14. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 15. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Piston Diameter - production - cylinder 1-4 .............................................................................................................. 91.985-92.003 mm (3.621-3.622 inch) Piston Diameter - service limit - cylinder 1-4 .................................................................................................................................. 91.945 mm (3.619 inch) Piston Diameter - production - cylinder 5-6 ................................................................................................................ 91.99-92.028 mm (3.621-3.623 inch) Piston Diameter - service limit - cylinder 5-6 ................................................................................................................................... 91.945 mm (3.619 inch) Piston Pin Bore Diameter ......................... 23.005-23.010 mm (0.9057-0.9059 inch) Piston Ring Groove Width - First 1.23-1.25 mm (0.048-0.049 inch) Piston Ring Groove Width Second ................................................................................................................................. 1.53-1.55 mm (0.060-0.061 inch) Piston Ring Groove Width - Oil Control ......................................................................................................................... 3.03-3.055 mm (0.119-0.120 inch) Piston to Bore Clearance - production - 1-4 ................................................................................................................ 0.17-0.053 mm (0.0006-0.0020 inch) Piston to Bore Clearance - service limit- 1-4 ................................................................................................................................... 0.093 mm (0.0036 inch) Piston to Bore Clearance - production - 5-6 ........................................................................................................... -0.008-0.048 mm (-0.0003-0.0018 inch) Piston to Bore Clearance - service limit- 5-6 .............................................................................................................................. 0.093 mm (0.0036 inch)Pin Piston Pin Clearance to Connecting Rod Bore - Press Fit ............................................................................ -0.047 to -0.019 mm (-0.0019 to -0.0007 inch) Piston Pin Clearance to Piston Pin Bore ............................................................................................................... 0.008-0.016 mm (0.00031-0.00063 inch) Piston Pin Diameter ................................................................................................................................................ 22.994-22.997 mm (0.9053-0.9054 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Ring End Gap First Compression Ring ..................................................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.36 mm (0.006-0.014 inch) Second Compression Ring ............................................................................................................................................ 0.48-0.74 mm (0.0188-0.0291 inch) Oil Control Ring ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.25-0.77 mm (0.0098-0.0303 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance First Compression Ring ................................................................................................................................................. 0.04-0.086 mm (0.002-0.0033 inch) Second Compression Ring .............................................................................................................................................. 0.04-0.08 mm (0.002-0.0031 inch) Oil Control Ring ........................................................................................................................................................... 0.07-0.095 mm (0.0028-0.0037 inch) Piston Ring Thickness First Compression Ring ................................................................................................................................................. 1.164-1.190 mm (0.046-0.047 inch) Second Compression Ring ........................................................................................................................................ 1.460-1.490 mm (0.0574-0.0586 inch) Oil Control Ring - Maximum .............................................................................................................................................................. 2.960 mm (0.116 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2262 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover(s). 2. Remove the rocker arm bolt(s). 3. Remove the valve rocker arm(s) and the pushrod(s). Installation Procedure 1. Coat the ends of the push rods using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. 2. Important: The intake valve push rods measure 146.0 mm (5.75 inch) in length. The exhaust valve push rods measure 152.5 mm (6.0 inch) in length. Install the push rods in their original location. 3. Coat the rocker arm friction surfaces using prelube GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2266 4. Important: Shims may be required under the valve rocker arm pedestals if reconditioning has been performed on the cylinder head or its components. Install the valve rocker arms in their original positions. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 42 Nm (31 ft. lbs.) . 6. Install the valve rocker arm cover(s). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) Repair Instructions Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the left side spark plug wires (1) from the retainers (2). 3. Remove the bolt (2) and the spark plug wire support (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 2271 4. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) foul air pipe (4) from the PCV valve. 5. Remove the oil filler cap from the valve rocker arm cover. 6. Notice: Valve rocker arm cover gasket and sealant must be carefully trimmed away from lower intake manifold gasket. Failure to do so will damage the lower intake manifold gasket, causing a severe oil leak. Loosen the valve rocker arm cover bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 2272 7. Important: When removing the valve rocker arm cover, ensure the gasket stays in place attached to the cylinder head. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. Bump the end of the valve rocker arm cover with the palm of your hand or a soft rubber mallet if the cover adheres to the cylinder head. 8. Trim the valve cover gasket and sealant away from the lower intake manifold gasket at the cylinder head to the lower intake manifold joints (1). 9. Remove the rocker arm cover gasket. 10. Clean the sealing surface on the cylinder head with degreaser. 11. Clean the valve rocker arm cover. Installation Procedure 1. Important: All gasket mating surfaces need to be free of oil and foreign material. Use GM P/N 12346139 (Canadian P/N 10953463) or equivalent to clean surfaces. Important: Apply sealant GM P/N 12378521 (Canadian P/N 88901148) or equivalent, at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joint. Apply sealant at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joints (1). 2. Install a new gasket to the valve rocker arm cover. Ensure the gasket is properly seated in the groove of the valve rocker arm cover. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm cover. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 2273 4. Install the oil filler cap to the valve rocker arm cover. 5. Connect the PCV foul air pipe (4) to the PCV valve. 6. Install the spark plug wire support (1) and bolt (2). ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 2274 7. Connect the left side spark plug wires (1) to the spark plug wire retainers (2). 8. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 2275 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Right) Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Remove the generator bracket. 3. Remove the ignition control module bracket from the engine with the ignition control module and spark plug wires still attached. Position out of the way. 4. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe (1) from the right valve rocker arm cover. 5. Notice: Valve rocker arm cover gasket and sealant must be carefully trimmed away from lower intake manifold gasket. Failure to do so will damage the lower intake manifold gasket, causing a severe oil leak. Loosen the valve rocker arm cover bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 2276 6. Important: When removing the valve rocker arm cover, ensure the gasket stays in place attached to the cylinder head. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. Bump the end of the valve rocker arm cover with the palm of your hand or a soft rubber mallet if the cover adheres to the cylinder head. 7. Trim the valve cover gasket and sealant away from the lower intake manifold gasket at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joints (1). 8. Remove the valve rocker arm cover gasket. 9. Clean the sealing surface on the cylinder head with degreaser. 10. Clean the valve rocker arm cover. Installation Procedure 1. Important: All gasket mating surfaces need to be free of oil and foreign material. Use GM P/N 12346139 (Canadian P/N 10953463) or equivalent to clean surfaces. Important: Apply sealer GM P/N 12378521 (Canadian P/N 88901148) or equivalent, at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joint. Apply sealant at the cylinder head to lower intake manifold joints (1). 2. Install a new gasket to the valve rocker arm cover. Ensure the gasket is properly seated in the groove of the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 2277 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm cover. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the PCV fresh air pipe (1) to the right valve rocker arm cover. 5. Install the ignition control module bracket with the ignition control module and spark plug wired still attached. 6. Install the generator bracket. 7. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 22794 Spark Plug Port Adapter - J 38606 Valve Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rocker arm. 2. Remove the spark plug. 3. Important: Before you remove the valve keys, rotate the engine so that the piston in the cylinder you are working on is at (TDC) top dead center. This will eliminate the possibility of the valve accidentally falling inside the cylinder. Install the J 22794 into the spark plug port. Apply compressed air in order to hold the valves in place. 4. Compress the valve spring with the J 38606. 5. Remove the valve keys (2). 6. Remove the valve spring cap (3). 7. Remove the valve spring (4). 8. Inspect the valve spring for damage. Replace the spring if it is damaged. 9. Remove the spring seat/valve stem oil seal (5). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2281 1. Install the valve stem oil seal/spring seat (5). ^ Use a suitable driver. ^ Press over the valve guide boss. 2. Install the valve spring (4). 3. Install the valve spring cap (3). 4. Compress the valve spring using the J 38606. 5. Install the valve keys. If necessary, hold the valve keys in place with grease. 6. Remove the J 38606 in order to release the valve spring. 7. Ensure that the valve keys are seated. 8. Release the air pressure and remove the J 22794. 9. Install the valve rocker arm. 10. Install the spark plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2287 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2288 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2289 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2290 Drive Belt: Description and Operation Drive Belt System Description The drive belt system consists of the following components: ^ The drive belt ^ The drive belt tensioner ^ The drive belt idler pulley ^ The crankshaft balancer pulley ^ The accessory drive component mounting brackets ^ The accessory drive components ^ The power steering pump, if belt driven ^ The generator ^ The A/C compressor, if equipped ^ The engine cooling fan, if belt driven ^ The water pump, if belt driven ^ The vacuum pump, if equipped ^ The air compressor, if equipped The drive belt system may use one belt or two belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. There also may be a V-belt style belt used to drive certain accessory drive components. The drive belts are made of different types of rubbers (chloroprene or EPDM) and have different layers or plys containing either fiber cloth or cords for reinforcement. Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth. The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft. The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys. Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is not equipped with the accessory. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2293 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2294 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2295 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Excessive Wear Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2296 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2297 grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2298 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2299 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2300 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2301 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2302 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Drive Belt Excessive Wear Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2303 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Drive Belt Falls Off Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2304 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Drive Belt Rumbling Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2305 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Drive Belt Squeal Drive Belt Squeal Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the squeal noise. If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2306 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the squeal noise is the drive belt(s) or an accessory drive component. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. This test is to verify that an accessory drive component does not have a seized bearing. With the belt remove test the bearings in the accessory drive components for turning smoothly. Also test the accessory drive components with the engine operating by varying the load on the components to verify that the components operate properly. 5. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. 6. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 7. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 8. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. Drive Belt Vibration Drive Belt Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2307 The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Such as but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom such as the exhaust system, or the drivetrain. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) or accessory drive components may be causing the vibration. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. The drive belt(s) may cause a vibration. While the drive belt(s) is removed this is the best time to inspect the condition of the belt. 6. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 8. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smoothness and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 9. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 2308 Drive Belt Whine Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2309 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Provided the vehicle will not be raised or lifted to perform additional work. Utilizing a floor jack and a wood block, support the front of the engine using the following procedure. 1. Place the wood block between the lift point of the floor jack and the bottom of the engine oil pan. 2. Raise the jack until the wood block comes into contact with the engine oil pan and is capable of supporting the weight of the engine. 7. If the vehicle is to be raised or lifted in order to perform additional work. Support the engine using the engine support fixture. 8. Remove the right engine mount. 9. Remove the drive belt from the remaining pulleys. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2310 1. Install the drive belt to all the pulleys except the right idler pulley. 2. Install the right engine mount. 3. Depending on which method was used to support the engine. Remove the floor jack from under the engine oil pan or remove the engine support fixture. 4. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 5. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 6. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 7. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 8. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all pulleys (1-8). 9. Install the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Tensioner Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2314 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Loosen the drive belt tensioner bolt. 7. Remove the drive belt tensioner and bolt together from the generator bracket. 8. Separate the bolt from the drive belt tensioner once removed from vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2315 1. Install the bolt to the drive belt tensioner. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drive belt tensioner and bolt as an assembly to the generator bracket. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 4. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 5. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 6. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 7. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 8. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). 9. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Engine Mount: Testing and Inspection Engine Mount Inspection 1. Important: Before replacing any engine mount due to suspected fluid loss, verify that the source of the fluid is the engine mount, not the engine or accessories. Install the engine support fixture. 2. Observe the engine mount while raising the engine. Raising the engine removes the weight from the engine mount and creates slight tension on the rubber. 3. Replace the engine mount if the engine mount exhibits any of the following conditions: ^ The hard rubber is covered with heat check cracks. ^ The rubber is separated from the metal plate of the engine mount. ^ The rubber is split through the center of the engine mount. ^ The engine mount itself is leaking fluid. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Lift Bracket Replacement Engine Lift Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the engine lift bracket bolts. 3. Remove the engine lift bracket from the left cylinder head. Installation Procedure 1. Install the engine lift bracket to the left cylinder head. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine lift bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the thermostat housing. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2321 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right engine mount. 2. Remove the engine mount bracket to engine bolts (1-4). 3. Remove the engine mount bracket from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Position the engine mount bracket to the engine. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2322 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine mount bracket to engine bolts (1-4). 1. Tighten the bolts in locations (1) and (2) to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 2. Tighten the bolts in locations (3) and (4) to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the right engine mount. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2323 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Replacement Engine Mount Replacement - Front Engine Mount Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission mount bolt. 3. Remove the transmission mount-to-transmission bolts. 4. Remove the transmission mount from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2324 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount-to-transmission bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transmission mount bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Engine Mount Replacement - Right Engine Mount Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Support the engine. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2325 4. Remove the engine mount to bracket bolts. 5. Remove the engine mount to frame rail nuts. 6. Remove the engine mount from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the engine mount onto the frame rail studs. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2326 Install the engine mount to frame rail stud nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine mount to engine mount bracket bolts. Take care when aligning the engine mount to engine mount bracket bolt holes, while hand tightening all the bolts. 4. Tighten the engine mount to engine mount bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the engine support. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2327 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Support Fixture Engine Support Fixture Installation Procedure ^ Tools Required J 28467-B Universal Engine Support Fixture - J 36462-A Engine Support Adapter Leg Set - J 28467-13 Engine Support Fixture Adapters - GM P/N 11519137 4 Studs or equivalent 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Pull each end of the hood rear seal away from the cowl panel flange near both strut towers. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Replace 2 strut bolts with studs GM P/N 11519137 on right and left sides of the vehicle for installation of support fixture. ^ Tighten the studs to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2328 4. Install the J-28467-13 (1) and J 28467-5 strut tower adapter (2) to the top of the right strut tower. 5. Install the J-28467-13 (2) and J 28467-5 strut tower adapter (1) to the top of the left strut tower. 6. Install a 127 cm (50 inch) engine support fixture cross bar (2) transversely across the vehicle between both J 28467-5 strut tower adapters. 7. Insert safety pins (1, 3) through the J 28467-5 strut tower adapters and the cross bar (2) to prevent movement. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2329 8. Important: If 58 cm (23 inch) length engine support cross bar is not available it may be necessary to remove the vehicle hood for additional clearance if a longer cross bar is to be substituted. Position a 58 cm (23 inch) engine support fixture cross bar (1) longitudinally with J 36462-A leg assembly (3) next to the rear engine lift bracket. 9. Install a J 28467-1A clamp (2) to secure the longitudinal mounted cross bar to the transverse mounted cross bar. 10. Insert a J 28467-7A lift hook through a J 28467-6 bracket and install a J 28467-34 wing nut. 11. Install the lift hook and bracket assembly (1) to the longitudinal mounted cross bar (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2330 12. Position the J 28467-7A lift hook to the rear engine lift bracket (2). 13. Tighten the J 28467-34 wing nut (1) until all free slack is removed from the J 28467-7A bolt hook. 14. Important: If 58 cm (23 inch) length engine support cross bar is not available it may be necessary to remove the vehicle hood for additional clearance if a longer cross bar is to be substituted. Position a 58 cm (23 inch) engine support fixture cross bar (3) longitudinally with J 36462-A leg assembly (4) next to the front engine lift bracket. 15. Install a J 28467-1A clamp to secure the longitudinal mounted cross bar to the transverse mounted cross bar. 16. Insert a J 28467-7A lift hook through a J 28467-6 bracket and install a J 28467-34 wing nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 2331 17. Install the lift hook and bracket assembly (1) to the longitudinal mounted cross bar (2). 18. Position the J 28467-7A bolt hook (1) to the front engine lift bracket. 19. Tighten the J 28467-34 wing nut (2) until all free slack is removed from the J 28467-7A lift hook (1). 20. Evenly tighten both wing nuts until the engine weight is supported by the engine support fixture and no longer carried by the engine mounts. 21. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. After removing the engine support fixture, replace the temporary strut studs with the original strut bolts. ^ Tighten the studs to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 2. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 3. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 4. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. Remove the right front wheel. 7. Remove the engine splash shield. 8. Loosen the lower belt idler pulley bolt. 9. Remove the lower belt idler pulley and bolt from the engine front cover. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 2336 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the lower belt idler pulley and bolt to the engine cover. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the engine splash shield. 3. Install the right front wheel. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 6. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 7. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 8. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 9. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 10. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 2337 Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Left Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Left ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Loosen the left belt idler pulley bolt. 7. Remove the left belt idler pulley and bolt from the generator bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 2338 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the left belt idler pulley and bolt to the generator bracket. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 3. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 4. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 5. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 6. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 7. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). 8. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 2339 Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Right Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Right ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 4. Carefully release J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 5. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 6. Loosen the right belt idler pulley bolt. 7. Remove the right belt idler pulley and bolt from the engine front cover. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Lower > Page 2340 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the right belt idler pulley and bolt to the engine front cover. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler pulley (3). 3. Using J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 4. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 5. Carefully release J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 6. Remove J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 7. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1-8). 8. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications 414 kPa (60 psi) ......................................................................................................................................................... at 1,850 RPM using 5W-30 engine oil Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2345 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Low or No Oil Pressure The following conditions may cause low or no oil pressure: ^ Low oil level Fill to the full mark on the oil level indicator. ^ Incorrect or malfunctioning oil pressure switch Replace the oil pressure switch. ^ Incorrect or malfunctioning oil pressure gage Replace the oil pressure gage. ^ Improper oil viscosity or diluted oil ^ Install oil of proper viscosity for expected temperature. ^ Install new oil if the oil is diluted. ^ A worn or dirty oil pump Clean or replace the oil pump. ^ A plugged oil filter Replace the oil filter. ^ A loose or plugged oil pickup screen Replace the oil pickup screen. ^ A hole in the oil pickup tube Replace the oil pickup tube. ^ Excessive bearing clearance Replace the bearings. ^ Cracked, porous, or plugged oil gallery Repair or replace the engine block. ^ Missing or improperly installed gallery plugs Install or repair the plugs as needed. ^ A stuck pressure regulator valve ^ Inspect the pressure regulator valve for sticking in the bore. ^ Inspect the bore for scoring and burrs. ^ A worn or poorly machined camshaft Replace the camshaft. Oil Pressure Testing ^ Tools Required J 25087-C Oil Pressure Tester If the vehicle has low oil pressure complete the following steps: 1. Inspect the oil level. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the oil filter. 4. Assemble the plunger valve in the large hole of the J 25087-C base. Insert the hose in the small hole of the J 25087-C base. Connect the gage to the end of the hose. 5. Insert the flat side of the rubber plug in the bypass valve without depressing the bypass valve. 6. Install the J 25087-C on the filter mounting pad. 7. Start the engine. 8. Inspect the overall oil pressure, the oil pressure switch, and for noisy lifters. Ensure that the engine is at operating temperature before inspecting the oil pressure. The oil pressure should be approximately 414 kPa (60 psi) at 1,850 RPM using 5W-30 engine oil. 9. If adequate oil pressure is indicated, test the oil pressure switch. 10. If a low reading is indicated, press the valve on the tester base in order to isolate the oil pump and/or its components from the lubricating system. An adequate reading at this time indicates a good pump and the previous low pressure was due to worn bearings, etc. A low reading while pressing the valve indicates a faulty pump. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator and Tube Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil level indicator (1). 2. Remove the oil level indicator tube bolt (3). 3. Remove the oil level indicator tube (2).If you are unable to remove the oil level indicator tube, perform the following steps: 1. Remove the stud in order to allow for lateral movement of the oil level indicator tube. 2. Apply penetrating oil to the bottom of the oil level indicator tube. 3. Move the oil level indicator tube back and forth in order to loosen the oil level indicator tube. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the oil level indicator tube. 2. Apply GM sealant P/N 12345739 or equivalent around the oil level indicator tube 12.7 mm (0.50 inch) below the bead. 3. Install the oil level indicator tube (2) into the engine block. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil level indicator tube bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil level indicator (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2353 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2354 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2355 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Engine Oil Capacity INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-007 Date: March 14, 2008 Subject: Updated Engine Oil Capacity for 3.4L Engine (RPO LNJ) Models: 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) The purpose of this bulletin is to update the Engine Oil Capacities for the 3.4L V6 Engine (RPO LNJ) found in the Chevrolet Equinox and Pontiac Torrent. The engine oil capacity with an oil filter replacement has been revised to 4.3 L (4.5 qts). The original capacity was 3.8L (4.0 qts). This revision has been made in the Maintenance and Lubrication, Approximate Fluid Capacities and Engine Mechanical- 3.4L, Engine Mechanical Specifications sections of SI. This change also applies to the Owners Manual. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2356 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Oil Capacity Bulletin No.: 05-06-01-024 Date: August 10, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Information on 3.4L V-6 Engine Oil Capacity Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V-6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) This bulletin is being published to advise technicians of a change to the engine oil capacity. The engine oil capacity with filter is listed in the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Owners Manual as 4.5 quarts (U.S) or 4.3 Liters (Canada). This is being revised to an initial fill of 4.0 quarts (U.S) or 3.8 Liters (Canada), (approximate) with filter and top-off as necessary. The 4.5 quarts (U.S) or 4.3 Liters (Canada) recommendation was an initial volume fill for a completely dry engine at the assembly plant. The change in oil quantity will not be realized in the field by the customer during an engine oil change. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter Change ............................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 4.3L (4.5 Qt) NOTE: ALL capacity specifications are approximate. When replacing or adding fluids, fill to the recommended level and recheck fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2359 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil API Classification ................................................................................................................................. ........................................ Look for Starburst Symbol Grade ............................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................ 5W-30 Below -29° C (-20° F) ................................................................................................................................................. 5W-30 synthetic (preferred) , 0W-30 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2360 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position the oil drain pan under the engine oil drain plug. 3. Remove the engine oil drain plug. 4. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug, replace if necessary. 5. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug sealing surface on the oil pan, repair or replace oil pan if necessary. 6. Remove the oil filter. 7. Clean and inspect the oil filter sealing area on the oil filter adapter, repair or replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lightly oil the replacement oil filter gasket with clean oil. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2361 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the new oil filter. ^ Tighten the filter to 3/4 to 1 full turn, after the oil filter gasket contacts the oil filter mounting surface. 3. Install the engine oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the oil drain pan. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2362 6. Remove the oil fill cap from the rocker arm cover. 7. Fill the engine with new engine oil. 8. Install the oil fill cap to the rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Oil Cooler Line Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Ensure that the vehicle is properly supported and squarely positioned. To help avoid personal injury when a vehicle is on a hoist, provide additional support for the vehicle on the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Position the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Place a drain pan or suitable container under the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the transaxle oil cooler lines from the radiator. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the transaxle cooler line assembly nut (2) from the transaxle. 6. Remove the transaxle cooler lines (1) from the vehicle. 7. Replace the transaxle oil cooler pipe seals. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2366 1. Install the transaxle oil cooler line assembly (1) to the transaxle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the transaxle oil cooler line assembly nut (2). ^ Tighten the transaxle oil cooler lines to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Connect the transaxle oil cooler lines to the radiator. ^ Tighten the transaxle cooler line fittings to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 5. Important: Dexron III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Add fluid to the transaxle. 6. Start the engine a check for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2371 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position the oil drain pan under the engine oil drain plug. 3. Remove the engine oil drain plug. 4. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug, replace if necessary. 5. Clean and inspect the engine oil drain plug sealing surface on the oil pan, repair or replace oil pan if necessary. 6. Remove the oil filter. 7. Clean and inspect the oil filter sealing area on the oil filter adapter, repair or replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lightly oil the replacement oil filter gasket with clean oil. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2372 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the new oil filter. ^ Tighten the filter to 3/4 to 1 full turn, after the oil filter gasket contacts the oil filter mounting surface. 3. Install the engine oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the oil drain pan. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2373 6. Remove the oil fill cap from the rocker arm cover. 7. Fill the engine with new engine oil. 8. Install the oil fill cap to the rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter and Bypass Valve Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the oil filter. 3. Remove the oil filter adapter bolts (2). 4. Remove the oil filter adapter (1) and gasket from the engine block. 5. Remove the oil filter bypass hole plug. 6. Important: Do not pry against the threads in the oil filter bypass hole when removing the bypass valve. Insert a flat-bladed tool into the oil filter bypass hole and force the bypass valve out in order to remove the bypass valve. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2377 1. Install the oil filter bypass valve (1) to the proper depth. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil filter bypass hole plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 19 Nm (14 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the oil filter adapter (1) and gasket to the engine block. 4. Install the oil filter adapter bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil filter. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the engine with NEW engine oil. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the oil pressure indicator switch from the engine block. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2381 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or the equivalent to the oil pressure indicator switch threads. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pressure indicator switch. ^ Tighten the switch to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Pan: > 07-06-01-020 > Sep > 07 > Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Oil Pan: Customer Interest Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-020 Date: September 17, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Knock Type Noise Coming from Engine Compartment or Underneath Vehicle (Check for Missing Rear Oil Pan Bolts and Perform Necessary Repair) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment about a loud rattle/knock type noise coming from the engine compartment or from underneath the vehicle. Upon inspection, you may find that the noise is coming from the rear of the engine in the transmission bell housing/flexplate area. Cause The bolt(s) that attach the rear of the oil pan to the engine block may have come out and fallen down into the transmission bell housing. Correction Replace the bolt that came out with a new bolt, P/N 11570082. Prior to installing the new bolts, apply thread locker, P/N 12345382 (in Canada, P/N 10953489), to the threads. Install the bolt and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Then remove the left rear oil pan bolt, clean the threads, apply thread locker, install and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Verify that the other (vertical) oil pan bolts are also tightened to the same specification and that the side (horizontal) oil pan bolts are tightened to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Inspect the flexplate (flywheel) and other components for damage caused by the movement of the bolt. Warranty Information Use appropriate labor operation number based on repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Pan: > 07-06-01-020 > Sep > 07 > Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Oil Pan: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Compartment Rattle or Knock Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-020 Date: September 17, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Knock Type Noise Coming from Engine Compartment or Underneath Vehicle (Check for Missing Rear Oil Pan Bolts and Perform Necessary Repair) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment about a loud rattle/knock type noise coming from the engine compartment or from underneath the vehicle. Upon inspection, you may find that the noise is coming from the rear of the engine in the transmission bell housing/flexplate area. Cause The bolt(s) that attach the rear of the oil pan to the engine block may have come out and fallen down into the transmission bell housing. Correction Replace the bolt that came out with a new bolt, P/N 11570082. Prior to installing the new bolts, apply thread locker, P/N 12345382 (in Canada, P/N 10953489), to the threads. Install the bolt and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Then remove the left rear oil pan bolt, clean the threads, apply thread locker, install and tighten to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Verify that the other (vertical) oil pan bolts are also tightened to the same specification and that the side (horizontal) oil pan bolts are tightened to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Inspect the flexplate (flywheel) and other components for damage caused by the movement of the bolt. Warranty Information Use appropriate labor operation number based on repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2395 Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Bolt .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Oil Pan Side Bolt ................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2396 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39505 Torque Wrench Adapter Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Install the engine support fixture. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the air conditioning compressor mounting bracket. 5. Remove the engine-to-transaxle brace bolts (1, 2). 6. Remove the engine-to-transaxle brace (3). 7. Remove the starter. 8. If equipped with all wheel drive (AWD), remove the transfer case. 9. If equipped with front wheel drive (FWD), remove the intermediate shaft. 10. Remove the frame. 11. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil filter. 12. Remove the oil pan side bolts. 13. Remove the oil pan sealing surface bolts. 14. Remove the oil pan. 15. Clean the oil pan and the engine block gasket surface. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2397 1. Important: Provided the rear main bearing cap and engine front cover have not been removed and provided the sealant on either side of the rear main bearing cap and engine front cover has not been disturbed, it may not be necessary to apply additional sealant in these locations. Apply sealer GM P/N 12378521 (Canadian P/N 88901148) or the equivalent, to both sides of the crankshaft rear main bearing cap (1) and where the engine front cover meets the engine block. Press the sealer into the gap using a putty knife. 2. Install the oil pan gasket. 3. Install the oil pan. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan flange bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil pan side bolts. ^ Using J 39505 torque the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 6. Install a NEW oil filter. 7. Install the frame. 8. If equipped with FWD, install the intermediate shaft. 9. If equipped with AWD, install the transfer case. 10. Install the starter. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2398 11. Install the engine-to-transaxle brace (3). 12. Install the engine-to-transaxle brace bolts (1, 2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 13. Install the air conditioning compressor mounting bracket. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the engine support fixture. 16. Connect the negative battery cable. 17. Fill the engine with new engine oil. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2402 Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump Drive Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pump Drive Shaft: Service and Repair Oil Pump Drive Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Remove the oil pump drive clamp bolt. 3. Remove the oil pump drive clamp. 4. Remove the oil pump drive. Installation Procedure 1. Apply prelube GM P/N 12345501 (Canadian P/N 992704) or the equivalent to the oil pump drive gear. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil pump drive gear assembly for ease of assembly. 3. Install the oil pump drive gear assembly. 4. Install the oil pump drive gear clamp. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pump drive gear clamp bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 36 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the lower intake manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the oil pump bolt. 3. Remove the oil pump and oil pump drive shaft. 4. Remove the crankshaft oil deflector nuts. 5. Remove the crankshaft oil deflector. 6. Inspect the oil pump driveshaft at both ends for rounding of the corners. Installation Procedure 1. Install the crankshaft oil deflector. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2409 Install the crankshaft oil deflector nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Important: Rotate the oil pump driveshaft as necessary in order to obtain the engagement with the oil pump drive. Install the oil pump and oil pump drive shaft. 4. Install the oil pump bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil pan. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications 414 kPa (60 psi) ......................................................................................................................................................... at 1,850 RPM using 5W-30 engine oil Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2414 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Low or No Oil Pressure The following conditions may cause low or no oil pressure: ^ Low oil level Fill to the full mark on the oil level indicator. ^ Incorrect or malfunctioning oil pressure switch Replace the oil pressure switch. ^ Incorrect or malfunctioning oil pressure gage Replace the oil pressure gage. ^ Improper oil viscosity or diluted oil ^ Install oil of proper viscosity for expected temperature. ^ Install new oil if the oil is diluted. ^ A worn or dirty oil pump Clean or replace the oil pump. ^ A plugged oil filter Replace the oil filter. ^ A loose or plugged oil pickup screen Replace the oil pickup screen. ^ A hole in the oil pickup tube Replace the oil pickup tube. ^ Excessive bearing clearance Replace the bearings. ^ Cracked, porous, or plugged oil gallery Repair or replace the engine block. ^ Missing or improperly installed gallery plugs Install or repair the plugs as needed. ^ A stuck pressure regulator valve ^ Inspect the pressure regulator valve for sticking in the bore. ^ Inspect the bore for scoring and burrs. ^ A worn or poorly machined camshaft Replace the camshaft. Oil Pressure Testing ^ Tools Required J 25087-C Oil Pressure Tester If the vehicle has low oil pressure complete the following steps: 1. Inspect the oil level. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the oil filter. 4. Assemble the plunger valve in the large hole of the J 25087-C base. Insert the hose in the small hole of the J 25087-C base. Connect the gage to the end of the hose. 5. Insert the flat side of the rubber plug in the bypass valve without depressing the bypass valve. 6. Install the J 25087-C on the filter mounting pad. 7. Start the engine. 8. Inspect the overall oil pressure, the oil pressure switch, and for noisy lifters. Ensure that the engine is at operating temperature before inspecting the oil pressure. The oil pressure should be approximately 414 kPa (60 psi) at 1,850 RPM using 5W-30 engine oil. 9. If adequate oil pressure is indicated, test the oil pressure switch. 10. If a low reading is indicated, press the valve on the tester base in order to isolate the oil pump and/or its components from the lubricating system. An adequate reading at this time indicates a good pump and the previous low pressure was due to worn bearings, etc. A low reading while pressing the valve indicates a faulty pump. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement Intake Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-06-01-026C Date: February 03, 2010 Subject: Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement After Severe Internal Engine Damage Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-01-026B (Section 06 - Engine). When replacing an engine due to internal damage, extreme care should be taken when transferring the intake manifold to the new Goodwrench service engine long block. Internal damage may result in the potential discharge of internal engine component debris in the intake manifold via broken pistons and/or bent, broken, or missing intake valves. After removing the intake manifold from the engine, the technician should carefully inspect all of the cylinder head intake ports to see if the valve heads are still present and not bent. Usually when the valve heads are missing or sufficiently bent, internal engine component debris will be present to varying degrees in the intake port of the cylinder head. If this debris is present in any of the cylinder head intake ports, the intake manifold should be replaced. This replacement is required due to the complex inlet runner and plenum configuration of most of the intake manifolds, making thorough and complete component cleaning difficult and nearly impossible to verify complete removal of debris. Re-installation of an intake manifold removed from an engine with deposits of internal engine component debris may result in the ingestion of any remaining debris into the new Goodwrench service engine. This may cause damage or potential failure of the new service engine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2419 Intake Manifold: Specifications Lower Intake Manifold Bolt - Center First Pass ................................................................................... ............................................................................................................... 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.) Final Pass ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.) Lower Intake Manifold Bolt - Corner First Pass ....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.) Final Pass ............................................................................... .................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Upper Intake Manifold Bolt/Stud .............................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Throttle Body Bolt/Stud ........................................................................................................................ ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold. 3. Remove the heater inlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the radiator inlet hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the fuel rail assembly. 6. Remove the lower intake manifold bolts. 7. Remove the lower intake manifold from the engine. 8. If replacing the lower intake manifold, remove the thermostat and housing. 9. Remove the rocker arms and push rods. 10. Remove the lower intake manifold gaskets. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 2422 Important: All gasket mating surfaces must remain free of oil and foreign material. Use GM P/N 12346139 (Canadian P/N 10953463) or equivalent to clean surfaces. Important: Do not apply room temperature vulcanizing (RTV) sealer to the engine block prior to the installation of the manifold gaskets. RTV sealer is not to be placed under the lower intake manifold gaskets. 1. Install the lower intake manifold gaskets. 2. Install the rocker arms and push rods. 3. Install the lower intake manifold seals. 4. With the seals in place, apply a small drop 8 - 10 mm (0.31 - 0.39 inch) of RTV sealer GM P/N 12346141 (Canadian P/N 10953433). 5. Install the lower intake manifold to the engine. Notice: Maximum gasket performance is achieved when using new fasteners, which contain a thread-locking patch. If the fasteners are not Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 2423 replaced, a thread locking chemical must be applied to the fastener threads. Failure to replace the fasteners or apply a thread-locking chemical MAY reduce gasket sealing capability. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: All lower intake manifold bolts need to be clean, free of foreign materials, and reused only if new bolts are unavailable. Use GM P/N 1234382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent and apply to the old intake manifold bolt threads. Important: Manufacturer recommends the center bolts be fully torqued before the diagonal bolts to assure proper torque distribution. Important: Lower intake manifold bolts in locations (6) and (7) should be torqued to specification using a crows foot type tool. 6. Install the lower intake manifold bolts. Tighten A.Tighten the lower intake manifold bolts (1,2,3,4) in sequence to 7 Nm (62 lb in) on the first pass. B.Tighten the lower intake manifold bolts (1, 2, 3, 4) in sequence to 13 Nm (115 lb in) on the final pass. C. Tighten the lower intake manifold bolts (5,6,7,8) in sequence to 13 Nm (115 lb in) on the first pass. D.Tighten the lower intake manifold bolts (5, 6, 7, 8) in sequence to 25 Nm (18 lb ft) on the final pass. 7. Install the fuel rail assembly. 8. Connect the radiator inlet hose to the thermostat housing. 9. Install the heater inlet pipe. 10. Install the upper intake manifold. 11. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 2424 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold Replacement INTAKE MANIFOLD REPLACEMENT - UPPER Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Release the clamp (1) from the brake booster vacuum hose connection. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (2) from the intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the left side spark plug wires (1) from the retainers (2) and from the spark plugs. 5. Remove the ignition control module bracket from the engine with the ignition control module and spark plug wires still attached. Position out of the way. 6. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 2425 7. Remove the heater outlet pipe nut (4) from the upper intake manifold. 8. Remove the heater outlet pipe nuts (2) and bolt (3) from the throttle body. 9. Position the heater outlet pipe out of the way without disconnecting the heater hoses. 10. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe. 11. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) foul air hose. 12. Loosen but do not completely remove the generator attachment bolt most near the intake manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 2426 13. Remove the generator brace nut (2). 14. Remove the generator brace (1). 15. Remove the upper intake manifold bolts (4, 5). 16. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (3). 17. Remove the upper intake manifold (2). 18. Remove the upper intake manifold gaskets (1). 19. If replacing the upper intake manifold complete the following steps: 1. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 2. Remove the EGR valve. 3. Remove the evaporative emissions (EVAP) purge solenoid valve. 4. Remove the throttle body. 5. Remove the fuel injector sight shield studs. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 2427 1. Install the upper intake manifold gaskets (1) to the lower intake manifold and install the fir tree retainers to retain the upper intake manifold gasket position. 2. Install the upper intake manifold (2). 3. Install the spark plug wire retainer (3). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) to the bolt threads. Install the upper intake manifold bolts (4, 5). ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. If the upper manifold was replaced, complete the following steps: 1. Install the fuel injector sight shield studs. 2. Install the throttle body. 3. Install the EVAP purge solenoid valve. 4. Install the EGR valve. 5. Install MAP sensor. 6. Install the generator brace (1). 7. Install the generator brace nut (2). ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 2428 8. Fully insert the generator attachment bolt most near the intake manifold. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the PCV foul air hose. 10. Install the EGR pipe. 11. Position the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body and the upper intake manifold. 12. Install the heater outlet pipe nuts (2) to the throttle body. ^ Tighten the nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 13. Install the heater outlet pipe bolt (3) to the throttle body. ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 14. Install the heater outlet pipe nut (4) to the upper intake manifold. ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 15. Install the air cleaner intake duct. 16. Install the ignition control module bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 2429 17. Connect the left side spark plug wires (1) to the spark plugs and to the spark plug wire retainers. 18. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose (2) to the intake manifold. 19. Install the clamp (1) to the brake booster vacuum hose connection. 20. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal Bulletin No.: 05-06-01-019F Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Engine Oil Leak at Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal (Install Revised Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Using Revised Rear Main Seal Installer and Remover Tools) Models: 1986-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with 2.8L, 3.1L, 3.4L, 3.5L, 3.9L 60 Degree V6 Engine (VINs D, E, F, J, K, L, M, N, R, S, T, V, W, X, Z, 1, 3, 8, 9, W, R - RPOs LG6, LA1, LNJ, LG8, LL1 or LX9, L82, LL2, LB8, LHO, LG5, LB6, LE2 or LQ1, LH7, LC1, L44, LZ4, LZE, LZ9, LGD, LZ8, LZG) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add an Important statement on proper seal installation. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-01-019E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). This bulletin only applies to 60 degree V6 engines. Some of the discontinued 60 degree V6 engine VINs and RPOs may have carried over to other new model year engines and may no longer be a 60 degree V6 engine. So this bulletin may not apply. It is very important to verify that the following information is correct before using this bulletin: Year of vehicle (e.g. N = 1992) V6 Engine Liter size (e.g. 3.4L) VIN CODE (e.g. X) RPO (e.g. LQ1) If ALL the information from the vehicle (year, size, VIN Code, RPO) you're working on can be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin applies to that engine. If one or more of the vehicle's information can NOT be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin does NOT apply. This bulletin does not apply to 2004-2007 Saturn VUE models with 3.5L DOHC V6 Engine (VIN 4 RPO L66) or 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS with 2.8L HFV6 Engine (VIN T - RPO LP1). Condition Some customers may comment on external oil leakage. Correction Before replacement of the new design crankshaft rear main oil seal, be sure the PCV system is operating correctly. The new seal described below comes with a protective nylon sleeve already installed in the seal. This sleeve assures that the seal is installed in the correct direction and also protects the seal from getting damaged during installation. Do not remove the protective sleeve from the seal; if removed, the installation tool (EN48108) will not work. A new design crankshaft rear main oil seal and installation tool (EN-48108) has been released. This seal incorporates features that improve high mileage durability. Replace the crankshaft rear main oil seal with the new design rear main oil seal, P/N 12592195, using the following service procedures. Tools Required TOOLS WERE SHIPPED TO YOUR DEALERSHIPS. IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED THEM OR THEY ARE LOST, PLEASE CALL GM SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS AT 1-800-GM-TOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2439 EN-48108 Rear Main Oil Seal Installation Tool This tool has a unique design to allow the technician to easily install the rear main seal squarely to the correct depth and direction. Before proceeding with installation, review the above illustration to become familiar with the components shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2440 EN-48672 rear Main Oil Seal Remover Tool This tool has a unique design to allow the technician to easily remove the rear main seal without nicking the crankshaft sealing surface when removing the seal. Before proceeding with removal, review the above illustration to become familiar with the following components: Removal Plate Threaded Adjustment Pins and Jam Nuts Force Screw # 2 Self Drill Screws 38 mm (1.5 in) long 8 needed Extreme Pressure Lubricant Removal Procedure Remove the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Install the removal plate (2) and both threaded adjustment pins and jam nuts (1) into the back of the crankshaft flange and secure the plate with adjustment pins and jam nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2441 Install # 2 Self Drill Screws 38 mm (1.5 in) long, eight needed, (1) and tighten down flush to the plate. Before installing the force screw, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit. Install the force screw (1) and back off both jam nuts (2) and continue to turn the force screw (1) into the removal plate to remove the seal from the crankshaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2442 Once the seal is removed from the crankshaft, remove and save all eight screws and discard the old seal. Clean the crankshaft sealing surface with a clean, lint free towel. Inspect the lead-in edge of the crankshaft for burrs or sharp edges that could damage the rear main oil seal. Remove any burrs or sharp edges with crocus cloth or equivalent before proceeding. Installation Procedure Do not remove the protective nylon sleeve from the new rear main seal prior to installation. The EN-48108 is designed to install the rear main seal with the protective sleeve in place. Never apply or use any oil, lubricants or sealing compounds on the crankshaft rear main oil seal. Align the mandrel dowel pin (EN-48108) to the dowel pin hole in the crankshaft. Refer to the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2443 Using a large flat-bladed screwdriver, tighten the two mandrel screws to the crankshaft. Ensure that the mandrel is snug to the crankshaft hub. Refer to the above illustration. Different types (styles) of rear main seals were used in production in different model years, engines and manufacturing facilities. As a result, the NEW style rear main seal that you will be installing may have a different appearance or shape than the one removed. Regardless of what type of seal was removed and what side was facing outside the engine, the new seal must be installed as described. Upon close inspection of the outer lip on the new seal, the words this side out" will be seen. This side of the seal must be facing OUTSIDE the engine when correctly installed. While this may seem backwards, it is correct. In addition, the protective nylon (plastic) sleeve that the seal is mounted on in the package was designed so that the seal can only be installed in the proper direction when using the installation tool described in the following steps. Install the rear main seal (1), with the protective nylon sleeve attached (2), onto the mandrel. The seal, if properly installed, will center on a step that protrudes from the center of the mandrel. As an error proof, seal will fit only one way onto the mandrel. Refer to the above illustration. Before installing the outer drive drum, bearing, washer and the drive nut onto the threaded shaft, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2444 Install the outer drive drum onto the mandrel (EN-481 08). Install the bearing, washer and the drive nut onto the threaded shaft. Refer to the above illustration. Using a wrench, turn the drive nut on the mandrel (EN-48108), which will push the seal into the engine block bore. Turn the wrench until the drive drum is snug and flush against the engine block. Refer to the above illustration. Loosen and remove the drive nut, washer, bearing and drive drum. Discard the protective nylon sleeve. Verify that the seal has seated properly. Use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the two attachment screws from the mandrel and remove the mandrel from the crankshaft hub. Refer to the above illustration. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Install the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Inspect for proper fluid levels. Inspect for leaks. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2445 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal Bulletin No.: 05-06-01-019F Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Engine Oil Leak at Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal (Install Revised Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Using Revised Rear Main Seal Installer and Remover Tools) Models: 1986-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with 2.8L, 3.1L, 3.4L, 3.5L, 3.9L 60 Degree V6 Engine (VINs D, E, F, J, K, L, M, N, R, S, T, V, W, X, Z, 1, 3, 8, 9, W, R - RPOs LG6, LA1, LNJ, LG8, LL1 or LX9, L82, LL2, LB8, LHO, LG5, LB6, LE2 or LQ1, LH7, LC1, L44, LZ4, LZE, LZ9, LGD, LZ8, LZG) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add an Important statement on proper seal installation. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-01-019E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). This bulletin only applies to 60 degree V6 engines. Some of the discontinued 60 degree V6 engine VINs and RPOs may have carried over to other new model year engines and may no longer be a 60 degree V6 engine. So this bulletin may not apply. It is very important to verify that the following information is correct before using this bulletin: Year of vehicle (e.g. N = 1992) V6 Engine Liter size (e.g. 3.4L) VIN CODE (e.g. X) RPO (e.g. LQ1) If ALL the information from the vehicle (year, size, VIN Code, RPO) you're working on can be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin applies to that engine. If one or more of the vehicle's information can NOT be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin does NOT apply. This bulletin does not apply to 2004-2007 Saturn VUE models with 3.5L DOHC V6 Engine (VIN 4 RPO L66) or 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS with 2.8L HFV6 Engine (VIN T - RPO LP1). Condition Some customers may comment on external oil leakage. Correction Before replacement of the new design crankshaft rear main oil seal, be sure the PCV system is operating correctly. The new seal described below comes with a protective nylon sleeve already installed in the seal. This sleeve assures that the seal is installed in the correct direction and also protects the seal from getting damaged during installation. Do not remove the protective sleeve from the seal; if removed, the installation tool (EN48108) will not work. A new design crankshaft rear main oil seal and installation tool (EN-48108) has been released. This seal incorporates features that improve high mileage durability. Replace the crankshaft rear main oil seal with the new design rear main oil seal, P/N 12592195, using the following service procedures. Tools Required TOOLS WERE SHIPPED TO YOUR DEALERSHIPS. IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED THEM OR THEY ARE LOST, PLEASE CALL GM SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS AT 1-800-GM-TOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2451 EN-48108 Rear Main Oil Seal Installation Tool This tool has a unique design to allow the technician to easily install the rear main seal squarely to the correct depth and direction. Before proceeding with installation, review the above illustration to become familiar with the components shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2452 EN-48672 rear Main Oil Seal Remover Tool This tool has a unique design to allow the technician to easily remove the rear main seal without nicking the crankshaft sealing surface when removing the seal. Before proceeding with removal, review the above illustration to become familiar with the following components: Removal Plate Threaded Adjustment Pins and Jam Nuts Force Screw # 2 Self Drill Screws 38 mm (1.5 in) long 8 needed Extreme Pressure Lubricant Removal Procedure Remove the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Install the removal plate (2) and both threaded adjustment pins and jam nuts (1) into the back of the crankshaft flange and secure the plate with adjustment pins and jam nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2453 Install # 2 Self Drill Screws 38 mm (1.5 in) long, eight needed, (1) and tighten down flush to the plate. Before installing the force screw, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit. Install the force screw (1) and back off both jam nuts (2) and continue to turn the force screw (1) into the removal plate to remove the seal from the crankshaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2454 Once the seal is removed from the crankshaft, remove and save all eight screws and discard the old seal. Clean the crankshaft sealing surface with a clean, lint free towel. Inspect the lead-in edge of the crankshaft for burrs or sharp edges that could damage the rear main oil seal. Remove any burrs or sharp edges with crocus cloth or equivalent before proceeding. Installation Procedure Do not remove the protective nylon sleeve from the new rear main seal prior to installation. The EN-48108 is designed to install the rear main seal with the protective sleeve in place. Never apply or use any oil, lubricants or sealing compounds on the crankshaft rear main oil seal. Align the mandrel dowel pin (EN-48108) to the dowel pin hole in the crankshaft. Refer to the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2455 Using a large flat-bladed screwdriver, tighten the two mandrel screws to the crankshaft. Ensure that the mandrel is snug to the crankshaft hub. Refer to the above illustration. Different types (styles) of rear main seals were used in production in different model years, engines and manufacturing facilities. As a result, the NEW style rear main seal that you will be installing may have a different appearance or shape than the one removed. Regardless of what type of seal was removed and what side was facing outside the engine, the new seal must be installed as described. Upon close inspection of the outer lip on the new seal, the words this side out" will be seen. This side of the seal must be facing OUTSIDE the engine when correctly installed. While this may seem backwards, it is correct. In addition, the protective nylon (plastic) sleeve that the seal is mounted on in the package was designed so that the seal can only be installed in the proper direction when using the installation tool described in the following steps. Install the rear main seal (1), with the protective nylon sleeve attached (2), onto the mandrel. The seal, if properly installed, will center on a step that protrudes from the center of the mandrel. As an error proof, seal will fit only one way onto the mandrel. Refer to the above illustration. Before installing the outer drive drum, bearing, washer and the drive nut onto the threaded shaft, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2456 Install the outer drive drum onto the mandrel (EN-481 08). Install the bearing, washer and the drive nut onto the threaded shaft. Refer to the above illustration. Using a wrench, turn the drive nut on the mandrel (EN-48108), which will push the seal into the engine block bore. Turn the wrench until the drive drum is snug and flush against the engine block. Refer to the above illustration. Loosen and remove the drive nut, washer, bearing and drive drum. Discard the protective nylon sleeve. Verify that the seal has seated properly. Use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the two attachment screws from the mandrel and remove the mandrel from the crankshaft hub. Refer to the above illustration. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Install the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement in SI or the appropriate Service Manual. Inspect for proper fluid levels. Inspect for leaks. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-01-019F > Oct > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks from Crankshaft Rear Main Seal > Page 2457 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Steering Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 04-02-32-006 Date: August 06, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle or Clunk Felt in Steering Wheel While Driving on Rough Roads (Adjust Steering Gear Preload) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Attention: This Bulletin Only Applies To General Motors Chevrolet Dealers In Mexico Condition Some customers may comment that while driving over certain rough road conditions, they hear a rattle noise from the front end of the vehicle. Some customers may also comment that they feel clunking in the steering wheel while hearing the noise. Correction Follow the service procedure below to correct this condition. 1. Set the steering wheel in a straight ahead position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove both front tire assemblies. Important: Hold the ball stud in order to prevent turning during removal of the nut. 4. Remove the tie rod to knuckle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 2463 Note: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 5. Use the SA91100C to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the bar. 8. Rotate the stabilizer bar upward. 9. Remove the pinch bolt from the lower intermediate shaft to the steering gear shaft. 10. Remove the lower intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 11. Remove the two bolts retaining the steering gear to the frame. 12. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle. Note: ONLY clamp the steering gear in a vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Failure to clamp the gear in this location may cause damage to the gear. 13. Mount the steering gear in a vise by clamping the vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Important: ^ ONLY use a 14 mm open end crows foot with a newton meter torque wrench when measuring the steering gear preload. ^ Measure the preload before making any adjustments to the steering gear. 14. Measure the steering gear preload by rotating the stub shaft back and forth in a +/- 45° rotation from center using a 14 mm open end crows foot and a newton meter torque wrench. Measure the steering gear preload prior to making an adjustment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 2464 15. Using the J 35467-2, hold the adjuster plug and loosen the lock nut with a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. 16. Tighten the adjuster plug using the J 35467-2 while turning the stub shaft with a 14 mm open end crows foot in a back and forth movement in a +/45° rotation from center. Preload Specification Adjust the steering gear preload to 1.5 N.m - 2.0 N.m (13.2 lb in - 17.7 lb in) 17. While holding the adjuster plug with the J-35467-2, tighten the lock nut using a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. Tighten Tighten the adjuster lock nut to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 18. Re-measure the steering gear preload after tightening the lock nut to make sure the preload did not change while tightening the locking nut. 19. Reinstall the steering gear in the vehicle. 20. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 21. Connect the stabilizer links the stabilizer shaft and install the nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 65 N.m (48 lb ft). 22. Connect the outer tie rod ends to the knuckles. 23. Using the J 44015 , seat the ball stud taper to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 24. Remove the J 44015 and install a new nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 2465 25. Install the front tires and wheels. 26. Lower the vehicle. Tool Information General Motors Special Tools can be purchased by calling SPX of Mexico at (552) 5-95-16-30. Warranty Information This labor code is for GM of Mexico dealers only. This labor code is for bulletin use only. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 2471 Note: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 5. Use the SA91100C to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the bar. 8. Rotate the stabilizer bar upward. 9. Remove the pinch bolt from the lower intermediate shaft to the steering gear shaft. 10. Remove the lower intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 11. Remove the two bolts retaining the steering gear to the frame. 12. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle. Note: ONLY clamp the steering gear in a vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Failure to clamp the gear in this location may cause damage to the gear. 13. Mount the steering gear in a vise by clamping the vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Important: ^ ONLY use a 14 mm open end crows foot with a newton meter torque wrench when measuring the steering gear preload. ^ Measure the preload before making any adjustments to the steering gear. 14. Measure the steering gear preload by rotating the stub shaft back and forth in a +/- 45° rotation from center using a 14 mm open end crows foot and a newton meter torque wrench. Measure the steering gear preload prior to making an adjustment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 2472 15. Using the J 35467-2, hold the adjuster plug and loosen the lock nut with a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. 16. Tighten the adjuster plug using the J 35467-2 while turning the stub shaft with a 14 mm open end crows foot in a back and forth movement in a +/45° rotation from center. Preload Specification Adjust the steering gear preload to 1.5 N.m - 2.0 N.m (13.2 lb in - 17.7 lb in) 17. While holding the adjuster plug with the J-35467-2, tighten the lock nut using a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. Tighten Tighten the adjuster lock nut to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 18. Re-measure the steering gear preload after tightening the lock nut to make sure the preload did not change while tightening the locking nut. 19. Reinstall the steering gear in the vehicle. 20. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 21. Connect the stabilizer links the stabilizer shaft and install the nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 65 N.m (48 lb ft). 22. Connect the outer tie rod ends to the knuckles. 23. Using the J 44015 , seat the ball stud taper to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 24. Remove the J 44015 and install a new nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 2473 25. Install the front tires and wheels. 26. Lower the vehicle. Tool Information General Motors Special Tools can be purchased by calling SPX of Mexico at (552) 5-95-16-30. Warranty Information This labor code is for GM of Mexico dealers only. This labor code is for bulletin use only. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2474 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 34686 Rear Main Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Important: Do not damage the crankshaft or seal bore. Remove the engine flywheel. 2. Remove the crankshaft rear oil seal. Pry the crankshaft rear oil seal out using a suitable tool. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Do not apply or use any oil lubrication on the crankshaft rear oil seal, or the seal installer. Do not touch the sealing lip of the oil seal once the protective sleeve is removed. Doing so will damage/deform the seal. Notice: Clean the crankshaft sealing surface with a clean, lint free towel. Inspect lead-in edge of crankshaft for burrs/sharp edges that could damage the rear main oil seal. Remove burrs/sharp edges with crocus cloth before proceeding. Important: Notice the direction of the rear oil seal. The new design is a reverse style as opposed to what has been used in the past. "THIS SIDE OUT" has been stamped into the seal as shown in the graphic. Carefully remove the protection sleeve from the new crankshaft rear oil seal. 2. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal onto the J 34686 by sliding the crankshaft rear oil seal over the mandrel using a twisting motion until the back of the crankshaft rear oil seal bottoms squarely against the collar of the tool. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Perform the following steps in order to install the crankshaft rear oil seal: 1. Align the dowel pin of the J 34686 with the dowel pin in the crankshaft. 2. Attach the J 34686 to the crankshaft by hand, or tighten the attaching screws to 5 Nm (45 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2475 3. Turn the T-handle of the J 34686 in order to engage allow the collar to push the seal into the bore. Turn the handle until the collar is tight against the engine block. Ensure that the seal is seated properly. 4. Loosen the T-handle until the handle comes to a stop. 5. Remove the attaching screws. 4. Install the engine flywheel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal Front Crankshaft Seal: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-023 Date: December 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: 60 Degree V6 Engine Oil Leak at Crankshaft Front Oil Seal (Use New Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Installer Tool EN-48869) Models: 1986-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with 2.8L, 3.1L, 3.4L, 3.5L or 3.9L 60 Degree V6 Engine (VINs D, E, F, J, K, L, M, N, R, S, T, V, W, X, Z, 1, 3, 8, 9, W, R - RPOs LG6, LA1, LNJ, LG8, LL1 or LX9, L82, LL2, LB8, LHO, LG5, LB6, LE2 or LQ1, LH7, LC1, L44, LZ4, LZE, LZ9, LGD, LZ8, LZG) This bulletin does not apply to 2004-2007 Saturn VUE models with 3.5L DOHC V6 Engine (VIN 4 RPO L66) or 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS with 2.8L HFV6 Engine (VIN T - RPO LP1). This bulletin only applies to 60 degree V6 engines. Some of the discontinued 60 degree V6 engine VINs and RPOs may have carried over to other new model year engines and may no longer be a 60 degree V6 engine. So this bulletin may not apply. It is very important to verify that the information shown is correct before using this bulletin. If ALL the information from the vehicle (year, size, VIN Code, RPO) you're working on can be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin applies to that engine. If one or more of the vehicle's information can NOT be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin does NOT apply. Condition Some customers may comment on external oil leakage. Correction Before replacement of the crankshaft front oil seal, be sure the PCV system is operating correctly. Tools Required TOOLS WERE SHIPPED TO YOUR DEALERSHIPS. IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED THEM OR THEY ARE LOST, PLEASE CALL GM SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS AT 1-800-GM-TOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 2484 The EN-48869 has a unique design to allow the technician to easily install the front crankshaft seal squarely to the correct depth and direction. Before proceeding with installation, review the illustration to become familiar with the tool. Removal Procedure Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement in SI. Use care not to damage the engine front cover or nick the crankshaft. Remove the crankshaft front oil seal (1) using a suitable tool. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 2485 Lubricate the inside of the crankshaft front oil seal (1) with clean engine oil. Then install the seal to the installer body (2). Align the oil seal and installer body (1) with the engine front cover and crankshaft. Before installing the force screw, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit, to the force screw. Install the drive nut (4) onto the threaded force screw shaft (5), washer (3), and bearing (2). Then install to the installer body (1) and tighten the force screw to the crankshaft by hand. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 2486 Using a wrench, turn the drive nut on the threaded force screw shaft (2), this will push the seal into the engine front cover. Continue to turn the drive nut (2) with the wrench until the installer body (1) is snug and flush against the engine front cover. Loosen and remove the drive nut from the threaded force screw shaft, washer, bearing, and installer body. Verify that the seal has seated properly, flush against front cover flange (1). Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement in SI. Inspect for proper fluid levels. Inspect for leaks. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 2487 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal Front Crankshaft Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-023 Date: December 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: 60 Degree V6 Engine Oil Leak at Crankshaft Front Oil Seal (Use New Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Installer Tool EN-48869) Models: 1986-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with 2.8L, 3.1L, 3.4L, 3.5L or 3.9L 60 Degree V6 Engine (VINs D, E, F, J, K, L, M, N, R, S, T, V, W, X, Z, 1, 3, 8, 9, W, R - RPOs LG6, LA1, LNJ, LG8, LL1 or LX9, L82, LL2, LB8, LHO, LG5, LB6, LE2 or LQ1, LH7, LC1, L44, LZ4, LZE, LZ9, LGD, LZ8, LZG) This bulletin does not apply to 2004-2007 Saturn VUE models with 3.5L DOHC V6 Engine (VIN 4 RPO L66) or 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS with 2.8L HFV6 Engine (VIN T - RPO LP1). This bulletin only applies to 60 degree V6 engines. Some of the discontinued 60 degree V6 engine VINs and RPOs may have carried over to other new model year engines and may no longer be a 60 degree V6 engine. So this bulletin may not apply. It is very important to verify that the information shown is correct before using this bulletin. If ALL the information from the vehicle (year, size, VIN Code, RPO) you're working on can be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin applies to that engine. If one or more of the vehicle's information can NOT be found under the models listed above, then this bulletin does NOT apply. Condition Some customers may comment on external oil leakage. Correction Before replacement of the crankshaft front oil seal, be sure the PCV system is operating correctly. Tools Required TOOLS WERE SHIPPED TO YOUR DEALERSHIPS. IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED THEM OR THEY ARE LOST, PLEASE CALL GM SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS AT 1-800-GM-TOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 2493 The EN-48869 has a unique design to allow the technician to easily install the front crankshaft seal squarely to the correct depth and direction. Before proceeding with installation, review the illustration to become familiar with the tool. Removal Procedure Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement in SI. Use care not to damage the engine front cover or nick the crankshaft. Remove the crankshaft front oil seal (1) using a suitable tool. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 2494 Lubricate the inside of the crankshaft front oil seal (1) with clean engine oil. Then install the seal to the installer body (2). Align the oil seal and installer body (1) with the engine front cover and crankshaft. Before installing the force screw, apply a small amount of the Extreme Pressure Lubricant J 23444-A, provided in the tool kit, to the force screw. Install the drive nut (4) onto the threaded force screw shaft (5), washer (3), and bearing (2). Then install to the installer body (1) and tighten the force screw to the crankshaft by hand. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 2495 Using a wrench, turn the drive nut on the threaded force screw shaft (2), this will push the seal into the engine front cover. Continue to turn the drive nut (2) with the wrench until the installer body (1) is snug and flush against the engine front cover. Loosen and remove the drive nut from the threaded force screw shaft, washer, bearing, and installer body. Verify that the seal has seated properly, flush against front cover flange (1). Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement in SI. Inspect for proper fluid levels. Inspect for leaks. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-023 > Dec > 07 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Front Crankshaft Seal > Page 2496 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Power Seat Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Subject: Left Power Seat Inoperative/Grinding Noise (Replace Power Seat Motor) # 06-08-50-011 (10/12/2006) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a grinding noise when moving the driver power seat. Cause This cause may be due to the customer pulling on the motor assembly by mistake. Correction Replace the power seat motor assembly using the following procedure: 1. Release the seat belt from the seat. 2. Remove the two retaining bolts and move the seat back. 3. Tilt the seat forward to release it from the floor and disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the recliner handle by pulling it off the mechanism. 5. Remove the left side outer seat trim panel and connector from the power seat switch. 6. If the motor works but is noisy proceed to step 8. If the seat motor is inoperative, remove the two bolts that retain the track to the worm gear as see in the illustration above. 7. Slide the track back to gain access to the four T-20 TORX screws. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 2502 8. Remove the four T-20 TORX screws at the actuators and cables. 9. Remove the lock from the wire harness connector. 10. With a small pick or screwdriver, remove the red wire from cavity C and the black wire from cavity F. Remove the motor assembly. 11. Install the red wire into cavity C and the black wire into cavity F and install the lock. Install the motor assembly. 12. Install the motor assembly and tighten the four T-20 TORX screws. If the motor works but is noisy, proceed to step 13. Tighten Tighten the T-20 TORX Screws to 3 Nm (19 lb-in). 13. Slide both tracks back in line with the worm gear and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 14. Install the left side outer seat trim panel and switch connector. 15. Install the recliner handle. 16. Install the seat assembly into vehicle. Connect the electrical connector and install the seat track bolts. Tighten Tighten the seat bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 17. Install the seat bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 2503 18. Verify proper operation of the seat. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 2509 8. Remove the four T-20 TORX screws at the actuators and cables. 9. Remove the lock from the wire harness connector. 10. With a small pick or screwdriver, remove the red wire from cavity C and the black wire from cavity F. Remove the motor assembly. 11. Install the red wire into cavity C and the black wire into cavity F and install the lock. Install the motor assembly. 12. Install the motor assembly and tighten the four T-20 TORX screws. If the motor works but is noisy, proceed to step 13. Tighten Tighten the T-20 TORX Screws to 3 Nm (19 lb-in). 13. Slide both tracks back in line with the worm gear and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 14. Install the left side outer seat trim panel and switch connector. 15. Install the recliner handle. 16. Install the seat assembly into vehicle. Connect the electrical connector and install the seat track bolts. Tighten Tighten the seat bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 17. Install the seat bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Crankshaft Seal: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 2510 18. Verify proper operation of the seat. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2511 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 35468 Cover Aligner and Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the crankshaft balancer. 2. Pry out the crankshaft front oil seal using a suitable tool. Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft. 3. Inspect the crankshaft, the crankshaft balancer and the engine front cover for wear and/or damage. Replace the components as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Align the J 35468 and the crankshaft front oil seal with the engine front cover and crankshaft. 2. Install the crankshaft front oil seal using the J 35468 and a suitable tool. 3. Install the crankshaft balancer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 22794 Spark Plug Port Adapter - J 38606 Valve Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rocker arm. 2. Remove the spark plug. 3. Important: Before you remove the valve keys, rotate the engine so that the piston in the cylinder you are working on is at (TDC) top dead center. This will eliminate the possibility of the valve accidentally falling inside the cylinder. Install the J 22794 into the spark plug port. Apply compressed air in order to hold the valves in place. 4. Compress the valve spring with the J 38606. 5. Remove the valve keys (2). 6. Remove the valve spring cap (3). 7. Remove the valve spring (4). 8. Inspect the valve spring for damage. Replace the spring if it is damaged. 9. Remove the spring seat/valve stem oil seal (5). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2515 1. Install the valve stem oil seal/spring seat (5). ^ Use a suitable driver. ^ Press over the valve guide boss. 2. Install the valve spring (4). 3. Install the valve spring cap (3). 4. Compress the valve spring using the J 38606. 5. Install the valve keys. If necessary, hold the valve keys in place with grease. 6. Remove the J 38606 in order to release the valve spring. 7. Ensure that the valve keys are seated. 8. Release the air pressure and remove the J 22794. 9. Install the valve rocker arm. 10. Install the spark plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the oil pressure indicator switch from the engine block. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2520 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or the equivalent to the oil pressure indicator switch threads. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pressure indicator switch. ^ Tighten the switch to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the oil pressure indicator switch electrical connector (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2524 Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair Timing Chain: Service and Repair Timing Chain and Sprockets Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. 2. Remove the camshaft sprocket bolt. 3. Remove the camshaft sprocket and timing chain. 4. Remove the crankshaft sprocket. 5. Remove the timing chain dampener bolts. 6. Remove the timing chain dampener. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2529 1. Install the crankshaft sprocket. 2. Apply prelube GM P/N 12345501 (Canadian P/N 992704) or the equivalent to the crankshaft sprocket thrust surface. 3. Install the timing chain dampener. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the timing chain dampener bolts. ^ Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 5. Align the crankshaft timing mark (2) to the timing mark on the bottom of the timing chain dampener (1). 6. Hold the camshaft sprocket with the timing chain hanging down and install the timing chain to the crankshaft gear. 7. Align the timing mark on the camshaft gear (4) with the timing mark on top of the timing chain dampener (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2530 8. Align the dowel in the camshaft with the dowel hole in the camshaft sprocket. 9. Draw the camshaft sprocket onto the camshaft using the mounting bolt. 10. Coat the crankshaft and camshaft sprocket with engine oil. ^ Tighten the bolt to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the engine front cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Engine Front Cover Bolt Large Bolt ..................................................................................................... ............................................................................................. 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Medium Bolt ............. .............................................................................................................................................................. ................... 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Small Bolt ........................................................................................... ....................................................................................................... 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2537 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the engine support fixture. 4. Remove the drive belt. 5. Drain the cooling system. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 7. Remove the crankshaft balancer. 8. Remove the lower belt idler pulley. 9. Remove the engine oil pan. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove the left belt idler pulley. 12. Remove the right engine mount bracket bolts (2-4). 13. Remove the right engine mount bracket (1). 14. Remove the water pump. 15. Remove the thermostat bypass hose adapter. 16. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the engine front cover. 17. Remove the engine front cover bolts (2-4). 18. Remove the engine front cover (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2538 19. Remove the engine front cover gasket (1). 20. Clean the engine block and front cover gasket sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or the equivalent, to the lower tabs of the engine front cover gasket. Uniformly apply the sealer to both sides of the gasket lower tabs with the sealant bead being no less than 5.0 mm (0.20 inch) wide as shown. Torque front cover immediately after installation of sealer coated gasket. 2. Install the gasket (1) to the engine block positioning the gasket on the locating pins (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2539 3. Install the engine front cover (1) to the engine block aligning the cover with the locating pins. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine front cover bolts (3, 4). ^ Tighten the bolts to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the engine front cover bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the radiator outlet hose to the engine front cover. 7. Install the thermostat bypass hose adapter. 8. Install the water pump. 9. Install the right engine mount bracket (1). 10. Install the right engine mount bracket bolts (2-4). ^ Tighten the bolts to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the engine mount bracket bolts (3). ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the left belt idler pulley. 13. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 14. Install the engine oil pan. 15. Install the lower belt idler pulley. 16. Install the crankshaft balancer. 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Install the drive belt. 19. Remove the engine support fixture. 20. Install the air cleaner assembly. 21. Connect the negative battery cable. 22. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2546 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2547 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2548 Steps 7-13 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2564 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2570 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing Splash Guard: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing Bulletin No.: 05-08-111-003 Date: April 12, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Rear Door Stone Guards Turn Yellow (Replace Rear Door Stone Guards) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to September 02, 2004 Production Date Condition Some Equinox vehicles that are equipped with urethane stone guards on the rear doors may have a yellow coloring. This condition is more prevalent on vehicles that are Summit White, Galaxy Silver Metallic and Sandstone Metallic in color. Correction Replace the protective film following the procedure listed below. 1. Remove the existing protective film. 2. Use an alcohol-based cleaner to clean the area where the part is to be applied. Refer to the illustration above. 3. Remove the liner (the bottom film), starting at the tab, by rolling the liner away from the part while keeping the part flat. Refer to the illustration above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 2576 4. Hold the part upright, spray the application solution (20% Isopropyl alcohol, 80% water) on both sides of the part and on the vehicle in the area where the part is to be installed. Refer to the illustration above. 5. Hold the bottom tab and align the notch to the vehicle while using your fingers against the vehicle to steady the location. Refer to the arrow in the illustration above. 6. Lay the part on the door, the flatter the initial application the easier it is to remove the trapped air. Use the wheel arch as a guide for the application. 7. Hold the squeegee as shown in the illustration above. Using firm pressure in a downward motion, squeegee out the air bubbles starting at the top and moving along the wheel arch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 2577 8. Once the center has been adhered, squeegee from the center outward, using overlapping strokes. 9. Illustration A Illustration B Slowly pull the outer tab straight down starting at the top. Refer to illustration A above. Ensure that the protective film is not pulling away from the vehicle along with the film. Completely remove the remaining outer film with a "quick snap" in a downward motion. Refer to illustration B above. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 2578 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 2584 4. Hold the part upright, spray the application solution (20% Isopropyl alcohol, 80% water) on both sides of the part and on the vehicle in the area where the part is to be installed. Refer to the illustration above. 5. Hold the bottom tab and align the notch to the vehicle while using your fingers against the vehicle to steady the location. Refer to the arrow in the illustration above. 6. Lay the part on the door, the flatter the initial application the easier it is to remove the trapped air. Use the wheel arch as a guide for the application. 7. Hold the squeegee as shown in the illustration above. Using firm pressure in a downward motion, squeegee out the air bubbles starting at the top and moving along the wheel arch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 2585 8. Once the center has been adhered, squeegee from the center outward, using overlapping strokes. 9. Illustration A Illustration B Slowly pull the outer tab straight down starting at the top. Refer to illustration A above. Ensure that the protective film is not pulling away from the vehicle along with the film. Completely remove the remaining outer film with a "quick snap" in a downward motion. Refer to illustration B above. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 2586 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2587 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2588 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2589 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2595 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. ......................5,600 ohm per meter (1,707 ohm per ft) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2599 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Refer to the list below for items to be inspected. 1. Inspect for correct routing of the spark plug wires. Improper routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Inspect each wire for any signs of cracks or splits in the wire. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or terminal, both the wire and the component connected to the wire should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2600 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the left side spark plugs. NOTE: Twist the spark plug boot one-half turn in order to release the boot. Pull on the spark plug boot only. Do not pull on the spark plug wire or the wire could be damaged. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 4. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the right side spark plugs. 5. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 6. Remove the spark plug wires from the ignition coil/control module. 7. Remove the spark plug wires from the engine. 8. If you are replacing the spark plug wires, transfer any of the following components: - Boot heat shields - Spark plug wire conduit - Spark plug wire retaining clips Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2601 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the ignition coil/control module. 2. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the right side spark plugs. 3. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 4. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the left side spark plugs. 5. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 6. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 15 Nm (11.0 lb ft) Spark Plug Gap ................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 1.52 mm (0.060 in) NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2605 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type ................................................................................................................................................... GM P/N 12568387 (AC Delco # 41-101) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2606 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE - Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. - Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION - Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. - Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. - Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2607 - Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION - Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. - Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: Rich fuel mixtures Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. - Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2608 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Observe the following service precautions: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove spark plugs from a hot engine can cause the spark plugs to seize. This can damage the cylinder head threads. - Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so can result in engine damage due to dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or in contamination of the cylinder head threads. Contaminated threads may prevent proper seating of the new spark plug. - Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs (1) from the cylinder head. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Gap the spark plugs to the specifications. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. NOTE: It is important to check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. Pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round wire feeler gauge to be sure of an accurate check, particularly on used plugs. Installing plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 2. Install the spark plugs to the cylinder head. NOTE: Be sure plug threads smoothly into cylinder head and is fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean threads in cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat spark plug can cause overheating of plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Follow the recommended torque specifications carefully. Over or under-tightening can also cause severe damage to engine or spark plug. - Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2609 IMPORTANT: ONLY when the cylinder head is replaced with a NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Install the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2613 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves, and the head gasket. 1. Important: Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the ignition fuses from the I/P fuse block. Disable the ignition. 2. Disable the fuel systems. 3. Remove the spark plugs from all the cylinders. 4. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 5. Block the throttle plate in the open position. 6. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Firmly install the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 2. Have an assistant crank the engine through at least 4 compression strokes in the testing =cylinder. 3. Record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 4. Disconnect the gauge. 5. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 7. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. ^ The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. ^ No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). 8. The following list contains examples of the possible measurements: ^ When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression on each cylinder. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach the normal compression, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ If the compression improves considerably with the addition of three squirts of oil, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and does not build up in the following strokes, the valves may be the cause. ^ The addition of oil does not affect the compression, the valves may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on two adjacent cylinders, or coolant is present in the crankcase, the head gasket may be the cause. 9. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 10. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 11. Install the spark plugs. 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) fuse. 13. Install the ignition fuse to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Bolt ................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 11 Nm (98 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2617 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system until the coolant is below the level of the water pump. 2. Loosen the water pump pulley bolts (4). 3. Using the J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 4. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 5. Carefully release the J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 6. Remove the J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 7. Remove the water pump pulley bolts (2). 8. Remove the water pump pulley (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2618 9. Remove the water pump bolts (3). 10. Remove the water pump (1). 11. Remove the water pump gasket (2). 12. Clean the water pump mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the water pump gasket (2). 2. Install the water pump (1). 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the water pump bolts (3). ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2619 4. Install the water pump pulley (1). Loosely install the pulley bolts (2). 5. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler puller (3). 6. Using the J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 7. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 8. Carefully release the J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 9. Remove the J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 10. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1 - 8). 11. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 12. Fill the cooling system. 13. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 3. Remove the thermal bypass hose (1) from the thermal bypass fitting. 4. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the thermal bypass fitting. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the thermal bypass fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement > Page 2625 6. Remove the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). 7. Remove the thermal bypass fitting (1). 8. Remove the seal from the thermal bypass fitting. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal to the thermal bypass fitting. 2. Apply engine coolant to the thermal bypass fitting seal to ease installation. 3. Install the thermal bypass fitting (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermal bypass fitting bolt (2). ^ Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement > Page 2626 5. Install the heater outlet hose (2) to the thermal bypass fitting. 6. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the thermal bypass fitting. 7. Install the thermal bypass hose (1) to the thermal bypass fitting. 8. Position the thermal bypass pipe hose clamp (2) over the thermal bypass fitting. 9. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement > Page 2627 Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair Thermal Bypass Hose Replacement Thermal Bypass Hose Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the thermal bypass pipe hose clamps (2) away from the hose connections. 3. Remove thermal bypass hose (1). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the bypass hose in order to ease installation. 2. Install the thermal bypass pipe hose (1). 3. Position the thermal bypass pipe hose clamps (2) over the hose end connections. 4. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement > Page 2628 Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair Thermal Bypass Pipe Replacement Thermal Bypass Pipe Replacement ^ Tools Required J 21882 Oil Suction Pipe Installer Removal Procedure 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold. 3. Remove the thermal bypass hose. 4. Remove the thermal bypass pipe bolt. 5. Remove the thermal bypass pipe. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) or equivalent to the end of the thermal bypass pipe where the pipe is pressed into the intake manifold. 2. Install the thermal bypass pipe using J 21882. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermal bypass pipe bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermal Bypass Fitting Replacement > Page 2629 4. Install the thermal bypass hose. 5. Install the upper intake manifold. 6. Fill the engine with coolant. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-002B Date: January 18, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: DEX-COOL(R) Coolant - New Leak Detection Dye J 46366 - Replaces J 29545-6 Models: 1996-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light/Medium Duty Trucks* (including Saturn) 1997-2008 Isuzu T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models Built in Janesville and Flint 1999-2008 Isuzu N-Series Medium Duty Commercial Models with 5.7L or 6.0L Gas Engine 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X *EXCLUDING 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Epica, Optra, Vivant and Pontiac Matiz, Wave Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-002A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Leak detection dye P/N 12378563 (J 29545-6) (in Canada P/N 88900915) may cause DEX-COOL(R) coolant to appear green in a black vessel making it appear to be conventional (green) coolant. This may cause a technician to add conventional coolant to a low DEX-COOL(R) system thus contaminating it. The green DEX-COOL(R) appearance is caused by the color of the leak detection dye which alters the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. A new leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (J 46366) (in Canada P/N 89022220) has been released that does not alter the appearance of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. When adding the new leak detection dye the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant will not change. For detecting leaks on any system that uses DEX-COOL(R) leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (in Canada P/N 89022220) should be used. The new leak detection dye can be used with both conventional and DEX-COOL(R) coolant. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 2634 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 2635 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 2636 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 2637 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 10.6 quart (10.0 liter) NOTE: ALL capacity specifications are approximate. When replacing or adding fluids, fill to the recommended level and recheck fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2640 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL extended life coolant. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant will: ^ Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). ^ Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). ^ Protect against rust and corrosion. ^ Help keep the proper engine temperature. ^ Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. WHAT TO USE Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, check your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant, you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Coolant Line/Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2649 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2650 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2651 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Coolant Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2657 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2658 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2659 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Spare Tire Carrier: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Bulletin No.: 06-08-66-005A Date: September 13, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Rear of Vehicle (Replace Spare Tire Well) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information under Correction and Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-66-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise in the rear of the vehicle over rough roads. Correction Raise the vehicle. Inspect the sheet metal above the muffler for a sheet metal crack in the spare tire well. This crack will run left to right, just under the spare tire hold down bracket. Do not attempt to repair or reinforce the floor area around the spare tire hold-down bracket. It is recommended that the entire Panel, Spare Tire Well be replaced to maintain the integrity of the spare tire hold-down bracket Procedure Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear fascia, energy absorber, and impact bar. Remove the trailer hitch if equipped. Remove the exhaust. Open the rear hatch and remove the spare tire cover and cargo net. Remove the rear sill plate. Remove the rear seat. Remove the right and left door sill plate. Remove the right and left rear quarter trim. Remove the rear speakers. Pull the rear carpet forward. Move the rear harness. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the spare tire well area. Locate and drill out all the factory welds that attach the spare tire well. Note the number and location of the welds for the installation of the new part. Remove the damaged part. Drill out the welds around the perimeter of the spare tire well. Fit the new tire well in the vehicle. Mark the location of the welds. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 2665 Remove the panel and drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in all the marked locations on the new panel. Apply weld-thru coating to all mating surfaces. Position the new panel in the vehicle. Plug weld accordingly. Clean and prepare all welding surfaces. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials as necessary per the GM 4901M-D-2006 Approved Refinish Materials online at: Go to www.gmgoodwrench.com. Click on GM Parts & Accessories link. Click on GM Technical Repair Information. Click on Paint Shop. Refinish the inside using materials compliant to GM4901M standards. Clean the back side of the repair and apply an epoxy undercoat per GM4901-D-2006. Reinstall the rear harness. Reinstall the rear carpet forward. Reinstall the rear speakers. Reinstall the right and left rear quarter trim. Reinstall the right and left door sill plate. Reinstall the rear seat. Reinstall the rear sill plate. Reinstall the spare tire cover and cargo net. Reinstall the exhaust. Reinstall the trailer hitch if equipped. Reinstall the rear fascia. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 2666 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 2672 Remove the panel and drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in all the marked locations on the new panel. Apply weld-thru coating to all mating surfaces. Position the new panel in the vehicle. Plug weld accordingly. Clean and prepare all welding surfaces. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials as necessary per the GM 4901M-D-2006 Approved Refinish Materials online at: Go to www.gmgoodwrench.com. Click on GM Parts & Accessories link. Click on GM Technical Repair Information. Click on Paint Shop. Refinish the inside using materials compliant to GM4901M standards. Clean the back side of the repair and apply an epoxy undercoat per GM4901-D-2006. Reinstall the rear harness. Reinstall the rear carpet forward. Reinstall the rear speakers. Reinstall the right and left rear quarter trim. Reinstall the right and left door sill plate. Reinstall the rear seat. Reinstall the rear sill plate. Reinstall the spare tire cover and cargo net. Reinstall the exhaust. Reinstall the trailer hitch if equipped. Reinstall the rear fascia. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 2673 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (2). Installation Procedure 1. Apply engine coolant to the heater outlet hose in order to ease installation. 2. Install the heater outlet hose (2). 3. Install the heater outlet hose clamps (1). 4. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 2676 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Release and slide the heater core inlet hose clamp away from the heater inlet pipe connection. 3. Disconnect the heater core inlet hose from the heater inlet pipe. 4. Remove the heater inlet pipe nut (2). 5. Remove the heater inlet pipe (1). 6. Remove the seal (3) from the heater inlet pipe (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal (3) to the heater inlet pipe (1). 2. Apply engine coolant to the heater inlet pipe seal (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 2677 3. Install the heater outlet pipe (1). 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater inlet pipe nut (2). ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the heater core inlet hose to the heater inlet pipe. 6. Position the heater core inlet hose clamp over the heater inlet pipe connection. 7. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 2678 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Heater Pipe Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the air cleaner air intake duct. 4. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor bolt (3) and bracket (2). 5. Rotate the MAP sensor out of the way of the heater outlet pipe. 6. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) pipe from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 8. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical connector. 9. Release and slide the heater outlet hose clamp (1) away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 10. Disconnect the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 2679 11. Release and slide the heater core outlet hose clamp away from the heater outlet pipe connection. 12. Disconnect the heater core outlet hose from the heater outlet pipe. 13. Remove the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. 14. Remove the two nuts (3) and bolt (4) securing the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body. 15. Remove the heater outlet pipe (2) from the engine. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 2680 1. Install the heater outlet pipe (2) to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heater outlet pipe nut (1) securing the heater outlet pipe (2) to the intake manifold. ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the heater outlet pipe to the throttle body nuts (3) and bolt (4). ^ Tighten the nuts and bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the heater core outlet hose to the heater outlet pipe. 5. Position the heater core outlet hose clamp over the heater outlet pipe connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose Replacement - Outlet > Page 2681 6. Connect the heater outlet hose (2) to the heater outlet pipe. 7. Position the heater outlet hose clamp (1) over the heater outlet pipe connection. 8. Connect the electrical connector to the EGR valve. 9. Connect the electrical connector to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 10. Connect the EVAP pipe to the EVAP canister purge solenoid. 11. Reposition the MAP sensor. 12. Install the MAP sensor bracket (2) and bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 13. Install the air cleaner air intake duct. 14. Fill the cooling system. 15. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Surge Tank Replacement Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Surge Tank Replacement Surge Tank Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose from the engine. 6. Position the loose end of the heater inlet hose outboard to ease in the removal of the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2686 7. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 8. Disconnect the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 9. Remove the surge tank bolts from the surge tank. 10. Lift the surge tank to gain access to the heater outlet hose. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the surge tank. 13. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2687 1. Install the heater outlet hose to the surge tank. 2. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the surge tank bolts to the surge tank. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 5. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2688 6. Install the heater outlet hose to the engine. 7. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the engine. 8. Install the heater outlet hose to the heater core. 9. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 10. Fill the engine coolant. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2689 Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Surge Tank Hose/Pipe Replacement - Inlet Surge Tank Hose/Pipe Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 2. Remove the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 3. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the engine. 4. Remove the surge tank inlet hose from the engine. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2690 1. Install the surge tank inlet hose to the engine. 2. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the engine. 3. Install the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 4. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagrams Cooling Fan - Left Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2695 Cooling Fan - Right Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2696 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor Replacement - Electric Removal Procedure 1. Remove the cooling fan and shroud from the vehicle. 2. Important: The fan and motor assembly is a balanced assembly. Be sure to mark the relationship of the fan to the motor shaft to ensure the balance is maintained. Place a scribe mark (3) on the fan (2) hub and the motor shaft (1). 3. Remove the fan retaining clip (1) from the motor shaft (2). 4. Discard fan retaining clip (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2697 5. Remove the fan (1) from the motor (2). 6. Remove the fan motor screws from the fan shroud. 7. Remove the fan motor from the fan shroud. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fan motor to the fan shroud. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2698 Install the fan motor screws to the fan shroud. ^ Tighten the screws to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Install the fan (1) to the motor (2). 4. Align the scribe marks (3) previously made on the fan (2) hub and the motor shaft (1). 5. Important: Ensure that the scribe marks remain aligned during fan retaining clip (1) installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2699 Install a new fan retaining clip (1) to the motor shaft (2). Ensure the retaining clip (1) is fully seated. 6. Install the cooling fan and shroud to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Component Locations Engine Cooling System Components Cooling System Component Views 1 - Cooling Fan - Left 2 - Cooling Fan - Right 3 - Cooling Fan S/P Relay 4 - Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2704 Front Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2705 Cooling Fan S/P Relay Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2710 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2711 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2712 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2713 Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Cooling Fan and Shroud Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Drain the coolant. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the fan motors. 4. Unclip the wire harness from the fan assembly. 5. Remove the condenser radiator fan module (CRFM) closeout panel retainers from the condenser. 6. Remove the CRFM closeout panel from the condenser. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2717 7. Remove the CRFM mounting bracket bolts from the radiator support. 8. Remove the CRFM mounting brackets from the radiator support. 9. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 10. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. 11. Disconnect the upper transmission cooler line from the radiator. 12. Unclip the transmission cooler lines from the fan assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2718 13. Lift the CRFM assembly from the lower mounts and carefully move the bottom of the assembly rearward while tilting the top forward. 14. Remove the fan assembly bolts from the radiator. 15. Remove the fan assembly from the radiator. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fan assembly to the radiator by guiding the lower tabs into the corresponding hooks on the radiator. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2719 Install the fan assembly bolts to the radiator. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Position the CRFM assembly onto the lower mounts. 4. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. 5. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. 6. Clip the transmission cooler lines to the fan assembly. 7. Connect the upper transmission cooler line to the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2720 8. Install the CRFM mounting brackets to the radiator support. 9. Install the CRFM mounting bracket bolts to the radiator support. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 10. Install the CRFM closeout panel to the condenser. 11. Install the CRFM closeout panel retainers to the condenser. 12. Clip the transmission cooler lines to the fan assembly. 13. Clip the engine wire harness to fan assembly. 14. Notice: Refer to Compressor Hose Clearance to the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Pipe Notice in Service Precautions. Install the electrical connectors to the fan motors. 15. Install the front fascia. 16. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 2725 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 2726 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2727 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the heater core. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose from the heater core. 6. Remove the instrument panel retainer. 7. Remove the shift control. 8. Remove the heater duct screws. 9. Remove the heater duct. 10. Remove the heater core cover screws. 11. Remove the heater core cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2728 12. Remove the heater core pipe cover screw. 13. Remove the heater core pipe cover. 14. Remove the heater core pipe foam seal. 15. Grasp the heater core at end tanks and remove heater core. Spray the perimeter of the heater core seal and the heater core pipes at the front of dash with a soap and water mixture to ease removal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the heater core. Spray the perimeter of the heater core seal and the heater core pipes at the front of dash with a soap and water mixture to ease installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2729 2. Install the heater core pipe seal. 3. Install the heater core pipe cover. 4. Install the heater core pipe cover screw. Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Spray the front of dash seal at the drain tube opening to aid in heater core cover installation. 6. Install the heater core cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2730 7. Install the heater core cover screws. Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 8. Install the heater duct. 9. Install the heater duct screws. Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 10. Install the instrument panel retainer. 11. Install the shift control bracket. 12. Install the heater inlet hose to the heater core. 13. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 14. Install the heater outlet hose to the heater core. 15. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 16. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Heater Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2739 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2740 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2741 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2747 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2748 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2749 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Hose - Inlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - INLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater inlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose from the engine. 6. Remove the heater inlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 2752 1. Install the heater inlet hose to the vehicle. 2. Install the heater inlet hose to the engine. 3. Install the heater inlet hose hose to the engine. 4. Install the heater inlet hose to the heater core. 5. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 6. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 2753 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Hose - Outlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose from the engine. 6. Position the loose end of the heater inlet hose outboard to ease in the removal of the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 2754 7. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 8. Disconnect the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 9. Remove the surge tank bolts from the surge tank. 10. Lift the surge tank to gain access to the heater outlet hose. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the surge tank. 13. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. 14. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the hose. This will aid in routing the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. 15. Remove the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 2755 1. Install the heater outlet hose to the vehicle. Route the hose into position for attachment to the surge tank. 2. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the hose. 3. Install the heater outlet hose to the surge tank. 4. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. 5. Install the surge tank bolts to the surge tank. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Connect the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 7. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 2756 8. Install the heater outlet hose to the engine. 9. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the engine. 10. Install the heater outlet hose to the heater core. 11. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 12. Fill the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Radiator Drain Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Drain Plug: Service and Repair Drain Cock Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Be sure the surge tank cap is installed when performing this procedure. A small amount of coolant will drain if the cap is installed, but if the cap is removed, the entire cooling system will drain. Unscrew the drain plug from the radiator end tank. Then using a flat-bladed tool, gently pry the plug from the end tank. Installation Procedure Install the drain plug into the end tank drain hole by snapping into place. Tighten using a flat-bladed tool. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Radiator Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2769 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2770 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2771 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Radiator Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2777 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2778 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 2779 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the coolant. 2. Remove the upper fascia retainers from the radiator support. 3. Remove the upper radiator bracket bolt from the radiator support. 4. Remove the upper radiator bracket from the radiator. 5. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 6. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 2782 7. Remove the radiator inlet hose clamp from the engine. 8. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator inlet hose to the engine. 2. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the engine. 3. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 2783 4. Install the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. 5. Install the upper radiator bracket to the radiator. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the upper radiator bracket bolt to the radiator support. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 7. Install the upper fascia retainers to the radiator support. 8. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 2784 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet Removal Procedure 1. Drain the coolant. 2. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the engine. 3. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the engine. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the radiator. 6. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the radiator. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 2785 1. Install the radiator outlet hose to the radiator. 2. Install the radiator outlet hose clamp to the radiator. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Install the radiator outlet hose to the engine. 5. Install the radiator outlet hose clamp to the engine. 6. Fill the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Component Locations Engine Cooling System Components Cooling System Component Views 1 - Cooling Fan - Left 2 - Cooling Fan - Right 3 - Cooling Fan S/P Relay 4 - Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2791 Front Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2792 Cooling Fan S/P Relay Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2798 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2799 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2800 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2801 Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Full Open Temperature .................................................................................................... ............................................................... 91°C (195°F) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2805 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Drain the coolant until the coolant level is below the thermostat. 3. Remove the crossover exhaust pipe. 4. Remove the radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the thermostat housing bolts (2) and clean any sealer from the bolt threads. 6. Remove the thermostat housing (1). 7. Remove the thermostat (3). 8. Clean the mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the thermostat (3). 2. Install the thermostat housing (1). 3. Install RTV sealer, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or the equivalent, to the thermostat housing bolt threads. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermostat housing bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the radiator hose to the thermostat housing. 6. Install the crossover exhaust pipe. 7. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2806 8. Fill the cooling system. 9. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermostat Housing Replacement Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Thermostat Housing Replacement Thermostat Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Drain the coolant until the coolant level is below the thermostat. 3. Remove the crossover exhaust pipe. 4. Remove the radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Remove the thermostat housing bolts (2) and clean any sealer from the bolt threads. 6. Remove the thermostat housing (1). 7. Remove the thermostat (3). 8. Clean the mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the thermostat (3). 2. Install the thermostat housing (1). 3. Install RTV sealer, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or the equivalent, to the thermostat housing bolt threads. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the thermostat housing bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the radiator hose to the thermostat housing. 6. Install the crossover exhaust pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermostat Housing Replacement > Page 2811 7. Install the fuel injector sight shield. 8. Fill the cooling system. 9. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Thermostat Housing Replacement > Page 2812 Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Water Outlet and Thermostat Removal Water Outlet and Thermostat Removal 1. Remove the water outlet bolts. 2. Remove the water outlet. 3. Remove the thermostat. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Bolt ................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 11 Nm (98 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2816 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement ^ Tools Required J 39914 Serpentine Belt Tensioner Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system until the coolant is below the level of the water pump. 2. Loosen the water pump pulley bolts (4). 3. Using the J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner (8) to release the tension on the drive belt. 4. Remove the drive belt from the right idler pulley (2). 5. Carefully release the J 39914 to relieve the drive belt tensioner spring tension. 6. Remove the J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 7. Remove the water pump pulley bolts (2). 8. Remove the water pump pulley (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2817 9. Remove the water pump bolts (3). 10. Remove the water pump (1). 11. Remove the water pump gasket (2). 12. Clean the water pump mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the water pump gasket (2). 2. Install the water pump (1). 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the water pump bolts (3). ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2818 4. Install the water pump pulley (1). Loosely install the pulley bolts (2). 5. Insure the drive belt is properly centered on all the pulleys except the right idler puller (3). 6. Using the J 39914 rotate the drive belt tensioner away from the drive belt. 7. Install the drive belt to the right idler pulley (2). 8. Carefully release the J 39914 allowing the drive belt tensioner (8) to come in contact with the drive belt. 9. Remove the J 39914 from the drive belt tensioner (8). 10. Inspect the drive belt to insure the belt is properly centered on all the pulleys (1 - 8). 11. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 12. Fill the cooling system. 13. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Bulletin No.: 06-06-01-010A Date: February 04, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Close-Coupled Converter and Engine Breakdown or Non-Function Due to Severe Overheat or Lack of Oil Causing Piston(s) Connecting Rod(s) Crankshaft Cylinder(s) and/or Head(s) Camshaft(s) Intake and/or Exhaust Valve(s) Main and/or Rod Bearing(s) Damage Models: 2004-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks with Close-Coupled Catalytic Converters Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-01-010 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Certain 2004-2008 General Motors products may be equipped with a new style of catalytic converter technically known as the close-coupled catalytic converter providing quick catalyst warm-up resulting in lower tail pipe emissions earlier in the vehicle operating cycle. If an engine breakdown or non-function were to occur (such as broken intake/exhaust valve or piston) debris may be deposited in the converter through engine exhaust ports. If the engine is non-functioning due to a severe overheat event damage to the ceramic "brick" internal to the catalytic converter may occur. This may result in ceramic debris being drawn into the engine through the cylinder head exhaust ports. If a replacement engine is installed in either of these instances the replacement engine may fail due to the debris being introduced into the combustion chambers when started. When replacing an engine for a breakdown or non-function an inspection of the catalytic converters and ALL transferred components (such as exhaust/ intake manifolds) should be performed. Any debris found should be removed. In cases of engine failure due to severe overheat dealers should also inspect each catalytic converter for signs of melting or cracking of the ceramic "brick". If damage is observed the converter should be replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2824 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) connector (2) from the wiring harness (3). 3. Remove the catalytic converter pipe flange to exhaust system pipe flange nuts. 4. Separate the pipes and discard the gasket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2825 5. Important: Catalytic converter flex coupler must NEVER be deflected more than 6 degrees or failure of flex coupler could result. Remove the nuts (3) securing the catalytic converter (4) to the exhaust manifold. 6. Separate the catalytic converter flange from the exhaust manifold and discard the gasket (2). 7. Separate the catalytic converter hanger from the rubber isolator and remove the catalytic converter from the vehicle. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold studs (1) if worn or damaged. 9. If replacing the catalytic converter, remove the HO2S. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2826 1. Install the HO2S, if previously removed. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the exhaust manifold studs (1) if previously removed. ^ Tighten the studs to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 3. Install the rubber isolator and to the catalytic converter hanger. 4. Notice: To prevent internal damage to the flexible coupling of the catalytic converter assembly, the converter must be supported. The vertical movement at the rear of the catalytic converter assembly must not exceed 6 degrees up or down. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2827 Install a new gasket (2) and attach the catalytic converter (4) to the exhaust manifold. 5. Install the catalytic converter to the exhaust manifold nuts (3). ^ Tighten the nuts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 6. Install a new exhaust pipe flange gasket to the catalytic converter flange. 7. Install the exhaust pipe to the catalytic converter pipe. with the catalytic converter nuts. 8. Install the exhaust pipe to the catalytic converter pipe. ^ Tighten the nuts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 9. Connect the HO2S connector (2) to the wiring harness (3). 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Crossover Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Crossover Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Crossover Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery box. 2. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe nuts (2). 3. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe (3). 4. Remove the exhaust manifold studs (1), if replacement of the stud is necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install any previously removed exhaust manifold studs (1). ^ Tighten the studs to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the exhaust crossover pipe (3). 3. Important: Maintain approximately 6.35 mm (0.25 inch) between the thermostat housing and the exhaust crossover pipe. Install the exhaust crossover pipe nuts (2). ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the battery box. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Specifications Exhaust Manifold Nut .......................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Exhaust Manifold Stud .................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Remove the 3 nuts attaching the exhaust crossover pipe to the left exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe. 3. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (2). 4. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield (1). 5. Remove the exhaust manifold nuts (3). 6. Remove the exhaust manifold (2). 7. Remove the exhaust manifold gasket (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left > Page 2836 8. If necessary, remove the exhaust manifold studs. 9. Clean the exhaust manifold and the cylinder head exhaust manifold sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. If previously removed, install the exhaust manifold studs. ^ Tighten the studs to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left > Page 2837 2. Install the exhaust manifold gasket (1). 3. Install the exhaust manifold (2). 4. Install the exhaust manifold nuts (3). ^ Tighten the nuts to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield (1). 6. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 7. Install the EGR pipe. 8. Install the 3 nuts attaching the exhaust crossover pipe to the left exhaust manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left > Page 2838 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the oxygen sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 3 nuts attaching exhaust crossover pipe to the right exhaust manifold. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nuts (3) securing the catalytic converter (4) to the exhaust manifold and position catalytic converter out of the way. 5. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (3). 6. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shields (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left > Page 2839 7. Remove the exhaust manifold nuts (3). 8. Remove the exhaust manifold (2). 9. Remove the exhaust manifold gasket (1). 10. If you are REPLACING the engine right side exhaust manifold, remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). 11. If necessary, remove the exhaust manifold studs. 12. Clean the exhaust manifold and the cylinder head exhaust manifold sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left > Page 2840 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. If previously removed, install the exhaust manifold studs. ^ Tighten the studs to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 2. If removed, install the HO2S. 3. Install the exhaust manifold gasket (1). 4. Install the exhaust manifold (2). 5. Install the exhaust manifold nuts (3). ^ Tighten the nuts to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the exhaust manifold upper heat shield (1). 7. Install the exhaust manifold lower heat shield (2). 8. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (3). ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left > Page 2841 9. Install the catalytic converter (4) to the exhaust manifold and install the nuts (3). 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Install the exhaust crossover pipe nuts to the right side exhaust manifold. 12. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left > Page 2842 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Left 1. Remove the heat shield bolts (3). 2. Remove the heat shield (2) from the exhaust manifold. Installation Procedure 1. Install the heat shield (1) to the exhaust manifold. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heat shield bolts to the exhaust manifold. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left > Page 2843 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Right Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Replacement - Right 1. Remove the heat shield bolts (3). 2. Remove the lower heat shield (2) from the exhaust manifold. 3. Remove the upper heat shield (1) from the exhaust manifold. Installation Procedure 1. Install the upper heat shield (1) to the exhaust manifold. 2. Install the lower heat shield (2) to the exhaust manifold. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the heat shield bolts to the exhaust manifold. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement Heat Shield: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Remove the fuel tank shield from the fuel tank. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fuel tank shield to the fuel tank. 2. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement > Page 2848 Heat Shield: Service and Repair Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Front Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the catalytic converter. 3. Important: The front and rear heat shields overlap and utilize common rivet attachment points. Remove the nut and rivets. 4. Remove the heat shield. Installation Procedure 1. Position the shield to the vehicle, aligning the front hole stud. Place the rear of the shield under the rear shield and against the underbody. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the nut and tighten. ^ Tighten the heat shield-to-underbody nut to 10 Nm (89 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rivets. 4. Install the catalytic converter. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement > Page 2849 Heat Shield: Service and Repair Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center Exhaust Heat Shield Replacement - Center Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the exhaust system. 3. If vehicle is equipped with all wheel drive (AWD) remove the propeller shaft underbody guard loop bolts and guard loop. 4. Important: Support the fuel tank before removing the fuel tank strap bolt. Remove the fuel tank strap bolt, which also fastens the rear of the center heat shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement > Page 2850 5. Important: The front and rear heat shields overlap and utilize common rivet attachment points. Remove the rivets. 6. Remove the shield. Installation Procedure 1. Position the shield to the vehicle, aligning the front rivet locations which are common attachment points with the front heat shield. 2. Install the rivets 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Heat Shield Replacement > Page 2851 Install the fuel tank strap bolt and tighten. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. If vehicle is equipped with AWD install the propeller shaft underbody guard loop and bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the exhaust system. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 2863 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 2864 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 2870 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 2871 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Bulletin No.: 04-08-47-001 Date: March 02, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: BCM, PSCM and On-Star DTC's B1372, B1377, B1382, U10001, U1016, U1096, U1064, C0000, U1500 Stored in History Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician of DTCs that may be stored in history for the Body Control Module (BCM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and/or On-Star Module. The DTCs shown will not affect functionality of the vehicle and will not turn on the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) light. Diagnostics and/or repairs for any other DTCs that may be set should be made based on the appropriate Strategy Based Diagnostic information found in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's > Page 2876 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 2882 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 2883 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 2889 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 2890 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2891 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2894 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2895 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2896 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2897 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2898 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2899 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2900 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2901 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2902 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2903 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2904 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2905 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2906 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2907 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2908 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2909 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2910 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2911 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2912 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2913 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2914 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2915 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2916 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2917 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2918 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2919 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2920 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2921 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2922 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2923 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2924 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2925 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2926 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2927 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2928 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2929 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2930 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2931 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2932 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2933 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2934 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2935 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2936 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2937 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2938 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2939 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2940 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2941 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2942 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2943 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2944 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2945 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2946 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2947 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2948 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2949 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2950 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2951 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2952 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2953 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2954 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2955 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2956 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: - The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2957 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2958 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2959 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2960 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2961 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2962 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2963 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2964 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2965 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2966 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2967 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2968 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2969 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2970 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2971 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2972 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2973 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2974 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2975 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2976 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2979 The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2980 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The communication among modules is performed through the class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time communication are attached to the high speed GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the networks. The purpose of the gateway is to transfer information from one network to another. The gateway will interact with each network according to that network's transmission model. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for more information about the gateway. GMLAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500 Kbps. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohm resistors, one is internal to the ECM and the other is internal to the BCM. The resistors are used to reduce noise on the high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level which is approximately 2.5 volts is considered a recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to their extremes adds 1 volt to high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts 1 volt from high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. This dominant state is interpreted as a logic 0. GMLAN network management supports selective start up and is based on virtual networks. A virtual network is a collection of signals started in response to a vehicle event. The starting of a virtual network signifies that a particular aspect of the vehicles's functionality has been requested. A virtual network is supported by virtual devices which represents a collection of signals owned by a single physical device. So, any physical device can have one or more virtual devices. The signal supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not. Failsofting is the ability to substitute a signal with a default value or a default algorithm, in the absence of a valid signal. Some messages are also interpreted as a "heartbeat" of a virtual device. If such a signal is lost, the application will set a no communication code against the respective virtual device. This code is mapped on the Tech 2 screen as a code against the physical device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The interaction between high speed GMLAN and class 2 is assured by BCM, which is the gateway. Any message from the class 2 modules to the high speed GMLAN modules is translated by BCM without carrying the original transmitter ID. Therefore the GMLAN modules consider the BCM as being the originator of all class 2 messages that they receive. CLASS 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the class 2 serial data circuit. Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 Kbps. The bus is active at 7.0 volts nominal and inactive at ground potential. Each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the body control module (BCM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1064. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The BCM emulates the GMLAN modules on the class 2, embedding the original transmitter ID in GMLAN messages to class 2. Therefore the class 2 modules can set specific non communications DTCs against GMLAN modules. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 signal at terminal 2 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) at terminal 6 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) at terminal 14 GMLAN SERIAL DATA LINE The GMLAN serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a linear topology. The following modules are connected to the link, in order from DLC to the end of the linear configuration: The body control module (BCM) - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The transmission control module (TCM) - The engine control module (ECM) VCIM communicates functionally and physically on class 2 only. The high speed GMLAN circuits just pass through the module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2981 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a star configuration. The star has one splice pack, located nearby the DLC. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: The body control module (BCM) - The digital radio receiver (DRR) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The power steering control module (PSCM) - The radio - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2982 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2985 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2986 Steps 1 - 6 Steps 1 - 6 Power Mode Mismatch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2987 POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The body control module (BCM) is the power mode master responsible for sending the power mode message on the data buses. The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run) and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) in order to determine the present power mode. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1 - 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2988 Steps 8 - 14 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 6. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 7. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 8. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 9. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2989 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS Battery 1: The scan tool displays 0-25.5 volts. The state of the battery voltage supplied to the body control module (BCM). Driver Door Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the driver door switch. Ignition 1 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 1 Run/Crank input to the BCM. Ignition 2 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 2 Acc/Run input to the BCM. Ignition 3 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 3 Run input to the BCM. Key In Ignition: The scan tool displays Yes/No. The BCM receives an input from the ignition switch indicating whether the key is in the ignition or not, with Yes meaning the key is in the ignition. Liftgate Ajar Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the liftgate switch. Pass Door Switches: The scan tool displays the status of the passenger doors switches. Scan Tool Data List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION The procedures below are designed to set-up the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: 1. Programming the BCM. 2. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components. 3. Program Key Fobs Programming the BCM IMPORTANT: The BCM can be programmed using only Pass-Thru procedure. - After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Pass-Thru programming allows the scan tool to remain connected to the terminal and to the vehicle throughout the programming process. The vehicle must be in close proximity to the terminal while using Pass-Thru. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup for more information. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the PASSLOCK system. - The engine will not crank or start. Program Key Fobs Refer to Transmitter Programming in Keyless Entry for the proper procedure. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2992 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2996 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2997 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Technical Service Bulletin # 05539A Date: 050427 Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Product Emission - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage-Replace PCM # 05539A - (Apr 27, 2005) Models: 2005 CHEVROLET MALIBU, UPLANDER, EQUINOX, CLASSIC, SILVERADO 2005 GMC SIERRA 2005 PONTIAC SUNFIRE, GRAND AM, G6, GRAND PRIX, MONTANA SV6 2005 BUICK LACROSSE / ALLURLE, TERRAZA 2005 SATURN RELAY 2006 PONTIAC G6 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD 2005 AND 2006 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES TO THE RECALL. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 05539. Condition General Motors has decided to conduct a Voluntary Emission Recall involving certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6. Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles. The Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM/ECM) in these vehicles may have been manufactured with damaged internal IC chips, which may affect the Fuel Pump Control and EGR outputs of the PCM; or the Fuel Pump Control and Variable Nozzle Turbo Control (VNTC) outputs of the Diesel ECM. Customers may experience illumination of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or driveability complaints. Correction Dealers are to replace the Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM / ECM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6, Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles and built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: GM Dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning recall repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3006 Important: Saturn U.S. retailers must verify recall involvement by running a National Vehicle History (NVH) prior to performing repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Recall claims will only be paid on involved vehicles. For US and Canada For GM dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report (CIDR) containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld (US) Recall Information, GMinfoNet (Canada) Recall Reports. For U.S. Saturn Retailers only, the involved vehicles are provided in a Facility VIN List attachment to the Saturn Bulletin, located on DealerWorld. Dealers/Retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. For Export For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers will not receive a report with the recall bulletin if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Parts required to complete this recall are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" prior to ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. An emergency requirement should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Parts Information (Saturn US Only) A pre-shipment of the required parts to perform this program has been sent to involved Saturn U.S. retailers from Saturn Service Parts Operations (SSPO). Service Procedure Important: The labor time allowance listed in this recall is different than that currently published in the labor time guide for performing the same operation. In the near future, the labor time guide will be updated with this new information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3007 Prep the vehicle for PCM / ECM replacement. Refer to PCM / ECM replacement in the appropriate vehicle SI service manual and replace the PCM / ECM. The SI document numbers are shown for your reference. CALIFORNIA, MASSACHUSETTS, MAIN, VERMONT VEHICLES ONLY: Install a Recall Identification Label. Also, for California vehicles complete a "Proof Of Correction" certificate upon recall completion. Recall Identification Label -- California, Massachusetts, Maine & Vermont Vehicles Only Place a Recall Identification Label on each vehicle corrected in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Recall Bulletin. Each label provides a space to include the recall number and the five-digit dealer code of the dealer performing the recall service. This information may be inserted with a typewriter or a ballpoint pen. Put the Recall Identification Label on a clean and dry surface of the radiator core support in an area that will be visible to people servicing the vehicle. When installing the Recall Identification Label, be sure to pull the tab to allow adhesion of the clear protective covering. Important: (GM Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels for US dealers can be obtained from Dealer Support Materials. Request Item Number S-1015 when ordering. Important: (Saturn U.S. Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels may be ordered from Saturn publications. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada (GM Only) The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3008 Claim Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Claim Information (Saturn US Only) Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3009 Customer Notification -- For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the sample letter. In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Dealer Recall Responsibility -- All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is shown in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. * * *THE FOLLOWING 2 PARAGRAPHS ARE NOT FOR CANADA OR EXPORT* * * When a California emissions recall is completed by a GM dealer, the dealer must provide the vehicle owner a "Proof Of Correction Certificate" which the owner may need to present to the California Department Of Motor Vehicles (DMV) when renewing their vehicle registration. Without this correction certificate, the owner may be unable to renew their vehicle registration. Additional Certificates can be obtained, at no charge, from Dealer Support Materials. Ask for GM Item Number 1825 when ordering. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3010 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3011 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3012 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3018 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Technical Service Bulletin # 05539A Date: 050427 Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Product Emission - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage-Replace PCM # 05539A - (Apr 27, 2005) Models: 2005 CHEVROLET MALIBU, UPLANDER, EQUINOX, CLASSIC, SILVERADO 2005 GMC SIERRA 2005 PONTIAC SUNFIRE, GRAND AM, G6, GRAND PRIX, MONTANA SV6 2005 BUICK LACROSSE / ALLURLE, TERRAZA 2005 SATURN RELAY 2006 PONTIAC G6 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD 2005 AND 2006 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES TO THE RECALL. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 05539. Condition General Motors has decided to conduct a Voluntary Emission Recall involving certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6. Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles. The Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM/ECM) in these vehicles may have been manufactured with damaged internal IC chips, which may affect the Fuel Pump Control and EGR outputs of the PCM; or the Fuel Pump Control and Variable Nozzle Turbo Control (VNTC) outputs of the Diesel ECM. Customers may experience illumination of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or driveability complaints. Correction Dealers are to replace the Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM / ECM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6, Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles and built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: GM Dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning recall repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3027 Important: Saturn U.S. retailers must verify recall involvement by running a National Vehicle History (NVH) prior to performing repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Recall claims will only be paid on involved vehicles. For US and Canada For GM dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report (CIDR) containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld (US) Recall Information, GMinfoNet (Canada) Recall Reports. For U.S. Saturn Retailers only, the involved vehicles are provided in a Facility VIN List attachment to the Saturn Bulletin, located on DealerWorld. Dealers/Retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. For Export For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers will not receive a report with the recall bulletin if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Parts required to complete this recall are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" prior to ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. An emergency requirement should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Parts Information (Saturn US Only) A pre-shipment of the required parts to perform this program has been sent to involved Saturn U.S. retailers from Saturn Service Parts Operations (SSPO). Service Procedure Important: The labor time allowance listed in this recall is different than that currently published in the labor time guide for performing the same operation. In the near future, the labor time guide will be updated with this new information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3028 Prep the vehicle for PCM / ECM replacement. Refer to PCM / ECM replacement in the appropriate vehicle SI service manual and replace the PCM / ECM. The SI document numbers are shown for your reference. CALIFORNIA, MASSACHUSETTS, MAIN, VERMONT VEHICLES ONLY: Install a Recall Identification Label. Also, for California vehicles complete a "Proof Of Correction" certificate upon recall completion. Recall Identification Label -- California, Massachusetts, Maine & Vermont Vehicles Only Place a Recall Identification Label on each vehicle corrected in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Recall Bulletin. Each label provides a space to include the recall number and the five-digit dealer code of the dealer performing the recall service. This information may be inserted with a typewriter or a ballpoint pen. Put the Recall Identification Label on a clean and dry surface of the radiator core support in an area that will be visible to people servicing the vehicle. When installing the Recall Identification Label, be sure to pull the tab to allow adhesion of the clear protective covering. Important: (GM Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels for US dealers can be obtained from Dealer Support Materials. Request Item Number S-1015 when ordering. Important: (Saturn U.S. Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels may be ordered from Saturn publications. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada (GM Only) The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3029 Claim Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Claim Information (Saturn US Only) Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3030 Customer Notification -- For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the sample letter. In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Dealer Recall Responsibility -- All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is shown in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. * * *THE FOLLOWING 2 PARAGRAPHS ARE NOT FOR CANADA OR EXPORT* * * When a California emissions recall is completed by a GM dealer, the dealer must provide the vehicle owner a "Proof Of Correction Certificate" which the owner may need to present to the California Department Of Motor Vehicles (DMV) when renewing their vehicle registration. Without this correction certificate, the owner may be unable to renew their vehicle registration. Additional Certificates can be obtained, at no charge, from Dealer Support Materials. Ask for GM Item Number 1825 when ordering. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3031 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3032 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3033 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-03-10-014 > Oct > 05 > Wheels - Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-03-10-014 > Oct > 05 > Wheels - Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification > Page 3039 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3044 LF Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3047 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3048 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3049 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3050 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3051 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) (1) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The PCM is in the engine compartment. The PCM is the control center of the engine controls system. The PCM controls the following components: - The fuel injection system - The ignition system - The emission control systems - The on-board diagnostics - The A/C and fan systems - The throttle actuation control (TAC) system The PCM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the PCM detects a malfunction, it stores a DTC. The condition is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. PCM Function The powertrain control module (PCM) can supply 5 volts or 12 volts to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the control module. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 megaohms input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The PCM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3054 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. PCM Service Precautions The powertrain control module (PCM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: Hydrocarbons (HC) - Carbon monoxide (CO) - Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) - Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system, powertrain control module (PCM), detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the PCM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment NOTE: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. - Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3055 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage IMPORTANT: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the control module, DO NOT touch the connector pins on the control module. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the effect of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection IMPORTANT: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. - Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. - Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Basic Knowledge Required NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in incorrect diagnostic performance or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary in order to effectively use this section. You must be familiar with some of the basics of engine operation and electrical diagnosis in order to use this section. - Basic electrical circuits-You should have an understanding of basic electricity and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire, and you should be able to identify a shorted or open circuit by using a DMM. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram. - Use of digital multimeter-You should be familiar with the DMM, particularly the essential tool. You should be able to use the meter in order to measure the voltage (volts), the resistance (ohms), the current (amps), intermittents (min/max), and frequency (Hertz). - Use of circuit testing tools-You should not use a test lamp to diagnose the engine controls system unless you are specifically instructed to do so. You should know how to the use jumper wires in order to test the components and allow the DMM readings without damaging the terminals. You should know how to use the J 35616-B connector test adapter kit and use the kit whenever the diagnostic procedures call for front probing any connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3056 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Ignition (EI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The powertrain control module (PCM) controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensor (KS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3057 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (Tac) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3058 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. Record the remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. IMPORTANT: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. - It is necessary to record the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid will need to be changed at 83000 km (50,000 mi) from the last automatic transmission fluid change. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) (1) and PCM bracket (2) from the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3059 3. Remove the PCM bracket (2) from the PCM (1). 4. Disconnect the PCM wire harness (4) from the battery box cover. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the PCM connectors (2) from the PCM (3). 7. Remove the PCM (3) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the PCM (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the PCM connectors (2) to the PCM (3). 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3060 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (4) to the battery box cover. 5. Install the PCM bracket (2) to the PCM (1). 6. Install the PCM bracket (1) to the battery box cover. 7. Reprogram the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ignition Control Module: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3065 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3066 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3067 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils mounted to the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the IC control circuit of the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 3070 Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 3071 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Control Module Bracket Replacement IGNITION CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 3. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (1) from the ignition control module bracket. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Position the ignition coil/control module aside out of the way. 6. Remove the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve fresh air tube retainer. 7. Remove the engine wire harness retainers from the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 8. Remove the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 3072 9. Lift pipe up slightly to gain access for the removal of the 2 ignition control module bracket bolts. 10. Remove the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). 11. Remove the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). 12. Remove the ignition control module bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 3073 3. Install the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Tighten Tighten the nut to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the engine wire harness retainers to the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 6. Install the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and PCV valve fresh air tube retainer. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 8. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wire retainer (1) to the ignition control module bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 3074 10. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 11. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection IGNITION RELAY DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ignition relay is normally an open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. When the ignition switch is turned to the Run or Start position, current will flow through the relay coil. A wire connected to the other end of the relay coil completes the path to ground. The electromagnetic field created by the relay coil overcomes the spring tension and moves the armature, allowing the relay contacts to close. The closed relay contacts allow current to flow from the battery to the following fuses: The Eng Controls fuse - The Fuel INJ fuse - The Elec Eng fuse - The O2 Sensors fuse - The Trans Sol fuse - The ABS fuse - The AWD fuse When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, the electromagnetic field collapses. This action allows the spring tension to move the armature away from the relay contacts, which interrupts current flow to the fuses. If the ignition relay fails to close, the engine will crank but will not run. The class 2 communications will be available with the use of a scan tool. The ignition relay table assumes that the vehicle battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test in Starting and Charging. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3078 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3079 Steps 8-18 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3080 Steps 19-28 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3081 Steps 29-37 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3082 Steps 38-44 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3088 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3089 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3090 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3091 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3095 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3098 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3099 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3105 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3106 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3110 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3111 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3112 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3113 Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3117 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3120 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 3. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF.Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool and perform the following: - Accelerate to WOT. - Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 7. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 3123 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 3124 Tighten Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3128 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the CAN serial data to the body control module (BCM). The instrument panel cluster (IPC) displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - PRIMARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: NEW fuel tank module seals are necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain NEW seals for both the primary and secondary modules prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector from the underside of the top of the pump module. 4. Release the retaining tabs (1, 2) and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3131 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place (1, 2). 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3132 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Secondary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - SECONDARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: A NEW fuel tank module seal is necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain a NEW seal prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 4. Release the retaining tabs and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3133 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place. 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3137 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. As FTP increases, FTP sensor voltage decreases, high pressure, = low voltage. As FTP decreases, FTP sensor voltage increases low pressure or vacuum = high voltage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3138 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump module harness electrical connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Position 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers, one on each side of the sensor, near the vacuum port. 4. Carefully use the screwdrivers to lift and release the sensor from the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3139 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor to the fuel pump module assembly. Ensure that the sensor grommet is fully seated to the pump module. 2. Connect the pump module electrical connector to the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3143 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3144 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3148 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3149 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3150 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3153 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3154 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3155 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3159 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3160 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3161 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure which gives an indication of the engine load. The MAP sensor has a 5-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit and provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit, which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. With low MAP, such as during idle or deceleration, the PCM should detect a low MAP sensor signal voltage. With high MAP, such as ignition ON, engine OFF or wide open throttle (WOT), the PCM should detect a high MAP sensor signal voltage. The MAP sensor is also used in order to calculate the barometric pressure (BARO) when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively low, DTC P0107 sets. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively high DTC P0108 sets. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Poor idle characteristics may be caused by uncontrolled fueling due to an open or high resistance in the HO2S 1 low signal circuit. Before replacing any component, ensure that this condition does not exist. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3162 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3163 Steps 7-14 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3164 Steps 15-22 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3165 Steps 23-31 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests the MAP sensor's ability to correctly indicate BARO. 12. The measurement noted in this step will be used in subsequent steps if the measurement does not exceed the specified value. 15. This step calculates the resistance in the 5-volt reference circuit. 16. This step calculates the resistance in the low reference circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3166 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining bolt (3) and bracket (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (1) and the MAP sensor port seal if it is still retained in the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAP sensor (1) to the intake manifold. 2. Install the MAP sensor retaining bracket (2) and bolt (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3167 3. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3171 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3174 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) 1 REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the HO2S 1 harness connector. 2. Remove the HO2S 1 from the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. 2. Install the HO2S 1 to the exhaust manifold. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the HO2S 1 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 3177 3. Connect the HO2S 1 harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 3178 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Replacement HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) 2 REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). 3. Use a liquid penetrate before removing the sensor. IMPORTANT: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. DO NOT use products containing silicone on or near the HO2S. 4. Remove the HO2S 2 (2) from the exhaust pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 3179 2. Install the HO2S 2 (2). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the HO2S 2 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Ensure the HO2S 2 harness pigtail connector is secure to the chassis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3183 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3184 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 3187 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 3188 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 3189 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 3190 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 3191 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Of The Transmission, Left Side Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3199 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3200 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3201 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3202 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3206 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3209 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3210 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3217 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3218 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3222 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3225 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 3. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF.Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool and perform the following: - Accelerate to WOT. - Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 7. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 3228 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 3229 Tighten Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3239 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3240 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3241 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3247 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3248 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 3249 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3253 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3254 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3255 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3258 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3259 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3260 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 3267 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 3268 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 3269 Steps 7-13 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 3285 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 3291 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3292 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3293 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3294 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 3300 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. ......................5,600 ohm per meter (1,707 ohm per ft) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3304 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Refer to the list below for items to be inspected. 1. Inspect for correct routing of the spark plug wires. Improper routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Inspect each wire for any signs of cracks or splits in the wire. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or terminal, both the wire and the component connected to the wire should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3305 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the left side spark plugs. NOTE: Twist the spark plug boot one-half turn in order to release the boot. Pull on the spark plug boot only. Do not pull on the spark plug wire or the wire could be damaged. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 4. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the right side spark plugs. 5. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 6. Remove the spark plug wires from the ignition coil/control module. 7. Remove the spark plug wires from the engine. 8. If you are replacing the spark plug wires, transfer any of the following components: - Boot heat shields - Spark plug wire conduit - Spark plug wire retaining clips Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3306 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the ignition coil/control module. 2. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the right side spark plugs. 3. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 4. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the left side spark plugs. 5. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 6. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 15 Nm (11.0 lb ft) Spark Plug Gap ................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 1.52 mm (0.060 in) NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3310 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type ................................................................................................................................................... GM P/N 12568387 (AC Delco # 41-101) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3311 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE - Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. - Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION - Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. - Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. - Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3312 - Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION - Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. - Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: Rich fuel mixtures Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. - Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3313 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Observe the following service precautions: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove spark plugs from a hot engine can cause the spark plugs to seize. This can damage the cylinder head threads. - Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so can result in engine damage due to dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or in contamination of the cylinder head threads. Contaminated threads may prevent proper seating of the new spark plug. - Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs (1) from the cylinder head. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Gap the spark plugs to the specifications. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. NOTE: It is important to check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. Pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round wire feeler gauge to be sure of an accurate check, particularly on used plugs. Installing plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 2. Install the spark plugs to the cylinder head. NOTE: Be sure plug threads smoothly into cylinder head and is fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean threads in cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat spark plug can cause overheating of plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Follow the recommended torque specifications carefully. Over or under-tightening can also cause severe damage to engine or spark plug. - Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3314 IMPORTANT: ONLY when the cylinder head is replaced with a NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Install the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3318 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves, and the head gasket. 1. Important: Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the ignition fuses from the I/P fuse block. Disable the ignition. 2. Disable the fuel systems. 3. Remove the spark plugs from all the cylinders. 4. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 5. Block the throttle plate in the open position. 6. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Firmly install the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 2. Have an assistant crank the engine through at least 4 compression strokes in the testing =cylinder. 3. Record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 4. Disconnect the gauge. 5. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 7. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. ^ The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. ^ No cylinder reading should be less than 689 kPa (100 psi). 8. The following list contains examples of the possible measurements: ^ When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression on each cylinder. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach the normal compression, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ If the compression improves considerably with the addition of three squirts of oil, the piston rings may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on the first stroke and does not build up in the following strokes, the valves may be the cause. ^ The addition of oil does not affect the compression, the valves may be the cause. ^ When the compression is low on two adjacent cylinders, or coolant is present in the crankcase, the head gasket may be the cause. 9. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 10. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 11. Install the spark plugs. 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) fuse. 13. Install the ignition fuse to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3323 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3324 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3325 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3326 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3330 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3333 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3334 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3338 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3339 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 3348 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 3349 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 3355 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 3356 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Bulletin No.: 04-08-47-001 Date: March 02, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: BCM, PSCM and On-Star DTC's B1372, B1377, B1382, U10001, U1016, U1096, U1064, C0000, U1500 Stored in History Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician of DTCs that may be stored in history for the Body Control Module (BCM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and/or On-Star Module. The DTCs shown will not affect functionality of the vehicle and will not turn on the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) light. Diagnostics and/or repairs for any other DTCs that may be set should be made based on the appropriate Strategy Based Diagnostic information found in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's > Page 3361 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3367 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3368 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3369 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3375 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3376 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3377 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3378 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3381 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3382 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3383 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3384 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3385 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3386 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3387 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3388 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3389 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3390 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3391 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3392 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3393 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3394 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3395 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3396 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3397 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3398 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3399 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3400 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3401 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3402 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3403 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3404 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3405 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3406 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3407 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3408 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3409 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3410 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3411 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3412 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3413 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3414 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3415 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3416 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3417 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3418 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3419 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3420 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3421 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3422 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3423 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3424 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3425 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3426 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3427 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3428 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3429 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3430 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3431 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3432 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3433 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3434 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3435 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3436 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3437 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3438 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3439 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3440 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3441 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3442 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3443 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3444 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3445 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3446 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3447 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3448 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3449 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3450 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3451 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3452 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3453 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3454 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3455 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3456 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3457 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3458 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3459 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3460 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3461 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3462 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3463 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 3466 The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 3467 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The communication among modules is performed through the class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time communication are attached to the high speed GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the networks. The purpose of the gateway is to transfer information from one network to another. The gateway will interact with each network according to that network's transmission model. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for more information about the gateway. GMLAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500 Kbps. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohm resistors, one is internal to the ECM and the other is internal to the BCM. The resistors are used to reduce noise on the high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level which is approximately 2.5 volts is considered a recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to their extremes adds 1 volt to high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts 1 volt from high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. This dominant state is interpreted as a logic 0. GMLAN network management supports selective start up and is based on virtual networks. A virtual network is a collection of signals started in response to a vehicle event. The starting of a virtual network signifies that a particular aspect of the vehicles's functionality has been requested. A virtual network is supported by virtual devices which represents a collection of signals owned by a single physical device. So, any physical device can have one or more virtual devices. The signal supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not. Failsofting is the ability to substitute a signal with a default value or a default algorithm, in the absence of a valid signal. Some messages are also interpreted as a "heartbeat" of a virtual device. If such a signal is lost, the application will set a no communication code against the respective virtual device. This code is mapped on the Tech 2 screen as a code against the physical device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The interaction between high speed GMLAN and class 2 is assured by BCM, which is the gateway. Any message from the class 2 modules to the high speed GMLAN modules is translated by BCM without carrying the original transmitter ID. Therefore the GMLAN modules consider the BCM as being the originator of all class 2 messages that they receive. CLASS 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the class 2 serial data circuit. Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 Kbps. The bus is active at 7.0 volts nominal and inactive at ground potential. Each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the body control module (BCM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1064. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The BCM emulates the GMLAN modules on the class 2, embedding the original transmitter ID in GMLAN messages to class 2. Therefore the class 2 modules can set specific non communications DTCs against GMLAN modules. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 signal at terminal 2 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) at terminal 6 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) at terminal 14 GMLAN SERIAL DATA LINE The GMLAN serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a linear topology. The following modules are connected to the link, in order from DLC to the end of the linear configuration: The body control module (BCM) - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The transmission control module (TCM) - The engine control module (ECM) VCIM communicates functionally and physically on class 2 only. The high speed GMLAN circuits just pass through the module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 3468 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a star configuration. The star has one splice pack, located nearby the DLC. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: The body control module (BCM) - The digital radio receiver (DRR) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The power steering control module (PSCM) - The radio - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 3469 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3472 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3473 Steps 1 - 6 Steps 1 - 6 Power Mode Mismatch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3474 POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The body control module (BCM) is the power mode master responsible for sending the power mode message on the data buses. The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run) and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) in order to determine the present power mode. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1 - 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3475 Steps 8 - 14 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 6. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 7. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 8. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 9. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3476 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS Battery 1: The scan tool displays 0-25.5 volts. The state of the battery voltage supplied to the body control module (BCM). Driver Door Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the driver door switch. Ignition 1 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 1 Run/Crank input to the BCM. Ignition 2 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 2 Acc/Run input to the BCM. Ignition 3 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 3 Run input to the BCM. Key In Ignition: The scan tool displays Yes/No. The BCM receives an input from the ignition switch indicating whether the key is in the ignition or not, with Yes meaning the key is in the ignition. Liftgate Ajar Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the liftgate switch. Pass Door Switches: The scan tool displays the status of the passenger doors switches. Scan Tool Data List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION The procedures below are designed to set-up the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: 1. Programming the BCM. 2. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components. 3. Program Key Fobs Programming the BCM IMPORTANT: The BCM can be programmed using only Pass-Thru procedure. - After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Pass-Thru programming allows the scan tool to remain connected to the terminal and to the vehicle throughout the programming process. The vehicle must be in close proximity to the terminal while using Pass-Thru. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup for more information. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the PASSLOCK system. - The engine will not crank or start. Program Key Fobs Refer to Transmitter Programming in Keyless Entry for the proper procedure. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3479 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3485 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3486 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3490 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3491 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3492 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3493 Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3497 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3500 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 3. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF.Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool and perform the following: - Accelerate to WOT. - Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 7. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 3503 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 3504 Tighten Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3508 Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3509 Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3510 Data Link Connector: Description and Operation DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3511 Data Link Connector: Service and Repair DATA LINK CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - If the vehicle interior is exposed to moisture and becomes soaked up to the level of the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), the SDM and SDM harness connector must be replaced. The SDM could be activated when powered, which could cause airbag deployment and result in personal injury. 2. Remove the console assembly. 3. Remove the retainers from the connector position assurance (CPA) and disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the nuts and remove the SDM. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM to the vehicle with the nuts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the console assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3512 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. 5. Reprogram the BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. IMPORTANT: If you do NOT perform the BCM programming procedure, the vehicle option content information which is read by the BCM may be incorrect and a DTC B1001 Option Configuration Error will set in both the SDM and the BCM. This will illuminate the AIR BAG telltale. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3516 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (TAC) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The throttle actuator control (TAC) system delivers improved throttle response and greater reliability and eliminates the need for mechanical cable. The TAC system performs the following functions: Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensing - Throttle positioning to meet driver and engine demands - Throttle position sensing - Internal diagnostics - Cruise control functions - Manage TAC electrical power consumption The TAC system includes the following components: The APP sensors - The throttle body assembly - The powertrain control module (PCM) ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY The throttle assembly contains the following components: The throttle blade - The throttle actuator motor - The throttle position (TP) sensor 1 and 2 - The throttle actuator control (TAC) module The throttle body functions similar to a conventional throttle body with the following exceptions: There is no longer an idle air control (IAC) motor and associated air passages. - An electric motor opens and closes the throttle valve. - The TAC module is located within the throttle body assembly. - The throttle blade is spring loaded in both directions and the default position is slightly open. - There are 2 individual TP sensors within the throttle body assembly. The TP sensors are used to determine the throttle plate angle. The TP sensors provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with a signal voltage proportional to throttle plate movement. Both TP sensor signal voltages are low at closed throttle and increase as the throttle opens. THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. MODES OF OPERATION Normal Mode During the operation of the throttle actuator control (TAC) system, several modes or functions are considered normal. The following modes may be entered during normal operation: Minimum pedal value-At key-up, the powertrain control module (PCM) updates the learned minimum pedal value. - Minimum throttle position (TP) values-At key-up, the PCM updates the learned minimum throttle position value. In order to learn the minimum throttle position value, the throttle blade is moved to the closed position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3517 - Ice break mode-If the throttle is not able to reach a predetermined minimum throttle position, the ice break mode is entered. During the ice break mode, the PCM commands the maximum pulse width several times to the throttle actuator motor in the closing direction. - Battery saver mode-After a predetermined time without engine RPM, the PCM commands the battery saver mode. During the battery saver mode, the TAC module removes the voltage from the motor control circuits, which removes the current draw used to maintain the idle position and allows the throttle to return to the spring loaded default position. REDUCED ENGINE POWER MODE When the PCM detects a condition with the TAC system, the PCM may enter a reduced engine power mode. Reduced engine power may cause one or more of the following conditions: Acceleration limiting-The PCM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control, however the vehicle acceleration is limited. - Limited throttle mode-The PCM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control however the maximum throttle opening is limited. - Throttle default mode-The PCM will turn off the throttle actuator motor and the throttle will return to the spring loaded default position. - Forced idle mode-The PCM will perform the following actions: Limit engine speed to idle by positioning the throttle, or by controlling the fuel and spark if the throttle is turned off. - Ignore the accelerator pedal input. - Engine shutdown mode-The PCM will disable fuel and de-energize the throttle actuator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3521 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3522 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Technical Service Bulletin # 05539A Date: 050427 Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Product Emission - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage-Replace PCM # 05539A - (Apr 27, 2005) Models: 2005 CHEVROLET MALIBU, UPLANDER, EQUINOX, CLASSIC, SILVERADO 2005 GMC SIERRA 2005 PONTIAC SUNFIRE, GRAND AM, G6, GRAND PRIX, MONTANA SV6 2005 BUICK LACROSSE / ALLURLE, TERRAZA 2005 SATURN RELAY 2006 PONTIAC G6 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD 2005 AND 2006 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES TO THE RECALL. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 05539. Condition General Motors has decided to conduct a Voluntary Emission Recall involving certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6. Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles. The Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM/ECM) in these vehicles may have been manufactured with damaged internal IC chips, which may affect the Fuel Pump Control and EGR outputs of the PCM; or the Fuel Pump Control and Variable Nozzle Turbo Control (VNTC) outputs of the Diesel ECM. Customers may experience illumination of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or driveability complaints. Correction Dealers are to replace the Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM / ECM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6, Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles and built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: GM Dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning recall repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3531 Important: Saturn U.S. retailers must verify recall involvement by running a National Vehicle History (NVH) prior to performing repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Recall claims will only be paid on involved vehicles. For US and Canada For GM dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report (CIDR) containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld (US) Recall Information, GMinfoNet (Canada) Recall Reports. For U.S. Saturn Retailers only, the involved vehicles are provided in a Facility VIN List attachment to the Saturn Bulletin, located on DealerWorld. Dealers/Retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. For Export For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers will not receive a report with the recall bulletin if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Parts required to complete this recall are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" prior to ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. An emergency requirement should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Parts Information (Saturn US Only) A pre-shipment of the required parts to perform this program has been sent to involved Saturn U.S. retailers from Saturn Service Parts Operations (SSPO). Service Procedure Important: The labor time allowance listed in this recall is different than that currently published in the labor time guide for performing the same operation. In the near future, the labor time guide will be updated with this new information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3532 Prep the vehicle for PCM / ECM replacement. Refer to PCM / ECM replacement in the appropriate vehicle SI service manual and replace the PCM / ECM. The SI document numbers are shown for your reference. CALIFORNIA, MASSACHUSETTS, MAIN, VERMONT VEHICLES ONLY: Install a Recall Identification Label. Also, for California vehicles complete a "Proof Of Correction" certificate upon recall completion. Recall Identification Label -- California, Massachusetts, Maine & Vermont Vehicles Only Place a Recall Identification Label on each vehicle corrected in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Recall Bulletin. Each label provides a space to include the recall number and the five-digit dealer code of the dealer performing the recall service. This information may be inserted with a typewriter or a ballpoint pen. Put the Recall Identification Label on a clean and dry surface of the radiator core support in an area that will be visible to people servicing the vehicle. When installing the Recall Identification Label, be sure to pull the tab to allow adhesion of the clear protective covering. Important: (GM Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels for US dealers can be obtained from Dealer Support Materials. Request Item Number S-1015 when ordering. Important: (Saturn U.S. Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels may be ordered from Saturn publications. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada (GM Only) The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3533 Claim Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Claim Information (Saturn US Only) Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3534 Customer Notification -- For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the sample letter. In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Dealer Recall Responsibility -- All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is shown in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. * * *THE FOLLOWING 2 PARAGRAPHS ARE NOT FOR CANADA OR EXPORT* * * When a California emissions recall is completed by a GM dealer, the dealer must provide the vehicle owner a "Proof Of Correction Certificate" which the owner may need to present to the California Department Of Motor Vehicles (DMV) when renewing their vehicle registration. Without this correction certificate, the owner may be unable to renew their vehicle registration. Additional Certificates can be obtained, at no charge, from Dealer Support Materials. Ask for GM Item Number 1825 when ordering. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3535 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3536 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3537 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3543 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Technical Service Bulletin # 05539A Date: 050427 Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Product Emission - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage-Replace PCM # 05539A - (Apr 27, 2005) Models: 2005 CHEVROLET MALIBU, UPLANDER, EQUINOX, CLASSIC, SILVERADO 2005 GMC SIERRA 2005 PONTIAC SUNFIRE, GRAND AM, G6, GRAND PRIX, MONTANA SV6 2005 BUICK LACROSSE / ALLURLE, TERRAZA 2005 SATURN RELAY 2006 PONTIAC G6 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD 2005 AND 2006 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES TO THE RECALL. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 05539. Condition General Motors has decided to conduct a Voluntary Emission Recall involving certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6. Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles. The Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM/ECM) in these vehicles may have been manufactured with damaged internal IC chips, which may affect the Fuel Pump Control and EGR outputs of the PCM; or the Fuel Pump Control and Variable Nozzle Turbo Control (VNTC) outputs of the Diesel ECM. Customers may experience illumination of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or driveability complaints. Correction Dealers are to replace the Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM / ECM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6, Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles and built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: GM Dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning recall repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3552 Important: Saturn U.S. retailers must verify recall involvement by running a National Vehicle History (NVH) prior to performing repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Recall claims will only be paid on involved vehicles. For US and Canada For GM dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report (CIDR) containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld (US) Recall Information, GMinfoNet (Canada) Recall Reports. For U.S. Saturn Retailers only, the involved vehicles are provided in a Facility VIN List attachment to the Saturn Bulletin, located on DealerWorld. Dealers/Retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. For Export For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers will not receive a report with the recall bulletin if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Parts required to complete this recall are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" prior to ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. An emergency requirement should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Parts Information (Saturn US Only) A pre-shipment of the required parts to perform this program has been sent to involved Saturn U.S. retailers from Saturn Service Parts Operations (SSPO). Service Procedure Important: The labor time allowance listed in this recall is different than that currently published in the labor time guide for performing the same operation. In the near future, the labor time guide will be updated with this new information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3553 Prep the vehicle for PCM / ECM replacement. Refer to PCM / ECM replacement in the appropriate vehicle SI service manual and replace the PCM / ECM. The SI document numbers are shown for your reference. CALIFORNIA, MASSACHUSETTS, MAIN, VERMONT VEHICLES ONLY: Install a Recall Identification Label. Also, for California vehicles complete a "Proof Of Correction" certificate upon recall completion. Recall Identification Label -- California, Massachusetts, Maine & Vermont Vehicles Only Place a Recall Identification Label on each vehicle corrected in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Recall Bulletin. Each label provides a space to include the recall number and the five-digit dealer code of the dealer performing the recall service. This information may be inserted with a typewriter or a ballpoint pen. Put the Recall Identification Label on a clean and dry surface of the radiator core support in an area that will be visible to people servicing the vehicle. When installing the Recall Identification Label, be sure to pull the tab to allow adhesion of the clear protective covering. Important: (GM Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels for US dealers can be obtained from Dealer Support Materials. Request Item Number S-1015 when ordering. Important: (Saturn U.S. Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels may be ordered from Saturn publications. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada (GM Only) The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3554 Claim Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Claim Information (Saturn US Only) Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3555 Customer Notification -- For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the sample letter. In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Dealer Recall Responsibility -- All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is shown in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. * * *THE FOLLOWING 2 PARAGRAPHS ARE NOT FOR CANADA OR EXPORT* * * When a California emissions recall is completed by a GM dealer, the dealer must provide the vehicle owner a "Proof Of Correction Certificate" which the owner may need to present to the California Department Of Motor Vehicles (DMV) when renewing their vehicle registration. Without this correction certificate, the owner may be unable to renew their vehicle registration. Additional Certificates can be obtained, at no charge, from Dealer Support Materials. Ask for GM Item Number 1825 when ordering. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3556 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3557 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3558 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3564 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3569 LF Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3572 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3573 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3574 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3575 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3576 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) (1) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The PCM is in the engine compartment. The PCM is the control center of the engine controls system. The PCM controls the following components: - The fuel injection system - The ignition system - The emission control systems - The on-board diagnostics - The A/C and fan systems - The throttle actuation control (TAC) system The PCM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the PCM detects a malfunction, it stores a DTC. The condition is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. PCM Function The powertrain control module (PCM) can supply 5 volts or 12 volts to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the control module. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 megaohms input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The PCM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3579 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. PCM Service Precautions The powertrain control module (PCM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: Hydrocarbons (HC) - Carbon monoxide (CO) - Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) - Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system, powertrain control module (PCM), detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the PCM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment NOTE: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. - Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3580 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage IMPORTANT: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the control module, DO NOT touch the connector pins on the control module. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the effect of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection IMPORTANT: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. - Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. - Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Basic Knowledge Required NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in incorrect diagnostic performance or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary in order to effectively use this section. You must be familiar with some of the basics of engine operation and electrical diagnosis in order to use this section. Basic electrical circuits-You should have an understanding of basic electricity and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire, and you should be able to identify a shorted or open circuit by using a DMM. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram. - Use of digital multimeter-You should be familiar with the DMM, particularly the essential tool. You should be able to use the meter in order to measure the voltage (volts), the resistance (ohms), the current (amps), intermittents (min/max), and frequency (Hertz). - Use of circuit testing tools-You should not use a test lamp to diagnose the engine controls system unless you are specifically instructed to do so. You should know how to the use jumper wires in order to test the components and allow the DMM readings without damaging the terminals. You should know how to use the J 35616-B connector test adapter kit and use the kit whenever the diagnostic procedures call for front probing any connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3581 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Ignition (EI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The powertrain control module (PCM) controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensor (KS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3582 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (Tac) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3583 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. Record the remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. IMPORTANT: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. - It is necessary to record the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid will need to be changed at 83000 km (50,000 mi) from the last automatic transmission fluid change. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) (1) and PCM bracket (2) from the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3584 3. Remove the PCM bracket (2) from the PCM (1). 4. Disconnect the PCM wire harness (4) from the battery box cover. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the PCM connectors (2) from the PCM (3). 7. Remove the PCM (3) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the PCM (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the PCM connectors (2) to the PCM (3). 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3585 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (4) to the battery box cover. 5. Install the PCM bracket (2) to the PCM (1). 6. Install the PCM bracket (1) to the battery box cover. 7. Reprogram the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3589 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the CAN serial data to the body control module (BCM). The instrument panel cluster (IPC) displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - PRIMARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: NEW fuel tank module seals are necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain NEW seals for both the primary and secondary modules prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector from the underside of the top of the pump module. 4. Release the retaining tabs (1, 2) and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3592 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place (1, 2). 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3593 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Secondary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - SECONDARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: A NEW fuel tank module seal is necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain a NEW seal prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 4. Release the retaining tabs and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3594 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place. 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3598 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. As FTP increases, FTP sensor voltage decreases, high pressure, = low voltage. As FTP decreases, FTP sensor voltage increases low pressure or vacuum = high voltage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3599 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump module harness electrical connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Position 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers, one on each side of the sensor, near the vacuum port. 4. Carefully use the screwdrivers to lift and release the sensor from the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3600 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor to the fuel pump module assembly. Ensure that the sensor grommet is fully seated to the pump module. 2. Connect the pump module electrical connector to the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3605 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3606 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3607 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3608 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3609 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3610 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3611 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3612 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3613 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3614 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3615 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3616 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3617 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3618 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3619 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3620 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3621 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3622 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3623 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3624 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3625 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3626 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3627 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3628 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3629 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3630 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3631 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3632 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3633 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3634 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3635 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3636 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3637 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3638 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3639 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3640 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3641 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3642 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3643 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3644 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3645 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3646 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3647 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3648 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3649 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3650 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3651 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3652 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3653 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3654 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3655 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3656 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3657 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3658 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3659 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3660 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3661 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3662 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3663 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3664 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3665 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3666 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3667 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3668 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3669 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3670 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3671 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3672 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3673 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3674 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3675 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3676 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3677 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3678 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3679 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3680 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3681 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3682 Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With Class 2 Device SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH CLASS 2 DEVICE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Modules connected to the class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. Connecting a scan tool to the data link connector (DLC) allows communication with the modules for diagnostic purposes. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS The following conditions will cause a total loss of class 2 serial data communication: A class 2 serial data circuit shorted to ground. - A class 2 serial data circuit shorted to voltage. - An internal condition within a module or connector on the class 2 serial data circuit, that causes a short to voltage or ground to the class 2 serial data circuit. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3685 Steps 1 - 11 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3686 Steps 12 - 18 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. A partial malfunction in the class 2 serial data circuit uses a different procedure from a total malfunction of the class 2 serial data circuit. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: Body control module (BCM) - Digital radio receiver (DRR) - Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - Instrument panel cluster (IPC) - Power steering control module (PSCM) - Radio - Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) 3. The following DTCs may be retrieved with a history status, but are not the cause of the present condition. - U1300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3687 - U1301 - U1305 6. A state of health DTC with a history status may be present along with a U1000 or U1255 code having a current status. This indicates that the malfunction occurred when the ignition was ON. 7. Data link connector terminals 2 and 5 provide the connection to the class 2 serial data circuit and the signal ground circuit respectively. 10. A poor connection at DLC terminal of the splice pack - SP200 would cause this condition but will not set a DTC. 11. An open in the class 2 serial data circuit between the DLC and splice pack SP200 will prevent the scan tool from communicating with any module. This condition will not set a DTC. 12. The class 2 serial data circuit is shorted to voltage or ground. The condition may be due to the wiring or due to a malfunction in one of the modules. When testing the wire for a short, make sure there is not a module connected to the wire being tested. This test isolates the BCM class 2 serial data circuit. 14. The BCM detects that the ignition is ON and sends the appropriate power mode message to the other modules. Therefore, the BCM must remain connected to the DLC for any other module to communicate with the scan tool. This test isolates the splice pack - SP200 serial data circuits. Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With High Speed GMLAN Device SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH HIGH SPEED GMLAN DEVICE Modules connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications on the high speed GMLAN network during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module detects a bus-off condition a DTC U0001, U2100 or U2104 will be set. Generally these DTCs can be retrieved as history only, with the exception of body control module (BCM) that can set DTC U2100 as current, because it communicates with the scan tool on class 2. Diagnostic Aids The high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses two 120 ohm terminating resistors that are in parallel with the high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits. One of the resistors is connected at the body control module (BCM) and the other is at the engine control module (ECM). If testing for a short between high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) a reading of 60 ohm is normal. If the high speed GMLAN serial data is open testing the resistance between high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) will read about 120 ohm. The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits while the engine is not running. The following conditions may cause a total loss of high speed GMLAN data communication: A short between high speed GMLAN (+) and high speed GMLAN (-) circuits - Any of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits shorted to ground or voltage - A module internal malfunction that causes a short to voltage or ground on the high speed GMLAN circuits - Any of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits open Test Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3688 Steps 1 - 8 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3689 Steps 9 - 13 Scan Tool Does Not Power Up SCAN TOOL DOES NOT POWER UP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 The scan tool will power up with the ignition OFF. Some modules however, will not communicate unless the ignition is ON and the power mode master (PMM) module sends the appropriate power mode message. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3690 Steps 1 - 4 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. If the battery positive voltage and ground circuits of the DLC are functioning properly, the malfunction must be due to the scan tool. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3691 Information Bus: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures DATA LINK REFERENCES IMPORTANT: - For DTC U1500, refer to DTC U1500 in Cellular Communication. - For DTC U0107, refer to DTC U0107 in Computers and Control Systems - 3.4L This table identifies which serial data link that a particular module uses for in-vehicle data transmission. Some modules may use more than one data link to communicate. Some modules may have multiple communication circuits passing through them without actively communicating on that data link. This table is used to assist in correcting a communication malfunction. For the description and operation of these serial data communication circuits, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3695 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3696 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3697 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3700 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3701 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3702 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation SERVICE VEHICLE SOON INDICATOR Also known as "SERVICE", "SERVICE VEHICLE" or "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON" lamps, these lamps are used to inform the technician that a Non-Emissions releated malfunction of the Computerized Engine Control System or Body Control System has occurred, (a DTC has occurred). The "SERVICE TELLTALE" lamps are checked for proper operation while the engine is cranking, and will turn off after the engine is running. Depending on the trouble code set, the "SERVICE TELLTALE" lamp will come on and stay on while the malfunction is taking place. If a malfunction is intermittent, the service lamp that came on will go out when the malfunction is no longer detected by the computer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ALWAYS ON CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the diagnostic. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS If the problem is intermittent, refer to Intermittent Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Strategies/Intermittent Conditions TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1-7 The number refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 3708 2. This step determines if the condition is with the MIL control circuit or the PCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 3709 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Inoperative MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) INOPERATIVE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the PCM. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 3710 Steps 1-12 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 3711 Steps 13-16 The number refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests for a short to voltage on the MIL control circuit. With the fuse removed there should be no voltage on the MIL control circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3712 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair SERVICE VEHICLE SOON INDICATOR The "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON" light will come on if there are certain non-emission related vehicle problems. These problems may not be obvious and may affect vehicle performance or durability. The light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly. This light does NOT come on at certain mileage intervals. There is probably a PCM or a BCM Code set that will aid you in diagnosis. RESET PROCEDURE The only way to get the light to go off is to clear the PCM or BCM code(s). This light can NOT be reset or shut off any other way. PCM/BCM codes should be read & repaired before clearing them. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3716 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3717 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3718 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure which gives an indication of the engine load. The MAP sensor has a 5-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit and provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit, which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. With low MAP, such as during idle or deceleration, the PCM should detect a low MAP sensor signal voltage. With high MAP, such as ignition ON, engine OFF or wide open throttle (WOT), the PCM should detect a high MAP sensor signal voltage. The MAP sensor is also used in order to calculate the barometric pressure (BARO) when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively low, DTC P0107 sets. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively high DTC P0108 sets. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Poor idle characteristics may be caused by uncontrolled fueling due to an open or high resistance in the HO2S 1 low signal circuit. Before replacing any component, ensure that this condition does not exist. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3719 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3720 Steps 7-14 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3721 Steps 15-22 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3722 Steps 23-31 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests the MAP sensor's ability to correctly indicate BARO. 12. The measurement noted in this step will be used in subsequent steps if the measurement does not exceed the specified value. 15. This step calculates the resistance in the 5-volt reference circuit. 16. This step calculates the resistance in the low reference circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3723 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining bolt (3) and bracket (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (1) and the MAP sensor port seal if it is still retained in the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAP sensor (1) to the intake manifold. 2. Install the MAP sensor retaining bracket (2) and bolt (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3724 3. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3728 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3731 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) 1 REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the HO2S 1 harness connector. 2. Remove the HO2S 1 from the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. 2. Install the HO2S 1 to the exhaust manifold. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the HO2S 1 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 3734 3. Connect the HO2S 1 harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 3735 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Replacement HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) 2 REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). 3. Use a liquid penetrate before removing the sensor. IMPORTANT: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. DO NOT use products containing silicone on or near the HO2S. 4. Remove the HO2S 2 (2) from the exhaust pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 3736 2. Install the HO2S 2 (2). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the HO2S 2 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Ensure the HO2S 2 harness pigtail connector is secure to the chassis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 3746 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 3747 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 3753 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 3754 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Bulletin No.: 04-08-47-001 Date: March 02, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: BCM, PSCM and On-Star DTC's B1372, B1377, B1382, U10001, U1016, U1096, U1064, C0000, U1500 Stored in History Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician of DTCs that may be stored in history for the Body Control Module (BCM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and/or On-Star Module. The DTCs shown will not affect functionality of the vehicle and will not turn on the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) light. Diagnostics and/or repairs for any other DTCs that may be set should be made based on the appropriate Strategy Based Diagnostic information found in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's > Page 3759 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Bulletin No.: 04-08-47-001 Date: March 02, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: BCM, PSCM and On-Star DTC's B1372, B1377, B1382, U10001, U1016, U1096, U1064, C0000, U1500 Stored in History Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician of DTCs that may be stored in history for the Body Control Module (BCM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and/or On-Star Module. The DTCs shown will not affect functionality of the vehicle and will not turn on the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) light. Diagnostics and/or repairs for any other DTCs that may be set should be made based on the appropriate Strategy Based Diagnostic information found in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's > Page 3765 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3766 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3769 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3770 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3771 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3772 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3773 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3774 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3775 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3776 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3777 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3778 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3779 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3780 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3781 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3782 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3783 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3784 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3785 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3786 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3787 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3788 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3789 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3790 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3791 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3792 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3793 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3794 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3795 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3796 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3797 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3798 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3799 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3800 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3801 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3802 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3803 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3804 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3805 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3806 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3807 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3808 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3809 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3810 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3811 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3812 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3813 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3814 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3815 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3816 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3817 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3818 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3819 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3820 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3821 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3822 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3823 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3824 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3825 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3826 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3827 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3828 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3829 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3830 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3831 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: - The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3832 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3833 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3834 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3835 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3836 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3837 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3838 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3839 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3840 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3841 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3842 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3843 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3844 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3845 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3846 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3847 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3848 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3849 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3850 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3851 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 3854 The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 3855 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The communication among modules is performed through the class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time communication are attached to the high speed GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the networks. The purpose of the gateway is to transfer information from one network to another. The gateway will interact with each network according to that network's transmission model. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for more information about the gateway. GMLAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500 Kbps. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohm resistors, one is internal to the ECM and the other is internal to the BCM. The resistors are used to reduce noise on the high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level which is approximately 2.5 volts is considered a recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to their extremes adds 1 volt to high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts 1 volt from high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. This dominant state is interpreted as a logic 0. GMLAN network management supports selective start up and is based on virtual networks. A virtual network is a collection of signals started in response to a vehicle event. The starting of a virtual network signifies that a particular aspect of the vehicles's functionality has been requested. A virtual network is supported by virtual devices which represents a collection of signals owned by a single physical device. So, any physical device can have one or more virtual devices. The signal supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not. Failsofting is the ability to substitute a signal with a default value or a default algorithm, in the absence of a valid signal. Some messages are also interpreted as a "heartbeat" of a virtual device. If such a signal is lost, the application will set a no communication code against the respective virtual device. This code is mapped on the Tech 2 screen as a code against the physical device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The interaction between high speed GMLAN and class 2 is assured by BCM, which is the gateway. Any message from the class 2 modules to the high speed GMLAN modules is translated by BCM without carrying the original transmitter ID. Therefore the GMLAN modules consider the BCM as being the originator of all class 2 messages that they receive. CLASS 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the class 2 serial data circuit. Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 Kbps. The bus is active at 7.0 volts nominal and inactive at ground potential. Each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the body control module (BCM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1064. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The BCM emulates the GMLAN modules on the class 2, embedding the original transmitter ID in GMLAN messages to class 2. Therefore the class 2 modules can set specific non communications DTCs against GMLAN modules. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 signal at terminal 2 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) at terminal 6 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) at terminal 14 GMLAN SERIAL DATA LINE The GMLAN serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a linear topology. The following modules are connected to the link, in order from DLC to the end of the linear configuration: The body control module (BCM) - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The transmission control module (TCM) - The engine control module (ECM) VCIM communicates functionally and physically on class 2 only. The high speed GMLAN circuits just pass through the module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 3856 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a star configuration. The star has one splice pack, located nearby the DLC. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: The body control module (BCM) - The digital radio receiver (DRR) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The power steering control module (PSCM) - The radio - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 3857 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3860 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3861 Steps 1 - 6 Steps 1 - 6 Power Mode Mismatch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3862 POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The body control module (BCM) is the power mode master responsible for sending the power mode message on the data buses. The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run) and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) in order to determine the present power mode. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1 - 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3863 Steps 8 - 14 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 6. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 7. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 8. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 9. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3864 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS Battery 1: The scan tool displays 0-25.5 volts. The state of the battery voltage supplied to the body control module (BCM). Driver Door Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the driver door switch. Ignition 1 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 1 Run/Crank input to the BCM. Ignition 2 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 2 Acc/Run input to the BCM. Ignition 3 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 3 Run input to the BCM. Key In Ignition: The scan tool displays Yes/No. The BCM receives an input from the ignition switch indicating whether the key is in the ignition or not, with Yes meaning the key is in the ignition. Liftgate Ajar Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the liftgate switch. Pass Door Switches: The scan tool displays the status of the passenger doors switches. Scan Tool Data List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION The procedures below are designed to set-up the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: 1. Programming the BCM. 2. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components. 3. Program Key Fobs Programming the BCM IMPORTANT: The BCM can be programmed using only Pass-Thru procedure. - After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Pass-Thru programming allows the scan tool to remain connected to the terminal and to the vehicle throughout the programming process. The vehicle must be in close proximity to the terminal while using Pass-Thru. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup for more information. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the PASSLOCK system. - The engine will not crank or start. Program Key Fobs Refer to Transmitter Programming in Keyless Entry for the proper procedure. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3867 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3871 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3872 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is the control center for the TAC system. The TAC system uses electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and is self-diagnosing. The TAC module provides diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through a dedicated serial data line. The TAC achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage to the TAC motor as directed by the PCM. The TAC module is not serviced and should be replaced with the throttle body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Technical Service Bulletin # 05539A Date: 050427 Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Product Emission - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage-Replace PCM # 05539A - (Apr 27, 2005) Models: 2005 CHEVROLET MALIBU, UPLANDER, EQUINOX, CLASSIC, SILVERADO 2005 GMC SIERRA 2005 PONTIAC SUNFIRE, GRAND AM, G6, GRAND PRIX, MONTANA SV6 2005 BUICK LACROSSE / ALLURLE, TERRAZA 2005 SATURN RELAY 2006 PONTIAC G6 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD 2005 AND 2006 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES TO THE RECALL. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 05539. Condition General Motors has decided to conduct a Voluntary Emission Recall involving certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6. Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles. The Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM/ECM) in these vehicles may have been manufactured with damaged internal IC chips, which may affect the Fuel Pump Control and EGR outputs of the PCM; or the Fuel Pump Control and Variable Nozzle Turbo Control (VNTC) outputs of the Diesel ECM. Customers may experience illumination of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or driveability complaints. Correction Dealers are to replace the Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM / ECM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6, Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles and built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: GM Dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning recall repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3881 Important: Saturn U.S. retailers must verify recall involvement by running a National Vehicle History (NVH) prior to performing repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Recall claims will only be paid on involved vehicles. For US and Canada For GM dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report (CIDR) containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld (US) Recall Information, GMinfoNet (Canada) Recall Reports. For U.S. Saturn Retailers only, the involved vehicles are provided in a Facility VIN List attachment to the Saturn Bulletin, located on DealerWorld. Dealers/Retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. For Export For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers will not receive a report with the recall bulletin if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Parts required to complete this recall are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" prior to ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. An emergency requirement should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Parts Information (Saturn US Only) A pre-shipment of the required parts to perform this program has been sent to involved Saturn U.S. retailers from Saturn Service Parts Operations (SSPO). Service Procedure Important: The labor time allowance listed in this recall is different than that currently published in the labor time guide for performing the same operation. In the near future, the labor time guide will be updated with this new information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3882 Prep the vehicle for PCM / ECM replacement. Refer to PCM / ECM replacement in the appropriate vehicle SI service manual and replace the PCM / ECM. The SI document numbers are shown for your reference. CALIFORNIA, MASSACHUSETTS, MAIN, VERMONT VEHICLES ONLY: Install a Recall Identification Label. Also, for California vehicles complete a "Proof Of Correction" certificate upon recall completion. Recall Identification Label -- California, Massachusetts, Maine & Vermont Vehicles Only Place a Recall Identification Label on each vehicle corrected in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Recall Bulletin. Each label provides a space to include the recall number and the five-digit dealer code of the dealer performing the recall service. This information may be inserted with a typewriter or a ballpoint pen. Put the Recall Identification Label on a clean and dry surface of the radiator core support in an area that will be visible to people servicing the vehicle. When installing the Recall Identification Label, be sure to pull the tab to allow adhesion of the clear protective covering. Important: (GM Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels for US dealers can be obtained from Dealer Support Materials. Request Item Number S-1015 when ordering. Important: (Saturn U.S. Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels may be ordered from Saturn publications. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada (GM Only) The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3883 Claim Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Claim Information (Saturn US Only) Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3884 Customer Notification -- For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the sample letter. In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Dealer Recall Responsibility -- All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is shown in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. * * *THE FOLLOWING 2 PARAGRAPHS ARE NOT FOR CANADA OR EXPORT* * * When a California emissions recall is completed by a GM dealer, the dealer must provide the vehicle owner a "Proof Of Correction Certificate" which the owner may need to present to the California Department Of Motor Vehicles (DMV) when renewing their vehicle registration. Without this correction certificate, the owner may be unable to renew their vehicle registration. Additional Certificates can be obtained, at no charge, from Dealer Support Materials. Ask for GM Item Number 1825 when ordering. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3885 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3886 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3887 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3893 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Technical Service Bulletin # 05539A Date: 050427 Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage Product Emission - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage-Replace PCM # 05539A - (Apr 27, 2005) Models: 2005 CHEVROLET MALIBU, UPLANDER, EQUINOX, CLASSIC, SILVERADO 2005 GMC SIERRA 2005 PONTIAC SUNFIRE, GRAND AM, G6, GRAND PRIX, MONTANA SV6 2005 BUICK LACROSSE / ALLURLE, TERRAZA 2005 SATURN RELAY 2006 PONTIAC G6 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD 2005 AND 2006 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES TO THE RECALL. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 05539. Condition General Motors has decided to conduct a Voluntary Emission Recall involving certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6. Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles. The Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM/ECM) in these vehicles may have been manufactured with damaged internal IC chips, which may affect the Fuel Pump Control and EGR outputs of the PCM; or the Fuel Pump Control and Variable Nozzle Turbo Control (VNTC) outputs of the Diesel ECM. Customers may experience illumination of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or driveability complaints. Correction Dealers are to replace the Powertrain/Engine Control Module (PCM / ECM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 Chevrolet Malibu, Uplander, Equinox, Classic, Silverado; GMC Sierra; Pontiac Sunfire, Grand Am, G6, Grand Prix, Montana SV6; Buick LaCrosse/Allure, Terraza; Saturn Relay; and 2006 Pontiac G6 model vehicles and built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: GM Dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning recall repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3902 Important: Saturn U.S. retailers must verify recall involvement by running a National Vehicle History (NVH) prior to performing repairs. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Recall claims will only be paid on involved vehicles. For US and Canada For GM dealers and Canadian Saturn Retailers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report (CIDR) containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld (US) Recall Information, GMinfoNet (Canada) Recall Reports. For U.S. Saturn Retailers only, the involved vehicles are provided in a Facility VIN List attachment to the Saturn Bulletin, located on DealerWorld. Dealers/Retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. For Export For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers will not receive a report with the recall bulletin if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Parts required to complete this recall are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" prior to ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. An emergency requirement should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Parts Information (Saturn US Only) A pre-shipment of the required parts to perform this program has been sent to involved Saturn U.S. retailers from Saturn Service Parts Operations (SSPO). Service Procedure Important: The labor time allowance listed in this recall is different than that currently published in the labor time guide for performing the same operation. In the near future, the labor time guide will be updated with this new information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3903 Prep the vehicle for PCM / ECM replacement. Refer to PCM / ECM replacement in the appropriate vehicle SI service manual and replace the PCM / ECM. The SI document numbers are shown for your reference. CALIFORNIA, MASSACHUSETTS, MAIN, VERMONT VEHICLES ONLY: Install a Recall Identification Label. Also, for California vehicles complete a "Proof Of Correction" certificate upon recall completion. Recall Identification Label -- California, Massachusetts, Maine & Vermont Vehicles Only Place a Recall Identification Label on each vehicle corrected in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Recall Bulletin. Each label provides a space to include the recall number and the five-digit dealer code of the dealer performing the recall service. This information may be inserted with a typewriter or a ballpoint pen. Put the Recall Identification Label on a clean and dry surface of the radiator core support in an area that will be visible to people servicing the vehicle. When installing the Recall Identification Label, be sure to pull the tab to allow adhesion of the clear protective covering. Important: (GM Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels for US dealers can be obtained from Dealer Support Materials. Request Item Number S-1015 when ordering. Important: (Saturn U.S. Dealers Only) Additional Recall Identification Labels may be ordered from Saturn publications. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada (GM Only) The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3904 Claim Information (GM and Saturn Canada Only) Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Claim Information (Saturn US Only) Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3905 Customer Notification -- For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the sample letter. In order to ensure full protection under the emission warranty, and the right to participate in future recalls, the customer notification letter recommends that customers have their vehicles serviced as soon as possible. It also advises that failure to do so could legally be determined to be lack of proper maintenance. The vehicle may fail a state or local emission inspection test if the recall work is not completed. Dealer Recall Responsibility -- All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is shown in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. * * *THE FOLLOWING 2 PARAGRAPHS ARE NOT FOR CANADA OR EXPORT* * * When a California emissions recall is completed by a GM dealer, the dealer must provide the vehicle owner a "Proof Of Correction Certificate" which the owner may need to present to the California Department Of Motor Vehicles (DMV) when renewing their vehicle registration. Without this correction certificate, the owner may be unable to renew their vehicle registration. Additional Certificates can be obtained, at no charge, from Dealer Support Materials. Ask for GM Item Number 1825 when ordering. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3906 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3907 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05539A > Apr > 05 > Recall - PCM Integrated Circuit Chip Damage > Page 3908 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3914 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3919 LF Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3922 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3923 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3924 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3925 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3926 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) (1) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The PCM is in the engine compartment. The PCM is the control center of the engine controls system. The PCM controls the following components: - The fuel injection system - The ignition system - The emission control systems - The on-board diagnostics - The A/C and fan systems - The throttle actuation control (TAC) system The PCM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the PCM detects a malfunction, it stores a DTC. The condition is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. PCM Function The powertrain control module (PCM) can supply 5 volts or 12 volts to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the control module. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 megaohms input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The PCM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the control module. The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the powertrain control module (PCM) needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the control module. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing communication data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3929 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure that the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A DTC is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. PCM Service Precautions The powertrain control module (PCM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the PCM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: Hydrocarbons (HC) - Carbon monoxide (CO) - Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) - Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system, powertrain control module (PCM), detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the PCM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment NOTE: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. - Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3930 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage IMPORTANT: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the control module, DO NOT touch the connector pins on the control module. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4,000 volts for a person to even feel the effect of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper left corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection IMPORTANT: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. - Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. - Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Basic Knowledge Required NOTE: Lack of basic knowledge of this powertrain when performing diagnostic procedures could result in incorrect diagnostic performance or damage to powertrain components. Do not attempt to diagnose a powertrain problem without this basic knowledge. A basic understanding of hand tools is necessary in order to effectively use this section. You must be familiar with some of the basics of engine operation and electrical diagnosis in order to use this section. - Basic electrical circuits-You should have an understanding of basic electricity and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire, and you should be able to identify a shorted or open circuit by using a DMM. You should be able to read and understand a wiring diagram. - Use of digital multimeter-You should be familiar with the DMM, particularly the essential tool. You should be able to use the meter in order to measure the voltage (volts), the resistance (ohms), the current (amps), intermittents (min/max), and frequency (Hertz). - Use of circuit testing tools-You should not use a test lamp to diagnose the engine controls system unless you are specifically instructed to do so. You should know how to the use jumper wires in order to test the components and allow the DMM readings without damaging the terminals. You should know how to use the J 35616-B connector test adapter kit and use the kit whenever the diagnostic procedures call for front probing any connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3931 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Ignition (EI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The powertrain control module (PCM) controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensor (KS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module > Page 3932 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (Tac) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE The powertrain control module (PCM) determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. This information is sent to the throttle actuator control (TAC) module through a dedicated serial data line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3933 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. Record the remaining engine oil and the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. IMPORTANT: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. - It is necessary to record the remaining automatic transmission fluid life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid life will default to 100%. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining automatic transmission fluid life, the automatic transmission fluid will need to be changed at 83000 km (50,000 mi) from the last automatic transmission fluid change. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) (1) and PCM bracket (2) from the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3934 3. Remove the PCM bracket (2) from the PCM (1). 4. Disconnect the PCM wire harness (4) from the battery box cover. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the PCM connectors (2) from the PCM (3). 7. Remove the PCM (3) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the PCM (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the PCM connectors (2) to the PCM (3). 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3935 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (4) to the battery box cover. 5. Install the PCM bracket (2) to the PCM (1). 6. Install the PCM bracket (1) to the battery box cover. 7. Reprogram the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3940 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3941 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3942 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3943 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3947 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3950 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3951 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3957 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3958 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3962 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3963 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3964 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Engine coolant must be drained below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply thread sealant GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to sensor threads. IMPORTANT: Tap out sensor mounting hole in engine head to remove any thread sealant residue. Clean any sealant residue from old sensor and apply RTV sealant to threads if old sensor is going to be reused. 2. Install the ECT sensor. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3965 Tighten the engine coolant temperature sensor to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Fill engine coolant to proper level. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3969 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3972 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 3. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF.Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool and perform the following: - Accelerate to WOT. - Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 7. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 3975 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 3976 Tighten Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3980 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the CAN serial data to the body control module (BCM). The instrument panel cluster (IPC) displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - PRIMARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: NEW fuel tank module seals are necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain NEW seals for both the primary and secondary modules prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector from the underside of the top of the pump module. 4. Release the retaining tabs (1, 2) and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3983 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place (1, 2). 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3984 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Secondary FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT - SECONDARY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: A NEW fuel tank module seal is necessary each time the fuel tank module is serviced. Obtain a NEW seal prior to beginning this service procedure. - There are 2 fuel level sender unit and float assemblies in the fuel tank. There is 1 located on each fuel pump module. The fuel level sender unit and float is NOT the same for each of the fuel pump modules. 2. Remove the fuel pump module. 3. Disconnect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 4. Release the retaining tabs and remove the level sensor by sliding up. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement - Primary > Page 3985 1. Install the fuel level sender unit and float onto the fuel pump module. Make sure that the sender cap snaps into place. 2. Connect the fuel level sender unit and the float electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel pump module into the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3989 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. As FTP increases, FTP sensor voltage decreases, high pressure, = low voltage. As FTP decreases, FTP sensor voltage increases low pressure or vacuum = high voltage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3990 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump module harness electrical connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Position 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers, one on each side of the sensor, near the vacuum port. 4. Carefully use the screwdrivers to lift and release the sensor from the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3991 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor to the fuel pump module assembly. Ensure that the sensor grommet is fully seated to the pump module. 2. Connect the pump module electrical connector to the fuel tank pressure sensor. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3995 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3996 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4000 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4001 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4002 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4005 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4006 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4007 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4011 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4012 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4013 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in intake manifold pressure which gives an indication of the engine load. The MAP sensor has a 5-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit and provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit, which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. With low MAP, such as during idle or deceleration, the PCM should detect a low MAP sensor signal voltage. With high MAP, such as ignition ON, engine OFF or wide open throttle (WOT), the PCM should detect a high MAP sensor signal voltage. The MAP sensor is also used in order to calculate the barometric pressure (BARO) when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively low, DTC P0107 sets. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively high DTC P0108 sets. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Poor idle characteristics may be caused by uncontrolled fueling due to an open or high resistance in the HO2S 1 low signal circuit. Before replacing any component, ensure that this condition does not exist. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4014 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4015 Steps 7-14 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4016 Steps 15-22 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4017 Steps 23-31 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests the MAP sensor's ability to correctly indicate BARO. 12. The measurement noted in this step will be used in subsequent steps if the measurement does not exceed the specified value. 15. This step calculates the resistance in the 5-volt reference circuit. 16. This step calculates the resistance in the low reference circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4018 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining bolt (3) and bracket (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (1) and the MAP sensor port seal if it is still retained in the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAP sensor (1) to the intake manifold. 2. Install the MAP sensor retaining bracket (2) and bolt (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4019 3. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4023 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4026 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) 1 REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the HO2S 1 harness connector. 2. Remove the HO2S 1 from the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. 2. Install the HO2S 1 to the exhaust manifold. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the HO2S 1 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 4029 3. Connect the HO2S 1 harness connector. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 4030 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Replacement HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) 2 REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). 3. Use a liquid penetrate before removing the sensor. IMPORTANT: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. DO NOT use products containing silicone on or near the HO2S. 4. Remove the HO2S 2 (2) from the exhaust pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the threads of the HO2S 2. NOTE: Silicone based products will contaminate the HO2S. Use only a nickel based anti-seize compound that does not contain silicone. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 Replacement > Page 4031 2. Install the HO2S 2 (2). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the HO2S 2 to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S 2 harness connector (3). Push in the connector until a click is heard, then pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 4. Ensure the HO2S 2 harness pigtail connector is secure to the chassis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4035 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4036 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4039 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4040 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4041 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4042 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4043 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Of The Transmission, Left Side Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4050 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4051 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4054 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4055 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4056 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4057 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4058 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Top Of The Transmission, Left Side Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Bulletin No.: 06-06-01-010A Date: February 04, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Close-Coupled Converter and Engine Breakdown or Non-Function Due to Severe Overheat or Lack of Oil Causing Piston(s) Connecting Rod(s) Crankshaft Cylinder(s) and/or Head(s) Camshaft(s) Intake and/or Exhaust Valve(s) Main and/or Rod Bearing(s) Damage Models: 2004-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks with Close-Coupled Catalytic Converters Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-01-010 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Certain 2004-2008 General Motors products may be equipped with a new style of catalytic converter technically known as the close-coupled catalytic converter providing quick catalyst warm-up resulting in lower tail pipe emissions earlier in the vehicle operating cycle. If an engine breakdown or non-function were to occur (such as broken intake/exhaust valve or piston) debris may be deposited in the converter through engine exhaust ports. If the engine is non-functioning due to a severe overheat event damage to the ceramic "brick" internal to the catalytic converter may occur. This may result in ceramic debris being drawn into the engine through the cylinder head exhaust ports. If a replacement engine is installed in either of these instances the replacement engine may fail due to the debris being introduced into the combustion chambers when started. When replacing an engine for a breakdown or non-function an inspection of the catalytic converters and ALL transferred components (such as exhaust/ intake manifolds) should be performed. Any debris found should be removed. In cases of engine failure due to severe overheat dealers should also inspect each catalytic converter for signs of melting or cracking of the ceramic "brick". If damage is observed the converter should be replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4067 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) connector (2) from the wiring harness (3). 3. Remove the catalytic converter pipe flange to exhaust system pipe flange nuts. 4. Separate the pipes and discard the gasket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4068 5. Important: Catalytic converter flex coupler must NEVER be deflected more than 6 degrees or failure of flex coupler could result. Remove the nuts (3) securing the catalytic converter (4) to the exhaust manifold. 6. Separate the catalytic converter flange from the exhaust manifold and discard the gasket (2). 7. Separate the catalytic converter hanger from the rubber isolator and remove the catalytic converter from the vehicle. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold studs (1) if worn or damaged. 9. If replacing the catalytic converter, remove the HO2S. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4069 1. Install the HO2S, if previously removed. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the exhaust manifold studs (1) if previously removed. ^ Tighten the studs to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 3. Install the rubber isolator and to the catalytic converter hanger. 4. Notice: To prevent internal damage to the flexible coupling of the catalytic converter assembly, the converter must be supported. The vertical movement at the rear of the catalytic converter assembly must not exceed 6 degrees up or down. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4070 Install a new gasket (2) and attach the catalytic converter (4) to the exhaust manifold. 5. Install the catalytic converter to the exhaust manifold nuts (3). ^ Tighten the nuts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 6. Install a new exhaust pipe flange gasket to the catalytic converter flange. 7. Install the exhaust pipe to the catalytic converter pipe. with the catalytic converter nuts. 8. Install the exhaust pipe to the catalytic converter pipe. ^ Tighten the nuts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 9. Connect the HO2S connector (2) to the wiring harness (3). 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4075 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4076 Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4077 Canister Purge Solenoid: Description and Operation EVAP PURGE VALVE The EVAP purge valve controls the flow of vapors from the EVAP system to the intake manifold. This normally closed valve is pulse width modulated (PWM) by the control module to precisely control the flow of fuel vapor to the engine. The valve will also be opened during some portions of the EVAP testing, allowing engine vacuum to enter the EVAP system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4078 Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge solenoid valve electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve hose/pipe. 4. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve retaining bolt (2). 5. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve (1) from the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve (1) on the intake manifold. 2. install the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve bolt (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the EVAP canister purge valve retaining bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Connect the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve hose/pipe. 4. Connect the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. IMPORTANT: The evaporative emission (EVAP) canister filter cover must also be replaced when the EVAP filter is replaced to ensure proper operation of the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the EVAP canister from the vehicle. 3. Carefully release the canister filter cover rear retaining tabs. 4. Carefully release the canister filter cover forward retaining tabs and remove the cover from the EVAP canister. 5. Discard the EVAP canister filter cover. 6. Remove the filter from the canister and discard the filter. 7. Clean the inside of the EVAP canister filter housing with a clean shop towel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4082 1. Install a NEW filter to the canister filter housing. 2. Install a NEW EVAP filter cover to the EVAP canister. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the seal is properly seated in the NEW EVAP filter cover. 3. Install the EVAP canister to the vehicle. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Evaporative Check Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Bulletin No.: 08-06-04-008 Date: February 04, 2008 TECHNICAL Subject: Clicking Type Noise Heard Under Vehicle (Replace EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid Valve) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment on a clicking type noise coming from under the vehicle. Some may comment that there are always three clicks while others may refer to the noise as being three bangs. Cause The clicking or banging type noise may be caused by the cycling of the evaporative canister vent valve, when the valve is cycling there may be three clicks or bangs heard. The cycling of the valve is determined and controlled by the PCM. Correction Explain to the customer that the sound they are hearing is a normal function of the vehicle's evaporative emission system and that no repairs are needed. If the customer still feels the condition is not acceptable the canister vent solenoid valve can be replaced with P/N 15788844. This is a quieter operating valve. Before replacing the valve, please advise the customer that this will only reduce the sound level (volume) of the valve and will not eliminate the sound completely. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle > Page 4091 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Evaporative Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle Bulletin No.: 08-06-04-008 Date: February 04, 2008 TECHNICAL Subject: Clicking Type Noise Heard Under Vehicle (Replace EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid Valve) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment on a clicking type noise coming from under the vehicle. Some may comment that there are always three clicks while others may refer to the noise as being three bangs. Cause The clicking or banging type noise may be caused by the cycling of the evaporative canister vent valve, when the valve is cycling there may be three clicks or bangs heard. The cycling of the valve is determined and controlled by the PCM. Correction Explain to the customer that the sound they are hearing is a normal function of the vehicle's evaporative emission system and that no repairs are needed. If the customer still feels the condition is not acceptable the canister vent solenoid valve can be replaced with P/N 15788844. This is a quieter operating valve. Before replacing the valve, please advise the customer that this will only reduce the sound level (volume) of the valve and will not eliminate the sound completely. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-06-04-008 > Feb > 08 > Emissions - Clicking/Banging Noise From Under Vehicle > Page 4097 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations Under The Rear Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4102 Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4103 Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation EVAP VENT VALVE The EVAP vent valve controls fresh airflow into the EVAP canister. The valve is normally open. The control module will command the valve closed during some EVAP tests, allowing the system to be tested for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4104 Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister from the vehicle. 2. Rotate the EVAP canister vent valve counterclockwise to release from the locked position. 3. Remove the vent valve from the EVAP canister. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4105 1. Insert the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve into the EVAP canister, with the valve aligned to the released position. 2. Rotate vent valve clockwise to secure into the locked position. 3. Install the EVAP canister to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-04-059 > Sep > 05 > Emissions - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0446/Hard To Refuel Evaporative Emissions Hose: Customer Interest Emissions - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0446/Hard To Refuel Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-059 Date: September 07, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Intermittently or Prematurely During Fuel Fill and/or SES Lamp On with DTC P0446 EVAP Vent System Performance Set (Inspect EVAP Canister Vent Hose and Replace As Needed) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition Some customers may comment on gas station fuel nozzles shutting off intermittently or prematurely during fuel fill, and/or that the Service Engine Soon (SES) lamp is illuminated with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0446 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Vent System Performance set. Cause This condition may be caused by a partial restriction of the EVAP canister vent hose. Correction Inspect the EVAP canister vent hose for any restriction. If a restriction is found that resembles a ball of cotton, this may be a "spider nest." If such a restriction is found, replace the EVAP canister vent hose with a second design hose that includes a screen. Service Procedure 1. Inspect the EVAP canister vent hose for any restriction. ^ If no restriction is found, refer to DTC P0446 diagnostics in SI or the appropriate model year Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual to continue to diagnose the concern. ^ If any restriction is found, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the EVAP canister vent hose with a second design hose. Refer to "Vent Hose Replacement" procedure in SI or the appropriate model year Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-04-059 > Sep > 05 > Emissions - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0446/Hard To Refuel > Page 4114 Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-04-059 > Sep > 05 > Emissions - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0446/Hard To Refuel Evaporative Emissions Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0446/Hard To Refuel Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-059 Date: September 07, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Intermittently or Prematurely During Fuel Fill and/or SES Lamp On with DTC P0446 EVAP Vent System Performance Set (Inspect EVAP Canister Vent Hose and Replace As Needed) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition Some customers may comment on gas station fuel nozzles shutting off intermittently or prematurely during fuel fill, and/or that the Service Engine Soon (SES) lamp is illuminated with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0446 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Vent System Performance set. Cause This condition may be caused by a partial restriction of the EVAP canister vent hose. Correction Inspect the EVAP canister vent hose for any restriction. If a restriction is found that resembles a ball of cotton, this may be a "spider nest." If such a restriction is found, replace the EVAP canister vent hose with a second design hose that includes a screen. Service Procedure 1. Inspect the EVAP canister vent hose for any restriction. ^ If no restriction is found, refer to DTC P0446 diagnostics in SI or the appropriate model year Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual to continue to diagnose the concern. ^ If any restriction is found, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the EVAP canister vent hose with a second design hose. Refer to "Vent Hose Replacement" procedure in SI or the appropriate model year Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-06-04-059 > Sep > 05 > Emissions - SES Lamp ON/DTC P0446/Hard To Refuel > Page 4120 Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Steering Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 04-02-32-006 Date: August 06, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle or Clunk Felt in Steering Wheel While Driving on Rough Roads (Adjust Steering Gear Preload) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Attention: This Bulletin Only Applies To General Motors Chevrolet Dealers In Mexico Condition Some customers may comment that while driving over certain rough road conditions, they hear a rattle noise from the front end of the vehicle. Some customers may also comment that they feel clunking in the steering wheel while hearing the noise. Correction Follow the service procedure below to correct this condition. 1. Set the steering wheel in a straight ahead position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove both front tire assemblies. Important: Hold the ball stud in order to prevent turning during removal of the nut. 4. Remove the tie rod to knuckle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4126 Note: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 5. Use the SA91100C to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the bar. 8. Rotate the stabilizer bar upward. 9. Remove the pinch bolt from the lower intermediate shaft to the steering gear shaft. 10. Remove the lower intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 11. Remove the two bolts retaining the steering gear to the frame. 12. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle. Note: ONLY clamp the steering gear in a vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Failure to clamp the gear in this location may cause damage to the gear. 13. Mount the steering gear in a vise by clamping the vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Important: ^ ONLY use a 14 mm open end crows foot with a newton meter torque wrench when measuring the steering gear preload. ^ Measure the preload before making any adjustments to the steering gear. 14. Measure the steering gear preload by rotating the stub shaft back and forth in a +/- 45° rotation from center using a 14 mm open end crows foot and a newton meter torque wrench. Measure the steering gear preload prior to making an adjustment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4127 15. Using the J 35467-2, hold the adjuster plug and loosen the lock nut with a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. 16. Tighten the adjuster plug using the J 35467-2 while turning the stub shaft with a 14 mm open end crows foot in a back and forth movement in a +/45° rotation from center. Preload Specification Adjust the steering gear preload to 1.5 N.m - 2.0 N.m (13.2 lb in - 17.7 lb in) 17. While holding the adjuster plug with the J-35467-2, tighten the lock nut using a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. Tighten Tighten the adjuster lock nut to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 18. Re-measure the steering gear preload after tightening the lock nut to make sure the preload did not change while tightening the locking nut. 19. Reinstall the steering gear in the vehicle. 20. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 21. Connect the stabilizer links the stabilizer shaft and install the nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 65 N.m (48 lb ft). 22. Connect the outer tie rod ends to the knuckles. 23. Using the J 44015 , seat the ball stud taper to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 24. Remove the J 44015 and install a new nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4128 25. Install the front tires and wheels. 26. Lower the vehicle. Tool Information General Motors Special Tools can be purchased by calling SPX of Mexico at (552) 5-95-16-30. Warranty Information This labor code is for GM of Mexico dealers only. This labor code is for bulletin use only. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4134 Note: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 5. Use the SA91100C to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the bar. 8. Rotate the stabilizer bar upward. 9. Remove the pinch bolt from the lower intermediate shaft to the steering gear shaft. 10. Remove the lower intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 11. Remove the two bolts retaining the steering gear to the frame. 12. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle. Note: ONLY clamp the steering gear in a vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Failure to clamp the gear in this location may cause damage to the gear. 13. Mount the steering gear in a vise by clamping the vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Important: ^ ONLY use a 14 mm open end crows foot with a newton meter torque wrench when measuring the steering gear preload. ^ Measure the preload before making any adjustments to the steering gear. 14. Measure the steering gear preload by rotating the stub shaft back and forth in a +/- 45° rotation from center using a 14 mm open end crows foot and a newton meter torque wrench. Measure the steering gear preload prior to making an adjustment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4135 15. Using the J 35467-2, hold the adjuster plug and loosen the lock nut with a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. 16. Tighten the adjuster plug using the J 35467-2 while turning the stub shaft with a 14 mm open end crows foot in a back and forth movement in a +/45° rotation from center. Preload Specification Adjust the steering gear preload to 1.5 N.m - 2.0 N.m (13.2 lb in - 17.7 lb in) 17. While holding the adjuster plug with the J-35467-2, tighten the lock nut using a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. Tighten Tighten the adjuster lock nut to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 18. Re-measure the steering gear preload after tightening the lock nut to make sure the preload did not change while tightening the locking nut. 19. Reinstall the steering gear in the vehicle. 20. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 21. Connect the stabilizer links the stabilizer shaft and install the nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 65 N.m (48 lb ft). 22. Connect the outer tie rod ends to the knuckles. 23. Using the J 44015 , seat the ball stud taper to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 24. Remove the J 44015 and install a new nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4136 25. Install the front tires and wheels. 26. Lower the vehicle. Tool Information General Motors Special Tools can be purchased by calling SPX of Mexico at (552) 5-95-16-30. Warranty Information This labor code is for GM of Mexico dealers only. This labor code is for bulletin use only. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) HOSES/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the generator. 2. Remove the nuts (1) securing the evaporative emission (EVAP) hose/pipe (2) to the strut tower. 3. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose/pipe (2) from the purge solenoid. 4. Disconnect the engine EVAP purge hose/pipe from the chassis EVAP purge hose/pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 4139 5. Cap or plug both the engine and chassis EVAP purge hose/pipes to prevent contamination. 6. Remove the EVAP hose/pipe (2) from the retainer (3). 7. Remove the EVAP hose/pipe (2) from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the EVAP hose/pipe (2) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 4140 2. Install the EVAP hose/pipe (2) to the retainer (3). 3. Remove the caps or plugs from both the engine and chassis EVAP purge hose/pipes. 4. Connect the engine EVAP purge hose/pipe to the chassis EVAP purge hose/pipe. 5. Connect the EVAP purge hose/pipe (2) to the purge solenoid. 6. Install the nuts (1) securing the evaporative emission EVAP hose/pipe (2) to the strut tower. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Install the generator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 4141 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine/Chassis EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) HOSES/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE/CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not allow smoking or the use of open flames in the area where work on the fuel or EVAP system is taking place. Anytime work is being done on the fuel system, disconnect the negative battery cable, except for those tests where battery voltage is required. - Whenever fuel lines are removed, catch fuel in an approved container. Container opening must be a minimum of 300 mm (12 in) diameter to adequately catch the fluid. NOTE: Fuel/Vapor lines cannot be spliced or repaired. The line must be replaced (if damaged) with the same type of line. 1. Disconnect the engine evaporative emission (EVAP) purge hose/pipe from the chassis EVAP purge hose/pipe. 2. Cap or plug both the engine and chassis EVAP purge hose/pipes to prevent contamination. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose/pipe from the EVAP canister. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 4142 5. Cap or plug both the EVAP purge hose/pipe and canister to prevent contamination. 6. Release the pipe retainers (1) from the vehicle underbody. 7. Remove the purge pipe from the pipe retainers. 8. Remove the purge pipe from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the purge pipe to the vehicle. 2. Install the purge pipe to the pipe retainers. 3. Secure the pipe retainers (1) to the vehicle underbody. 4. Remove the caps or plugs from both the EVAP purge hose/pipe and canister. 5. Connect the EVAP purge hose/pipe to the EVAP canister. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 4143 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Remove the caps or plugs from both the engine and chassis EVAP purge hose/pipes. 8. Connect the engine EVAP purge hose/pipe to the chassis EVAP purge hose/pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative System Service Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporative System Service Port: Description and Operation EVAP SERVICE PORT The EVAP service port is located in the EVAP purge pipe between the EVAP purge valve and the EVAP canister. The service port is identified by a green colored cap. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair EGR Tube: Service and Repair EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) PIPE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the bolt (3) retaining the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe (4) to the EGR valve (1). 3. Remove the 2 bolts (5) securing the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. 4. Remove the EGR pipe (4). 5. Remove the EGR pipe to exhaust manifold gasket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the EGR pipe to exhaust manifold gasket. 2. Install the EGR pipe (4). 3. Install the 2 bolts (5) that secure the EGR pipe (4) to exhaust manifold. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4151 Tighten Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the bolt (3) the secures the EGR pipe (4) bolt to the EGR valve (1). Tighten Tighten the bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4155 EGR Valve: Description and Operation LINEAR EGR VALVE The linear EGR valve consists of the following: The EGR valve position sensor - The EGR valve position sensor cap - The bobbin and coil assembly - The valve pintle - The primary pole piece - The armature sleeve - The armature and base assembly - The exhaust gas inlet port - The exhaust gas outlet port Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4156 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe (4). 2. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. 3. Remove the EGR valve bolts (2). 4. Remove the EGR valve (1). 5. Remove the EGR valve gasket. 6. Clean the EGR valve mating surface. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the EGR valve (1) with a new gasket to the intake manifold. 2. Install the EGR valve bolts (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4157 Tighten Tighten the bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 3. Connect the EGR valve electrical connector. 4. Install the EGR pipe (4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair PCV Valve Hose: Service and Repair Crankcase Ventilation Hoses/Pipes Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PVC) fresh air pipe (1) from the air cleaner duct. 3. Remove the ignition control module bracket. 4. Disconnect the PVC fresh air pipe (1) from the valve cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4162 5. Disconnect the PVC foul air pipe (4) from the PVC valve. 6. Remove the PVC foul air pipe retaining clip (2) and bolt (3) from the intake manifold. 7. Disconnect the PVC foul air pipe (4) from the intake manifold. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the PVC foul air pipe (4) to the intake manifold. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the PVC foul air pipe retaining clip (2) and bolt (3) to the intake manifold. ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the PVC foul air pipe (4) to the PVC valve. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4163 4. Connect the PVC fresh air pipe (1) to the valve cover. 5. Install the ignition control module bracket. 6. Connect the PVC fresh air pipe (1) to the air cleaner duct. 7. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: The PCV valve is not removable from the valve rocker arm cover. The PCV valve and rocker arm cover must be replaced as an assembly. Remove the left valve rocker arm cover. 2. Remove the screws (1) from the PCV baffle. 3. Remove the PCV baffle (2). 4. Clean the PCV valve (3) or replace the valve cover (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4167 1. Install the PCV baffle (2). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the PCV baffle screws (1). ^ Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 3. Install the left valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4174 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4175 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4176 Steps 7-13 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4181 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4188 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4189 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4190 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4191 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE DUCT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Loosen the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fresh air pipe from the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner intake duct from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle body. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner intake duct to the MAF sensor and throttle body. 2. Install the PCV fresh air pipe to the air cleaner intake duct. 3. Tighten the clamps at both ends of the air cleaner intake duct. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the clamps to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 4204 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 4210 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4211 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4212 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by tilting to release the lid from the lower housing. 5. Remove the air cleaner element (2) from the lower housing (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air cleaner element (2) into the lower housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4213 2. Install the air cleaner assembly lid (1) by first engaging the hinge then lower the cover into the closed position. 3. Fasten the clamps (2) on the side of the air cleaner assembly. 4. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4217 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4220 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4221 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G Date: October 27, 2010 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB Top Tier Fuel Availability Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in May of 2010. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 4226 Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane grades : Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta) - Shell Canada (nationally) - Petro-Canada (nationally) - Sunoco-Canada (Ontario) - Esso-Canada (nationally) What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website, http://www.toptiergas.com/. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 4227 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 4228 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-047I Date: August 17, 2009 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - U.S. Only Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) (U.S. Only) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 (U.S. Only) 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 (U.S. Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (U.S. Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and additional sources to the Top Tier Fuel Retailers list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047H (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). In Canada, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with Legal Minimum additive Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards As of August 1, 2009, all grades of the following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards: - Chevron - Chevron-Canada - QuikTrip - Conoco Phillips 66 - 76 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 4229 - Shell - Shell-Canada - Entec Stations located in the greater Montgomery, Alabama area. - MFA Oil Company located throughout Missouri. - Kwik Trip, Inc. in Minnesota and Wisconsin and Kwik Star convenience stores in Iowa. The Somerset Refinery, Inc. at Somerset Oil stations in Kentucky. Aloha Petroleum - Tri-Par Oil Company - Turkey Hill Minit Markets - Texaco - Petro-Canada - Sunoco-Canada - Road Ranger located in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri, Ohio and Wisconsin What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began on May 3, 2004 and many fuel marketers have joined the program and have introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Where Can I find the Latest Information on TOP TIER Fuel and Retailers? On the web, please visit www.toptiergas.com for additional information and updated retailer lists. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: Audi, BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota and Volkswagen. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 4230 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Fuel Usage Precautions Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-035C Date: July 30, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Usage of E85 Fuels in GM Vehicles Models: 1997-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 1997-2008 Isuzu NPR Commercial Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year and additional engines with E85 capability. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-035B (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Customer Interest in E85 Fuel As the retail price of gasoline increases, some locations in the country are seeing price differentials between regular gasoline and E85 where E85 is selling for substantially less than regular grade gasoline. One result of this is that some customers have inquired if they are able to use E85 fuel in non-E85 compatible vehicles. Only vehicles designated for use with E85 should use E85 blended fuel. E85 compatibility is designated for vehicles that are certified to run on up to 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline. All other gasoline engines are designed to run on fuel that contains no more than 10% ethanol. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. Using E85 Fuels in Non-Compatible Vehicles General Motors is aware of an increased number of cases where customers have fueled non-FlexFuel designated vehicles with E85. Fueling non-FlexFuel designated vehicles with E85, or with fuels where the concentration of ethanol exceeds the ASTM specification of 10%, will result in one or more of the following conditions: Lean Driveability concerns such as hesitations, sags and/or possible stalling. SES lights due to OBD codes. Fuel Trim codes P0171 and/or P0174. Misfire codes (P0300). Various 02 sensor codes. Disabled traction control or Stability System disabled messages. Harsh/Firm transmission shifts. Fuel system and/or engine mechanical component degradation. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. If the dealer suspects that a non-FlexFuel designated vehicle brought in for service has been fueled with E85, the fuel in the vehicle's tank should be checked for alcohol content with tool J 44175. If the alcohol content exceeds 10% the fuel should be drained and the vehicle refilled with gasoline - preferably one of the Top Tier brands. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 4231 Repairs to non-FlexFuel vehicles that have been fueled with E85 are not covered under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. A complete list of GM's FlexFuel vehicles can be found in this Service Bulletin, or at www.livegreengoyellow.com. E85 Compatible Vehicles The only E85 compatible vehicles produced by General Motors are shown. Only vehicles that are listed in the E85 Compatible Vehicles section of this bulletin and/or www.livegreengoyellow.com are E85 compatible. All other gasoline and diesel engines are NOT E85 compatible. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. Repairs to non-FlexFuel vehicles that have been fueled with E85 are not covered under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 4232 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Refueling Station Information Bulletin No.: 06-06-04-030 Date: May 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Locations of E85 Refueling Stations and Expanded E85 Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Equipped for Flexible Fuel (E85) Attention: U.S. dealers - This bulletin should be directed to the Sales Manager as well as the Service Manager. Copies of this bulletin may be given to customers purchasing or considering the purchase of E85 capable vehicles, and may be left or posted in customer waiting areas. Canadian dealers - This bulletin is intended for the U.S. Market and provides only limited information relevant to the Canadian market. Customer Questions, Concerns and Refueling Locations for E85 Fuel Extensive information on E85 Ethanol based fuels can be found at www.livegreengoyellow.com . This General Motors site contains vital information that anticipates and answers customer questions and concerns about E85 fuel. Part of the information is a useful link that provides the location nationally of all E85 refueling stations. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 4233 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Top Tier Detergent Gasoline Information Bulletin No.: 04-06-00-047 Date: June 24, 2004 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Top Tier Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) Models: 2005 and Prior All General Motors Passenger Cars and Trucks (U.S. Only) A new class of gasoline, called Top Tier Detergent Gasoline, will be appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by four automotive companies. A description of the concept and benefits of Top Tier is provided in the following question and answer section. What is Top Tier Detergent Gasoline? Top Tier Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by four automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Who developed Top Tier Detergent Gasoline standards? Top Tier Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by four automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda and Toyota. Why was Top Tier Detergent Gasoline developed? Top Tier Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet Top Tier Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, Top Tier was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the four automotive companies join together to develop Top Tier? All four corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline? Top Tier Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using Top Tier Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Where can Top Tier Detergent Gasoline be purchased? The Top Tier program began on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and are making plans to introduce Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, a list of all fuel marketers meeting Top Tier standards will be made available. For now, look for the "Top Tier" designation at the gas pump. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4234 Fuel: Specifications GASOLINE OCTANE Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. ADDITIVES To provide cleaner air, all gasoline in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. You should not have to add anything to your fuel. Gasoline containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasoline may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasoline, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier. NOTICE: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don't use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn't be covered under your warranty. Some gasoline that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasoline. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service. CALIFORNIA FUEL If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp ) and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > With Special Tool Fuel: Testing and Inspection With Special Tool ALCOHOL/CONTAMINANTS-IN-FUEL DIAGNOSIS (WITH SPECIAL TOOL) TEST DESCRIPTION Fuel quality can affect vehicle performance. Gasoline and gasoline blends that are contaminated or contain excessive amounts of alcohol can affect vehicle driveability, fuel economy, fuel system components, and emissions. Excessive alcohol in the fuel may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and subsequent fuel filter restriction. Some types of alcohol are more detrimental to fuel system components than others. Ethanol is commonly used in gasoline, but in concentrations of no more than 10 percent. Some fuels, such as E85, contain a very high percent of ethanol. Fuel with more than 10 percent ethanol may cause driveability conditions in vehicles such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or no start. If excessive alcohol in the fuel is suspected, then use the following procedure to test the fuel quality. TEST PROCEDURE 1. Turn ON the J 44175 Fuel Composition Tester. 2. Verify the fuel composition tester is operational by measuring the AC frequency output with a DMM. A frequency without a fuel sample in the test cell indicates that the tester is working correctly. 3. Install the J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 4. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. IMPORTANT: You will need to bleed the J 34730-1A a few times in order to obtain an accurate fuel sample. 5. Place the bleed hose (1) of the fuel pressure gage into the 100 ml beaker (2). 6. Command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. 7. Slowly open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage, until an adequate fuel sample is obtained. 8. If water appears in the fuel sample, clean the fuel system and replace the fuel in the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > With Special Tool > Page 4237 9. Pour the fuel sample from the beaker (1) into the J 44175, until the level of the fuel is at the top of each fuel test port (2). IMPORTANT: Do not allow any substances other than gasoline, ethanol/gasoline blends, air, or acetone into the test ports of the fuel composition tester. Contaminants in the fuel composition tester could result in misdiagnosis. 10. Observe the diagnostic LEDs on the fuel composition tester. If the red fuel diagnostic LED is illuminated, a fuel contamination condition exists. Refer to Fuel System Cleaning. 11. Measure the output frequency of the fuel composition tester. 12. Subtract 50 from the reading on the DMM to obtain the percentage of alcohol in the fuel sample. Refer to the examples in the table. 13. If the fuel sample contains more than 10 percent ethanol, replace the fuel in the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > With Special Tool > Page 4238 Fuel: Testing and Inspection Without Special Tool ALCOHOL/CONTAMINANTS-IN-FUEL DIAGNOSIS (WITHOUT SPECIAL TOOL) Water contamination in the fuel system may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, stalling, no start, or misfires in one or more cylinders. Water may collect near a single fuel injector, at the lowest point in the fuel rail, and cause a misfire in that cylinder. If the fuel system is contaminated with water, inspect the fuel system components for rust, or deterioration. Alcohol concentrations of 10 percent or greater in fuel can be detrimental to fuel system components. Alcohol contamination may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and subsequent fuel filter restriction. Fuel contaminated with alcohol may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or no start. Some types of alcohol are more detrimental to fuel system components than others. Alcohol in Fuel Testing Procedure The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear. If alcohol contamination is suspected then use the following procedure to test the fuel quality. 1. Using a 100 ml specified cylinder with 1 ml graduation marks, fill the cylinder with fuel to the 90 ml mark. 2. Add 10 ml of water in order to bring the total fluid volume to 100 ml and install a stopper. 3. Shake the cylinder vigorously for 10-15 seconds. 4. Carefully loosen the stopper in order to release the pressure. 5. Re-install the stopper and shake the cylinder vigorously again for 10-15 seconds. 6. Put the cylinder on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow adequate liquid separation. If alcohol is present in the fuel, the volume of the lower layer, which would now contain both alcohol and water, will be more than 10 ml. For example, if the volume of the lower layer is increased to 15 ml, this indicates at least 5 percent alcohol in the fuel. The actual amount of alcohol may be somewhat more because this procedure does not extract all of the alcohol from the fuel. Particulate Contaminants in Fuel Testing Procedure The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear. If the sample appears cloudy, or contaminated with water, as indicated by a water layer at the bottom of the sample, use the following procedure to diagnose the fuel. 1. Using an approved fuel container, draw approximately 0.5 liter of fuel. 2. Place the cylinder on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow settling of the particulate contamination. Particulate contamination will show up in various shapes and colors. Sand will typically be identified by a white or light brown crystals. Rubber will appear as black and irregular particles. If particles are found clean the entire fuel system thoroughly. Refer to Fuel System Cleaning. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation FUEL FILLER CAP NOTE: If a fuel tank filler cap requires replacement, use only a fuel tank filler cap with the same features. Failure to use the correct fuel tank filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel and EVAP system. The fuel fill pipe has a tethered fuel filler cap. A torque-limiting device prevents the cap from being over-tightened. To install the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear audible clicks. This indicates that the cap is correctly torqued and fully seated. A fuel filler cap that is not fully seated may cause a malfunction in the Emission System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4247 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Connect the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection. 3. Install the bleed hose into an approved container and open the valve to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 4. Disconnect the fuel pressure gage from the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's Fuel Injector: Customer Interest Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 03-06-04-030G Date: April 22, 2009 Subject: Various Driveability Symptoms Due to Clogged Fuel Injectors, MIL/SES DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0300, P1174, P1175 (Clean Fuel Injectors and/or Perform Injector Test With AFIT CH-47976) Models: 2005-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with Engine RPOs listed in the Table above and MULTEC(R) 2 Fuel Injectors Attention: GM does not support cleaning injectors on any engines that are not listed in this bulletin. Engines other than the ones listed in this bulletin that diagnosis indicates having restricted injectors should have those injectors replaced. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model year to 2009 and to provide applicable engine RPO table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following various driveability symptoms: - Extended Crank Time - Hard to Start - MIL/SES Illuminated with DTCs - Hesitation - Lack of Power - Surge or Chuggle - Rough Idle - Light or Intermittent Misfire Cause Due to various factors, the fuel injectors may become restricted. Extensive testing has demonstrated that fuel related issues are the cause of clogged injectors. At this point, no specific fuel, fuel constituent, or engine condition has been identified as causing the restriction. The restriction causes the engine to operate at a lean air fuel ratio. This may either trigger the MIL to illuminate or the engine to develop various driveability symptoms. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 4256 Fuel injector restrictions, deposits can be cleaned on the vehicle using the following procedure. Under NO circumstances should this procedure be modified, changed or shortened. As a long term solution, and to prevent reoccurrence, customers should be encouraged to use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For further information on Top Tier detergent gasoline and fuel retailers, please refer to the following Corporate Bulletin Numbers: - 04-06-04-047G (U.S. Only) - 05-06-04-022D (Canada ONLY) Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent approved for use with General Motors fuel system components. Other injector cleaners may cause damage to plastics, plated metals or bearings. General Motors has completed extensive laboratory testing of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, and can assure its compatibility with General Motors fuel system components, as long as the cleaning procedure is followed correctly. Injector Cleaning Procedure The following tools, or their equivalent, are required: - CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42964 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42873 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - * One bottle of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, P/N 88861802 (in Canada, P/N 88861804) - * One bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, P/N 88861011 (in Canada, P/N 88861012) Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976) Some dealers may not have an Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976). Dealers can contact to order an AFIT- CH-47976. Dealers still can test the fuel injectors without an AFIT. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/ J 39021 or Tech 2(R)) in SI. Important As mentioned in the AFIT User Guide, vehicles that are not listed in the AFIT menu can still be tested with the AFIT. Depending on the model, it may be possible to enter the previous model year and proceed with testing using the DLC connection. If this is not possible on the model that you are working on, it will be necessary to use the direct connection method outlined in the AFIT User Guide (See Pages 17-31). General Motors recommends that the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) be used in testing fuel injectors. If the SI diagnostics do not isolate a cause for this concern, use the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT - CH-47976) to perform an "Injector Test" as outlined in the AFIT User Guide. The AFIT "Injector Test" measures the flow characteristics of all fuel injectors, which is more precise when compared with the standard Tech 2(R) fuel injector balance test. As a result, the AFIT is more likely to isolate the cause of a P1174 DTC (for example: if it is being caused by a fuel injector concern). The CH-47976 (Active Fuel Injector Tester - AFIT) can also be used to measure fuel pressure and fuel system leak down. Also, as mentioned in the P1174 SI diagnosis, if the misfire current counters or misfire graph indicate any misfires, it may be an indicator of the cylinder that is causing the concern. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH-47976) in SI for additional instructions. Training (U.S.) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GM Training Website: 1. After logging into the training website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "web video library." 2. Then choose "technical." 3. Next, within the search box, type in September course number "10206.09D. 4. This will bring up a link with this course. Scroll through to choose "feature topic." 5. At this point, the seminar can be chosen to view or the video related to the AFIT. Additional training is available from the training website. Please see TECHassist 16044.18T2 Active Fuel Injector Tester and also see 16044.14D1 GM Powertrain Performance for more information on GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 4257 Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Training (Canada) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GMPro LMS Training Website: 1. After logging into the website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "Catalog." 2. Then choose "Catalog Search." 3. Next, within the search box, Select Course Number - Contains - "T" then select search. 4. This will bring up a list of TECHassist courses. Scroll through to choose "Active Fuel Injector Tester" and select "View." 5. At this point, a new window will open and the program can be Launched. Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Techlink Additional information can be found on AFIT (June 2006 Edition) and GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner (November 2006 Edition) in Techlink. To access the articles, take the following path: 1. Go to GM DealerWorld (U.S.) or the GM GlobalConnect (Canada). 2. Click on the Service Tab in DealerWorld (in Canada, click Technican Resources in the Service Library of GM GlobalConnect). 3. Click on the GM Techlink Hyperlink. 4. Click on the Archives Hyperlink at GM Techlink. - Click on 06-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the Active Fuel Injector Tester Link in the June 2006 Techlink Article. - Click on 11-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the GM Top Engine Cleaner Replaced Link in the November 2006 Techlink Article. Injector Cleaning Procedure Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank. Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have any out of specification injectors replaced. 1. For 4, 5 and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A - Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 2. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for a second time for an 8 cylinder engine (8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid 120 ml (4 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 3. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 4. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by either removing the fuel pump fuse or the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 4258 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 6. Relieve fuel pressure and disconnect the fuel feed and return lines at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return lines coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls, due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 11. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove the J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 15. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus (P/N 88861011 [in Canada, P/N 88861012]) into the tank and advise the customer to fill the tank. 16. Review the benefits of using Top Tier Detergent gasoline with the customer and recommend that they add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Parts Information * Only 1/8 of the cost may be claimed for 4 and 6 cylinder engines and 1/4 of the cost for 8 cylinder engines. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 4259 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 03-06-04-030G Date: April 22, 2009 Subject: Various Driveability Symptoms Due to Clogged Fuel Injectors, MIL/SES DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0300, P1174, P1175 (Clean Fuel Injectors and/or Perform Injector Test With AFIT CH-47976) Models: 2005-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with Engine RPOs listed in the Table above and MULTEC(R) 2 Fuel Injectors Attention: GM does not support cleaning injectors on any engines that are not listed in this bulletin. Engines other than the ones listed in this bulletin that diagnosis indicates having restricted injectors should have those injectors replaced. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model year to 2009 and to provide applicable engine RPO table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following various driveability symptoms: - Extended Crank Time - Hard to Start - MIL/SES Illuminated with DTCs - Hesitation - Lack of Power - Surge or Chuggle - Rough Idle - Light or Intermittent Misfire Cause Due to various factors, the fuel injectors may become restricted. Extensive testing has demonstrated that fuel related issues are the cause of clogged injectors. At this point, no specific fuel, fuel constituent, or engine condition has been identified as causing the restriction. The restriction causes the engine to operate at a lean air fuel ratio. This may either trigger the MIL to illuminate or the engine to develop various driveability symptoms. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 4265 Fuel injector restrictions, deposits can be cleaned on the vehicle using the following procedure. Under NO circumstances should this procedure be modified, changed or shortened. As a long term solution, and to prevent reoccurrence, customers should be encouraged to use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For further information on Top Tier detergent gasoline and fuel retailers, please refer to the following Corporate Bulletin Numbers: - 04-06-04-047G (U.S. Only) - 05-06-04-022D (Canada ONLY) Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent approved for use with General Motors fuel system components. Other injector cleaners may cause damage to plastics, plated metals or bearings. General Motors has completed extensive laboratory testing of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, and can assure its compatibility with General Motors fuel system components, as long as the cleaning procedure is followed correctly. Injector Cleaning Procedure The following tools, or their equivalent, are required: - CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42964 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42873 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - * One bottle of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, P/N 88861802 (in Canada, P/N 88861804) - * One bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, P/N 88861011 (in Canada, P/N 88861012) Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976) Some dealers may not have an Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976). Dealers can contact to order an AFIT- CH-47976. Dealers still can test the fuel injectors without an AFIT. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/ J 39021 or Tech 2(R)) in SI. Important As mentioned in the AFIT User Guide, vehicles that are not listed in the AFIT menu can still be tested with the AFIT. Depending on the model, it may be possible to enter the previous model year and proceed with testing using the DLC connection. If this is not possible on the model that you are working on, it will be necessary to use the direct connection method outlined in the AFIT User Guide (See Pages 17-31). General Motors recommends that the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) be used in testing fuel injectors. If the SI diagnostics do not isolate a cause for this concern, use the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT - CH-47976) to perform an "Injector Test" as outlined in the AFIT User Guide. The AFIT "Injector Test" measures the flow characteristics of all fuel injectors, which is more precise when compared with the standard Tech 2(R) fuel injector balance test. As a result, the AFIT is more likely to isolate the cause of a P1174 DTC (for example: if it is being caused by a fuel injector concern). The CH-47976 (Active Fuel Injector Tester - AFIT) can also be used to measure fuel pressure and fuel system leak down. Also, as mentioned in the P1174 SI diagnosis, if the misfire current counters or misfire graph indicate any misfires, it may be an indicator of the cylinder that is causing the concern. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH-47976) in SI for additional instructions. Training (U.S.) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GM Training Website: 1. After logging into the training website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "web video library." 2. Then choose "technical." 3. Next, within the search box, type in September course number "10206.09D. 4. This will bring up a link with this course. Scroll through to choose "feature topic." 5. At this point, the seminar can be chosen to view or the video related to the AFIT. Additional training is available from the training website. Please see TECHassist 16044.18T2 Active Fuel Injector Tester and also see 16044.14D1 GM Powertrain Performance for more information on GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 4266 Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Training (Canada) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GMPro LMS Training Website: 1. After logging into the website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "Catalog." 2. Then choose "Catalog Search." 3. Next, within the search box, Select Course Number - Contains - "T" then select search. 4. This will bring up a list of TECHassist courses. Scroll through to choose "Active Fuel Injector Tester" and select "View." 5. At this point, a new window will open and the program can be Launched. Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Techlink Additional information can be found on AFIT (June 2006 Edition) and GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner (November 2006 Edition) in Techlink. To access the articles, take the following path: 1. Go to GM DealerWorld (U.S.) or the GM GlobalConnect (Canada). 2. Click on the Service Tab in DealerWorld (in Canada, click Technican Resources in the Service Library of GM GlobalConnect). 3. Click on the GM Techlink Hyperlink. 4. Click on the Archives Hyperlink at GM Techlink. - Click on 06-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the Active Fuel Injector Tester Link in the June 2006 Techlink Article. - Click on 11-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the GM Top Engine Cleaner Replaced Link in the November 2006 Techlink Article. Injector Cleaning Procedure Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank. Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have any out of specification injectors replaced. 1. For 4, 5 and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A - Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 2. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for a second time for an 8 cylinder engine (8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid 120 ml (4 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 3. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 4. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by either removing the fuel pump fuse or the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 4267 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 6. Relieve fuel pressure and disconnect the fuel feed and return lines at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return lines coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls, due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 11. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove the J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 15. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus (P/N 88861011 [in Canada, P/N 88861012]) into the tank and advise the customer to fill the tank. 16. Review the benefits of using Top Tier Detergent gasoline with the customer and recommend that they add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Parts Information * Only 1/8 of the cost may be claimed for 4 and 6 cylinder engines and 1/4 of the cost for 8 cylinder engines. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 4268 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 04-06-04-051B > Jan > 06 > Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-051B Date: January 04, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Maintenance Cleaning of Fuel Injectors Models: 2006 and Prior All General Motors Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the name and part number of GM Fuel System Treatment. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-051A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools, equipment and programs to support fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. General Motors does not endorse, support or acknowledge the need for fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. Fuel injector cleaning is approved only when performed as directed by a published GM driveability or DTC diagnostic service procedure. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, the only preventative maintenance currently endorsed by GM regarding its gasoline engine fuel systems is the addition of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, P/N 88861011 (for U.S. ACDelco(R), use P/N 88861013) (in Canada, P/N 88861012), added to a tank of fuel at each oil change. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030A for proper cleaning instructions. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 04-06-04-051B > Jan > 06 > Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-051B Date: January 04, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Maintenance Cleaning of Fuel Injectors Models: 2006 and Prior All General Motors Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the name and part number of GM Fuel System Treatment. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-051A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools, equipment and programs to support fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. General Motors does not endorse, support or acknowledge the need for fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. Fuel injector cleaning is approved only when performed as directed by a published GM driveability or DTC diagnostic service procedure. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, the only preventative maintenance currently endorsed by GM regarding its gasoline engine fuel systems is the addition of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, P/N 88861011 (for U.S. ACDelco(R), use P/N 88861013) (in Canada, P/N 88861012), added to a tank of fuel at each oil change. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030A for proper cleaning instructions. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications Resistance Injector Coil .......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 11 - 14 ohms Difference between Injectors (maximum allowable) .................................................................................................................................................. 3 ohms Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4280 Fuel Injector: Mechanical Specifications If the pressure drop value for each fuel injector is within 20 kPa (3 psi) of the average pressure drop value, the fuel injectors are flowing properly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuel Injector: Connector Views Fuel Injector 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4283 Fuel Injector 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4284 Fuel Injector 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4285 Fuel Injector 4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4286 Fuel Injector 5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4287 Fuel Injector 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4288 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation FUEL INJECTORS The fuel injector assembly is a solenoid device controlled by the control module that meters pressurized fuel to a single engine cylinder. The control module energizes the high-impedance, 12 ohm, injector solenoid (4) to open a normally closed ball valve (1). This allows fuel to flow into the top of the injector, past the ball valve, and through a director plate (3) at the injector outlet. The director plate has machined holes that control the fuel flow, generating a spray of finely atomized fuel at the injector tip. Fuel from the injector tip is directed at the intake valve, causing the fuel to become further atomized and vaporized before entering the combustion chamber. This fine atomization improves fuel economy and emissions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Coil Test FUEL INJECTOR COIL TEST CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The powertrain control module (PCM) enables the appropriate fuel injector on the intake stroke for each cylinder. Ignition voltage is supplied directly to the fuel injectors. The PCM controls each fuel injector by grounding the control circuit via a solid state device called a driver. A fuel injector coil winding resistance that is too high or low will affect engine driveability. A fuel injector control circuit DTC may not set, but a misfire may be apparent. The fuel injector coil windings are affected by temperature. The resistance of the fuel injector coil windings will increase as the temperature of the fuel injector increases. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS - Monitoring the misfire current counters, or misfire graph, may help isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition. - Operating the vehicle over a wide temperature range may help isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition. - Perform the fuel injector coil test within the conditions of the customers concern. A fuel injector condition may only be apparent at a certain temperature, or under certain conditions. - If the fuel injector coil test does not isolate the condition perform the fuel injector balance test. Refer to Fuel Injector Balance Test with Special Tool or Fuel Injector Balance Test with Tech 2. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 4291 Steps 1-11 The numbers refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 3. This step tests each fuel injector resistance within a specific temperature range. If any of the fuel injectors display a resistance outside of the specified value, replace the fuel injector. 4. This step determines if all of the fuel injectors are within 3 ohms of each other. If the highest resistance value is within 3 ohms of the lowest resistance value, then all of the fuel injector coil windings are OK. 6. This step determines if the ignition 1 voltage circuit under the intake plenum is causing the concern. 8. This step determines which fuel injector is faulty. After subtracting the highest and lowest resistance values from the average value, replace the fuel injector that has the greatest resistance difference from the average. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 4292 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Balance Test With special Tool FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE TEST WITH SPECIAL TOOL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The scan tool is first used to energize the fuel pump relay. The fuel injector tester is then used to pulse each injector for a precise amount of time, allowing a measured amount of fuel into the manifold. This causes a drop in system fuel pressure that can be recorded and used to compare each injector. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 4293 Steps 1-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 4294 Steps 6-8 The numbers refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 3. The engine coolant temperature (ECT) must be below the operating temperature in order to avoid irregular fuel pressure readings due to hot soak fuel boiling. 6. If the pressure drop value for each fuel injector is within 20 kPa (3 psi) of the average pressure drop value, the fuel injectors are flowing properly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 4295 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Balance Test with Tech 2 FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE TEST WITH TECH 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The scan tool first energizes the fuel pump and then the fuel injectors, for a precise amount of time, allowing a measured amount of fuel into the manifold. This causes a drop in system fuel pressure that can be recorded and used to compare each injector. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 4296 Steps 1-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 4297 Steps 6-8 The number refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 3. The engine coolant temperature (ECT) must be below the operating temperature in order to avoid irregular fuel pressure readings due to hot soak fuel boiling. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure FUEL INJECTOR CLEANING PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-Off Adapters - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 42873-1 3/8 Fuel Line Shut-Off Valve - J 42873-2 5/16 Return Pipe Shut-Off Valve - J 42964-1 3/8 Fuel Pipe Shut-Off Valve - J 42964-2 5/16 Fuel Pipe Shut-Off Valve NOTE: GM Top-Engine Cleaner is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. Do not use other cleaning agents, as they may contain methanol which can damage fuel system components. - Under NO circumstances should the top engine cleaner be added to the vehicles fuel tank, as it may damage the fuel pump and other system components. - Do not exceed a 10 percent cleaning solution concentration. Higher concentrations may damage fuel system components. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the 10 percent cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. IMPORTANT: Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have the injectors replaced. - During this procedure you will need a total of 960 ml (32.4 oz) of cleaning solution. That is 2 tanks of solution for the J 35800-A. Other brands of tools may have a different capacity and would therefore require more or less tanks to complete the procedure. You must use all 960 ml (32.4 oz) of solution to ensure complete injector cleaning. 1. Obtain J 35800-A (2). 2. For US dealers, empty 2 pre-measured GM Top-Engine Cleaner containers, 24 ml (0.812 oz) each, GM P/N 12346535, into the J 35800-A. IMPORTANT: Make sure the valve at the bottom of the canister (3) is closed. 3. For Canadian dealers, measure and dispense 48 ml (1.62 oz) of Top-Engine Cleaner, Canadian P/N 992872, into the J 35800-A. 4. If you are using any other brand of tank you will need a total of 96 ml (3.24 oz) of Top-Engine Cleaner mixed with 864 ml (29.16 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 5. Fill the injector cleaning tank with regular unleaded gasoline. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 6. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by removing the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 7. Disconnect the fuel feed and return line, if equipped, at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return line, if equipped, coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, or J 42964-1, and J 42964-2 or J 42873-1, and J 42873-2 as appropriate for the fuel system. 8. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 9. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 10. Start and idle the engine until it stalls due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 11. Disconnect J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove J 37287 or J 42964-1, and J 42964-2 or J 42873-1, and J 42873-2 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional 2 minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 4300 15. Repeat steps 1-5 of the Injector Balance Test, and record the fuel pressure drop from each injector. 16. Subtract the lowest fuel pressure drop from the highest fuel pressure drop. If the value is 15 kPa (2 psi) or less, no additional action is required. If the value is greater than 15 kPa (2 psi), replace the injector with the lowest fuel pressure drop. 17. Add one ounce of Port Fuel Injector Cleaner, GM P/N 12345104 (Canadian P/N 10953467), to the vehicle fuel tank for each gallon of gasoline estimated to be in the fuel tank. Instruct the customer to add the reminder of the bottle of Port Fuel Injector Cleaner to the vehicle fuel tank at the next fill-up. 18. Advise the customer to change brands of fuel and to add GM Port Fuel Injector Cleaner every 5 000 km (3,000 mi). GM Port Fuel Injector Cleaner contains the same additives that the fuel companies are removing from the fuel to reduce costs. Regular use of GM Port Fuel Injector Cleaner should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 19. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 4301 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector Replacement FUEL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care in removing the fuel injectors in order to prevent damage to the fuel injector electrical connector pins or the fuel injector nozzles. Do not immerse the fuel injector in any type of cleaner. The fuel injector is an electrical component and may be damaged by this cleaning method. IMPORTANT: If the fuel injectors are found to be leaking, the engine oil may be contaminated with fuel. 1. Remove the fuel rail. 2. Remove the fuel injector retaining clip (1). 3. Remove the fuel injector (3) from the fuel rail. 4. Remove the fuel injector upper O-ring (2). 5. Remove the fuel injector lower O-ring (4). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel injector upper O-ring (2). 2. Install the fuel injector lower O-ring (4). 3. Lubricate the fuel injector upper O-ring (2) using GM P/N 12345616 (Canadian P/N 993182). 4. Install the fuel injector (3) to the fuel rail. 5. Install the fuel injector retaining clip (1). 6. Install the fuel rail. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 4302 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector Sight Shield Replacement Fuel Injector Sight Shield Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the injector sight shield from the studs. 2. If replacing the sight shield studs, remove the studs from the intake manifold. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 4303 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. If the injector sight shield studs were removed, install the studs to the intake manifold. ^ Tighten the studs to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 2. Install the injector sight shield to the studs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Line Coupler: Description and Operation QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS Quick-connect fittings provide a simplified means of installing and connecting fuel system components. The fittings consist of a unique female connector and a compatible male pipe end. O-rings, located inside the female connector, provide the fuel seal. Integral locking tabs inside the female connector hold the fittings together. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) QUICK CONNECT FITTING(S) SERVICE (METAL COLLAR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 37088-A Fuel Line Disconnect Tool Set REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing any fuel system connection. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Remove the retainer from the quick-connect fitting. 3. Blow dirt out of the fitting using compressed air. CAUTION: Refer to Fuel and Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hose/Pipe Connection Cleaning Notice in Service Precautions. - Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 4. Choose the correct tool from the J 37088-A for the size of the fitting. Insert the tool into the female connector, then push inward in order to release the locking tabs. 5. Pull the connection apart. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 4309 CAUTION: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution in Service Precautions. 6. Use a clean shop towel in order to wipe off the male pipe end. 7. Inspect both ends of the fitting for dirt and burrs. Clean or replace the components as required. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe end. CAUTION: Refer to Fuel Pipe Fitting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Push both sides of the fitting together in order to snap the retaining tabs into place. 3. Once installed, pull on both sides of the fitting in order to make sure the connection is secure. 4. Install the retainer to the quick-connect fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 4310 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Plastic Collar) QUICK CONNECT FITTING(S) SERVICE (PLASTIC COLLAR) REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: There are several types of plastic collar fuel and evaporative emission quick connect fittings used on this vehicle. - Bartholomew (1) - Q Release (2) - Squeeze to Release (3) - Sliding Retainer (4) The following instructions apply to all of these types of plastic collar quick connect fittings except where indicated. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing any fuel system connection. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Using compressed air, blow any dirt out of the quick-connect fitting. CAUTION: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 4311 - Refer to Fuel and Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hose/Pipe Connection Cleaning Notice in Service Precautions. - Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 3. This step applies to Bartholomew style connectors ONLY. Squeeze the plastic quick connect fitting release tabs. 4. This step applies to Q Release style connectors ONLY. Release the fitting by Pushing the tab toward the other side of the slot in the fitting. 5. This step applies to Squeeze to Release style connectors ONLY. Squeeze where indicated by arrows on both sides of the plastic ring surrounding the quick connect fitting. 6. This step applies to Sliding Retainer style connectors ONLY. Release the fitting by pressing on one side of the release tab causing it to push in slightly. If the tab doesn't move try pressing the tab in from the opposite side. The tab will only move in one direction 7. Pull the connection apart. CAUTION: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 4312 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male connection end. CAUTION: Refer to Fuel Pipe Fitting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Push both sides of the quick-connect fitting together in order to cause the retaining feature to snap into place. 3. Once installed, pull on both sides of the quick-connect fitting in order to make sure the connection is secure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR The fuel pressure regulator is integrated into the fuel filter cover on the primary fuel tank module. The fuel pressure regulator uses a spring with a preset tension and a stainless steel ball inserted into a precision ground seat in order to regulate fuel pressure. This type of fuel pressure regulator is not serviceable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................384-425 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. - Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure connection, located on the fuel rail. 2. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 3. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the gage. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool until all of the air is bled out of the gage. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 8. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure gage to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. 6. Place the shop towel in an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4322 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the primary fuel tank module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel tank module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter, past the fuel pressure regulator, and through the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator has a T-joint that diverts the needed fuel to the fuel rail with the unused fuel dropping back into the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The primary fuel tank module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4323 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4324 Steps 7-13 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Rail: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL ASSEMBLY The fuel rail assembly attaches to the engine intake manifold. The fuel rail assembly performs the following functions: - Positions the injectors in the intake manifold - Distributes fuel evenly to the injectors - Integrates the fuel pulse dampener into the fuel metering system Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4328 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always install the fuel injector O-rings in the proper position. If the upper and lower O-rings are different colors (black and brown), be sure to install the black O-ring in the upper position and the brown O-ring in the lower position on the fuel injector. The O-rings are the same size but are made of different materials. IMPORTANT: When servicing the fuel rail assembly, precautions must be taken to prevent dirt and other contaminants from entering the fuel passages. It is recommended that the fittings be capped, and the holes be plugged during servicing. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold. 3. Disconnect the engine fuel feed pipe (1) at the fuel rail (4). 4. Disconnect the main fuel injector harness electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor and camshaft position sensor electrical connectors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4329 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the fuel injectors. 7. Remove the fuel rail retaining bolts (2). 8. Remove the fuel rail assembly (1). 9. Remove the injector O-ring seal from the spray tip end of each injector. 10. If removing the fuel injectors from the fuel rail is necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when servicing the fuel system components, especially the fuel injector electrical connectors, the fuel injector tips, and the injector O-rings. Plug the inlet and the outlet ports of the fuel rail in order to prevent contamination. - Do not use compressed air to clean the fuel rail assembly as this may damage the fuel rail components. - Do not immerse the fuel rail assembly in a solvent bath in order to prevent damage to the fuel rail assembly. 1. If the fuel injectors were removed from the fuel rail. 2. Lubricate the fuel injector O-rings using GM P/N 12345616, (Canadian P/N 993182) 3. Install the fuel injector nozzles into the lower intake manifold injector bores. 4. Press on the fuel rail (1) using the palms of both hands until the fuel injectors are fully seated. 5. Install the fuel rail attaching bolts (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 6. Install the injector electrical harness to the fuel rail. 7. Apply lubricant to the fuel injector electrical connectors. GM P/N 12377900, (Canadian P/N 10953529). 8. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors. 9. Connect the coolant temperature sensor and camshaft position sensor electrical connectors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4330 10. Connect the main fuel injector electrical harness connector. 11. Connect the fuel feed pipe (1) at the fuel rail (4). 12. Install the upper intake manifold. 13. Connect the negative battery cable. 14. Inspect for fuel leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Return Line: Description and Operation FUEL FEED PIPES The fuel feed pipe carries fuel from the fuel tank to the fuel injection system. The fuel pipe consists of 3 sections: - The rear fuel pipe is located from the top of the fuel tank to the chassis fuel pipe. The rear fuel pipe is constructed of nylon. - The chassis fuel pipe is located under the vehicle and connects the rear fuel pipe to the engine compartment fuel pipe. The chassis fuel pipe is constructed of steel with a section of rubber hose. - The engine compartment fuel pipe connects the chassis fuel feed pipe to the fuel rail. The engine compartment fuel pipe is constructed of steel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the engine fuel feed pipe or the engine fuel return pipe. Replace a damaged engine fuel feed pipe or the engine fuel return pipe. 1. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Remove the 2 nuts securing the fuel hose/pipe to the engine and transaxle. 4. Remove the fuel hose/pipe retainers from the threaded studs on the engine and transaxle. 5. Clean all engine fuel pipe connections and areas surrounding the engine fuel pipe connections before disconnecting the engine fuel pipe connections to avoid possible contamination of the fuel system. 6. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) from the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4336 7. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 8. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (1) from the fuel rail (4). 9. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 10. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the fuel pipe retainer (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the fuel hose/pipe to the engine. 2. Install the fuel hose/pipe retainers to the threaded studs on the engine and transaxle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4337 3. Install the 2 nuts securing the fuel hose/pipe to the engine and transaxle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 28 N.m (21 lb ft). 4. Install the fuel hose/pipe to the fuel pipe retainer (2). 5. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 6. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (1) to the fuel rail (4). 7. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 8. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) to the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 9. Install the exhaust crossover pipe. 10. Prime the fuel system. 1. Cycle the ignition ON for 5 seconds and then OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Repeat step 7.1 twice. 3. Crank the engine until it starts. The maximum starter motor cranking time is 20 seconds. 4. If the engine does not start, repeat steps 7.1-7.4. 11. Run the engine and check for fuel system leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4338 Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not allow smoking or the use of open flames in the area where work on the fuel or EVAP system is taking place. Anytime work is being done on the fuel system, disconnect the negative battery cable, except for those tests where battery voltage is required. - Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. - Whenever fuel lines are removed, catch fuel in an approved container. Container opening must be a minimum of 300 mm (12 in) diameter to adequately catch the fluid. NOTE: Fuel/Vapor lines cannot be spliced or repaired. The line must be replaced (if damaged) with the same type of line. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) from the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 4. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4339 5. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. Disconnect the chassis fuel hose/pipe (2) from the fuel tank. 7. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 8. Release the pipe retainers (1) from the vehicle underbody. 9. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the pipe retainers. 10. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel hose/pipe to the vehicle. 2. Install the fuel hose/pipe from the pipe retainers. 3. Attach the pipe retainers (1) to the vehicle underbody. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4340 4. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 5. Connect the chassis fuel hose/pipe (2) to the fuel tank. 6. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. 7. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 8. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) to the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 9. Connect the negative battery terminal. 10. Prime the fuel system. 1. Cycle the ignition ON for 5 seconds and then OFF for 10 seconds. Repeat cycling twice. 2. Crank the engine until it starts. The maximum starter motor cranking time is 20 seconds. 3. If the engine does not start, repeat steps. 11. Run the engine and check the system for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Supply Line: Description and Operation FUEL FEED PIPES The fuel feed pipe carries fuel from the fuel tank to the fuel injection system. The fuel pipe consists of 3 sections: The rear fuel pipe is located from the top of the fuel tank to the chassis fuel pipe. The rear fuel pipe is constructed of nylon. - The chassis fuel pipe is located under the vehicle and connects the rear fuel pipe to the engine compartment fuel pipe. The chassis fuel pipe is constructed of steel with a section of rubber hose. - The engine compartment fuel pipe connects the chassis fuel feed pipe to the fuel rail. The engine compartment fuel pipe is constructed of steel. NYLON FUEL PIPES CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury observe the following items: Replace all nylon fuel pipes that are nicked, scratched or damaged during installation, do not attempt to repair the sections of the nylon fuel pipes - Do not hammer directly on the fuel harness body clips when installing new fuel pipes. Damage to the nylon pipes may result in a fuel leak. - Always cover nylon vapor pipes with a wet towel before using a torch near them. Also, never expose the vehicle to temperatures higher than 115°C (239°F) for more than one hour, or more than 90°C (194°F) for any extended period. - Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends before connecting fuel pipe fittings. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. (During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated.) Nylon pipes are constructed to withstand maximum fuel system pressure, exposure to fuel additives, and changes in temperature. The following 2 sizes of nylon pipes are used: 9.53 mm (3/8 in) ID for the fuel feed - 12.7 mm (1/2 in) ID for the vent Heat resistant rubber hose or corrugated plastic conduit protect the sections of the pipes that are exposed to chafing, high temperature, or vibration. Nylon fuel pipes are somewhat flexible and can be formed around gradual turns under the vehicle. However, if nylon fuel pipes are forced into sharp bends, the pipes kink and restrict the fuel flow. Also, once exposed to fuel, nylon pipes may become stiffer and are more likely to kink if bent too far. Take special care when working on a vehicle with nylon fuel pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the engine fuel feed pipe or the engine fuel return pipe. Replace a damaged engine fuel feed pipe or the engine fuel return pipe. 1. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Remove the 2 nuts securing the fuel hose/pipe to the engine and transaxle. 4. Remove the fuel hose/pipe retainers from the threaded studs on the engine and transaxle. 5. Clean all engine fuel pipe connections and areas surrounding the engine fuel pipe connections before disconnecting the engine fuel pipe connections to avoid possible contamination of the fuel system. 6. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) from the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4346 7. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 8. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (1) from the fuel rail (4). 9. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 10. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the fuel pipe retainer (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the fuel hose/pipe to the engine. 2. Install the fuel hose/pipe retainers to the threaded studs on the engine and transaxle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4347 3. Install the 2 nuts securing the fuel hose/pipe to the engine and transaxle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 28 N.m (21 lb ft). 4. Install the fuel hose/pipe to the fuel pipe retainer (2). 5. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 6. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (1) to the fuel rail (4). 7. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 8. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) to the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 9. Install the exhaust crossover pipe. 10. Prime the fuel system. 1. Cycle the ignition ON for 5 seconds and then OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Repeat step 7.1 twice. 3. Crank the engine until it starts. The maximum starter motor cranking time is 20 seconds. 4. If the engine does not start, repeat steps 7.1-7.4. 11. Run the engine and check for fuel system leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4348 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not allow smoking or the use of open flames in the area where work on the fuel or EVAP system is taking place. Anytime work is being done on the fuel system, disconnect the negative battery cable, except for those tests where battery voltage is required. - Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. - Whenever fuel lines are removed, catch fuel in an approved container. Container opening must be a minimum of 300 mm (12 in) diameter to adequately catch the fluid. NOTE: Fuel/Vapor lines cannot be spliced or repaired. The line must be replaced (if damaged) with the same type of line. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) from the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 4. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4349 5. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. Disconnect the chassis fuel hose/pipe (2) from the fuel tank. 7. Cap the fuel hose/pipes to prevent contamination and fuel leakage. 8. Release the pipe retainers (1) from the vehicle underbody. 9. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the pipe retainers. 10. Remove the fuel hose/pipe from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel hose/pipe to the vehicle. 2. Install the fuel hose/pipe from the pipe retainers. 3. Attach the pipe retainers (1) to the vehicle underbody. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 4350 4. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 5. Connect the chassis fuel hose/pipe (2) to the fuel tank. 6. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. 7. Remove the caps from the fuel pipes. 8. Connect the engine compartment fuel hose/pipe (2) to the chassis fuel hose/pipe (3). 9. Connect the negative battery terminal. 10. Prime the fuel system. 1. Cycle the ignition ON for 5 seconds and then OFF for 10 seconds. Repeat cycling twice. 2. Crank the engine until it starts. The maximum starter motor cranking time is 20 seconds. 3. If the engine does not start, repeat steps. 11. Run the engine and check the system for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Hose: Description and Operation FUEL FILL PIPE The fuel fill pipe has a built-in restrictor in order to prevent refueling with leaded fuel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4355 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair FILLER TUBE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Ensure that the fuel level in the tank is less than 1/4 full. If necessary, drain the fuel tank to at least this level. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure. IMPORTANT: Replacement fuel filler tube hoses do not come equipped with hose clamps. Obtain replacement hose clamps prior to beginning this service procedure. CAUTION: Do not allow smoking or the use of open flames in the area where work on the fuel or EVAP system is taking place. Anytime work is being done on the fuel system, disconnect the negative battery cable, except for those tests where battery voltage is required. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the right rear wheel and tire. 5. Remove the right rear wheelhouse inner liner. 6. Loosen the fuel filler tube hose clamp. 7. Disconnect the fuel filler tube, the fuel filler vent tube, and the fresh air hose from the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4356 8. Remove the fuel filler tube bracket bolts (2). 9. Remove the fuel filler tube (1) from the vehicle. 10. Remove the closeout grommet. 11. Separate the fresh air hose from the fuel filler tube. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4357 1. Attach the fresh air hose to the fuel filler tube. 2. Install the closeout grommet. 3. Position the fuel filler tube (1) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4358 4. Position the fuel filler tube to the closeout grommet (1). 5. Install the fuel filler tube bracket bolts (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 6. Position the filler tube-to-fuel tank connecting hose and hose clamp. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the fuel filler tube connecting hose is installed until it touches the fuel tank body. The hose clamp should be located within 13 mm (1/2 in) of the end of the connecting hose. Tighten Tighten the clamp to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Connect the fuel filler vent tube and fresh air hose. 8. Install the inner wheelhouse liner. 9. Install the wheel and tire. 10. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. 11. Install the fuel filler cap. 12. Perform the Service Bay Diagnostic Test for the EVAP emission system using the scan tool. This test will verify the integrity of the vapor handling areas of the fuel system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 09-06-04-001 > Jan > 09 > Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-001 Date: January 08, 2009 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine Light On, DTC P0442 or P0455 Set (Perform Outlined Repair) Models: 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a check engine light on. Upon further investigation, the technician may find DTC P0442 (EVAP small leak) or P0455 (EVAP large leak) set as current or in history. Cause This condition may be caused by the rubber grommet at the fuel tank filler neck not being properly seated. In some situations, the inner lip of the grommet may ride over the top of the filler neck, preventing the fuel cap from tightening properly, resulting in poor sealing. This can set the small or large leak diagnostic codes. Correction DO NOT replace the fuel cap for this condition. Follow the instructions listed below. 1. Inspect the rubber grommet for damage. Replace if necessary. 2. Ensure that the grommet is correctly seated to the fuel filler neck pocket. 3. If the grommet is not correctly seated, use a non-metallic tool to push down on the inner lip of the grommet, folding it inward on the fill pipe. This will prevent the possibility of the inner lip interfering with the fuel cap. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 09-06-04-001 > Jan > 09 > Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 > Page 4367 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 09-06-04-001 > Jan > 09 > Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-001 Date: January 08, 2009 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine Light On, DTC P0442 or P0455 Set (Perform Outlined Repair) Models: 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a check engine light on. Upon further investigation, the technician may find DTC P0442 (EVAP small leak) or P0455 (EVAP large leak) set as current or in history. Cause This condition may be caused by the rubber grommet at the fuel tank filler neck not being properly seated. In some situations, the inner lip of the grommet may ride over the top of the filler neck, preventing the fuel cap from tightening properly, resulting in poor sealing. This can set the small or large leak diagnostic codes. Correction DO NOT replace the fuel cap for this condition. Follow the instructions listed below. 1. Inspect the rubber grommet for damage. Replace if necessary. 2. Ensure that the grommet is correctly seated to the fuel filler neck pocket. 3. If the grommet is not correctly seated, use a non-metallic tool to push down on the inner lip of the grommet, folding it inward on the fill pipe. This will prevent the possibility of the inner lip interfering with the fuel cap. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 09-06-04-001 > Jan > 09 > Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC's P0455/P0442 > Page 4373 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4377 Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Unit: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4381 Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Under The Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4386 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4387 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors within the assembly. The APP sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: - A 5-volt reference circuit - A low reference circuit - A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The powertrain control module (PCM) provides each APP sensor with a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the PCM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. Both APP sensor signal voltages are low at rest position and increase as the pedal is applied. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4388 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector. 3. Disconnect the APP sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the APP assembly attachment bolts. IMPORTANT: Due to clearance issues, the upper attachment bolt cannot be removed from the accelerator pedal assembly. Loose then bolt completely and leave the bolt in the component until the assembly is removed from the vehicle. 5. Remove the APP assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4389 1. Install the upper attachment bolt into the APP assembly. 2. Install the APP assembly into the vehicle. 3. Install the remaining attachment bolts into the APP assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Connect the APP sensor harness connector. Push the connector in until the lock position is felt, then pull back to confirm engagement. 5. Install the CPA to the APP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4393 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4396 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the MAF from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the MAF to air cleaner assembly seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4397 1. Install the seal to the MAF. 2. Install the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the screws that retain the MAF to the air cleaner assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Body: Description and Operation THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY The throttle assembly contains the following components: - The throttle blade - The throttle actuator motor - The throttle position (TP) sensor 1 and 2 - The throttle actuator control (TAC) module The throttle body functions similar to a conventional throttle body with the following exceptions: There is no longer an idle air control (IAC) motor and associated air passages. - An electric motor opens and closes the throttle valve. - The TAC module is located within the throttle body assembly. - The throttle blade is spring loaded in both directions and the default position is slightly open. - There are 2 individual TP sensors within the throttle body assembly. The TP sensors are used to determine the throttle plate angle. The TP sensors provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with a signal voltage proportional to throttle plate movement. Both TP sensor signal voltages are low at closed throttle and increase as the throttle opens. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Assembly Replacement THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The throttle actuator control (TAC) module is not replaceable separate of the throttle body assembly. If the TAC module requires replacement the entire throttle body assembly must be replaced. 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Remove the heater outlet pipe. 3. Cover the throttle body opening with a shop towel and use the shop air to remove any dirt at the base of the throttle body. 4. Disconnect the TAC module electrical connector (1) by pulling up on the connector lock (2) to release the connector from the TAC module (3). 5. Remove the throttle body bolts (2). 6. Remove the throttle body (1) from the intake manifold 7. Block the intake manifold opening with a clean shop towel to prevent dirt from entering. 8. Remove the throttle body studs ONLY If replacement of stud is necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement > Page 4403 1. Install the throttle body studs if previously removed. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the throttle body stud to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 2. Install the throttle body (1) to the intake manifold 3. Install the throttle body bolts. Tighten Tighten the throttle body-to-intake manifold bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the TAC module electrical connector (1) to the TAC module (3) then press down the connector lock (2) in order to secure the TAC module electrical connector. 5. Install the heater outlet pipe. 6. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement > Page 4404 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Cleaning Procedure THROTTLE BODY CLEANING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Over extended time and mileage, deposits may accumulate on the back of the throttle valve plate. The source of the deposit is exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) gas. Typically these deposits pose no problem. Occasionally the deposit may accumulate to a point where perceived pedal effort or throttle valve movement is effected. This procedure should not be performed on vehicles with mileage under 80 450 km (50,000 mi). 1. Remove the air intake duct. CAUTION: Turn OFF the ignition before inserting fingers into the throttle bore. Unexpected movement of the throttle blade could cause personal injury. NOTE: Do not insert any tools into the throttle body bore in order to avoid damage to the throttle valve plate. 2. Inspect the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate for deposits. You will need to open the throttle valve in order to inspect all surfaces. NOTE: Do not use any solvent that contains Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent may damage fuel system components. 3. Clean the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate using a clean shop towel with GM top engine cleaner, GM P/N 1052626 (Canadian P/N 993026) or AC-Delco Carburetor Tune-Up Conditioner, P/N X66-P, or an equivalent product. 4. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4411 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4412 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4416 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4419 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 3. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF.Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool and perform the following: - Accelerate to WOT. - Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 7. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 4422 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 4423 Tighten Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. ......................5,600 ohm per meter (1,707 ohm per ft) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4427 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Refer to the list below for items to be inspected. 1. Inspect for correct routing of the spark plug wires. Improper routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Inspect each wire for any signs of cracks or splits in the wire. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or terminal, both the wire and the component connected to the wire should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4428 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the left side spark plugs. NOTE: Twist the spark plug boot one-half turn in order to release the boot. Pull on the spark plug boot only. Do not pull on the spark plug wire or the wire could be damaged. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 4. Remove the spark plug wires (1) from the right side spark plugs. 5. Remove the spark plug wires from the retaining clips (2). 6. Remove the spark plug wires from the ignition coil/control module. 7. Remove the spark plug wires from the engine. 8. If you are replacing the spark plug wires, transfer any of the following components: - Boot heat shields - Spark plug wire conduit - Spark plug wire retaining clips Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4429 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the ignition coil/control module. 2. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the right side spark plugs. 3. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 4. Install the spark plug wires (1) to the left side spark plugs. 5. Install the spark plug wires to the retaining clips (2). 6. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation Ignition Coil: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils mounted to the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the IC control circuit of the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4433 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4434 Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ignition Control Module: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4438 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4439 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4440 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils mounted to the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the IC control circuit of the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4443 Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4444 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Control Module Bracket Replacement IGNITION CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 3. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (1) from the ignition control module bracket. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Position the ignition coil/control module aside out of the way. 6. Remove the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve fresh air tube retainer. 7. Remove the engine wire harness retainers from the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 8. Remove the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4445 9. Lift pipe up slightly to gain access for the removal of the 2 ignition control module bracket bolts. 10. Remove the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). 11. Remove the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). 12. Remove the ignition control module bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4446 3. Install the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Tighten Tighten the nut to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the engine wire harness retainers to the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 6. Install the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and PCV valve fresh air tube retainer. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 8. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wire retainer (1) to the ignition control module bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4447 10. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 11. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection IGNITION RELAY DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ignition relay is normally an open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. When the ignition switch is turned to the Run or Start position, current will flow through the relay coil. A wire connected to the other end of the relay coil completes the path to ground. The electromagnetic field created by the relay coil overcomes the spring tension and moves the armature, allowing the relay contacts to close. The closed relay contacts allow current to flow from the battery to the following fuses: The Eng Controls fuse - The Fuel INJ fuse - The Elec Eng fuse - The O2 Sensors fuse - The Trans Sol fuse - The ABS fuse - The AWD fuse When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, the electromagnetic field collapses. This action allows the spring tension to move the armature away from the relay contacts, which interrupts current flow to the fuses. If the ignition relay fails to close, the engine will crank but will not run. The class 2 communications will be available with the use of a scan tool. The ignition relay table assumes that the vehicle battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test in Starting and Charging. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4451 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4452 Steps 8-18 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4453 Steps 19-28 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4454 Steps 29-37 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4455 Steps 38-44 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4459 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4460 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4461 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4464 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4465 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4466 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ignition Control Module: Locations Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4471 Top Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4472 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4473 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM)/COILS There are 3 dual-tower ignition coils mounted to the ignition control module (ICM). The ICM contains coil driver circuits that command the coils to operate. The ICM has the following circuits: - An ignition voltage circuit - A ground circuit - An IC 1 control circuit for the 1-4 ignition coil - An IC 2 control circuit for the 2-5 ignition coil - An IC 3 control circuit for the 3-6 ignition coil - A low reference circuit The powertrain control module (PCM) controls each dual-tower ignition coil by transmitting timing pulses on the IC control circuit of the ICM for the proper coil to enable a spark event. The spark plugs are connected to each coil tower by spark plug wires. The spark plug wires conduct the spark energy from the coil to the spark plug. The spark plug electrode is tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement IGNITION COIL/CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Note the position from which the wires are removed. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Remove the ignition coil/control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4476 Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 3. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 4. Connect the spark plug wires. 5. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4477 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair Ignition Control Module Bracket Replacement IGNITION CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the injector sight shield. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 3. Remove the spark plug wire retainer (1) from the ignition control module bracket. 4. Remove the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 5. Position the ignition coil/control module aside out of the way. 6. Remove the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve fresh air tube retainer. 7. Remove the engine wire harness retainers from the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 8. Remove the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4478 9. Lift pipe up slightly to gain access for the removal of the 2 ignition control module bracket bolts. 10. Remove the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). 11. Remove the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). 12. Remove the ignition control module bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module bracket. 2. Install the ignition control module bracket nuts (6). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4479 3. Install the ignition control module bracket bolts (2). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the nut (1) retaining the heater outlet pipe. Tighten Tighten the nut to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the engine wire harness retainers to the ignition control module bracket studs (5). 6. Install the bolt (3) from the fuel injector wire harness bracket (4) and PCV valve fresh air tube retainer. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 7. Install the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. 8. Install the 4 bolts securing the ignition coil/control module to the ignition control module bracket. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wire retainer (1) to the ignition control module bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil/Control Module Replacement > Page 4480 10. Connect the ignition coil/control module electrical connectors. 11. Install the injector sight shield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection IGNITION RELAY DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ignition relay is normally an open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. When the ignition switch is turned to the Run or Start position, current will flow through the relay coil. A wire connected to the other end of the relay coil completes the path to ground. The electromagnetic field created by the relay coil overcomes the spring tension and moves the armature, allowing the relay contacts to close. The closed relay contacts allow current to flow from the battery to the following fuses: The Eng Controls fuse - The Fuel INJ fuse - The Elec Eng fuse - The O2 Sensors fuse - The Trans Sol fuse - The ABS fuse - The AWD fuse When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, the electromagnetic field collapses. This action allows the spring tension to move the armature away from the relay contacts, which interrupts current flow to the fuses. If the ignition relay fails to close, the engine will crank but will not run. The class 2 communications will be available with the use of a scan tool. The ignition relay table assumes that the vehicle battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test in Starting and Charging. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4484 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4485 Steps 8-18 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4486 Steps 19-28 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4487 Steps 29-37 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4488 Steps 38-44 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4495 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor does not directly affect the operation of the ignition system. The CMP sensor information is used by the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine the position of the valve train relative to the crankshaft position. By monitoring the CMP and crankshaft position (CKP) signals, the PCM can accurately time the operation of the fuel injectors. The PCM supplies the sensor with a 12-volt reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4496 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt. 3. Remove the CMP sensor. 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-rings for wear, cracks, or leakage if the sensor is being reused. Replace the O-rings if damaged. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the CMP sensor O-rings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the CMP sensor. 3. Install the CMP sensor bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4500 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4503 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a 3-wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses 2 magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets, the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The CKP sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 24 times per crankshaft revolution. The pulse width encoding pattern is used to synchronize the coil firing sequence with the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor is used for ignition timing, fuel injector timing, misfire diagnostics, and tachometer display. The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies a 12-volt reference, a low reference, and a medium resolution engine speed signal circuit to the CKP sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 3. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF.Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool and perform the following: - Accelerate to WOT. - Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 7. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 4506 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CKP sensor nut (2). 4. Remove the CKP sensor (1) from the engine. 5. Inspect for wear, cracks, or leakage if the CKP sensor is being reused. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil. Replace the O-rings if damaged. 2. Install the CKP sensor (1) to the block. 3. Install the CKP sensor nut (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 4507 Tighten Tighten the nut to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4517 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4518 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4519 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4525 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4526 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4527 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4531 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4532 Lower Rear Side Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4533 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4536 Knock Sensor (KS) 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4537 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4538 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: This engine is equipped with 2 knock sensors. This service procedure applies to both the right and left knock sensors 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the KS bolt. 4. Remove the KS. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply thread locker to the sensor threads. The sensor threads are coated at the factory and applying additional thread locker affects the sensor's ability to detect detonation. 1. Install the KS to engine block. 2. Install the KS bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the KS electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 15 Nm (11.0 lb ft) Spark Plug Gap ................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 1.52 mm (0.060 in) NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4542 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type ................................................................................................................................................... GM P/N 12568387 (AC Delco # 41-101) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4543 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE - Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. - Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION - Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. - Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. - Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4544 - Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION - Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. - Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: Rich fuel mixtures Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. - Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4545 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Observe the following service precautions: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove spark plugs from a hot engine can cause the spark plugs to seize. This can damage the cylinder head threads. - Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so can result in engine damage due to dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or in contamination of the cylinder head threads. Contaminated threads may prevent proper seating of the new spark plug. - Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs (1) from the cylinder head. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Gap the spark plugs to the specifications. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. NOTE: It is important to check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. Pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round wire feeler gauge to be sure of an accurate check, particularly on used plugs. Installing plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 2. Install the spark plugs to the cylinder head. NOTE: Be sure plug threads smoothly into cylinder head and is fully seated. Use a thread chaser if necessary to clean threads in cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat spark plug can cause overheating of plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Follow the recommended torque specifications carefully. Over or under-tightening can also cause severe damage to engine or spark plug. - Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4546 IMPORTANT: ONLY when the cylinder head is replaced with a NEW cylinder head, the FIRST time the spark plugs are installed, tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). All subsequent tightening of the spark plugs, tighten to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Install the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4553 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4554 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4561 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4562 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4563 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4564 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4565 Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4566 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4570 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4576 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Shift Indicator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws holding the shift indicator to the center console trim bezel and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the shift indicator from the center trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4577 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Align the shift indicator with the center trim bezel and fasten with the screws. ^ Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 2. Connect the electrical connection to the center trim bezel. 3. Attach the center trim bezel to the center stack. Verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 4588 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 4598 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4604 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4605 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4606 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4607 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4608 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Locations Component Locator Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4620 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4621 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4624 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4625 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4626 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4627 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 4628 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4632 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4633 Transmission Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 4636 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle . 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 4637 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 4638 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4642 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4643 Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set Bulletin No.: 06-06-04-008B Date: March 19, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: LNJ Service Engine Soon (SES) Light Illuminated, Multiple Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1404 and/or P0404 (Install EGR Valve, EGR Valve Gasket, EGR Pipe, EGR Valve Wiring Harness Connector and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to January 25, 2006 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the first Important statement in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-04-008A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on a Service Engine Soon (SES) light illuminated on the instrument cluster. Some vehicles may have previously been serviced for this same condition. Technicians may also find a DTC P1404 and/or DTC P0404, which may have led to previous exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and PCM replacements. Correction The following EGR valve service parts kit, P/N 89018176, contains all the required individual parts needed to perform an EGR system change-over for the vehicles listed in this bulletin only. Please be advised that some early produced kits may contain an instruction sheet that has an error in the wiring portion of the procedure. Therefore, it is advised that the instructions included in the kit be discarded and that only the instructions contained in the bulletin be used. P/N 12581876 - EGR Valve P/N 12593632 - EGR Gasket P/N 12602507 - Pipe Assembly, EGR Valve P/N 15306175 - Wiring Harness Connector, EGR Valve (includes terminals and wire leads) This EGR valve kit is used to convert a Delphi EGR valve equipped LNJ engine used in the Chevrolet Equinox and Pontiac Torrent to a Siemens valve. This kit contains all necessary parts for conversion. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration must be updated for the Siemens EGR valve to work correctly. Failure to install an updated calibration when using this conversion kit may cause PCM diagnostic codes to set, resulting in a "Service Engine Soon" indicator lamp to illuminate. EGR Valve Identification Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4652 If a Siemens valve is already installed, it is NOT necessary to install this kit. Individual components are serviced. Install the service part kit listed in this bulletin using the following procedure: Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery. If equipped, remove the injector sight shield from the studs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4653 Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. Remove the bolt (3) retaining the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe (4) to the EGR valve (1). Remove the 2 bolts (5) securing the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. Remove the EGR pipe to exhaust manifold gasket. Remove the EGR valve bolts (2). Remove the EGR valve (1). Remove the EGR valve gasket. Remove all the old gasket material from intake manifold with a gasket scraper. Clean and inspect the EGR valve gasket mating surfaces. Install the new EGR valve, P/N 12581876 (1) with a new EGR gasket, P/N 12593632 to the intake manifold. Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Refer to the Fastener Notice in the Service Manual. Tighten Tighten the EGR valve bolts (2) to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). Install the new EGR pipe (4), P/N 12602507 to the exhaust manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4654 Install the 2 bolts (5) that secure the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. Tighten Tighten the EGR pipe assembly bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Install the bolt (3) the secures the EGR pipe (4) bolt to the EGR valve (1). Tighten Tighten the bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). In the following steps, care must be taken to prevent cross-wiring of the two gray colored EGR wire leads (located at pin A and pin D). Cross-wiring will result in an MIL to be set. Before cutting the wiring harness leads, mark the gray leads using tape so the location will be remembered on assembly. Take the disconnected EGR valve harness electrical connector and cut the wires directly at the base of the connector. Open the EGR electrical conduit to expose the wire leads. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from all five EGR circuit harness connector wires. Refer to the correct EGR Valve Wiring Harness Connector End View Schematics in the bulletin for the installation of the new EGR valve wiring harness connector, P/N 15306175. Use splice seal connectors supplied in the wiring harness kit (P/N 15306175) when replacing the EGR valve wiring harness connector. Install the new EGR valve wiring harness connector, P/N 15306175 (includes splice connectors, terminals and wire leads), to the existing engine wiring harness. Use a heat gun to shrink the tubing and set the glue in the connectors. Wrap the new EGR valve wiring harness leads with electrical tape and secure them into the EGR valve electrical harness conduit. Failure to correctly wire the EGR valve electrical connector will result in a PCM diagnostic code to set and result in a "Service Engine Soon" indicator lamp to illuminate. Connect the engine harness electrical connector to the EGR valve. If equipped, install the injector sight shield to the studs. Connect the negative battery cable at the battery. Reprogram the PCM with the latest calibrations for the EGR system change over. This calibration, or any that follow, is designed to address this concern. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) using the appropriate Service Information (SI) procedures. The PCM calibrations are available to dealerships as part of TIS2000 incremental satellite update version 1.0, which was broadcast to dealers January 08, 2006 or later. For the dealerships that use CDs, they were mailed out January 14, 2006 or later. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4655 It is important to mark both gray wires before cutting off the EGR valve harness connector. Follow the wiring schematic in this bulletin to ensure a proper repair. Incorrect installation of the EGR valve harness connector will cause EGR valve DTCs to set with incorrect scan tool EGR data parameter readings. If you encounter this condition, check your wiring repair to the EGR valve harness connector. Do not replace the PCM or the EGR valve. Installation Instruction Sheet You may have received the incorrect installation instruction sheet for the EGR retrofit kit. It is very important to check the revision date on the instruction sheet before attempting this repair. There are three instruction sheets in one. Use the one on the top left corner. The revision date can be found on the lower left corner of your copy. Please discard any copy that does not have the following revision date of 03FE06 If the revision date cannot be determined, then look at the EGR valve connector end view schematic on your copy of the instruction sheet for the following. If the illustration callout shows A-E , your instruction sheet is incorrect. If the illustration callout shows E-A , your instruction sheet is correct. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4656 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-04-056 > Sep > 05 > Engine Controls - Poor Perceived City Fuel Economy PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Poor Perceived City Fuel Economy Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-056 Date: September 02, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Perceived Poor Fuel Economy in City Type Driving (Reprogram Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with New Calibration) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment on poor fuel economy in city type driving. Cause A PCM odometer calculation error that occurs at speeds associated with city type driving is causing fewer miles (kilometers) to be displayed than that actually traveled. As a result, the vehicle really is getting more kilometers (miles) per gallon or tankful of fuel. Correction Important: The new calibration will only address customer comments on poor fuel economy at city type driving speeds. It will NOT address or correct any comments on poor fuel economy at highway speeds. Reprogram the PCM with the latest calibrations if the above concern is encountered. An updated PCM calibration is now available to address this concern. This calibration, or any that follow, is designed to address this concern. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) using the appropriate Service Information (SI) procedures. The new PCM calibrations will be available to dealerships as part of TIS2000 incremental satellite update version 9.0, which was broadcast to dealers on 09/06/2005. For the dealerships that use CD's, they were mailed on 09/14/2005. As always, make sure your TECH 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-06-04-056 > Sep > 05 > Engine Controls - Poor Perceived City Fuel Economy > Page 4661 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 4666 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-043 > Dec > 04 > A/T - Shift Hesitation/Engine Flare/Harsh Cold Shifts PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Hesitation/Engine Flare/Harsh Cold Shifts Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-043 Date: December 02, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Automatic Transaxle Shift Hesitation/Engine Flare During 2-3 Shift At Light Throttle and/or Harsh Reverse to Drive Shift, Both at Cold Operating Temperatures (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with All Wheel Drive (AWD) (RPO M45) and Front Wheel Drive (FWD) (RPO M09) Built Prior to: VIN Breakpoint with All Wheel Drive (AWD) 56091857 VIN Breakpoint with Front Wheel Drive (FWD) 56091812 Condition Some customers may comment on a hesitation/engine flare during the 2-3 shift and/or a harsh reverse to drive garage shift, both at cold operating temperatures. Diagnosis may show a false power steering code DTC C0000 set with NO service vehicle soon light on. Cause The TCM calibration may be the cause. Correction 1. Reprogram the Transaxle Control Module (TCM) with a new service calibration released with TIS satellite data update version 11.25 on November 15, 2004 or newer. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS). Important: ^ An in-depth road test drive procedure is required to allow the TCM to adapt/"fine tune" the software calibrations to the transaxle in order to achieve optimum performance and shift characteristics. ^ If any of the road test/relearn procedure is not completed as outlined during the service visit to the dealership, it is possible that the customer may experience a less than desired or uncharacteristic shift quality for that certain shift point until the adaptive values for that shift are adapted by the TCM. ^ This "uncharacteristic shift quality" should not be misunderstood as an internal transaxle concern unless the concern continues after the complete relearn procedure has been completed. 1. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-043 > Dec > 04 > A/T - Shift Hesitation/Engine Flare/Harsh Cold Shifts > Page 4671 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set Bulletin No.: 06-06-04-008B Date: March 19, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: LNJ Service Engine Soon (SES) Light Illuminated, Multiple Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P1404 and/or P0404 (Install EGR Valve, EGR Valve Gasket, EGR Pipe, EGR Valve Wiring Harness Connector and Reprogram PCM) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to January 25, 2006 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the first Important statement in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-04-008A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on a Service Engine Soon (SES) light illuminated on the instrument cluster. Some vehicles may have previously been serviced for this same condition. Technicians may also find a DTC P1404 and/or DTC P0404, which may have led to previous exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and PCM replacements. Correction The following EGR valve service parts kit, P/N 89018176, contains all the required individual parts needed to perform an EGR system change-over for the vehicles listed in this bulletin only. Please be advised that some early produced kits may contain an instruction sheet that has an error in the wiring portion of the procedure. Therefore, it is advised that the instructions included in the kit be discarded and that only the instructions contained in the bulletin be used. P/N 12581876 - EGR Valve P/N 12593632 - EGR Gasket P/N 12602507 - Pipe Assembly, EGR Valve P/N 15306175 - Wiring Harness Connector, EGR Valve (includes terminals and wire leads) This EGR valve kit is used to convert a Delphi EGR valve equipped LNJ engine used in the Chevrolet Equinox and Pontiac Torrent to a Siemens valve. This kit contains all necessary parts for conversion. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration must be updated for the Siemens EGR valve to work correctly. Failure to install an updated calibration when using this conversion kit may cause PCM diagnostic codes to set, resulting in a "Service Engine Soon" indicator lamp to illuminate. EGR Valve Identification Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4677 If a Siemens valve is already installed, it is NOT necessary to install this kit. Individual components are serviced. Install the service part kit listed in this bulletin using the following procedure: Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery. If equipped, remove the injector sight shield from the studs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4678 Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector. Remove the bolt (3) retaining the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipe (4) to the EGR valve (1). Remove the 2 bolts (5) securing the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. Remove the EGR pipe to exhaust manifold gasket. Remove the EGR valve bolts (2). Remove the EGR valve (1). Remove the EGR valve gasket. Remove all the old gasket material from intake manifold with a gasket scraper. Clean and inspect the EGR valve gasket mating surfaces. Install the new EGR valve, P/N 12581876 (1) with a new EGR gasket, P/N 12593632 to the intake manifold. Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Install the EGR valve bolts (2). Refer to the Fastener Notice in the Service Manual. Tighten Tighten the EGR valve bolts (2) to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). Install the new EGR pipe (4), P/N 12602507 to the exhaust manifold. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4679 Install the 2 bolts (5) that secure the EGR pipe (4) to the exhaust manifold. Tighten Tighten the EGR pipe assembly bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Install the bolt (3) the secures the EGR pipe (4) bolt to the EGR valve (1). Tighten Tighten the bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). In the following steps, care must be taken to prevent cross-wiring of the two gray colored EGR wire leads (located at pin A and pin D). Cross-wiring will result in an MIL to be set. Before cutting the wiring harness leads, mark the gray leads using tape so the location will be remembered on assembly. Take the disconnected EGR valve harness electrical connector and cut the wires directly at the base of the connector. Open the EGR electrical conduit to expose the wire leads. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from all five EGR circuit harness connector wires. Refer to the correct EGR Valve Wiring Harness Connector End View Schematics in the bulletin for the installation of the new EGR valve wiring harness connector, P/N 15306175. Use splice seal connectors supplied in the wiring harness kit (P/N 15306175) when replacing the EGR valve wiring harness connector. Install the new EGR valve wiring harness connector, P/N 15306175 (includes splice connectors, terminals and wire leads), to the existing engine wiring harness. Use a heat gun to shrink the tubing and set the glue in the connectors. Wrap the new EGR valve wiring harness leads with electrical tape and secure them into the EGR valve electrical harness conduit. Failure to correctly wire the EGR valve electrical connector will result in a PCM diagnostic code to set and result in a "Service Engine Soon" indicator lamp to illuminate. Connect the engine harness electrical connector to the EGR valve. If equipped, install the injector sight shield to the studs. Connect the negative battery cable at the battery. Reprogram the PCM with the latest calibrations for the EGR system change over. This calibration, or any that follow, is designed to address this concern. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) using the appropriate Service Information (SI) procedures. The PCM calibrations are available to dealerships as part of TIS2000 incremental satellite update version 1.0, which was broadcast to dealers January 08, 2006 or later. For the dealerships that use CDs, they were mailed out January 14, 2006 or later. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4680 It is important to mark both gray wires before cutting off the EGR valve harness connector. Follow the wiring schematic in this bulletin to ensure a proper repair. Incorrect installation of the EGR valve harness connector will cause EGR valve DTCs to set with incorrect scan tool EGR data parameter readings. If you encounter this condition, check your wiring repair to the EGR valve harness connector. Do not replace the PCM or the EGR valve. Installation Instruction Sheet You may have received the incorrect installation instruction sheet for the EGR retrofit kit. It is very important to check the revision date on the instruction sheet before attempting this repair. There are three instruction sheets in one. Use the one on the top left corner. The revision date can be found on the lower left corner of your copy. Please discard any copy that does not have the following revision date of 03FE06 If the revision date cannot be determined, then look at the EGR valve connector end view schematic on your copy of the instruction sheet for the following. If the illustration callout shows A-E , your instruction sheet is incorrect. If the illustration callout shows E-A , your instruction sheet is correct. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-06-04-008B > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - SES Lamp ON/MultipleDTC's Set > Page 4681 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 05-06-04-056 > Sep > 05 > Engine Controls - Poor Perceived City Fuel Economy PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Poor Perceived City Fuel Economy Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-056 Date: September 02, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Perceived Poor Fuel Economy in City Type Driving (Reprogram Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with New Calibration) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Condition Some customers may comment on poor fuel economy in city type driving. Cause A PCM odometer calculation error that occurs at speeds associated with city type driving is causing fewer miles (kilometers) to be displayed than that actually traveled. As a result, the vehicle really is getting more kilometers (miles) per gallon or tankful of fuel. Correction Important: The new calibration will only address customer comments on poor fuel economy at city type driving speeds. It will NOT address or correct any comments on poor fuel economy at highway speeds. Reprogram the PCM with the latest calibrations if the above concern is encountered. An updated PCM calibration is now available to address this concern. This calibration, or any that follow, is designed to address this concern. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) using the appropriate Service Information (SI) procedures. The new PCM calibrations will be available to dealerships as part of TIS2000 incremental satellite update version 9.0, which was broadcast to dealers on 09/06/2005. For the dealerships that use CD's, they were mailed on 09/14/2005. As always, make sure your TECH 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 05-06-04-056 > Sep > 05 > Engine Controls - Poor Perceived City Fuel Economy > Page 4686 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 4691 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-07-30-043 > Dec > 04 > A/T - Shift Hesitation/Engine Flare/Harsh Cold Shifts PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Hesitation/Engine Flare/Harsh Cold Shifts Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-043 Date: December 02, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Automatic Transaxle Shift Hesitation/Engine Flare During 2-3 Shift At Light Throttle and/or Harsh Reverse to Drive Shift, Both at Cold Operating Temperatures (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with All Wheel Drive (AWD) (RPO M45) and Front Wheel Drive (FWD) (RPO M09) Built Prior to: VIN Breakpoint with All Wheel Drive (AWD) 56091857 VIN Breakpoint with Front Wheel Drive (FWD) 56091812 Condition Some customers may comment on a hesitation/engine flare during the 2-3 shift and/or a harsh reverse to drive garage shift, both at cold operating temperatures. Diagnosis may show a false power steering code DTC C0000 set with NO service vehicle soon light on. Cause The TCM calibration may be the cause. Correction 1. Reprogram the Transaxle Control Module (TCM) with a new service calibration released with TIS satellite data update version 11.25 on November 15, 2004 or newer. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS). Important: ^ An in-depth road test drive procedure is required to allow the TCM to adapt/"fine tune" the software calibrations to the transaxle in order to achieve optimum performance and shift characteristics. ^ If any of the road test/relearn procedure is not completed as outlined during the service visit to the dealership, it is possible that the customer may experience a less than desired or uncharacteristic shift quality for that certain shift point until the adaptive values for that shift are adapted by the TCM. ^ This "uncharacteristic shift quality" should not be misunderstood as an internal transaxle concern unless the concern continues after the complete relearn procedure has been completed. 1. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-07-30-043 > Dec > 04 > A/T - Shift Hesitation/Engine Flare/Harsh Cold Shifts > Page 4696 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-06-04-086 > Nov > 04 > Engine Controls - PCM Programming Information PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - PCM Programming Information Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-086 Date: November 17, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Reprogramming Powertrain Control Modules Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) The need to remove the PCM from the Chevrolet Equinox for reprogramming has been eliminated. Dealers will no longer be required to install the PCM into a Malibu in order to program it. Effective with TIS release 9.5 for 2004 and Tech 2 software version 24.006, the PCM may be reprogrammed without removing it from the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-06-04-086 > Nov > 04 > Engine Controls - PCM Programming Information PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - PCM Programming Information Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-086 Date: November 17, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Reprogramming Powertrain Control Modules Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) The need to remove the PCM from the Chevrolet Equinox for reprogramming has been eliminated. Dealers will no longer be required to install the PCM into a Malibu in order to program it. Effective with TIS release 9.5 for 2004 and Tech 2 software version 24.006, the PCM may be reprogrammed without removing it from the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4712 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4713 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4720 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4721 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4722 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4723 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4724 Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4725 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4729 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4735 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4736 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4743 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4744 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4745 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4746 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4747 Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4748 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4752 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Locations Component Locator Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set Case: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set Incorrect Transmission Shifts, Poor Engine Performance, Harsh 1-2 Upshifts, Slips 1st and Reverse, Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Stuck Off/On, DTCs P0757, P0741, P0742, P0730, P0756 # 02-07-30-013E - (May 20, 2005) Models: 2001-2005 GM Passenger Cars with 4T65-E Automatic Transmission 2001-2005 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick Terraza 2001-2004 Chevrolet Venture 2005 Chevrolet Uplander 2001-2004 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2001-2005 Pontiac Aztek, Montana 2005 Saturn Relay with 4T65-F Transmission (RPOs M15, MN3, MN7, M76) This bulletin is being revised to include additional diagnostic information and clarify model usage. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-013D (Section 07 -- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some owners may comment on any one or more of the following conditions: ^ The SES lamp is illuminated. ^ The transmission slips. ^ The transmission does not shift correctly, is very difficult to get the vehicle to start moving or the engine lacks the power to move the vehicle. ^ Poor engine performance. Cause The most likely cause of the various conditions may be chips or debris: ^ All years--Pressure Reg. Valve (Bore 1) or Torque Signal Valve (Bore 4) stuck ^ On 2001-2002 vehicles, a plugged orifice on the case side of the spacer plate. ^ ON 2003-2005 vehicles, restricted movement of the 2-3 shift valves in the valve body. ^ On 2003-2005 vehicles, restricted movement of the 3-4 shift valves in the valve body. Technician Diagnosis and Correction ^ The technician's road test reveals the vehicle launches in third or fourth gear (high RPM with slow vehicle acceleration). ^ On 2001-2002 vehicles, a DTC P0756 or P0757 may be stored. ^ On 2003-2005 vehicles, a DTC P0730, P0741, P0748 or P0757 may be stored. ^ Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) for additional Diagnostic Assistance. ^ With a Tech 2(R) connected to the vehicle, road test the vehicle and perform the following steps: If the above symptoms are present proceed with the following steps. 1. With the valve body removed and on a workbench, carefully push the valve against spring pressure to check if the valve will snap back to the original position. Or for the valves seated in home position, use a small flat-bladed screwdriver and carefully pry the valve off its seat, quickly remove the screwdriver allowing the valve to return to its seat. If the valve does not snap back unencumbered, then the valve will need to be removed from the valve body. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set > Page 4764 2. Once the valve is removed, inspect for any scratching or scoring. 3. If any scratching or scoring is found, then the fingernail test will need to be performed. Important: It has been found that in most cases that the scratches are not severe enough to catch your fingernail. 4. Using your fingernail, move over any scratches to see if your nail will catch on the scratch or score. - If your nail catches in the scratches, the valve will need to be replaced. - If your nail does not catch in the scratches, continue with the next step. 6. Important: Clean the valve body with the machined side down so debris may escape. 7. Clean the valve and bore using brake cleaner. 8. Blow off with shop air. 9. To verify free movement of the valve, dip the valve into clean ATF and install the valve back into the appropriate bore. The valve should move freely. If the valve moves freely, in most cases the valve body will function properly when reinstalled. 10. Reassemble and retest Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set > Page 4765 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set Case: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set Incorrect Transmission Shifts, Poor Engine Performance, Harsh 1-2 Upshifts, Slips 1st and Reverse, Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Stuck Off/On, DTCs P0757, P0741, P0742, P0730, P0756 # 02-07-30-013E - (May 20, 2005) Models: 2001-2005 GM Passenger Cars with 4T65-E Automatic Transmission 2001-2005 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick Terraza 2001-2004 Chevrolet Venture 2005 Chevrolet Uplander 2001-2004 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2001-2005 Pontiac Aztek, Montana 2005 Saturn Relay with 4T65-F Transmission (RPOs M15, MN3, MN7, M76) This bulletin is being revised to include additional diagnostic information and clarify model usage. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-013D (Section 07 -- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some owners may comment on any one or more of the following conditions: ^ The SES lamp is illuminated. ^ The transmission slips. ^ The transmission does not shift correctly, is very difficult to get the vehicle to start moving or the engine lacks the power to move the vehicle. ^ Poor engine performance. Cause The most likely cause of the various conditions may be chips or debris: ^ All years--Pressure Reg. Valve (Bore 1) or Torque Signal Valve (Bore 4) stuck ^ On 2001-2002 vehicles, a plugged orifice on the case side of the spacer plate. ^ ON 2003-2005 vehicles, restricted movement of the 2-3 shift valves in the valve body. ^ On 2003-2005 vehicles, restricted movement of the 3-4 shift valves in the valve body. Technician Diagnosis and Correction ^ The technician's road test reveals the vehicle launches in third or fourth gear (high RPM with slow vehicle acceleration). ^ On 2001-2002 vehicles, a DTC P0756 or P0757 may be stored. ^ On 2003-2005 vehicles, a DTC P0730, P0741, P0748 or P0757 may be stored. ^ Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) for additional Diagnostic Assistance. ^ With a Tech 2(R) connected to the vehicle, road test the vehicle and perform the following steps: If the above symptoms are present proceed with the following steps. 1. With the valve body removed and on a workbench, carefully push the valve against spring pressure to check if the valve will snap back to the original position. Or for the valves seated in home position, use a small flat-bladed screwdriver and carefully pry the valve off its seat, quickly remove the screwdriver allowing the valve to return to its seat. If the valve does not snap back unencumbered, then the valve will need to be removed from the valve body. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set > Page 4771 2. Once the valve is removed, inspect for any scratching or scoring. 3. If any scratching or scoring is found, then the fingernail test will need to be performed. Important: It has been found that in most cases that the scratches are not severe enough to catch your fingernail. 4. Using your fingernail, move over any scratches to see if your nail will catch on the scratch or score. - If your nail catches in the scratches, the valve will need to be replaced. - If your nail does not catch in the scratches, continue with the next step. 6. Important: Clean the valve body with the machined side down so debris may escape. 7. Clean the valve and bore using brake cleaner. 8. Blow off with shop air. 9. To verify free movement of the valve, dip the valve into clean ATF and install the valve back into the appropriate bore. The valve should move freely. If the valve moves freely, in most cases the valve body will function properly when reinstalled. 10. Reassemble and retest Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set > Page 4772 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Case: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Case: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4778 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Case: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4779 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Case: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4780 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Case: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4786 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Case: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4787 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Case: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 4788 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Channel Plate: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 4797 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 4807 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-027 Date: June 04, 2008 Subject: No Movement When Transmission is Shifted to Drive or Third - Normal Operation When Shifted to Second, First or Reverse (Replace Forward Sprag Assembly) Models: 1982 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2006 - 2007 Buick Rainier 2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2006 Chevrolet SSR 2006 - 2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Colorado, Express, Silverado Classic, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 GMC Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2006 - 2008 GMC Canyon, Envoy, Savana, Sierra Classic, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2006 Pontiac GTO 2006 - 2007 HUMMER H2 2006 - 2008 HUMMER H3 2006 - 2008 Saab 9-7X with 4L60, 4L60E, 4L65E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30, M32, M33 or M70) Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle has no movement when the transmission is shifted to DRIVE or THIRD position, but there is normal operation when it is shifted to SECOND, FIRST or REVERSE position. Cause This condition may be caused by a damaged forward sprag assembly (642). Correction When inspecting the sprag, it is important to test the sprag for proper operation by holding the outer race (644) with one hand while rotating the input sun gear (640) with the other hand. The sun gear should rotate only in the counterclockwise direction with the input sun gear facing upward. If the sprag rotates in both directions or will not rotate in either direction, the sprag elements should be inspected by removing one of the sprag assembly retaining rings (643). Refer to SI Unit Repair section for forward clutch sprag disassembly procedures. If the sprag is found to be damaged, make repairs to the transmission as necessary. A new forward roller clutch sprag assembly is now available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 4821 If clutch debris is found, it is also very important to inspect the Pressure Control (PC) solenoid valve (377) fluid screens. Clean or replace the PC solenoid (377) as necessary. It is also important to flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J45096. Refer to SI Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test for the procedure. The notches above each sprag must point up as shown when assembled into the outer race. Bearing Assembly, Input Sun Gear Snap Ring, Overrun Clutch Hub Retaining Hub, Overrun Clutch Wear Plate, Sprag Assembly Retainer and Race Assembly, Sprag Forward Sprag Assembly Retainer Rings, Sprag Assembly Outer Race, Forward Clutch Washer, Thrust (Input Carrier to Race) The following information applies when this sprag is used in 1982-86 transmissions. The new design sprag can be used on models 1982 through 1986, by replacing the entire assembly (637 - 644). Individual components are NOT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 4822 interchangeable. Important: The wear plate (640) and input thrust washer (660) are not required with the new sprag. Use of the thrust washer and wear plate with the new sprag assembly will cause a misbuild (correct end play cannot be obtained). Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-027 Date: June 04, 2008 Subject: No Movement When Transmission is Shifted to Drive or Third - Normal Operation When Shifted to Second, First or Reverse (Replace Forward Sprag Assembly) Models: 1982 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2006 - 2007 Buick Rainier 2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2006 Chevrolet SSR 2006 - 2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Colorado, Express, Silverado Classic, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 GMC Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2006 - 2008 GMC Canyon, Envoy, Savana, Sierra Classic, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2006 Pontiac GTO 2006 - 2007 HUMMER H2 2006 - 2008 HUMMER H3 2006 - 2008 Saab 9-7X with 4L60, 4L60E, 4L65E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30, M32, M33 or M70) Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle has no movement when the transmission is shifted to DRIVE or THIRD position, but there is normal operation when it is shifted to SECOND, FIRST or REVERSE position. Cause This condition may be caused by a damaged forward sprag assembly (642). Correction When inspecting the sprag, it is important to test the sprag for proper operation by holding the outer race (644) with one hand while rotating the input sun gear (640) with the other hand. The sun gear should rotate only in the counterclockwise direction with the input sun gear facing upward. If the sprag rotates in both directions or will not rotate in either direction, the sprag elements should be inspected by removing one of the sprag assembly retaining rings (643). Refer to SI Unit Repair section for forward clutch sprag disassembly procedures. If the sprag is found to be damaged, make repairs to the transmission as necessary. A new forward roller clutch sprag assembly is now available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 4832 If clutch debris is found, it is also very important to inspect the Pressure Control (PC) solenoid valve (377) fluid screens. Clean or replace the PC solenoid (377) as necessary. It is also important to flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J45096. Refer to SI Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test for the procedure. The notches above each sprag must point up as shown when assembled into the outer race. Bearing Assembly, Input Sun Gear Snap Ring, Overrun Clutch Hub Retaining Hub, Overrun Clutch Wear Plate, Sprag Assembly Retainer and Race Assembly, Sprag Forward Sprag Assembly Retainer Rings, Sprag Assembly Outer Race, Forward Clutch Washer, Thrust (Input Carrier to Race) The following information applies when this sprag is used in 1982-86 transmissions. The new design sprag can be used on models 1982 through 1986, by replacing the entire assembly (637 - 644). Individual components are NOT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 4833 interchangeable. Important: The wear plate (640) and input thrust washer (660) are not required with the new sprag. Use of the thrust washer and wear plate with the new sprag assembly will cause a misbuild (correct end play cannot be obtained). Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Bulletin No.: 05-08-67-010A Date: October 18, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof will Not Close from Vent, Partly Opened, or Fully Opened Position (Replace Sunroof Control Module) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2005 Saturn VUE with Sunroof (RPO CF5) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-67-010 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the sunroof will no longer respond to the control switch while in a vented, partially opened, or fully opened position. Cause A software issue with the sunroof control module may cause the sunroof control module to incorrectly indicate a "closed" position, which may result in no power to the sunroof motor. Correction Verify the customer concern. If a condition is present, replace the sunroof control module with a new sunroof control module, P/N 15847643. Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure 1. Verify the customer concern by opening and closing the sunroof. ^ If the sunroof will not open , check the power windows. - If the power windows are also inoperative, check the fuse. If the fuse has opened, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-004 to install 30A circuit breaker. - If the power windows are fully functional, refer to "Power Sunroof Inoperative" diagnostics (SI Document ID# 1392967) in the Body section of the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. ^ If the sunroof will open (or is already open), but will not close proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the sunroof control module. 3. Open and close the sunroof in order to confirm that the customer concern has been resolved. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions > Page 4843 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions > Page 4849 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 4858 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 4868 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4874 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4875 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4876 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4877 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4878 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Service and Repair Fluid Level Indicator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris away from the transaxle fluid plug/level indicator area. 2. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator bolt from the transaxle. 3. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator from the transaxle. 4. Wipe away any transaxle fluid from the fluid level indicator. Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle fluid level indicator onto the transaxle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle fluid level indicator bolt onto the transaxle. ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 4886 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 7.1L (7.5 Qt) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4889 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ......................... T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Description Inspection of the transaxle fluid level, correct type of fluid, and the condition of the fluid for accurate operation of the transaxle. Procedure 1. Important: Routine inspection of the transaxle fluid is not required. Transaxle fluid inspection is only required if there is a symptom indicating a concern with the fluid. Park the vehicle on a flat level surface. 2. Operate the vehicle in order for the transmission fluid temperature to reach the normal operating range. Transaxle normal temperature: 60 - 70°C (140 - 158°F) 3. With the engine at idle, manual shift through all transaxle ranges and return to the PARK position. Leave the engine idling. 4. Clean any dirt or debris away from the area of the transaxle fluid level indicator. 5. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator bolt (1) from the transaxle. 6. Remove the transaxle fluid level indicator (2). 7. Wipe away any transaxle fluid from the indicator. 8. Insert the indicator into the transaxle until fully seated. 9. Important: Inspecting transaxle fluid level when not at normal temperature can give an incorrect measurement. The transaxle fluid expands when warm. Remove the indicator and inspect the level and the condition of the oil on the indicator: ^ Transmission fluid level at normal operating temperature (1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 4892 ^ Transmission fluid level if cold (2) 10. If the fluid level is incorrect inspect for the following conditions: ^ Fluid below level, inspect for a leak. ^ Fluid above level, inspect for contamination of the fluid. 11. Important: The transaxle uses T-IV fluid, GM P/N 88900925 (Canadian P/N 22689186). The fluid is normally red in color. The oil may darken in color with more miles on a vehicle. Inspect the condition of the fluid for the following conditions: ^ Excessively dirty with particles in the fluid ^ If there are no DRIVEABILITY concerns, replace the fluid. ^ If DRIVEABILITY concerns are present disassemble and inspect for a cause. ^ Burnt smell ^ Inspect for the correct fluid. ^ Inspect for conditions that may of cause overheating of the transmission fluid. ^ If there are no DRIVEABILITY concerns, replace the fluid. ^ If DRIVEABILITY concerns are present disassemble and inspect for cause. ^ Inspect the transmission oil cooler system for functioning properly. ^ Black in color ^ Disassemble the transaxle and inspect for components that may have over heated. ^ Inspect the transmission oil cooler system for functioning properly. ^ Milky or white tint in color from coolant or water ^ Inspect for failure of the transaxle oil cooler. ^ Inspect for missing or improperly routed vent hose. ^ Inspect for missing fill plug. 12. Install the fluid level indicator. 13. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the fluid indicator bolt. ^ Tighten the fluid indicator bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 4893 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid Checking Procedure TRANSAXLE FLUID REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain fluid. Allow at least 5 minutes for the fluid to drain completely. 3. Remove the gasket from the drain plug and discard. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new gasket on the drain plug. NOTICE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the drain plug. TIGHTEN Drain plug to 40 Nm (30 lb ft) 3. Make sure vehicle is level. IMPORTANT: Dexron III automatic transmission fluid is NOT compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 4894 4. Remove the fluid level indicator located behind the front transaxle mount. NOTICE: Do not remove the 3rd gear anchor band bolt located on top of the transmission for checking fluid or adding fluid. Removing the bolt will dislocate internal components and require the transmission to be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for repair. 5. Add approximately 3.1L (3.3 quart) of GM T-IV fluid to the transaxle, using the fluid level indicator location. IMPORTANT: If the check is necessary at a low oil temperature of 30°-40°C (86°-104°F), perform check using the "COLD" range on the level gage. However, the fluid must be re-checked at the proper fluid temperature. 6. Start engine and operate vehicle until transaxle fluid temperature reaches 60°-70°C (140°-158°F). 7. Apply parking brake. 8. Depress brake pedal and move shift lever slowly through all gear ranges from park (P) to low (liter), pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Return shift lever to park (P) range at idle condition. 9. Pull level gauge out again and check if fluid level is within the "HOT" range. a. If fluid is not within the correct level, adjust accordingly: b. If fluid is below the "HOT" range, add enough to bring it up to the correct level. c. If fluid is above "HOT" range, drain excess fluid. 10. Install the fluid level indicator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 4895 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Fluid Replacement Transaxle Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain fluid. Allow at least 5 minutes for the fluid to drain completely. 3. Remove the gasket from the drain plug and discard. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new gasket on the drain plug. 2. Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug. ^ Tighten the drain plug to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Make sure vehicle is level . 4. Remove the fluid level indicator located behind the front transaxle mount. 5. Important: Dexron(R)III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron(R)III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid P/N 88900925. Notice: Do not remove the 3rd gear anchor band bolt located on top of the transmission for checking fluid or adding fluid. Removing the bolt will dislocate internal components and require the transmission to be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for repair. Add approximately 3.1 L(3.3 Qt) of GM T-IV fluid to the transaxle , using the fluid level indicator location. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 4896 6. Important: If the check is necessary at a low oil temperature of 30° - 40°C (86° - 104°F), perform check using the COLD range on the level gage. However, the fluid must be re-checked at the proper fluid temperature. Start engine and operate vehicle until transaxle fluid temperature reaches 60° - 70°C (140° 158°F). 7. Apply parking brake. 8. Depress brake pedal and move shift lever slowly through all gear ranges from park (P) to low (L), pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Return shift lever to park (P) range at idle condition. 9. Pull level gauge out again and check if fluid level is within the HOT range. 10. If fluid is not within the correct level, adjust accordingly: 1. If fluid is below the HOT range, add enough to bring it up to the correct level. 2. If fluid is above HOT range, drain excess fluid. 11. Install the fluid level indicator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-017B Date: November 25, 2008 Subject: Information on 4T65-E MN7, M15, M76, MN3 Automatic Transmission Case, Cooler Fitting and Torque Converter Drain Back Check Ball Change Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with one of the HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmissions shown above. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-017A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Effective with Julian date 4019 (January 19, 2004), the 4T65E transaxle cases and cooler fittings have changed and are not interchangeable with past models. The technician may find that when replacing the inlet or outlet transmission cooler lines, the new lines cannot be connected to the transmission. A change to the transmission cooler line fittings was implemented in production on February 1, 2004. The cooler line fittings were changed to a design with a longer lead in pilot (1). The cooler line fittings with the longer lead in pilot will not fit on models built before February 1, 2004. The longer lead in pilot fittings (1) (9/16-18 UNF) have replaced the shorter lead in pilot fittings (2) (3/8-18 NPSF w/check ball & 1/4-18 NPSF). If the transmission cooler lines will not connect, then replace them with the following cooler line fittings as appropriate with the older, shorter lead in pilot design: ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, P/N 20793004. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, second design P/N 15264588. ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, P/N 20793005. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, second design P/N 15264589. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 4901 The torque specification has changed for the fittings to case. The torque has changed from 38 Nm (28 lb ft) to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the new cooler fittings to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). The converter drain back check ball (420C) has been removed from the cooler line fitting and is now located in the channel plate. If you get a concern of no movement in the morning or after sitting for several hours, the cooler check ball should be inspected. The best way to determine where the check ball is located is to look at the cooler line fittings. The old fittings are different sizes (3/8-18 NPSF & 1/4-18 NPSF) and would contain the cooler check ball. The new fittings are the same size as each other (9/16-18 UNF) and do not have a cooler check ball. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4909 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Shift Indicator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws holding the shift indicator to the center console trim bezel and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the shift indicator from the center trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4910 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Align the shift indicator with the center trim bezel and fasten with the screws. ^ Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 2. Connect the electrical connection to the center trim bezel. 3. Attach the center trim bezel to the center stack. Verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Output Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-042F Date: February 05, 2010 Subject: Information on 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and 4L70E transmission. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-042E (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important For 2005 model year fullsize utilities and pickups, refer to Corporate Bulletin 05-07-30-012. Some vehicles may exhibit a clunk noise that can be heard on a 2-3 upshift or a 3-2 downshift. During a 2-3 upshift, the 2-4 band is released and the 3-4 clutch is applied. The timing of this shift can cause a momentary torque reversal of the output shaft that results in a clunk noise. This same torque reversal can also occur on a 3-2 downshift when the 3-4 clutch is released and the 2-4 band applied. This condition may be worse on a 4-wheel drive vehicle due to the additional tolerances in the transfer case. This is a normal condition. No repairs should be attempted. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Lock Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Lock Cable: Service and Repair Park Lock Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the console. 3. Remove the lock cylinder bezel from the steering column shroud by carefully prying with a thin bladed screwdriver. 4. Remove the shroud fasteners and remove the steering column upper and lower shroud panels. 5. Make sure the key is in the OFF position. 6. Squeeze the tabs on the park lock cable clip and pull upward to remove the cable from the shift control. 7. Disconnect the park lock cable from the shift control park lock lever. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Lock Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4918 8. Disengage the retaining tabs and remove the park lock cable from the ignition module. 9. Note the park lock cable routing while removing the park lock cable from the vehicle. 10. Using a screwdriver, push on the black tab to release the end fitting. Discard the end fitting. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new end fitting on the park lock cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Lock Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4919 2. Install the park lock cable onto the ignition module. 3. Install the park lock cable onto the shift control. 4. Install the park lock cable end terminal onto the park lock lever by aligning the cable fitting to the park lock lever pin and pushing forward. When installing, be sure not to install the cable end fitting on an angle or push down on the cable portion as this may cause cable to misadjust. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Lock Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4920 5. With the cable adjuster in the unlocked position, verify the shift control is in the park (P) position. Lock the adjuster piece into place by pushing in on the tab, then check the cable adjustment as follows: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. With the ignition key removed from ignition lock cylinder and control shift lever in the park (P) position, depress the control shift lever button and attempt to move control shift lever out of park (P) position. ^ If control shift lever can be shifted out of park (P) position, perform step 5 over again ensuring that the cable adjuster lock is operating properly. ^ If control shift lever cannot be shifted out of park (P) position, proceed to next step. 3. Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder assembly and turn to RUN position. 4. Depress the brake pedal and depress the control shift lever button and move control shift lever out of park (P) position. 5. Release the brake pedal. With the control shift lever out of the park (P) position, attempt to turn ignition to LOCK position. Ensure the ignition key is pushed inward toward the steering column when it is rotated toward LOCK position. ^ If ignition key can be turned to LOCK position with control shift lever out of park (P) position, return to the beginning of step 5 and check the park lock cable adjustment. ^ If the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK position with the control shift lever out of the park (P) position, park lock cable is properly adjusted. Proceed to next step. 6. Depress the control shift lever button. Move control shift lever to park (P) position. 7. Turn the ignition key to ON position and then to OFF position. 8. Ensure ignition key is removable. ^ If ignition key can be removed from ignition lock cylinder assembly, proceed to next step. ^ If ignition key cannot be removed from ignition lock assembly, return to the beginning of step 5 and check the park lock cable adjustment. 9. Turn the ignition key to LOCK position. 10. Remove the ignition key from the ignition lock cylinder assembly. 6. Install the shroud fasteners and install the steering column upper and lower shroud panels. 7. Install the lock cylinder bezel onto the steering column shroud. 8. Install the console. 9. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Grinding/Growling Noise in Park on Incline Parking Pawl: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Grinding/Growling Noise in Park on Incline INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-07-30-030F Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: Grinding and/or Growling Noise in Park on Incline Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Automatic Transmissions Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-07-30-030E (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Service Information Owners of some vehicles equipped with Hydra-Matic front wheel drive transaxles may comment on a grinding and/or growling noise that is noticeable when standing in PARK on a hill or slope with the engine running and the parking brake not applied. Under these conditions, the weight of the vehicle puts a load on the parking pawl which can create a "ground-out" path through the drive axles, front struts, springs and spring towers. Normal engine noise can be transmitted to the passenger compartment through the "ground-out" path. Owners concerned about this condition should be advised to apply the parking brake prior to shifting into PARK. This is the recommended procedure described in the Owners Manual. Applying the parking brake first will put the load of the vehicle on the rear brakes rather than on the parking pawl. Refer the owner to the appropriate Owner Manual for additional details and instructions. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4928 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4929 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 4939 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 4949 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4955 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4956 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4957 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4958 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4959 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 4968 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 4974 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Steering Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 04-02-32-006 Date: August 06, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle or Clunk Felt in Steering Wheel While Driving on Rough Roads (Adjust Steering Gear Preload) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Attention: This Bulletin Only Applies To General Motors Chevrolet Dealers In Mexico Condition Some customers may comment that while driving over certain rough road conditions, they hear a rattle noise from the front end of the vehicle. Some customers may also comment that they feel clunking in the steering wheel while hearing the noise. Correction Follow the service procedure below to correct this condition. 1. Set the steering wheel in a straight ahead position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove both front tire assemblies. Important: Hold the ball stud in order to prevent turning during removal of the nut. 4. Remove the tie rod to knuckle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4980 Note: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 5. Use the SA91100C to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the bar. 8. Rotate the stabilizer bar upward. 9. Remove the pinch bolt from the lower intermediate shaft to the steering gear shaft. 10. Remove the lower intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 11. Remove the two bolts retaining the steering gear to the frame. 12. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle. Note: ONLY clamp the steering gear in a vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Failure to clamp the gear in this location may cause damage to the gear. 13. Mount the steering gear in a vise by clamping the vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Important: ^ ONLY use a 14 mm open end crows foot with a newton meter torque wrench when measuring the steering gear preload. ^ Measure the preload before making any adjustments to the steering gear. 14. Measure the steering gear preload by rotating the stub shaft back and forth in a +/- 45° rotation from center using a 14 mm open end crows foot and a newton meter torque wrench. Measure the steering gear preload prior to making an adjustment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4981 15. Using the J 35467-2, hold the adjuster plug and loosen the lock nut with a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. 16. Tighten the adjuster plug using the J 35467-2 while turning the stub shaft with a 14 mm open end crows foot in a back and forth movement in a +/45° rotation from center. Preload Specification Adjust the steering gear preload to 1.5 N.m - 2.0 N.m (13.2 lb in - 17.7 lb in) 17. While holding the adjuster plug with the J-35467-2, tighten the lock nut using a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. Tighten Tighten the adjuster lock nut to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 18. Re-measure the steering gear preload after tightening the lock nut to make sure the preload did not change while tightening the locking nut. 19. Reinstall the steering gear in the vehicle. 20. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 21. Connect the stabilizer links the stabilizer shaft and install the nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 65 N.m (48 lb ft). 22. Connect the outer tie rod ends to the knuckles. 23. Using the J 44015 , seat the ball stud taper to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 24. Remove the J 44015 and install a new nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 4982 25. Install the front tires and wheels. 26. Lower the vehicle. Tool Information General Motors Special Tools can be purchased by calling SPX of Mexico at (552) 5-95-16-30. Warranty Information This labor code is for GM of Mexico dealers only. This labor code is for bulletin use only. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4983 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 01-07-30-032E Date: 080929 A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4984 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 01-07-30-032E Date: 080929 A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4985 To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Locations Component Locator Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4996 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4997 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5000 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5001 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5002 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5003 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5004 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5008 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5009 Transmission Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5012 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle . 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5013 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5014 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5018 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5019 Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment Technical Service Bulletin # 04044 Date: 040817 Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment Noncompliance - Park Lock System Compliance # 04044 - (Aug 17, 2004) 04044 - Park Lock System Compliance 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles fail to conform to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 114, Theft Protection. The Standard requires a park lock system in vehicles that will prevent the transmission from being shifted out of PARK when the key is removed from the ignition. Some vehicles were produced with a shifter park lock cable that was incorrectly adjusted, which allows the transmission to be shifted out of PARK when the ignition key is removed. Correction Dealers are to inspect the operation of the transmission shifter and if required, readjust the shifter park lock cable. The owner letter will explain how to determine if the cable needs adjustment. If the inspection indicates that the cable requires adjustment, or if the customer is uncomfortable performing the inspection, they will be instructed to contact their dealer. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important Dealers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS GM Vehicle Inquiry System) before beginning recall repairs. [Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld, Recall Information website. Dealer that have no vehicles currently assigned will not have a report available in GM DealerWorld. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any other purpose is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information No parts are required for this recall. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5029 Claim Information Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). Dealer Recall Responsibility The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above, Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard as a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall MUST be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin BEFORE customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. This could be done by mailing to such customers a copy of the customer letter accompanying this bulletin. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, please take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Service Procedure The following procedure provides instructions for inspecting the park lock system operation, and if necessary, seating the park lock cable end correctly in the shifter assembly. Inspection 1. Place the automatic transmission lever in the PARK position. 2. Set the parking brake. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5030 3. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and remove the key. 4. Attempt to remove the transmission lever from the PARK position by depressing the shifter button and pulling the shifter in the direction of the other gear positions. ^ If the transmission lever could NOT be removed from the PARK position, then no further action is required. ^ If the transmission lever COULD be removed from the PARK position, then proceed to the next section titled, "Park Lock Cable Repair." Park Lock Cable Repair This procedure should only be performed if the automatic transmission lever could be removed from the PARK position with the ignition key in the OFF position. 1. Locate the fuse center on the forward right side of the floor console and remove the cover. 2. Remove the AIR BAG fuse. 3. Remove the rubber mat from the floor console at the base of the shifter. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5031 4. Starting at the bottom, carefully pull to disengage the trim bezel retainers from the floor console 5. Continue to disengage the trim bezel retainers from the instrument panel (IP). 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and move the shifter lever to the L2 position. 7. Carefully disengage the retainers that attach the rear cover to the console. 8. With the trim bezel raised up, disconnect the electrical connector from the power window switch. 9. Carefully reposition the complete trim bezel off to the right side of the console. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5032 10. Locate the orange retaining ring (1) that attaches the park lock cable to the shift control. Squeeze the two tabs on the orange retaining ring together and pull upward to remove the park lock cable from the shift control. 11. Place the shift lever in the PARK position and remove the key from the ignition. 12. Reaching under the front of the shift assembly, disconnect the park lock cable retainer (2) from the shift lever by pushing the end of the cable rearward to disengage the slot (4) from the pin (3). 13. With the park lock cable disconnected from the shifter, reposition the cable to obtain access to the cable end. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5033 Important DO NOT remove the locking retainer (C-clip) from the cable end in the next step. It is only necessary to raise or pry the clip partially out of the cable end. 14. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully pry up the locking retainer (1) in the cable retainer. 15. Position the cable and orange retaining ring back into the shifter control and push down to seat the ring. 16. With the shift lever in the PARK position and the key removed from the ignition switch, reach under the shifter and attach the cable retainer to the pin on the shifter. Pull the cable forward to engage the cable retainer (a click will be heard and felt). Important Do not pull, push, or disturb the cable when seating the locking retainer in the next step. Doing so may cause the cable to be mis-adjusted. 17. With the cable attached to the pi, press the locking retainer inwards until fully seated in the cable retainer. At this point, the cable should be properly adjusted. 18. With the key removed from the ignition switch, attempt to remove the transmission lever from the PARK position. ^ If the transmission lever could NOT be removed from the PARK position, then the cable is adjusted correctly. Proceed to the next step. ^ If the transmission lever COULD be removed from the PARK position, then the cable has NOT been adjusted correctly. Repeat the adjustment steps above. 19. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and move the shift lever to the L2 position. 20. Carefully position the trim bezel over the console and connect the electrical connector to the power window switch. 21. Position the trim bezel to the IP and console, and engage the retainers. 22. Position the rear cover to the console and engage the retainers. 23. Place the shift lever in the PARK position and install the rubber mat. 24. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5034 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5035 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5036 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment Technical Service Bulletin # 04044 Date: 040817 Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment Noncompliance - Park Lock System Compliance # 04044 - (Aug 17, 2004) 04044 - Park Lock System Compliance 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles fail to conform to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 114, Theft Protection. The Standard requires a park lock system in vehicles that will prevent the transmission from being shifted out of PARK when the key is removed from the ignition. Some vehicles were produced with a shifter park lock cable that was incorrectly adjusted, which allows the transmission to be shifted out of PARK when the ignition key is removed. Correction Dealers are to inspect the operation of the transmission shifter and if required, readjust the shifter park lock cable. The owner letter will explain how to determine if the cable needs adjustment. If the inspection indicates that the cable requires adjustment, or if the customer is uncomfortable performing the inspection, they will be instructed to contact their dealer. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important Dealers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS GM Vehicle Inquiry System) before beginning recall repairs. [Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld, Recall Information website. Dealer that have no vehicles currently assigned will not have a report available in GM DealerWorld. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any other purpose is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information No parts are required for this recall. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5042 Claim Information Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). Dealer Recall Responsibility The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above, Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard as a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall MUST be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin BEFORE customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. This could be done by mailing to such customers a copy of the customer letter accompanying this bulletin. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, please take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Service Procedure The following procedure provides instructions for inspecting the park lock system operation, and if necessary, seating the park lock cable end correctly in the shifter assembly. Inspection 1. Place the automatic transmission lever in the PARK position. 2. Set the parking brake. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5043 3. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and remove the key. 4. Attempt to remove the transmission lever from the PARK position by depressing the shifter button and pulling the shifter in the direction of the other gear positions. ^ If the transmission lever could NOT be removed from the PARK position, then no further action is required. ^ If the transmission lever COULD be removed from the PARK position, then proceed to the next section titled, "Park Lock Cable Repair." Park Lock Cable Repair This procedure should only be performed if the automatic transmission lever could be removed from the PARK position with the ignition key in the OFF position. 1. Locate the fuse center on the forward right side of the floor console and remove the cover. 2. Remove the AIR BAG fuse. 3. Remove the rubber mat from the floor console at the base of the shifter. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5044 4. Starting at the bottom, carefully pull to disengage the trim bezel retainers from the floor console 5. Continue to disengage the trim bezel retainers from the instrument panel (IP). 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and move the shifter lever to the L2 position. 7. Carefully disengage the retainers that attach the rear cover to the console. 8. With the trim bezel raised up, disconnect the electrical connector from the power window switch. 9. Carefully reposition the complete trim bezel off to the right side of the console. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5045 10. Locate the orange retaining ring (1) that attaches the park lock cable to the shift control. Squeeze the two tabs on the orange retaining ring together and pull upward to remove the park lock cable from the shift control. 11. Place the shift lever in the PARK position and remove the key from the ignition. 12. Reaching under the front of the shift assembly, disconnect the park lock cable retainer (2) from the shift lever by pushing the end of the cable rearward to disengage the slot (4) from the pin (3). 13. With the park lock cable disconnected from the shifter, reposition the cable to obtain access to the cable end. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5046 Important DO NOT remove the locking retainer (C-clip) from the cable end in the next step. It is only necessary to raise or pry the clip partially out of the cable end. 14. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully pry up the locking retainer (1) in the cable retainer. 15. Position the cable and orange retaining ring back into the shifter control and push down to seat the ring. 16. With the shift lever in the PARK position and the key removed from the ignition switch, reach under the shifter and attach the cable retainer to the pin on the shifter. Pull the cable forward to engage the cable retainer (a click will be heard and felt). Important Do not pull, push, or disturb the cable when seating the locking retainer in the next step. Doing so may cause the cable to be mis-adjusted. 17. With the cable attached to the pi, press the locking retainer inwards until fully seated in the cable retainer. At this point, the cable should be properly adjusted. 18. With the key removed from the ignition switch, attempt to remove the transmission lever from the PARK position. ^ If the transmission lever could NOT be removed from the PARK position, then the cable is adjusted correctly. Proceed to the next step. ^ If the transmission lever COULD be removed from the PARK position, then the cable has NOT been adjusted correctly. Repeat the adjustment steps above. 19. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and move the shift lever to the L2 position. 20. Carefully position the trim bezel over the console and connect the electrical connector to the power window switch. 21. Position the trim bezel to the IP and console, and engage the retainers. 22. Position the rear cover to the console and engage the retainers. 23. Place the shift lever in the PARK position and install the rubber mat. 24. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5047 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5048 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Cable: > 04044 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Shift Interlock Cable Adjustment > Page 5049 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5056 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5057 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5058 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5059 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5060 Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5061 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Control Knob Replacement Shift Control Knob Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Rotate the key to the RUN position, however do NOT start the vehicle. 3. Move the shift control lever rearward to one of the low gear positions. 4. Carefully insert a small flat bladed tool between the trim ring (2) and the shift knob (1). Apply careful downward pressure to the shift knob trim ring to separate the trim ring from the shift knob. The trim ring will drop down approximately 13.0mm (0.5 inch) exposing the shift knob retaining screw. 5. Loosen the shift control knob screw (1) approximately 4-5 turns. It is not necessary to fully remove the screw from the shift control knob. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 5066 6. Remove the shift control knob (2) from the shift control lever (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the shift control knob (2) to the shift control lever (1). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the control knob screw (1) if previously removed. ^ Tighten the screw to 1.5 Nm (13 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 5067 3. Lift the shift control knob trim ring (1) up to the shift control knob until a click sound is heard indicating the trim ring is secured to the shift knob. 4. Check for proper operation of the shift knob button through all gear ranges. 5. Place the shift control lever in the PARK position. 6. Rotate the key to the off position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 5068 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Control Replacement Shift Control Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the console. 3. Using the J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the shift control range select lever pin. 4. Squeeze the tabs on the shift control cable retainer clip and remove the cable from the shift control. 5. Squeeze the tabs on the park lock cable clip and pull upward to remove the cable from the shift control. 6. Disconnect the park lock cable from the shift control park lock lever. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 5069 7. Disconnect the shift control electrical connector. 8. Remove the nuts from the shift control. 9. Remove the shift control from the shift control mounting bracket. Installation Procedure 1. Install the shift control to the shift control mounting bracket. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 5070 Install the shift control nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the shift control electrical connector. 4. Install the park lock cable onto the shift control. 5. Install the park lock cable end terminal onto the park lock lever by aligning the cable fitting to the park lock lever pin and pushing forward. When installing, be sure not to install the cable end fitting on an angle or push down on the cable portion as this may cause cable to misadjust. 6. If the park lock cable becomes misadjusted. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Knob Replacement > Page 5071 7. Install the shift control cable onto the shift control. 8. Connect the shift control cable onto the shift control range select lever pin. 9. Install the console. 10. Enable SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Shift Control Cable Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Adjustment Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake and ensure the vehicle is not running. 2. Ensure that the shift control assembly is in the park (P) position. 3. Pull back the white plastic cover (1) on the center connector. 4. Pull up on the center tabs of the lock button (2). 5. Important: This step must be performed correctly to avoid a misadjusted cable. Do not grasp the shift cable end (2) during this procedure. Release the shift cable end (2) and allow the blue spring to tension/adjust the shift cable system. 6. Pull the white cover (3) on the shift cable end (1) back. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5076 7. Push the natural colored lock button (2) down to engage the locking teeth on the shift cable end (1). 8. Release the white cover (1). 9. Verify the white cover (1) conceals the natural colored lock (2). 10. If the white cover (1) does not conceal the natural colored lock (2), the shift cable must be readjusted. 11. Test the transmission for proper shift operation. 12. If all of the gear positions cannot be achieved, the shift cable must be readjusted. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement Shift Cable: Service and Repair Shift Control Cable Replacement Shift Control Cable Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Important: The shift control cable can be disassembled and removed as two independent sections when removal of the complete cable is not necessary, or the cable can remain together and be removed as one piece not requiring disassembly of the cable. Disassembling Cable 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Ensure that the shift control range select lever is in the park (P) position. 3. Remove the shift control cable retainer (2) from the cowl stud (1) near the brake master cylinder. 4. Pull back the spring loaded cover (2) to expose the cable adjustment lock (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5079 5. Lift the cable adjustment lock (3) up to unlock both halves of the shift cable (1, 4). 6. Rotate the shift cable to expose the retaining clip (5). It may be necessary to pull the transaxle end of the shift cable (4) out of the shift control end of the shift cable (1) to fully expose the retaining clip (5). 7. Remove the retaining clip (2) from the shift control cable (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5080 8. Separate the shift control end of the cable (1) from the transaxle end of the cable (2). Cable Removal - Shift Control End Refer to the following steps to remove the shift control end (2) of the shift control cable. 1. Remove the console. 2. Ensure that the shift control range select lever is in the park (P) position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5081 3. Using the J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the shift control range select lever pin. 4. Depress the shift control cable retainer clip tabs and remove the cable from the shift control. 5. Remove the shift control cable grommet from the cowl. 6. Remove the shift control cable retainer (1) from the cowl stud (2) near the generator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5082 7. Remove the shift control cable retaining clips (2) from the cowl (1). 8. Note the shift control cable routing and remove the shift control cable from the vehicle. Cable Removal - Transaxle End Refer to the following steps to remove the transaxle end (1) of the shift control cable. 1. Using the J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable (2) from the transaxle range switch lever (3). 2. Depress the shift control cable retainer clip tabs and remove the shift control cable (2) from the shift control cable bracket (1). 3. Note the shift control cable routing and remove the shift control cable from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5083 Cable Installation - Transaxle End Refer to the following steps to install the transaxle end (1) of the shift control cable. 1. Important: Ensure the shift control cable is routed exactly as originally positioned in the vehicle to avoid coming into contact with potential hazards such as hot, sharp, and moving objects. Install the shift control cable (2) to the shift control cable bracket (1). Ensure the shift control cable retaining tabs fully engage the shift control cable bracket. 2. Connect the shift control cable (2) to the transaxle range switch lever (3). Cable Installation - Shift Control End Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5084 Refer to the following steps to remove the shift control end (2) of the shift control cable. 1. Important: Ensure the shift control cable is routed exactly as originally positioned in the vehicle to avoid coming into contact with potential hazards such as hot, sharp, and moving objects. Secure the shift control cable grommet by pressing the cable into the pass-thru hole in the cowl. 2. Ensure the shift control range select lever is in the park (P) position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5085 3. Install the shift control cable to the shift control. 4. Install the shift control cable onto the shift control range select lever pin. 5. Install the console. 6. Attach the shift control cable retainer (1) to the cowl stud (2) near the generator. 7. Install the shift control cable retaining clips (2) to the cowl (1). Assembling Cable Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5086 1. Install the cable retaining clip (2). 2. Push the transaxle end of the shift control cable (4) into the shift control end of the shift control cable (1) until the cable retaining clip (5) is fully locked into the shift control cable groove (3). 3. Ensure that the shift control lever and the transaxle range select lever are both in the park (P) position. 4. Ensure the transaxle cable end (4) is not being held and that the spring is allowed to tension the cable. 5. Depress the cable adjustment lock (3) in order to lock both halves of the shift cable (1, 4). 6. Release the spring loaded cover (2) allowing it to cover the cable adjustment lock. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5087 7. Install the shift control cable retainer (2) to the cowl stud (1) near the brake master cylinder. 8. Adjust the shift control cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5088 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Shift Control Cable Bracket Replacement Shift Control Cable Bracket Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Notice: The control cable must be disconnected from the transaxle range switch lever prior to disconnecting it from the control cable bracket. Otherwise damage to the manual shift shaft may result, requiring transaxle disassembly. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Depress the shift control cable retainer clip tabs and remove the cable from the shift control cable bracket. 4. Remove the shift control cable bracket bolts. 5. Remove the shift control cable bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Control Cable Replacement > Page 5089 1. Install the transaxle shift control bracket. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle shift control bracket. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Secure the shift control cable to the bracket . An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 4. With the transaxle range switch lever in neutral (N), attach the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when the shift control cable is properly installed. 5. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear Sun Gear: Customer Interest A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 00-07-30-022D Date: June 10, 2008 Subject: No Reverse, Second Gear or Fourth Gear (Replace Reaction Sun Shell with More Robust Heat Treated Parts) Models: 1993 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003 - 2005 HUMMER H2 with 4L60/65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30 or M32) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2005 model year to the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-07-30-022C (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a no reverse, no second or no fourth gear condition. First and third gears will operate properly. Cause The reaction sun gear (673) may not hold inside the reaction sun shell (670). Correction Important: There are FOUR distinct groups of vehicles and repair procedures involved. Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and prior that make use of a reaction shaft to shell thrust washer: ^ The sun shell can be identified by four square holes used to retain the thrust washer. Use reaction sun shell P/N 24228345, reaction carrier to shell thrust washer (699B) P/N 8642202 and reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674) P/N 8642331er (674) P/N 8642331along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and prior that have had previous service to the reaction sun shell: It is possible that some 2001 and prior model year vehicles have had previous service to the reaction sun shell. At the time of service, these vehicles may have been updated with a Reaction Sun Shell Kit (Refer to Service Bulletin 020730003) without four square holes to retain the thrust washer. If it is found in a 2001 model year and prior vehicles that the reaction sun shell DOES NOT have four square holes to retain the thrust washer, these vehicles must be serviced with P/Ns 24229825 (674), 24217328 and 8642331 along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and later that make use of a reaction shaft to shell thrust bearing: The sun shell can be identified by no holes to retain the thrust washer. Use reaction sun shell, P/N 24229825, reaction carrier shaft to shell thrust bearing (669A), P/N 24217328 and reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674), P/N 8642331 along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built from November, 2001 through June, 2002: These vehicles should have the reaction carrier shaft replaced when the sun shell is replaced. Use shell kit P/N 24229853, which contains a sun shell (670), a reaction carrier shaft (666), a reaction carrier shaft to shell thrust bearing (669A) and a reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674). The appropriate seals and washers listed below should also be used. When servicing the transmission as a result of this condition, the transmission oil cooler and lines MUST be flushed. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052. Follow the service procedure below for diagnosis and correction of the no reverse, no second, no forth condition. Important: If metallic debris is found on the transmission magnet, the transmission must be completely disassembled and cleaned. Metallic debris is defined as broken parts and pieces of internal transmission components. This should not be confused with typical "normal" fine particles found on all transmission magnets. Failure to properly clean the transmission case and internal components may lead to additional repeat repairs. 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and inspect the magnet in the bottom of the pan for metal debris. Refer to SI Document ID # 825141. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear > Page 5098 2. Remove the transmission from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate SI document. Important: ^ Inspect all the transmission components for damage or wear. Replace all damaged or worn components. The parts shown above should be sufficient to correct this concern. ^ This condition does not normally require replacement of the transmission completely. Components such as clutches, valve body, pump and torque converters will NOT require replacement to correct this condition. Disassemble the transmission and replace the appropriate parts listed below. Refer to the Unit Repair Manual - Repair Instructions. 3. Reinstall the transmission in the vehicle. Refer to appropriate service information. When servicing the transmission as a result of this condition, the transmission oil cooler and lines MUST be flushed. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear > Page 5099 Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear Sun Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 00-07-30-022D Date: June 10, 2008 Subject: No Reverse, Second Gear or Fourth Gear (Replace Reaction Sun Shell with More Robust Heat Treated Parts) Models: 1993 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003 - 2005 HUMMER H2 with 4L60/65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30 or M32) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2005 model year to the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-07-30-022C (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a no reverse, no second or no fourth gear condition. First and third gears will operate properly. Cause The reaction sun gear (673) may not hold inside the reaction sun shell (670). Correction Important: There are FOUR distinct groups of vehicles and repair procedures involved. Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and prior that make use of a reaction shaft to shell thrust washer: ^ The sun shell can be identified by four square holes used to retain the thrust washer. Use reaction sun shell P/N 24228345, reaction carrier to shell thrust washer (699B) P/N 8642202 and reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674) P/N 8642331er (674) P/N 8642331along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and prior that have had previous service to the reaction sun shell: It is possible that some 2001 and prior model year vehicles have had previous service to the reaction sun shell. At the time of service, these vehicles may have been updated with a Reaction Sun Shell Kit (Refer to Service Bulletin 020730003) without four square holes to retain the thrust washer. If it is found in a 2001 model year and prior vehicles that the reaction sun shell DOES NOT have four square holes to retain the thrust washer, these vehicles must be serviced with P/Ns 24229825 (674), 24217328 and 8642331 along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and later that make use of a reaction shaft to shell thrust bearing: The sun shell can be identified by no holes to retain the thrust washer. Use reaction sun shell, P/N 24229825, reaction carrier shaft to shell thrust bearing (669A), P/N 24217328 and reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674), P/N 8642331 along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built from November, 2001 through June, 2002: These vehicles should have the reaction carrier shaft replaced when the sun shell is replaced. Use shell kit P/N 24229853, which contains a sun shell (670), a reaction carrier shaft (666), a reaction carrier shaft to shell thrust bearing (669A) and a reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674). The appropriate seals and washers listed below should also be used. When servicing the transmission as a result of this condition, the transmission oil cooler and lines MUST be flushed. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052. Follow the service procedure below for diagnosis and correction of the no reverse, no second, no forth condition. Important: If metallic debris is found on the transmission magnet, the transmission must be completely disassembled and cleaned. Metallic debris is defined as broken parts and pieces of internal transmission components. This should not be confused with typical "normal" fine particles found on all transmission magnets. Failure to properly clean the transmission case and internal components may lead to additional repeat repairs. 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and inspect the magnet in the bottom of the pan for metal debris. Refer to SI Document ID # 825141. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear > Page 5105 2. Remove the transmission from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate SI document. Important: ^ Inspect all the transmission components for damage or wear. Replace all damaged or worn components. The parts shown above should be sufficient to correct this concern. ^ This condition does not normally require replacement of the transmission completely. Components such as clutches, valve body, pump and torque converters will NOT require replacement to correct this condition. Disassemble the transmission and replace the appropriate parts listed below. Refer to the Unit Repair Manual - Repair Instructions. 3. Reinstall the transmission in the vehicle. Refer to appropriate service information. When servicing the transmission as a result of this condition, the transmission oil cooler and lines MUST be flushed. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear > Page 5106 Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5112 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5113 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5114 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5120 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5121 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5122 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-010C Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle Torque Converter Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Except VTi Equipped Vehicles (RPO M16 and M75) 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with ALL Automatic Transmissions and Transaxles Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2007-2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-010B (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The purpose of this bulletin is to help technicians determine when a torque converter should be replaced. Below is a list of general guidelines to follow. The converter should NOT be replaced if the following apply: ^ DTC P0742 - TCC stuck on is set. This code is almost always the result of a controls condition (i.e. stuck TCC solenoid/valve). Experience has shown that this code rarely indicates a mechanical concern within the torque converter. ^ The fluid has an odor or is discolored but no evidence of metal contamination. ^ Fine metal particles (traces of metal flakes/gray color to fluid ) are found in the converter. This is not harmful to the torque converter. ^ The vehicle has been exposed to high mileage. ^ A small amount of wear appears on the hub where the oil pump drive gear mates to the converter (RWD only). A certain amount of such wear is normal for both the hub and oil pump gear. Neither the converter nor the front pump assembly should be replaced. The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ^ The vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. First complete all electrical and hydraulic diagnosis and check for proper engine operation. The converter clutch may be damaged. Also the converter bushing and/or internal 0-ring may be damaged. ^ Evidence of damage to the oil pump assembly pump shaft turbine shaft drive sprocket support and bearing or metal chips/debris in the converter. ^ Metal chips/debris are found in the converter or when flushing the cooler and the cooler lines. ^ External leaks in the hub weld area lug weld or closure weld. ^ Converter pilot is broken damaged or fits poorly into the crankshaft. ^ The converter hub is scored or damaged. ^ The transmission oil is contaminated with engine coolant engine oil or water. ^ If excessive end play is found after measuring the converter for proper end play (refer to Service Manual). ^ If metal chips/debris are found in the fluid filter or on the magnet and no internal parts in the unit are worn or damaged. This indicates that the material came from the converter. ^ The converter has an unbalanced condition that results in a vibration that cannot be corrected by following Converter Vibration Procedures. ^ Blue converter or dark circular ring between lugs. This condition will also require a complete cleaning of the cooler and a check for adequate flow Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information > Page 5127 through the cooler. ^ Converter bearing noise determined by noise from the bell housing area in Drive or Reverse at idle. The noise is gone in Neutral and Park. ^ If silicon from the viscous clutch is found in the lower pan (4T80-E ONLY). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting Torque Converter Check Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-017B Date: November 25, 2008 Subject: Information on 4T65-E MN7, M15, M76, MN3 Automatic Transmission Case, Cooler Fitting and Torque Converter Drain Back Check Ball Change Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with one of the HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmissions shown above. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-017A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Effective with Julian date 4019 (January 19, 2004), the 4T65E transaxle cases and cooler fittings have changed and are not interchangeable with past models. The technician may find that when replacing the inlet or outlet transmission cooler lines, the new lines cannot be connected to the transmission. A change to the transmission cooler line fittings was implemented in production on February 1, 2004. The cooler line fittings were changed to a design with a longer lead in pilot (1). The cooler line fittings with the longer lead in pilot will not fit on models built before February 1, 2004. The longer lead in pilot fittings (1) (9/16-18 UNF) have replaced the shorter lead in pilot fittings (2) (3/8-18 NPSF w/check ball & 1/4-18 NPSF). If the transmission cooler lines will not connect, then replace them with the following cooler line fittings as appropriate with the older, shorter lead in pilot design: ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, P/N 20793004. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, second design P/N 15264588. ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, P/N 20793005. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, second design P/N 15264589. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 5132 The torque specification has changed for the fittings to case. The torque has changed from 38 Nm (28 lb ft) to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the new cooler fittings to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). The converter drain back check ball (420C) has been removed from the cooler line fitting and is now located in the channel plate. If you get a concern of no movement in the morning or after sitting for several hours, the cooler check ball should be inspected. The best way to determine where the check ball is located is to look at the cooler line fittings. The old fittings are different sizes (3/8-18 NPSF & 1/4-18 NPSF) and would contain the cooler check ball. The new fittings are the same size as each other (9/16-18 UNF) and do not have a cooler check ball. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5136 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-052G Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow(R) Models: 2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Automatic Transmission/Transaxle including Allison(R) Transmissions Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. The J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool replaces current tool J 35944-A. J 45096 is a self-contained unit utilizing a 12-volt flow meter, shop air supply and DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid (ATF). In the flush mode, transmission fluid is cycled through the transmission oil cooling system. High-pressure air is automatically injected into the fluid stream adding agitation to the ATF oil to enhance the removal of contaminated ATF oil and debris. In the flow mode, an electronic flow meter is used to measure the flow capability of the ATF oil cooling system. A digital display indicates the ATF oil flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM) along with the amount of ATF oil in the supply vessel, supply vessel ATF oil temperature, machine cycles and the operating mode. The supply oil vessel has 30 L (32 qt) capacity and the waste oil vessel has 32 L (34 qt) capacity. The waste oil vessel is constructed of a translucent composite material that allows the user to easily identify the oil level. The waste oil vessel can accommodate vacuum evacuation and gravity draining. In the code mode, a random, encrypted code is generated that can be used for verification of flow test results. Current essential cooler line adapters are used to connect the J 45096 to the automatic transmission oil cooler lines that allows J 45096 to adapt to General Motors passenger cars and light duty trucks, current and past models (except the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo). The tool may be adapted for use on the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo by dealership personnel with a barbed hose connector and rubber hose obtained locally. The Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission has a transmission oil requirement which is slightly different than DEXRON(R) VI ATF. However, flushing the cooler with DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid is an acceptable service procedure. Very little fluid remains in the cooler after the flush procedure and the residual DEXRON(R) VI ATF in the cooler is compatible with the Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission fluid. Notice Insufficient oil flow through the ATF oil cooling system will cause premature transmission failure. The required minimum ATF oil flow rate reading is directly related to the supply oil temperature. Refer to the flow rate reference chart for the oil flow rate specification based on the temperature of the ATF in the supply vessel. Helpful Hints for Maintaining the Temperature at or above 18°C (65°F) Important - The temperature of the supply vessel oil must be 18°C (65°F) or greater for J 45096 to operate. It is recommended to store the J 45096 in an area of the dealership where the room temperature remains at or above 18°C (65°F) when not in use. - Do not attempt to increase the fluid temperature in the Transflow(R) machine with an engine oil dipstick, or any other immersion type heater. The Transflow(R) machine has a check valve in the supply reservoir. Inserting a heater will damage the check valve and the subsequent repair expense would be the dealer's responsibility. - A heater blanket, P/N J-45096-10, is available for the Transflow(R) transmission cooling system flushing tool. This heater fastens around the Transflow(R) internal supply vessel and runs on 110 volts AC. The heater will warm the ATF in the supply vessel to at least 18°C (65° F) and has a thermostat to hold a constant temperature. Store the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine in a room where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Keep the ATF level in the reservoir low when the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R), is not in use. Store several gallons of oil in an area where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Fill the reservoir of the J 45096 as needed before using the machine on Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 5141 each repair. With the ATF in a tightly sealed container, place the container in a tub of hot water for a period of time. Then pour the ATF into the reservoir. This method works best with a low fluid level in the reservoir. Place the Transflow(R) machine in the direct sunlight with the cabinet door open to expose the reservoir to the rays of the warm sun. Flush / Flow Test Procedure Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle and require the transmission oil pan or transmission side cover to be removed include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate procedure. Important The J 45096 can be used to flush the transmission oil cooler system on an Allison equipped vehicle, but the flow meter should not be utilized. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate flow check procedure. Machine Displays After completion of the flush and flow test, the following information is to be recorded on the repair order. This information is displayed on the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine when the dial is in the code position. - Tested flow rate (displayed in Gallons Per Minute (GPM) - Temperature (displayed is degrees Fahrenheit) - Cycle number (a number) - Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code (i.e. A10DFB2) Warranty Information Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Performing a transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test will use between 4.7-7.5 L (5-8 qts) of DEXRON(R)VI transmission fluid. The amount Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 5142 of transmission fluid (ATF), (DEXRON(R)VI) (fluid) that is to be charged for the flush portion of the repair should not exceed the allowable charge for 7.5 L (2 gal) of fluid. This expense should be shown in the Parts Section of the warranty claim document. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card, entered in the warranty claim labor operation Flush Code additional field (when available) and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 5143 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 5144 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Transmission Mount: Testing and Inspection Transmission Mount Inspection Inspection Procedure 1. Notice: In order to avoid oil pan damage and possible engine failure, insert a block of wood that spans the width of the oil pan bottom between the oil pan and the jack support. Important: Before replacing any transmission mount due to a suspected fluid loss, verify that the source of the fluid is the mount. Raise the transmission/transaxle in order to relieve tension in the mount. 2. Observe the mount while raising the transmission/transaxle. Raising the transmission/transaxle removes the weight from the mount. 3. Replace the mount if it exhibits any of the following conditions: ^ The hard rubber surface is covered with heat check cracks. ^ The rubber is separated from the outer metal sleeve of the mount. ^ The rubber is split through the center of the transmission mount. ^ The mount is leaking fluid. 4. When replacing the transmission mounts or brackets, refer to the following procedures: ^ Transmission Mount Replacement - Rear ^ Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement - Rear ^ Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transaxle brace to engine oil pan bolts (2). 3. Remove the transaxle brace to transaxle bolt (1). 4. Remove the transaxle brace (3). Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle brace (3). 2. Install the transaxle brace bolts (1, 2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 5150 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Support the engine. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the transmission mount to transmission bolts. 4. Remove the transmission mount to frame rail bolts. 5. Remove the mount from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Position the transmission mount on the frame rail. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 5151 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount to frame rail bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the transmission mount to transmission bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the battery tray. 5. Remove the engine support. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 5152 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Replacement - Rear Transmission Mount Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove both front tires and wheels. 3. If equipped with AWD, disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer shaft. 4. If equipped with AWD, swing the stabilizer shaft upwards in order to gain additional clearance. 5. Remove the transmission mount-to-bracket through bolt. 6. Remove the transmission mount-to-frame bolts. 7. Remove the transmission mount from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the transmission mount to the frame. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 5153 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount-to-frame bolts. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the transmission mount-to-bracket through bolt, while aligning the transmission mount to the bracket. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped with AWD, lower the stabilizer shaft and connect the stabilizer links . ^ Tighten the stabilizer link nuts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 5. Install both front tires and wheels. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 5154 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement - Rear Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear transmission mount. 2. Disconnect the intermediate steering shaft from the steering gear. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 5155 3. Remove the steering gear to frame bolts. 4. Secure the steering gear upward in order to gain additional clearance. 5. Remove the transmission mount bracket to transmission bolts. 6. Remove the transmission mount bracket from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 5156 1. Position the transmission mount bracket to the transmission. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount bracket to transmission bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the steering gear to the frame. 4. Install the steering gear to frame bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine to Transaxle Brace Replacement > Page 5157 5. Install the intermediate steering shaft to the steering gear. 6. Install the intermediate steering shaft to gear pinch bolt. ^ Tighten the bolts to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the rear transmission mount. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5161 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5162 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5165 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5166 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5167 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5168 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5169 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5173 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5174 Transmission Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5177 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle . 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5178 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5179 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5183 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5184 Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set Valve Body: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set Incorrect Transmission Shifts, Poor Engine Performance, Harsh 1-2 Upshifts, Slips 1st and Reverse, Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Stuck Off/On, DTCs P0757, P0741, P0742, P0730, P0756 # 02-07-30-013E - (May 20, 2005) Models: 2001-2005 GM Passenger Cars with 4T65-E Automatic Transmission 2001-2005 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick Terraza 2001-2004 Chevrolet Venture 2005 Chevrolet Uplander 2001-2004 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2001-2005 Pontiac Aztek, Montana 2005 Saturn Relay with 4T65-F Transmission (RPOs M15, MN3, MN7, M76) This bulletin is being revised to include additional diagnostic information and clarify model usage. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-013D (Section 07 -- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some owners may comment on any one or more of the following conditions: ^ The SES lamp is illuminated. ^ The transmission slips. ^ The transmission does not shift correctly, is very difficult to get the vehicle to start moving or the engine lacks the power to move the vehicle. ^ Poor engine performance. Cause The most likely cause of the various conditions may be chips or debris: ^ All years--Pressure Reg. Valve (Bore 1) or Torque Signal Valve (Bore 4) stuck ^ On 2001-2002 vehicles, a plugged orifice on the case side of the spacer plate. ^ ON 2003-2005 vehicles, restricted movement of the 2-3 shift valves in the valve body. ^ On 2003-2005 vehicles, restricted movement of the 3-4 shift valves in the valve body. Technician Diagnosis and Correction ^ The technician's road test reveals the vehicle launches in third or fourth gear (high RPM with slow vehicle acceleration). ^ On 2001-2002 vehicles, a DTC P0756 or P0757 may be stored. ^ On 2003-2005 vehicles, a DTC P0730, P0741, P0748 or P0757 may be stored. ^ Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) for additional Diagnostic Assistance. ^ With a Tech 2(R) connected to the vehicle, road test the vehicle and perform the following steps: If the above symptoms are present proceed with the following steps. 1. With the valve body removed and on a workbench, carefully push the valve against spring pressure to check if the valve will snap back to the original position. Or for the valves seated in home position, use a small flat-bladed screwdriver and carefully pry the valve off its seat, quickly remove the screwdriver allowing the valve to return to its seat. If the valve does not snap back unencumbered, then the valve will need to be removed from the valve body. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set > Page 5193 2. Once the valve is removed, inspect for any scratching or scoring. 3. If any scratching or scoring is found, then the fingernail test will need to be performed. Important: It has been found that in most cases that the scratches are not severe enough to catch your fingernail. 4. Using your fingernail, move over any scratches to see if your nail will catch on the scratch or score. - If your nail catches in the scratches, the valve will need to be replaced. - If your nail does not catch in the scratches, continue with the next step. 6. Important: Clean the valve body with the machined side down so debris may escape. 7. Clean the valve and bore using brake cleaner. 8. Blow off with shop air. 9. To verify free movement of the valve, dip the valve into clean ATF and install the valve back into the appropriate bore. The valve should move freely. If the valve moves freely, in most cases the valve body will function properly when reinstalled. 10. Reassemble and retest Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set > Page 5194 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set Incorrect Transmission Shifts, Poor Engine Performance, Harsh 1-2 Upshifts, Slips 1st and Reverse, Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Stuck Off/On, DTCs P0757, P0741, P0742, P0730, P0756 # 02-07-30-013E - (May 20, 2005) Models: 2001-2005 GM Passenger Cars with 4T65-E Automatic Transmission 2001-2005 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick Terraza 2001-2004 Chevrolet Venture 2005 Chevrolet Uplander 2001-2004 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2001-2005 Pontiac Aztek, Montana 2005 Saturn Relay with 4T65-F Transmission (RPOs M15, MN3, MN7, M76) This bulletin is being revised to include additional diagnostic information and clarify model usage. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-013D (Section 07 -- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some owners may comment on any one or more of the following conditions: ^ The SES lamp is illuminated. ^ The transmission slips. ^ The transmission does not shift correctly, is very difficult to get the vehicle to start moving or the engine lacks the power to move the vehicle. ^ Poor engine performance. Cause The most likely cause of the various conditions may be chips or debris: ^ All years--Pressure Reg. Valve (Bore 1) or Torque Signal Valve (Bore 4) stuck ^ On 2001-2002 vehicles, a plugged orifice on the case side of the spacer plate. ^ ON 2003-2005 vehicles, restricted movement of the 2-3 shift valves in the valve body. ^ On 2003-2005 vehicles, restricted movement of the 3-4 shift valves in the valve body. Technician Diagnosis and Correction ^ The technician's road test reveals the vehicle launches in third or fourth gear (high RPM with slow vehicle acceleration). ^ On 2001-2002 vehicles, a DTC P0756 or P0757 may be stored. ^ On 2003-2005 vehicles, a DTC P0730, P0741, P0748 or P0757 may be stored. ^ Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) for additional Diagnostic Assistance. ^ With a Tech 2(R) connected to the vehicle, road test the vehicle and perform the following steps: If the above symptoms are present proceed with the following steps. 1. With the valve body removed and on a workbench, carefully push the valve against spring pressure to check if the valve will snap back to the original position. Or for the valves seated in home position, use a small flat-bladed screwdriver and carefully pry the valve off its seat, quickly remove the screwdriver allowing the valve to return to its seat. If the valve does not snap back unencumbered, then the valve will need to be removed from the valve body. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set > Page 5204 2. Once the valve is removed, inspect for any scratching or scoring. 3. If any scratching or scoring is found, then the fingernail test will need to be performed. Important: It has been found that in most cases that the scratches are not severe enough to catch your fingernail. 4. Using your fingernail, move over any scratches to see if your nail will catch on the scratch or score. - If your nail catches in the scratches, the valve will need to be replaced. - If your nail does not catch in the scratches, continue with the next step. 6. Important: Clean the valve body with the machined side down so debris may escape. 7. Clean the valve and bore using brake cleaner. 8. Blow off with shop air. 9. To verify free movement of the valve, dip the valve into clean ATF and install the valve back into the appropriate bore. The valve should move freely. If the valve moves freely, in most cases the valve body will function properly when reinstalled. 10. Reassemble and retest Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 02-07-30-013E > May > 05 > A/T - 4T65E Poor Performance/Harsh Shifts/DTC's Set > Page 5205 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5211 Valve Body: Specifications Tighten the control valve body assembly-to-transaxle case bolts in sequence. Tighten the bolts to .. .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5212 Valve Body: Diagrams Control Valve Body Assembly Control Valve Body Assembly 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) - Dark Gray 301 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 62) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 302 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 28) (2) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) - Blue 304 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 50) (2) 304 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 50) (2) 305 - Reverse Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S5) - Brown 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 306 - Shift Solenoid Valve O-ring Seal (5) 307 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 307 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 307 Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 10) (3) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) - Black 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) - Black 311 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 13) 312 - Control Valve Body Solenoid Valve Retainer 313 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 20) (5) 313 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 20) (5) 314 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 16) (2) 315 - Front Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5213 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) - Blue 318 - Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Clip 319 - TCC Lock Up Control Solenoid Valve Retainer (SLU) 320 - Front Control Valve Body to Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Gasket 321 - Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate 322 - Front Control Valve Body Spacer Plate to Middle Control Valve Body Gasket 323 - Middle Control Valve Body Assembly 324 - Middle Control Valve Body Assembly to Rear Control Valve Body Spacer Plate and Gasket Assembly 326 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 327 - Rear Control Valve Body to Rear Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Gasket 328 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Spacer Plate 329 - Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Spacer Plate to No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Gasket 330 - No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 331 Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 76) 332 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 49.5) (4) 333 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 40) 334 - Control Valve Body Assembly Pressure Test Hole Bolt/Screw Pressure Tap (M6 x 1.0 x 12) (1) 335 - Control Valve Body Bolt/Screw (M5 x 0.8 x 35) (2) 336 - Manual Valve Link 337 - Manual Valve 338 - Manual Valve Link Retainer 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) - Black 340 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) - Green Front Control Valve Body Assembly Front Control Valve Body Assembly 345 - Front Control Valve Body 346 - Solenoid Modulator Valve 347 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Spring - Yellow 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 348 - Solenoid Modulator Valve Bore Plug (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5214 349 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 10) (4) 350 - Pressure Relief Valve Spring - Natural Color 351 - Pressure Relief Valve 352 - Fluid Strainer 354 - Forward Clutch (C1) Control Valve 355 - Ball Check Valve 356 - Neutral Relay Valve 357 - Neutral Relay Valve Spring - Light Blue 358 2nd Coast Clutch (B1) Control Valve Spring - Blue 359 - 2nd Coast Clutch (B1) Control Valve 360 Check Valve (2) 361 - Check Valve Spring (2) Middle Control Valve Body Assembly Middle Control Valve Body Assembly 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (6) 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (7) 362 Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 362 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 12.5) (7) 370 - Middle Control Valve Body 371 - Fluid Strainer (3) 371 - Fluid Strainer (3) 372 - Fluid Strainer 373 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve Bushing - Inner 374 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve 375 - Reverse Shift Ball Check Valve Bushing - Outer 376 - Solenoid Relay Valve Sleeve 377 - Solenoid Relay Valve Plunger 378 Solenoid Relay Valve 379 - Solenoid Relay Valve Spring - Orange 380 - Cooler By-Pass Valve Spring - Natural Color Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5215 381 - Cooler By-Pass Valve 382 - TCC Check Valve 383 - TCC Check Valve Spring - Yellow 384 3rd Gear Band (B4) Release Valve Spring - Blue 385 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Release Valve 386 - U1 Shift Valve 387 - U1 Shift Valve Spring - Light Green 389 - M1 Shift Valve 390 - M1 Shift Valve Spring - Light Blue 391 - M1 Shift Valve Bore Plug 392 - U2 Shift Valve 393 - U2 Shift Valve Spring - Light Green 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 394 - U2 Shift Valve Bore Plug (3) 395 - Primary Regulator Valve 396 - Primary Regulator Valve Spring - Purple 397 - Primary Regulator Valve Plunger 398 - Primary Regulator Valve Sleeve 399 - Forward Clutch Check Ball Rear Control Valve Body Assembly Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 410 - Rear Control Valve Body 411 - 1-2 Reverse Clutch (B5) Control Valve 412 - Lock Up Relay Control Valve Sleeve 413 - Lock Up Relay Control Valve Plunger 414 - Lock Up Relay Valve Spring - Red 415 - Lock Up Relay Valve 416 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Bolt - Hexagon (M5 x 0.8 x 13) (2) 417 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate 418 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Gasket 419 Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Gasket 420 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate 421 - Rear Valve Body Cover Plate Bolt - Hexagon (M5 x 0.8 x 13) (7) 422 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Control Valve Spring Orange Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5216 423 - 3rd Gear Band (B4) Control Valve 424 - Shift Pressure Relay Valve 425 - Shift Pressure Relay Valve Spring - Light Green 426 - M2 Shift Valve 427 - M2 Shift Valve Spring - Light Blue 428 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Sleeve 429 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Spring - White 430 - Shift Pressure Control Valve 431 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Plunger 432 - Shift Pressure Control Valve Plunger Sleeve 433 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston 434 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston Spring - Outer - Orange 435 - Line Pressure Control (SLT) Accumulator Piston Spring - Inner - Orange 436 - Secondary Regulator Valve 437 - Secondary Regulator Valve Spring - Natural Color No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body Assembly 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (2) 353 - Accumulator Check Valve Assembly (2) 445 No. 2 Rear Control Valve Body 446 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve 447 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve Spring - Natural Color 448 - 2nd Clutch (B2) Control Valve Plug 449 - TCC Check Valve Spring - Light Blue 450 - TCC Check Valve 451 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve Bushing Inner 452 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve 453 - Reverse Shift Restrict Ball Check Valve Bushing - Outer 454 - Lock Up Control Valve 455 - Lock Up Control Valve Plunger 456 - Lock Up Control Valve Spring - Yellow 457 - Lock Up Control Valve Sleeve 458 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 21.2) 459 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 15) (2) 459 - Sleeve/Bore Plug Retainer (3.2 x 5 x 15) (2) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the left front wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the left splash shield. 4. Remove the front engine mount. 5. Remove the transaxle oil cooler lines and seals from the transaxle. 6. Remove the 9 TORX bolts (2) from the control valve body cover (1). Important: Do not pry with a tool on the transaxle control valve body cover, case or sealing surfaces. 7. Remove control valve body cover. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any gasket material from the control valve body cover and inspect the gasket mounting surface. 2. Install a 3 mm (0.125 inch) bead of RTV sealer GM P/N 89020326 (Canadian P/N 89021188) onto the control valve body cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 5219 3. Install the control valve body cover (1) onto the transaxle case. 4. Important: Use LOCTITE(TM) 242 thread sealer on ALL bolt threads. Install the control valve body cover bolts (2) hand tight. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the control valve body cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten the bolts to 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.). 6. Install the transaxle oil cooler lines and seals to the transaxle. 7. Install the front engine mount. 8. Install the left splash shield. 9. Install the left front wheel and the tire assembly. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Check the transaxle fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 5220 Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve Body Replacement Control Valve Body Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Place the transaxle in neutral (N). Remove the control valve body cover. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors (1-8). 3. Remove the fluid temperature sensor bolt (31). 4. Remove the fluid temperature sensor clamp (49). 5. Remove the fluid temperature sensor (36) and the O-ring (32) from the control valve body. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 5221 6. Remove the wiring harness (33) from the automatic transaxle wiring harness clip. 7. With a twisting motion remove the complete wiring harness assembly. 8. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts/screws (31), control valve body fluid passage cover (37) and gasket (38). 9. Remove the 6 control valve body mounting bolts/screws (1-6). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 5222 10. While holding the control valve body assembly, disconnect the manual shift detent lever assembly (710) from the manual valve link (336). 11. Move the detent lever assembly clockwise for ease of removing the manual valve. 12. Remove the control valve body assembly (39). 13. Remove the 2 transaxle case fluid passage seals (86). Installation Procedure 1. Install 2 new transaxle case fluid passage seals (86) into the transaxle case fluid ports. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 5223 2. While holding the control valve body assembly (39), connect the manual valve link (336) to the manual shift detent lever assembly (710). 3. Install the 6 control valve body assembly to transaxle case bolts and hand tighten. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the control valve body assembly-to-transaxle case bolts in sequence. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 5224 5. Install a new control valve body fluid passage cover gasket (38). 6. Install the control valve body fluid passage cover (37). 7. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (31). ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 8. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to a new transaxle wiring connector O-ring seal (46). 9. Install a new transaxle wiring connector O-ring seal (46) onto the transaxle wiring harness assembly (33). 10. Install the transaxle wiring harness assembly (33) into the transaxle case through the wiring harness bore. 11. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to a new transaxle fluid temperature sensor O-ring seal (32). 12. Install a new transaxle fluid temperature sensor O-ring seal (32) into the groove of the transaxle fluid temperature sensor (36). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 5225 13. Install the transaxle fluid temperature sensor (36) into the front control valve body fluid temperature sensor bore. 14. Install the transaxle fluid temperature sensor clip (49). 15. Install the fluid temperature sensor bolt (31). ^ Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 16. Connect the 8 solenoid wire connectors as follows: ^ 1 blue ^ 2 black ^ 3 green ^ 4 black ^ 5 blue ^ 6 gray ^ 7 brown ^ 8 black 17. Install the control valve body cover. 18. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Hydraulic Clutch Bleeding Procedure Improvement Clutch Hydraulic System: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Hydraulic Clutch Bleeding Procedure Improvement Bulletin No.: 01-07-31-002B Date: November 01, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Improved Bleeding Procedure for Hydraulic Clutch Release System Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior Chevrolet and GMC 6-7F T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models 2007 and Prior Isuzu F-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-31-002A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). This bulletin is being issued to inform dealers of an improved procedure to aid in the ease of bleeding the clutch hydraulic system for the above listed vehicles. This procedure can be used anytime air is introduced into the hydraulic system. Following this procedure may also reduce the number of unnecessary parts replaced for low clutch pedal reserve and high shift effort. Verify that all the lines and fittings are dry and secure. Clean the dirt and grease from the reservoir cap in order to ensure that no foreign substances enter the system. Remove the reservoir cap. Fill the reservoir to the proper level with the required fluid. Attach the J 43485 (Adapter) to the J 35555 (Mity Vac), or equivalent. Brake fluid will deteriorate the rubber on J 43485. Use a clean shop cloth to wipe away the fluid after each use. Place and hold the adapter on the reservoir filler neck to ensure a tight fit. In some cases, the adapter will fit into the reservoir opening. Apply a vacuum of 51-68 kPa (15-20 hg) and remove the adapter. Refill the reservoir to the proper level. Repeat Steps 6 and 7. If needed, refill the reservoir and continue to pull a vacuum until no more bubbles can be seen in the reservoir or until the fluid level no longer drops. The vehicle will move if started in gear before the Actuator Cylinder is refilled and operational. Start the vehicle the first time in neutral to help prevent personal injury from vehicle movement and see if the transmission will shift easily into gear. Pump the clutch pedal until firm (to refill actuator cylinder). Add additional fluid if needed. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Shift Lock Control Feature Function Shift Interlock: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Lock Control Feature Function Bulletin No.: 03-07-30-043A Date: May 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Information Regarding Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Models: 2007 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-30-043 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). This bulletin is being issued to better explain how the Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control (formerly known as Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)) feature is intended to operate. Revised wording regarding the shift lock control system began appearing in the Owner Manuals beginning with the 2004 model year. The shift lock control feature was intended to prevent drivers from shifting out of Park with the vehicle running without the brakes applied. However, if the ignition switch is in the Accessory (ACC) position, it may be possible on some vehicles to move the shift lever out of Park WITHOUT first activating the brake. The shift lock control system is ONLY active when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ON position. This means that when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ON position, the shift lever cannot be moved out of the Park position without activating the brake. Some owners may feel that the shift lock control system prevents an unattended child from moving the vehicle. Please stress to owners, as stated in the Owner Manual, that children should NEVER be left unattended in a vehicle, even if the ignition key has been removed from the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Clutch: Service and Repair Differential Clutch Drum Assembly Replacement ^ Tools Required J-08614-A Pinion Flange Holder and Remover - J 8092 Driver Handle - J 46607 Alignment Tool - J 44852 Front Clutch Drum Seal Installer - J 44853 Rear Clutch Drum Seal Installer - J 44873 Shoulder Bolts Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the propeller shaft underbody guard loop bolts. 3. Remove the guard loop. 4. Reference mark the propeller shaft flange-to-pinion flange relationship at the rear drive module (RDM). 5. Remove the propeller shaft flange mounting bolts at the RDM pinion flange. 6. Position the end of the propeller shaft away from the RDM and secure with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5240 7. Place a container under the RDM housing. 8. Remove the RDM drain plug. 9. Drain the RDM fluid. 10. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using the J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 11. Loosen the pinion flange nut. 12. Using a breaker bar to hold the J 44873 stationary, loosen the pinion flange nut. 13. Remove and discard the pinion flange nut (1). 14. Remove the pinion flange (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5241 15. Remove the RDM housing cover bolts (1). 16. Carefully remove the housing cover (2) from the RDM. 17. Remove the clutch drum (2) from the housing cover (1). 18. Remove the filter assembly. 19. Remove the locating pins. 20. Important: Do not gouge the housing cover and RDM sealing surfaces. Remove all traces of sealer from the housing cover and RDM sealing surfaces. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5242 21. Clean the housing cover and RDM sealing surfaces with denatured alcohol or equivalent, and dry with a clean, lint free cloth. 22. Check the pinion flange sealing surface (1) for wear or gouges, the bolt threads (2) for damage and the pinion splines (3) for worn or damaged splines. 23. Inspect the dust deflector (2) for cracks . 24. Inspect the pinion flange seal (1), the front seal (2) and the rear seal (3) for tears, cuts, and gouges on the seals and sealing surfaces. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5243 25. If the rear seal (1) is damaged, replace using J 44853 . Install the clutch drum rear oil seal (1) to the differential housing. 26. Inspect the clutch cover oil seal (1). It is recessed into the clutch cover. Inspect for tears, cuts, and gouges on the seals and sealant surfaces. 27. If the front seal is damaged, replace using J 44852 (1) and J 8092 (2). Install the front oil seal into the clutch cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5244 28. Important: The bearing must be replaced, if removed. Inspect the clutch cover bearing (1) for roughness and excessive play. It is recessed into the clutch cover. 29. Remove the snap ring (1). 30. Drive the bearing (1) out from the inner race. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5245 31. Install the bearing (1) into the clutch over from the outer race with a suitable driver. 32. Install the snap ring (2) into the groove. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new filter assembly. 2. Install the locating pins. 3. Align the clutch with the pump and pump bushing. Place the J 46607 in the splines of the clutch. Twist alignment tool back and forth to align the pump and bushing. With a properly aligned clutch, the groove on the J 46607 will be flush with the drum as shown. Remove the tool by pulling straight out. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5246 4. Notice: Do not submerge the clutch drum in solvent. This will damage friction material and geroter pump. Install the clutch drum (1) to the pinion shaft (2) by shaking the drum while rotating the drum back and forth to engage the splines of the pump rotor and bushing. 5. When properly engaged, the clutch drum will be fully seated against the clutch drum oil seal (1). 6. Apply a continuous bead of sealer, GM P/N 21019581 (Canadian P/N 10953472) of equal height and width to the RDM housing sealing surface. Apply sealer to a height and width of 2.5 mm (0.098 inch). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5247 7. Notice: The clutch cover housing must be fully seated to the rear drive module (RDM). Do Not use the mounting bolts to draw the cover to the RDM. If the cover does not fully seat to the RDM, the clutch drum assembly splines must be realigned to the pinion shaft splines before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions will result in damage to the clutch assembly. Important: Do not disturb the sealer bead applied to the RDM sealing surface. Install the clutch housing cover (1) to the RDM. 8. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hand install the clutch housing cover bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the dust deflector (2) to the input flange (1) if removed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5248 10. Install the input flange (2) to the clutch shaft. 11. Hand install a new input flange nut (1) to the clutch shaft. 12. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 13. Tighten the pinion nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.). 14. Thoroughly clean the drain plug threads and apply thread sealer, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), to the plug threads. 15. Install the RDM drain plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5249 16. Remove the RDM fill plug. 17. Thoroughly clean the fill plug threads and apply thread sealer, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), to the plug threads. 18. Fill the RDM with lubricant. 19. Install the fill plug. ^ Tighten the plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 20. Thoroughly clean and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488) to the propeller shaft flange mounting bolt threads. 21. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft flange and the RDM input flange. 22. Install the propeller shaft flange mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5250 23. Install the propeller shaft underbody guard loop. 24. Install the propeller shaft underbody guard loop bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 25. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Mount: Service and Repair Differential Carrier Assembly Mount Replacement ^ Tools Required J 44866Support Bushing Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the intermediate exhaust pipe from the front pipe and remove the intermediate pipe and muffler assembly. 3. Place a support stand under the rear drive module (RDM) and support the RDM. 4. Remove the rear stabilizer bar. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5254 5. Remove the RDM bracket-to-bushing mounting nut and bolt. 6. Remove the nut (1) and bolt (3) from the mounting RDM mounting bracket (2) and remove the bracket. 7. Place the open receiver end of the J 44866 over the flanged side of the bushing and against the vehicle frame. 8. Position the driver portion of the J 44866 with the smaller diameter of the driver against the bushing. 9. Install the bolt and washer through the driver, bushing, and receiver. 10. Install the nut to the bolt. 11. Slowly tighten the bolt and nut until the bushing is driven out of the vehicle frame and into the receiver. 12. Disassemble the J 44866 and remove the bushing. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5255 1. Position the RDM support bushing to the vehicle frame with the slotted portions of the bushing at the 6 o'clock and 12 o'clock positions. 2. Install the receiver end of the J 44866 against the vehicle frame opposite the bushing. 3. Place the large diameter face of the J 44866 driver against the flanged portion of the bushing. 4. Install the bolt and washer through the driver, bushing, and receiver. 5. Install the nut to the bolt. 6. Slowly tighten the bolt and nut until the bushing is drawn into the vehicle frame and the flange is seated squared against the vehicle frame. 7. Remove the J 44866 . 8. Install the support bracket (2) to the RDM. 9. Install the bolt (3) and nut (1) to the bracket. 10. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the support bracket nut and bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5256 11. Install the bracket-to-bushing bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.). 12. Remove the support stand from under the RDM. 13. Install the rear stabilizer bar to the vehicle. 14. Install the intermediate pipe and muffler assembly. 15. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Oil Capacity Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 750 ml (25.4 Oz.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5261 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Fluid Type ................................................................................................................................................ VersaTrak Fluid GM P/N 12378514 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle Inspection Procedure 1. Important: In order to obtain an accurate indication of the fluid level, the rear drive module priming procedure must be performed prior to fluid level inspection. Prime the rear drive module in the service stall: 1. Raise and support the vehicle so that all wheels are off of the ground. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Start the engine and place transmission in a forward gear. 3. Slowly apply the park brake until the rear wheels stop rotating. 4. Carefully accelerate the engine until the rear wheels begin to rotate. 5. Important: Do not exceed 5 seconds of park brake apply while vehicle is in gear and the engine is running to avoid overheating of the rear drive module. Continue allowing the rear wheels to rotate for 5 seconds. 6. Release the accelerator and apply the brakes. 7. Place transmission in park or neutral and turn the engine OFF. 8. Release the park brake. 9. Raise the vehicle fully. 2. Alternatively, prime the rear drive module by driving the vehicle on a flat, paved surface in a tight, 360 degree circle for 3 consecutive revolutions at 8 km/h (5 mph). 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Clean the area around the fluid fill plug. 5. Remove the fluid fill plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 5264 6. Using a length of heavy mechanics wire or equivalent, position a 90 degree bend approximately 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the wire. 7. Place the angled end of the wire into the fluid fill plug hole. 8. Rest the wire squarely on the threads of the fill plug hole. 9. Remove the wire and measure the distance between the bend and the fluid level as indicated by the witness mark. The distance from the bend to the witness mark should be 8 - 17 mm (0.32 - 0.68 inch). 10. Adjust the fluid level as required by adding or removing fluid GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045). 11. Thoroughly clean the fill plug threads and apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the threads. 12. Install the rear drive module fill plug. ^ Tighten the fill plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 13. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 5265 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Draining Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan below the rear drive module. 3. Remove the drain plug from the front of the rear drive module, below the input flange. 4. Drain the fluid. Filling Procedure 1. Thoroughly clean the threads of the drain plug. 2. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the drain plug threads. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drain plug to the rear drive module. ^ Tighten the drain plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the rear drive module fill plug. 5. Fill the rear drive module with fluid GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045). Fill initially with 750 ml (25.4 oz) of fluid. 6. Inspect the fluid level. 7. Thoroughly clean the threads of the fill plug. 8. Apply sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) to the fill plug threads. 9. Install the fill plug to the rear drive module. ^ Tighten the fill plug to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle > Page 5266 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair Pinion Flange: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J-08614-A Pinion Flange Holder and Remover - J 44851 Pinion Seal Installer - J 44873 Shoulder Bolts Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Index mark the propeller shaft at the power take-off unit (PTU) output flange and at the rear drive module input flange. 3. Place an adjustable support at the front and the rear of the propeller shaft. 4. Remove the rear drive module (RDM) propeller shaft guard (2) mounting bolts (1). 5. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the RDM flange. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5270 6. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the PTU. 7. Remove the bolts securing the support bearing to the vehicle underbody. 8. Remove the propeller shaft from the vehicle. 9. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 10. Loosen the pinion flange nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5271 11. Remove and discard the pinion flange nut (1). 12. Remove the flange (2). 13. Remove the dust deflector (2) from the pinion flange (1). 14. Remove and discard the pinion oil seal (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5272 1. Thoroughly clean the pinion oil seal mounting surface of the RDM housing (1). 2. Using the J 44851 , install a new pinion oil seal to the RDM. 3. Ensure that the seal flange seats squarely against the face of the RDM. 4. Install the dust deflector (2) to the drive pinion flange (1). 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the pinion flange (2) and nut (1) to the RDM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5273 6. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 7. Tighten the pinion flange nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 44873 from pinion flange. 9. Install the propeller shaft to the vehicle using support stands to assist in positioning the propeller shaft. 10. Hand install the support bearing retainer bolts to the vehicle underbody. 11. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft and the PTU output flange. 12. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft and the PTU flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5274 13. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft and the RDM pinion flange. 14. Thoroughly clean and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the propeller shaft flange mounting bolt threads. 15. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft and the pinion flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 16. Remove the support stands. 17. Install the propeller shaft guard to the RDM. 18. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft guard. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 19. Inspect the RDM fluid level. 20. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left ^ Tools Required J 44809 Output Shaft Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the left rear wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the left rear wheel drive shaft. 4. Carefully pry out the output shaft seal and discard. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new output shaft seal using the J 44809 . 2. Install the left rear wheel drive shaft. 3. Inspect the rear drive module fluid level. 4. Install the left rear wheel and tire assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 5279 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Right ^ Tools Required J 44809 Output Shaft Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right rear wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the right rear wheel drive shaft. 4. Carefully pry out the output shaft seal and discard. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new output shaft seal using the J 44809 . 2. Install the right rear wheel drive shaft. 3. Inspect the rear drive module fluid level. 4. Install the right rear wheel and tire assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 5280 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J-08614-A Pinion Flange Holder and Remover - J 44851 Pinion Seal Installer - J 44873 Shoulder Bolts Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Index mark the propeller shaft at the power take-off unit (PTU) output flange and at the rear drive module input flange. 3. Place an adjustable support at the front and the rear of the propeller shaft. 4. Remove the rear drive module (RDM) propeller shaft guard (2) mounting bolts (1). 5. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the RDM flange. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 5281 6. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the PTU. 7. Remove the bolts securing the support bearing to the vehicle underbody. 8. Remove the propeller shaft from the vehicle. 9. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 10. Loosen the pinion flange nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 5282 11. Remove and discard the pinion flange nut (1). 12. Remove the flange (2). 13. Remove the dust deflector (2) from the pinion flange (1). 14. Remove and discard the pinion oil seal (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 5283 1. Thoroughly clean the pinion oil seal mounting surface of the RDM housing (1). 2. Using the J 44851 , install a new pinion oil seal to the RDM. 3. Ensure that the seal flange seats squarely against the face of the RDM. 4. Install the dust deflector (2) to the drive pinion flange (1). 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the pinion flange (2) and nut (1) to the RDM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 5284 6. Install the J-08614-A (1) to the pinion flange (2) using J 44873-2 shoulder bolts (3). 7. Tighten the pinion flange nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 44873 from pinion flange. 9. Install the propeller shaft to the vehicle using support stands to assist in positioning the propeller shaft. 10. Hand install the support bearing retainer bolts to the vehicle underbody. 11. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft and the PTU output flange. 12. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft and the PTU flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 5285 13. Align the reference marks on the propeller shaft and the RDM pinion flange. 14. Thoroughly clean and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the propeller shaft flange mounting bolt threads. 15. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft and the pinion flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 16. Remove the support stands. 17. Install the propeller shaft guard to the RDM. 18. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft guard. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 19. Inspect the RDM fluid level. 20. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5290 Axle Shaft Assembly: Diagrams Wheel Drive Shafts Disassembled Views Tripot Design Wheel Drive Shaft Tripot Design Wheel Drive Shaft 1 - Retainer and Housing Assembly 2 - Retaining Ring 3 - Tripot Joint Spider Assembly 4 - Boot Retaining Clamp 5 - Tripot Trilobal Bushing 6 - Inboard Boot 7 - Boot Retaining Clamp 8 - Axle Shaft 9 - Boot Retaining Clamp 10 - Outboard Boot 11 - Boot Retaining Clamp 12 - Race Retaining Ring 13 - Chrome Alloy Ball 14 - CV Joint Inner Race 15 - CV Joint Cage 16 - CV Joint Outer Race Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5291 Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Wheel Drive Shafts Description and Operation Wheel drive shafts are flexible assemblies consisting of an inner tripot joint and an outer constant velocity joint connected by an axle shaft. The inner joint is completely flexible, and can plunge in and out. The outer joint is also flexible, but cannot plunge in and out. These drive axles are used to transmit rotational force from the transaxle to the front tire and wheel assemblies. Seal and Clamp The wheel drive shafts use inboard and outboard joint seals made of thermoplastic material, and clamps made of stainless steel. The functions of the seals are as follows: ^ The seals protect the internal parts of the inboard and outboard joints. ^ They protect the joint lubricating grease from surrounding detrimental atmospheric conditions; such as extreme temperatures, ozone gas, etc. ^ They protect the joint lubricating grease from foreign materials; such as stones, dirt, water, salt, etc. ^ The seals facilitate angular and axial movement of the inboard joint. ^ The seals facilitate angular movement of the outboard joint. The function of the clamps is as follows: Provide a leak proof connection at both the housing and the axle shaft for the inboard and outboard joints. The thermoplastic material performs well against normal handing, operational wear and conditions. This material however, is not strong enough to withstand abusive handling or damage due to objects such as sharp tools or the sharp edge of any other surrounding component on the vehicle. Inner Joint The inner joints are of the tripot design without an over-extension limitation retainer. The inner joints incorporate a male spline which interlocks with the transaxle using snap rings. Outer Joint The outer joints are of the Rzeppa, constant velocity joint design. The shaft end which mates with the wheel bearing and hub assembly, incorporates a helical spline to assure a tight, press-type fit. This design assures that no end play will exist between the hub bearing and the drive shaft assembly for added durability and reduced bearing noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Axle Shaft Assembly: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnostic Starting Point - Wheel Drive Shafts Begin the wheel drive shaft system diagnosis with the Diagnostic Starting Point - Vibration Diagnosis and Correction in Vibration Diagnosis and Correction. The use of the Diagnostic Starting Point will help determine if the concern is wheel drive shaft related. When instructed to exit the Vibration Diagnosis and Correction diagnostic procedures, return to the Diagnostic Starting Point Wheel Drive Shafts and proceed to Wheel Drive Shafts Description and Operation in order to become familiar with the design and function of the wheel drive shaft system. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will also help determine if the condition is a potential operating characteristic or not. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5294 Axle Shaft Assembly: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Symptoms - Wheel Drive Shaft Symptoms - Wheel Drive Shafts Important: Complete the following steps prior to beginning the wheel drive shaft diagnosis. 1. Review the Diagnostic Starting Point - Vibration Diagnosis and Correction in Vibration Diagnosis and Correction. 2. Perform the Vibration Analysis - Road Testing in Vibration Diagnosis and Correction in order to effectively diagnose the concern. 3. Review the system operation in order to become familiar with the system function. Visual/Physical Inspection ^ Inspect for aftermarket equipment and modifications which could affect the operation of the wheel drive shafts or other rotating components. ^ Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. ^ Thoroughly inspect the entire wheel drive shaft for visible damage, leaking joint seals, and missing seal clamps. ^ Inspect the wheel drive shaft seals for cuts, tears, or other damage which may allow the loss of lubricant and the entry of contaminates. Symptom List After performing the Visual/Physical Inspection and no visual signs of damage or other interference impairing the wheel drive shaft function is apparent, it may be necessary to remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle and manipulate the joints manually. Any binding or otherwise impeded movement of the joints may indicate damage which could contribute to the concern. Refer to the following: ^ Click Noise In Turns See: Click Noise In Turns ^ Clunk When Accelerating from Coast See: Clunk When Accelerating From Coast ^ Clunk Noise When Accelerating During Turns See: Clunk Noise When Accelerating During Turns ^ Shudder or Vibration During Acceleration See: Shudder or Vibration During Acceleration Click Noise In Turns Click Noise In Turns A constant velocity joint which is worn or damaged may cause a click noise during turns. This may be more apparent while simultaneously turning and accelerating. This click is caused by wear and/or damage to the constant velocity joint bearings and/or races. Commonly, this damage or wear is caused by the loss of lubricating grease from the constant velocity joint and the entry of foreign material or contaminates. Carefully inspect the wheel drive shaft seals for cuts, tears or other damage which may allow the lubricating grease to escape. The loss of this grease will cause damage to the wheel drive shaft constant velocity joint in a very short period of time. After the inspection reveals no visual evidence of wear or damage, it may be necessary to remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle and manipulate the inner and outer joints manually. Any binding or impeded movement of the joints may indicate damage which could contribute to the concern. Clunk Noise When Accelerating During Turns Clunk Noise When Accelerating During Turns A clunk noise that occurs while accelerating during turns may be caused by wear and/or damage to the inboard and the outboard joints in combination. The loss of lubricant and/or the presence of contaminates can cause damage to the internal components of the joints. Carefully inspect the joint seals for cuts, tears or other damage. Joint seals that are damaged may allow lubricant leakage and the entry of contaminates. After inspection reveals no visual evidence of wear or damage, it may be necessary to remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle an manipulate the joints manually. Do not allow the joints to separate from the wheel drive shaft bar. Any binding or impeded movement of the joints may indicate damage which could contribute to the concern. Clunk When Accelerating From Coast Clunk When Accelerating from Coast A clunk noise occurring when accelerating from coast or a standing start may be caused by a worn or damaged wheel drive shaft cross groove joint. The common cause of wheel drive shaft cross groove damage is the loss of lubricating grease and/or the presence of foreign material and contaminates in the joint. This usually occurs as a result of a torn or damaged cross groove joint seal. Carefully inspect the wheel drive shaft seal for cuts, tears or other damage that may allow the loss of the lubricating grease and/or the entry of contaminates. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5295 After inspection reveals no visual evidence of wear or damage, it may be necessary to remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle and manipulate the joint manually. Do not allow the joint to separate from the wheel drive shaft bar. Any binding or impeded movement of the joints may indicate damage which could contribute to the concern. Shudder or Vibration During Acceleration Shudder or Vibration During Acceleration In order to diagnose a shudder or vibration during acceleration, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vibration Diagnosis and Correction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) ^ Tools Required J 2619-01 Slide Hammer - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 44467 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. 5. Remove the O-ring seal from the intermediate drive shaft at the bearing retainer. 6. Remove the bearing retainer-to-support bracket mounting bolts. 7. Remove the bearing retainer. 8. Assemble the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 to the intermediate drive shaft retainer ring groove. 9. Disengage the intermediate drive shaft from the transaxle. 10. Remove the intermediate drive shaft from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5298 11. Remove the intermediate drive shaft support bracket mounting bolts. 12. Remove the support bracket from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install the intermediate drive shaft support bracket to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the support bracket mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5299 3. Install the J 44394 to the transaxle oil seal. 4. Install the intermediate drive shaft to the bearing retainer bracket and the transaxle. 5. Remove the J 44394 when the intermediate shaft splines pass the oil seal. 6. Ensure that the intermediate drive shaft is fully seated by grasping the intermediate drive shaft and attempting to pull free of the transaxle. 7. Position the bearing retainer to the support bracket. 8. Install the bearing retainer bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the O-ring seal to the intermediate drive shaft. 10. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the intermediate drive shaft. 11. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 12. Install the right tire and wheel assembly. 13. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5300 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L66) Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L66) ^ Tools Required J 2619-01 Slide Hammer - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 44467 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. 5. Remove the O-ring seal from the intermediate drive shaft at the bearing retainer. 6. Remove the intermediate drive shaft support bracket bolts at the engine. 7. Assemble the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 to the intermediate drive shaft retainer ring groove. 8. Disengage the intermediate drive shaft from the transaxle. 9. Remove the intermediate drive shaft from the vehicle. 10. Remove the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 from the intermediate drive shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5301 Installation Procedure 1. Install the J 44394 to the transaxle oil seal. 2. Install the intermediate drive shaft to the transaxle. 3. Remove the J 44394 when the intermediate shaft splines pass the oil seal. 4. Ensure that the intermediate drive shaft is fully seated by grasping the intermediate drive shaft and attempting to pull free of the transaxle. 5. Position the support bracket to the engine. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the support bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the O-ring seal to the intermediate drive shaft. 8. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the intermediate drive shaft. 9. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 10. Install the right tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5302 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 43828 Ball Joint Separator - J 44015 Steering Linkage Installer - J 45341 Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Removal Tool - J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 2619-01 Slide Hammer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 4. Notice: Hold the ball stud from turning when removing/installing the nut. The boot can become torn and damaged if the ball stud turns. Remove the outer tie rod end-to-steering knuckle nut. Do not loosen the tie rod end jam nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5303 5. Important: Do not use a wedge type tool to separate the tie rod end from the steering knuckle. Using the J 24319-B separate the tie rod end from the steering knuckle. 6. Remove and discard the cotter pin from the lower ball joint stud. 7. Remove the ball joint stud nut. 8. Using the J 43828 separate the lower ball joint stud from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5304 9. Using a backup wrench on the stud, remove the nut securing the lower stabilizer bar link and disengage the link. 10. Disengage the wheel drive shaft spindle from the wheel hub assembly. If necessary, place a wood block against the end of the wheel drive shaft spindle and tap with a hammer to aid removal. 11. Important: Use care not to damage the joint seal when removing the wheel drive shaft. Assemble the J 45341 and the J 2619-01 to the wheel drive shaft inner tripot joint. 12. Important: On vehicles equipped with all-wheel drive (AWD), the stub shaft may disengage from the power takeoff unit (PTU). If necessary, cap the opening in the PTU to prevent fluid loss. Disengage the wheel drive shaft from the transmission or power takeoff unit (PTU), if equipped. 13. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5305 1. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the output shaft. 2. Install the J 44394 to the wheel drive shaft oil seal. 3. Install the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft: ^ Guide the wheel drive shaft tripot joint squarely onto the output shaft. ^ After the splined end of the wheel drive shaft passes the oil seal, remove the J 44394 from the oil seal. ^ Firmly engage the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot joint is fully seated on the output shaft by grasping the tripot joint and attempting to pull free of the output shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5306 4. Insert the constant velocity (CV) joint spindle to the wheel hub/bearing assembly of the steering knuckle. 5. Hand install a new wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 6. Install the lower ball joint stud to the steering knuckle. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the lower ball joint castle nut to the stud. ^ Tighten the nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the nut an additional 150 degrees. 8. Install the cotter pin to the ball joint stud. 9. If necessary, tighten the nut one additional flat at a time until the castle nut aligns with the hole in the ball joint stud. 10. Secure the cotter pin to the ball joint stud by folding one tine over the end of the ball joint stud. 11. Cut off any excess length of the cotter pin tines. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5307 12. Install the lower link to the stabilizer bar. 13. Install a new nut to the stabilizer bar link stud. 14. Important: In order to prevent damaging the stabilizer bar link stud seal, do not allow the stud to rotate while tightening the nut. Use a back up wrench on the stud and tighten the nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 15. Install the tie rod end to the steering knuckle. 16. Using the J 44015 , pull the stud into steering knuckle. ^ Tighten the J 44015 to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 17. Remove the J 44015 from the tie rod end stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5308 18. Install a new nut to the tie rod end stud. ^ Tighten the nut to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 19. Tighten the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). 20. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 21. Lower the vehicle. 22. Inspect the transmission fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5309 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 45341 Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Removal Tool - J 44394 Seal Protector - J-2619-A Slide Hammer w/Adapter Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 4. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut. 5. Disconnect the link from the control arm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5310 6. Place a stand under the lower control arm and support the control arm. 7. Remove the lower shock absorber mounting bolt and nut. 8. Remove the toe link nut, bolt, and washer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5311 9. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower suspension jounce bumper nut. 10. Remove the lower control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. 11. Important: Relieve spring tension slowly in order to avoid sudden release of the coil spring. Slowly lower support stand until coil spring tension is relieved and remove coil spring. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5312 12. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper control arm-to-suspension knuckle nut. 13. Important: Support the wheel drive shaft while it is disengaged from the wheel hub and bearing assembly in order to avoid damaging the wheel drive shaft seals. Place a block of wood against the wheel drive shaft spindle and tap with a hammer to release the spindle from the wheel hub and bearing assembly. 14. Rotate the suspension knuckle upward and secure with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5313 15. Assemble the J 45341 and the J-2619-A to the wheel drive shaft inner tripot joint. 16. Disengage the tripot joint from the rear drive module (RDM). 17. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the inner tripot joint. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5314 2. Install the J 44394 to the wheel drive shaft oil seal. 3. Align the splines of the inner tripot joint to the output shaft of the RDM. 4. Install the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft: ^ Guide the wheel drive shaft tripot joint squarely onto the output shaft. ^ After the splined end of the wheel drive shaft passes the oil seal, remove the J 44394 from the oil seal. ^ Firmly engage the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot joint is fully seated on the output shaft by grasping the tripot joint and attempting to pull free of the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot slinger does not become damaged. 5. Rotate the suspension knuckle downward while simultaneously guiding the constant velocity (CV) joint spindle to the wheel hub and bearing assembly of the suspension knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5315 6. Hand install a new wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 7. Position the insulators to the coil spring and align the ends of the coil spring with the abutments of the insulators. 8. Secure each of the insulators to the coil spring using 2 plastic tie straps positioned 180 degrees apart and through the reliefs molded into the insulators. 9. Cut off any excess length of the tie straps. 10. Position the coil spring assembly to the lower control arm. 11. Position a support stand under the lower control arm. 12. Carefully raise the lower control arm while simultaneously guiding the coil spring assembly into the rear suspension cradle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5316 13. Position the suspension knuckle to the lower control arm. 14. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Ensure that the hex head of the suspension knuckle bolt faces the rear of the vehicle. Install the lower control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 15. Tighten the upper control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 135 Nm (100 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5317 16. Install the lower shock absorber mounting bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 17. Slowly lower and remove the support stand. 18. Tighten the lower jounce bumper nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 19. Position the rear toe link to the suspension knuckle. 20. Install the washer, bolt, and nut to the suspension knuckle and the toe link assembly. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 21. Position the stabilizer bar link to the lower control arm. 22. Install the nut to the stabilizer bar link. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5318 23. While holding the stabilizer bar link stationary with a wrench, tighten the nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 24. Tighten the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 25. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 26. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5319 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) ^ Tools Required J 2619-01 Slide Hammer - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 44467 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. 5. Remove the O-ring seal from the intermediate drive shaft at the bearing retainer. 6. Remove the bearing retainer-to-support bracket mounting bolts. 7. Remove the bearing retainer. 8. Assemble the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 to the intermediate drive shaft retainer ring groove. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5320 9. Disengage the intermediate drive shaft from the transaxle. 10. Remove the intermediate drive shaft from the vehicle. 11. Remove the intermediate drive shaft support bracket mounting bolts. 12. Remove the support bracket from the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install the intermediate drive shaft support bracket to the engine. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the support bracket mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5321 3. Install the J 44394 to the transaxle oil seal. 4. Install the intermediate drive shaft to the bearing retainer bracket and the transaxle. 5. Remove the J 44394 when the intermediate shaft splines pass the oil seal. 6. Ensure that the intermediate drive shaft is fully seated by grasping the intermediate drive shaft and attempting to pull free of the transaxle. 7. Position the bearing retainer to the support bracket. 8. Install the bearing retainer bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the O-ring seal to the intermediate drive shaft. 10. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the intermediate drive shaft. 11. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 12. Install the right tire and wheel assembly. 13. Lower the vehicle. Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L66) Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L66) ^ Tools Required J 2619-01 Slide Hammer - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 44467 Output Shaft Assembly Remover and Installer Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5322 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the right tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. 5. Remove the O-ring seal from the intermediate drive shaft at the bearing retainer. 6. Remove the intermediate drive shaft support bracket bolts at the engine. 7. Assemble the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 to the intermediate drive shaft retainer ring groove. 8. Disengage the intermediate drive shaft from the transaxle. 9. Remove the intermediate drive shaft from the vehicle. 10. Remove the J 44467 and the J 2619-01 from the intermediate drive shaft. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5323 1. Install the J 44394 to the transaxle oil seal. 2. Install the intermediate drive shaft to the transaxle. 3. Remove the J 44394 when the intermediate shaft splines pass the oil seal. 4. Ensure that the intermediate drive shaft is fully seated by grasping the intermediate drive shaft and attempting to pull free of the transaxle. 5. Position the support bracket to the engine. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the support bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the O-ring seal to the intermediate drive shaft. 8. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the intermediate drive shaft. 9. Install the right wheel drive shaft. 10. Install the right tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 43828 Ball Joint Separator - J 44015 Steering Linkage Installer - J 45341 Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Removal Tool - J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller - J 44394 Seal Protector - J 2619-01 Slide Hammer Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5324 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 4. Notice: Hold the ball stud from turning when removing/installing the nut. The boot can become torn and damaged if the ball stud turns. Remove the outer tie rod end-to-steering knuckle nut. Do not loosen the tie rod end jam nut. 5. Important: Do not use a wedge type tool to separate the tie rod end from the steering knuckle. Using the J 24319-B separate the tie rod end from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5325 6. Remove and discard the cotter pin from the lower ball joint stud. 7. Remove the ball joint stud nut. 8. Using the J 43828 separate the lower ball joint stud from the steering knuckle. 9. Using a backup wrench on the stud, remove the nut securing the lower stabilizer bar link and disengage the link. 10. Disengage the wheel drive shaft spindle from the wheel hub assembly. If necessary, place a wood block against the end of the wheel drive shaft Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5326 spindle and tap with a hammer to aid removal. 11. Important: Use care not to damage the joint seal when removing the wheel drive shaft. Assemble the J 45341 and the J 2619-01 to the wheel drive shaft inner tripot joint. 12. Important: On vehicles equipped with all-wheel drive (AWD), the stub shaft may disengage from the power takeoff unit (PTU). If necessary, cap the opening in the PTU to prevent fluid loss. Disengage the wheel drive shaft from the transmission or power takeoff unit (PTU), if equipped. 13. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the output shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5327 2. Install the J 44394 to the wheel drive shaft oil seal. 3. Install the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft: ^ Guide the wheel drive shaft tripot joint squarely onto the output shaft. ^ After the splined end of the wheel drive shaft passes the oil seal, remove the J 44394 from the oil seal. ^ Firmly engage the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot joint is fully seated on the output shaft by grasping the tripot joint and attempting to pull free of the output shaft. 4. Insert the constant velocity (CV) joint spindle to the wheel hub/bearing assembly of the steering knuckle. 5. Hand install a new wheel drive shaft spindle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5328 6. Install the lower ball joint stud to the steering knuckle. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the lower ball joint castle nut to the stud. ^ Tighten the nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the nut an additional 150 degrees. 8. Install the cotter pin to the ball joint stud. 9. If necessary, tighten the nut one additional flat at a time until the castle nut aligns with the hole in the ball joint stud. 10. Secure the cotter pin to the ball joint stud by folding one tine over the end of the ball joint stud. 11. Cut off any excess length of the cotter pin tines. 12. Install the lower link to the stabilizer bar. 13. Install a new nut to the stabilizer bar link stud. 14. Important: In order to prevent damaging the stabilizer bar link stud seal, do not allow the stud to rotate while tightening the nut. Use a back up wrench on the stud and tighten the nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5329 15. Install the tie rod end to the steering knuckle. 16. Using the J 44015 , pull the stud into steering knuckle. ^ Tighten the J 44015 to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 17. Remove the J 44015 from the tie rod end stud. 18. Install a new nut to the tie rod end stud. ^ Tighten the nut to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 19. Tighten the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5330 20. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 21. Lower the vehicle. 22. Inspect the transmission fluid level. Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 45341 Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Removal Tool - J 44394 Seal Protector - J-2619-A Slide Hammer w/Adapter Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5331 4. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut. 5. Disconnect the link from the control arm. 6. Place a stand under the lower control arm and support the control arm. 7. Remove the lower shock absorber mounting bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5332 8. Remove the toe link nut, bolt, and washer. 9. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower suspension jounce bumper nut. 10. Remove the lower control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5333 11. Important: Relieve spring tension slowly in order to avoid sudden release of the coil spring. Slowly lower support stand until coil spring tension is relieved and remove coil spring. 12. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper control arm-to-suspension knuckle nut. 13. Important: Support the wheel drive shaft while it is disengaged from the wheel hub and bearing assembly in order to avoid damaging the wheel drive shaft seals. Place a block of wood against the wheel drive shaft spindle and tap with a hammer to release the spindle from the wheel hub and bearing assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5334 14. Rotate the suspension knuckle upward and secure with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. 15. Assemble the J 45341 and the J-2619-A to the wheel drive shaft inner tripot joint. 16. Disengage the tripot joint from the rear drive module (RDM). 17. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the wheel drive shaft retaining ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5335 1. Install a new wheel drive shaft retaining ring to the inner tripot joint. 2. Install the J 44394 to the wheel drive shaft oil seal. 3. Align the splines of the inner tripot joint to the output shaft of the RDM. 4. Install the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft: ^ Guide the wheel drive shaft tripot joint squarely onto the output shaft. ^ After the splined end of the wheel drive shaft passes the oil seal, remove the J 44394 from the oil seal. ^ Firmly engage the wheel drive shaft to the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot joint is fully seated on the output shaft by grasping the tripot joint and attempting to pull free of the output shaft. ^ Ensure that the tripot slinger does not become damaged. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5336 5. Rotate the suspension knuckle downward while simultaneously guiding the constant velocity (CV) joint spindle to the wheel hub and bearing assembly of the suspension knuckle. 6. Hand install a new wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 7. Position the insulators to the coil spring and align the ends of the coil spring with the abutments of the insulators. 8. Secure each of the insulators to the coil spring using 2 plastic tie straps positioned 180 degrees apart and through the reliefs molded into the insulators. 9. Cut off any excess length of the tie straps. 10. Position the coil spring assembly to the lower control arm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5337 11. Position a support stand under the lower control arm. 12. Carefully raise the lower control arm while simultaneously guiding the coil spring assembly into the rear suspension cradle. 13. Position the suspension knuckle to the lower control arm. 14. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Ensure that the hex head of the suspension knuckle bolt faces the rear of the vehicle. Install the lower control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5338 15. Tighten the upper control arm-to-suspension knuckle bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 135 Nm (100 ft. lbs.). 16. Install the lower shock absorber mounting bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 17. Slowly lower and remove the support stand. 18. Tighten the lower jounce bumper nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 19. Position the rear toe link to the suspension knuckle. 20. Install the washer, bolt, and nut to the suspension knuckle and the toe link assembly. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5339 21. Position the stabilizer bar link to the lower control arm. 22. Install the nut to the stabilizer bar link. 23. While holding the stabilizer bar link stationary with a wrench, tighten the nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 24. Tighten the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 25. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 26. Lower the vehicle. Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely. 2. Using side cutters, remove and discard the small seal clamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5340 3. Remove large seal retaining clamp using a flat-bladed tool and discard the clamp. 4. Separate the seal from the tripot housing at the large diameter and slide the seal away from the joint along the axle shaft. 5. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the tripot spider and the inside of the tripot housing. 6. Remove the tripot housing from the spider and shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5341 7. Remove the retaining ring from the groove on the wheel drive shaft bar and remove the spider assembly. 8. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Thoroughly clean all parts with a suitable solvent, removing all traces of grease and contaminants. 10. Dry all parts with compressed air. 11. Inspect the tripot joint components for unusual wear, cracks, and other damage. Replace any damaged components. Assembly Procedure 1. Install the small seal clamp to the seal. Do not crimp the clamp. 2. Slide the inner seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and locate the lip of the seal groove on the wheel drive shaft bar. 3. Important: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove. Using the J 35910 , crimp the small seal clamp. 4. Measure the clamp gap width. Clamp gap width should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5342 5. Install the tripot spider assembly to the wheel drive shaft bar, until seated against shoulder. 6. Install the retaining ring in the groove of the wheel drive shaft bar with suitable pliers. 7. Place approximately half of the grease in the kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing. 8. Install the large clamp over the large diameter of the seal. 9. Install the tripot housing to the tripot spider assembly on the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the tripot housing and position the lip of the seal in the housing groove. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5343 11. Place the large seal retaining clamp around the seal and close using J 35910 . 12. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 13. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely. 2. Using side cutters, remove and discard the small seal clamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5344 3. Remove large seal retaining clamp using a flat-bladed tool and discard the clamp. 4. Separate the seal from the tripot housing at the large diameter and slide the seal away from the joint along the axle shaft. 5. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the tripot spider and the inside of the tripot housing. 6. Remove the tripot housing from the spider and shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5345 7. Remove the retaining ring from the groove on the wheel drive shaft bar and remove the spider assembly. 8. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Thoroughly clean all parts with a suitable solvent, removing all traces of grease and contaminants. 10. Dry all parts with compressed air. 11. Inspect the tripot joint components for unusual wear, cracks, and other damage. Replace any damaged components. Assembly Procedure 1. Install the small seal clamp to the seal. Do not crimp the clamp. 2. Slide the inner seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and locate the lip of the seal groove on the wheel drive shaft bar. 3. Important: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove. Using the J 35910 , crimp the small seal clamp. 4. Measure the clamp gap width. Clamp gap width should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5346 5. Install the tripot spider assembly to the wheel drive shaft bar, until seated against shoulder. 6. Install the retaining ring in the groove of the wheel drive shaft bar . 7. Place approximately half of the grease in the kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing. 8. Install the large clamp over the large diameter of the seal. 9. Install the tripot housing to the tripot spider assembly on the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the tripot housing and position the lip of the seal in the housing groove. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5347 11. Place the large seal retaining clamp around the seal and close using J 35910 . 12. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 13. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement - Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5348 2. Use a flat-bladed tool and disengage the retaining tabs of the large seal clamp. 3. Discard the clamp. 4. Remove the small seal clamp using side cutters and discard the clamp. 5. Separate the constant velocity (CV) joint boot from the CV joint race at the large diameter. 6. Slide the boot away from the joint along the wheel drive shaft bar. 7. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the CV inner race. 8. Place a block of wood against the CV joint outer race and carefully tap on the CV joint to remove it from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Remove the CV joint retaining ring from the wheel drive shaft bar. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5349 11. Place a brass drift against the CV joint inner race (1). 12. Tap gently on the brass drift with a hammer in order to tilt the joint race. 13. Remove the first bearing roller (2) when the CV race tilts. 14. Tilt the CV joint inner race in the opposite direction to remove the opposing bearing roller. 15. Repeat the process to remove all 6 of the bearing rollers. 16. Pivot the CV joint cage (4) and the inner race 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (2). At the same time, align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race. 17. Lift out the cage (4) and the inner race. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5350 18. Remove the inner race (1) from the cage (2) by rotating the inner race upward. 19. Clean the following items thoroughly with a suitable solvent. Remove all traces of grease and contaminants. ^ The inner and outer race assemblies. ^ The CV joint cage. ^ The bearing rollers. 20. Dry all the parts with compressed air. 21. Inspect the CV joint assembly for the following: ^ Unusual wear ^ Cracks ^ Damage 22. Replace any damaged parts. 23. Clean the wheel drive shaft bar. Use a wire brush to remove any rust in the seal mounting grooves. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new small seal clamp (2) on the neck of the outboard seal (1). Do not clamp. 2. Slide the outboard seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and position the neck of the outboard seal in the seal groove on the bar. The largest groove below the sight groove on the wheel drive shaft bar is the seal groove seal (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5351 3. Important: Ensure that the seal clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the seal. Crimp the seal clamp using the J 35910 . 4. Measure the clamp end gap dimension. The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). 5. Put a light coat of grease from the service kit on the bearing roller grooves of the inner race and outer race. 6. Hold the inner race 90 degrees to centerline of cage with the lands of the inner race (1) aligned with the windows of the cage (2) and insert the inner race into the cage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5352 7. Hold the cage and inner race 90 degrees to the center line of the outer race (1) and align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race. 8. Important: Be sure that the retaining ring side of the inner race faces the wheel drive shaft bar. Place the cage and the inner race into the outer race. 9. Insert the first bearing roller, then tilt the cage in the opposite direction to insert the opposing bearing roller. 10. Repeat this process until all 6 bearing rollers are in place. 11. Install the CV joint retaining ring to the wheel drive shaft bar. 12. Place approximately half the grease from the service kit inside the outboard seal and pack the CV joint with the remaining grease. 13. Place a block of wood against the CV joint spindle and tap on the block of wood until the CV joint inner race engages the retaining ring. 14. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the CV race and locate the lip of the seal in the housing groove. 15. Install the large seal retaining clamp over the seal and close using the J 35910 16. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 17. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the bench vise. 18. Distribute the grease within the outer CV joint by rotating the joint in a circular motion four to five times. Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Disassembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5353 1. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool and disengage the retaining tabs of the large seal clamp. 3. Discard the clamp. 4. Remove the small seal clamp using side cutters and discard the clamp. 5. Separate the constant velocity (CV) joint boot from the CV joint race at the large diameter. 6. Slide the boot away from the joint along the wheel drive shaft bar. 7. Wipe the excess grease from the face of the CV inner race. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5354 8. Place a block of wood against the CV joint outer race and carefully tap on the CV joint to remove it from the wheel drive shaft bar. 9. Remove the seal from the wheel drive shaft bar. 10. Remove the CV joint retaining ring from the wheel drive shaft bar. 11. Place a brass drift against the CV joint inner race (1). 12. Tap gently on the brass drift with a hammer in order to tilt the joint race. 13. Remove the first bearing roller (2) when the CV race tilts. 14. Tilt the CV joint inner race in the opposite direction to remove the opposing bearing roller. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5355 15. Repeat the process to remove all 6 of the bearing rollers. 16. Pivot the CV joint cage (4) and the inner race 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (2). At the same time, align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race. 17. Lift out the cage (4) and the inner race. 18. Remove the inner race (1) from the cage (2) by rotating the inner race upward. 19. Clean the following items thoroughly with a suitable solvent. Remove all traces of grease and contaminants. ^ The inner and outer race assemblies ^ The CV joint cage ^ The bearing rollers 20. Dry all the parts with compressed air. 21. Inspect the CV joint assembly for the following: ^ Unusual wear ^ Cracks ^ Damage 22. Replace any damaged parts. 23. Clean the wheel drive shaft bar. Use a wire brush to remove any rust in the seal mounting grooves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5356 Installation Procedure 1. Install the new small seal clamp (2) on the neck of the outboard seal (1). Do not clamp. 2. Slide the outboard seal onto the wheel drive shaft bar and position the neck of the outboard seal in the seal groove on the bar. The largest groove below the sight groove on the wheel drive shaft bar is the seal groove seal (3). 3. Important: Ensure that the seal clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the seal. Crimp the seal clamp using the J 35910 . 4. Measure the clamp end gap dimension. The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 inch). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5357 5. Put a light coat of grease from the service kit on the bearing roller grooves of the inner race and outer race. 6. Hold the inner race 90 degrees to centerline of cage with the lands of the inner race (1) aligned with the windows of the cage (2) and insert the inner race into the cage. 7. Hold the cage and inner race 90 degrees to the center line of the outer race (1) and align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race. 8. Important: Be sure that the retaining ring side of the inner race faces the wheel drive shaft bar. Place the cage and the inner race into the outer race. 9. Insert the first bearing roller, then tilt the cage in the opposite direction to insert the opposing bearing roller. 10. Repeat this process until all 6 bearing rollers are in place. 11. Using pliers, install the CV joint retaining ring to the wheel drive shaft bar. 12. Place approximately half the grease from the service kit inside the outboard seal and pack the CV joint with the remaining grease. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intermediate Shaft Replacement (L61) > Page 5358 13. Place a block of wood against the CV joint spindle and tap on the block of wood until the CV joint inner race engages the retaining ring. 14. Slide the large diameter of the seal over the outside of the CV race and locate the lip of the seal in the housing groove. 15. Instal the large seal retaining clamp over the seal and close using the J 35910 . 16. Inspect the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Continue tightening until the gap dimension is reached. Dimension equals 1.9 mm (5/64 inch). 17. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the bench vise. 18. Distribute the grease within the outer CV joint by rotating the joint in a circular motion 4 to 5 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5359 Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5360 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5374 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5375 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5376 Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) ^ Tools Required J 45000 Seal Remover - J 45187 Differential Output Shaft Oil Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the transaxle to catch any spilled transaxle fluid. 3. Remove the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Vehicles equipped with all wheel drive (AWD), remove the transfer case. 5. Using the J 45000 remove the right drive axle seal from the transaxle. 6. Clean the seal bore in the transaxle housing. Installation Procedure 1. Using the J 45187 , install the right drive axle seal onto the transaxle. 2. Vehicles equipped with AWD, install the transfer case. 3. Install the right front wheel drive shaft. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Important: Dexron(R)III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron(R)III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid GM P/N 88900925. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) > Page 5379 Inspect the transaxle fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Right) > Page 5380 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Left) Drive Axle Shaft Seal Replacement (Left) ^ Tools Required J 44809 Output Shaft Seal Installer - J 45000 Seal Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the transaxle to catch any spilled transaxle fluid. 3. Remove the left front axle shaft. 4. Using the J 45000 , remove the axle seal from the transaxle and discard. 5. Clean the seal bore in the transaxle housing. Installation Procedure 1. Using the J 44809 , install the left axle seal into the transaxle . 2. Install the left front axle shaft. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Important: Dexron(R)III automatic transmission fluid is not compatible with this transaxle. If Dexron(R)III ATF is used, transaxle failure will result. This transaxle uses GM T-IV fluid GM P/N 88900925. Inspect the transaxle fluid level. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 5386 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 5387 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 5388 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 5389 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. On vehicles with all-wheel drive, remove the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 5390 4. Important: Do not damage the wheel drive shaft joint seal. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the suspension knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 5391 3. On all-wheel drive vehicles, install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped, route the wheel speed sensor electrical harness through the backing plate and seat the grommet. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the rear brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Install the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. Tighten the nut to ......................................................... ........................................................................................................................ 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Center Support: Service and Repair Center Bearing Removal Removal Procedure ^ Tools Required J 22912-01 Split-Plate Bearing Puller - J 45270 Universal Joint Remover/Installer 1. Notice: Never clamp propeller shaft tubing in a vise. Clamping propeller shaft tubing in a vise could dent or deform the tube, causing an imbalance or unsafe condition. Always clamp on one end of the yokes and support the shaft horizontally. Important: Prior to disassembly, mark the positions of the driveshaft components relative to the driveshaft tube. All components must be reassembled in the same relationship to maintain proper balance. Remove the snap rings. 1. Pinch the ends of the snap ring together with a pair of pliers. 2. If the snap ring does not readily snap out of the groove in the yoke, tap the end of the bearing cup lightly in order to relieve pressure from ring. 2. Remove the universal joint caps using J 45270 . 3. Remove the front shaft half. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5400 4. Remove the lock ring (1) from the groove. 5. Discard the lock ring. 6. Place J 22912-01 on the splined yoke, as illustrated. 7. Using a press, remove the yoke. 8. Place J 22912-01 behind the support bearing. 9. Place the shaft in a press; then, support J 22912-01 and press off the support bearing. Center Bearing Cleaning and Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5401 1. Clean and inspect the universal joint cap bore (1). 2. Check the slinger (2) for bent lip or looseness. 3. Clean and inspect the splines (3). 4. Clean the snap ring groove (1). 5. Clean and inspect the yoke splines (2). 6. Clean and inspect the bearing mating surfaces (3). Center Bearing Installation Installation Procedure ^ Tool Required J 44870 Yoke Installer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5402 1. Using J 44870 , install the support bearing on the drive shaft until it seats firmly. 2. Align the splines on the shaft and the splines on the yoke. 3. Using J 44870 , install the yoke (2) on the drive shaft (1) until the lock ring groove is visible. 4. Install the lock ring (1) in the groove. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5403 5. Install the universal joint caps and the retaining clips. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Propeller Shaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Place the transmission in neutral. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Index mark the relationship of the propeller shaft to the rear drive module flange. 4. Remove the bolts securing the underbody guard loop. 5. Remove the underbody guard loop. 6. Place a support under the propeller shaft at the rear drive module. 7. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft yoke flange to the rear drive module flange. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5407 8. Index mark the relationship of the propeller shaft to the power take-off unit (PTU) flange. 9. Place a support under the propeller shaft at the PTU. 10. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft to the PTU flange. 11. Place a support under the propeller shaft at the support bearing. 12. Remove the bolts securing the propeller shaft support bearing to the vehicle underbody. 13. While supporting the propeller shaft, move the propeller shaft rearward to disengage the constant velocity joint from the PTU flange. 14. Remove the propeller shaft from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. While supporting the front, center, and rear of the propeller shaft, install the propeller shaft to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5408 2. Install, but do not tighten, the support bearing mounting bolts. 3. Pull the forward section of the propeller shaft rearward and install the propeller shaft to the PTU flange. 4. Align the index marks on the propeller shaft constant velocity joint and the PTU flange. 5. Thoroughly clean the propeller shaft flange mounting bolts and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the bolt threads. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the front propeller shaft mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 7. Align the index marks on the propeller shaft yoke flange and the rear drive module flange and install the propeller . 8. Thoroughly clean the yoke mounting bolts and apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the bolt threads. 9. Install the bolts to the propeller shaft yoke and rear drive module flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 10. Tighten the support bearing mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5409 11. Remove the support stands from the propeller shaft. 12. Install the guard loop to the vehicle underbody. 13. Install the bolts to the guard loop. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 14. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring Universal Joint: Service and Repair Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring ^ Tool Required J 45270 Universal Joint Remover/Installer 1. Notice: Never clamp propeller shaft tubing in a vise. Clamping propeller shaft tubing in a vise could dent or deform the tube, causing an imbalance or unsafe condition. Always clamp on one end of the yokes and support the shaft horizontally. Important: Prior to disassembly, mark the positions of the driveshaft components relative to the driveshaft tube. All components must be reassembled in the same relationship to maintain proper balance. Remove the propeller shaft. 2. Remove the snap rings. 1. Pinch the ends of the snap ring together with a pair of pliers. 2. If a snap ring does not readily snap out of the groove in the yoke, tap the end of the bearing cup lightly in order to relieve pressure from ring. 3. Use J 45270 to remove the U-joint caps. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 5414 4. If the bearing cup is not completely removed (2), place the exposed portion of the bearing cap into a soft-jaw vise. Tap upwards on the propeller shaft yoke with a hammer until the bearing cap is free of the propeller shaft yoke. 5. Rotate the propeller shaft and press the opposite bearing cup out of the yoke. 6. Remove the cross from the yoke. 7. Remove the remaining universal joint parts from the yoke. 8. Inspect the retaining ring grooves for the following: ^ Dirt ^ Corrosion ^ Pieces of the old ring 9. Inspect the bearing cup bores for burns or imperfections. 10. Important: Corrosion or dirt may prevent bearing cup installation and may prohibit the proper seating of the bearing retainers. Clean the retaining ring grooves. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 5415 1. Remove the bearing cups from the new universal joint journals. 2. Coat the needle bearings in the bearing cups with a thin layer of grease that is present on the journal. Use your finger to apply the grease. 3. Install one bearing cup partway into one side of the yoke. 4. Turn the yoke ear toward the bottom. 5. Install the cross into the yoke so that the trunnion seats freely into the bearing cup. 6. With the trunnion seated in the bearing cup, press the bearing cup into the yoke until it is flush with the yoke ear. 7. Install the opposite bearing cup partway into the yoke ear. 8. Make sure that the trunnions are started straight and true into both bearing cups. 9. Important: If the bearing cup seems to bind or hang-up, stop pressing. Check the needle bearings for misalignment in the bearing cup. Press the opposite bearing cup into the yoke ear. ^ Work the cross all the time. ^ Check for free unbinding movement of the trunnions in the bearing cups. ^ Press the bearing cup into the yoke until the bearing retainer groove is visible over the top of the bearing cup. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 5416 10. Important: Assemble the universal joint using the yellow snap rings supplied in the kit. If difficulty is encountered with the yellow snap rings, install the black snap rings supplied in the kit. Install the bearing retainer in the retainer groove. ^ Continue pressing until you can snap both retainers into place. ^ A small amount of chassis grease may help the snap ring seat in the bearing cup groove. 11. After the clips are installed, check for binding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 5417 12. If cross binding is felt, it may be necessary to strike the flange area in order to remove excess pressure from the cross. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - External Snap Ring > Page 5418 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Constant Velocity Joint Cleaning and Inspection Constant Velocity Joint Cleaning and Inspection Cleaning and Inspection Replace the propeller shaft half if any of the following occur: ^ Important: The constant velocity (CV) joint assembly is not serviceable. If the dust boot is torn or the joint is worn or damaged, replace the propeller shaft as an assembly. Inspect the constant velocity (CV) joint boot for rips or cracks. ^ Rotate the constant velocity (CV) joint to inspect for binding. ^ Inspect the constant velocity (CV) joint for grease or oil leakage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flywheel bolts ...................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 71 Nm (52 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5422 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Engine Flywheel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the automatic transaxle. 2. Remove the engine flywheel bolts and flywheel. 3. Clean the engine flywheel bolt threads and bolt holes. 4. Clean and inspect the engine flywheel. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine flywheel and bolts ^ Tighten bolts to 71 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the automatic transaxle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5428 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Shift Indicator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws holding the shift indicator to the center console trim bezel and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the shift indicator from the center trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5429 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Align the shift indicator with the center trim bezel and fasten with the screws. ^ Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 2. Connect the electrical connection to the center trim bezel. 3. Attach the center trim bezel to the center stack. Verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics Manual Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-07-29-004G Date: December 15, 2010 Subject: Manual Transmission Operating Characteristics Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior Chevrolet and GMC Medium Duty Trucks 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Manual Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and to add Cold Operation information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-29-004F (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle). Important Even though this bulletin attempts to cover operating characteristics of manual transmissions, it cannot be all inclusive. Be sure to compare any questionable concerns to a similar vehicle and if possible, with similar mileage. Even though many of the conditions are described as characteristics and may not be durability issues, GM may attempt to improve specific issues for customer satisfaction. The purpose of this bulletin is to assist in identifying characteristics of manual transmissions that repair attempts will not change. The following are explanations and examples of conditions that will generally occur in all manual transmissions. All noises will vary between transmissions due to build variation, type of transmission (usually the more heavy duty, the more noise), type of flywheel and clutch, level of insulation, etc. Basic Information Many transmission noises are created by the firing pulses of the engine. Each firing pulse creates a sudden change in angular acceleration at the crankshaft. These changes in speed can be reduced with clutch damper springs and dual mass flywheels. However, some speed variation will make it through to the transmission. This can create noise as the various gears will accel and decel against each other because of required clearances. Cold Operation Manual transmission operation will be affected by temperature because the transmission fluid will be thicker when cold. The thicker fluid will increase the amount of force needed to shift the transmission when cold. The likelihood of gear clash will also increase due to the greater time needed for the synchronizer assembly to perform its function. Therefore when the transmission is cold, or before it has reached operating temperature, quick, hard shifts should be avoided to prevent damage to the transmission. Gear Rattle Rattling or grinding (not to be confused with a missed shift type of grinding, also described as a combustion knock type of noise) type noises usually occur while operating the engine at low RPMs (lugging the engine). This can occur while accelerating from a stop (for example, a Corvette) or while operating at low RPMs while under a load (for example, Kodiak in a lower gear and at low engine speed). Vehicles equipped with a dual-mass flywheel (for example, a 3500 HD Sierra with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)) will have reduced noise levels as compared to vehicles without (for example, a 4500 Kodiak with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)). However, dual-mass flywheels do not eliminate all noise. Neutral Rattle There are often concerns of rattle while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged. This is related to the changes in angular acceleration described earlier. This is a light rattle, and once again, vehicles with dual mass flywheels will have reduced noise. If the engine is shut off while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged, the sudden stop of the engine will create a rapid change in angular acceleration that even dual mass flywheels cannot compensate. Because of the mass of all the components, this will create a noise. This type of noise should not be heard if the clutch is released (pedal pushed to the floor). Backlash Backlash noise is created when changing engine or driveline loading. This can occur when accelerating from a stop, coming to a stop, or applying and releasing the throttle (loading and unloading the driveline). This will vary based on vehicle type, build variations, driver input, vehicle loading, etc. and is created from the necessary clearance between all of the mating gears in the transmission, axle(s) and transfer case (if equipped). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics > Page 5434 Shift Effort Shift effort will vary among different style transmissions and synchronizer designs. Usually the more heavy duty the transmission, the higher the shift effort because of the increased mass of the components. Shift effort can also be higher in cold weather because the fluid will be thicker. Medium duty transmissions will not shift as quickly as a Corvette transmission. To reduce shift effort, do not attempt to rush the shift - allow the synchronizers to work as designed. Shifting harder will only increase the chance of rushing past the synchronizer leading to grinding while shifting. Non-Synchronized Gears Some light duty truck transmissions in 1st gear (creeper-gear) and reverse gears in various transmissions, along with all gears in some medium duty transmissions, may be non-synchronized. This means there is not a mechanism to match input and output shaft speeds to allow for a smooth shift. This function is left up to the driver. This can be noticed if a shift into 1st or reverse is attempted while the vehicle is rolling or before the input shaft stops rotating leading to a gear grind. The grinding can be reduced by coming to a complete stop and pausing for a moment before shifting into the 1st or reverse gear. Some slight grinding can be expected. In medium duty non-synchronized transmissions, the driver must match input shaft (engine) speed to output shaft (driveshaft) speed with every shift. This can be accomplished by double clutching, or by using other methods. If the driver is not able to perform this function properly, there will be gear grinding with each improperly completed shift. Driver training may be required to correct this condition. Clutch brakes are used in medium duty non-synchronized transmissions to allow a shift into gear at a stop. The clutch brake is used to stop the input shaft from spinning, allowing a shift into gear at a stop without grinding. The clutch brake is activated by pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the floor. When the clutch brake is used, it is possible to have a blocked shift with the vehicle stationary. If this occurs, engage the clutch slightly to rotate the input gear to allow the shift. The clutch brake is intended to only be used while at a stop. Care must be taken to not activate the clutch brake while shifting between gears. This could lead to excessive grinding or a blocked or missed shift. Skip Shift Currently, the Cadillac CTS-V, Pontiac GTO, Chevrolet Corvette and Camaro SS (other models may follow) equipped with the 6-speed manual transmission have a feature referred to as a "skip-shift." This feature only allows a shift from 1st to 4th gear when the indicator lamp is illuminated on the dash. Dealers cannot disable this feature as it was established to help meet fuel economy standards. The conditions for this feature are: engine coolant at normal operating temperature, vehicle speed of 24-31 km/h (15-19 mph), 21% or less throttle being used (refer to Service Information or the Owner Manual for more details.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 5445 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 5455 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5461 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5462 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5463 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5464 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5465 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Locations Component Locator Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5477 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5478 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5481 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5482 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5483 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5484 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5485 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5489 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5490 Transmission Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5493 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle . 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5494 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5495 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5499 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5500 Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5507 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Line Pressure Control Solenoid (SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5508 Shift Pressure Control Solenoid (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid/Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift control assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake transaxle shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness connector. 3. Using a screwdriver, disconnect the plastic retainers at solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 4. Remove the solenoid from the shift control assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the solenoid onto the shift control assembly. Connect the plastic retainers at the solenoid base and at the park lock lever. 2. Connect the BTSI solenoid harness connector. 3. Install the shift control assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5515 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5516 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 1-2, 2-3, Reverse Shift Solenoid (S3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5517 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (S2) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5518 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid (S4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5519 Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid (S1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5520 Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5524 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid (SLU) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5530 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Shift Indicator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws holding the shift indicator to the center console trim bezel and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the shift indicator from the center trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5531 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Align the shift indicator with the center trim bezel and fasten with the screws. ^ Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 2. Connect the electrical connection to the center trim bezel. 3. Attach the center trim bezel to the center stack. Verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 5542 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics Bulletin No.: 05-07-30-014 Date: May 09, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Undesirable Shift Characteristics For Equinox Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 (Reprogram Transaxle Control Module (TCM)) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to June 1, 2005 with Automatic Transaxle AF33-5 Condition Some customers may comment that there are certain shift characteristics from the transaxle that are "undesirable". Correction Important: If the customer DOES NOT have a shift characteristic concern, DO NOT install this new calibration as a ''maintenance item''. The new calibration will have different shift characteristics and will eliminate the down hill mode. These changes may be perceived by the customer as a concern. An updated calibration has been introduced as a "production running change" from the plant on approximately June 1, 2005. This updated calibration is now available as a service replacement calibration for vehicles built from start of production to approximately June 1, 2005. Changes in these calibrations are designed to improve customer satisfaction and include the following updates: ^ The ELIMINATION of Down Hill Mode ^ Improved R-D rolling engagement at light throttle (not at cold operation) ^ Improvements on the 2-3, 3-4, 4-5 upshifts to prevent slight engine RPM flare and/or delayed upshifts ^ Improvements to the 5-4 forced downshift feel ^ Improvement to the TCC engagement feel on minimum to light throttle ^ Improvements to some concerns for harsh 1-2 upshifts with cold ATF sump temps 1. Technicians are to reprogram the TCM with an updated software calibration. This new service calibration was released with TIS satellite data update version 4.0 or later available April 5, 2005. Important: Failure to clear and relearn the transmission adapts may cause intermittent erratic shifts, customer dissatisfaction, and a return visit to the dealership. 2. After successful reprogramming of the TCM, reset the transmission adapts and perform the Transmission Adaptive Learn Procedure. 3. Road test the vehicle under normal driving conditions to confirm the overall shift quality of the transmission. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-07-30-014 > May > 05 > A/T Controls - AF33-5, Undesirable Shift Characteristics > Page 5552 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-06-04-060 > Sep > 05 > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5558 Control Module: Diagrams Transmission Control Module C1 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5559 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5560 Transmission Control Module C2 Connector Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5561 Control Module: Service and Repair Transaxle Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the TCM from TCM bracket. 3. Disconnect the transaxle control module (TCM) electrical connectors (1) from the TCM (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5562 1. Connect the TCM electrical connector (1) to the TCM (2). 2. Install the TCM to the TCM bracket. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. 4. Important: DTC P0602 is set with all new service transaxle control modules. When the transaxle control module is reprogrammed with the correct software and calibrations, DTC P0602 will be erased. Reprogram the TCM with the correct calibration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 5. Perform the transmission adaptive learn procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Locations Component Locator Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly Connector , Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5574 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transaxle Range Switch Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover - J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Shift the transaxle into neutral (N) position. 3. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , remove the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Loosen the transaxle range switch bolt (2) and stud (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5575 5. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 8. Install the shift control cable to the transaxle range switch lever. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. After adjusting the transaxle range switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36346 Fascia Retainer Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Using the Fascia Retainer Remover J 36346 , disconnect the shift control cable from the transaxle range switch lever. 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever nut and lever. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5578 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transaxle range switch lever and lever nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the shift control cable end fitting onto the ball stud of the transaxle range switch lever. An audible snap will be heard when properly installed. 3. Install the battery tray. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5579 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transaxle Range Switch Replacement Transaxle Range Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45404 Transmission Indicator Alignment Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Important: The transaxle manual shaft must be in neutral (N) position prior to re-installing the switch. Apply the parking brake and place control shift lever in neutral (N). 3. Remove the transaxle range switch lever. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3, 5) from the transaxle range switch. 5. Using a screwdriver, bend the lockwasher tabs down away from the manual shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5580 6. Remove the nut, lock tab washer, and flat washer. 7. Remove the transaxle range switch bolt (2), stud (1), and flat washers. 8. Remove the transaxle range switch (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the transaxle range switch (3) to the manual shaft lever. 2. Install the washer stud (1) and the bolt (2). Hand tighten ONLY at this time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5581 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the flat washer, lock tab washer, and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 4. Ensure the manual shaft is in neutral (N) position. 5. Bend the lock washer tabs up to secure the nut. 6. Install the J 45404 to the manual shaft and rotate the transaxle range switch until the neutral base line on the switch lines up with the indicator line on the J 45404 . 7. Tighten the transaxle range switch bolt and stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Range Switch Lever Replacement > Page 5582 ^ Tighten the bolt and stud to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the J 45404 from the manual shaft. 9. Connect the electrical connectors (3, 5) to the transaxle range switch. 10. Install the transaxle range switch lever. 11. Install the battery tray. 12. After installing and adjusting the switch, verify the engine only starts in park (P) or neutral (N). If the engine starts in any other position, readjust the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5586 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5587 Transmission Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness (4) from the input speed sensor. 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt. 4. Remove the input speed sensor. 5. Remove the input speed sensor O-ring. Discard the O-ring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5590 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new input speed sensor O-ring. 2. Install the new input speed sensor O-ring onto the input speed sensor. 3. Install the input speed sensor to the transaxle . 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the input speed sensor bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (4) to the input speed sensor. 6. Install the battery tray . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5591 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the wiring harness (2) from the output shaft speed sensor. 2. Remove the output speed sensor bolt (3). 3. Remove the output shaft speed sensor (2) and the O-ring (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5592 1. Apply GM T-IV automatic transaxle fluid GM P/N 88900925 to the new output speed sensor O-ring (1). 2. Install the new output speed sensor O-ring (1) onto the output speed sensor (2). 3. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case assembly. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the output speed sensor bolt (3). ^ Tighten the bolt to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness (2) to the output shaft speed sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5596 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components View Electronic Components View 36 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 62 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor 73 - Automatic Transmission Input Speed Sensor 75 - Park/Neutral Position Switch 300 - 1-2, 2-3, Reverse, Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S3) 303 - 3-4, 4-5 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S4) 305 - Reverse Shift Valve Solenoid (S5) 308 - 2-3, 3-4 Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S2) 310 - Reverse, 1st Shift Solenoid Valve Assembly (S1) 316 - Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLT) 339 - TCC Lock Up Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLU) 340 - Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (SLS) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5597 Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Component Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5604 Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5605 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5606 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EBCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5607 5. Disconnect the pump motor electrical connector. 6. Remove the EBCM attaching screws. 7. Separate the EBCM from the BPMV by carefully pulling apart. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the sealing surface of the BPMV, with denatured alcohol and a clean shop cloth. 2. Install the EBCM to the BPMV. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the EBCM-to-BPMV attaching screws. Tighten the bolts in a cross pattern. ^ Tighten the bolts to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the pump motor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5608 5. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start the engine. 8. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 3. Clean the brake modulator assembly pipe fitting areas of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the electronic brake control module (EBCM). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5613 5. Place a shop towel under the brake modulator assembly to catch any brake fluid loss. 6. Important: Prior to disconnecting the brake pipes from the antilock brake system (ABS) modulator assembly, note the locations of the brake pipes to the valve assembly, to aid during installation. Disconnect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes from the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). 7. Cap the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 8. Disconnect the master cylinder brake pipes from the BPMV. 9. Cap the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 10. Plug the modulator brake pipe openings to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 11. Loosen the 2 insulator nuts on the brake pressure modulator valve assembly. 12. Remove the brake modulator assembly from modulator bracket by pulling straight up. Installation Procedure Important: When installing a new brake modulator assembly, do NOT remove the shipping plugs from the pipe ports until after installation into the vehicle. 1. Install the brake modulator assembly to the modulator bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5614 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the 2 brake pressure modulator assembly insulator nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the caps from the master cylinder brake pipe ends. 4. Remove the plugs from the master cylinder ports on the modulator assembly. 5. Connect the master cylinder brake pipes to the modulator assembly, in the same location as removed. 6. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the caps from the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipe ends. 8. Remove the plugs from the caliper and wheel cylinder ports on the modulator assembly. 9. Connect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes to the modulator assembly, in the same location as removed. 10. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the BPMV. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5615 11. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 12. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 13. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 14. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start engine. 15. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehiclein Vehicle DTC Information. 16. Observe the feel of the brake pedal after performing the diagnostic system check. If the pedal now feels spongy, air may have been in the secondary circuit of the brake modulator assembly, which may have been introduced into the primary circuit. If the pedal feels spongy, perform the ABS Automated Bleed Procedure. 17. Remove the shop towel and discard into an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5616 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Bracket Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the electronic brake control module (EBCM) electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5617 4. Loosen the 2 insulator nuts on the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) assembly. 5. Carefully lift the brake modulator assembly just enough to clear the bracket, then support the assembly. 6. Remove the brake pressure modulator assembly bracket mounting bolts. 7. Remove the bracket from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the BPMV assembly bracket to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5618 Install the brake pressure modulator assembly bracket mounting bolts and nut. ^ Tighten the bolts and nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 3. Install the brake modulator assembly to the bracket. 4. Tighten the 2 brake pressure modulator assembly insulator nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the EBCM electrical connector. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Left Side of the I/P Left Side of the I/P 1. Ambient Light Sensor 2. Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Traction Control (TC) Switch (JM4) 5. Hazard Switch 6. Fog Lamp Switch (T96) 7. Radio 8. HVAC Control Module 9. Power Window Switch - Main 10. Transmission Range Indicator 11. Horn Switch/Pad - Part of the Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 12. Headlamp Switch 13. Dimmer Switch 14. Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 15. Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5622 Traction Control Switch (JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5623 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Traction Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. 2. Carefully release the retaining tabs and remove the traction control switch from the trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5624 1. Install the traction control switch to the trim bezel. Ensure that the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 2. Install the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Component Locations LF Suspension LF Suspension 1 - C104 Left Shown, C105 Right Similar 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF, RF Similar Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5629 Under the Rear of the Vehicle 1 - Fuel Tank Harness 2 - C406 3 - Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Harness 4 - C404 5 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Shown, LR Similar Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5630 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5631 Under The Rear Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5632 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5633 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5634 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5635 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake rotor. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 5638 1. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the brake rotor. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 5639 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake shoes. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 5640 1. Install the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Seat the wheel speed sensor harness grommet into the backing plate. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the brake shoes. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: ^ Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel ^ Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred ^ Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure 1. Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: ^ If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle, and diagnose the appropriate DTC. ^ If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 5645 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Ensure the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level.Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 19. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 20. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 21. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 5646 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) ^ Tools Required J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent - J 44894-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal becomes firm, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 44894-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 44894-A. 7. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 8. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 9. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 10. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 11. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 12. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 13. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 15. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 20. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 44894-A. 21. Remove the J 44894-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 22. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 23. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 5647 may have been trapped in the BPMV. 24. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 25. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 5648 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the cap from the hose nipple on the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 6. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 inch), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 7. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 8. Remove the transparent hoses from the reservoir. 9. Install the cap to the hose nipple on the reservoir, to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 10. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 11. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal assembly electrical connector. 2. Remove the mounting bolts and reposition the module aside, if equipped. 3. Remove the retaining clip and washer from the brake pedal. 4. Release the brake booster pushrod from the brake pedal. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5652 5. Remove the stop lamp switch from the pedal bracket. 6. Remove the cruise control release switch, if equipped, from the pedal bracket. 7. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts. 8. Position the brake booster forward to clear the studs from the front of the dash. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5653 9. Remove the brake pedal bracket-to-steering column bracket bolt. 10. Loosen, but do not remove, the steering column bracket to cowl nut. 11. While simultaneously disengaging the brake pedal bracket pilot bushings from the foam insulation panel, pull the brake pedal assembly back and toward the center of the vehicle. 12. Remove the brake pedal assembly from the vehicle. 13. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly from the brake pedal bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5654 14. Remove the mounting bracket bolts and J-nuts from the brake pedal assembly, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the J-nuts and mounting bracket bolts to the brake pedal assembly, if equipped. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 2. Install the accelerator pedal assembly to the brake pedal bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5655 3. Install the brake pedal assembly into the vehicle, while guiding the brake pedal bracket pilot bushings into the foam insulator panel. 4. Reposition the booster studs thru dash panel. 5. Install the brake pedal bracket-to-steering column bracket bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Loosely install the brake booster mounting nuts. 7. Apply a thin coating of lithium grease to the pushrod pin on the brake pedal. 8. Connect the brake booster pushrod to the brake pedal. 9. Install the washer and retaining clip to the brake pedal. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5656 10. Tighten the vacuum brake booster mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the steering column bracket to cowl nut. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the cruise control release switch and retainer, if equipped, to the pedal bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5657 13. Install the stop lamp switch and retainer to the pedal bracket. 14. Adjust the stop lamp switch. 15. Adjust the cruise release switch, if equipped. 16. Reposition the module to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 17. Connect the accelerator pedal assembly electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: Customer Interest Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5667 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5668 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5669 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5675 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5676 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5677 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 5683 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 5684 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 5690 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 5691 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure Caution: Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Failure to obtain a firm pedal before moving vehicle may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the brake caliper from the brake caliper bracket. 2. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Support the brake caliper (1) with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent; do NOT disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. 3. Remove the brake pads (2) from the brake caliper bracket (3). 4. Remove the brake pad retainers (1) from the brake caliper bracket (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 5694 5. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (2). 6. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1) from the knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1) to the knuckle. 2. Important: If reusing the caliper bracket bolts, the threads of the caliper bracket bolts and the threads of the knuckle mounting holes must be thoroughly cleaned and free of debris prior to the application of threadlocker. Prepare the bolts and the threaded holes for assembly: 1. Thoroughly clean the residue from the bolt threads by using denatured alcohol or equivalent and allow to dry. 2. Thoroughly clean the residue from the threaded holes by using denatured alcohol or equivalent and allow to dry. 3. Apply threadlocker Saturn P/N 21005994, or equivalent to two-thirds of the threaded length of the lower caliper bracket bolts. 4. Allow the threadlocker to cure approximately 10 minutes before installation. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the 2 brake caliper bracket bolts (2). ^ Tighten the front brake caliper bracket bolts to 185 Nm (136 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the brake pad retainers (1) to the brake caliper bracket (3). 5. Install the brake pads (2) to the brake caliper bracket (3). 6. Install the brake caliper (1) to the front brake caliper bracket (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 5695 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement Brake Caliper Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 7. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outer brake pad. 8. Tighten the C-clamp until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 9. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake hose-to-caliper bolt from the brake caliper. 11. Remove the brake hose from the brake caliper. 12. Remove and discard the 2 copper brake hose gaskets. These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 13. Cap or plug the opening in the brake caliper and the brake hose to prevent fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 5696 14. Remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts. 15. Remove the brake caliper from the caliper bracket. 16. Inspect the brake caliper guide pins for freedom of movement, and inspect the condition of the guide pin boots. Move the guide pins inboard and outboard within the bracket bores, without disengaging the slides from the boots, and observe for the following: ^ Restricted caliper guide pin movement ^ Looseness in the brake caliper mounting bracket ^ Seized or binding caliper guide pins ^ Split or torn boots 17. If any of the conditions listed are found, the brake caliper guide pins and/or boots require replacement. Installation Procedure 1. Apply a light, thin coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the caliper guide pins. 2. Install the guide pins to the brake caliper bracket. 3. Install the brake caliper to the brake caliper bracket. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 5697 5. Remove the caps or plugs from the brake caliper opening and the brake hose. 6. Important: Do not reuse the copper brake hose gaskets. Install NEW copper brake hose gaskets to the brake hose-to-caliper bolt and to the brake hose. 7. Install the brake hose and the brake hose-to-brake caliper bolt to the brake caliper. ^ Tighten the bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 8. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 9. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the wheel hub. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 13. Slowly release the brake pedal. 14. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Brake Pad Lining Minimum Thickness .................................................................................................................................................. 2.0 mm (0.080 inch) Brake Pad Lining Thickness - New ........................................................................................................................................................ 9.6 mm (0.380 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Replacement Brake Pads Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder auxiliary reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 7. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 8. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 9. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. 11. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement > Page 5703 Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. 12. Remove the brake pads from the caliper mounting bracket. 13. Remove the brake pad retainers from the caliper bracket. 14. Thoroughly clean the brake pad hardware mating surfaces of the caliper bracket, of any debris and corrosion. 15. Inspect the brake caliper guide pins for freedom of movement, and inspect the condition of the guide pin boots. Move the guide pins inboard and outboard within the bracket bores, without disengaging the slides from the boots, and observe for the following: ^ Restricted caliper guide pin movement ^ Looseness in the brake caliper mounting bracket ^ Seized or binding caliper guide pins ^ Split or torn boots 16. If any of the conditions listed are found, the brake caliper guide pins and/or boots require replacement. Installation Procedure 1. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper, with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against an old inboard brake pad or a wood block installed against the caliper piston. 2. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed completely into the caliper bore. 3. Remove the C-clamp and the old brake pad or wood block from the caliper. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement > Page 5704 4. Apply a very thin coating of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the pad hardware mating surfaces of the caliper bracket only. 5. Install the brake pad retainers to the brake caliper bracket. 6. Important: The wear sensor equipped disc brake pad must be mounted inboard of the rotor with the leading edge of the sensor facing the brake rotor during forward wheel rotation, or at the top of the pad when installed in vehicle position. Install the brake pads to the caliper bracket. 7. Remove the support, and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 8. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement > Page 5705 ^ Tighten the bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 9. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 13. Slowly release the brake pedal. 14. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 15. Fill the master cylinder auxiliary reservoir to the proper level. 16. Burnish the pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement > Page 5706 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Burnishing Pads and Rotors Burnishing Pads and Rotors Caution: Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal injury and vehicle damage. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-05-22-002L Date: 090326 Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-05-22-002L Date: March 26, 2009 Subject: Disc Brake Warranty Service and Procedures Models: 1999-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 1999-2004 Isuzu Light Duty Trucks (Canada Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) 1999-2010 Saturn Vehicles (Canada Only) EXCLUDING 2009-2010 Chevrolet Corvette ZR1 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to inform you that due to improvements in vehicle brake corner and wheel design, assembly plant build processes and dealership required tools like the On-Car Lathe, measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) is no longer a required step when performing base brake service. Due to this change, you are no longer required to enter the LRO measurement on the repair order or in the warranty system failure code section. The bulletin information below and the base brake labor operations have been updated accordingly. Due to this change it is more important than ever to properly maintain your brake lathe (per the Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure in this bulletin). Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-05-22-002K (Section 05 Brakes). For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all GM's Standard Brake Service Procedures and Policy Guidelines for brake rotor and brake pad service and wear. For additional information, the Service Technical College lists a complete index of available Brake courses. This information can be accessed at www.gmtraining.com > resources > training materials > brakes courseware index. In Canada, refer to Service Know How course 55040.00V and Hydraulic Brake Certification program 15003.16H. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM BRAKE SERVICE. The following four (4) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful brake service. 1. Measure and Document Pre-Service Rotor Thickness* (REQUIRED on Repair Order) determine rotor clean-up/refinish/replace 2. Properly clean ALL brake corner mating surfaces - hub, rotor and wheel 3. Properly clean-up/refinish rotor, measure and document post-service rotor thickness (REQUIRED on Repair Order) Important If it is determined the rotor needs to be refinished, verify lathe equipment is properly calibrated. 4. Properly reassemble the brake corner using proper torque tools, torque specification and torque sequence - wheel lug nuts. * The bulletin refers to Minimum Thickness specification as the minimum allowable thickness after refinish. Always refer to SI to verify the spec stamped on the rotor is the minimum thickness spec after refinish and not the discard spec. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5711 Bulletin Format ***REPAIR ORDER REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5712 Important When using any one of the brake labor operations listed in this bulletin (except for H9709 - Brake Burnish), the following two rotor measurements (1. Original Rotor Thickness, 2. Refinished Rotor Thickness are required and MUST be written/documented on the repair order, or for your convenience, complete the form (GM Brake Service Repair Order Documentation for Required Measurements) shown above and attach it to the repair order. If the Warranty Parts Center generates a request, this Documentation/Form must be attached to the repair order that is sent back. Important Documentation of brake lathe maintenance and calibration as recommended by the lathe manufacturer must be available for review upon request. Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Original And Refinished Thickness - REQUIRED When resurfacing a brake rotor or drum, the ORIGINAL thickness (measured thickness before refinish) and REFINISHED thickness (measured thickness after refinish) MUST be written/documented on the repair order hard copy for each rotor serviced. If a rotor replacement is necessary, only the original thickness measurement needs to be recorded. Repair Order Documentation - Explanation of Part Replacement - REQUIRED If replacement of a brake component is necessary, proper documentation on the repair order is required. See the following examples: ^ Brake rotor replacement - Customer comment was brake pulsation. Rotor was refinished on a prior brake service. After rotor measurement, it was determined that refinishing the rotor again would take it under the Minimum Thickness specification. ^ Brake pad replacement - Customer comment was brake squeak noise. On inspection, found pads contaminated by fluid leak at caliper. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5713 TOOL INFORMATION CORRECTION PLATE PART INFORMATION Refer to TSB 01-05-23-001 for the Brake Align(R) application chart. For vehicles repaired under warranty, Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates should be submitted in the Net Amount at cost plus 40%. Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates are available through the following suppliers: - Dealer Equipment and Services - Brake Align(R) LLC (U.S. Dealers Only) * We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items, which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5714 WARRANTY INFORMATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5715 WORKSHEET - BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION Important Brake lathe calibration should be performed and recorded monthly or if you are consistently measuring high LRO after rotor refinishing. Disclaimer GM Brake Service Procedure GM BRAKE SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wheel and caliper. 2. Measure rotor thickness. In order to determine if the rotor can be refinished, do the following steps: Important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5716 If performing routine Brake Service for worn pads only, and the rotors are not damaged and measure within specification - DO NOT REFINISH ROTORS. 1. Remove the rotor(s). 2. Measure the rotor for original thickness using a brake micrometer. Multiple measure points should be taken and the lowest measurement should be recorded. 3. Reference the Minimum Thickness specification stamped on the backside of the rotor or SI for Minimum Thickness specification/other. In most cases, the rotor should be refinished unless the measurement taken makes it obvious that refinishing the rotor would take the measurement under the Minimum Thickness specification (then replacement is necessary). DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. 3. ***Record the lowest ORIGINAL rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy as noted in the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 4. Clean all of the mating surfaces between the hub, the rotor and the wheel using the J 42450A Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit and J 41013 - Whiz Wheel(R). If rotors are not to be refinished - Go To Step 8. Important Cleaning all mating surfaces and making them free of corrosion, burrs and other debris (which includes removal of Hubless rotors) is critical and MUST be performed whether using an On-Car or Bench Lathe Refinish Procedure. 5. Be sure to follow the appropriate refinishing procedure listed below for the type of lathe you are using. Important Only replace the rotors if they do not meet the Minimum Thickness specification. Important DO NOT REFINISH NEW ROTORS. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important Prior to making the cut, install the recommended clip-on style disc silencer supplied with the lathe. Use of this silencer is critical to prevent chatter from occurring during the cut. Bench Type Lathe 1. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. 2. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information, see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure (Bench-Type)" section in this bulletin. 3. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn 4. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 5. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 6. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 7. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Reinstall the rotor(s). Important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5717 When using the On-Car lathe on vehicles equipped with limited slip (or posi-trac) rear system, it is critical that the rear drive shaft is disconnected/disengaged prior to operation of the On-Car lathe. Remember to mark and re-index the drive shaft correctly on re-assembly to prevent creating driveline vibration. Whenever the lathe drive motor is being switched on, the operator MUST keep their body out of the wheel well area until the machine has reached its normal operating RPM. 2. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Important When raising the vehicle on the lift, be sure to have it at a good working height (waist high is average) to accommodate mounting the On-Car lathe. Optimally, the center piston on the lathe trolley will be mid-travel. If the lathe trolley center piston is completely compressed (bottoming out) or inversely fully extended and hanging off the vehicle hub, this could affect the calibration time of the lathe. 3. Select the correct adapter for the vehicle you're working on and mount it to the hub with the vehicle lug nuts. Hand tighten 34-41 Nm (25-30 lb ft) the nuts using equal torque. DO NOT use impact wrenches, excessive torque will damage the adapter. Important Ensure the adapter sits flush on the rotor hat surface. Be sure to remove any rust, rotor retaining clips, etc. that may preclude the adapter from sitting flat on the mounting surface. 4. Connect the lathe to the adapter, turn on the lathe and activate the computer to compensate for run-out in the hub. 5. Once the computer indicates the compensation process was successful, on the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 6. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 7. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 8. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 9. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. 10. Dismount the lathe, but leave the lathe adapter attached to the vehicle. 6. Once the rotor has been properly machined, wash the rotor with soap and water (use a mild dish washing soap) or wipe it clean with GM approved brake cleaner, P/N 88862650 (Canadian P/N 88901247). Important Thoroughly cleaning the rotor will prevent the possible transfer of finite metal dust left as a by-product of machining to the pad material during the seating process, thus reducing the opportunity for squeaks or other noises to occur. 7. ***Record the REFINISHED rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy. Refer to the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 8. Setting up to measure for Lateral Run Out (LRO): Important Measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) (steps 8 - 15) is no longer required however, these steps are being left in the overall procedure as a good check to be performed in the case of a repeat pulsation complaint. If you are not checking for LRO, go to step 16. Bench-Type Lathe 1. Ensure that the mating surfaces of the rotor hat section and the hub mating surface are clean and free of debris. 2. Mount the new, original or refinished rotor onto the vehicle hub. Important Always hold the rotor on the bottom half so any debris that may be dislodged from the vents will fall out instead of falling into the mounting area. Any movement or jarring from the rotor falling over on the studs can release rust from the vents on the rotor. 3. Tilt the top of the rotor in towards the vehicle so you can see the studs and ease the rotor onto the studs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5718 4. Slide the rotor all the way to the hub and hold it in place until you have placed one of the conical washers (with the tapered hole side facing out) and run the first lug nut up tight by hand so the rotor doesn't move when you release it. 5. Place the conical washers on the rest of the studs (with the tapered hole side facing out), start and snug the lug nuts by hand. 6. Using the one half inch drive impact wrench and a torque stick (J 39544) or equivalent, start with the lug nut opposite of the one you first tightened by hand and tighten the lug nuts using a star pattern until they touch the hub but do not completely torque. Then again, starting with the first lug nut you tightened by hand, tighten all the lug nuts in a star pattern to the specific vehicle torque specification. 7. DO NOT reinstall the caliper or the wheel at this time. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Leave the On-Car adapter on the wheel. 2. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Fasten the dial indicator to the steering knuckle so that the indicator needle contacts the rotor outboard friction surface approximately 6.35 mm (0.25 in) from the rotor's outer edge. The stylus should be perpendicular to the friction surface of the rotor. Important Make sure the dial indicator needle tip is screwed tight, a loose tip could cause false readings. 10. Measure for LRO. Follow the procedure below to determine if the LRO is within specification (0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS). 1. Rotate the rotor and locate the point on the rotor where the lowest dial indicator reading is indicated and set the dial indicator to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor from the low point and locate the point with the highest dial indicator reading (rotor "high spot"). Note the amount and mark the location of the "high spot" on the rotor and mark the closest wheel stud relative to this location. If the high point falls between two studs, mark both studs. In instances where the vehicle has "capped lug nuts" you should mark the hub. 11. If the Lateral Run Out (LRO) measurement is 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS, no correction is necessary. Go to Step 15 if this is the first rotor completed. Go to Step 16 if this is the second rotor completed. If the LRO is GREATER than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), go to Step 12. 12. If the LRO measurement is greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), use the following procedure to correct for LRO: Important If the LRO measurement is over 0.279 mm (0.011 in), determine the source or cause of the LRO and correct it (i.e. verify drive axle nut torque specification, refinished rotor is source of LRO due to a lathe qualification issue - see "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure"). Hubless Rotor 1. Remove the rotor and using the Brake Align(R) application chart (found in TSB 01-05-23-001B), choose the correct plate to bring the rotor LRO to 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or less. The plates come in 0.0762 mm (0.003 in), 0.1524 mm (0.006 in) and 0.2286 (0.009 in) compensation. For more information on proper plate selection, see the instruction video/DVD included in the "Brake Align(R)" kit or TSB 01-05-23-001B. 2. Align the V-notch of the selected Brake Align(R) correction plate to the marked wheel stud ("high spot") or between the two points marked (if the "high spot" is between two wheel studs). Important IF Brake Align(R) Correction Plates are not available for the vehicle being serviced, refer to SI Document - Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction for correcting LRO. Important Per Brake Align(R) manufacturer, NEVER attempt to stack two or more Correction Plates together on one hub. NEVER attempt to reuse a previously installed Correction Plate. 3. Reinstall the rotor using the same method and precautions as the first time - found in Step 8. Make sure to index the rotor correctly to the marks made in step 10, otherwise LRO will be comprised. Hubbed / Captured / Trapped Rotor 1. Measure the rotor thickness. 2. Refinish or replace the rotor (see Service Information for further details). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5719 13. Use a Dial Indicator to measure the rotor to verify the LRO is within specification. 14. If using, BENCH LATHE - DO NOT remove conical washers and lug nuts at this time. ON-CAR LATHE - You must remove adapter and install conical washers and lug nuts to retain rotor position. Important For Hubless rotor design, while removing the adapter, you must hold the rotor tight to the hub and install the top conical washer and lug nut first to ensure no debris falls between the surface while removing the adapter. Then, install the remaining conical washers and lug nuts. Otherwise, LRO will be comprised. 15. Perform Steps 1 through 7 on the opposite side of the vehicle (steps 1-12, if performing LRO). 16. Reinstall the rotors on both sides of the vehicle and perform the following steps: 1. Reinstall the calipers and pads. 2. Pump the brakes to pressurize the calipers. 3. Remove the lug nuts/conical washers. 4. Install and properly torque the wheels. Important It is critical to follow the star pattern wheel torque procedure and use the proper tools (torque stick or torque wrench) as referenced in SI. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify the repairs. Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE Calibration of the brake lathe should be performed and recorded monthly or whenever post-service brake rotor LRO measurements are consistently reading above specification. BENCH-TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate a Bench-type brake lathe: 1. After refinishing a rotor, loosen the arbor nut and while holding the inside bell clamp to keep it from rotating, rotate the rotor 180 degrees. 2. Retighten the arbor nut and set the dial indicator on the rotor using the same instructions as checking the run out on the vehicle. 3. Rotate the arbor and read the runout. 4. Divide the reading by two and this will give you the amount of runout the lathe is cutting into the rotor. Important If there is any runout, you will need to machine the inside bell clamp in place on the lathe (this procedure is for a Bench type lathe ONLY, DO NOT machine inside the bell clamp on an On-Car type lathe). Machining the Inside Bell Clamp (Bench Type Lathe Only) Any nicks or burrs on the shoulder of the arbor must be removed. An 80-grit stone can be used to accomplish this. Spray WD-40(R) on the shoulder and with the lathe running, hold the stone flat against the shoulder surface using slight pressure. When the burrs are gone, clean the surface. Burrs must also be removed from the hub of the inside bell clamp. This can be accomplished with the stone and WD-40(R). Keep the stone flat on the hub while removing the burrs. After removing the burrs, clean the hub. Place the bell clamp on the arbor of the lathe and use the small radius adapters first and then spacers to allow you to tighten the arbor nut to secure the bell clamp to the lathe. Position the tool bit in the left hand of the rotor truer so you can machine the face of the bell clamp. Machine the face of the bell clamp taking just enough off of it to cut the full face of the clamp the full 360 degrees. Before you loosen the arbor nut, match mark the hub of the bell clamp to the arbor and line up these marks before machining a rotor. A magic marker can be used to make the match marks. Machine a rotor and recheck the calibration. Repeat this procedure on all Inside Bell Clamps used. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5720 Important If runout is still present, contact the brake lathe supplier. ON-CAR TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate an On-Car brake lathe: 1. Connect the lathe to a vehicle using the appropriate adapter. 2. Attach a vise-grip dial indicator to a fixed point in the wheel well and bring the dial indicator to a flat surface on the cutting head. 3. Turn on the lathe and press the "start" button so the lathe begins to compensate. 4. Once compensation is complete, note the runout as measured by the dial indicator. Measured runout at this point is overstated given that it is outside the rotor diameter. 5. If runout is in excess of 0.1016 mm (0.004 in) (0.050 mm (0.002 in) as measured within the rotor diameter), calibration must be tightened. Follow manufacturer's instructions for tightening the calibration of the lathe. This information is found in the manual supplied with the lathe. Important If the machine is taking a long time to compensate during normal use, prior to checking the lathe calibration, it is recommended that the machine be disconnected from the adapter and the adapter (still connected to the vehicle) is rotated 180 degrees and the machine reattached. This will accomplish two things: - It will re-verify the machine is properly attached to the adapter. - It will change the location of the runout (phase) relative to the machine and thus possibly allow for quick compensation as a result of the position change. The following information has been added as a reference to ensure your Pro-Cut PFM lathe provides a consistent smooth surface finish over long term usage. Cutting Tips / Depth of Cut / Tip Life The cutting tips must be right side up. Reference marks always face up. The cutting tips may not have chips or dings in the surface of the points. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. When cleaning or rotating the cutting bits, make sure that the seat area for the tip on the tool is free and clear of debris. Cutting Head On each brake job, the technician must center the cutting head for that particular vehicle using one of the mounting bolt holes on the slide plate. Once the head is centered, it is vital that the technician use one hand to push the head firmly and squarely back into the dovetail on the slide plate while using the other hand to tighten the Allen-Hex bolt that secures the head. Failure to do this could result in chatter occurring during the cut. Tool Holder Plate (Cutting Head) The tool holder plate is the plate that the cutting arms are attached to. It can bend or break if a technician accidently runs the cutting arms into the hub of the rotor while the rotor is turning. (Cuts of more than 0.508 mm (0.020 in) can also bend this plate). Once bent, the lathe will most likely not cut properly until the tool holder plate is replaced. In order to verify the condition of the tool holder plate on a machine that will not cut right, remove the mounting bolt and remove the cutting head from the slide plate. With the cutting head titled at an angle, lay the long edge of the tool holder plate down on the flat part of the slide plate. If any gap can be seen between the edge and the slide plate, the tool holder plate is bent and the source of vibration. Also check to ensure that the cutting arms are lying flat on the upper side of the tool holder plate. If the mounting arm post is bent, it will show itself by having the back of the cutting arm lifting off the surface of the tool holder. Gib Adjustment / Loose Gib As wear occurs between the slide plate and the box it rides on, you must take up the slack. You do this by way of a moveable wedge, which we call the gib. Your lathe manual details adjustment process, which you should perform when required after monthly checks or whenever surface finish is inconsistent. Brake Pulsation BRAKE PULSATION Brake pulsation is caused by brake rotor thickness variation. Brake rotor thickness variation causes the piston in the brake caliper, when applied, to "pump" in and out of the caliper housing. The "pumping" effect is transmitted hydraulically to the brake pedal. Brake pulsation concerns may result from two basic conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5721 1. Thickness Variation Pulsation is Caused by Lateral Run Out (LRO). LRO on a brake corner assembly is virtually undetectable unless measured (with a dial indicator after the brake service) and will not be detected as brake pulsation during an after brake service test drive. If the brake corner is assembled with excessive LRO (greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), thickness variation will develop on the brake rotor over time and miles. Excessive LRO will cause the brake pads to wear the brake rotors unevenly, which causes rotor thickness variation. Pulsation that is the result of excessive Lateral Run Out usually develops in 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi). The more excessive the LRO, the faster the pulsation will develop. LRO can also be induced when uneven torque is applied to wheel nuts (lug nuts). Improper wheel tightening after tire rotation, spare tire usage, brake inspection, etc. can be the cause of brake pulsation. Again, it usually takes 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) AFTER the service event for the condition to develop. The customer does not usually make the connection between the service event and the awareness of the pulsation. The proper usage of torque wrenches and/or torque sticks (torque limiting sockets) will greatly reduce or eliminate the pulsation conditions after wheel service events. The improper use of impact wrenches on wheel nuts greatly increases the likelihood of pulsation after wheel service. The following are examples of pulsation conditions and reimbursement recommendations: - If the customer noticed the condition between 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) and it gradually got worse, normally the repair would be covered. The customer may tolerate the condition until it becomes very apparent. - If a GM dealer performed a prior brake service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce proper brake lathe maintenance. - If the customer had the brake service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. - If a customer indicated they had wheel service, ask who performed the service. Then; - If a GM dealer performed the service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce the use of torque sticks at the dealer. Two common size torque sticks cover 90% of all GM products. Each technician needs to use torque sticks properly every time the wheel nuts are tightened. - If the customer had the wheel service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. 2. Thickness Variation Pulsation Caused by Brake Rotor Corrosion - Rotor corrosion is another form of thickness variation, which can cause a pulsation concern and can be addressed as follows: - Cosmetic Corrosion: In most instances rotor corrosion is cosmetic and refinishing the rotor is unnecessary. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (Lot Rot / Low Miles - 0-321 km (0-200 mi): At times more extensive corrosion can cause pulsation due to thickness variation. This usually happens when the vehicle is parked for long periods of time in humid type conditions and the braking surface area under the pads corrodes at a different rate compared to the rest of the braking surface area. Cleaning up of braking surfaces (burnishing) can be accomplished by 10 - 15 moderate stops from 56- 64 km/h (35 - 40 mph) with cooling time between stops. If multiple moderate braking stops do not correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (without rotor flaking / higher mileage 3,200-8,000 km (2,000-5,000 mi): In some cases, more extensive corrosion that is not cleaned up by the brake pad over time and miles can cause the same type of pulsation complaint due to thickness variation. In these cases, the rotor surface is usually darker instead of shiny and a brake pad foot print can be seen against the darker surface. This darker surface is usually due to build-up, on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (with rotor flaking / higher mileage - 8,000 + km (5,000 + miles) : At times, more extensive corrosion over time and miles can cause pulsation due to thickness variation (flaking). This flaking is usually a build up, mostly on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. When rotor measurements are taken, the low areas are usually close to the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement and the high areas usually measure more than the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement (depending on mileage and normal wear). To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" described below. Important In some flaking instances, cleaning-up this type of corrosion may require more rotor material to be removed then desired. Customer consideration should be taken in these situations and handled on a case by case basis, depending on the amount/percentage of rotor life remaining and the vehicle's warranty time and miles. Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5722 BRAKE ROTOR CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE Clean-up the rotors on an approved, well-maintained brake lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure" section in this bulletin. 1. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 2. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 3. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 4. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 5. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important In many of these instances, such a minimal amount of material is removed from the rotor that customer satisfaction is not a concern for future brake services. This procedure is intended to "Clean-up" the rotor surface and should be conveyed to the customer as such - not as "cut", "refinish" or "machine", which tends to be terms understood as a substantial reduction of rotor material/life. If the brake lathe equipment being used is not capable of removing minor amounts of material while holding tolerances, further lathe maintenance, repair, updates or equipment replacement may be necessary. Brake Noise BRAKE NOISE Some brake noise is normal and differences in loading, type of driving, or driving style can make a difference in brake wear on the same make and model. Depending on weather conditions, driving patterns and the local environment, brake noise may become more or less apparent. Verify all metal-to-metal contact areas between pads, pad guides, caliper and knuckles are clean and lubricated with a thin layer of high temperature silicone grease. Brake noise is caused by a "slip-stick" vibration of brake components. While intermittent brake noise may be normal, performing 3 to 4 aggressive stops may temporarily reduce or eliminate most brake squeal. If the noise persists and is consistently occurring, a brake dampening compound may be applied to the back of each pad. This allows parts to slide freely and not vibrate when moving relative to each other. Use Silicone Brake Lubricant, ACDelco P/N 88862181 (Canadian P/N 88862496) or equivalent. The following noises are characteristics of all braking systems and are unavoidable. They may not indicate improper operation of the brake system. Squeak/Squeal Noise: - Occurs with front semi-metallic brake pads at medium speeds when light to medium pressure is applied to the brake pedal. - Occasionally a noise may occur on rear brakes during the first few stops or with cold brakes and/or high humidity. Grinding Noise: - Common to rear brakes and some front disc brakes during initial stops after the vehicle has been parked overnight. - Caused by corrosion on the metal surfaces during vehicle non-use. Usually disappears after a few stops. Groan Noise: A groan type noise may be heard when stopping quickly or moving forward slowly from a complete stop. This is normal. On vehicles equipped with ABS, a groan or moan type noise during hard braking applications or loose gravel, wet or icy road conditions is a normal function of the ABS activation. Key Points - Frequently Asked Questions KEY POINTS - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS - Q: How do on-car lathes react to Axle Float? Does the play affect the machining of the rotor, either surface finish or LRO? Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5723 A: Because the Pro-Cut on-car lathe adjusts in a live mode while spinning the hub/rotor, the dynamics of a floating axle are effectively eliminated. Once the lathe is compensated, there is no difference in the cutting/surface finish and LRO are just the same as with a non-floating axle. - Q: Which lathe is essential for performing brake work, the bench or on-car? A: Dealers must have a well maintained bench lathe and well maintained on-car lathe. These lathes need to be calibrated on a monthly basis. BOTH lathes are essential to providing quality brake service. - Q: What is the expected tip life for an on-car lathe? A: The geometry and composition of the Pro-Cut tips are designed for "single pass" cutting. When using the Pro-Cut the cutting depth should be set to take all material needed to get below rust grooves, eliminate all run-out and resurface the entire disc in a single pass. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. No "skim cut" or "finish cut" is needed. Failure to follow this procedure will shorten tip life. The Pro-cut tips will last between 7-12 cuts per corner. With three usable corners, a pair of tips is good for at least 21 cuts. - Q: Why does GM recommend the use of single pass (referred to as "positive rake") bench and on-car brake lathes? A: GM Service and GM Brake Engineering have performed competitive evaluations on a significant number of bench and on-car brake lathes. These tests measured critical performance characteristics such as flatness, surface finish and the ability of the lathe to repeat accuracy over many uses. In each test, single pass lathe designs out performed the competitors. Single pass brake lathes are more productive requiring less time to perform the same procedure. - Q: Is it okay to leave the caliper/pads installed while cutting rotors using an on-car lathe? A: On-car lathes should never be used with the pads and calipers installed on the vehicle. The debris from cutting the rotors can contaminate the brake pads/calipers which can lead to other brake concerns and comebacks. - Q: What information needs to be documented on the Repair Order? A: Any claim that is submitted using the labor operations in this bulletin, must have the Original Rotor Thickness and Refinish Rotor Thickness (if refinished) documented on the repair order. For more information, refer to the "Repair Order Required Documentation" section of this bulletin. All Warranty Repair Orders paid by GM, are subject to review for compliance and may be debited where the repair does not comply with this procedure. Brake Warranty BRAKE WARRANTY Brake Rotors: - Brake rotor warranty is covered under the terms of the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Reference the vehicle's warranty guide for verification. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced during normal/routine pad replacement. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced and is ineffective in correcting brake squeal type noises and/or premature lining wear out. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for cosmetic corrosion. Clean up of braking surfaces can be accomplished by 10-15 moderate stops from 56-64 km/h (35-40 mph) with cooling time between stops. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for rotor discoloration/hard spots. - Rotors should be refinished NOT replaced for Customer Pulsation concerns. This condition is a result of rotor thickness variation, usually caused by LRO (wear induced over time and miles) or corrosion (Lot Rot). - When rotor refinishing, only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. - Rotors should be refinished for severe scoring - depth in excess of 1.5 mm (0.060 in). Important If the scoring depth is more than 1.5 mm (0.060 in) after the rotor is refinished, it should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5724 - It is not necessary to replace rotors in pairs. Rotors may be replaced individually. However, caution should be exercised, as a variance in surface finish may cause a brake pull condition. - New rotors should not be refinished before installation. Original equipment rotor surfaces are ground to ensure smooth finish and parallelism between mounting and friction surfaces. If a new rotor has more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in) Lateral Run Out (LRO) when properly mounted on the hub, correct it using one of the following methods: 1. For hubless rotor designs, use the correction plate procedure found in the "GM Brake Service Procedure for Hubless Rotors" outlined in this bulletin. 2. For hubbed/trapped/captured rotor designs, refinish the rotor using an On-Car lathe and the procedure outlined in this bulletin. - Never reuse rotors that measure under the Minimum Thickness specification. In this instance, the rotor should be replaced. Important If the Minimum Thickness specification is not visible on the rotor, reference Service Information (SI) for the specific vehicle application. DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. Brake Pads: Important When determining the warranty coverage (as an example) - if all four front or four rear brake pads are excessively worn evenly, that would NOT be covered under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to driving habits or trailering. However, if the brake pads are excessively worn un-evenly, side-to-side or same side/inner-to-outer pads, then consideration should be given to cover this under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to poor operation of other braking components. - Consideration should be given for covering brake pads up to 39,000 km (24,000 mi) (excluding owner abuse, excessive trailering, or the situations that would not be considered normal use). - Installation of new rotors does not require pad replacement. Do not replace pads unless their condition requires it - excessively worn, damage or contaminated. Brake Wear: Several factors impact brake lining wear and should be taken into account when reviewing related issues: - heavy loads / high temperatures / towing / mountainous driving / city driving / aggressive driving / driver braking characteristics (left foot or two feet) The following are conditions that may extend brake lining wear: - light loads / highway driving / conservative driving / level terrain Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5725 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Bulletin No.: 06-05-22-007 Date: November 30, 2006 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Subject: Brake Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) The purpose of this bulletin is to advise dealership personnel of labor operation changes relating to brake repairs. Existing brake rotor and drum labor operations have been revised to remove the refinishing times and new labor operations have been established for refinishing brake rotors or drums. The changes will become effective with the release of the December 2006 Labor Time Guide. The following changes: Applies to all 2005-2007 vehicles, unless 2005 was the last year of production for that particular model. May apply to 2004 and prior models years if the vehicle was produced after 2005 - e.g. TrailBlazer, Envoy, etc. Where the new labor operations for refinishing rotors or drums do not apply, the existing labor operations will still contain time for refinishing. Always refer to the Labor Time Guide for the appropriate labor operations and time for the vehicle being repaired. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 5726 The list shown is of labor operations for brake service. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5727 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Rotor Diameter .......................................................................................................................... ........................................... 296.00 mm (11.654 inch) Brake Rotor Discard Thickness....................... ...................................................................................................................................... 24.5 mm (0.960 inch) Brake Rotor Maximum Allowable Assembled Lateral Runout ............................................................................................................. 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) Brake Rotor Maximum Allowable Scoring .......................................................................................................................................... 1.50 mm (0.059 inch) Brake Rotor Maximum Allowable Thickness Variation ..................................................................................................................... 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) Brake Rotor Minimum Allowable Thickness After Refinish ................................................................................................................ 24.5 mm (0.960 inch) Brake Rotor Thickness - New ........................................................................................................................ ....................................... 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Rotor Replacement Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Rotor Replacement Brake Rotor Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install a C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper, with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and the outboard disc brake pad. 4. Tighten the C-clamp until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 5. Remove the C-clamp. 6. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Important: Do NOT disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. Remove the brake caliper and the caliper mounting bracket as an assembly from the steering knuckle and support the assembly with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. Ensure that there is no tension on the hydraulic brake flexible hose. 7. Matchmark the position of the brake rotor to the wheel studs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Rotor Replacement > Page 5730 8. Remove the brake rotor. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, any rust or contaminants should be cleaned from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in excessive assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. Using the J 42450-A , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J 41013 , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface and mounting surface of the brake rotor. 3. Inspect the mating surfaces of the hub/axle flange and the rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for proper orientation to the flange. 5. If the brake rotor was removed and installed as part of a brake system repair, measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes. 6. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. 7. Remove the support, and install the brake caliper and the brake caliper bracket as an assembly to the steering knuckle. 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. If the brake rotor was refinished or replaced, or if new brake pads were installed, burnish the pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Rotor Replacement > Page 5731 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Burnishing Pads and Rotors Burnishing Pads and Rotors Caution: Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal injury and vehicle damage. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Rotor Replacement > Page 5732 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Rotor Refinishing Brake Rotor Refinishing ^ Tools Required J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ The disc brake rotors do not require refinishing as part of routine brake system service. New disc brake rotors do not require refinishing.Do not refinish disc brake rotors in an attempt to correct the following conditions: ^ Brake system noise - squeal, growl, groan ^ Uneven and/or premature disc brake pad wear ^ Superficial or cosmetic corrosion/rust of the disc brake rotor friction surface ^ Scoring of the disc brake rotor friction surface less than the maximum allowable specification ^ Before refinishing a brake rotor, the rotor MUST first be checked for adequate thickness to allow the rotor to be refinished and remain above the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification. Disc brake rotors should only be refinished if they have adequate thickness to be refinished and if one or more of the following conditions exist: ^ Thickness variation in excess of the maximum allowable specification ^ Excessive corrosion/rust and/or pitting ^ Cracks and/or heat spots ^ Excessive blueing discoloration ^ Scoring of the disc brake rotor surface in excess of the maximum allowable specification ^ Disc brake rotors may need to be refinished as part of the process for correcting brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) that exceeds the maximum allowable specification. 1. Important: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, clean any rust or contaminants from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in increased assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. Using the J 42450-A , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J 41013 , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface and mounting surface of the brake rotor. 3. Inspect the mating surfaces of the hub/axle flange and the rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Mount the brake rotor to the brake lathe according to the lathe manufacturer's instructions, ensuring that all mounting attachments and adapters are clean and free of debris. 5. Ensure that any vibration dampening attachments are securely in place. 6. With the brake lathe running, slowly bring in the cutting tools until they just contact the brake rotor friction surfaces. 7. Observe the witness mark on the brake rotor. If the witness mark extends approximately three-quarters or more of the way around the brake rotor friction surface on each side, the brake rotor is properly mounted to the lathe. 8. If the witness mark does not extend three-quarters or more of the way around the brake rotor, re-mount the rotor to the lathe. 9. Following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions, refinish the brake rotor. 10. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. 11. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. 12. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: ^ If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper ^ If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner 13. Remove the brake rotor from the brake lathe. 14. Measure the assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes. 15. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Backing Plate: Service and Repair Drum Brake Backing Plate Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Do not pry against the splash shield or backing plate in attempt to free the drum. This will bend the splash shield or backing plate. A bent backing plate may cause brake chatter and/or pulsation. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the brake drum. 4. Remove the brake shoes. 5. Remove the park brake cable from the park brake actuator lever. 6. Depress the retaining fingers on the park brake cable (1) and remove the park brake cable from the backing plate. 7. Remove the wheel cylinder. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5737 8. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 9. Remove the backing plate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the backing plate. 2. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 3. Install the wheel cylinder. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5738 4. Install the park brake cable (1) to the backing plate. 5. Install the park brake cable to the park brake actuator (5). 6. Install the brake shoes. 7. Adjust the brake shoes. 8. Adjust the park brake cable. 9. Install the brake drum. 10. Install the tire and wheel. 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Bulletin No.: 06-05-22-007 Date: November 30, 2006 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Subject: Brake Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) The purpose of this bulletin is to advise dealership personnel of labor operation changes relating to brake repairs. Existing brake rotor and drum labor operations have been revised to remove the refinishing times and new labor operations have been established for refinishing brake rotors or drums. The changes will become effective with the release of the December 2006 Labor Time Guide. The following changes: Applies to all 2005-2007 vehicles, unless 2005 was the last year of production for that particular model. May apply to 2004 and prior models years if the vehicle was produced after 2005 - e.g. TrailBlazer, Envoy, etc. Where the new labor operations for refinishing rotors or drums do not apply, the existing labor operations will still contain time for refinishing. Always refer to the Labor Time Guide for the appropriate labor operations and time for the vehicle being repaired. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations > Page 5743 The list shown is of labor operations for brake service. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5744 Brake Drum: Specifications Brake Drum Diameter - New ............................................................................................................... ................................................. 250.0 mm (9.84 inch) Brake Drum Discard Diameter ............................................................................................................................................................. 251.5 mm (9.90 inch) Brake Drum Maximum Allowable Radial Runout ................................................................................................................................ 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) Brake Drum Maximum Allowable Scoring .............................................................................................................................................. 1.5 mm (0.059 inch Brake Drum Maximum Diameter After Refinish .................................................................................................................................. 251.5 mm (9.90 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Drum Replacement Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Replacement Brake Drum Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Check to ensure that the park brake is fully released. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. If the brake drum is to be reinstalled to the vehicle, use the J 41013 to clean any rust or corrosion from the hub/flange mating surface of the brake drum. If necessary, carefully remove any corrosion from the edge of the drum braking surface in order to ease installation. 6. Use the J 42450-A to clean the wheel hub flange. Installation Procedure 1. Adjust the drum brakes. 2. Install the brake drum. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Apply the brakes approximately three times in order to seat and center the brake shoes within the drum. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Drum Replacement > Page 5747 Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Refinishing Brake Drum Refinishing ^ Tools Required J 41013 Rotor/Drum Flange Resurfacing Kit - J 42450-A Hub Cleaning Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. 1. The brake drums do not require refinishing as part of routine brake system service. Do not refinish brake drums in an attempt to correct the following conditions: ^ Brake system noise (squeal, growl, groan) ^ Uneven and/or premature brake lining wear ^ Superficial or cosmetic corrosion/rust of the brake drum surface ^ Scoring of the brake drum surface (less than the maximum allowable specification) 2. Brake drums should only be refinished if the following conditions exist: ^ Excessive corrosion/rust and/or pitting ^ Cracks and/or heat spots ^ Excessive blueing discoloration ^ Scoring of the brake drum surface (in excess of the maximum allowable specification) ^ Radial runout in excess of the maximum allowable specification 3. Inspect each of the brake drums and determine if the brake drums can be refinished and remain within the maximum allowable diameter after refinish specification: 1. With the tire and wheel assemblies removed, measure the diameter of each of the brake drums. 2. Inspect each of the brake drums for excessive surface wear and/or radial runout. 4. If the brake drums can be refinished, proceed with the rotor refinishing procedure. 5. If necessary, use the J 41013 in order to thoroughly clean any corrosion/rust from the brake drum flange. 6. Mount the brake drum to the brake lathe according to the lathe manufacturer's instructions. 7. Ensure that any vibration dampening attachments are securely in place. 8. With the brake lathe running, slowly bring in the cutting tool until it just contacts the brake drum friction surface. 9. Observe the witness mark on the brake drum. If the witness mark extends approximately three-quarters or more of the way around the brake drum surface, the brake drum is properly mounted to the lathe. 10. If the witness mark does not extend three-quarters or more of the way around the brake drum, re-mount the brake drum to the lathe. 11. Following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions, refinish the brake drum. 12. After each successive cut, inspect the brake drum diameter. 13. If at any time the brake drum exceeds the maximum allowable diameter after refinish specification, the brake drum must be replaced. 14. After refinishing the brake drum, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 0. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish 1. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: ^ If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. ^ If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. 2. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake drum with denatured alcohol or an equivalent brake cleaner 15. Remove the brake drum from the brake lathe. Important: Failure to clean the corrosion from the wheel bearing flange may result in increased lateral runout of the brake drum and brake system pulsation. 16. If necessary, use the J 42450-A in order to thoroughly clean any corrosion from the wheel bearing flange. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications Brake Shoe: Specifications Brake Shoe Lining Minimum Thickness ................................................................................................................................................... 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) Brake Shoe Lining Thickness - New ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) Brake Shoe Lining-to-Drum Clearance ................................................................................................................................................. 0.50 mm (0.020 inch) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5751 Brake Shoe: Adjustments Drum Brake Adjustment ^ Tools Required J 21177-A Drum-to-Brake Shoe Clearance Gage Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the rear wheels and tires. 3. Relieve cable tension from the park brake system at the equalizer. There should be no tension on the park brake cables, so that the brake shoes are positioned only by the adjuster strut. 4. Remove the rear drums. 5. Set the J 21177-A so that the J 21177-A contacts the inside diameter of the drum at the widest point. 6. Position the J 21177-A over the shoes at the widest point. 7. Turn the adjuster nut until the shoes just contact the J 21177-A. 8. Repeat steps 2-7 for the other rear brake assembly. 9. Install the rear drums. 10. Install the rear wheels and tires. 11. Adjust the park brake cable system. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5752 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoe Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Keep fingers away from rear brake shoe springs to prevent fingers from being pinched between spring and shoe web or spring and backing plate. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the brake drum. 3. Notice: Do not over stretch the adjuster spring. Damage can occur if the spring is over stretched. Disengage the adjuster spring hook end from the tab on the adjuster actuator (1). 4. Remove the straight end of the adjuster spring from the brake shoe. 5. Remove the adjuster actuator from the brake shoe. 6. Remove the return spring (7) from the brake shoes. 7. Remove the park brake cable (6) from the park brake actuator lever (5). 8. Remove the brake shoe hold-down springs and retainers (4) from the brake shoes. 9. Remove the adjuster from the brake shoes and the park brake actuator lever (2). 10. Remove the horseshoe clip retaining the park brake actuator lever to the brake shoe. 11. Remove the park brake actuator lever and wave washer from the brake shoe. 12. Clean all of the drum brake system components with denatured alcohol. 13. Inspect all of the drum brake system components. 14. Replace drum brake system components as necessary. 15. Inspect the wheel cylinder for the following conditions: ^ Brake fluid leakage ^ Worn or damaged dust boots 16. Replace damaged or leaking wheel cylinders as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply a thin, light coat of high temperature, silicone brake lubricant to the following areas: ^ The brake shoe contact points on the backing plate ^ The adjuster screw threads ^ The inside diameter of the adjuster socket Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5753 2. Install the park brake actuator lever (5) to the lever pivot pin. 3. Install the horseshoe clip to the park brake actuator lever pivot pin. 4. Install the brake shoes to the brake backing plate. 5. Install the brake shoe hold-down pins, springs and retainers (4) to the brake shoes. 6. Install the park brake cable (6) to the park brake actuator lever. 7. Important: Ensure that the adjuster (2) engages the brake shoe (4) and the park brake actuator (3) properly. Install the adjuster screw to the brake shoe and the park brake actuator. 8. Apply a thin, light coat of high temperature, silicone brake lubricant to the adjuster actuator/brake shoe interface. 9. Install the adjuster actuator (1) to the brake shoe. 10. Notice: Do not over stretch the adjuster spring. Damage can occur if the spring is over stretched. Install the straight end of the adjuster spring (3) to the brake shoe. 11. Install the adjuster spring hook end to the tab on the adjuster actuator (1). 12. Install the return spring (7) to the brake shoes. 13. Important: Ensure that the adjuster operates properly. Move the park brake actuator lever (5) in order to spread the brake shoes apart. The adjuster actuator lever should move downward, then upward as the park brake actuator lever is released, forcing the adjuster wheel to rotate. If the adjuster does not operate properly, remove then reinstall the adjuster. 14. Adjust the brake shoes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5754 15. Adjust the park brake cable. 16. Install the brake drum. 17. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Wheel Cylinder Inspection Guidelines Wheel Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Wheel Cylinder Inspection Guidelines Bulletin No.: 03-05-24-001A Date: March 21, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Service Information Regarding Rear Brake Drum Wheel Cylinder Inspections Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2005 and Prior Saturn Vehicles with Rear Drum Brakes Supercede: This bulletin is being revised add model years and include all GM vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-05-24-001 (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information on proper inspection of rear drum brake wheel cylinders. Important: It is not recommended that dust boots be removed during inspection processes as dirt and debris could contaminate the wheel cylinder bore causing premature wear of the wheel cylinder. In addition, most bores should look damp and some lubricant may drip out from under the boot as a result of lubricant being present. All rear drum brake wheel cylinders are assembled with a lubricant to aid in assembly, provide an anti-corrosion coating to the cylinder bore, and lubricate internal rubber components. As a result of this lubrication process, it is not uncommon for some amount of lubricant to accumulate at the ends of the cylinder under the dust boot. Over time, the lubricant may work its way to the outside of the boot and cause an area of the boot to look damp. Evidence of a damp area on the boot does not indicate a leak in the cylinder. However, if there is excessive wetness (i.e. drips) coming from the boot area of the wheel cylinder, it could indicate a brake hydraulic fluid leak requiring wheel cylinder replacement. (Refer to the Wheel Cylinder Replacement procedures in the appropriate Service Manual.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5759 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder Replacement ^ Tools Required J 38400 Brake Shoe Spanner and Spring Remover Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the wheel cylinder brake pipe fitting and the bleeder valve. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Remove the brake pipe nut. 6. Install a cap over the end of the brake pipe in order to prevent brake fluid loss and/or brake fluid contamination. 7. Remove the wheel cylinder bolts (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5760 8. Use the J 38400 in order to spread the brake shoes apart (1). 9. Remove the wheel cylinder. 10. Clean the old sealant from the backing plate where the wheel cylinder was installed. Clean the sealant from the wheel cylinder if you are reusing the wheel cylinder. Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 38400 in order to spread the brake shoes apart (1). 2. Install the wheel cylinder. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel cylinder bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the cap from the brake pipe and install the brake pipe to the wheel cylinder. ^ Tighten the nut to 19 Nm (14 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the brake drum. . 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system at the wheel cylinder. 7. Install the tire and wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5761 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: ^ Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel ^ Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred ^ Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure 1. Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: ^ If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle, and diagnose the appropriate DTC. ^ If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 5767 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Ensure the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level.Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 19. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 20. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 21. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 5768 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) ^ Tools Required J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent - J 44894-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to catch brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal becomes firm, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, or if you have disconnected the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, you must perform the following steps to bleed air at the ports of the hydraulic component: 1. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the brake pipes installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly, loosen and separate one of the brake pipes from the port of the component. For the proportioning valve assembly or the brake modulator assembly, perform these steps in the sequence of system flow; begin with the fluid feed pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the component. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the component and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the component. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the component. 9. With the brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, proportioning valve assembly, or brake modulator assembly - after all air has been purged from the first port of the component that was bled - loosen and separate the next brake pipe from the component, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8, until each of the ports on the component has been bled. 10. After completing the final component port bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the brake pipe-to-component fittings are properly tightened. 4. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 44894-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 44894-A. 7. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 8. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 9. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 10. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 11. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 12. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 13. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 15. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 20. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 44894-A. 21. Remove the J 44894-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 22. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 23. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 5769 may have been trapped in the BPMV. 24. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. 25. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 5770 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the cap from the hose nipple on the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 6. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 inch), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 7. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 8. Remove the transparent hoses from the reservoir. 9. Install the cap to the hose nipple on the reservoir, to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 10. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 11. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: Customer Interest Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5779 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5780 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5781 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Brake Caliper: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 05-05-23-005A Date: January 23, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle at Slow Speeds on Rough Surfaces When Brake Pedal Is Not Applied (Install New Caliper Pin Bushing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2006 Saturn VUE Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-05-23-005 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds over rough road surfaces when the brake pedal is not applied. Cause This condition may be caused by the interface of the front brake caliper guide pins and the front brake caliper bracket. Correction Verify the customer concern. To isolate the brake caliper guide pins as a potential source of the noise, apply the brakes when the noise is apparent. If the noise stops when the brakes are applied and comes back when the brakes are released, then the brake caliper guide pin bushings are the most likely source of the concern. If the brake caliper guide pin bushings have been identified as the source of the noise, then replace the front brake caliper guide pin bushings on the lower pin on the brakes on both sides of the vehicle. Refer to the service procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure Caution: Avoid taking the following actions when you service wheel brake parts: ^ Do not grind brake linings. ^ Do not sand brake linings. ^ Do not clean wheel brake parts with a dry brush or with compressed air. Some models or aftermarket brake parts may contain asbestos fibers which can become airborne in dust. Breathing dust with asbestos fibers may cause serious bodily harm. Use a water-dampened cloth in order to remove any dust on brake parts. Equipment is available commercially in order to perform this washing function. These wet methods prevent fibers from becoming airborne. Caution: Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions: ^ Eye contact--rinse thoroughly with water. ^ Skin contact--wash with soap and water. ^ If ingested--consult a physician immediately. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5787 Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 4. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outboard brake pad. 5. Tighten the C-clamp evenly until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 6. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper lower guide pin bolt. Note: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 8. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake flexible hose, pivot the caliper upward and secure the caliper with heavy mechanics wire, or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5788 9. Remove the lower caliper pin taking care not to damage the pin boot. 10. Remove the rubber bushing from the caliper pin. 11. Clean the pin and install a new bushing. 12. Lubricate the caliper pin and bushing assembly with a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant and install in the caliper bracket. 13. Remove the support and rotate the brake caliper into position over the disc brake pads and to the caliper mounting bracket. 14. Repeat Steps 1-13 on opposite side brake assembly. Installation Procedure Note: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 1. Install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-05-23-005A > Jan > 06 > Brakes - Front End Rattles on Bumps/Rough Roads > Page 5789 2. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the hub. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Repeat Steps 1-3 on opposite side brake assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 5795 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 5800 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 5806 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Caliper: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 5811 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure Caution: Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Failure to obtain a firm pedal before moving vehicle may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the brake caliper from the brake caliper bracket. 2. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Support the brake caliper (1) with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent; do NOT disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. 3. Remove the brake pads (2) from the brake caliper bracket (3). 4. Remove the brake pad retainers (1) from the brake caliper bracket (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 5814 5. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (2). 6. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1) from the knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1) to the knuckle. 2. Important: If reusing the caliper bracket bolts, the threads of the caliper bracket bolts and the threads of the knuckle mounting holes must be thoroughly cleaned and free of debris prior to the application of threadlocker. Prepare the bolts and the threaded holes for assembly: 1. Thoroughly clean the residue from the bolt threads by using denatured alcohol or equivalent and allow to dry. 2. Thoroughly clean the residue from the threaded holes by using denatured alcohol or equivalent and allow to dry. 3. Apply threadlocker Saturn P/N 21005994, or equivalent to two-thirds of the threaded length of the lower caliper bracket bolts. 4. Allow the threadlocker to cure approximately 10 minutes before installation. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the 2 brake caliper bracket bolts (2). ^ Tighten the front brake caliper bracket bolts to 185 Nm (136 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the brake pad retainers (1) to the brake caliper bracket (3). 5. Install the brake pads (2) to the brake caliper bracket (3). 6. Install the brake caliper (1) to the front brake caliper bracket (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 5815 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement Brake Caliper Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Install and firmly hand tighten 2 wheel nuts to opposite wheel studs in order to retain the rotor to the hub. 7. Install a large C-clamp over the body of the brake caliper with the C-clamp ends against the rear of the caliper body and against the outer brake pad. 8. Tighten the C-clamp until the caliper piston is compressed into the caliper bore enough to allow the caliper to slide past the brake rotor. 9. Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 10. Remove the brake hose-to-caliper bolt from the brake caliper. 11. Remove the brake hose from the brake caliper. 12. Remove and discard the 2 copper brake hose gaskets. These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 13. Cap or plug the opening in the brake caliper and the brake hose to prevent fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 5816 14. Remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts. 15. Remove the brake caliper from the caliper bracket. 16. Inspect the brake caliper guide pins for freedom of movement, and inspect the condition of the guide pin boots. Move the guide pins inboard and outboard within the bracket bores, without disengaging the slides from the boots, and observe for the following: ^ Restricted caliper guide pin movement ^ Looseness in the brake caliper mounting bracket ^ Seized or binding caliper guide pins ^ Split or torn boots 17. If any of the conditions listed are found, the brake caliper guide pins and/or boots require replacement. Installation Procedure 1. Apply a light, thin coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the caliper guide pins. 2. Install the guide pins to the brake caliper bracket. 3. Install the brake caliper to the brake caliper bracket. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement > Page 5817 5. Remove the caps or plugs from the brake caliper opening and the brake hose. 6. Important: Do not reuse the copper brake hose gaskets. Install NEW copper brake hose gaskets to the brake hose-to-caliper bolt and to the brake hose. 7. Install the brake hose and the brake hose-to-brake caliper bolt to the brake caliper. ^ Tighten the bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 8. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 9. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake rotor to the wheel hub. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 13. Slowly release the brake pedal. 14. Wait 15 seconds, then gradually apply the brake pedal approximately 2/3 of its travel distance again until a firm brake pedal apply is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the vehicle manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5822 Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Component Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5827 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5828 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Pipe Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45405 Brake Pipe Flaring Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Always use double walled steel brake pipe when replacing brake pipes. The use of any other pipe is not recommended and may cause brake system failure. Carefully route and retain replacement brake pipes. Always use the correct fasteners and the original location for replacement brake pipes. Failure to properly route and retain brake pipes may cause damage to the brake pipes and cause brake system failure. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When servicing the brake pipes, note the following: ^ If sectioning the brake pipe, use replacement pipe of the same type and outside diameter. ^ Use fittings of the appropriate size and type. ^ Only create flares of the same type or design as originally equipped on the vehicle. 1. Inspect the area of brake pipe to be repaired or replaced. 2. Release the brake pipe to be replaced from the retainers, as required. 3. Select an appropriate location to section the brake pipe, if necessary. ^ Allow adequate clearance in order to maneuver the J 45405. ^ Avoid sectioning the brake pipe at bends or mounting points. 4. Using a string or wire, measure the length of the pipe to be replaced including all pipe bends. 5. Add to the measurement taken the appropriate additional length required for each flare to be created. ^ 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) for 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) diameter pipe ^ 9.50 mm (0.374 inch) for 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter pipe Important: Ensure that the brake pipe end to be flared is cut at a square, 90 degree angle to the pipe length. 6. Using the pipe cutter included in the J 45405 , carefully cut the brake pipe squarely to the measured length. 7. Remove the sectioned brake pipe from the vehicle. 8. Select the appropriate size of brake pipe and tube nuts, as necessary. The brake pipe outside diameter determines brake pipe size. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5833 9. Strip the nylon coating from the brake pipe end to be flared, if necessary. ^ Select the appropriate blade on the coating stripping tool included in the J 45405 , by unthreading the blade block from the stripping tool and installing the block with the desired blade facing the tool rollers. ^ 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) blade for 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) diameter pipe ^ 9.50 mm (0.374 inch) blade for 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter pipe ^ Insert the brake pipe end to be flared into the stripping tool to the depth of the ledge on the tool rollers. ^ While holding the brake pipe firmly against the stripping tool roller ledges, rotate the thumbwheel of the tool until the blade contacts the brake pipe coated surface. Important: Do not gouge the metal surface of the brake pipe. ^ Rotate the stripping tool in a clockwise direction, ensuring that the brake pipe end remains against the tool roller ledges. ^ After each successive revolution of the stripping tool, carefully rotate the thumbwheel of the tool clockwise, in order to continue stripping the coating from the brake pipe until the metal pipe surface is exposed. ^ Loosen the thumbwheel of the tool and remove the brake pipe. Important: Ensure that all loose remnants of the nylon coating have been removed from the brake pipe. ^ Inspect the stripped end of the brake pipe to ensure that the proper amount of coating has been removed. ^ 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) for 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) diameter pipe ^ 9.50 mm (0.374 inch) for 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter pipe 10. Chamfer the inside and outside diameter of the pipe with the de-burring tool included in the J 45405. 11. Install the tube nuts on the brake pipe, noting their orientation. 12. Clean the brake pipe and the J 45405 of lubricant, contaminants, and debris. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5834 13. Loosen the die clamping screw of the J 45405. 14. Select the corresponding die set and install the die halves into the die cage with the full, flat face of one die facing the clamping screw, and the counterbores of both dies facing the forming ram. 15. Place the flat face of an unused die (1) against the die halves in the clamping cage and hold firmly against the counterbored face of the dies. 16. Insert the prepared end of the pipe to be flared through the back of the dies until the pipe is seated against the flat surface of the unused die (1). 17. Remove the unused die (1). 18. Ensure that the rear of both dies are seated firmly against the enclosed end of the die cage. 19. Firmly hand tighten the clamping screw (2) against the dies. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5835 20. Select the appropriate forming mandrel and place into the forming ram. 21. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve clockwise to the closed position. 22. Rotate the body of the J 45405 until it bottoms against the die cage. 23. While guiding the forming mandrel into the exposed end of pipe to be flared, operate the lever of the J 45405 until the forming mandrel bottoms against the clamping dies. 24. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the hydraulic forming ram to retract. 25. Insert the finishing cone into the forming ram. 26. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve clockwise to the closed position. 27. Rotate the body of the J 45405 until it bottoms against the die cage. 28. While guiding the finishing cone into the exposed end of pipe to be flared, operate the lever of the J 45405 until the finishing cone bottoms against the dies. 29. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the hydraulic forming ram to retract. 30. Loosen the die clamping screw and remove the dies and pipe. 31. If necessary, lightly tap the dies until the die halves separate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5836 32. Inspect the brake pipe flare for correct shape and diameter (a). ^ 6.92 mm (0.272 inch) 0.18 mm (0.007 inch) flare diameter for 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) diameter pipe ^ 8.92 mm (0.351 inch) 0.18 mm (0.007 inch) flare diameter for 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter pipe 33. If necessary, using the removed section of brake pipe as a template, shape the new pipe with a suitable brake pipe bending tool. Important: When installing the pipe, maintain a clearance of 19 mm (3/4 inch) from all moving or vibrating components. 34. Install the pipe to the vehicle with the appropriate brake pipe unions, as required. 35. If previously released, secure the brake pipe to the retainers. 36. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 37. With the aid of an assistant, inspect the brake pipe flares for leaks by starting the engine and applying the brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5837 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement - Front Brake Hose Replacement - Front Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Release the wheel speed sensor wire harness retainers and harness from the front brake hose. 4. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the brake hose ends and the brake pipe fitting. 5. Using a backup wrench on the hose fitting, disconnect the brake pipe fitting from the brake hose. Cap or plug the brake pipe fitting end and the brake hose end to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 6. Release the retaining clip from the brake hose mounting bracket and the brake hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5838 7. Remove the brake hose-to-caliper bolt from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the brake hose bracket retaining bolt. 9. Remove the brake hose from the brake caliper. 10. Remove and discard the copper brake hose gaskets. These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 11. Cap or plug the opening in the brake caliper and the brake hose to prevent fluid loss and contamination. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the caps or plugs from the opening in the brake caliper and the brake hose. 2. Important: Install NEW copper brake hose gaskets. Assemble the NEW copper brake hose gaskets, and the brake hose bolt, to the brake hose. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the brake hose-to-brake caliper bolt to the brake caliper. ^ Tighten the bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the front brake hose bracket retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5839 5. Remove the caps or plugs from the brake pipe fitting end and the brake hose end. 6. Using a backup wrench on the hose fitting, connect the brake pipe fitting at the front brake hose. ^ Tighten the fitting to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the brake hose retaining clip to the brake hose and the brake hose mounting bracket. 8. Connect the wheel speed sensor wire harness and harness retainers to the front brake hose. 9. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 10. Ensure that the hose does not make contact with any part of the suspension. Check the hose in extreme right and extreme left turn conditions. If the hose makes contact, remove the hose and correct the condition. 11. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5840 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement - Rear Brake Hose Replacement - Rear Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the brake hose ends and brake pipe fittings. 4. Using a backup wrench on the hose fitting, disconnect the brake pipe fittings from the brake hose. Cap or plug the brake pipe fitting ends and the brake hose ends to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 5. Remove the brake hose retaining clips from the hose mounting brackets. 6. Remove the hose from the mounting brackets. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake hose to the brake hose mounting brackets. Align the hose fittings with the notch in the brackets. 2. Install the hose retaining clips onto the hose fittings at the hose brackets. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Using a backup wrench on the hose fitting, connect the brake pipe fittings at the rear brake hose. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 5841 5. Ensure that the hose does not make contact with any part of the suspension. If the hose makes contact, remove the hose and correct the condition. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Service and Repair Proportioning Valve Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Without disconnecting the electrical connectors, remove the transmission control module (TCM) with the bracket from the bracket on the strut tower and position aside on top of the engine. 2. Place a shop towel under the proportioning valve assembly to catch any brake fluid loss. 3. Important: Prior to disconnecting the brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly, note the locations of the brake pipes to the valve assembly, to aid during installation. Disconnect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly. 4. Cap or plug the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 5. Disconnect the master cylinder brake pipes from the proportioning valve assembly. 6. Cap or plug the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 7. If the proportioning valve is to be reused, plug the ports to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5845 8. Remove the proportioning valve mounting bolts. 9. Important: Do not exert excessive force on the brake pipes. Remove the proportioning valve from the vehicle while carefully repositioning the brake pipes. Installation Procedure 1. Install the proportioning valve assembly to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the proportioning valve assembly bracket mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5846 3. Remove the plugs from the proportioning valve assembly ports. 4. Remove the caps or plugs from the master cylinder brake pipe ends. 5. Connect the master cylinder brake pipes to the proportioning valve assembly. 6. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the proportioning valve assembly. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the caps or plugs from the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipe ends. 8. Connect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes to the proportioning valve assembly. 9. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the proportioning valve assembly. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 10. Remove the shop towel and discard into an approved container. 11. Reposition the TCM with bracket to the bracket on the strut tower. 12. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 3. Clean the brake modulator assembly pipe fitting areas of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the electronic brake control module (EBCM). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5851 5. Place a shop towel under the brake modulator assembly to catch any brake fluid loss. 6. Important: Prior to disconnecting the brake pipes from the antilock brake system (ABS) modulator assembly, note the locations of the brake pipes to the valve assembly, to aid during installation. Disconnect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes from the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). 7. Cap the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 8. Disconnect the master cylinder brake pipes from the BPMV. 9. Cap the brake pipe ends to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 10. Plug the modulator brake pipe openings to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 11. Loosen the 2 insulator nuts on the brake pressure modulator valve assembly. 12. Remove the brake modulator assembly from modulator bracket by pulling straight up. Installation Procedure Important: When installing a new brake modulator assembly, do NOT remove the shipping plugs from the pipe ports until after installation into the vehicle. 1. Install the brake modulator assembly to the modulator bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5852 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the 2 brake pressure modulator assembly insulator nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the caps from the master cylinder brake pipe ends. 4. Remove the plugs from the master cylinder ports on the modulator assembly. 5. Connect the master cylinder brake pipes to the modulator assembly, in the same location as removed. 6. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the caps from the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipe ends. 8. Remove the plugs from the caliper and wheel cylinder ports on the modulator assembly. 9. Connect the caliper and wheel cylinder brake pipes to the modulator assembly, in the same location as removed. 10. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the BPMV. ^ Tighten the fittings to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5853 11. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 12. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 13. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 14. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start engine. 15. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehiclein Vehicle DTC Information. 16. Observe the feel of the brake pedal after performing the diagnostic system check. If the pedal now feels spongy, air may have been in the secondary circuit of the brake modulator assembly, which may have been introduced into the primary circuit. If the pedal feels spongy, perform the ABS Automated Bleed Procedure. 17. Remove the shop towel and discard into an approved container. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5854 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Bracket Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the electronic brake control module (EBCM) electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5855 4. Loosen the 2 insulator nuts on the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) assembly. 5. Carefully lift the brake modulator assembly just enough to clear the bracket, then support the assembly. 6. Remove the brake pressure modulator assembly bracket mounting bolts. 7. Remove the bracket from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the BPMV assembly bracket to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Modulator Assembly Replacement > Page 5856 Install the brake pressure modulator assembly bracket mounting bolts and nut. ^ Tighten the bolts and nut to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 3. Install the brake modulator assembly to the bracket. 4. Tighten the 2 brake pressure modulator assembly insulator nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the EBCM electrical connector. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the cap from the hose nipple on the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 6. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 inch), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 7. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 8. Remove the transparent hoses from the reservoir. 9. Install the cap to the hose nipple on the reservoir, to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 10. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 11. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5861 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Fluid Level Sensor Replacement Master Cylinder Fluid Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level sensor electrical connector. 2. While simultaneously depressing the retaining tabs on the opposite side of the sensor electrical connection, carefully pull the sensor from the master cylinder reservoir. 3. Remove the low brake fluid level sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5862 1. While noting the proper orientation, install the brake fluid level sensor to the master cylinder. 2. Press the brake fluid level sensor firmly into the master cylinder reservoir, ensuring that the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 3. Connect the brake fluid level sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5863 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Replacement Master Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the brake fluid level sensor. 2. Disconnect the brake pipes from the master cylinder. 3. Important: Install a rubber cap or plug to the exposed brake pipe fitting ends in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Plug the open brake pipe ends. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5864 4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts. 5. Remove the master cylinder from the vehicle. 6. Drain the master cylinder reservoir of all brake fluid. Installation Procedure 1. Bench bleed the master cylinder. 2. Install the master cylinder to the brake booster. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the master cylinder mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the master cylinder mounting nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5865 4. Remove the plugs from the brake pipes. 5. Connect the brake pipes to the master cylinder. ^ Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the master cylinder to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 6. Connect the electrical connector to the brake fluid level sensor. 7. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5866 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Remove the brake fluid from the reservoir. Discard the fluid into an approved container. 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the brake fluid level sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5867 4. Remove the master cylinder reservoir attachment pins and discard the pins. 5. Release the reservoir from the master cylinder by carefully pulling reservoir straight up. 6. Remove the reservoir seals from the master cylinder body. Installation Procedure 1. Install the reservoir seals to the master cylinder body. 2. Install the reservoir to the master cylinder body by pushing the reservoir bayonets straight down into the seals in the master cylinder body. 3. Install NEW reservoir attachment pins. Ensure that the attachment pins are fully and firmly seated. 4. Install the brake fluid level sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5868 5. Connect the low brake fluid level sensor electrical connector. 6. Fill the master cylinder reservoir. 7. Bleed the brake system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding > Page 5869 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only GM approved or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Visually inspect the brake fluid level through the brake master cylinder auxiliary reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, the brake system should be inspected for wear and possible brake fluid leaks. 3. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, and an inspection of the brake system did not reveal wear or brake fluid leaks, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 4. If brake system service was just completed, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 5. If the brake fluid level is above the half-full point, adding brake fluid is not recommended under normal conditions. 6. If brake fluid is to be added to the master cylinder auxiliary reservoir, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Wheel Cylinder Inspection Guidelines Wheel Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Wheel Cylinder Inspection Guidelines Bulletin No.: 03-05-24-001A Date: March 21, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Service Information Regarding Rear Brake Drum Wheel Cylinder Inspections Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2005 and Prior Saturn Vehicles with Rear Drum Brakes Supercede: This bulletin is being revised add model years and include all GM vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-05-24-001 (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information on proper inspection of rear drum brake wheel cylinders. Important: It is not recommended that dust boots be removed during inspection processes as dirt and debris could contaminate the wheel cylinder bore causing premature wear of the wheel cylinder. In addition, most bores should look damp and some lubricant may drip out from under the boot as a result of lubricant being present. All rear drum brake wheel cylinders are assembled with a lubricant to aid in assembly, provide an anti-corrosion coating to the cylinder bore, and lubricate internal rubber components. As a result of this lubrication process, it is not uncommon for some amount of lubricant to accumulate at the ends of the cylinder under the dust boot. Over time, the lubricant may work its way to the outside of the boot and cause an area of the boot to look damp. Evidence of a damp area on the boot does not indicate a leak in the cylinder. However, if there is excessive wetness (i.e. drips) coming from the boot area of the wheel cylinder, it could indicate a brake hydraulic fluid leak requiring wheel cylinder replacement. (Refer to the Wheel Cylinder Replacement procedures in the appropriate Service Manual.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5874 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder Replacement ^ Tools Required J 38400 Brake Shoe Spanner and Spring Remover Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the wheel cylinder brake pipe fitting and the bleeder valve. 4. Remove the brake drum. 5. Remove the brake pipe nut. 6. Install a cap over the end of the brake pipe in order to prevent brake fluid loss and/or brake fluid contamination. 7. Remove the wheel cylinder bolts (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5875 8. Use the J 38400 in order to spread the brake shoes apart (1). 9. Remove the wheel cylinder. 10. Clean the old sealant from the backing plate where the wheel cylinder was installed. Clean the sealant from the wheel cylinder if you are reusing the wheel cylinder. Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 38400 in order to spread the brake shoes apart (1). 2. Install the wheel cylinder. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel cylinder bolts (2). ^ Tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the cap from the brake pipe and install the brake pipe to the wheel cylinder. ^ Tighten the nut to 19 Nm (14 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the brake drum. . 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system at the wheel cylinder. 7. Install the tire and wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5876 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation Parking Brake Cable: Description and Operation Park Brake System Description and Operation System Component Description The park brake system consists of the following: Park Brake Lever Assembly Receives, multiplies, and transfers park brake system apply input force from driver to park brake cable system. Releases applied park brake system when lever release button is depressed and lever is returned to the at rest position. Park Brake Cables Transfers input force received from park brake lever, through park brake cable equalizer, to park brake apply lever. Park Brake Cable Equalizer Evenly distributes input force to both the left and right park brake units. Threaded front park brake cable adjuster is also used to remove slack in park brake cables. Park Brake Apply Lever Multiplies and transfers input force to park brake actuator/adjuster. Park Brake Actuator/Adjuster Uses multiplied input force from apply lever to expand drum brake shoes toward the friction surface of the brake drum. Threaded park brake actuators/adjusters are also used to control clearance between the drum brake shoes and the friction surface of the brake drum . System Operation Park brake apply input force is received by the park brake lever assembly being applied. The input force is multiplied by the lever assembly, transferred and evenly distributed, through the park brake cables and the park brake cable equalizer, to the left and right park brake apply levers. The park brake apply levers multiply and transfer the apply input force to the park brake actuators/adjusters which expand the drum brake shoes toward the friction surface of the brake drum in order to prevent the rotation of the rear tire and wheel assemblies. The park brake lever assembly releases an applied park brake system when it is released and returned to the at rest position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5881 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Park Brake Adjustment 1. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Apply and fully release the park brake several times. Verify that the park brake lever releases completely. 2. Turn ON the ignition. Verify the red BRAKE warning lamp is not illuminated. 3. If the red BRAKE warning lamp is illuminated, verify the following conditions: ^ The park brake lever is in the fully released position and against the stop. ^ There is no slack in the park brake cable. 4. Turn OFF the ignition. 5. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 6. Remove the front floor console. 7. With the park brake lever in the released position, using ONLY hand tools, loosen the adjusting nut completely to the end of the front cable threaded rod. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. 9. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. 10. Adjust the rear drum brakes. 11. Ensure there is no brake shoe drag after adjustment by rotating the brake drums. If drag exists, re-center the brake shoes and perform the brake shoe adjustment again. 12. Install 2 wheel nuts to the wheel studs and firmly hand tighten in order to retain the brake drums. 13. Lower the vehicle to permit access to the park brake lever. 14. Raise the park brake lever 1 detent position. 15. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Using ONLY hand tools, tighten the park brake cable adjusting nut (1) until light to moderate drag is exhibited while rotating the rear brake drums. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5882 16. Attempt to rotate the rear brake drums. There should be no rotation forward or rearward. 17. Fully release the park brake lever. 18. Verify the park brake is released by rotating the rear brake drums. The drums should rotate freely and exhibit no brake shoe drag. 19. If the drums do not rotate freely, repeat the park brake cable adjustment procedure. 20. Raise the park brake lever 3 detent positions and attempt to rotate the rear brake drums: ^ One of the brake drums should not rotate forward or rearward. ^ The other brake drum should not rotate forward or rearward, or should require substantial effort to rotate. 21. Raise the vehicle. 22. Remove the wheel nuts retaining the brake drums. 23. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. 24. Lower the vehicle. 25. Install the front floor console. 26. Release the park brake lever. 27. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. With park brake lever in the released position, using ONLY hand tools, remove the park brake cable adjusting nut and washer. 4. Release the rear park brake cable ends from the cable equalizer on the front cable. 5. Remove the front park brake cable from the park brake lever by pulling the cable rearward. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front park brake cable to the park brake lever. 2. Install the rear cable ends to the cable equalizer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 5885 3. Using ONLY hand tools, install the washer and NEW adjusting nut (1) to the front park brake cable. 4. Adjust the park brake cable tension. 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 5886 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Replacement - Rear Park Brake Cable Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Ensure that the park brake lever is in the fully released position. 4. Release the tension from the park brake cable system at the front cable adjusting nut (1).Using only hand tools, loosen the adjusting nut (1) completely to the end of the front cable threaded rod. 5. Remove the rear carpet retainers. 6. Position the carpet forward in order to access the rear park brake cables and body pass-through grommets. 7. With the park brake lever (1) in the released position, release the appropriate rear park brake cable (2) from the cable equalizer. 8. Release the rear cable fitting from the park brake lever bracket and remove the cable from the lever assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 5887 9. Fold back the park brake cable routing tabs on the vehicle interior floor. 10. Release the rear park brake cable body pass-through grommet. 11. Raise and support the vehicle. 12. Remove the bolt from the park brake cable-to-underbody retainer. 13. Remove the bolt from the park brake cable retainer at the lower suspension trailing arm. 14. Remove the cable from the opening in the vehicle underbody. 15. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. 16. Remove the brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 5888 17. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, depress the visible retaining tab (1) on the park brake cable fitting, then tilt the released side of the cable end back into the backing plate. 18. Rotate the park brake cable to expose the other retaining tab. 19. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, depress the remaining retaining tab on the park brake cable fitting, and release the cable fitting from the backing plate. 20. Move the majority of the cable return spring back through the opening in the backing plate. 21. Push the cable toward the rear of the vehicle, just enough to clear the cable end from the slot on the park brake lever. 22. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, lift the cable to fully release the cable from the lever, then remove the cable. Installation Procedure 1. Insert the park brake cable through the opening in the backing plate. Only install the cable return spring to just rearward of the spring positioning tab on the backing plate. 2. Push the cable toward the rear of the vehicle, along the outside of the secondary brake shoe, until the cable end is positioned just past the slot on the park brake lever. 3. While holding the cable in position from front to rear, move the cable end to the back of the park brake lever. 4. Press the cable down into the slot on the lever, then pull the cable toward the front of the vehicle to secure the cable end to the slot. 5. While continuing to pull the cable away from the lever, insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the opening on the lever to prevent the cable from lifting out of the slot on the lever. 6. Move the cable return spring through the opening in the backing plate. 7. Secure the cable fitting to the backing plate. Attempt to pull the park brake cable free of the backing plate, to ensure that the retaining tabs (1) on the fitting are properly secured. 8. Adjust the rear drum brakes. 9. Install the brake drum. 10. Install the rear tire and wheel assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 5889 11. Insert the cable through the opening in the vehicle underbody. 12. Install the park brake cable retaining bracket to the rear suspension lower trailing arm. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 13. Install the bolt and nut to the park brake cable retainer and lower trailing arm. ^ Tighten the bolt and nut to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 14. Install and secure park brake cable pass-through grommet to the opening in the vehicle underbody. 15. Install the park brake cable to the underbody retainer. 16. Install the bolt to the park brake cable retainer and the vehicle underbody. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 17. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 5890 18. Secure the cable fitting to the park brake lever bracket. Attempt to pull the park brake cable free of the lever bracket, to ensure that the retaining tabs on the fitting are properly secured. 19. Install the cable end (2) to the cable equalizer. 20. Position park brake cable to routing tabs on vehicle interior floor. 21. Secure park brake cable to floor by folding routing tabs over park brake cable. 22. Reposition the carpet to the installed position. 23. Install the rear carpet retainers. 24. Adjust the park brake cable tension. 25. Install the front floor console. 26. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair Park Brake Lever Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Ensure that the park brake lever is in the fully released position. 4. Release the tension from the park brake cable system at the front cable adjusting nut (1). 5. Using ONLY hand tools, loosen the adjusting nut (1) completely to the end of the front cable threaded rod. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the park brake warning lamp switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5894 7. With the park brake lever (1) in the released position, release the rear park brake cable (2) ends from the cable equalizer. 8. Release the rear cable fittings from the park brake lever bracket. 9. Remove the park brake lever mounting nuts. 10. Remove the park brake lever assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake lever assembly to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5895 Install the park brake lever assembly mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Secure the rear cable fittings to the park brake lever bracket. Attempt to pull the park brake cables free of the lever bracket, to ensure that the retaining tabs on the fittings are properly secured. 4. Install the cable ends to the cable equalizer. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the park brake warning lamp switch. 6. Adjust the park brake cable tension. 7. Install the front floor console. 8. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5899 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5900 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect and remove the battery. 2. Remove and position aside the underhood electrical center. 3. Remove the battery tray. 4. Disconnect the coolant surge hose from the surge tank and position aside. 5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts. Do NOT disconnect the brake pipes from the master cylinder. 6. Carefully pull the master cylinder away from the vacuum booster and position aside. 7. Disconnect the vacuum booster check valve and hose assembly from the booster. 8. Without disconnecting the electrical connectors, remove the transmission control module (TCM) with the bracket from the bracket on the strut tower and position aside on top of the engine. 9. Remove the brake modulator assembly, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5905 10. Remove the brake modulator valve bracket, if equipped. 11. Remove the brake booster push rod-to-brake pedal retaining clip. 12. Remove the foam washer from the brake pedal assembly. 13. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts. 14. Important: Ensure that the foam insulator on the mounting surface of the brake booster withdraws with the booster. Disengage the brake booster from the front of dash and the brake pedal bracket. Maneuver the booster toward the center of the vehicle in order to ease removal. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5906 Installation Procedure 1. Install the foam insulator the vacuum brake booster. 2. Install the brake booster to the vehicle. 3. Install, but do not tighten, the booster mounting nuts. 4. Lightly lubricate the booster push rod pivot pin on the brake pedal with silicone lubricant. 5. Install the booster push rod to the pivot pin on the brake pedal. 6. Install the foam washer to the pivot pin. 7. Install the brake booster push rod retaining clip. 8. Fully seat the brake booster to the front of dash and the brake pedal assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 9. Tighten the vacuum brake booster mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5907 10. Install the brake modulator valve bracket, if equipped. 11. Install the brake modulator assembly, if equipped. 12. Reposition the TCM and bracket to the bracket on the strut tower. 13. Install the vacuum booster check valve and hose assembly to the booster. 14. Reposition and install the master cylinder to the booster. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5908 15. Install the coolant surge hose and clamp to the surge tank. 16. Install the battery tray. 17. Install the underhood electrical center. 18. Install and connect the battery. 19. If necessary, bleed the brake system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve and/or Hose Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Release the retaining clamp (1) and remove the vacuum hose (2) from the vacuum port on the engine. 2. Remove the check valve and hose from the brake booster by gently turning the check valve right then left while pulling straight out from the grommet. 3. Remove the vacuum hose from the check valve. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5912 1. Install the vacuum hose to the check valve. 2. Install the brake booster check valve and hose assembly to the booster. 3. Install the vacuum hose (2) to the engine vacuum port. 4. Install the vacuum hose clamp (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Component Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side 1 - EPS Inline Fuse Holder 2 - PSCM Harness Connection to the Underhood Fuse Block 3 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5918 Electronic Power Steering Harness, Underhood Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5919 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5920 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Remove the transmission control module (TCM), if equipped, from the mounting bracket and position aside. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any accumulated dirt and foreign material. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the EBCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5921 5. Disconnect the pump motor electrical connector. 6. Remove the EBCM attaching screws. 7. Separate the EBCM from the BPMV by carefully pulling apart. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the sealing surface of the BPMV, with denatured alcohol and a clean shop cloth. 2. Install the EBCM to the BPMV. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the EBCM-to-BPMV attaching screws. Tighten the bolts in a cross pattern. ^ Tighten the bolts to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the pump motor electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5922 5. Connect the electrical connector to the EBCM. 6. Reposition the TCM, if equipped, to the mounting bracket. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT start the engine. 8. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Component Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5928 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5929 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5933 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5934 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Left Side of the I/P Left Side of the I/P 1. Ambient Light Sensor 2. Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Traction Control (TC) Switch (JM4) 5. Hazard Switch 6. Fog Lamp Switch (T96) 7. Radio 8. HVAC Control Module 9. Power Window Switch - Main 10. Transmission Range Indicator 11. Horn Switch/Pad - Part of the Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 12. Headlamp Switch 13. Dimmer Switch 14. Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 15. Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5938 Traction Control Switch (JM4) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5939 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Traction Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. 2. Carefully release the retaining tabs and remove the traction control switch from the trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5940 1. Install the traction control switch to the trim bezel. Ensure that the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 2. Install the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Component Locations LF Suspension LF Suspension 1 - C104 Left Shown, C105 Right Similar 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF, RF Similar Under the Rear of the Vehicle Under the Rear of the Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5945 Under the Rear of the Vehicle 1 - Fuel Tank Harness 2 - C406 3 - Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Harness 4 - C404 5 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Shown, LR Similar Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5946 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations LF Suspension Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5947 Under The Rear Of The Vehicle Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5948 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5949 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - LR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5950 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5951 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - RR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake rotor. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 5954 1. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the brake rotor. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 5955 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake shoes. 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement - Front > Page 5956 1. Install the wheel speed sensor through the drum brake backing plate to the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 2. Seat the wheel speed sensor harness grommet into the backing plate. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the brake shoes. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5968 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5969 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5970 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5976 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5977 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 5978 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Top Of The Transmission, Left Side Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions Jump Starting: Service Precautions CAUTION: - Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. - Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. - Do not connect a jumper cable directly to the negative terminal of a discharged battery to prevent sparking and possible explosion of battery gases. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 5986 Jump Starting: Service and Repair JUMP STARTING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. NOTE: This vehicle has a 12 volt, negative ground electrical system. Make sure the vehicle or equipment being used to jump start the engine is also 12 volt, negative ground. Use of any other type of system will damage the vehicle's electrical components. 1. Position the vehicle with the booster battery so that the jumper cables will reach. - Do not let the 2 vehicles touch. - Make sure that the jumper cables do not have loose ends, or missing insulation. 2. Place an automatic transmission in PARK. If equipped with a manual transmission, place in NEUTRAL and block the wheels. 3. Turn OFF all electrical loads on both vehicles that are not needed. 4. Turn OFF the ignition on both vehicles. 5. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the battery positive (+) terminal (2) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal (1) of the booster battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Connect the black negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal (3) of the booster battery. 8. The final connection is made to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part (4) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.This final attachment must be at least 46 cm (18 in) away from the dead battery. CAUTION: Do not connect a jumper cable directly to the negative terminal of a discharged battery to prevent sparking and possible explosion of battery gases. 9. Start the engine of the vehicle that is providing the boost. 10. Crank the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. NOTE: Never operate the starter motor more than 15 seconds at a time without pausing in order to allow it to cool for at least 2 minutes. Overheating will damage the starter motor. 11. The black negative (-) cable must be first disconnected from the vehicle that was boosted (4). 12. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the negative (-) terminal (3) of the booster battery. 13. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the positive (+) terminal (1) of the booster battery. NOTE: Do not let the cable end touch any metal. Damage to the battery and other components may result. 14. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the remote positive (+) terminal (2) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure Negative: Service and Repair Disconnect/Connect Procedure BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE DISCONNECT/CONNECT PROCEDURE REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Record all of the customers radio station presets. 2. Turn OFF all the lamps and accessories. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position. 4. Disconnect the powertrain control module (PCM) wire harness (2) from the battery box cover. 5. Remove the PCM bracket with PCM (1) from the top of the battery box cover. 6. Carefully position the PCM and bracket out of the way. 7. Loosen the screws securing the battery box cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 5992 8. Remove the battery box cover (1). 9. Loosen the battery negative cable terminal bolt. 10. Remove the battery negative cable from the battery. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the battery negative cable to the battery. Tighten the battery negative cable terminal bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Clean any existing corrosion from the battery terminal bolt flange and the battery cable end. 2. Install battery box cover (1). Tighten the battery box cover screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 5993 3. Install the PCM and bracket to the battery box cover. 4. Connect the PCM wire harness (2) to the battery box cover. 5. Program all of the customer's radio station presets and set the radio clock to the current time. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 5994 Negative: Service and Repair Replacement procedures BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Always use replacement cables that are of the same type, diameter and length of the cables that you are replacing. - Always route the replacement cable the same way as the original cable. 1. Remove the battery box. 2. Disconnect the battery cable retainers (1) from the battery tray. 3. Remove the negative battery cable nut (2) and cable (1) from the inner fender body ground stud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 5995 4. Remove the negative battery cable nut and cable (1) from the transaxle stud. 5. Remove the negative battery cable from the wire loom. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the negative battery cable into the wire loom. 2. Connect the negative battery cable (1) to the transaxle stud. 3. Install the negative battery cable nut to the transaxle stud. Tighten the nut to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 5996 4. Install the negative battery cable (1) to the inner fender body ground stud. 5. Install the negative battery cable body ground nut (2). Tighten the nut to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 6. Connect the battery cable retainers (1) to the battery tray. 7. Install the battery box. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Positive: Technician Safety Information CAUTION: - Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. - Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. - Do not connect a jumper cable directly to the negative terminal of a discharged battery to prevent sparking and possible explosion of battery gases. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6001 Positive: Vehicle Damage Warnings BATTERY DISCONNECT CAUTION CAUTION: Unless directed otherwise, the ignition and start switch must be in the OFF or LOCK position, and all electrical loads must be OFF before servicing any electrical component. Disconnect the negative battery cable to prevent an electrical spark should a tool or equipment come in contact with an exposed electrical terminal. Failure to follow these precautions may result in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or its components. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 6002 Positive: Service and Repair BATTERY POSITIVE CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Always use replacement cables that are of the same type, diameter and length of the cables that you are replacing. - Always route the replacement cable the same way as the original cable. 1. Remove the battery. 2. Remove the underhood fuse block (UHFB) cover. 3. Remove the positive battery cable nut from the UHFB. 4. Remove the positive battery cable (2) from the UHFB. 5. Remove the battery box. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 6003 6. Disconnect the battery cable retainers (1) from the battery tray. 7. Remove the positive battery terminal nut (5) from the starter solenoid. 8. Disconnect the positive battery cable (1) from the starter solenoid. 9. Remove the positive battery cable from the wire loom. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the positive battery cable into the wire loom. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 6004 2. Connect the positive battery cable (1) to the starter solenoid. 3. Install the positive battery terminal nut (5) to the starter Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 6005 4. Connect the battery cable retainers (1) to the battery tray. 5. Install the battery box. 6. Install the positive battery cable (2) to the UHFB. 7. Install the positive battery cable nut to the UHFB. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 8. Install the UHFB cover. 9. Install the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6015 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6016 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6017 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6018 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6019 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6020 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6021 Alternator: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6022 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6023 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6024 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6025 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6026 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6027 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6028 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6029 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6030 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6031 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6032 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6033 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6034 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6035 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6036 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6037 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6038 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6039 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6040 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6041 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6042 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6043 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6044 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6045 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6046 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6047 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6048 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6049 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6050 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6051 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6052 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6053 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6054 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6055 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6056 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6057 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6058 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6059 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6060 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6061 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6062 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6063 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6064 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6065 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6066 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6067 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6068 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6073 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6074 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6075 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6076 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6077 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6078 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6079 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6080 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6081 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6088 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6089 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement GENERATOR BRACKET/ENGINE LIFT BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the generator. 2. Remove the drive belt tensioner. 3. Remove the generator bracket bolts. 4. Remove the generator bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the generator bracket. 2. Install the generator bracket bolts. Tighten the generator bracket bolts in the sequence shown to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the drive belt tensioner. 4. Install the generator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 6092 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Replacement GENERATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the battery ground (negative) cable from the battery. 2. Remove the generator B+ terminal nut. 3. Remove the generator B+ lead 4. Remove the generator electrical connector. 5. Remove the drive belt from the generator. 6. Remove the generator bolts. 7. Remove the generator from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 6093 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the generator to the generator bracket. 2. Install the generator bolts. Tighten the generator bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the drive belt. 4. Install the generator electrical connector. 5. Install the generator B+ lead. 6. Install the generator B+ terminal nut. Tighten the generator B+ terminal nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket/Engine Lift Bracket Replacement > Page 6094 7. Install the battery ground (negative) cable to the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 6105 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 6106 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 6107 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds Bulletin No.: 06-02-35-016C Date: October 02, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard to Turn or Binds (Clean and Lubricate Ignition Lock Cylinder/Housing) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2003-2007 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the lubrication information by adding steps and photos. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-35-016B (Section 02 - Steering Wheel and Column). Condition Some customers may comment that the ignition lock cylinder intermittently sticks or binds. Cause A lack of lubrication may cause adjoining metal surfaces to wear, resulting in a significant amount of powder (black in color) to form in the ignition cylinder case housing. Correction If the following lubrication procedure was already performed on this vehicle, contact Technical Assistance (TAC). Remove the ignition lock cylinder, clean the ignition lock cylinder and case housing. Then lubricate the ignition lock cylinder tip and case using the procedure below. You must use two different GM lubricants as outlined in this procedure. Remove the battery cover and disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Tip Use a shop cloth wrapped around a screwdriver to aid in cleaning the inside of the ignition case housing (1). Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and wipe out the inside of the ignition cylinder case Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 6113 housing (1). The actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing must be in the ACC position in order to install the ignition lock cylinder as shown in the above illustration. Inspect the position of the actuator blade inside the ignition cylinder case housing. If the actuator blade rotated when cleaning the ignition cylinder case housing, then reposition the actuator blade to the ACC position using needle nose pliers. Wet a shop cloth with GM Brake Cleaner, P/N 12378392 (in Canada, 88901247), or equivalent and clean the outside case (1) and the tip (2) of the ignition lock cylinder. Use the tube of GM Super Lube(R) with PTF, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada) as shown in the above illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 6114 Lightly coat the tail end (1), the two tabs (2), and the shaft of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Super Lube(R) with PTFE, P/N 12371287 for U.S. (10953437 in Canada). Lightly coat the entire outside case (1) of the ignition lock cylinder with GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant, P/N 89021668 for U.S. (89021674 in Canada). The ignition key must be installed in the ignition lock cylinder before installing the cylinder into the housing. Install the ignition lock cylinder assembly into the ignition cylinder case housing. Refer to Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement in SI. Connect the negative battery cable and install the battery cover. Verify that the customer's condition is fixed. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 06-02-35-016C > Oct > 07 > Ignition - Ignition Lock Cylinder is Hard To Turn/Binds > Page 6115 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 6120 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 6121 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 6122 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 6127 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Top Of The Transmission, Left Side Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Starter Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6135 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6136 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6137 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6138 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6139 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6140 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6141 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6142 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6143 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6144 Starter Motor: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6145 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6146 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6147 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6148 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6149 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6150 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6151 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6152 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6153 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6154 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6155 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6156 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6157 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6158 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6159 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6160 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6161 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6162 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6163 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6164 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6165 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6166 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6167 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6168 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6181 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6182 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6183 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6184 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6185 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6186 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6187 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6188 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6189 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6190 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6191 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6192 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6193 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6194 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6195 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6196 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6197 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6198 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6199 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6200 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6201 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6202 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6203 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6204 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6205 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6206 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6207 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6208 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6209 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6210 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6211 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6212 Starter Motor: Service and Repair STARTER MOTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the starter motor solenoid positive terminal nut and electrical wires. 4. Remove the starter motor solenoid S terminal nut and electrical wire. 5. Remove the torque converter cover bolt (2). 6. Remove the torque converter cover (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6213 7. Remove the starter motor bolts (2, 3). 8. Remove the starter motor (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the starter motor (1). 2. Install the starter motor bolts (2, 3). Tighten the starter motor bolts to 43 N.m (32 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6214 3. Install the torque converter cover (1). 4. Install the torque converter cover bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Install the starter motor solenoid S terminal electrical wire and nut. Tighten the solenoid S terminal nut to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 6. Install the starter motor solenoid positive terminal electrical wires and nut. Tighten the solenoid positive terminal nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install the battery negative cable to the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Starter Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Power Outlets Components View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6224 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6225 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6226 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6227 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6228 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6229 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6230 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6231 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6232 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6233 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6234 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6235 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6236 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6237 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6238 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6239 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6240 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6241 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6242 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6243 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6244 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6245 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6246 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6247 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6248 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6249 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6250 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6251 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6252 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6253 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6254 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6255 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6256 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6257 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6258 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6259 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6260 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6261 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6262 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6263 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6264 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6265 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6266 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6267 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6268 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6269 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6270 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6271 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6272 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6273 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6274 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6275 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6276 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6277 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6278 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6279 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6280 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6281 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6282 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6283 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6284 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6285 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6286 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6287 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6288 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6289 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6290 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6291 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6292 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6293 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6294 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6295 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6296 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6297 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6298 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6299 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6301 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Auxiliary Power Outlet - Front Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6302 Auxiliary Power Outlet - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT - FLOOR CONSOLE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse located in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 2. Lift the tether cap and locate 2 square holes in the receptacle. 3. Hold J 42059 at a 30 degree angle as you insert the tool into the receptacle. 4. Position one side of the tool in each hole. 5. Pull the receptacle straight out. 6. Disconnect the connector and remove the receptacle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 6305 1. Connect the receptacle connector. 2. Push the receptacle into the side trim. 3. Install the fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 6306 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - 12 Volt Rear Quarter Trim ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT - 12 VOLT - REAR QUARTER TRIM TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse located in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 2. Lift the tether cap and locate 2 square holes in the receptacle. 3. Hold J 42059 at a 30 degree angle as you insert the tool into the receptacle. 4. Position one side of the tool in each hole. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 6307 5. Pull the receptacle straight out. 6. Disconnect the connector and remove the receptacle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the receptacle connector. 2. Push the receptacle into the side trim. 3. Install the fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6308 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Locations Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6315 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6316 Application Table Part 2 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6317 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6318 Fuse: Locations I/P Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6319 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6320 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6323 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6324 Application Table Part 2 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6325 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6326 Fuse: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6327 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6328 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6334 Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6335 Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6336 Fuse Block - I/P C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6337 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6338 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6339 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6340 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6341 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6342 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6343 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6344 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6345 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6346 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6347 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6348 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6349 Fuse Block - Underhood C4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6350 Fuse Block - Underhood C5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6353 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6354 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6355 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6356 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6357 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6362 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6363 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6364 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6365 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6366 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6367 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 6376 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 6382 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C100 - C199 C102 - Body Harness To The Engine Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6385 C104 - LF WSS Harness To The Body Harness C105 - RF WSS Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6386 C106 - Body Harness To The Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6387 C150 - Engine Harness To The Fuel Rail Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6388 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C200 - C299 C200 - I/P To The Body Harness Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6389 C200 - I/P To The Body Harness Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6390 C202 - I/P Harness To The HVAC Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6391 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6392 C275 - SIR Coil To The I/P Harness C276 - I/P Harness To The SIR Coil Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6393 C277 - SIR Coil To The Steering Wheel Control Switches Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6394 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C300 - C399 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Jumper Harness (Early Production) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6395 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Harness (Late Production) C301 - Body Harness To The Console Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6396 C302 - Headliner Harness To The Sunroof Harness (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6397 C303 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The I/P Harness (Early Production With RPO Code UE1) C303 - Headliner Harness To The I/P Harness (Late Production With RPO Code UE1) C304 - I/P Harness To The Shifter Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6398 C305 - Body Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (With RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6399 C306 - Body Harness To The Front Passenger Seat Harness (With RPO Code KA1) C307 - Roof Rail Harness To The I/P Harness (With RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6400 C308 - Roof Rail Module Harness To The I/P Harness (With RPO Code ASF) C310 - Driver Seat Jumper Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (With RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6401 C311 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness C312 - Body Harness To The Trailer Connector Adapter Harness (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6402 C313 - Trailer Connector Adapter Harness To The Trailer Hitch Harness (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6403 C398 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The Headliner Harness (Early Production) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6404 C399 - Headliner Harness To The Headliner Jumper Harness (Early Production With RPO Code UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6405 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C400 - C499 C400 - Body Harness To The LR Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6406 C401 - Body Harness To The RR Tail Lamp Harness C402 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6407 C403 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness C404 - Body Harness To The Rear WSS Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6408 C406 - Body Harness To The Fuel Tank Harness C408 - Body Harness To The CHMSL Jumper Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6409 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C102 - Body Harness To The Engine Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6410 C104 - LF WSS Harness To The Body Harness C105 - RF WSS Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6411 C106 - Body Harness To The Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6412 C150 - Engine Harness To The Fuel Rail Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6413 C200 - I/P To The Body Harness Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6414 C200 - I/P To The Body Harness Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6415 C202 - I/P Harness To The HVAC Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6416 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6417 C275 - SIR Coil To The I/P Harness C276 - I/P Harness To The SIR Coil Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6418 C277 - SIR Coil To The Steering Wheel Control Switches Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6419 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Jumper Harness (Early Production) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6420 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Harness (Late Production) C301 - Body Harness To The Console Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6421 C302 - Headliner Harness To The Sunroof Harness (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6422 C303 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The I/P Harness (Early Production With RPO Code UE1) C303 - Headliner Harness To The I/P Harness (Late Production With RPO Code UE1) C304 - I/P Harness To The Shifter Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6423 C305 - Body Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (With RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6424 C306 - Body Harness To The Front Passenger Seat Harness (With RPO Code KA1) C307 - Roof Rail Harness To The I/P Harness (With RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6425 C308 - Roof Rail Module Harness To The I/P Harness (With RPO Code ASF) C310 - Driver Seat Jumper Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (With RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6426 C311 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness C312 - Body Harness To The Trailer Connector Adapter Harness (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6427 C313 - Trailer Connector Adapter Harness To The Trailer Hitch Harness (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6428 C398 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The Headliner Harness (Early Production) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6429 C399 - Headliner Harness To The Headliner Jumper Harness (Early Production With RPO Code UE1) C400 - Body Harness To The LR Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6430 C401 - Body Harness To The RR Tail Lamp Harness C402 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6431 C403 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness C404 - Body Harness To The Rear WSS Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6432 C406 - Body Harness To The Fuel Tank Harness C408 - Body Harness To The CHMSL Jumper Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6433 C500 - Body Harness To The LF Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6434 C600 - Body Harness To The RF Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6435 C700 - Body Harness To The LR Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6436 C800 - Body Harness To The RR Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6437 C900 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Liftgate Harness C901 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6438 C902 - Left License Lamp To The Liftgate Harness Harness C903 - Right License Lamp To The Liftgate Harness Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6439 C904 - CHMSL Jumper Harness To The CHMSL Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6440 Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6446 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6447 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6448 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6449 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6450 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6455 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6456 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6457 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6458 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6459 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6468 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6469 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6470 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 6475 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6481 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6482 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6483 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6488 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6489 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6490 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6491 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6492 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6493 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 6498 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 6503 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6509 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6510 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6511 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6512 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6513 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6514 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 6519 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Power Outlets Components View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6526 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6527 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6528 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6529 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6530 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6531 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6532 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6533 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6534 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6535 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6536 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6537 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6538 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6539 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6540 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6541 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6542 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6543 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6544 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6545 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6546 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6547 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6548 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6549 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6550 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6551 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6552 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6553 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6554 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6555 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6556 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6557 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6558 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6559 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6560 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6561 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6562 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6563 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6564 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6565 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6566 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6567 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6568 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6569 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6570 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6571 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6572 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6573 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6574 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6575 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6576 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6577 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6578 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6579 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6580 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6581 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6582 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6583 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6584 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6585 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6586 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6587 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6588 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6589 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6590 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6591 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6592 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6593 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6594 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6595 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6596 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6597 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6598 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6599 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6600 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6601 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6602 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6603 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Auxiliary Power Outlet - Front Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6604 Auxiliary Power Outlet - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT - FLOOR CONSOLE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse located in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 2. Lift the tether cap and locate 2 square holes in the receptacle. 3. Hold J 42059 at a 30 degree angle as you insert the tool into the receptacle. 4. Position one side of the tool in each hole. 5. Pull the receptacle straight out. 6. Disconnect the connector and remove the receptacle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 6607 1. Connect the receptacle connector. 2. Push the receptacle into the side trim. 3. Install the fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 6608 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - 12 Volt Rear Quarter Trim ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT - 12 VOLT - REAR QUARTER TRIM TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse located in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 2. Lift the tether cap and locate 2 square holes in the receptacle. 3. Hold J 42059 at a 30 degree angle as you insert the tool into the receptacle. 4. Position one side of the tool in each hole. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement - Floor Console > Page 6609 5. Pull the receptacle straight out. 6. Disconnect the connector and remove the receptacle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the receptacle connector. 2. Push the receptacle into the side trim. 3. Install the fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6610 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Locations Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6617 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6618 Application Table Part 2 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6619 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6620 Fuse: Locations I/P Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6621 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6622 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6625 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6626 Application Table Part 2 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6627 Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6628 Fuse: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6629 Application Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 6630 Location View Location View Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6636 Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6637 Fuse Block - I/P C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6638 Fuse Block - I/P C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6639 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6640 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6641 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6642 Fuse Block - I/P C3 Part 4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6643 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6644 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6645 Fuse Block - Underhood C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6646 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6647 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6648 Fuse Block - Underhood C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6649 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6650 Fuse Block - Underhood C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6651 Fuse Block - Underhood C4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6652 Fuse Block - Underhood C5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6655 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6656 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6657 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6658 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6659 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6664 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6665 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6666 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6667 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6668 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6669 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 6678 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 6684 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C100 - C199 C102 - Body Harness To The Engine Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6687 C104 - LF WSS Harness To The Body Harness C105 - RF WSS Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6688 C106 - Body Harness To The Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6689 C150 - Engine Harness To The Fuel Rail Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6690 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C200 - C299 C200 - I/P To The Body Harness Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6691 C200 - I/P To The Body Harness Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6692 C202 - I/P Harness To The HVAC Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6693 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6694 C275 - SIR Coil To The I/P Harness C276 - I/P Harness To The SIR Coil Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6695 C277 - SIR Coil To The Steering Wheel Control Switches Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6696 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C300 - C399 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Jumper Harness (Early Production) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6697 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Harness (Late Production) C301 - Body Harness To The Console Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6698 C302 - Headliner Harness To The Sunroof Harness (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6699 C303 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The I/P Harness (Early Production With RPO Code UE1) C303 - Headliner Harness To The I/P Harness (Late Production With RPO Code UE1) C304 - I/P Harness To The Shifter Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6700 C305 - Body Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (With RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6701 C306 - Body Harness To The Front Passenger Seat Harness (With RPO Code KA1) C307 - Roof Rail Harness To The I/P Harness (With RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6702 C308 - Roof Rail Module Harness To The I/P Harness (With RPO Code ASF) C310 - Driver Seat Jumper Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (With RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6703 C311 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness C312 - Body Harness To The Trailer Connector Adapter Harness (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6704 C313 - Trailer Connector Adapter Harness To The Trailer Hitch Harness (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6705 C398 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The Headliner Harness (Early Production) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6706 C399 - Headliner Harness To The Headliner Jumper Harness (Early Production With RPO Code UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6707 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C400 - C499 C400 - Body Harness To The LR Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6708 C401 - Body Harness To The RR Tail Lamp Harness C402 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6709 C403 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness C404 - Body Harness To The Rear WSS Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6710 C406 - Body Harness To The Fuel Tank Harness C408 - Body Harness To The CHMSL Jumper Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6711 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C102 - Body Harness To The Engine Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6712 C104 - LF WSS Harness To The Body Harness C105 - RF WSS Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6713 C106 - Body Harness To The Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6714 C150 - Engine Harness To The Fuel Rail Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6715 C200 - I/P To The Body Harness Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6716 C200 - I/P To The Body Harness Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6717 C202 - I/P Harness To The HVAC Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6718 C204 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6719 C275 - SIR Coil To The I/P Harness C276 - I/P Harness To The SIR Coil Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6720 C277 - SIR Coil To The Steering Wheel Control Switches Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6721 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Jumper Harness (Early Production) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6722 C300 - Body Harness To The Headliner Harness (Late Production) C301 - Body Harness To The Console Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6723 C302 - Headliner Harness To The Sunroof Harness (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6724 C303 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The I/P Harness (Early Production With RPO Code UE1) C303 - Headliner Harness To The I/P Harness (Late Production With RPO Code UE1) C304 - I/P Harness To The Shifter Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6725 C305 - Body Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (With RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6726 C306 - Body Harness To The Front Passenger Seat Harness (With RPO Code KA1) C307 - Roof Rail Harness To The I/P Harness (With RPO Code ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6727 C308 - Roof Rail Module Harness To The I/P Harness (With RPO Code ASF) C310 - Driver Seat Jumper Harness To The Driver Seat Harness (With RPO Code AG1/KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6728 C311 - I/P Harness To The Body Harness C312 - Body Harness To The Trailer Connector Adapter Harness (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6729 C313 - Trailer Connector Adapter Harness To The Trailer Hitch Harness (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6730 C398 - Headliner Jumper Harness To The Headliner Harness (Early Production) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6731 C399 - Headliner Harness To The Headliner Jumper Harness (Early Production With RPO Code UE1) C400 - Body Harness To The LR Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6732 C401 - Body Harness To The RR Tail Lamp Harness C402 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6733 C403 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Body Harness C404 - Body Harness To The Rear WSS Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6734 C406 - Body Harness To The Fuel Tank Harness C408 - Body Harness To The CHMSL Jumper Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6735 C500 - Body Harness To The LF Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6736 C600 - Body Harness To The RF Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6737 C700 - Body Harness To The LR Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6738 C800 - Body Harness To The RR Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6739 C900 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Liftgate Harness C901 - Liftgate Jumper Harness To The Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6740 C902 - Left License Lamp To The Liftgate Harness Harness C903 - Right License Lamp To The Liftgate Harness Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6741 C904 - CHMSL Jumper Harness To The CHMSL Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 6742 Splice Pack SP200 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6748 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6749 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6750 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6751 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6752 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition OFF. IMPORTANT: Record all preset radio stations. 2. Remove the screws from the battery cooling box. Remove the battery cover. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the positive battery cable. 5. Remove the console. 6. Remove the nut holding the following fuse block connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4): - The body 68-way connector (1) - The I/P 68-way connector (2) - The I/P 24-way connector (3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6757 7. Remove the bolt holding the fuse block into place. 8. Remove the ground wire (1). 9. Remove the fuse block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuse block and attach the ground wire (1) and attach the bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6758 2. Connect the harness connectors to the back of the I/P fuse block (4). Tighten the connectors to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the console. 4. Connect the positive battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Tighten the bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the battery cooling box cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 7. Set the radio stations to the preset selections. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6759 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the underhood accessory wiring junction block cover. 3. Remove the nut at the end of the fuse block and remove both the positive battery cable and the EPS cable. 4. Loosen the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block until the block can be lifted off the connectors. 5. Remove the I/P connectors (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6760 6. Pull up on each of the following 68-way connectors until they come out. IMPORTANT: All 3 fuse block 68-way connectors are held into place to the fuse block case by push-in retainers. 1. Fuse block case (1) 2. Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) 3. Engine 68-way connector (3) 4. I/P 68-way connector (4) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each of the following 68-way connectors into its proper location. - Fuse block case (1) - Forward lamp 68-way connector (2) - Engine 68-way connector (3) - I/P 68-way connector (4) 2. Push down on each connector until it is fully secured into the fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 6761 3. Connect the I/P connectors (2). 4. Tighten the bolts (1) on the top of the fuse block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the underhood accessory wiring junction block harness retaining bolts (1) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 5. Reconnect the positive battery cable and EPS at the end of the fuse block with the nut. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the fuse box cover. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6770 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6771 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6772 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 6777 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6783 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6784 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 6785 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6790 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6791 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6792 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6793 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6794 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6795 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 6800 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 6805 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6811 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6812 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6813 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6814 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6815 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 6816 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 6821 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 6827 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 6828 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 6829 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 6830 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 6831 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 6832 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 6833 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications > Page 6836 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications > Page 6837 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6838 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear . Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6839 Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. Lead/Pull Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6840 At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors: ^ Tire construction ^ Wheel alignment ^ Unbalanced steering gear The way in which a tire is built may produce lead/pull. The rear tires will not cause lead. Torque Steer Description A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the other direction during deceleration. The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle: ^ A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar, change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the most significant effect on torque steer correction. ^ A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure ^ Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to level ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan (shown on the left side of the illustration) has the most downward sloping axle angle. Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6841 compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment Alignment: Service and Repair Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6844 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6845 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. 2. Important: ^ Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first ^ Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation ^ If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6846 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. ^ Tighten the nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6847 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. 3. Important: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts. ^ Tighten the jam nuts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6848 Alignment: Service and Repair Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification. Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6849 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. 2. Important: ^ Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first ^ Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation ^ If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6850 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. ^ Tighten the nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6851 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. 3. Important: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts. ^ Tighten the jam nuts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Rear Camber Adjustment Rear Camber Adjustment 1. Loosen the upper control arm-to-frame fastener enough to allow movement. 2. Important: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, turning the cam nut will move the camber in to the designated location. Rotate the upper control arm-to-frame fastener in the direction necessary to the correct the camber measurement. 3. Snug the upper control arm-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear camber specifications and adjust as necessary. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the nut and tighten the upper control arm-to-frame bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 6852 Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. Loosen the toe link-to-frame fastener enough to allow for movement. 2. Important: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, a cam nut is available for service if required. Rotate the toe link cam nut in the direction necessary to correct the toe angle. 3. Snug the toe link-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear toe specifications and adjust as necessary. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the nut and tighten the link-to-frame fastener bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Steering Column Control Module: Diagrams Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6858 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6859 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, I/P Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 6878 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Revised Tie Rod to Steering Knuckle Torque Front Steering Knuckle: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Revised Tie Rod to Steering Knuckle Torque Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-017 Date: December 06, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod-to-Steering Knuckle Nut Tightening Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Cobalt, Equinox 2005 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2005 Saturn ION, VUE This bulletin is being issued to revise the steering linkage outer tie rod-to-steering knuckle nut tightening specification in the Front Suspension sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. Revised Torque TSB # 05-03-08-017 Dated 12/06/2005 The information shown has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Rear Knuckle Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 4. Remove the upper control arm to knuckle bolt and nut. 5. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6886 6. Remove the toe link to knuckle bolt and nut. 7. Remove the trailing blade to knuckle bolts. 8. Remove the knuckle from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the knuckle to the lower control arm. Loosely install the bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6887 2. Install the knuckle to the upper control arm. Loosely install the bolt and nut. 3. Install the knuckle to the toe link. Loosely install the bolt and nut. 4. Install the knuckle to trailing blade. Loosely install the bolt and nut. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts and nuts in the following sequence: 1. Tighten the knuckle to lower control arm bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 2. Tighten the knuckle to upper control arm bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 3. Tighten the knuckle to toe link bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6888 4. Tighten the knuckle to trailing blade bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 7. Install the tire and wheel. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform a vehicle wheel alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6889 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB Bulletin No. #05-03-08-017 dated December 06, 2005. SUBJECT: Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod-to-Steering Knuckle Nut Torque Steering Knuckle Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43828 Ball Joint Remover - J 44015 Steering Linkage Installer - SA91100C Tie Rod Separator - SA9140E Torque Angle Gage Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the strut assembly. 4. Loosen the steering knuckle to strut bolts and nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6890 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint cotter pin. 7. Loosen the ball stud nut, until level with the top of the ball stud. 8. Using the J 43828 , separate the lower control arm from the steering knuckle. 9. Remove the lower control arm and nut from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6891 10. Remove the outer tie rod end to knuckle nut. 11. Using the SA91100C , separate the outer tie rod from the steering knuckle. 12. Remove the steering knuckle to strut bolts and nuts. Discard the bolts and nuts. 13. Remove the steering knuckle from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the steering knuckle to strut assembly. 2. Loosely install the strut to steering knuckle bolts and nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6892 3. Install the control arm ball stud into the steering knuckle. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Note: There are 2 different ball studs used on this vehicle. The ball stud type must be identified in order to use the correct torque value when tightening the ball stud nut. If the wrong torque is used, damage could occur to the ball stud. Important: ^ Only use hardware provided with the new ball joint. ^ The bolts must be installed with the bolt head on top of the ball joint. Install the ball joint to control arm bolts. ^ Lower Control Arm Ball Stud Nut (Ball Stud with Silver Cup on Bottom) - 60 N.m (44 lb-ft) ^ Lower Control Arm Ball Stud Nut (Ball Stud with Flat and Black Bottom) - 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 5. Tighten the strut to steering knuckle bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten the bolts and nuts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 6. Important: Do not loosen the castle nut for cotter pin installation. Tighten the castle nut enough to allow for cotter pin installation. 7. Important: The cotter pin must not contact the wheel speed sensor or drive axle. Install the cotter pin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6893 8. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 9. Connect the outer tie rod end to the steering knuckle. 10. Use the J 44015 to seat the ball stud taper to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 11. Remove the J 44015 . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 6894 12. Install a new tie rod retention nut. - Tighten the steering linkage outer tie rod-to-steering knuckle nut to 25 Nm (18 lb ft) Plus 90 degrees 13. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Connect the stabilizer link to the strut assembly. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 14. Install the tire and wheel. 15. Lower the vehicle. 16. Perform a wheel alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6900 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Power Steering Pump Replacement Tips Power Steering Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering Pump Replacement Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-02-32-013B Date: August 07, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips/Recommendations When Power Steering Pump Replacement is Necessary Models: 1997-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update the information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-32-013A (Section 02 - Steering). A recently completed analysis of returned power steering (PS) pumps that had been replaced for noise, no power assist, no or low pressure and leaking conditions has indicated a high number of "No Trouble Found" results. Corporate Bulletin Number 01-02-32-004 indicates that when attempting to repair a power steering concern, the steering system analyzer should be utilized to assist the technician in a successful diagnosis. Note- Saturn ASTRA does not utilize the Power Steering System Analyzer. In addition, extensive warranty analysis has shown that the following situations are all significant root causes of PS pump failures: - Improper pulley installation - Re-using the O-rings - Using fluid other than the OE-specified steering fluid - Failure to flush the PS system In order to help improve customer satisfaction and reduce comebacks, GM recommends the following tips for replacing a PS pump: 1. Low or no pressure from the PS pump may be the results of dirty or contaminated fluid, which could cause the pressure relief valve to stop functioning. Using the proper tools, flush and bleed the PS system. Any residual contaminants will result in pump failure. 2. When removing the pulley, use the proper special tools. Because the pulley alignment is critical, distorting the pulley may damage bearings on the new PS pump. Note Some new PS pumps may not include a new O-ring. Please refer to the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. 3. Be sure to use only the new O-rings included with the PS pump. The new reservoir O-ring must be lubricated with OE-specific PS fluid prior to installation. Also make sure that the control valve O-ring is in its exact groove position and is NOT covering the pressure bypass hole. 4. Bleed the PS system according to the procedures/recommendations in SI. Following these procedures and using the correct tools and fluids should help ensure that the new PS pump operates properly. Skipping steps may cost you time and trouble later. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, I/P Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Steering Column Control Module: Diagrams Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6912 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6913 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Power Steering Harness, I/P Side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6922 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6923 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6924 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6925 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6926 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6927 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6928 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6929 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6930 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6931 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6932 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6933 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6934 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6935 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6936 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6937 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6938 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6939 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6940 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6941 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6942 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6943 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6944 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6945 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6946 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6947 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6948 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6949 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6950 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6951 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Steering Column Control Module: Diagrams Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6955 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6956 Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Steering Gear: Customer Interest Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 04-02-32-006 Date: August 06, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle or Clunk Felt in Steering Wheel While Driving on Rough Roads (Adjust Steering Gear Preload) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Attention: This Bulletin Only Applies To General Motors Chevrolet Dealers In Mexico Condition Some customers may comment that while driving over certain rough road conditions, they hear a rattle noise from the front end of the vehicle. Some customers may also comment that they feel clunking in the steering wheel while hearing the noise. Correction Follow the service procedure below to correct this condition. 1. Set the steering wheel in a straight ahead position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove both front tire assemblies. Important: Hold the ball stud in order to prevent turning during removal of the nut. 4. Remove the tie rod to knuckle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 6965 Note: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 5. Use the SA91100C to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the bar. 8. Rotate the stabilizer bar upward. 9. Remove the pinch bolt from the lower intermediate shaft to the steering gear shaft. 10. Remove the lower intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 11. Remove the two bolts retaining the steering gear to the frame. 12. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle. Note: ONLY clamp the steering gear in a vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Failure to clamp the gear in this location may cause damage to the gear. 13. Mount the steering gear in a vise by clamping the vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Important: ^ ONLY use a 14 mm open end crows foot with a newton meter torque wrench when measuring the steering gear preload. ^ Measure the preload before making any adjustments to the steering gear. 14. Measure the steering gear preload by rotating the stub shaft back and forth in a +/- 45° rotation from center using a 14 mm open end crows foot and a newton meter torque wrench. Measure the steering gear preload prior to making an adjustment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 6966 15. Using the J 35467-2, hold the adjuster plug and loosen the lock nut with a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. 16. Tighten the adjuster plug using the J 35467-2 while turning the stub shaft with a 14 mm open end crows foot in a back and forth movement in a +/45° rotation from center. Preload Specification Adjust the steering gear preload to 1.5 N.m - 2.0 N.m (13.2 lb in - 17.7 lb in) 17. While holding the adjuster plug with the J-35467-2, tighten the lock nut using a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. Tighten Tighten the adjuster lock nut to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 18. Re-measure the steering gear preload after tightening the lock nut to make sure the preload did not change while tightening the locking nut. 19. Reinstall the steering gear in the vehicle. 20. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 21. Connect the stabilizer links the stabilizer shaft and install the nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 65 N.m (48 lb ft). 22. Connect the outer tie rod ends to the knuckles. 23. Using the J 44015 , seat the ball stud taper to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 24. Remove the J 44015 and install a new nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 6967 25. Install the front tires and wheels. 26. Lower the vehicle. Tool Information General Motors Special Tools can be purchased by calling SPX of Mexico at (552) 5-95-16-30. Warranty Information This labor code is for GM of Mexico dealers only. This labor code is for bulletin use only. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Steering Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads Bulletin No.: 04-02-32-006 Date: August 06, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise from Front of Vehicle or Clunk Felt in Steering Wheel While Driving on Rough Roads (Adjust Steering Gear Preload) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Attention: This Bulletin Only Applies To General Motors Chevrolet Dealers In Mexico Condition Some customers may comment that while driving over certain rough road conditions, they hear a rattle noise from the front end of the vehicle. Some customers may also comment that they feel clunking in the steering wheel while hearing the noise. Correction Follow the service procedure below to correct this condition. 1. Set the steering wheel in a straight ahead position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove both front tire assemblies. Important: Hold the ball stud in order to prevent turning during removal of the nut. 4. Remove the tie rod to knuckle nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 6973 Note: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 5. Use the SA91100C to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 7. Remove the stabilizer link from the bar. 8. Rotate the stabilizer bar upward. 9. Remove the pinch bolt from the lower intermediate shaft to the steering gear shaft. 10. Remove the lower intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 11. Remove the two bolts retaining the steering gear to the frame. 12. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle. Note: ONLY clamp the steering gear in a vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Failure to clamp the gear in this location may cause damage to the gear. 13. Mount the steering gear in a vise by clamping the vise on one of the gear mounting ears. Important: ^ ONLY use a 14 mm open end crows foot with a newton meter torque wrench when measuring the steering gear preload. ^ Measure the preload before making any adjustments to the steering gear. 14. Measure the steering gear preload by rotating the stub shaft back and forth in a +/- 45° rotation from center using a 14 mm open end crows foot and a newton meter torque wrench. Measure the steering gear preload prior to making an adjustment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 6974 15. Using the J 35467-2, hold the adjuster plug and loosen the lock nut with a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. 16. Tighten the adjuster plug using the J 35467-2 while turning the stub shaft with a 14 mm open end crows foot in a back and forth movement in a +/45° rotation from center. Preload Specification Adjust the steering gear preload to 1.5 N.m - 2.0 N.m (13.2 lb in - 17.7 lb in) 17. While holding the adjuster plug with the J-35467-2, tighten the lock nut using a large adjustable wrench, or equivalent. Tighten Tighten the adjuster lock nut to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 18. Re-measure the steering gear preload after tightening the lock nut to make sure the preload did not change while tightening the locking nut. 19. Reinstall the steering gear in the vehicle. 20. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 21. Connect the stabilizer links the stabilizer shaft and install the nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 65 N.m (48 lb ft). 22. Connect the outer tie rod ends to the knuckles. 23. Using the J 44015 , seat the ball stud taper to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 24. Remove the J 44015 and install a new nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 04-02-32-006 > Aug > 04 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise on Rough Roads > Page 6975 25. Install the front tires and wheels. 26. Lower the vehicle. Tool Information General Motors Special Tools can be purchased by calling SPX of Mexico at (552) 5-95-16-30. Warranty Information This labor code is for GM of Mexico dealers only. This labor code is for bulletin use only. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6976 Steering Gear: Service and Repair The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB Bulletin No. #05-03-08-017 dated December 06, 2005. SUBJECT: Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod-to-Steering Knuckle Nut Torque Power Steering Gear Replacement ^ Tools Required J 44015 Tie Rod installer - SA91100C Tie Rod Separator Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front tires. 3. Remove both outer tie rod to steering knuckle nuts. Discard the nuts. 4. Notice: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. Important: Hold the ball stud to prevent turning during removal of the nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6977 Using the SA91100C , separate the tie rods from the steering knuckles. 5. Rotate the intermediate steering shaft in order to gain access to the intermediate shaft pinch bolt. 6. Remove the intermediate to steering gear pinch bolt. Discard the bolt. 7. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 8. Disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer bar. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6978 9. On CVT equipped vehicles, remove the shift cable clip from the steering gear. 10. Remove the steering gear to cradle mounting bolts. 11. Remove the steering gear through the right side of the vehicle. 12. With heat shield equipped steering gears, remove the heat shield. Save for installation. Installation Procedure 1. If applicable, install the heat shield. 2. Important: Ensure the stabilizer is swung in the upmost position for gear clearance. Install the steering gear from the right side of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6979 3. Center the gear mounting bushings into the cradle supports. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hand start both steering gear to cradle mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 5. On CVT equipped vehicles, install the shift cable clip to the steering gear. 6. Connect the intermediate shaft to the steering gear and install a new pinch bolt. ^ Tighten the intermediate pinch bolt to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6980 7. Connect the stabilizer links to the stabilizer bar. 8. Important: Hold the ball stud to prevent turning during installation of the nut. Using the J 44015 , seat the ball stud taper to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6981 9. Important: Hold the ball stud to prevent turning during installation of the nut. Remove the J 44015 and install a new nuts. Tighten the steering linkage outer tie rod-to-steering knuckle nut to 25 Nm (18 lb ft) Plus 90 degrees 10. Install the front tires and wheels. 11. Check the front wheel alignment and align as necessary. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Control Switch Assembly Replacement Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the screws from the steering wheel shroud. 2. Notice: Cruise control switches must be removed from the rear. Do not attempt to pry them out from front as damage to steering wheel may occur. If the vehicle is equipped with cruise control, push the switches out from the rear of the steering wheel. Assembly Procedure 1. If the vehicle is equipped with cruise control, install the switches by pushing them in place from the front of the wheel. 2. Install the screws in the steering wheel shroud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Locking of the steering column will prevent damage and a possible malfunction of the SIR system. With the steering wheel in the straight forward position, remove the ignition key 2. Remove the intermediate steering shaft to steering gear pinch bolt. Discard the bolt. 3. Disengage the intermediate shaft seal from the body panel. 4. Collapse the intermediate steering shaft, while disconnecting the intermediate steering shaft from the steering gear. 5. Place scribe makes on the intermediate shaft to the steering column connection prior to removal. 6. Remove the intermediate shaft pinch bolt at the steering column. Discard the pinch bolt. 7. Disconnect the intermediate steering shaft from the steering column. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6988 8. Remove the intermediate steering shaft assembly from inside the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Failure to transfer the pre-scribed marks may result in an off-center steering wheel. If installing a new intermediate shaft, transfer the pre-scrubed alignment marks on to the new part. 2. Install the intermediate steering shaft assembly from inside the vehicle. 3. Align and connect the intermediate steering shaft to the steering gear Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6989 4. Notice: Install a new lower intermediate shaft pinch bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 5. Align the pre-scribed mark on the intermediate steering shaft to the pre-scribed mark on the steering column. 6. Connect the intermediate steering shaft to the steering column. 7. If the intermediate shaft was removed without the use of scribed marks, perform the following: 1. Place the road wheels in the straight ahead position. 2. Align the steering column shaft notch in the 12 o'clock position and connect the intermediate shaft to the steering column. 3. Install a new Upper intermediate shaft pinch bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 8. Seat the intermediate shaft seal into the body panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42578Steering Wheel Puller Legs - J 1859-A Steering Wheel Puller Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If equipped with cruise control, disconnect the cruise control switch connector from the steering column. 4. Remove the steering wheel nut. 5. Remove the steering wheel. It may be necessary to use the J 42578 and J 1859-A or equivalent to remove the steering wheel. Installation Procedure 1. Align the steering wheel to the steering column and install the steering wheel. 2. Notice: Install the steering wheel nut. Tighten the steering wheel nut to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. If equipped with cruise control, connect the cruise control switch connector. 4. Install the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 5. Enable the SIR system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair Tie Rod Boot: Service and Repair Rack and Pinion Boot Replacement - On Vehicle ^ Tools Required SA9164C Clamp Crimper Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire assembly. 3. Remove the outer tie rod. 4. Remove the jam nut. 5. Remove the spring from the boot, outer end. 6. Cut and remove the crimp clamp, inner end. Discard the clamp. 7. Unseat the boot from the steering gear and remove. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6997 8. Clean the inner tie rod and boot contact area of grease and debris. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The inner tie rod must be free of debris and moisture. The boot sealing areas must be clean and dry. Apply approximately 3/4 of the supplied grease packet into the small end of the boot cavity. Apply the remainder of the grease on the shaft where the small end of the boot meats the shaft. 2. Important: Ensure the large end of the boot is firmly seated in the gear housing groove. Install the boot with the large clamp loosely attached, not crimped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6998 3. Using the SA9164C , crimp the large clamp. 4. Important: Ensure the small end of the boot is firmly seated in the inner tie rod end groove. Install the spring clamp to the small end of the boot. 5. Install the jam nut approximately 174 mm (6.85 inch) from the boot clamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6999 6. Install the outer tie rod. 7. Install the tire assembly. 8. Check the front wheel alignment and align as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair Tie Rod End: Service and Repair The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB Bulletin No. #05-03-08-017 dated December 06, 2005. SUBJECT: Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod-to-Steering Knuckle Nut Torque Rack and Pinion Outer Tie Rod End Replacement ^ Tools Required J 44015 Tie Rod Installer - SA91100C Tie Rod Separator Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front tire assembly. 3. Important: Mark the location of the jam nut for installation. Loosen the tie rod inner jam nut. 4. Important: Hold the ball stud to prevent turning during removal of the nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7003 Remove the tie rod to knuckle nut. Discard the nut. 5. Notice: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. Use the SA91100C to separate the tie rod from the steering knuckle. 6. Remove the outer tie rod from the inner tie rod. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7004 1. Install the outer tie rod to the inner tie rod. 2. Connect the tie rod to the knuckle. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7005 Install a new tie rod retention nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Plus 90 degrees. 6. Install the front tire assembly. 7. Check the wheel alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Wear Limit ............................................................................................................................ .................................................. 3.18 mm (0.125 in) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7010 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7011 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Ball Joint Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower control arm. 2. Place the control arm in a vise or suitable holding device. 3. Remove the ball joint rivets using the following procedure. 1. Drill through the rivets using a 8 mm (5/16 inch) drill bit. 2. Enlarge the hole using a 12 mm (31/64 inch) drill bit. 3. Remove any remaining burs from the control arm. 4. Remove the ball joint from the control arm. Note the position of the ball joint for reassembly. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The control arm must be clean and free of debris. Install the ball joint to the control arm as previously noted. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Note: There are 2 different ball studs used on this vehicle. The ball stud type must be identified in order to use the correct torque value when tightening the ball stud nut. If the wrong torque is used, damage could occur to the ball stud. Important: ^ Only use hardware provided with the new ball joint. ^ The bolts must be installed with the bolt head on top of the ball joint. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7012 Install the ball joint to control arm bolts. ^ Lower Control Arm Ball Stud Nut (Ball Stud with Silver Cup on Bottom) - 60 N.m (44 lb-ft) ^ Lower Control Arm Ball Stud Nut (Ball Stud with Flat and Black Bottom) - 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 3. Install the lower control arm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 07-03-08-004 > Mar > 07 > Suspension - Front End Rattle Noise on Bumps Control Arm Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Rattle Noise on Bumps Bulletin No.: 07-03-08-004 Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Front of Vehicle While Driving Over Rough Road Surfaces (Replace Both Front Lower Control Arm Rear Bushings) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds (approximately 8-17 km/h (5-10 mph) over rough road surfaces. Correction Replace the right and left front lower control arm rear bushings. Refer to the Front Lower Control Arm Rear Bushing Replacement procedure in SI. The revised bushing will not only address the rattle noise but has been designed for enhanced comfort and road isolation. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 07-03-08-004 > Mar > 07 > Suspension - Front End Rattle Noise on Bumps Control Arm Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End Rattle Noise on Bumps Bulletin No.: 07-03-08-004 Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Front of Vehicle While Driving Over Rough Road Surfaces (Replace Both Front Lower Control Arm Rear Bushings) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise coming from the front of the vehicle while driving at slow speeds (approximately 8-17 km/h (5-10 mph) over rough road surfaces. Correction Replace the right and left front lower control arm rear bushings. Refer to the Front Lower Control Arm Rear Bushing Replacement procedure in SI. The revised bushing will not only address the rattle noise but has been designed for enhanced comfort and road isolation. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) ^ Tools Required J 44971 Control Arm Bushing Remover/Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the lower control arm. 4. Place the control arm in a vise or suitable holding device. 5. Use the J 44971 to press out the front control arm bushing. Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 44971 to press in the front control arm bushing. 2. Install the lower control arm. 3. Install the front tire and wheel assembly. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) > Page 7029 Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Rear) Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the lower control arm. 4. Remove the rear bushing nut. 5. Remove the rear bushing. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the rear bushing to the lower control arm. ^ Tighten the nut to 150 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the lower control arm. 3. Install the front tire and wheel assembly. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) > Page 7030 Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Bushing Replacement Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Bushing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45097 Rear Control Arm Bushing Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower control arm. 2. Using the J 45097 , remove the bushing in the direction of the arrow. 3. Install the push out socket against the bushing from the flanged side of the control arm. 4. Install the through bolt with the washer and bearing against the push out socket. 5. Install a backing socket against the control arm, opposite of the flange. 6. Install the stabilizer between the control arm ears. 7. Install flat washer and nut. 8. Important: Apply high pressure lube to the threads of the tool. Tighten the nut until the bushing is removed. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (Front) > Page 7031 1. Important: Apply high pressure lube to the threads of the tool. Install a new bushing from the opposite direction. 2. Using the J 45097, reverse the tool layout from the removal procedure. 3. Tighten the nut until the bushing is fully installed. 4. Install the lower control arm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member Bushing > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Cross-Member Bushing: Service and Repair Support Rear Drive Module Mounting Bushing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 44866 Support Bushing Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the production muffler and resonator as an assembly. 3. Remove the rear stabilizer shaft. 4. Remove the rear drive module bracket to support bolt and nut. Discard the nut. 5. Remove the rear drive module to rear drive module bolts and nuts. Discard the nuts. 6. Remove the rear drive module bracket from the vehicle. 7. Install the J 44866 to the support assembly in the following procedure. 1. Position the large part of the tool over the bushing flange and against the frame. 2. Install the bolt and washer. 3. Install the small part of the tool against the bushing. 4. Lube the threads of the J 44866 with extreme pressure (EP) lube. 5. Important: Ensure the small end of the tool is aligned with the bushing. Install the bearing, washer and nut. 6. Tighten the J 44866 in order to remove the bushing from the support assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member Bushing > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7036 1. Install the J 44866 to the support assembly in the following procedure. 1. Place the bolt washer and large portion of the J 44866 against the frame. 2. Position the bushing against the support assembly. Align the bushing with the slots in the rubber portion straight up and down. 3. Position the small part of the J 44866 against the bushing flange area. 4. Lube the threads of the J 44866 with EP lube. 5. Install the bearing, washer and nut. 6. Important: The bushing must be fully seated. Tighten the J 44866 in order to install the bushing into the support assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the rear drive module bracket to the rear drive module, using new nuts. ^ Tighten the drive module bracket to drive module bolts and nuts to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rear bracket to support bolt, using a new nut. ^ Tighten the drive module bracket to support assembly bolt and nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the rear stabilizer shaft. 5. install the production muffler and resonator as an assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Revised Tie Rod to Steering Knuckle Torque Front Steering Knuckle: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Revised Tie Rod to Steering Knuckle Torque Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-017 Date: December 06, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod-to-Steering Knuckle Nut Tightening Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Cobalt, Equinox 2005 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2005 Saturn ION, VUE This bulletin is being issued to revise the steering linkage outer tie rod-to-steering knuckle nut tightening specification in the Front Suspension sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. Revised Torque TSB # 05-03-08-017 Dated 12/06/2005 The information shown has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Rear Knuckle Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 4. Remove the upper control arm to knuckle bolt and nut. 5. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7043 6. Remove the toe link to knuckle bolt and nut. 7. Remove the trailing blade to knuckle bolts. 8. Remove the knuckle from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the knuckle to the lower control arm. Loosely install the bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7044 2. Install the knuckle to the upper control arm. Loosely install the bolt and nut. 3. Install the knuckle to the toe link. Loosely install the bolt and nut. 4. Install the knuckle to trailing blade. Loosely install the bolt and nut. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts and nuts in the following sequence: 1. Tighten the knuckle to lower control arm bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 2. Tighten the knuckle to upper control arm bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 3. Tighten the knuckle to toe link bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7045 4. Tighten the knuckle to trailing blade bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 7. Install the tire and wheel. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform a vehicle wheel alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7046 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB Bulletin No. #05-03-08-017 dated December 06, 2005. SUBJECT: Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod-to-Steering Knuckle Nut Torque Steering Knuckle Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43828 Ball Joint Remover - J 44015 Steering Linkage Installer - SA91100C Tie Rod Separator - SA9140E Torque Angle Gage Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the strut assembly. 4. Loosen the steering knuckle to strut bolts and nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7047 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint cotter pin. 7. Loosen the ball stud nut, until level with the top of the ball stud. 8. Using the J 43828 , separate the lower control arm from the steering knuckle. 9. Remove the lower control arm and nut from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7048 10. Remove the outer tie rod end to knuckle nut. 11. Using the SA91100C , separate the outer tie rod from the steering knuckle. 12. Remove the steering knuckle to strut bolts and nuts. Discard the bolts and nuts. 13. Remove the steering knuckle from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the steering knuckle to strut assembly. 2. Loosely install the strut to steering knuckle bolts and nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7049 3. Install the control arm ball stud into the steering knuckle. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Note: There are 2 different ball studs used on this vehicle. The ball stud type must be identified in order to use the correct torque value when tightening the ball stud nut. If the wrong torque is used, damage could occur to the ball stud. Important: ^ Only use hardware provided with the new ball joint. ^ The bolts must be installed with the bolt head on top of the ball joint. Install the ball joint to control arm bolts. ^ Lower Control Arm Ball Stud Nut (Ball Stud with Silver Cup on Bottom) - 60 N.m (44 lb-ft) ^ Lower Control Arm Ball Stud Nut (Ball Stud with Flat and Black Bottom) - 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 5. Tighten the strut to steering knuckle bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten the bolts and nuts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 6. Important: Do not loosen the castle nut for cotter pin installation. Tighten the castle nut enough to allow for cotter pin installation. 7. Important: The cotter pin must not contact the wheel speed sensor or drive axle. Install the cotter pin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7050 8. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 9. Connect the outer tie rod end to the steering knuckle. 10. Use the J 44015 to seat the ball stud taper to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 11. Remove the J 44015 . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear > Page 7051 12. Install a new tie rod retention nut. - Tighten the steering linkage outer tie rod-to-steering knuckle nut to 25 Nm (18 lb ft) Plus 90 degrees 13. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Connect the stabilizer link to the strut assembly. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 14. Install the tire and wheel. 15. Lower the vehicle. 16. Perform a wheel alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Rear Knuckle Bushing Replacement Deletion Rear Knuckle: Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Knuckle Bushing Replacement Deletion Bulletin No.: 05-03-09-003 Date: May 03, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Deletion of Knuckle Bushing Replacement Procedures Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This bulletin is being issued to advise technicians of the deletion of the Knuckle Bushing Replacement procedures in the Rear Suspension sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The following information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. The procedures for the replacement of the rear suspension knuckle bushings (upper and lower) have been deleted from SI. If the bushings wear out, you must replace the knuckle assembly. Refer to Knuckle Replacement (SI Document ID # 1402699). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle Alignment Link > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Knuckle Alignment Link: Service and Repair Toe Link Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the toe link to knuckle nut and bolt. 3. Remove the toe link to support nut and bolt. 4. Remove the toe link from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle Alignment Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7059 1. Install the toe link to the support assembly. 2. Important: ^ Install the bolt with the head towards the front of the vehicle. ^ Position the cam nut in same position as in the upper control arm. Install the toe link to support nut and bolt. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the toe link to the knuckle. ^ Tighten the bolt to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 4. Tighten the toe link to support bolt. Tighten the bolt to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the rear alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar clamp bolts. 3. Remove the insulators from the stabilizer bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the insulators the stabilizer bar. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the stabilizer bar clamp bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7065 Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Rear Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar clamp to cradle bolts. 3. Remove the stabilizer bar clamps and bushings from the stabilizer bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the stabilizer bar clamps and bushings to the stabilizer bar. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the stabilizer bar clamp to cradle bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-008B Date: November 11, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Groan/Hiss/Grind Noise While Turning Steering Wheel at Low Speeds OR Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Replace Necessary Components) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to VIN Breakpoints 56073267 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information to correct the front suspension noise concerns. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition The purpose of this bulletin is to address various front suspension noises. Some customers may comment on a groan, hiss or grind type noise while turning the steering wheel at low speeds or when the vehicle is stopped. Or, some customers may comment on a popping noise from the front suspension while driving over bumps. The type of noise will determine the corrective action to be taken. Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Noise While Turning at Low Speeds": 1. Install Chassis Ears (J 39570) to the following locations on the vehicle (refer to diagram): 1. Front Spring 2. Wheel-Well 3. Stabilizer Bar Link 2. Drive the vehicle, simulating parking lot maneuvers/turns, to determine the source of the noise. If the noise is heard most predominantly through: ^ the Front Spring, refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. ^ the Wheel-Well ,the noise is caused by a body creak and no repair is available at this time. A field product report should be submitted to document the concern. ^ the Stabilizer Shaft Link, refer to the Stabilizer Shaft Link in the "correction" section of this bulletin. Note, to confirm replacing the stabilizer link will correct the customer's concern, disconnect the links to verify the noise is eliminated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 7074 Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Popping Noise From Suspension While Driving Over Bumps". 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events and the technician should refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. 5. To confirm the noise source, hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 6. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram and repeat steps 1 - 4. Correction Important: Repair only the affected side. Strut Replacement: Replace the strut assembly. Important: The complete strut assembly part number has been revised from bulletin 04-03-08-008. Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement: Replace the front stabilizer link. Part Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 7075 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-012A Date: January 04, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Refer to Bulletin # 04-03-08-008A) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being replaced by Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-012 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may notice a "popping" noise while driving over bumps. The popping noise typically occurs over a sharp bump or a large road swell that could unload the front suspension. Cause To verify this bulletin pertains to the customer's concern, try to reproduce the concern using the following procedure: Replication Procedure: 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. 5. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events. 6. If no noise is heard, continue to diagnose the customer's concern using the diagnostic information found in SI. Engineering has determined that the noise comes from "rubbing contact" between the lower spring seat and the front suspension spring. To confirm the noise source, do the following steps: Confirmation Procedure 1. Hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 2. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram. Repeat the "replication" procedure to confirm the isolator prevented the noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps > Page 7080 Correction Refer to bulletin 04-03-08-008A for repair procedure. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-008B Date: November 11, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Groan/Hiss/Grind Noise While Turning Steering Wheel at Low Speeds OR Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Replace Necessary Components) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to VIN Breakpoints 56073267 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information to correct the front suspension noise concerns. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition The purpose of this bulletin is to address various front suspension noises. Some customers may comment on a groan, hiss or grind type noise while turning the steering wheel at low speeds or when the vehicle is stopped. Or, some customers may comment on a popping noise from the front suspension while driving over bumps. The type of noise will determine the corrective action to be taken. Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Noise While Turning at Low Speeds": 1. Install Chassis Ears (J 39570) to the following locations on the vehicle (refer to diagram): 1. Front Spring 2. Wheel-Well 3. Stabilizer Bar Link 2. Drive the vehicle, simulating parking lot maneuvers/turns, to determine the source of the noise. If the noise is heard most predominantly through: ^ the Front Spring, refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. ^ the Wheel-Well ,the noise is caused by a body creak and no repair is available at this time. A field product report should be submitted to document the concern. ^ the Stabilizer Shaft Link, refer to the Stabilizer Shaft Link in the "correction" section of this bulletin. Note, to confirm replacing the stabilizer link will correct the customer's concern, disconnect the links to verify the noise is eliminated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 7086 Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Popping Noise From Suspension While Driving Over Bumps". 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events and the technician should refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. 5. To confirm the noise source, hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 6. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram and repeat steps 1 - 4. Correction Important: Repair only the affected side. Strut Replacement: Replace the strut assembly. Important: The complete strut assembly part number has been revised from bulletin 04-03-08-008. Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement: Replace the front stabilizer link. Part Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 7087 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-012A Date: January 04, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Refer to Bulletin # 04-03-08-008A) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being replaced by Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-012 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may notice a "popping" noise while driving over bumps. The popping noise typically occurs over a sharp bump or a large road swell that could unload the front suspension. Cause To verify this bulletin pertains to the customer's concern, try to reproduce the concern using the following procedure: Replication Procedure: 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. 5. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events. 6. If no noise is heard, continue to diagnose the customer's concern using the diagnostic information found in SI. Engineering has determined that the noise comes from "rubbing contact" between the lower spring seat and the front suspension spring. To confirm the noise source, do the following steps: Confirmation Procedure 1. Hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 2. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram. Repeat the "replication" procedure to confirm the isolator prevented the noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps > Page 7092 Correction Refer to bulletin 04-03-08-008A for repair procedure. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. Remove the stabilizer link to strut nut. 4. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. 5. Remove the stabilizer link. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7095 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Connect the stabilizer link to the strut. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 2. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Connect the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the tire and wheel. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7096 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Loosen the stabilizer bar clamp bolts. 3. Important: Hold the ball shaft secure with a TORX® bit, when removing the nut. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7097 4. Important: When disconnecting the stabilizer link, hold the link with a wrench to prevent turning. Remove the stabilizer link to control arm nut. 5. Remove the stabilizer link from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the stabilizer link through the control arm. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When connecting the stabilizer link, hold the link with a wrench to prevent turning. Install the stabilizer link to control arm nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7098 3. Important: Hold the ball shaft secure with a TORX® bit, when installing the nut. Install the stabilizer link to stabilizer bar nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the stabilizer bar clamp bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Front Strut / Shock Tower: Customer Interest Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7108 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7109 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7110 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7111 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7112 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Front Strut / Shock Tower: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7118 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7119 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7120 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7121 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 7122 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7123 Front Strut / Shock Tower: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-08-57-001A Date: 081008 Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7124 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7125 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7126 Condition 6 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7127 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7128 Parts Information Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-08-57-001A Date: 081008 Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7129 Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7130 Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7131 Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7132 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 7133 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe: Service and Repair Frame Replacement (LNJ) Tools Required * J 43828 Ball Joint Remover * SA9140E Torque Angle Gage Removal Procedure 1. Secure the radiator to the upper radiator support. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in General Information. 3. Remove the front wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Tires and wheels. 4. Remove the side splash shield-to-frame fasteners. 5. Remove the front air dam-to-frame fasteners. 6. Remove the rear transaxle mount-to-frame bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7138 7. Remove the front transaxle mount through bolt. 8. Remove the steering gear-to-frame bolts. 9. Using mechanics wire, secure the steering gear to the exhaust. 10. Remove the stabilizer shaft clamp-to-frame bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7139 11. Remove the lower ball joint cotter pins. Discard the cotter pins. 12. Loosen the lower ball joint castle nut until the nut is level with the top of the ball stud. Notice: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 13. Using the J 43828 , separate the lower control arm from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7140 14. Remove the frame-to-body bolts. Discard the bolts. 15. Carefully lower the frame from the vehicle. 16. Remove the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement in Front Suspension. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement in Front Suspension. 2. Raise the frame to the body. Important: Do not tighten the fasteners at this time. 3. Loosely install new frame-to-body bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7141 4. Connect the ball joint stud to the steering knuckle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Using the SA9140E , install the ball stud castle nut. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in) + 180 degrees. Important: * Do not loosen the castle nut in order to align the cotter pin slots. * Ensure the cutter pin ends do not contact the wheel speed sensor harness. 6. Continue to tighten the castle nut to align the slots with the opening in the ball stud and install the ball stud cotter pin. 7. Remove the mechanics wire and install the steering gear to the frame. Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7142 8. Install the front transaxle mount through bolt. Tighten the bolt to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 9. Install the rear transaxle mount-to-frame bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 10. Install the stabilizer shaft clamp. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 11. Tighten the frame-to-body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 155 N.m (114 lb ft). 12. Install the front air dam fasteners. 13. Install the side splash shield-to-frame fasteners. 14. Install the front wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Tires and Wheels. 15. Lower the vehicle. 16. Unsecure the radiator from the upper radiator support. 17. Align the front suspension. Refer to Front Toe Adjustment . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Strut, Strut Component and/or Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42991 Strut Rod Nut Socket - J 45400 Strut Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Install the strut assembly in the J 45400 using the following procedure. 1. Adjust the lower legs of the J 45400 to the lowest possible coil of the spring. 2. Adjust the upper legs of the J 45400 to the highest possible coil of the spring. 3. Inspect the strut assembly to insure hooks on the strut compress legs are properly installed on the spring coils. 4. Verify the strut assembly is parallel with the J 45400 . 2. Compress the spring enough to unload the upper strut mount. 3. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to remove the strut shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7147 4. Important: Leave the spring in the spring compressor. Lower the strut from the spring assembly. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Remove the upper mount assembly, inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 6. Remove the strut dust shield and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 7. Remove the hollow bumper from the strut shaft and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 8. Inspect the spring for damage. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7148 1. Extend the strut to its limit of travel. 2. Install the hollow bumper and dust boot to the strut shaft. 3. Important: The tag identifying the spring will be closer to the bottom of the spring. The end of the cold sits up against the tab on the spring seat. With the spring in the compressor, install the strut into the spring. 4. Important: The anti-rotation tab on the spring seat must face 180 degrees from the direction that the knuckle bracket points. Assemble the upper spring seat onto the strut shaft and align the flat with the strut to knuckle mounting bracket. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Important: The flat on the metal plate of the top mount assembly must face the same direction of the anti-rotation tab on the spring seat. Assemble the top mount onto the strut shaft and align the flat 180 degrees from flat on the upper spring seat. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7149 6. Loosely install the strut shaft nut. 7. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the strut shaft and use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to tighten the shaft while verifying that the upper spring seat flats align with the top mount. ^ Tighten the strut shaft to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 8. Release the tension on the J 45400 . 9. Remove the strut assembly from the J 45400 . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7150 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Coil Spring Replacement Coil Spring Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting Vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Important: Hold the link with a wrench during nut removal. Remove the stabilizer link to lower control arm nut. 4. Remove the trailing arm bracket to underbody bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7151 5. Place a screw-type jackstand under the lower control arm. 6. Using the jackstand, compress the coil spring. 7. Remove the lower shock bolt. 8. Loosen the lower control arm to support frame bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7152 9. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle nut and bolt. 10. Lower the control arm in order to unload the coil spring. 11. Remove the coil spring. Installation Procedure 1. Fully seat the top and bottom coil spring insulators to the spring. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7153 2. Important: ^ Spray silicon lubricant on the insulators to aid in installation. ^ Ensure that part number identification tape located on the coil spring is oriented outboard of the vehicle and at the top of the spring. Position the spring with the rubber insulators into the vehicle. 3. Use a screw-type jackstand to compress the spring. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the knuckle to the lower control arm. ^ Tighten the lower control arm to knuckle bolt to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 5. Tighten the lower control arm to support nut and bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7154 6. Install the shock to the lower control arm. ^ Tighten the lower shock bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the jackstand. 8. Important: Hold the link with a wrench during nut installation. Install the stabilizer link to the lower control arm. ^ Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 9. Push the trailing arm upward to align the front bracket to body bolt. 10. Use a drift to aid in bracket alignment and install the remaining bolts. ^ Tighten the bracket to body bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7155 11. Install the tire and wheel. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Check the rear alignment. Coil Spring Insulators Replacement Coil Spring Insulators Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the coil spring. 2. Remove the rubber insulators from the coil spring. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rubber insulators to the coil spring. 2. Install the coil spring. Spring Jounce Bumper Replacement Spring Jounce Bumper Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7156 2. Remove the jounce bumper nut at the lower control arm. 3. Remove the coil spring. 4. Remove the jounce bumper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the jounce bumper to the lower control arm. 2. Hand tighten the jounce bumper nut. 3. Install the coil Spring. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7157 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the jounce bumper to lower control arm nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the rear alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-008B Date: November 11, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Groan/Hiss/Grind Noise While Turning Steering Wheel at Low Speeds OR Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Replace Necessary Components) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to VIN Breakpoints 56073267 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information to correct the front suspension noise concerns. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition The purpose of this bulletin is to address various front suspension noises. Some customers may comment on a groan, hiss or grind type noise while turning the steering wheel at low speeds or when the vehicle is stopped. Or, some customers may comment on a popping noise from the front suspension while driving over bumps. The type of noise will determine the corrective action to be taken. Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Noise While Turning at Low Speeds": 1. Install Chassis Ears (J 39570) to the following locations on the vehicle (refer to diagram): 1. Front Spring 2. Wheel-Well 3. Stabilizer Bar Link 2. Drive the vehicle, simulating parking lot maneuvers/turns, to determine the source of the noise. If the noise is heard most predominantly through: ^ the Front Spring, refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. ^ the Wheel-Well ,the noise is caused by a body creak and no repair is available at this time. A field product report should be submitted to document the concern. ^ the Stabilizer Shaft Link, refer to the Stabilizer Shaft Link in the "correction" section of this bulletin. Note, to confirm replacing the stabilizer link will correct the customer's concern, disconnect the links to verify the noise is eliminated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 7166 Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Popping Noise From Suspension While Driving Over Bumps". 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events and the technician should refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. 5. To confirm the noise source, hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 6. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram and repeat steps 1 - 4. Correction Important: Repair only the affected side. Strut Replacement: Replace the strut assembly. Important: The complete strut assembly part number has been revised from bulletin 04-03-08-008. Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement: Replace the front stabilizer link. Part Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 7167 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-012A Date: January 04, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Refer to Bulletin # 04-03-08-008A) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being replaced by Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-012 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may notice a "popping" noise while driving over bumps. The popping noise typically occurs over a sharp bump or a large road swell that could unload the front suspension. Cause To verify this bulletin pertains to the customer's concern, try to reproduce the concern using the following procedure: Replication Procedure: 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. 5. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events. 6. If no noise is heard, continue to diagnose the customer's concern using the diagnostic information found in SI. Engineering has determined that the noise comes from "rubbing contact" between the lower spring seat and the front suspension spring. To confirm the noise source, do the following steps: Confirmation Procedure 1. Hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 2. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram. Repeat the "replication" procedure to confirm the isolator prevented the noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps > Page 7172 Correction Refer to bulletin 04-03-08-008A for repair procedure. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 7178 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-008B Date: November 11, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Groan/Hiss/Grind Noise While Turning Steering Wheel at Low Speeds OR Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Replace Necessary Components) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to VIN Breakpoints 56073267 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information to correct the front suspension noise concerns. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition The purpose of this bulletin is to address various front suspension noises. Some customers may comment on a groan, hiss or grind type noise while turning the steering wheel at low speeds or when the vehicle is stopped. Or, some customers may comment on a popping noise from the front suspension while driving over bumps. The type of noise will determine the corrective action to be taken. Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Noise While Turning at Low Speeds": 1. Install Chassis Ears (J 39570) to the following locations on the vehicle (refer to diagram): 1. Front Spring 2. Wheel-Well 3. Stabilizer Bar Link 2. Drive the vehicle, simulating parking lot maneuvers/turns, to determine the source of the noise. If the noise is heard most predominantly through: ^ the Front Spring, refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. ^ the Wheel-Well ,the noise is caused by a body creak and no repair is available at this time. A field product report should be submitted to document the concern. ^ the Stabilizer Shaft Link, refer to the Stabilizer Shaft Link in the "correction" section of this bulletin. Note, to confirm replacing the stabilizer link will correct the customer's concern, disconnect the links to verify the noise is eliminated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 7183 Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Popping Noise From Suspension While Driving Over Bumps". 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events and the technician should refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. 5. To confirm the noise source, hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 6. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram and repeat steps 1 - 4. Correction Important: Repair only the affected side. Strut Replacement: Replace the strut assembly. Important: The complete strut assembly part number has been revised from bulletin 04-03-08-008. Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement: Replace the front stabilizer link. Part Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 7184 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-012A Date: January 04, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Refer to Bulletin # 04-03-08-008A) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being replaced by Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-012 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may notice a "popping" noise while driving over bumps. The popping noise typically occurs over a sharp bump or a large road swell that could unload the front suspension. Cause To verify this bulletin pertains to the customer's concern, try to reproduce the concern using the following procedure: Replication Procedure: 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. 5. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events. 6. If no noise is heard, continue to diagnose the customer's concern using the diagnostic information found in SI. Engineering has determined that the noise comes from "rubbing contact" between the lower spring seat and the front suspension spring. To confirm the noise source, do the following steps: Confirmation Procedure 1. Hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 2. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram. Repeat the "replication" procedure to confirm the isolator prevented the noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps > Page 7189 Correction Refer to bulletin 04-03-08-008A for repair procedure. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 7195 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber - Replacement Shock Absorber Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting 2. Remove the lower shock bolt. 3. For right side only, remove splash shield. 4. Remove the upper shock bolt. 5. Remove the shock from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the shock to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7198 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the upper shock bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 3. For right side only, install splash shield 4. Install the lower shock bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7199 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber - Disposal Shock Absorber Disposal Caution: Gas charged shock absorbers contain high pressure gas. Do not remove the snap ring from inside the top of the tube. If the snap ring is removed, the contents of the shock absorber will come out with extreme force which may result in personal injury. Caution: To prevent personal injury, wear safety glasses when centerpunching and drilling the shock absorber. Use care not to puncture the shock absorber tube with the centerpunch. 1. Make an indentation 10 mm (0.4 inch) from the bottom (4) of the tube (3) using a centerpunch. 2. Clamp the shock absorber in a vise horizontally with the shock absorber rod (1) completely extended. 3. Drill a hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (4) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 4. Make an indentation in the middle (2) of the tube (3) with a centerpunch. 5. Drill a second hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (2) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Oil will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 6. Remove the shock absorber from the vise. Hold the shock absorber over a drain pan horizontally with the holes down. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (3) to completely drain the oil from the shock absorber. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7200 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Strut Assembly - Replacement Strut Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the strut assembly to body fasteners. 3. Remove the wheel and tire. 4. Remove the brake hose bracket from the strut assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7201 5. Loosen, do not remove the strut to knuckle bolts and nuts. 6. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the strut assembly. 7. Remove the strut to knuckle bolts and nuts. Discard the bolts and nuts. 8. Remove the strut assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7202 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the strut assembly to the vehicle. ^ Tighten the strut to body bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Attach the strut to the steering knuckle using new bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten the bolts and nuts to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 3. Inspect the stabilizer link seals for damage and replace the link as necessary. 4. Important: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7203 Connect the stabilizer link to the strut. ^ Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the brake hose bracket to the strut assembly. ^ Tighten the brake bracket bolt to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the wheel and tire. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Perform a wheel alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7204 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Strut, Strut Component and/or Spring Replacement Strut, Strut Component and/or Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42991 Strut Rod Nut Socket - J 45400 Strut Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Install the strut assembly in the J 45400 using the following procedure. 1. Adjust the lower legs of the J 45400 to the lowest possible coil of the spring. 2. Adjust the upper legs of the J 45400 to the highest possible coil of the spring. 3. Inspect the strut assembly to insure hooks on the strut compress legs are properly installed on the spring coils. 4. Verify the strut assembly is parallel with the J 45400 . 2. Compress the spring enough to unload the upper strut mount. 3. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to remove the strut shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7205 4. Important: Leave the spring in the spring compressor. Lower the strut from the spring assembly. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Remove the upper mount assembly, inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 6. Remove the strut dust shield and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 7. Remove the hollow bumper from the strut shaft and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 8. Inspect the spring for damage. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7206 1. Extend the strut to its limit of travel. 2. Install the hollow bumper and dust boot to the strut shaft. 3. Important: The tag identifying the spring will be closer to the bottom of the spring. The end of the cold sits up against the tab on the spring seat. With the spring in the compressor, install the strut into the spring. 4. Important: The anti-rotation tab on the spring seat must face 180 degrees from the direction that the knuckle bracket points. Assemble the upper spring seat onto the strut shaft and align the flat with the strut to knuckle mounting bracket. 5. Notice: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Important: The flat on the metal plate of the top mount assembly must face the same direction of the anti-rotation tab on the spring seat. Assemble the top mount onto the strut shaft and align the flat 180 degrees from flat on the upper spring seat. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7207 6. Loosely install the strut shaft nut. 7. Notice: Do not allow the front strut stud to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the strut stud from rotating. If air tools are used, and the stud is allowed to rotate, damage to the strut may occur. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Hold the strut shaft and use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to tighten the shaft while verifying that the upper spring seat flats align with the top mount. ^ Tighten the strut shaft to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 8. Release the tension on the J 45400 . 9. Remove the strut assembly from the J 45400 . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shock Absorber - Replacement > Page 7208 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Suspension Strut - Disposal Suspension Strut Disposal Caution: Use the proper eye protection when drilling to prevent metal chips from causing physical injury. 1. Clamp the strut in a vise horizontally with the rod (1) completely extended. 2. Drill a hole in the strut at the center of the end cap (3) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the strut. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 3. Remove the strut from the vise. 4. Hold the strut over a drain pan vertically with the hole down. 5. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (2) to completely drain the oil from the strut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Spring Jounce Bumper Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the jounce bumper nut at the lower control arm. 3. Remove the coil spring. 4. Remove the jounce bumper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the jounce bumper to the lower control arm. 2. Hand tighten the jounce bumper nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7212 3. Install the coil Spring. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the jounce bumper to lower control arm nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the rear alignment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Replacement Trailing Arm Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the trailing arm bracket to body bolts. 3. Remove the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. 4. Remove the park brake cable clip from the trailing arm. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 7217 5. Remove the trailing arm to knuckle bolts. 6. Remove the trailing arm. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the trailing arm to the knuckle. ^ Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 2. Position the trailing arm bracket to the trailing arm. 3. Loosely install the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 7218 4. Push upward on the trailing arm and loosely install the front bolt. 5. Use a drift to align the remaining bolts. ^ Tighten the trailing arm bracket to body bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the park brake cable clip. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 7219 Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the park brake clip from the trailing arm. 3. Remove the bracket to underbody bolts. 4. Remove the trailing arm to bracket nut and bolt. 5. Remove the bracket. Installation Procedure 1. Install the bracket to the trailing arm. 2. Loosely install the trailing arm bracket nut and bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 7220 3. Push the trailing arm upward to align the front bracket to body bolt. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Use a drift to aid in bracket alignment and install the remaining bolts. ^ Tighten the bracket to body bolts to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the parking brake cable clip to the trailing arm. ^ Tighten the bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten the bracket to trailing arm bushing bolt. ^ Tighten the nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7226 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7227 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7228 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7229 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. On vehicles with all-wheel drive, remove the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7230 4. Important: Do not damage the wheel drive shaft joint seal. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the suspension knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7231 3. On all-wheel drive vehicles, install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped, route the wheel speed sensor electrical harness through the backing plate and seat the grommet. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the rear brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Install the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. Tighten the nut to ......................................................... ........................................................................................................................ 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points Vehicle Lifting: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points Bulletin No.: 05-00-89-027 Date: April 28, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Information Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This bulletin is being issued to revise the Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle information in the General Information sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The following information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Note: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: ^ Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. ^ The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. ^ The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. ^ Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Revised Lifting and Jacking Points > Page 7241 ^ Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points shown. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7242 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB 05-00-89-027. LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7243 vehicle with a jack. Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Vehicle Lifting - Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approxately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Jacking Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 7258 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 7272 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spare Tire: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Spare Tire: Customer Interest Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Bulletin No.: 06-08-66-005A Date: September 13, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Rear of Vehicle (Replace Spare Tire Well) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information under Correction and Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-66-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise in the rear of the vehicle over rough roads. Correction Raise the vehicle. Inspect the sheet metal above the muffler for a sheet metal crack in the spare tire well. This crack will run left to right, just under the spare tire hold down bracket. Do not attempt to repair or reinforce the floor area around the spare tire hold-down bracket. It is recommended that the entire Panel, Spare Tire Well be replaced to maintain the integrity of the spare tire hold-down bracket Procedure Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear fascia, energy absorber, and impact bar. Remove the trailer hitch if equipped. Remove the exhaust. Open the rear hatch and remove the spare tire cover and cargo net. Remove the rear sill plate. Remove the rear seat. Remove the right and left door sill plate. Remove the right and left rear quarter trim. Remove the rear speakers. Pull the rear carpet forward. Move the rear harness. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the spare tire well area. Locate and drill out all the factory welds that attach the spare tire well. Note the number and location of the welds for the installation of the new part. Remove the damaged part. Drill out the welds around the perimeter of the spare tire well. Fit the new tire well in the vehicle. Mark the location of the welds. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spare Tire: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 7282 Remove the panel and drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in all the marked locations on the new panel. Apply weld-thru coating to all mating surfaces. Position the new panel in the vehicle. Plug weld accordingly. Clean and prepare all welding surfaces. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials as necessary per the GM 4901M-D-2006 Approved Refinish Materials online at: Go to www.gmgoodwrench.com. Click on GM Parts & Accessories link. Click on GM Technical Repair Information. Click on Paint Shop. Refinish the inside using materials compliant to GM4901M standards. Clean the back side of the repair and apply an epoxy undercoat per GM4901-D-2006. Reinstall the rear harness. Reinstall the rear carpet forward. Reinstall the rear speakers. Reinstall the right and left rear quarter trim. Reinstall the right and left door sill plate. Reinstall the rear seat. Reinstall the rear sill plate. Reinstall the spare tire cover and cargo net. Reinstall the exhaust. Reinstall the trailer hitch if equipped. Reinstall the rear fascia. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spare Tire: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 7283 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spare Tire: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Spare Tire: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Bulletin No.: 06-08-66-005A Date: September 13, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Rear of Vehicle (Replace Spare Tire Well) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information under Correction and Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-66-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise in the rear of the vehicle over rough roads. Correction Raise the vehicle. Inspect the sheet metal above the muffler for a sheet metal crack in the spare tire well. This crack will run left to right, just under the spare tire hold down bracket. Do not attempt to repair or reinforce the floor area around the spare tire hold-down bracket. It is recommended that the entire Panel, Spare Tire Well be replaced to maintain the integrity of the spare tire hold-down bracket Procedure Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear fascia, energy absorber, and impact bar. Remove the trailer hitch if equipped. Remove the exhaust. Open the rear hatch and remove the spare tire cover and cargo net. Remove the rear sill plate. Remove the rear seat. Remove the right and left door sill plate. Remove the right and left rear quarter trim. Remove the rear speakers. Pull the rear carpet forward. Move the rear harness. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the spare tire well area. Locate and drill out all the factory welds that attach the spare tire well. Note the number and location of the welds for the installation of the new part. Remove the damaged part. Drill out the welds around the perimeter of the spare tire well. Fit the new tire well in the vehicle. Mark the location of the welds. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spare Tire: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 7289 Remove the panel and drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in all the marked locations on the new panel. Apply weld-thru coating to all mating surfaces. Position the new panel in the vehicle. Plug weld accordingly. Clean and prepare all welding surfaces. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials as necessary per the GM 4901M-D-2006 Approved Refinish Materials online at: Go to www.gmgoodwrench.com. Click on GM Parts & Accessories link. Click on GM Technical Repair Information. Click on Paint Shop. Refinish the inside using materials compliant to GM4901M standards. Clean the back side of the repair and apply an epoxy undercoat per GM4901-D-2006. Reinstall the rear harness. Reinstall the rear carpet forward. Reinstall the rear speakers. Reinstall the right and left rear quarter trim. Reinstall the right and left door sill plate. Reinstall the rear seat. Reinstall the rear sill plate. Reinstall the spare tire cover and cargo net. Reinstall the exhaust. Reinstall the trailer hitch if equipped. Reinstall the rear fascia. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spare Tire: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 7290 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 7299 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 7300 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 7301 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 7306 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 7311 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 7312 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 7313 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 7319 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 7320 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 7321 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 7326 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 7331 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 7332 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 7337 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 7338 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 7339 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 7344 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 7349 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 7350 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 7351 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 7361 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 7362 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 7363 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 7368 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 7373 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 7374 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7379 Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel exhibits excessive runout ^ The wheel is bent ^ The wheel is cracked ^ The wheel is severely rusted ^ The wheel is severely corroded ^ Important: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. The wheel leaks air Caution: If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new Saturn original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-Saturn original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Notice: The use of non-Saturn original equipment wheels may cause: ^ Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel ^ Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components ^ Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius ^ Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance ^ Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel has elongated bolt holes. ^ The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Steel Wheel Repair Description Notice: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Notice: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front brake rotor. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7385 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector form the connector bracket. 4. Remove the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 5. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire or equivalent. 6. Remove and discard the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7386 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7387 4. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the mounting bracket, if equipped. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the front brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7388 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. On vehicles with all-wheel drive, remove the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7389 4. Important: Do not damage the wheel drive shaft joint seal. Support the wheel drive shaft with heavy mechanic's wire, or equivalent. 5. Remove the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the suspension knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the wheel bearing/hub mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Bearing/Hub Replacement - Front > Page 7390 3. On all-wheel drive vehicles, install the wheel drive shaft spindle nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. If equipped, route the wheel speed sensor electrical harness through the backing plate and seat the grommet. 5. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the rear brake drum. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: Customer Interest Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 7399 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 7400 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-013B Date: March 29, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle/Click/Ticking Type Noise Coming From Wheel Cover (Install Wheel Cover Insulators) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Buick Terraza with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2006 Chevrolet HHR with 16 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Pontiac Montana SV6 with 17 Inch Wheel Cover 2005-2006 Saturn Relay with 17 Inch Wheel Cover Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-013A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle/click/ticking type noise coming from the front or rear wheels. This condition is most apparent while driving at low speeds (0-24 km/h (0-15 mph)) and is relative to wheel rotation. Cause This condition may be caused by hard contact between the inner edge of the wheel cover and the outer edge of the steel rim. This contact occurs when the delrin ring comes out of its channel and separates from the wheel cover. In most cases, the delrin ring will be completely gone. Correction If the delrin ring is missing, install insulators on the backside of all four wheel covers. Use the following service procedure listed below. Remove the wheel covers. Clean the back side of each wheel cover using a mild liquid detergent in a distilled or deionized water solution. Rinse each wheel cover with clean water. Dry each wheel cover using compressed air or a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 7406 Saturn Relay Shown, others Similar After the wheel covers are completely dry, each wheel cover should be wiped with isopropyl alcohol on a clean, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and apply Adhesion Promoter, P/N 12378462, or equivalent, at the insulator locations. Insulator location is at the center of each spoke in the groove. Place two insulators at the location where a divider prevents one from going in the center. Refer to the illustrations above. Peel the red non-stick backing off of the insulator. Carefully place the insulator onto the wheel cover so that the area under the lip is resting against the corner of the inside edge of the wheel cover lip. This should place the insulator flush with the outside edge of the wheel cover. Press down firmly on the insulator to ensure that the adhesive is bonding to the wheel cover. Place another insulator in the next location by repeating Steps 5 through 7. There should be an insulator at each spoke location with two being placed at Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 05-03-10-013B > Mar > 07 > Wheels Wheel Cover Clicking/Ticking Noises > Page 7407 the above specified location. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Install the front wheel drive shaft spindle nut. Tighten the nut to ......................................................... ........................................................................................................................ 205 Nm (151 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 05-03-10-014 > Oct > 05 > Wheels Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Wheel Fastener: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-014 Date: October 05, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE This bulletin is being issued to revise wheel nut torque in the Fastener Tightening Specifications in the Tires and Wheels sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The following information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. The revised wheel nut torque is 140 N.m (100 lb ft). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Wheel Fastener: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Bulletin No.: 01-03-10-009A Date: July 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Missing and/or Loose (Replace Missing Covers and Add Sealant to All Covers) Models: 2005 and All Prior Passenger Cars (Except All Cadillac Models and Pontiac GTO) with Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-03-10-009. Condition Some customers may comment that the plastic wheel nut covers are missing and/or loose. Correction Important: ^ DO NOT USE a silicone-based adhesive. ^ Do not apply the *permatex(R) around the threads in a circular pattern. ^ Apply a single bead across the threads approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) in length, 5 mm (0.2 in) in height and 5 mm (0.2 in) in width. Replace any missing plastic wheel nut covers with the appropriate covers and apply Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) to the threads of all the plastic wheel nut covers. Tighten finger tight plus a 1/4 turn with a hand wrench. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any other such items which may be available from other sources. Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) part numbers (available at your local parts supplier) ^ P/N 80009 (2A/2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80015 (2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80010 (2B/2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80016 (2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80011 (2C) - 325 ml (11 oz) tube boxed Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing > Page 7424 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Wheel Fastener: Customer Interest Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Bulletin No.: 01-03-10-009A Date: July 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Missing and/or Loose (Replace Missing Covers and Add Sealant to All Covers) Models: 2005 and All Prior Passenger Cars (Except All Cadillac Models and Pontiac GTO) with Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-03-10-009. Condition Some customers may comment that the plastic wheel nut covers are missing and/or loose. Correction Important: ^ DO NOT USE a silicone-based adhesive. ^ Do not apply the *permatex(R) around the threads in a circular pattern. ^ Apply a single bead across the threads approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) in length, 5 mm (0.2 in) in height and 5 mm (0.2 in) in width. Replace any missing plastic wheel nut covers with the appropriate covers and apply Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) to the threads of all the plastic wheel nut covers. Tighten finger tight plus a 1/4 turn with a hand wrench. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any other such items which may be available from other sources. Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) part numbers (available at your local parts supplier) ^ P/N 80009 (2A/2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80015 (2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80010 (2B/2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80016 (2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80011 (2C) - 325 ml (11 oz) tube boxed Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing > Page 7430 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 05-03-10-014 > Oct > 05 > Wheels Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Wheel Fastener: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-014 Date: October 05, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE This bulletin is being issued to revise wheel nut torque in the Fastener Tightening Specifications in the Tires and Wheels sub-section of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The following information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. The revised wheel nut torque is 140 N.m (100 lb ft). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7436 Wheel Fastener: Specifications The contents of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB 05-03-10-014 Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-014 Date: October 05, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Wheel Nut Torque Specification Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2002-2005 Saturn VUE The revised wheel nut torque is 140 Nm (100 lb ft). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7437 Wheel Nut Torque Sequence Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7438 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: ^ The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. ^ The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. ^ M = Metric ^ 12 = Diameter in millimeters ^ 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. 4. Using the J 43631 , press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7441 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7442 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Using the J 43631 , press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7443 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installed. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations HVAC Module Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Actuator - Defrost Mode Actuator - Defrost Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Actuator - Defrost > Page 7451 Mode Actuator - Floor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Actuator - Defrost > Page 7452 Mode Actuator - Panel Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Actuator - Defrost > Page 7453 Recirculation Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Actuator Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Defroster Actuator DEFROSTER ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the communication interface module, if equipped. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the defroster actuator. 3. Remove the defroster actuator screws from the HVAC module. 4. Remove the defroster actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the defroster actuator with the defroster door shaft and rotate into position. 2. Install the defroster actuator screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster actuator. 4. Install the communication interface module, if equipped. 5. Calibrate the mode actuators by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module 3 times each, within 2 seconds of initial push. The A/C and RECIRC button LED's will flash while this calibration is taking place. - The calibration will take anywhere between 10-30 seconds depending on battery voltage. - The LED's will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Actuator > Page 7456 6. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. IMPORTANT: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Actuator > Page 7457 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Floor Actuator FLOOR ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the floor actuator. 2. Remove the floor actuator screws from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the floor actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the floor actuator with the door shaft and rotate into position. 2. Install the floor actuator screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the floor actuator. 4. Calibrate the mode actuators by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module three times each, within two seconds of initial push. The A/C and RECIRC button LEDs will flash while this calibration is taking place. - The calibration will take anywhere between 10 to 30 seconds depending on battery voltage. - The LEDs will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. IMPORTANT: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Actuator > Page 7458 air distribution. 5. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Actuator > Page 7459 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Panel Actuator PANEL ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel compartment. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the panel actuator. 3. Remove the panel actuator screws from the HVAC module. 4. Remove the panel actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the panel actuator with the door shaft and rotate into position. 2. Install the panel actuator screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the panel actuator. 4. Calibrate the mode actuators by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module three times each, within two seconds of initial push. The A/C and RECIRC button LED's will flash while this calibration is taking place. - The calibration will take anywhere between 10 to 30 seconds depending on battery voltage. - The LEDs will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Actuator > Page 7460 IMPORTANT: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. 5. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. 6. Install the instrument panel compartment. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Actuator > Page 7461 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Recirculation Actuator RECIRCULATION ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the recirculation actuator. 2. Remove the recirculation actuator screws from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the recirculation actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the recirculation actuator with the door shaft and rotate into position. 2. Install the recirculation actuator screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the recirculation actuator. 4. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Adjustments Air Door Cable: Adjustments TEMPERATURE CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the temperature cable from the HVAC control module. 3. Center the HVAC module temperature door by aligning the cable lug of the temperature control cable with the center point of the detent spring. Detent spring force should hold the temperature door in the desired position. 4. Center the temperature cable knob by inserting the assembly alignment tab into the centering slot of the temperature knob shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 7465 5. Install the temperature cable to the HVAC control module by aligning the retention tabs and the temperature knob shaft and snapping into place. 6. Install the center trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 7466 Air Door Cable: Service and Repair TEMPERATURE CONTROL CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Disconnect the temperature cable from the HVAC control module. 3. Remove the instrument panel compartment. 4. Remove the temperature cable screw from the HVAC module. 5. Press the white tab (1) at the center of the cable housing (2) to release the cable from the temperature door shaft. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 7467 1. Position the cable housing (2) to the temperature door shaft and press to engage. 2. Install the temperature cable screw to the HVAC module. Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the instrument panel compartment. 4. Center the HVAC module temperature door by aligning the cable lug of the temperature control cable with the center point of the detent spring. The detent spring force should hold the temperature door in the desired position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 7468 5. Center the temperature cable knob by inserting the assembly alignment tab into the centering slot of the temperature knob shaft. 6. Install the temperature cable to the HVAC control module by aligning the retention tabs and the temperature knob shaft and snapping into place. 7. Install the center trim bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Air Duct: Service and Repair Center AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - CENTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel retainer. 2. Remove the center air outlet duct push pins from the cross car beam. 3. Remove the center air outlet duct from the cross car beam. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the center air outlet duct to the cross car beam. 3. Install the center air outlet duct push pins to the cross car beam. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7473 4. Install the instrument panel retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7474 Air Duct: Service and Repair Defogger Outlet Duct - Side Window, RH DEFOGGER OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - SIDE WINDOW, RH REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Remove the RH defogger duct screws from the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Remove the RH defogger duct from the I/P upper trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the RH defogger duct to the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Install the RH defogger duct screws to the I/P upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7475 Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7476 Air Duct: Service and Repair Defogger Outlet Duct - Side Window, LH DEFOGGER OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - SIDE WINDOW, LH REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Remove the LH defogger duct screws from the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Remove the LH defogger duct from the I/P upper trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the LH defogger duct to the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Install the LH defogger duct screws to the I/P upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7477 Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7478 Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Duct - Windshield DEFROSTER DUCT REPLACEMENT - WINDSHIELD REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel upper trim panel. 2. Remove the windshield defrost duct nuts from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the windshield defrost duct from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the windshield defrost duct seals. If damaged, replace using Kent Industries adhesive back foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the windshield defrost duct to the HVAC module. 3. Install the windshield defrost duct nuts to the HVAC module. Tighten the nuts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7479 Air Duct: Service and Repair Center AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - CENTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel retainer. 2. Remove the center air outlet duct push pins from the cross car beam. 3. Remove the center air outlet duct from the cross car beam. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the center air outlet duct to the cross car beam. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7480 3. Install the center air outlet duct push pins to the cross car beam. 4. Install the instrument panel retainer. Defogger Outlet Duct - Side Window, RH DEFOGGER OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - SIDE WINDOW, RH REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Remove the RH defogger duct screws from the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Remove the RH defogger duct from the I/P upper trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7481 2. Install the RH defogger duct to the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Install the RH defogger duct screws to the I/P upper trim panel. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Defogger Outlet Duct - Side Window, LH DEFOGGER OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - SIDE WINDOW, LH REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Remove the LH defogger duct screws from the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Remove the LH defogger duct from the I/P upper trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7482 2. Install the LH defogger duct to the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Install the LH defogger duct screws to the I/P upper trim panel. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Defroster Duct - Windshield DEFROSTER DUCT REPLACEMENT - WINDSHIELD REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel upper trim panel. 2. Remove the windshield defrost duct nuts from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the windshield defrost duct from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7483 1. Inspect the windshield defrost duct seals. If damaged, replace using Kent Industries adhesive back foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the windshield defrost duct to the HVAC module. 3. Install the windshield defrost duct nuts to the HVAC module. Tighten the nuts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Left AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) - UPPER LEFT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the LH I/P trim panel. 2. Remove the LH air outlet duct screws from the instrument panel retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7484 3. Remove the LH air outlet duct from the instrument panel retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the LH air outlet duct to the instrument panel retainer. 3. Install the LH air outlet duct screws to the instrument panel retainer. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7485 4. Install the LH I/P trim panel. Instrument Panel (I/P) - Upper Right AIR OUTLET DUCT REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) - UPPER RIGHT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the RH I/P trim panel. 2. Remove the RH air outlet duct screws from the instrument panel retainer. 3. Remove the RH air outlet duct from the instrument panel retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center > Page 7486 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the RH air outlet duct to the instrument panel retainer. 3. Install the RH air outlet duct screws to the instrument panel retainer. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 4. Install the RH I/P trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Floor Air Register: Service and Repair Center Floor AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - CENTER FLOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the shift control. 2. Slide the center floor air outlet duct forward enough to clear the rear floor air outlet duct, and then up, and rearward to remove. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the center floor air outlet duct forward enough to clear rear floor air duct, and then down, and rearward to install. 2. Install the shift control. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Floor > Page 7491 Air Register: Service and Repair Defroster AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - DEFROSTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Remove the defroster air outlet screws from the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Remove the defroster air outlet from the I/P upper trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seals, and replace if damaged, using Kent Industries adhesive backed foam tape P/N 46485 or equivalent. 2. Install the defroster air outlet to the I/P upper trim panel. 3. Install the defroster air outlet screws to the I/P upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Floor > Page 7492 Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the instrument panel upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Floor > Page 7493 Air Register: Service and Repair Floor AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - FLOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel retainer. 2. Remove the floor air outlet screws from the heater core cover. 3. Remove the floor air outlet from the heater core cover. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the floor air outlet to the heater core cover. 2. Install the floor air outlet screws to the heater core cover. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the instrument panel retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Floor > Page 7494 Air Register: Service and Repair Instrument Panel AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) upper trim panel. 2. Depress the locking tabs on the outlet. 3. Carefully slide the outlet out of the I/P trim and the surrounding outlet bezel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the outlet to the I/P trim panel. The outlet will snap into place. 2. Install the I/P upper trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Floor > Page 7495 Air Register: Service and Repair Rear Floor AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT - REAR FLOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seats. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Partially remove the floor carpet from the front footwells to the B-pillars. 4. Remove the rear floor air outlet push pins from the floor pan. 5. Remove the rear floor air outlet from the floor pan. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the rear floor air outlet to the floor pan. 2. Install the rear floor air outlet push pins to the floor pan. 3. Install the floor carpet to the B-pillars and the front footwells. 4. Install the floor console. 5. Install the front seats. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7501 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7502 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7503 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7504 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7505 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7506 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7507 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7508 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7509 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7510 Auxiliary Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7511 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7512 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7513 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7514 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7515 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7516 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7517 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7518 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7519 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7520 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7521 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7522 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7523 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7524 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7525 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7526 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7527 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7528 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7529 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7530 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7531 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7532 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7533 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7534 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7535 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7536 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7537 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7538 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7539 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7540 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7541 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7542 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7543 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7544 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7545 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7546 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7547 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7548 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7549 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7550 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7551 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7552 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7553 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7554 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7555 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7556 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7557 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7558 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7559 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7560 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7561 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7562 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7563 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7564 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7565 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7566 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7567 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7568 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7569 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7570 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7571 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7572 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7573 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7574 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7575 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7576 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7577 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Blower Motor Impeller > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Impeller: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR IMPELLER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the blower motor. 2. Remove the blower motor screws from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the blower motor from the HVAC module. 4. Remove the blower motor impeller retention clip (1) from the blower motor shaft (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Blower Motor Impeller > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7581 5. Remove the blower motor impeller (1) from the blower motor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the blower motor impeller (1) to the blower motor (2). 2. Install the blower motor impeller retention clip (1) to the blower motor shaft (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Blower Motor Impeller > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7582 3. Install the blower motor to the HVAC module. 4. Install the blower motor screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the blower motor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Resistor: Locations HVAC Module Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7586 Lower Right Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7587 Blower Motor Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7588 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the blower motor resistor. 2. Remove the blower motor resistor screws from the HVAC module. 3. Remove the blower motor resistor from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the blower motor resistor to the HVAC module. 2. Install the blower motor resistor screws to the HVAC module. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7589 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the blower motor resistor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the blower motor control knob by pulling rearward off shaft. 3. Press the blower motor switch retention prongs and remove the switch from the HVAC control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the blower motor switch to the HVAC control module. Press to engage the retention prongs. 2. Install the center trim bezel. 3. Install the blower motor control knob. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER The Passenger compartment air filter is located in the RH engine compartment, near base of windshield. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER HOUSING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the RH air inlet panel. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 7598 4. Remove the RH air inlet panel. 5. Remove the LH air inlet panel. 6. Remove the filter housing nuts from the vehicle. 7. Remove the filter housing from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 7599 1. Inspect the foam seal. If the seal is damaged, replace the seal using Kent Industries adhesive back foam tape P/N 46485 (or equivalent). 2. Install the filter housing to the vehicle. 3. Install the new seal nuts to the filter housing. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: New seal nuts must be used when installing passenger compartment air filter housing to prevent leaks. 4. Install the LH air inlet panel. 5. Install the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 7600 6. Install the push pins to the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. 7. Close the hood. 8. Install the push pins to the rear of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 7601 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the RH air inlet panel. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 7602 4. Remove the RH air inlet panel. 5. Remove the filter from the filter housing by depressing the release tab at the inboard edge of the filter housing. 6. Remove the filter from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 7603 1. Install the filter to the vehicle. 2. Install the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Passenger Compartment Air Filter Housing > Page 7604 3. Install the push pins to the top and forward edge of the RH air inlet panel. 4. Close the hood. 5. Install the push pins to the rear of the RH air inlet panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams A/C Compressor Clutch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7609 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair COMPRESSOR CLUTCH ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED - J 45267 Clutch Holding Tool - J 25031-A Three Jaw Puller - J 45504 Clutch Pulley Installer REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the compressor from the vehicle. 2. Use J 45267 to hold the disk and hub assembly. 3. Remove the nut retaining the disk and hub assembly to the compressor. 4. Remove the spacer from the pulley. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7610 5. Remove the snap ring from the pulley. 6. Using J 25031-A, remove the A/C Clutch Pulley from the compressor. 7. Remove the thermal switch from the compressor: 1. Remove the hold down bracket bolt. 2. Remove the hold down bracket. 3. Gently twist and pull the thermal protection switch from the compressor. Use a small screwdriver to gently pry the switch from the compressor. 8. Remove the field coil snap ring. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7611 9. Remove the A/C clutch field coil. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and the pulley mounting surfaces. 2. Install the A/C clutch field coil. 3. Install the field coil snap ring to the compressor. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the field coil snap ring is installed with the bevel side out. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7612 4. Install the thermal switch to the compressor: 1. Clean the thermal switch pocket if necessary. 2. Install the thermal switch sealant in switch pocket. 3. Install the thermal switch, pushing into place to wet out sealant. Remove any excess sealant. 4. Install the hold down bracket. 5. Install the hold down bracket bolt. Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Use J 45504 if necessary, to align the clutch bearing/pulley assembly over the hub and gently tap to install. IMPORTANT: The A/C clutch bearing and pulley is a slip fit on the compressor. If correctly aligned it should slip on easily. If difficulty is encountered, install using the pulley installer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7613 6. Install the snap ring to the pulley. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the pulley snap ring is installed with the bevel side out. 7. Install the spacer. 8. Align the disk/hub assembly with the shaft and install to the compressor. IMPORTANT: Be sure to align the block tooth on disk/hub assembly with groove in shaft. 9. Install the old clutch nut to the compressor. 10. Using a feeler gage, check the clearance between the disk/hub assembly and the pulley. Ensure the clearance is 0.35 mm to 0.75 mm (0.014 in to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7614 0.030 in). 11. If necessary, adjust the clearance by adding or subtracting clutch hub spacers. 12. Once the correct air gap is obtained, install new clutch nut. 13. Tighten the clutch nut. Tighten the nut to 26 N.m (19 lb ft). 14. Install the compressor to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair CONDENSER REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the front fascia. 3. Remove the battery box air duct. 4. Remove the condenser radiator fan module (CRFM) closeout panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7618 5. Remove the receiver dehydrator from the condenser. 6. Install a protective cap to the receiver dehydrator to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 7. Remove the compressor hose from the condenser. 8. Install a protective cap to the compressor hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7619 9. Remove the CRFM bracket bolts from the radiator support. 10. Remove the CRFM brackets from the vehicle. 11. Lift the condenser while holding the upper retention tabs forward. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7620 12. Remove the condenser from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Add the specified amount of PAG oil to the condenser. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. 2. Inspect the radiator to condenser seals for the proper position. 3. Install the condenser by guiding the tabs into the retention clips on the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7621 4. Press down on the condenser to engage the retention clips. 5. Install the CRFM brackets to the vehicle. 6. Install the CRFM bracket bolts to the radiator support. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7622 7. Remove the protective cap from the compressor hose. 8. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose. 9. Install the compressor hose to the condenser. 10. Install compressor hose nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 11. Install a new seal washer to the receiver dehydrator. 12. Install the receiver dehydrator to the condenser. 13. Install the receiver dehydrator nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7623 14. Install the CRFM closeout panel. 15. Install the battery box air duct. 16. Install the front fascia. 17. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 18. Test the affected A/C joints leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Assembly: > 04-01-38-006 > May > 04 > A/C - Does Not Cool Sufficently Control Assembly: Customer Interest A/C - Does Not Cool Sufficently Bulletin No.: 04-01-38-006 Date: May 04, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: A/C Not Sufficiently Cooling (Calibrate HVAC Module/Verify Connection of Mode Switch C1 Connector and Temperature Cable) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment that the A/C is not cooling sufficiently. Cause Engineering has determined that the HVAC control module may need to be calibrated. Correction DO NOT REPLACE ANY HVAC COMPONENTS OR ATTEMPT TO DIAGNOSE THE SYSTEM PRIOR TO ENSURING THE HVAC CONTROL MODULE HAS BEEN CALIBRATED. HVAC CONTROL MODULE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE: 1. With the ignition "ON" simultaneously press the "A/C" and "Recirc" buttons three times in a period of LESS than two seconds. 2. Verify that the "A/C" and "Recirc" LED's are flashing. Allow 15 seconds for the calibration to complete. 3. After the calibration is complete, press the "A/C" and "Recirc" buttons to verify the LED state changes. Important: If the LED state does not change, inspect the following: ^ Inspect for full engagement of the HVAC control module C1 connector. ^ Inspect the connection of the temperature cable. 1. Perform a system function test to confirm operation of the following functions: ^ Noticeable blower speed change should occur from speed settings 1 thru 4. ^ Press the "A/C" button. The temperature of the outlet air must drop and the A/C indicator must light. ^ Turn the temperature knob from cold to hot. An increase in temperature should be detected. ^ Press the "recirc" button and verify increase in blower noise and verify indicator lights. If the HVAC control module calibration procedure does not resolve the customer's concern, follow published diagnostics found in SI. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Assembly: > 04-01-38-006 > May > 04 > A/C - Does Not Cool Sufficently > Page 7632 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table shown. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-01-38-006 > May > 04 > A/C - Does Not Cool Sufficently Control Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Does Not Cool Sufficently Bulletin No.: 04-01-38-006 Date: May 04, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: A/C Not Sufficiently Cooling (Calibrate HVAC Module/Verify Connection of Mode Switch C1 Connector and Temperature Cable) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment that the A/C is not cooling sufficiently. Cause Engineering has determined that the HVAC control module may need to be calibrated. Correction DO NOT REPLACE ANY HVAC COMPONENTS OR ATTEMPT TO DIAGNOSE THE SYSTEM PRIOR TO ENSURING THE HVAC CONTROL MODULE HAS BEEN CALIBRATED. HVAC CONTROL MODULE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE: 1. With the ignition "ON" simultaneously press the "A/C" and "Recirc" buttons three times in a period of LESS than two seconds. 2. Verify that the "A/C" and "Recirc" LED's are flashing. Allow 15 seconds for the calibration to complete. 3. After the calibration is complete, press the "A/C" and "Recirc" buttons to verify the LED state changes. Important: If the LED state does not change, inspect the following: ^ Inspect for full engagement of the HVAC control module C1 connector. ^ Inspect the connection of the temperature cable. 1. Perform a system function test to confirm operation of the following functions: ^ Noticeable blower speed change should occur from speed settings 1 thru 4. ^ Press the "A/C" button. The temperature of the outlet air must drop and the A/C indicator must light. ^ Turn the temperature knob from cold to hot. An increase in temperature should be detected. ^ Press the "recirc" button and verify increase in blower noise and verify indicator lights. If the HVAC control module calibration procedure does not resolve the customer's concern, follow published diagnostics found in SI. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-01-38-006 > May > 04 > A/C - Does Not Cool Sufficently > Page 7638 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table shown. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7639 Control Assembly: Service and Repair HVAC CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center trim bezel from the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the temperature cable from the HVAC control module. 3. Disconnect the blower switch from the HVAC control module. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the HVAC control module. 5. Disconnect the remaining electrical connectors from the center trim bezel. 6. Remove the HVAC control module screws from the center trim bezel. 7. Remove the HVAC control module from the center trim bezel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7640 1. Install the HVAC control module to the center trim bezel. 2. Install the HVAC control module screws to the center trim bezel. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Center the temperature cable knob by inserting the assembly alignment tab into the centering slot of the temperature knob shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7641 4. Center the HVAC module temperature door by aligning the cable lug of the temperature control cable with the center point of the detent spring. The detent spring force should hold the temperature door in the desired position. 5. Connect the temperature cable to the HVAC control module. 6. Connect the blower switch to the HVAC control module. 7. Connect the electrical connector to the HVAC control module. 8. Connect the remaining electrical connectors to the center trim bezel. 9. Install the center trim bezel to the instrument panel. 10. Calibrate the mode doors by simultaneously pushing the A/C and RECIRC buttons on the HVAC control module 3 times each, within 2 seconds of initial push. The A/C and RECIRC button LED's will flash while this calibration is taking place. - The calibration will take anywhere between 10-30 seconds depending on battery voltage. - The LED's will quit flashing when the calibration is complete. IMPORTANT: Any time a mode actuator or the HVAC control module is replaced, the HVAC control module must be calibrated to ensure proper air distribution. 11. Cycle the ignition and verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7645 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7646 HVAC Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sealing Washer A/C Coupler O-ring: Service and Repair Sealing Washer SEALING WASHER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seal washer from the A/C refrigerant component. 2. Inspect the seal washer for signs of damage to help determine the root cause of the failure. IMPORTANT: Cap or tape the open A/C refrigerant components immediately to prevent system contamination. 3. Inspect the A/C refrigerant components for damage or burrs. Repair if necessary. 4. Discard the sealing washer. IMPORTANT: DO NOT reuse sealing washer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the new seal washer for any signs of cracks, cuts, or damage.Do not use a damaged seal washer. IMPORTANT: Flat washer type seals do not require lubrication. 2. Remove the cap or tape from the A/C refrigerant components. 3. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, clean the sealing surfaces of the A/C refrigerant components. 4. Carefully install the new seal washer onto the A/C refrigerant component.The washer must completely bottom against the surface of the fitting. 5. Assemble the remaining A/C refrigerant components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure. IMPORTANT: After tightening the A/C components, there should be a slight sealing washer gap of approximately 1.2 mm (3/64 in) between the A/C line and the A/C component Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sealing Washer > Page 7652 A/C Coupler O-ring: Service and Repair O-Ring O-RING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the A/C refrigerant components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure - For compression style fittings use a back up wrench on the fitting (2) and loosen the fitting nut (1). - For banjo style fittings remove the bolt retaining the banjo type fitting. 2. Remove the O-ring seal from the A/C refrigerant component. 3. Inspect the O-ring seal for signs of damage to help determine the root cause of the failure. 4. Inspect the A/C refrigerant components for damage or burrs. Repair if necessary. 5. Cap or tape the A/C refrigerant components. IMPORTANT: Cap or tape the open A/C refrigerant components immediately to prevent system contamination. 6. Discard the O-ring seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the new O-ring seal for any sign or cracks, cuts, or damage. Replace if necessary. 2. Remove the cap or tape from the A/C refrigerant components. 3. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, carefully clean the sealing surfaces of the A/C refrigerant components. 4. Lightly coat the new O-ring seal with mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil. IMPORTANT: DO NOT allow any of the mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil on the new O-ring seal to enter the refrigerant system. 5. Carefully slide the new O-ring seal onto the A/C refrigerant component. IMPORTANT: DO NOT reuse O-ring seals. 6. The O-ring seal must be fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sealing Washer > Page 7653 7. Assemble the A/C components.Refer to the appropriate repair procedure. - For compression style fittings use a back up wrench on the fitting (2) and tighten the fitting nut (1) to specification. - For banjo style fittings install the bolt retaining the banjo type fitting and tighten to specification. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 7662 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 7663 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 7669 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 7670 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 7676 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 7682 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > First Design Evaporator Core: Service and Repair First Design EVAPORATOR CORE REPLACEMENT (FIRST DESIGN) REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the thermal expansion valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV independently using nuts. 1. Remove the HVAC module. See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair 2. Remove the evaporator case assembly. 3. Remove the TXV bolts from the backing plate. 4. Remove the TXV and the backing plate from the evaporator pipes. 5. Remove the O-rings from evaporator pipes. 6. Install protective caps to the evaporator pipes to prevent system contamination. 7. Remove the HVAC module front of dash seal. 8. Remove the evaporator pipe cover screw from the blower case assembly. 9. Remove the evaporator pipe cover from the blower case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > First Design > Page 7685 10. Remove the evaporator core from the blower case assembly. Spraying the perimeter of the evaporator core seal with a soap and water mixture will ease removal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Add the proper of polyalkylene glycol (PAG) oil to the evaporator core. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. 2. Inspect the seal around the evaporator core. Make sure the seal is in correct position and retained properly. 3. Spray the seal with a soap and water mixture to ease the installation of evaporator core. 4. Install the evaporator core to the blower case assembly. 5. Install the evaporator pipe cover. 6. Install the evaporator pipe cover screw. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > First Design > Page 7686 Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Install the HVAC module front of dash seal. 8. Remove the protective caps from the evaporator pipes and ensure the seal areas are clean, dry and lint-free. 9. Install new O-rings to the evaporator pipes. IMPORTANT: Use only R-12 refrigerant oil (mineral) to lubricate O-rings. Use of R-134a PAG oil will cause premature corrosion of fitting joints. - Use only clean lint free cloths with non-petroleum based solvents to clean refrigerant system sealing surfaces. Allow solvent to dry with air. Do not allow solvents to enter refrigerant system. 10. Instal the TXV and the backing plate to the evaporator pipes. 11. Install the TXV screws to the backing plate. Tighten the screws to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 12. Install the evaporator case assembly. 13. Install the HVAC module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > First Design > Page 7687 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Second Design EVAPORATOR CORE REPLACEMENT (SECOND DESIGN) REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV as a pair using a single nut. 1. Remove the HVAC module. See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair 2. Remove the evaporator case assembly. 3. Remove the thermal expansion valve (TXV) bolts from the backing plate. 4. Remove the TXV and the backing plate from the evaporator pipes. 5. Remove the O-rings from evaporator pipes. 6. Install protective caps to the evaporator pipes to prevent system contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > First Design > Page 7688 7. Disconnect the thermal expansion valve (TXV) temperature sensor from the engine harness. 8. Remove the temperature sensor screw from the evaporator pipe. 9. Remove the temperature sensor from the evaporator pipe. 10. Remove the HVAC module front of dash seal. 11. Remove the evaporator pipe cover screw from the blower case assembly. 12. Remove the evaporator pipe cover from the blower case assembly. 13. Remove the evaporator core from the blower case assembly. Spraying the perimeter of the evaporator core seal with a soap and water mixture will ease removal. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > First Design > Page 7689 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Add the proper of polyalkylene glycol (PAG) oil to the evaporator core. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. 2. Inspect the seal around the evaporator core. Make sure the seal is in correct position and retained properly. 3. Spray the seal with a soap and water mixture to ease the installation of evaporator core. 4. Install the evaporator core to the blower case assembly. 5. Install the evaporator pipe cover. 6. Install the evaporator pipe cover screw. Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > First Design > Page 7690 7. Install the HVAC module front of dash seal. 8. Fill the temperature sensor housing in the TXV with the thermal grease included with the service kit. IMPORTANT: The TXV cavity for temperature sensor must be packed with thermal grease to ensure functionality. 9. Install the temperature sensor and wipe away the excess grease. 10. Install the temperature sensor screw. Tighten the screw to 8.5 N.m (75 lb in). 11. Connect the temperature sensor to the engine harness. 12. Remove the protective caps from the evaporator pipes and ensure the seal areas are clean, dry and lint free. 13. Install new O-rings to the evaporator pipes. IMPORTANT: Use only R-12 refrigerant oil (mineral) to lubricate O-rings. Use of R-134a PAG oil will cause premature corrosion of fitting joints. - Use only clean lint free cloths with non-petroleum based solvents to clean refrigerant system sealing surfaces. Allow solvent to dry with air. Do not allow solvents to enter refrigerant system. 14. Instal the TXV and the backing plate to the evaporator pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > First Design > Page 7691 15. Install the TXV screws to the backing plate. Tighten the screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 16. Install the evaporator case assembly. 17. Install the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7695 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7696 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design Expansion Valve: Service and Repair Second Design THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE REPLACEMENT (SECOND DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV as a pair using a single nut. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. IMPORTANT: When removing the thermal expansion valve (TXV), keep dirt and foreign material from getting on or into the O-ring sealing surfaces. Clean tools and a clean work area are important for proper service. The TXV seal area should be cleaned before any repairs are performed. The parts must be kept clean at all times and any parts to be assembled should be cleaned with a non-petroleum based solvent and dried with air. Use only lint free cloths to wipe parts. Do not allow solvent to enter evaporator or hoses. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7701 4. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line. 5. Install protective caps to the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 6. Remove the TXV bolts from the backing plate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7702 7. Remove the TXV and the backing plate from the vehicle. 8. Remove and discard the O-rings from the evaporator pipes. 9. Install a protective cap to the evaporator pipes to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the evaporator pipe and ensure the seal areas are clean, dry and lint free. IMPORTANT: Use only lint free cloths to wipe parts. Do not allow any solvent to enter evaporator or hoses. 2. Install new O-rings to the evaporator pipes. 3. Remove the protective caps from the TXV. 4. Install the TXV and the backing plate to the evaporator pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7703 5. Install the TXV bolts to the backing plate. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Remove the protective caps from the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose 7. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7704 8. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 9. Install the liquid line and evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 10. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 11. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7705 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair First Design THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE REPLACEMENT (FIRST DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV independently using nuts. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the TXV. IMPORTANT: When removing the thermal expansion valve (TXV), keep dirt and foreign material from getting on or into the O-ring sealing surfaces. Clean tools and a clean work area are important for proper service. The TXV seal area should be cleaned before any repairs are performed. The parts must be kept clean at all times and any parts to be assembled should be cleaned with a non-petroleum based solvent and dried with air. Use only lint free cloths to wipe parts. Do not allow solvent to enter evaporator or hoses. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the TXV. 4. Install a protective cap to the evaporator outlet hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7706 5. Remove the liquid line nut from the TXV. 6. Remove the liquid line from the TXV. 7. Install a protective cap to the liquid line to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 8. Disconnect the refrigerant low temperature sensor from the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7707 9. Remove the TXV bolts from the backing plate. 10. Remove the TXV and the backing plate from the vehicle. 11. Remove and discard the O-rings from the evaporator pipes. 12. Install a protective cap to the evaporator pipes to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the evaporator pipe and ensure the seal areas are clean, dry and lint free. IMPORTANT: Use only lint free cloths to wipe parts. Do not allow any solvent to enter evaporator or hoses. 2. Install new O-rings to the evaporator pipes. 3. Remove the protective caps from the TXV. 4. Install the TXV and the backing plate to the evaporator pipes. 5. Install the TXV bolts to the backing plate. Tighten the bolts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7708 6. Remove the protective cap from the liquid line. 7. Install a new seal washer to the liquid line. 8. Install the liquid line to the TXV. 9. Install the liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 10. Remove the protective cap from the evaporator outlet hose. 11. Install a new seal washer to the evaporator outlet hose. 12. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 13. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7709 14. Connect the refrigerant low temperature sensor to the engine harness. 15. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 16. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 7714 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 7715 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7716 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the heater core. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose from the heater core. 6. Remove the instrument panel retainer. 7. Remove the shift control. 8. Remove the heater duct screws. 9. Remove the heater duct. 10. Remove the heater core cover screws. 11. Remove the heater core cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7717 12. Remove the heater core pipe cover screw. 13. Remove the heater core pipe cover. 14. Remove the heater core pipe foam seal. 15. Grasp the heater core at end tanks and remove heater core. Spray the perimeter of the heater core seal and the heater core pipes at the front of dash with a soap and water mixture to ease removal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the heater core. Spray the perimeter of the heater core seal and the heater core pipes at the front of dash with a soap and water mixture to ease installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7718 2. Install the heater core pipe seal. 3. Install the heater core pipe cover. 4. Install the heater core pipe cover screw. Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Spray the front of dash seal at the drain tube opening to aid in heater core cover installation. 6. Install the heater core cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7719 7. Install the heater core cover screws. Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 8. Install the heater duct. 9. Install the heater duct screws. Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 10. Install the instrument panel retainer. 11. Install the shift control bracket. 12. Install the heater inlet hose to the heater core. 13. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 14. Install the heater outlet hose to the heater core. 15. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 16. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Heater Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 7728 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 7729 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 7730 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors Bulletin No.: 04-06-02-010B Date: January 05, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: Odor from Under Hood, Coolant Odor (Flush Cooling System and Replace Coolant Hoses) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox with 3.4L V6 Engine (VIN F - RPO LNJ) Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56172604 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part information for the new GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner in the U.S. and Canada and to alert dealers of an important change to the directions for using the new cooling system cleaner. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-02-010A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an objectionable odor coming from under the hood. It may be found that this odor is from the engine coolant. Correction This repair is intended for the resolution of odor concern vehicles only. The discoloration of the coolant is normal and not related to odor. It is the result of the sealant pellets that are added to the system during production. DO NOT add sealant pellets when performing this repair. Flush the cooling system and replace the coolant hoses using the procedure listed below. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). This new cleaner is in liquid form and contains a neutralizer. Do not substitute other cleaners. Due to the complexity of these procedures, the following repair steps must be strictly adhered to in order to achieve the intended results. Any deviation or substitution may result in sub-standard cleaning/flushing results or system damage. Verify the fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel level should be above 1/4 tank before this procedure is started. As a precaution, verify the oil level in the crankcase. Add the amount required to bring the oil level into the normal range. It is recommended that the vehicle be placed in a position so that the following are available: A sanitary sewer - not a storm drain, etc. Running water In order to avoid personal injury, do not remove the cap or open the cooling system drains from a hot system. Allow the system to cool first. Drain the cooling system completely and properly dispose of the coolant. Place a container under the radiator drain valve located at the bottom of the left radiator end tank. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, open the radiator drain valve and allow the coolant to drain from the system. Remove the surge tank cap from the surge tank. Close the radiator drain valve. Raise and properly support the vehicle. Place a container under the left side of the engine. Remove the engine block coolant drain plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the drain plug. Place a container under the right side of the engine. Remove the engine block heater or plug and allow the coolant to drain. Install the engine block heater or plug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 7736 Lower the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Clean the cooling system with New GM Heavy Duty Cooling System Cleaner P/N 88861344 (in Canada, P/N 88861345). Pour the new cleaner (one-part liquid) into the surge tank. Avoid spilling the solution on the vehicle's finish. Fill the remaining system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. To help keep the engine cool and at operating temperature, an industrial cooling fan may be necessary to use in front of the radiator while the engine is being run at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Turn the heater on. Run the engine at fast idle for 40 minutes to one hour. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 10 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Fill the system with plain water. As the system fills, watch for water at the water pump tower. As water begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. Install the surge tank cap to the surge tank. Run the engine for 5 minutes. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. Drain the system completely and repeat Steps 1.1 through 1.8. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. Remove the battery box from the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Remove the upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet and outlet heater core hoses from the vehicle. Remove the inlet surge tank vent hose from the vehicle. Install the new inlet surge tank vent hose. Install the new inlet and outlet heater core hoses. Install the new upper and lower (inlet and outlet) radiator hoses. Install the battery box to the vehicle. Refer to the Battery Box Replacement procedure in the Engine Electrical sub-section of the Service Manual. Flush the coolant surge tank thoroughly using hot water to remove any stains. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. Open the air bleed screw on the water pump tower. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 7737 Refill the cooling system using a 50/70% mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL(R) antifreeze. DO NOT use any other type of antifreeze. As the system fills, watch for coolant at the water pump tower. As coolant begins to seep from the air bleed, close the air bleed screw. If the surge tank fills before the system does, lifting the right side of the vehicle may force the trapped air toward the air bleed. The new VAC-N-FILL tool (GE-47716) can also be used to remove trapped air. This tool should only be used for the coolant fill and not for the cooling system cleaner fills (doing so would contaminate the tool). Run the engine and cycle the vehicle from idle to 3,000 RPM in 30 second intervals until the cooling fans come on. Return the engine to idle. Idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine OFF. Allow the vehicle to cool. Add coolant to the surge tank until the level is approximately 25 mm (1 in) above the top of the Cold Fill Range at the surge tank seam. Install the surge tank cap. Cooling System Capacity Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 04-06-02-010B > Jan > 07 > Cooling System - Engine Compartment Coolant Odors > Page 7738 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Hose - Inlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - INLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater inlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater inlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose from the engine. 6. Remove the heater inlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 7741 1. Install the heater inlet hose to the vehicle. 2. Install the heater inlet hose to the engine. 3. Install the heater inlet hose hose to the engine. 4. Install the heater inlet hose to the heater core. 5. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 6. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 7742 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Hose - Outlet HEATER HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 2. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the heater core. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 4. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the engine. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose from the engine. 6. Position the loose end of the heater inlet hose outboard to ease in the removal of the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 7743 7. Remove the surge tank inlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 8. Disconnect the surge tank inlet hose from the surge tank. 9. Remove the surge tank bolts from the surge tank. 10. Lift the surge tank to gain access to the heater outlet hose. 11. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the surge tank. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the surge tank. 13. Remove the surge tank from the vehicle. 14. Remove the heater outlet hose clamp from the hose. This will aid in routing the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. 15. Remove the heater outlet hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 7744 1. Install the heater outlet hose to the vehicle. Route the hose into position for attachment to the surge tank. 2. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the hose. 3. Install the heater outlet hose to the surge tank. 4. Install the surge tank to the vehicle. 5. Install the surge tank bolts to the surge tank. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Connect the surge tank inlet hose to the surge tank. 7. Install the surge tank inlet hose clamp to the surge tank. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Hose - Inlet > Page 7745 8. Install the heater outlet hose to the engine. 9. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the engine. 10. Install the heater outlet hose to the heater core. 11. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. 12. Fill the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair COMPRESSOR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the pressure relief valve from the compressor hose. 4. Remove and discard the O-ring from the compressor hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7749 1. Lightly coat the new O-ring with mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil. IMPORTANT: Lubricate the new O-ring prior to installation on the compressor hose. 2. Install the new O-ring to the compressor hose. 3. Install the pressure relief valve to the compressor hose. Tighten the pressure relief valve to 10 N.m (88 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 6. Test the affected A/C joint for leaks using J 39400-A Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Hose Assembly COMPRESSOR HOSE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURES 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the compressor hose retainer nut from the battery box. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7754 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. 6. Install a protective cap to the evaporator outlet hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 7. Remove the compressor hose nut from the condenser. 8. Remove the compressor hose from the condenser. 9. Install a protective cap to the condenser to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 10. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector from the pressure transducer. 12. Remove the compressor hose bolt at the compressor. 13. Remove the compressor hose from the compressor. 14. Install a protective cap to the compressor to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7755 15. Remove the compressor hose from the vehicle. 16. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the compressor hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove protective cap from compressor end of the compressor hose and the compressor. 2. Install new seal washers to the compressor hose. 3. Position the compressor hose in the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7756 4. Install the compressor hose to the compressor. 5. Install the compressor hose bolt to the compressor. Tighten the bolt to 27 N.m (20 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Connect the electrical connector to the pressure transducer. NOTE: Refer to Compressor Hose Clearance to the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Pipe Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install a new sealing washer to the evaporator outlet hose. 9. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 10. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7757 Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 11. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose at the condenser. 12. Install the compressor hose to the condenser. 13. Install the compressor hose nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 14. Install the compressor hose retainer nut to the battery box. Tighten the nut to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 15. Install the left headlamp. 16. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 17. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7758 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Liquid Line (First Design) LIQUID LINE REPLACEMENT (FIRST DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV independently using nuts. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the surge tank. 4. Remove the washer bottle. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut from the wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7759 8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent hose retainers from the liquid line. 10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7760 12. Remove the liquid line nut from the TXV. 13. Remove the liquid line from the TXV. 14. Remove the liquid line nut from the receiver dehydrator. 15. Remove the liquid line from the receiver dehydrator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7761 16. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 17. Route the liquid line above the battery box and the ground lug. 18. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 19. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 20. Install protective caps to the receiver dehydrator and the TXV to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the receiver dehydrator and the liquid line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7762 2. Install the new sealing washer to the receiver dehydrator. 3. Route the receiver dehydrator end of the liquid line into position. 4. Install the liquid line to the receiver dehydrator. 5. Install the liquid line nut to the receiver dehydrator. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7763 6. Remove the protective cap from the TXV and the liquid line. 7. Install a new sealing washer to the liquid line at the TXV. 8. Install the liquid line to the TXV. 9. Install the liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 10. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 11. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7764 12. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug. 13. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse. Tighten the nut to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 14. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 15. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (86 lb in). 16. Install the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7765 17. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 18. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower. Tighten the nut to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 19. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 20. Install the surge tank. 21. Install the washer bottle. 22. Install the left headlamp. 23. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 24. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7766 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Liquid Line (Second Design) LIQUID LINE REPLACEMENT (SECOND DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV as a pair using a single nut. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp. 3. Remove the surge tank. 4. Remove the washer bottle. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut from the wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7767 8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent hose retainers from the liquid line. 10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7768 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 12. Remove the liquid line nut from the receiver dehydrator. 13. Remove the liquid line from the receiver dehydrator. 14. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 15. Route the liquid line above the battery box and the ground lug. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7769 16. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 17. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 18. Install protective caps to the receiver dehydrator and the TXV to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the receiver dehydrator and the liquid line. 2. Install the new sealing washer to the receiver dehydrator. 3. Route the receiver dehydrator end of the liquid line into position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7770 4. Install the liquid line to the receiver dehydrator. 5. Install the liquid line nut to the receiver dehydrator. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the line. 6. Remove the protective cap from the TXV, the liquid line, and the evaporator outlet hose. 7. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7771 8. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 9. Install the liquid line and evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7772 10. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug. 11. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse. Tighten the nut to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 12. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 13. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (86 lb in). 14. Install the battery. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7773 15. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 16. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower. Tighten the nut to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 17. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 18. Install the surge tank. 19. Install the washer bottle. 20. Install the left headlamp. 21. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 22. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7774 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Hose - Outlet (First Design) EVAPORATOR HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET (FIRST DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV independently using nuts. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7775 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the TXV. 6. Remove evaporator outlet hose from the vehicle. 7. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the evaporator outlet hose and the compressor hose. 8. Install protective caps to the TXV and the compressor hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the TXV and the compressor hose. 2. Install new sealing washers to the evaporator outlet hose and the compressor hose. 3. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 4. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7776 5. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 6. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 7. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 8. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7777 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Hose - Outlet (Second Design) EVAPORATOR HOSE REPLACEMENT - OUTLET (SECOND DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV as a pair using a single nut. 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the evaporator outlet hose. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the compressor hose. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7778 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 6. Remove evaporator outlet hose from the vehicle. 7. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the evaporator outlet hose and the compressor hose. 8. Install protective caps to the TXV and the compressor hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the protective caps from the TXV and the compressor hose. 2. Install new sealing washers to the evaporator outlet hose, liquid line, and the compressor hose. 3. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Hose Assembly > Page 7779 4. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the compressor hose. 6. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the evaporator outlet hose. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 7. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 8. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Case Assembly AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) EVAPORATOR CASE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the HVAC module. 2. Remove the heater duct screws from the heater core cover. 3. Remove the heater duct from the heater core cover. 4. Remove the panel actuator screws from the evaporator case assembly. 5. Remove the panel actuator from the evaporator case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7784 6. Remove the floor actuator screws from the evaporator case assembly. 7. Remove the floor actuator from the evaporator case assembly. 8. Remove the defrost actuator screws from the evaporator case assembly. 9. Remove the defrost actuator from the evaporator case assembly. 10. Remove the heater core cover screws from the evaporator case assembly. 11. Remove the heater core cover from the evaporator case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7785 12. Remove the heater core pipe cover screw. 13. Remove the heater core pipe cover. 14. Remove the heater core pipe seal. 15. Grasp the heater core at the end tanks and remove. Spraying perimeter of heater core seal with a soap and water mixture will ease removal. 16. Remove the evaporator case assembly screws from the blower case assembly. 17. Remove the evaporator case assembly from the blower case assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7786 1. Install evaporator case assembly to the blower case assembly. 2. Install evaporator case assembly screws to the blower case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install heater core. Spraying perimeter of heater core seal with a soap and water mixture will ease installation. 4. Install heater core pipe seal. 5. Install heater core pipe cover. 6. Install heater core pipe cover screw. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7787 Tighten the screw to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 7. Install heater core cover. 8. Install heater core cover screws. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 9. Install the floor actuator to the evaporator case assembly. 10. Install the floor actuator screws to the evaporator case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7788 11. Install the defrost actuator to the evaporator case assembly. 12. Install the defrost actuator screws to the evaporator case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 13. Install the panel actuator to the evaporator case assembly. 14. Install the panel actuator screws to the evaporator case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 15. Install the heater duct. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7789 16. Install the heater duct screws. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 17. Install the HVAC module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7790 Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair HVAC Module Assembly Replacement First Design HVAC MODULE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (FIRST DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV independently using nuts. 1. Disable the frontal and curtain air bags. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2, SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3, SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5, and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. 2. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the TXV. 6. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the evaporator outlet hose. 7. Install a protective cap to the evaporator outlet hose to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7791 8. Remove the liquid line nut from the TXV. 9. Remove the liquid line from the TXV. 10. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 11. Install a protective cap to the liquid line to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 12. Disconnect the TXV low temperature sensor connector from the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7792 13. Reposition the heater outlet hose clamp at the heater core. 14. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 15. Reposition the heater inlet hose clamp at the heater core. 16. Remove the heater inlet hose at the heater core. 17. Plug the heater core and the evaporator core with clean towels to prevent spillage when the HVAC module is removed. 18. Remove the HVAC module seal nuts from the front of dash. 19. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) retainer. 20. Remove the shift control bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7793 21. Remove the center floor air outlet duct by sliding the duct forward then up at the rear. 22. Remove the center I/P air outlet duct retainers from the cross car beam. 23. Remove the center I/P air outlet duct from the cross car beam. 24. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. 25. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. 26. Disconnect the HVAC module electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7794 27. Remove the defroster duct retainer from the cross car beam. 28. Remove the defroster duct nuts from the HVAC module. 29. Remove the defroster duct from the HVAC module. 30. Disconnect the I/P wire harness clips from the HVAC module. 31. Remove the metal bracket nut from the cross car beam. 32. Remove the metal bracket nuts from the HVAC module. 33. Remove the metal bracket from the HVAC module. 34. Remove the HVAC module bolts from the right side of the cross car beam. 35. Remove the HVAC module nut from the center of the cross car beam. 36. Remove HVAC module bolt from the left side of the cross car beam. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7795 37. Remove the HVAC module from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the front of dash seal for proper alignment. IMPORTANT: Make sure the HVAC module seals are flush and even as they meet their mating surfaces. This will reduce the chance of leaks and ensure proper fit. 2. Inspect the seal mating surfaces to ensure there are no obstructions. 3. Loose hang the HVAC module from the cross car beam. IMPORTANT: Make sure the plastic molded in bracket at the center of the HVAC module is forward of the cross car beam during installation. 4. Install the metal bracket to the left side of the HVAC module. 5. Install the metal bracket bolts to the left side of the HVAC module. Tighten the bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7796 6. Install the HVAC module seal nuts to the front of dash. Draw the HVAC module to the front of dash evenly by alternating between the seal nuts. Tighten the nuts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). IMPORTANT: New front of dash seal nuts must be used to prevent leaks. 7. Install the HVAC module bolts to the right side of the cross car beam. 8. Push up on the right side of the HVAC module while tightening the HVAC module bolts to the cross car beam. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 9. Install the HVAC module bolt to the left side of the cross car beam. Tighten the bolt to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 10. Install the HVAC module nuts to the left side and center of the cross car beam. Tighten the nuts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7797 11. Install the defroster duct to the HVAC module. 12. Install the defroster duct nuts to the HVAC module. Tighten the nuts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 13. Install the defroster duct retainer to the cross car beam. 14. Connect the I/P wire harness clips to the HVAC module. 15. Connect the blower motor electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. 16. Connect the blower motor resistor electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. 17. Connect the HVAC module electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7798 18. Install the center I/P duct to the cross car beam. 19. Install the center I/P duct retainers to the cross car beam. 20. Install the center floor air outlet by sliding forward onto the front floor air outlet then down and rearward over the rear floor air outlet. 21. Install the shift control bracket. 22. Install the I/P retainer. 23. Install the heater inlet hose to the heater core. 24. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 25. Install the heater outlet hose to heater core outlet. 26. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7799 27. Ensure the mating surfaces are clean and free of debris, and install a new seal washer to the liquid line. 28. Install the liquid line to the TXV. 29. Install the liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 30. Ensure the mating surfaces are clean and free of debris, and install a new seal washer to the evaporator outlet hose. 31. Install the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 32. Install the evaporator outlet hose nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 33. Enable the frontal and curtain air bags. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2, SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3, SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5, and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. 34. Fill the coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 35. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 36. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7800 Second Design HVAC MODULE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (SECOND DESIGN) TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the attachment method of the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). They are retained to the TXV as a pair using a single nut. 1. Disable the frontal and curtain air bags. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2, SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3, SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5, and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. 2. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 4. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 5. Remove the evaporator outlet hose from the TXV. 6. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the evaporator outlet hose. 7. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. 8. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. 9. Install a protective caps to the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. 10. Disconnect the TXV low temperature sensor connector from the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7801 11. Reposition the heater outlet hose clamp at the heater core. 12. Remove the heater outlet hose from the heater core. 13. Reposition the heater inlet hose clamp at the heater core. 14. Remove the heater inlet hose at the heater core. 15. Plug the heater core and the evaporator core with clean towels to prevent spillage when the HVAC module is removed. 16. Remove the HVAC module seal nuts from the front of dash. 17. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) retainer. 18. Remove the shift control bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7802 19. Remove the center floor air outlet duct by sliding the duct forward then up at the rear. 20. Remove the center I/P air outlet duct retainers from the cross car beam. 21. Remove the center I/P air outlet duct from the cross car beam. 22. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. 23. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. 24. Disconnect the HVAC module electrical connector from the I/P wire harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7803 25. Remove the defroster duct retainer from the cross car beam. 26. Remove the defroster duct nuts from the HVAC module. 27. Remove the defroster duct from the HVAC module. 28. Disconnect the I/P wire harness clips from the HVAC module. 29. Remove the metal bracket nut from the cross car beam. 30. Remove the metal bracket nuts from the HVAC module. 31. Remove the metal bracket from the HVAC module. 32. Remove the HVAC module bolts from the right side of the cross car beam. 33. Remove the HVAC module nut from the center of the cross car beam. 34. Remove HVAC module bolt from the left side of the cross car beam. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7804 35. Remove the HVAC module from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the front of dash seal for proper alignment. IMPORTANT: Make sure the HVAC module seals are flush and even as they meet their mating surfaces. This will reduce the chance of leaks and ensure proper fit. 2. Inspect the seal mating surfaces to ensure there are no obstructions. 3. Loose hang the HVAC module from the cross car beam. IMPORTANT: Make sure the plastic molded in bracket at the center of the HVAC module is forward of the cross car beam during installation. 4. Install the metal bracket to the left side of the HVAC module. 5. Install the metal bracket bolts to the left side of the HVAC module. Tighten the bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7805 6. Install the HVAC module seal nuts to the front of dash. Draw the HVAC module to the front of dash evenly by alternating between the seal nuts. Tighten the nuts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). IMPORTANT: New front of dash seal nuts must be used to prevent leaks. 7. Install the HVAC module bolts to the right side of the cross car beam. 8. Push up on the right side of the HVAC module while tightening the HVAC module bolts to the cross car beam. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 9. Install the HVAC module bolt to the left side of the cross car beam. Tighten the bolt to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 10. Install the HVAC module nuts to the left side and center of the cross car beam. Tighten the nuts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7806 11. Install the defroster duct to the HVAC module. 12. Install the defroster duct nuts to the HVAC module. Tighten the nuts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 13. Install the defroster duct retainer to the cross car beam. 14. Connect the I/P wire harness clips to the HVAC module. 15. Connect the blower motor electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. 16. Connect the blower motor resistor electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. 17. Connect the HVAC module electrical connector to the I/P wire harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7807 18. Install the center I/P duct to the cross car beam. 19. Install the center I/P duct retainers to the cross car beam. 20. Install the center floor air outlet by sliding forward onto the front floor air outlet then down and rearward over the rear floor air outlet. 21. Install the shift control bracket. 22. Install the I/P retainer. 23. Install the heater inlet hose to the heater core. 24. Install the heater inlet hose clamp to the heater core. 25. Install the heater outlet hose to heater core outlet. 26. Install the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater core. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporator Case Assembly > Page 7808 27. Ensure the mating surfaces are clean and free of debris, and install new seal washers to the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line. 28. Install the evaporator outlet hose and the liquid line to the TXV. 29. Install the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line nut to the TXV. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 30. Enable the frontal and curtain air bags. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2, SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3, SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5, and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. 31. Fill the coolant. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 32. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 33. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the left headlamp assembly. 3. Remove the receiver dehydrator nut from the condenser. IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting. Be careful not to twist the line. 4. Remove the receiver dehydrator nut from the liquid line. IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting. Be careful not to twist the line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7812 5. Remove the receiver dehydrator bracket bolt from the vehicle. 6. Remove the receiver dehydrator from the vehicle. 7. Install protective caps to the condenser, the liquid line, and the receiver dehydrator to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7813 1. Remove the protective caps from the condenser, the liquid line, and the receiver dehydrator. 2. Add the specified amount of PAG oil to the receiver dehydrator. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. 3. Install new seal washers to the receiver dehydrator. 4. Install the receiver dehydrator to the vehicle. 5. Install the receiver dehydrator nut to the liquid line. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting. Be careful not to twist the line. Install the receiver dehydrator nut to the condenser. Tighten the nut to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). IMPORTANT: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting. Be careful not to twist the line. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7814 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Position the receiver dehydrator in the vehicle. 7. Install the receiver dehydrator bolt to the vehicle. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 8. Install the left head lamp. 9. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 10. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Bulletin No.: 08-01-38-001 Date: January 25, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information On New GE-48800 CoolTech Refrigerant Recovery/Recharge Equipment Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin is being issued to announce the release of GM approved Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Equipment that meets the new Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2788 Refrigerant Recovery Standards. The ACR2000 (J-43600) cannot be manufactured in its current state after December 2007 and will be superseded by GE-48800. The new J2788 standard does not require that GM Dealers replace their ACR2000 units. ACR2000's currently in use are very capable of servicing today's refrigerant systems when used correctly and can continue to be used. Details regarding the new SAE J2788 standard are outlined in GM Bulletin 07-01-38-004. Effective February 1 2008, new A/C Refrigerant Recovery/Recharging equipment (P/N GE-48800) will be released as a required replacement for the previously essential ACR2000 (J-43600). This equipment is SAE J2788 compliant and meets GM requirements for A/C Refrigerant System Repairs on all General Motors vehicles, including Hybrid systems with Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil. This equipment will not be shipped as an essential tool to GM Dealerships. In addition, this equipment is Hybrid compliant and designed to prevent oil cross contamination when servicing Hybrid vehicles with Electric A/C Compressors that use POE refrigerant oil. The ACR2000 (J-43600) will need to be retrofitted with a J-43600-50 (Hose - ACR2000 Oil Flush Loop) to be able to perform Hybrid A/C service work. All Hybrid dealers will receive the J-43600-50, with installation instructions, as a component of the Hybrid essential tool package. Dealerships that do not sell Hybrids, but may need to service Hybrids, can obtain J-43600-50 from SPX Kent Moore. Refer to GM Bulletin 08-01-39-001 for the ACR2000 Hose Flush procedure. The High Voltage (HV) electric A/C compressor used on Two Mode Hybrid vehicles uses a Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil instead of a Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oil. This is due to the better electrical resistance of the POE oil and its ability to provide HV isolation. Failure to flush the hoses before adding refrigerant to a Hybrid vehicle with an electric A/C compressor may result in an unacceptable amount of PAG oil entering the refrigerant system. It may cause a Battery Energy Control Module Hybrid Battery Voltage System Isolation Lost Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC P1AE7) to be set. Additionally, the A/C system warranty will be voided. Warranty Submission Requirements The Electronically Generated Repair Data (snapshot summary) and printer functions have been eliminated from the GE-48800. The VGA display and temperature probes were eliminated to reduce equipment costs. As a result, effective immediately the 18 digit "Snapshot/Charge Summary" code is no longer required for Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant system repairs that are submitted for warranty reimbursement. The charge summary data from before and after system repairs will continue to required, but documented on the repair order only. Both high and low pressures and the recovery and charge amounts should be noted during the repair and entered on the repair order. If using ACR2000 (J-43600), the "Snapshot/Charge Summary" printouts should continue to be attached to the shops copy of the repair order. The labor codes that are affected by this requirement are D3000 through D4500. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 7819 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Contaminated R134A Refrigerant Bulletin No.: 06-01-39-007 Date: July 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Found on Market for Automotive Air-Conditioning Systems Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin should be directed to the Service Manager as well as the Parts Manager. Commercially Available Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Impurities have been found in new commercially available containers of R134a. High levels of contaminates may cause decreased performance, and be detrimental to some air-conditioning components. Accompanying these contaminates has been high levels of moisture. Tip: Excessive moisture may cause system concerns such as orifice tube freeze-up and reduced performance. Industry Reaction: New Industry Purity Standards Due to the potential availability of these lower quality refrigerants, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), and the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry (ARI) are in the process of instituting reliable standards that will be carried on the labels of future R134a refrigerant containers. This identifying symbol will be your assurance of a product that conforms to the minimum standard for OEM Automotive Air-Conditioning use. How Can You Protect Yourself Today? It is recommended to use GM or ACDelco(R) sourced refrigerants for all A/C repair work. These refrigerants meet General Motors own internal standards for quality and purity, insuring that your completed repairs are as good as the way it left the factory. Parts Information The part numbers shown are available through GMSPO or ACDelco(R). The nearest ACDelco(R) distributor in your area can be found by calling 1-800-223-3526 (U.S. Only). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 7820 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 1.75 lb. (0.79 kg.) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7823 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ....................................................................................................................... R134a P/N 12356150 U.S. (10953485 Canada) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7824 Refrigerant: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RECHARGING TOOLS REQUIRED J 43600 ACR 2000 Air Conditioning Service Center CAUTION: Avoid breathing the A/C Refrigerant 134a (R-134a) and the lubricant vapor or the mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose, and throat. Work in a well ventilated area. In order to remove R-134a from the A/C system, use service equipment that is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J 2210 (R-134a recycling equipment). If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. - For personal protection, goggles and gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant system. If R-134a comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical help should be obtained. NOTE: R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure. - To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C system. - Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result. - R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest of amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to the manufacturer instructions included with the service equipment before servicing. The J 43600 is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The ACR 2000 recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically. The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg (12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant. The ACR 2000 has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If foreign gases are present, the ACR 2000 will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system. The ACR 2000 also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain. Refer to the J 43600 ACR 2000 manual for operation and setup instruction. Always recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities for the correct amount. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - New PAG Oil Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New PAG Oil Bulletin No.: 02-01-39-004B Date: November 16, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: New PAG Oil Released Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Built With R-134a Refrigeration System All Air Conditioning Compressor Types (Excluding R4 and A6 Type Compressors) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the PAG oil part number used for R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-01-39-004A (Section 01 - HVAC). All General Motors vehicles built with R-134a refrigerant systems shall now be serviced with GM Universal PAG Oil (excluding vehicles equipped with an R4 or A6 compressor). R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems shall use PAG OIL, GM P/N 12356151 (A/C Delco part number 15-118) (in Canada, use P/N 10953486). Important: The PAG oil referenced in this bulletin is formulated with specific additive packages that meet General Motors specifications and use of another oil may void the A/C systems warranty. Use this new PAG oil when servicing the A/C system on the vehicles listed above. Oil packaged in an 8 oz tube should be installed using A/C Oil Injector, J 45037. Refer to the HVAC Section of Service Information for detailed information on Oil Balancing and Capacities. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITIES ABRUPT REFRIGERANT LOSS ......................................................................................................................................................... 103 ml (3.5 oz) NOTE: Abrupt refrigerant loss due to a large leak, hose rupture, collision, or pressure relief valve opening. Conditions that allow the refrigerant to seep or bleed off over time do not cause this oil loss. Upon replacement of a component that caused a large refrigerant loss, also add the required amount of oil for the particular component. COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT The Visteon model SC100V service compressor is precharged with the specified amount of PAG oil. ................................................... 120 ml (4.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. CONDENSER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................ 30 ml (1.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. EVAPORATOR REPLACEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................... 30 ml (1.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR REPLACEMENT ................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE REPLACEMENT ........................................................................................................................ 20 ml (0.75 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount of oil drained. TOTAL SYSTEM PAG OIL CAPACITY .......................................................................................................................................... 207 ml (7.00 oz) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7831 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL Polyalkylene glycol (PAG) Oil ................................................................................................................ GM P/N 12378526 (Canadian P/N 88900060) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7832 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C REFRIGERANT SYSTEM OIL CHARGE REPLENISHING If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component replacement, the oil must be replenished. Oil can be added to the system by pouring the correct amount into the replaced component or into an open refrigerant line. For the proper quantities of oil to add to the A/C refrigerant system, refer to Refrigerant System Capacities . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7836 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7837 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7838 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the refrigerant pressure sensor. 3. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the compressor hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the refrigerant pressure sensor O-ring with mineral oil. IMPORTANT: Use R-12 refrigerant oil (mineral) to lubricate O-rings. Use of R-134a polyalkylene glycol (PAG) oil will cause premature corrosion of fitting joints. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7839 2. Hand start the refrigerant pressure sensor to the compressor hose, taking care not to pinch the O-ring and tighten. Tighten the pressure sensor to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the electrical connector to the refrigerant pressure sensor. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design Refrigerant Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Second Design AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (SECOND DESIGN) REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the location of the temperature sensor. The temperature sensor is retained with a screw to the evaporator pipe. 1. Disconnect the thermal expansion valve (TXV) temperature sensor from the engine harness. 2. Remove the temperature sensor screw from the evaporator pipe. 3. Remove the temperature sensor from the evaporator pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Fill the temperature sensor housing in the TXV with the thermal grease included with the service kit. IMPORTANT: The TXV cavity for temperature sensor must be packed with thermal grease to ensure functionality. 2. Install the temperature sensor and wipe away the excess grease. 3. Install the temperature sensor screw. Tighten the screw to 8.5 N.m (75 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the temperature sensor to the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7844 Refrigerant Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair First Design AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (FIRST DESIGN) REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the location of the temperature sensor. The temperature sensor is retained with a screw to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). 1. Disconnect the thermal expansion valve (TXV) temperature sensor from the engine harness. 2. Remove the temperature sensor from the TXV. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7845 1. Fill the temperature sensor housing in the TXV with the thermal grease included with the service kit. IMPORTANT: The TXV cavity for temperature sensor must be packed with thermal grease to ensure functionality. 2. Install the temperature sensor and wipe away the excess grease. 3. Install the temperature sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 5 N.m (44 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the temperature sensor to the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7850 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Control Module C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7851 HVAC Control Module C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the blower motor control knob by pulling rearward off shaft. 3. Press the blower motor switch retention prongs and remove the switch from the HVAC control module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the blower motor switch to the HVAC control module. Press to engage the retention prongs. 2. Install the center trim bezel. 3. Install the blower motor control knob. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7859 LR Of The Engine Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7860 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7864 Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7865 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7866 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the refrigerant pressure sensor. 3. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the compressor hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the refrigerant pressure sensor O-ring with mineral oil. IMPORTANT: Use R-12 refrigerant oil (mineral) to lubricate O-rings. Use of R-134a polyalkylene glycol (PAG) oil will cause premature corrosion of fitting joints. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7867 2. Hand start the refrigerant pressure sensor to the compressor hose, taking care not to pinch the O-ring and tighten. Tighten the pressure sensor to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the electrical connector to the refrigerant pressure sensor. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design Refrigerant Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Second Design AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (SECOND DESIGN) REMOVAL PROCEDURE The second design can be identified by the location of the temperature sensor. The temperature sensor is retained with a screw to the evaporator pipe. 1. Disconnect the thermal expansion valve (TXV) temperature sensor from the engine harness. 2. Remove the temperature sensor screw from the evaporator pipe. 3. Remove the temperature sensor from the evaporator pipe. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Fill the temperature sensor housing in the TXV with the thermal grease included with the service kit. IMPORTANT: The TXV cavity for temperature sensor must be packed with thermal grease to ensure functionality. 2. Install the temperature sensor and wipe away the excess grease. 3. Install the temperature sensor screw. Tighten the screw to 8.5 N.m (75 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the temperature sensor to the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7872 Refrigerant Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair First Design AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) REFRIGERANT LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (FIRST DESIGN) REMOVAL PROCEDURE The first design can be identified by the location of the temperature sensor. The temperature sensor is retained with a screw to the Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV). 1. Disconnect the thermal expansion valve (TXV) temperature sensor from the engine harness. 2. Remove the temperature sensor from the TXV. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Second Design > Page 7873 1. Fill the temperature sensor housing in the TXV with the thermal grease included with the service kit. IMPORTANT: The TXV cavity for temperature sensor must be packed with thermal grease to ensure functionality. 2. Install the temperature sensor and wipe away the excess grease. 3. Install the temperature sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 5 N.m (44 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the temperature sensor to the engine harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Superheat Switch: Service and Repair COMPRESSOR THERMAL PROTECTION SWITCH REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 44020Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Cut the wire harness leads (1) to the clutch coil. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the clutch coil bracket. 4. Remove the thermal protection switch (TPS) retainer bolt from the compressor. 5. Remove the TPS retainer from the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7877 6. Using a flat-bladed tool, gently pry the TPS from the compressor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Measure and cut the new TPS assembly to the proper length. IMPORTANT: To ensure proper routing and retention, be sure the new TPS assembly is cut to the same length as the original TPS assembly. 2. Remove 9.5 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from the ends of the TPS assembly and the wire harness. 3. Position the stripped ends of wire in the appropriate splice sleeve found in J 44020. 4. Crimp the splices using an approved crimping tool. 5. Gently tug on the wires to ensure proper crimping. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7878 6. Apply heat source (1) to the splice joints until glue (2) flows from the splice sleeves. 7. Clean the TPS pocket of any foreign material. 8. Apply thermal conductive sealant P/N 22681632 to the TPS pocket. IMPORTANT: Use thermal conductive sealant P/N 22681632 to ensure the TPS functions properly. 9. Install the TPS to the TPS pocket on the compressor. 10. Remove any excess sealant from around the switch. 11. Install the TPS retainer to the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7879 12. Install the TPS retainer bolt to the compressor. Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 13. Install the electrical connector to the clutch coil bracket. 14. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair SERVICE PORT VALVE CORE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED - J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector - J 46246 Valve Core Removal Tool REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Use J 46246 or equivalent to remove the valve core. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Use J 46246 or equivalent to install and tighten the valve core. 2. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 3. Test the affected A/C fittings for leaks using J 39400-A. IMPORTANT: To prevent loss of refrigerant charge, tighten the cap. Replace the cap if the seal is missing or damaged. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Superheat Switch: Service and Repair COMPRESSOR THERMAL PROTECTION SWITCH REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 44020Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Cut the wire harness leads (1) to the clutch coil. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the clutch coil bracket. 4. Remove the thermal protection switch (TPS) retainer bolt from the compressor. 5. Remove the TPS retainer from the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7886 6. Using a flat-bladed tool, gently pry the TPS from the compressor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Measure and cut the new TPS assembly to the proper length. IMPORTANT: To ensure proper routing and retention, be sure the new TPS assembly is cut to the same length as the original TPS assembly. 2. Remove 9.5 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from the ends of the TPS assembly and the wire harness. 3. Position the stripped ends of wire in the appropriate splice sleeve found in J 44020. 4. Crimp the splices using an approved crimping tool. 5. Gently tug on the wires to ensure proper crimping. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7887 6. Apply heat source (1) to the splice joints until glue (2) flows from the splice sleeves. 7. Clean the TPS pocket of any foreign material. 8. Apply thermal conductive sealant P/N 22681632 to the TPS pocket. IMPORTANT: Use thermal conductive sealant P/N 22681632 to ensure the TPS functions properly. 9. Install the TPS to the TPS pocket on the compressor. 10. Remove any excess sealant from around the switch. 11. Install the TPS retainer to the compressor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Superheat Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7888 12. Install the TPS retainer bolt to the compressor. Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 13. Install the electrical connector to the clutch coil bracket. 14. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag System Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Air Bag System REPAIRS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED AFTER A COLLISION ACCIDENT WITH OR WITHOUT AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT - COMPONENT INSPECTIONS CAUTION: Proper operation of the SIR sensing system requires that any repairs to the vehicle structure return the vehicle structure to the original production configuration. Not properly repairing the vehicle structure could cause non-deployment in a collision or deployment for conditions less severe than intended. After any collision, inspect the following components as indicated. If damage is detected, replace the component. If damage to the mounting points or mounting hardware is detected, repair the component or replace the hardware as needed. Steering column-Perform the steering column accident damage inspection procedures. Refer to Steering Column Accident Damage Inspection in Steering Wheel and Column. - I/P knee bolsters and mounting points-Inspect the knee bolsters for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - I/P brackets, braces, etc.-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - Seat belts-Perform the seat belt operational and functional checks. Refer to Operational and Functional Checks in Seat Belts. - I/P cross car beam-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - I/P mounting points and brackets-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - Seats and seat mounting points-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. FRONTAL INFLATOR MODULE DEPLOYMENT - COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND INSPECTIONS After a collision involving inflator module deployment, replace the following components. Inflatable restraint I/P module - Inflatable restraint steering wheel module - Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Replace only if DTC B0051 or DTC B0053 cannot be cleared using the scan tool. Refer to DTC B0051 or DTC B0053. - Inflatable restraint front end sensor. - Inflatable restraint seat belt pretensioners Perform additional inspections on the following components: Inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil and coil wiring pigtail-Inspect for melting, scorching, or other damage due to excessive heat. - Mounting point or mounting hardware for the I/P module, steering wheel module, and SDM-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. ROOF RAIL INFLATOR MODULE DEPLOYMENT - COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND INSPECTIONS After a collision involving a roof rail inflator module deployment, replace the following components on the side of the impact. Inflatable restraint seat belt pretensioners - Inflatable restraint roof rail modules, left/right, on the side of the impact - Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - Inflatable restraint side impact sensor (SIS), left/right, on the side of the impact Perform additional inspections on the following components. Mounting points or mounting hardware for the inflatable restraint SIS on the side of the impact-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. - Mounting points or mounting hardware for the inflatable restraint SDM and seat belt pretensioners-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. SENSOR REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES The SIS replacement policy requires replacing sensors in the area of accident damage. The area of accident damage is defined as the portion of the vehicle which is crushed, bent, or damaged due to a collision. Replace the sensor whether or not the air bags have deployed. - Replace the sensor even if it appears to be undamaged. Sensor damage which is not visible, such as a slight bending of the mounting bracket or cuts in the wire insulation, can cause improper operation of the sensor. Do not try to determine whether the sensor is undamaged. Replace the sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag System > Page 7894 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt System REPAIRS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED AFTER A COLLISION CAUTION: Restraint systems can be damaged in a collision. To help avoid injury and ensure that all parts in need of replacement are replaced: - Replace any seat belt system that was in use during the collision serious enough to deploy any automatic restraint device such as air bags and seat belt pretensioners. This not only includes seat belt systems in use by people of adult size, but seat belt systems used to secure child restraints, infant carriers and booster seats, including LATCH system and top tether anchorages. - Replace any seat belt system that has torn, worn, or damaged components. This not only includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints and LATCH system components, if any. - Replace any seat belt system if you observe the words "REPLACE" or "CAUTION", or if a yellow tag is visible. Do not replace a seat belt if only the child seat caution label is visible. - Replace any seat belt system if you are doubtful about its condition. This not only includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints, LATCH system components, and any restraint system used to secure infant carriers, child restraints, and booster seats. Do NOT replace single seat belt system components in vehicles that have been in a collision as described above. Always replace the entire seat belt system with the buckle, guide and retractor assembly, which includes the latch and webbing material. After a minor collision where no automatic restraint device was deployed, seat belt system replacement may not be necessary unless some of the parts are torn, worn, or damaged. After any collision, verify that the pretentioners on the front seat belt retractor have not deployed. 1. Pull the seat belt webbing. 2. If you hear a grinding or a rattling, replace the retractor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag System > Page 7895 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Steering Column Steering Column Accident Damage Inspection Inspection This vehicle is equipped with electric power steering (EPS), with the electric motor and torque sensor mounted on the steering column. When involved in an accident resulting in sheet metal damage or driver-side air bag deployment, the steering column must be inspected for both electrical system integrity and steering column collapse. Refer to Diagnostic System Check. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle ^ If the steering column electrical system integrity is not within specifications, the complete steering column must be replaced. ^ If the steering column collapse mechanism is not within specifications, but the electrical system integrity is within specifications, then the steering column upper jacket must be replaced. Road test the vehicle when ever any steering system repairs or diagnostics have been performed. Electric Power Steering (EPS) Inspection 2 Tests if the steering column is damaged due to a previous accident or airbag deployment. Collapse Measurement A vehicle involved in an accident resulting in sheet metal damage or drivers-side air bag deployment will require an inspection for steering column collapse. If the steering column collapse measurement is greater than 3 mm than the steering column upper jacket must be replaced. For steering column collapse measurement, use the following procedure: 1. Remove the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag System > Page 7896 2. Inspect the upper steering column mounting capsule nuts for movement (a). If the steering column collapse measurement is greater than 3 mm than the steering column upper jacket must be replaced. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7902 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7903 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7904 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7905 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7906 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7907 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7908 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7909 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7910 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7911 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7912 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7913 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7914 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7915 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7916 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7917 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7918 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7919 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7920 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7921 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7922 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7923 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7924 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7925 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7926 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7927 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7928 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7929 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7930 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7931 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Air Bag Harness: Customer Interest Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 7941 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 7942 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 7948 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 7949 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7953 I/P Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7954 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7955 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7956 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at strategic locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM compares the signals from the internal and external sensors to a value stored in memory. When the generated signals exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags or seat belt pretensioners. If the force of the impact is not sufficient to warrant inflator module deployment, the SDM may still deploy the seat belt pretensioners. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator located in the IPC ON. As soon as three distinct deployment commands (representing different events) have been issued to any belt pretensioner, or the SDM commands any front and side air bag to deploy once, the SDM shall be considered to not be reusable. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON, notifying the driver that a malfunction exist. In the event that ignition positive voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7957 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the console assembly. 3. Remove the retainers from the connector position assurance (CPA) and disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the nuts and remove the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM to the vehicle with the nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the console assembly. 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. 5. Reprogram the BCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning IMPORTANT: If you do NOT perform the BCM programming procedure, the vehicle option content information which is read by the BCM may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7958 incorrect and a DTC B1001 Option Configuration Error will set in both the SDM and the BCM. This will illuminate the AIR BAG telltale. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Customer Interest Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 7967 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 7968 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 7974 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 7975 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7976 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT STEERING WHEEL MODULE COIL The steering wheel module coil is attached to the steering column and is located under the steering wheel. The steering wheel module coil consists of two or more current-carrying coils. The coils allow the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining continuous electrical contact between the steering wheel module deployment loop and the steering wheel module. Two coil wires are used for the steering wheel module deployment loop. Additional coil wires are used for accessories that are attached to the steering wheel, depending on the vehicle model. The steering wheel module coil connector is located near the base of the steering column. The connector contains a shorting bar that shorts the steering wheel module coil deployment loop circuitry to prevent unwanted deployment of the steering wheel module when the connector is disconnected. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7977 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT STEERING WHEEL MODULE COIL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the front wheels in the straight forward position with the steering wheel centered. NOTE: The new SIR coil assembly will be centered. Improper alignment of the SIR coil assembly may damage the unit, causing an inflatable restraint malfunction. 2. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. 3. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 4. Remove the steering wheel. 5. Remove the steering column covers. 6. Release the SIR coil harness clips from the bracket below the column. 7. Disconnect both the SIR coil and horn/cruise connectors. 8. Using a small flat-bladed tool, carefully pry the retaining tabs away from the SIR coil assembly and slide the SIR coil assembly off the steering column. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Route the SIR wiring harness and horn/cruise connector down steering column. IMPORTANT: A new roll connector is equipped with a yellow tab that is removed after the steering wheel is installed. This tab passes through the steering wheel. 2. Snap the SIR coil into position on the column. 3. Connect the SIR coil and horn/cruise electrical connectors. 4. Attach the wiring harness clips to the bracket below the column. 5. Install the steering column covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7978 6. Install the steering wheel. 7. Install the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 8. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Left (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 7984 Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Right (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 7985 Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Front End Sensor INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END SENSOR The front end sensor, also known as the electronic frontal sensor (EFS), is equipped on vehicles to supplement the SIR system performance. The EFS is an electronic sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The EFS can assist in determining the severity of some frontal collisions. The SDM contains a microprocessor which performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the frontal deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor > Page 7988 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Side Impact Sensor (SIS) INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SIS) The side impact sensor (SIS) contains a sensing device which monitors vehicle acceleration and velocity changes to detect side collisions that are severe enough to warrant air bag deployment. The SIS is not part of the deployment loop, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The SDM contains a microprocessor that performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the side air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Replacement Caution: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. Preliminary Procedure: Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. 1. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Tip: Loosen the TORX head bolt in order to remove sensor. The bolt has left hand threads. Tighten 8 N.m (71 lb in) 2. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Assembly. Procedure: 1. Slide the sensor towards the front of vehicle to guide the sensor bolt out of release slot. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7991 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. CAUTION: When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint side impact sensor (SIS). Before applying power to the SIS make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedures could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the center pillar lower molding. 3. Loosen the fasteners on the side impact sensor (SIS). 4. Remove the SIS by sliding the module up and out of the key slots in the sheet metal. 5. Disconnect the SIS electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Connect the SIS electrical connector and insert into the connector position assurance (CPA) to secure. 3. Place the SIS through the access hole in the lock pillar. 4. Slide the module down and locate the captured fastener in the key slots of the lock pillar. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7992 Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the center pillar lower molding. 6. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8013 Side Air Bag: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Roof Rail Module - Left (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8014 Inflatable Restraint Roof Rail Module - Right (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Side SIR System Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Side SIR System SIDE SIR SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The side SIR system consists of the following components: - AIR BAG indicator located in the instrument panel cluster (IPC) - Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - Inflatable restraint seat belt pretensioners (left/right) - Inflatable restraint side impact sensors (SIS) (left/right) - Inflatable restraint roof rail modules (left/right) - Inflatable restraint wiring harnesses Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Side SIR System > Page 8017 Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Roof Rail Modules INFLATABLE RESTRAINT ROOF RAIL MODULES The roof rail modules are located under the headliner extending from the front windshield pillar to the rear window pillar. The roof rail modules contain a housing, inflatable air bag, initiating device, and a canister of gas generating material. The initiator is part of the roof rail module deployment loop. When a side impact of sufficient force occurs the SIS detects the impact and sends a signal to the SDM. The SDM compares the signal received from the SIS to a value stored in memory. When the generated signal exceeds the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the side deployment loop deploying the roof rail air bags. The SDM, roof rail modules and the connecting wires makeup the side deployment loops. The SDM continuously monitors the deployment loops for malfunctions and turns the AIR BAG indicator ON if a fault is present. Each roof rail module is equipped with a shorting bar located on the connector of the module. The shorting bar shorts the roof rail modules deployment loop circuitry to prevent unwanted deployment of the air bag when servicing the inflator module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8018 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT ROOF RAIL MODULE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - Use care when working around the roof rail inflator module because sharp objects may puncture the roof rail airbag and the airbag will not deploy correctly. In order to avoid personal injury, if any part of the module is damaged replace the entire module 2. Remove the headliner and the garnish moldings from the vehicle. 3. Unsnap the SIR tether retainer and remove the tether from the windshield pillar. IMPORTANT: Remove all clips and plastic guides from the structure. Clips are designed for single usage only. The new inflator assembly will contain new clips and plastic guides. 4. Remove the SIR module fasteners from the inflator retention tabs and clips. Remove the SIR module from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Unpack the new inflator assembly. Start at the rear of the vehicle and install the inflator module to the structure with integral T-locator and fasteners. IMPORTANT: Position the module tether rearward of the molding attaching clips. Tighten the fasteners to 5 N.m (44 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8019 2. Working from the rear of the vehicle, install the retaining tabs to the structure to hold the inflator module in place. 3. Install the remaining side SIR module fasteners. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Visually inspect the side curtain to assure that the curtain is not twisted. 4. Install the hook on the curtain tether to the windshield pillar. Snap the hook retainer into place. 5. Install the headliner and the garnish moldings to the vehicle. 6. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. 7. After replacing the module, deploy the old module before disposal. If the module was replaced under warranty, fully deploy and dispose of the module after the required retention period. Refer to Inflator Module Handling and Scrapping. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation AIR BAG INDICATOR The AIR BAG indicator, located in the IPC, is used to notify the driver of SIR system malfunctions and to verify that the SDM is communicating with the IPC. When the ignition is turned ON, the SDM is supplied with ignition positive voltage. The SDM requests the IPC to flash the AIR BAG indicator seven times. While flashing the indicator, the SDM conducts tests on all SIR system components and circuits. If no malfunctions are detected, the SDM will communicate with the IPC through the class 2 serial data circuit and command the AIR BAG indicator OFF. The SDM provides continuous monitoring of the air bag circuits by conducting a sequence of checks. If a malfunction is detected the SDM will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and command the IPC to turn the AIR BAG indicator ON via class 2 serial data. The presence of a SIR system malfunction could result in non-deployment of the air bags or deployment in conditions less severe than intended. The AIR BAG indicator will remain ON until the malfunction has been repaired. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Description and Operation Knee Diverter: Description and Operation KNEE BOLSTER The knee bolsters are designed to help restrain the lower torso of front seat occupants by absorbing the energy through the front seat occupants upper legs. In a collision, the front seat occupants legs may come in contact with the knee bolsters. The knee bolsters are designed to crush and deform, absorbing some of the impact and helping to reduce bodily injuries. The driver and passenger knee bolsters are located in the lower part of the instrument panel and must be inspected for damages after a collision. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8030 Knee Diverter: Service and Repair KNEE BOLSTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screws from the trim panel. 2. Remove the filler panel by pulling until the trim clips disengage. 3. Remove the trim panel by pulling on the panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the outer trim panel. 2. Push to install the panel. 3. Fasten the screws that hold the left side trim panel to the I/P. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8035 I/P Harness Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8036 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8037 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8038 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at strategic locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM compares the signals from the internal and external sensors to a value stored in memory. When the generated signals exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags or seat belt pretensioners. If the force of the impact is not sufficient to warrant inflator module deployment, the SDM may still deploy the seat belt pretensioners. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator located in the IPC ON. As soon as three distinct deployment commands (representing different events) have been issued to any belt pretensioner, or the SDM commands any front and side air bag to deploy once, the SDM shall be considered to not be reusable. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON, notifying the driver that a malfunction exist. In the event that ignition positive voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8039 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the console assembly. 3. Remove the retainers from the connector position assurance (CPA) and disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the nuts and remove the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM to the vehicle with the nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the console assembly. 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8. 5. Reprogram the BCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning IMPORTANT: If you do NOT perform the BCM programming procedure, the vehicle option content information which is read by the BCM may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8040 incorrect and a DTC B1001 Option Configuration Error will set in both the SDM and the BCM. This will illuminate the AIR BAG telltale. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8059 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8060 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8061 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8062 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8063 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8064 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8065 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8066 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8067 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8068 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8069 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8070 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8071 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8072 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8073 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8074 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8075 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8076 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8077 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8078 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8079 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8080 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8081 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8082 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8083 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8084 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8085 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8086 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8087 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8088 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement - Child Restraint Tether Anchor Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Bezel Replacement - Child Restraint Tether Anchor BEZEL REPLACEMENT - CHILD RESTRAINT TETHER ANCHOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Fold down the rear seat back. 2. Remove the tether anchor bezel by pulling up at the sides. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the tether anchor bezel by pushing down on the sides. 2. Move the rear seat back to the upright position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement - Child Restraint Tether Anchor > Page 8094 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Child Restraint Tether Anchor Replacement (Early Production) CHILD RESTRAINT TETHER ANCHOR REPLACEMENT (EARLY PRODUCTION) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Fold down the rear seat back. 2. Remove the tether anchor escutcheon by pulling up at the sides. 3. Remove the tether anchor fastener and remove the tether anchor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement - Child Restraint Tether Anchor > Page 8095 1. Position the tether anchor onto the rear seat structure. 2. Install the tether anchor fastener. Tighten the fastener to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Verify that the tether anchor tab is inserted into the notch. 3. Install the tether anchor escutcheon. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 8104 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 8110 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 8115 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-09-40-002E > Oct > 10 > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 8121 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front (Quick Connect) SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - FRONT (QUICK CONNECT) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, depress the button on the seat buckle quick disconnect feature while pulling up on the shoulder belt to disengage the shoulder belt from the front seat assembly. 2. Remove the lower garnish molding from the center pillar. 3. Remove the retractor fastener and remove the retractor. 4. Remove the shoulder belt webbing retainer by pulling on the retainer while using a flat-bladed tool to disengage the attaching clips. 5. Remove the shoulder belt from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 8124 1. Position the shoulder belt retractor into the center pillar positioning unit with the locking tab in the body structure notch. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Install the retractor fastener. Tighten the fastener to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Snap the shoulder belt webbing retainer into the center pillar. 4. Install the lower garnish molding into the center pillar. 5. Install the seat belt to the seat assembly Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 8125 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Center Rear SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - CENTER REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the seat back cover. 3. Remove the comfort guide, if equipped. 4. Remove the seat back cover. 5. Feed the seat belt webbing, the bezel, and the anchor plate through the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 8126 6. Remove the retractor cover fasteners. 7. Remove the rear shoulder belt fasteners. 8. Pull upward on the retractor unit cover and remove the retractor from the rear seat back frame. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the retractor into the rear seat back frame and install the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Position the retractor cover over the shoulder belt retractor and install the TORX(R) fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 8127 3. Route the webbing and the escutcheon through the seat back trim cover. IMPORTANT: Verify that the shoulder belt is not twisted. 4. Continue to install the seat back trim cover by pressing over the hook and loop locations to ensure proper engagement. 5. Install the seat belt webbing bezel. Tighten the rear seat belt center bezel screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 6. Install the seat back cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 8128 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the rear lower quarter trim. 3. Remove the rear wheel quarter trim panel by pulling at the attaching clip locations. 4. On the driver side, disconnect the auxiliary plug wire harness connection. 5. Remove the shoulder belt fastener at the floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 8129 6. Remove the retractor fastener and remove the retractor. 7. Unsnap the upper fastener cover and remove the shoulder belt upper fastener. Remove the shoulder belt assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the retractor into the structure. Verify that the locking tabs are in place. Install the fastener. Tighten the fastener to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 8130 IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Install the shoulder belt upper fastener. Tighten the fastener to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). 3. Snap the fastener cover closed. 4. Install the shoulder belt to the floor with the fastener. Tighten the fastener to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). IMPORTANT: Verify that the belt is not twisted during installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Quick Connect) > Page 8131 5. On the driver side, connect the auxiliary plug connection. 6. Install the lower quarter trim. 7. Install the rear seat assembly. 8. Install the rear seat fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 9. Operate the shoulder belt to ensure proper installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 8140 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 8145 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 8151 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 07-09-40-002A > Jun > 09 > Restraints Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-003 Date: August 03, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard To Move Past Stitching And/Or Finish Knot Is Fraying (Trim Frayed Stitching) Models: 2005-2006 Buick Allure (Canada Only), LaCrosse 2005-2006 Cadillac XLR 2005-2006 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Equinox 2005-2006 GMC Canyon 2005-2006 Pontiac G6 2006 Pontiac Torrent Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the seat belt buckle is hard to move down the belt past the park stitching. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that the seat belt park stitching finish knot is fraying. Cause 1 This stitching is meant to prevent the seat belt latch plate from contacting the door trim or the "B" pillar molding when passengers are not present and if the plate is left below the stitching, it may rattle. Cause 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 05-09-40-003 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Hard to Move > Page 8160 The finish knot on the corner of the stitching is slightly larger than the stitching and may be frayed from the seat belt buckle passing over it as shown in the illustration above. Correction 1 Move the seat belt plate past the park stitching several times. This will help ease any difficulty the customer may encounter. Correction 2 Trim the frayed end of the stitching Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 07-09-40-002A > Jun > 09 > Restraints Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Side Mount) Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front (Side Mount) SEAT BELT BUCKLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT (SIDE MOUNT) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, depress the button on the seat buckle quick disconnect while pulling up on the shoulder belt to disengage the shoulder belt from the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 3. Remove the seat belt buckle fastener and remove the seat belt buckle. 4. On the driver side, remove the belt buckle wiring clip from the seat adjuster. Remove the seat belt buckle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat belt buckle and the fastener to the seat adjuster. Tighten the fasteners to 45 N.m (33 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Side Mount) > Page 8168 2. On the driver side, attach the seat belt wiring clip to the seat adjuster. 3. Install the front seat in the vehicle. 4. Snap the shoulder belt assembly into the front seat mini-belt buckle. IMPORTANT: Verify that the shoulder belt is not twisted. 5. Operate the front seat shoulder belt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Side Mount) > Page 8169 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front (Quick Connect) SEAT BELT BUCKLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT (QUICK CONNECT) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, depress the button on the seat buckle quick disconnect while pulling up on the shoulder belt to disengage the shoulder belt from the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 3. On the driver side, using a 90-degree pair of pliers, pull firmly on the recliner and riser handle cover to remove the handle cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Side Mount) > Page 8170 4. On the passenger side, remove the recliner side cover fastener and remove the cover. 5. Remove the side trim fasteners and remove the side trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Side Mount) > Page 8171 6. Remove the fastener and remove the shoulder belt quick disconnect. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the shoulder belt quick disconnect. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Side Mount) > Page 8172 2. Install the side trim with the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. On the passenger side, install the recliner side cover with the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Side Mount) > Page 8173 4. On the driver side, install the recliner and seat riser covers by firmly pushing on the handle cover. 5. Install the front seat to the vehicle. 6. Install the shoulder belt into the shoulder belt quick disconnect. IMPORTANT: Verify that the shoulder belt is not twisted. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front (Side Mount) > Page 8174 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Center Rear SEAT BELT BUCKLE REPLACEMENT - CENTER REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the fastener from the seat belt center buckle. 3. Pull the buckle through the opening gin the seat cushion and remove the buckle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Route the buckle through the openings in the seat cushion. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Install the seat belt buckle with the fastener. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the rear seat assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Component Views Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8178 Seat Belt Switch - Left Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-005F Date: June 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Belt Extender Availability Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009‐2011 model years and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-09-40-005E (Section 09 Restraints). Important: DO NOT use belt extenders when securing a child restraint. The seat and shoulder belt restraint systems used in all General Motors vehicles have sufficient belt length to accommodate most drivers and passengers. Consequently, requests for belt extensions (extenders) should be minimal. Seat belt extenders are available ONLY IN BLACK for most GM passenger cars and trucks produced in recent years. They are available in two different lengths, 23 cm (9 in) and 38 cm (15 in). They are designed to be coupled with the existing belts in each vehicle. When in use, the extender makes the belt arrangement a "custom fit" and use by anyone else or in another vehicle will lessen or nullify the protection offered by the vehicle's restraint system. For this reason, it is extremely important that the correct length extender be used for the vehicle and occupant intended. Important: Do not use an extender just to make it easier to buckle the safety belt. Use an extender only when you cannot buckle the safety belt without using an extender. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of extenders, see Extension Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate parts catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration catalog for the vehicle. U.S. Saab dealers should contact the Parts Help line. Canadian Saab dealers should fax requests to Partech Canada. Warranty Information ^ Seat belt extenders are a NO CHARGE item to all GM customers who request them for their specific vehicles. ^ Dealers should not be charging part costs since these extenders are supplied by GM to the dealers. ^ Dealers should not be charging labor costs since the extender can be customer installed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Guide Track > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Guide Track: Service and Repair GUIDE REPLACEMENT - REAR SEAT SHOULDER BELT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lower the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the shoulder belt from the comfort guide. 3. Remove the comfort guide retainer and remove the comfort guide. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the comfort guide to the rear seat back with the retainer. 2. Install the comfort guide to the shoulder belt assembly. 3. Operate the rear seat shoulder belt assembly to verify proper installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center pillar upper garnish molding. 2. Remove the fasteners from the shoulder belt height adjuster. Remove the height adjuster. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the shoulder belt height adjuster with the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Apply Permatex(R) 24200 on all restraint fasteners prior to installation. 2. Install the center pillar upper garnish molding. 3. Operate the shoulder belt to ensure proper installation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 8193 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 8194 Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Left Front SEAT BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER REPLACEMENT - LEFT FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2. 2. Remove the front bucket seat. 3. Remove the front seat belt anchor from the rear outboard stud. 4. Open the seat belt guide loop cover. 5. Remove the nut from seat belt guide loop. 6. Remove the seat belt guide loop from the guide adjuster bracket. 7. Remove the center pillar lower trim. 8. Remove the bolt from the seat belt retractor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 8197 9. Remove the seat belt retractor from the center pillar. 10. Remove the front seat belt from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat belt retractor to the center pillar. 2. Install the bolt to the seat belt retractor. Tighten the bolt to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the center pillar lower trim. 4. Place the seat belt guide loop to the guide adjuster bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 8198 5. Install the nut to the seat belt guide loop. Tighten the nut to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 6. Install the seat belt guide loop cover. 7. Place the seat belt anchor plate to the seat rear outboard stud. 8. Install the front bucket seat. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 8199 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Right Front SEAT BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER REPLACEMENT - RIGHT FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. 2. Remove the front bucket seat. 3. Remove the front seat belt anchor from the rear outboard stud. 4. Open the seat belt guide loop cover. 5. Remove the nut from seat belt guide loop. 6. Remove the seat belt guide loop from the guide adjuster bracket. 7. Remove the center pillar lower trim. 8. Remove the bolt from the seat belt retractor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 8200 9. Remove the seat belt retractor from the center pillar. 10. Remove the front seat belt from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat belt retractor to the center pillar. 2. Install the bolt to the seat belt retractor. Tighten the bolt to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the center pillar lower trim. 4. Place the seat belt guide loop to the guide adjuster bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Left Front > Page 8201 5. Install the nut to the seat belt guide loop. Tighten the nut to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 6. Install the seat belt guide loop cover. 7. Place the seat belt anchor plate to the seat rear outboard stud. 8. Install the front bucket seat. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt Pretensioner - Left Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8205 Seat Belt Pretensioner - Right Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8206 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER The seat belt pretensioner modules contain a housing, a seat belt retractor, the seat belt webbing, an initiating device, and a canister of gas generating material. The initiator is part of the seat belt pretensioner deployment loop. When the vehicle is involved in a collision of sufficient force, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops to the initiator. Current passing through the initiator ignites the material in the canister producing a rapid generation of gas and the release of compressed gas, if present. The gas produced from this reaction deploys the seat belt pretensioner and retracts the seat belt webbing, which removes slack in the seat belt. Depending on the severity of the collision, the seat belt pretension may deploy without the frontal inflator modules deploying, or they will deploy immediately before the frontal inflator modules deploy. As soon as three distinct deployment commands (representing different events) have been issued to any belt pretensioner the SDM shall be considered to not be reusable. Each seat belt pretensioner is equipped with a shorting bar located on the connector of the pretensioner. The shorting bar shorts the seat belt pretensioner deployment loop circuitry to prevent unwanted deployment of the pretensioner when servicing the seat belt pretensioner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Deployment Procedures DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES The seat belt pretensioner can be deployed inside or outside of the vehicle. The method used depends upon the final disposition of the vehicle. Review the deployment procedures in order to determine which will work best in a given situation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8209 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping PRETENSIONER HANDLING AND SCRAPPING TOOLS REQUIRED - J 38826 SIR Deployment Harness - J 39401-B SIR Deployment Fixture - An appropriate pigtail adapter CAUTION: When carrying an undeployed inflatable restraint seat belt retractor pretensioner: Do not carry the seat belt pretensioner by the seat belt webbing or pigtail connector, if equipped. - Carry the seat belt pretensioner by the housing, keeping hands and fingers away from the seat belt webbing. - Make sure the opening, from which the seat belt webbing extends, faces downward and the seat belt webbing hangs freely. Failure to observe these guidelines may result in personal injury. SCRAPPING PROCEDURE During the course of a vehicles useful life, certain situations may arise which will require the disposal of a live and undeployed seat belt pretensioner. Do not dispose of a live and undeployed seat belt pretensioner through normal disposal channels until the seat belt pretensioner has been deployed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disposing of a live and undeployed seat belt pretensioner. Do not deploy the seat belt pretensioner in the following situations: After replacement of a seat belt pretensioner under warranty. The seat belt pretensioner may need to be returned undeployed to the manufacturer. - If the vehicle is the subject of a Product Liability report, GM1241, related to the SIR system or the seat belt system. If the vehicle is subject to the Product Liability report, do not alter the SIR or seat belt system in any manner. - If the vehicle is involved in a campaign affecting the seat belt pretensioners. Follow the instructions in the Campaign Service Bulletin for proper SIR handling procedures. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8210 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Deployment Outside Vehicle For Seat Belt Pretensioners DEPLOYMENT OUTSIDE VEHICLE FOR SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Deploy the seat belt pretensioners outside of the vehicle when the vehicle will be returned to service. Situations that require deployment outside of the vehicle include the following: - Using the SIR diagnostics, it is determined that the seat belt pretensioner is malfunctioning. - The seat belt pretensioner pigtail, if equipped, is damaged. - The seat belt pretensioner connector is damaged. - The seat belt pretensioner connector terminals are damaged. Deployment and disposal of a malfunctioning seat belt pretensioner is subject to any required retention period. CAUTION: In order to prevent accidental deployment and the risk of personal injury, do not dispose of an undeployed inflatable restraint seat belt pretensioner as normal shop waste. Undeployed seat belt pretensioners contain substances that could cause severe illness or personal injury if their sealed containers are damaged during disposal. Use the following deployment procedures to safely dispose of an undeployed seat belt pretensioner. Failure to observe the following disposal methods may be a violation of federal, state, or local laws. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the ignition key. 3. Put on safety glasses. 4. Remove the seat belt pretensioner from the vehicle. 5. When carrying a seat belt pretensioner to the deployment area, keep fingers clear of the seat belt webbing. 6. Clear a space on the ground about 1.85 m (6 ft) in diameter for deployment of the seat belt pretensioner. If possible, use a paved, outdoor location free of activity. Otherwise, use a space free of activity on the shop floor. Make sure you have sufficient ventilation. 7. Make sure no loose or flammable objects are in the area. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8211 8. Place the J 39401-B in the center of the cleared area. 9. Fill the fixture plastic reservoir with water or sand. 10. Mount the seat belt pretensioner in the SIR deployment fixture with the seat belt webbing exiting through the top of the pretensioner. Use the following mounting method. Adjust and secure two of the J 39401-B arms to the deployment fixture, with the short slotted portions of the arms standing vertically and facing toward the center of the deployment fixture. - To mount, use the proper size bolt and nut with washers in order to secure the seat belt pretensioner mounting hole between the two deployment fixture brackets. - Securely tighten all fasteners prior to deployment. 11. Inspect the J 38826 and the appropriate pigtail adapter for damage. Replace as needed. 12. Short the 2 SIR deployment harness (1) leads together using one banana plug seated into the other. 13. Connect the appropriate pigtail adapter (2) to the SIR deployment harness (1). 14. Extend the SIR deployment harness and adapter to full length from the deployment fixture. 15. Connect the seat belt pretensioner connector to the adapter on the deployment harness. 16. Clear the area of people. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8212 IMPORTANT: When deploying a seat belt pretensioner, the rapid expansion of gas is very loud. Notify the people in the immediate area that a seat belt pretensioner will be deployed. 17. Place a 12-volt minimum/2-amp minimum power source, such as a vehicle battery, near the shorted end of the harness. 18. Separate the 2 banana plugs on the SIR deployment harness. 19. Connect the SIR deployment harness wires to the power source. Seat belt pretensioner deployment will occur when contact is made. 20. Disconnect the SIR deployment harness from the power source after the seat belt pretensioner deploys. 21. Seat one banana plug into the other in order to short the deployment harness leads. 22. If the seat pretensioner did not deploy, disconnect the adapter and discontinue the procedure. Contact the Technical Assistance Group. Otherwise, proceed to the following steps. 23. Put on a pair of shop gloves. 24. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the seat belt pretensioner as soon as possible. 25. Dispose of the deployed seat belt pretensioner through normal refuse channels. 26. Wash hands with a mild soap. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8213 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Deployment Inside Vehicle (Vehicle Scrapping Procedure) DEPLOYMENT INSIDE VEHICLE (VEHICLE SCRAPPING PROCEDURE) Deploy the seat belt pretensioners inside of the vehicle when destroying the vehicle or when salvaging the vehicle for parts. This includes but is not limited to the following situations: - The vehicle has completed its useful life. - Irreparable damage occurs to the vehicle in a non-deployment type accident. - Irreparable damage occurs to the vehicle during a theft. - The vehicle is being salvaged for parts to be used on a vehicle with a different VIN as opposed to rebuilding as the same VIN. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the ignition key. 3. Put on safety glasses. 4. Remove all loose objects from the front seats. 5. Disable the SIR System. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones. 6. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 7. Cut the seat belt pretensioner harness connector out of the vehicle, leaving at least 16 cm (6 in) of wire at the connector. 8. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from each of the connector wire leads. 9. Cut two 6.1 m (20 ft) deployment wires from a 0.8 mm (18 gage) or thicker multi-strand wire. These wires will be used for the seat belt pretensioner deployment harness. 10. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8214 11. Twist together one end from each of the wires in order to short the wires. Deployment wires shall remain shorted, and not connected to a power source until you are ready to deploy the seat belt pretensioner. 12. Twist together one connector wire lead to one deployment wire. 13. Inspect that the previous connections is secure. 14. Bend flat the twisted connection. 15. Secure and insulate the connection using electrical tape. 16. Twist together, bend, and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire. 17. Connect the deployment harness to the seat belt pretensioner connector. 18. Route the deployment harness out of the driver side of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8215 19. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 20. Cut the seat belt pretensioner connector out of the vehicle, leaving at least 16 cm (6 in) of wire at the connector. 21. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from each of the connector wire leads. 22. Cut two 6.1 m (20 ft) deployment wires from a 0.8 mm (18 gage) or thicker multi-strand wire. These wires will be used for the seat belt pretensioner deployment harness. 23. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. 24. Twist together one end from each of the wires in order to short the wires. The deployment wires are to remain shorted, and not connected to a power source until you are ready to deploy the seat belt pretensioner. 25. Twist together one connector wire lead to one deployment wire. 26. Inspect that the previous connection is secure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8216 27. Bend flat the twisted connection. 28. Secure and insulate the connection using electrical tape. 29. Twist together, bend, and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire. 30. Connect the deployment harness to the seat belt pretensioner connector. 31. Route the deployment harness out of the passengers side of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 8217 32. Completely cover the windshield and the front door openings with a drop cloth. 33. Stretch out all of the deployment harness wires on the passenger side of the vehicle to their full length. 34. Deploy each deployment loop one at a time. 35. Place a power source, 12-volt minimum/2-amp minimum, such as a vehicle battery, near the shorted end of the harnesses. 36. Separate one set of wires and touch the wire ends to the power source in order to deploy the seat belt pretensioners. 37. Disconnect the deployment harness from the power source and twist the wire ends together. 38. Continue the same process with the remaining deployment harnesses that are available. 39. Stretch out all the deployment harness wires on the driver side of the vehicle to their full length. 40. Place a power source, 12-volt minimum/2-amp minimum, such as a vehicle battery, near the shorted end of harness. 41. Separate one set of wires and touch the wire ends to the power source in order to deploy the seat belt pretensioner. 42. Remove the drop cloth from the vehicle. 43. Disconnect all harnesses from the vehicle. 44. Discard the harnesses. 45. Scrap the vehicle in the same manner as a non - Restraint Systems equipped vehicle. 46. If one or more of the seat belt pretensioners did not deploy, perform the following steps to remove the undeployed seat belt pretensioner from the vehicle, refer to Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner Replacement - Left Front or Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner Replacement - Right Front. 47. Call the Technical Assistance Group for further assistance. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Left (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 8224 Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Right (ASF) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) > Page 8225 Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Front End Sensor INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END SENSOR The front end sensor, also known as the electronic frontal sensor (EFS), is equipped on vehicles to supplement the SIR system performance. The EFS is an electronic sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The EFS can assist in determining the severity of some frontal collisions. The SDM contains a microprocessor which performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the frontal deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front End Sensor > Page 8228 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Side Impact Sensor (SIS) INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SIS) The side impact sensor (SIS) contains a sensing device which monitors vehicle acceleration and velocity changes to detect side collisions that are severe enough to warrant air bag deployment. The SIS is not part of the deployment loop, but instead provides an input to the SDM. The SDM contains a microprocessor that performs calculations using the measured accelerations and compares these calculations to a value stored in memory. When the generated calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the side air bags. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Replacement Caution: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. Preliminary Procedure: Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. 1. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Tip: Loosen the TORX head bolt in order to remove sensor. The bolt has left hand threads. Tighten 8 N.m (71 lb in) 2. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor Assembly. Procedure: 1. Slide the sensor towards the front of vehicle to guide the sensor bolt out of release slot. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8231 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. CAUTION: When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint side impact sensor (SIS). Before applying power to the SIS make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedures could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. 2. Remove the center pillar lower molding. 3. Loosen the fasteners on the side impact sensor (SIS). 4. Remove the SIS by sliding the module up and out of the key slots in the sheet metal. 5. Disconnect the SIS electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other contaminants from the mounting surface. 2. Connect the SIS electrical connector and insert into the connector position assurance (CPA) to secure. 3. Place the SIS through the access hole in the lock pillar. 4. Slide the module down and locate the captured fastener in the key slots of the lock pillar. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8232 Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the center pillar lower molding. 6. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 or to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Component Views Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8236 Seat Belt Switch - Left Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Accessory Delay Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8246 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8247 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8248 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8249 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8250 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8251 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8252 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8253 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8254 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8255 Accessory Delay Module: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8256 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8257 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8258 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8259 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8260 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8261 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8262 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8263 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8264 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8265 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8266 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8267 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8268 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8269 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8270 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8271 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8272 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8273 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8274 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8275 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8276 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8277 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8278 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8279 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8280 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8281 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8282 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8283 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8284 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8285 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8286 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8287 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8288 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8289 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8290 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8291 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8292 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8293 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8294 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8295 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8296 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8297 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8298 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8299 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8300 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8301 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8302 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8303 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8304 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8305 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8306 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8307 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8308 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8309 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8310 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8311 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8312 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8313 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8314 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8315 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8316 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8317 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8318 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8319 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8320 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8321 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8322 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Mast > Component Information > Service and Repair Antenna Mast: Service and Repair FIXED ANTENNA MAST REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Turn the antenna mast counterclockwise to remove the mast. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the antenna mast. Turn the mast clockwise to tighten. Tighten the mast to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-08-46-003B > Feb > 05 > Instruments - GPS System Performance Degradation Antenna, Navigation: Customer Interest Instruments - GPS System Performance Degradation Info - Global Position Sensor (GPS) Performance Degradation # 00-08-46-003B - (Feb 9, 2005) Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Trucks 2002-2005 Saturn Vehicles with Navigation Systems and/or OnStar(R) This bulletin is being revised to include additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-003A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Navigation and OnStar(R) systems require a GPS antenna in order to function properly. This antenna may be located inside the vehicle. If the GPS antenna is located inside the vehicle, performance of the system may be compromised by window tinting film. If the GPS system performance is in question and the vehicle has window tinting, a quick diagnostic check can be made by temporarily moving the GPS antenna to an external vehicle surface, such as the decklid or roof. If the GPS function of the navigation or On Star(R) system operates normally with the antenna relocated the repair would not be considered a warranty repair. The subsequent repair procedure or GPS placement would be up to the customer. Some vehicles have the GPS antenna located on the rear window shelf Objects placed on the rear window shelf such as tissue boxes, books, dolls, etc,, also have the potential to interfere with GPS performance. Warranty Information Repairs made to the vehicle navigation and/or OnStar(R) system, which are the result of window tinting, are not considered warranty repairs. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-002A > Apr > 05 > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Antenna, Navigation: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-002A > Apr > 05 > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 8340 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-003B > Feb > 05 > Instruments - GPS System Performance Degradation Antenna, Navigation: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - GPS System Performance Degradation Info - Global Position Sensor (GPS) Performance Degradation # 00-08-46-003B - (Feb 9, 2005) Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Trucks 2002-2005 Saturn Vehicles with Navigation Systems and/or OnStar(R) This bulletin is being revised to include additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-003A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Navigation and OnStar(R) systems require a GPS antenna in order to function properly. This antenna may be located inside the vehicle. If the GPS antenna is located inside the vehicle, performance of the system may be compromised by window tinting film. If the GPS system performance is in question and the vehicle has window tinting, a quick diagnostic check can be made by temporarily moving the GPS antenna to an external vehicle surface, such as the decklid or roof. If the GPS function of the navigation or On Star(R) system operates normally with the antenna relocated the repair would not be considered a warranty repair. The subsequent repair procedure or GPS placement would be up to the customer. Some vehicles have the GPS antenna located on the rear window shelf Objects placed on the rear window shelf such as tissue boxes, books, dolls, etc,, also have the potential to interfere with GPS performance. Warranty Information Repairs made to the vehicle navigation and/or OnStar(R) system, which are the result of window tinting, are not considered warranty repairs. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-002A > Apr > 05 > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Antenna, Navigation: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-002A > Apr > 05 > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 8350 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Antenna, Phone: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 8355 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Global Positioning System Antenna: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 8360 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8361 Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair ANTENNA ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT - CELLULAR AND NAVIGATION REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the windshield garnish molding. 2. Remove the sunshade from the headliner. 3. Remove the door edge molding from the door opening. 4. Lower the front corner of the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement in Interior Trim. 5. Disconnect the wire harness from the roof antenna. 6. Remove the antenna nut. 7. Remove the antenna from the roof. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Attach the antenna base to the roof and fasten the antenna nut. Tighten the nut to 2 N.m (18 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the antenna. 3. Push the headliner back into place. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door in Interior Trim. 4. Attach the sunshade to the headliner. Refer to Sunshade Replacement in Interior Trim. 5. Attach the windshield garnish molding. Refer to Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coaxial Cable Replacement - Digital Radio Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Coaxial Cable Replacement - Digital Radio COAXIAL CABLE REPLACEMENT - DIGITAL RADIO REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel center trim plate. 2. Disconnect the cable from the radio. 3. Disconnect the digital radio cable from the antenna. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the digital radio cable to the antenna. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coaxial Cable Replacement - Digital Radio > Page 8367 2. Connect the cable to the radio. 3. Install the instrument panel center trim plate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coaxial Cable Replacement - Digital Radio > Page 8368 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable Replacement ANTENNA CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel center trim plate. 2. Disconnect the extension cable from the radio. 3. Disconnect the extension cable from the antenna. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the extension cable to the antenna. 2. Connect the extension cable to the radio. 3. Install the instrument panel center trim plate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 8375 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT NOTE: - Use of the wrong battery size may damage the transmitter. - When removing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. IMPORTANT: If the transmitter won't work, perform the RKE System Check before replacing the battery. Also, before replacing the battery in the transmitter, make sure that the battery is touching both the negative and positive contacts inside of the transmitter. For battery replacement, use a Panasonic type CR2032 3-volt battery, or equivalent. 1. Use a small coin, or flat-head screwdriver, to separate the bottom of the transmitter from the top. 2. Remove the circuit board from the transmitter housing and key pad by pressing on the LOCK button. NOTE: Do not use sharp objects to help slide the battery out of the clip. This may result in damage to the circuit board. 3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery out of the battery clip. This may require a push from the back side of the clip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8380 4. Replace the battery with the new one making sure that the (+) side of the battery faces away from the circuit board. 5. Reassemble the circuit board and key pad, and replace them in the transmitter housing which does not contain the key pad openings. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to pinch the key pad while closing the housing. 6. Line up and replace the lower housing by snapping the upper and lower housings together. 7. Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle by pressing and holding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for 7 or more seconds. This is required to reestablish communications with the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8384 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8385 Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Diagrams Cellular Telephone Microphone Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8390 Cellular Phone Microphone: Service and Repair ONSTAR MICROPHONE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small, flat-bladed tool, pry at the forward edge of the reading lamp cover to disengage the forward clips. Slide the cover forward to disengage the rearward hooks. 2. Disconnect the OnStar(R) microphone harness. 3. Depress the microphone snap tabs. 4. Push on the rear face of the microphone to remove the microphone from the cover. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the OnStar(R) microphone in the cover. 2. Install the microphone by snapping into place. 3. Connect the wiring harness. 4. Snap the cover to engage the snap tabs. 5. Slide the cover rearward to engage the rear hooks. 6. Snap the reading lamp cover into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8399 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8400 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8401 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8402 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8403 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8404 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8405 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8406 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8407 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8408 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8409 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8410 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8411 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8412 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8413 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8414 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8415 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8416 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8417 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8418 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8419 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8420 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8421 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8422 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8423 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8424 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8425 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8426 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8427 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8428 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8429 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8430 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8431 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8432 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 8438 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 8443 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 8448 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 8449 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 8455 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-46-001 Date: 090409 OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-46-001 Date: April 09, 2009 Subject: Servicing Vehicles Upgraded to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital‐Capable System (Follow Information Below) Models Attention: This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and the procedures to diagnose an upgraded OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Program Overview Since it was launched in 1996, OnStar® has relied on an analog wireless network to provide communication to and from OnStar-equipped vehicles. As part of an industry wide change in the North American wireless telecommunications industry, wireless carriers are transitioning to digital technology and will no longer support the analog wireless network beginning early 2008. Effective January 1, 2008, OnStar(R) service in the United States and Canada will be available only through vehicles that are capable of operating on the digital network. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006H for information about upgrading certain vehicles to digital service. Details were covered in both the November 2006 and December 2007 issues of TechLink, which are available in the Archives of the TechLink website. Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within the OnStar(R) Canada Online Enrollment site that can be accessed from the OnStar(R) Brand Resources in GlobalConnect. Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8464 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8465 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8466 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8467 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8468 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8469 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8470 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8471 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8472 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8473 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8474 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8475 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8476 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8477 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8478 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8479 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8480 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8481 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8482 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8483 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8484 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8485 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8486 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8487 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8488 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8489 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8494 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8495 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8496 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8497 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8498 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8499 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8500 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8501 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8502 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8503 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8504 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8505 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8506 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8507 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8508 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8509 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8510 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8511 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8512 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8513 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8514 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8515 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8516 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8517 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8518 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8519 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8520 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8521 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8522 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8523 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8524 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8525 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8526 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8527 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006Q Date: 081028 OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-006Q Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Information on Upgrading Certain OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready Systems to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable System Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the upgrade kit installation information for the 2001 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006P (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and procedures to follow should an owner wish to upgrade their OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready system to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Disclaimer Program Overview Program Overview To upgrade their vehicle to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system, all that a customer must do is: ^ Take their vehicle to their dealer for the system upgrade. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8532 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8533 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8534 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8535 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8536 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8537 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8538 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8539 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8540 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8541 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8542 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8543 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 8548 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 8561 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 8566 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 8567 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 8573 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-46-001 Date: 090409 OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-46-001 Date: April 09, 2009 Subject: Servicing Vehicles Upgraded to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital‐Capable System (Follow Information Below) Models Attention: This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and the procedures to diagnose an upgraded OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Program Overview Since it was launched in 1996, OnStar® has relied on an analog wireless network to provide communication to and from OnStar-equipped vehicles. As part of an industry wide change in the North American wireless telecommunications industry, wireless carriers are transitioning to digital technology and will no longer support the analog wireless network beginning early 2008. Effective January 1, 2008, OnStar(R) service in the United States and Canada will be available only through vehicles that are capable of operating on the digital network. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006H for information about upgrading certain vehicles to digital service. Details were covered in both the November 2006 and December 2007 issues of TechLink, which are available in the Archives of the TechLink website. Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within the OnStar(R) Canada Online Enrollment site that can be accessed from the OnStar(R) Brand Resources in GlobalConnect. Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8582 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8583 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8584 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8585 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8586 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8587 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8588 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8589 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8590 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8591 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8592 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8593 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8594 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8595 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8596 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8597 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8598 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8599 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8600 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8601 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8602 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8603 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8604 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8605 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8606 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8607 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006Q Date: 081028 OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-006Q Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Information on Upgrading Certain OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready Systems to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable System Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the upgrade kit installation information for the 2001 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006P (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and procedures to follow should an owner wish to upgrade their OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready system to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Disclaimer Program Overview Program Overview To upgrade their vehicle to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system, all that a customer must do is: ^ Take their vehicle to their dealer for the system upgrade. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8612 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8613 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8614 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8615 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8616 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8617 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8618 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8619 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8620 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8621 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8622 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8623 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 8628 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 8641 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 8646 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 8647 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8657 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8658 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8659 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8660 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8661 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8662 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8663 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8664 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8665 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8666 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8667 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8668 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8669 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8670 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8671 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8672 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8673 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8674 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8675 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8676 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8677 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8678 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8679 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8680 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8681 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8682 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8687 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8688 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8689 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8690 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8691 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8692 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8693 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8694 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8695 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8696 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8697 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8698 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8699 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8700 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8701 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8702 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8703 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8704 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8705 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8706 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8707 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8708 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8709 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8710 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8711 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8712 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8713 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8714 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8715 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8716 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8717 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8718 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8719 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8720 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8725 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8726 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8727 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8728 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8729 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8730 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8731 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8732 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8733 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8734 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8735 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8736 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 8741 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Headphones / Earphones > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Entertainment System - Headphone Foam Pad Replacement Headphones / Earphones: Technical Service Bulletins Entertainment System - Headphone Foam Pad Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-08-44-005A Date: July 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Rear Seat Headphone Foam Ear Pad Replacement if Worn or Damaged Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with Rear Seat Entertainment System (RPOs U32, U42) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the shipping costs. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-44-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Foam ear pads on the rear headphone may become worn or damaged. The headphone foam ear pads may wear out when not handled and stored carefully. If the headphone foam ear pads become damaged or worn out, the foam pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set. It is not necessary to replace the complete headphone set. Parts Information All pricing information listed in this bulletin is in U.S. dollars and is subject to change without notice. The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs directly through the supplier. Have your customer call Unwired at 1-888-293-3332, then prompt zero (0). The replacement, P/N CS-980 (thick earfoam), can be ordered for $3.50 (USD) per pair plus $2.50 USPS shipping. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Global Positioning System Antenna: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 8760 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8761 Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair ANTENNA ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT - CELLULAR AND NAVIGATION REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the windshield garnish molding. 2. Remove the sunshade from the headliner. 3. Remove the door edge molding from the door opening. 4. Lower the front corner of the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement in Interior Trim. 5. Disconnect the wire harness from the roof antenna. 6. Remove the antenna nut. 7. Remove the antenna from the roof. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Attach the antenna base to the roof and fasten the antenna nut. Tighten the nut to 2 N.m (18 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the antenna. 3. Push the headliner back into place. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door in Interior Trim. 4. Attach the sunshade to the headliner. Refer to Sunshade Replacement in Interior Trim. 5. Attach the windshield garnish molding. Refer to Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations VCIM Location Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8765 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8766 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8767 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8768 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fastener located on the bottom of the OnStar(R) bracket. IMPORTANT: The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) has a specific set of unique numbers that tie the module to each vehicle. These numbers, the 10-digit station identification and the 11-digit electronic serial number, are used by the National Cellular Network and OnStar(R) to identify the specific vehicle. Because these numbers are tied to the vehicle identification number of the vehicle, you must never exchange these parts with those of another vehicle. 2. Tilt the module inboard to the center of the vehicle and pull down the communication interface module (CIM) 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8769 4. Remove the bolts from the OnStar(R) bracket assembly. 5. Lower the bracket and remove the CIM from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. If replacing the VCIM, record the 10-digit STID number, and the 11-digit ESN number from the labels on the new module. 2. Install the OnStar(R) CIM bracket. 3. Connect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. 4. Tilt the CIM inboard and install the CIM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8770 5. Install the CIM fastener. Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Refer to OnStar Reconfiguration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning IMPORTANT: After replacing the vehicle communication interface module, you must reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. In addition, pressing and holding the white dot button on the keypad will NOT reset this version of the OnStar(R) system. This action will cause a DTC to set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Personalization PERSONALIZATION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Personalization features may be set for the vehicle or the driver. Vehicle features do not change with each driver. For more information on vehicle personalization features for this vehicle, refer to Vehicle Personalization. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization > Page 8775 Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Vehicle Personalization VEHICLE PERSONALIZATION PROGRAMMING FEATURES WITH TECH 2 Enter Programming To enter Programming with the Tech 2, perform the following actions: 1. Install the scan tool. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Select the correct vehicle and model year. 4. Select F1: Body Control Module 5. Select F2: Special Functions 6. Select F2: Personalization SETTING OPTIONS Select an option with the UP/DOWN ARROW keys. The selected option will be highlighted. Use the SIDE TO SIDE ARROW keys to activate or deactivate the highlighted options, an ASTERISK will be displayed when an option has been ACTIVATED. Use the SOFT keys to save the selected options or use the EXIT key to leave the options unchanged. After all options have been selected press the SOFT key to continue. The following is a list of the selectable options: F0: Pre-alarm Option - F1: CTD Operation - F2: Door Lock Operation - F3: Fob Feedback - F4: Afterblow Option Pre-alarm Option Refer to Theft Systems Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. CTD Operation Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. Door Lock Operation Automatic Door Lock and Automatic Door Unlock can be configured with the Tech 2. Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors for more information. Fob Feedback Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry for information. Afterblow Option Refer to SIR Syste Description and Operation in Restraint Systems for information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8784 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8785 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8786 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8787 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8788 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8789 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8790 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8791 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8792 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8793 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8794 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8795 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8796 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8797 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8798 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8799 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8800 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8801 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8802 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8803 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8804 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8805 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8806 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8807 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8808 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8809 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8810 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8811 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8812 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8813 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8814 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8815 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8816 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8817 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Navigation System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 8823 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Navigation System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 8828 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 8834 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-08-44-006 > Oct > 10 > Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-006 Date: October 11, 2010 Subject: Reporting Missing or Inaccurate Navigation Radio Map Disc Information - Complete and Submit Feedback Form at GM Navigation Disc Center Website Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Navigation Radio Some customers may notice that some navigation radio map discs may have missing or incorrect information. The following list contains some examples: - Missing or incorrect roads, road names or road shapes - Missing or incorrect addresses - Missing or incorrect highway labeling - Missing or incorrect highway exit numbers - Missing or incorrect traffic restrictions - Missing points of interest (POI) or incorrect details, such as location, category or phone number General Motors uses a map database from two different suppliers. The two map suppliers are consistently updating their map database and will gladly accept any input regarding missing or incorrect information on the navigation radio map disc. To report any missing or incorrect information, please access the GM Navigation Disc Center at the following web site: http://www.gmnavdisc.com. At the GM Navigation Disc Center home page, select the tab: Your Feedback. In the Navigation Data Feedback form, fill in the appropriate information as required and then select: Submit, to send the form. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-44-012E Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: DVD Navigation Update Program, Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid, AVN Software Update Discs and Ordering Information Models: 2002-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please direct this information to your Sales Consultants, Service Consultants, Parts Personnel and Used Car Department. This bulletin ONLY applies to North American dealers/retailers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2010 model year and update the usage table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). DVD Navigation Update Program The data on the DVD map disc ages at a rate of 15-20% per year. As the data ages, the functionality of the navigation system declines. Offering GM customers new navigation DVDs will ensure that the customers have the latest information for their system. General Motors offered a Navigation Disc Update Program for 2006 and 2007 model year vehicles. This program concluded on December 31, 2009. The DVD Navigation Update Program policy has changed and customers are no longer eligible for free annual updates, however, a navigation DVD update disc can be purchased for $199 (USD) + shipping. If the navigation disc is needed for a warranty situation, the disc can be purchased for $120 (USD). The dealer must provide a VIN and RO# to qualify for the reduced price. The dealer must call the GM Navigation Disc Center, as this option is not available on the website. The GM Navigation Disc Center launched on March 15, 2006. There are two ways to obtain an updated disc: - Via the web through gmnavdisc.com - GM Navigation Disc Center Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid The following table can be used to identify acceptable discs for testing the navigation unit's map drive functionality. This should only be used to verify the map drive's ability to read the map disc properly and to determine if there is an issue with the unit's map drive or the disc. Some functions, such as voice recognition, may not work properly with some of the discs in the list. If the disc is found to be defective always contact the GM Navigation Disc Center to obtain the most recent disc for the vehicle. AVN Software Update Discs Technical Service Bulletins are sometimes generated to address specific navigation radio operational or performance issues. When a navigation radio bulletin is issued, it may contain instructions to utilize an advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update with a specific part number. GM dealers must order advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update discs as directed in the specific bulletin. AVN software update discs are for the dealer to update the navigation radio software only. They do NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. AVN software update discs can be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). To obtain an AVN software update disc, follow the specific ordering information provided in the bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program > Page 8843 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-46-001 Date: 090409 OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-46-001 Date: April 09, 2009 Subject: Servicing Vehicles Upgraded to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital‐Capable System (Follow Information Below) Models Attention: This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and the procedures to diagnose an upgraded OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Program Overview Since it was launched in 1996, OnStar® has relied on an analog wireless network to provide communication to and from OnStar-equipped vehicles. As part of an industry wide change in the North American wireless telecommunications industry, wireless carriers are transitioning to digital technology and will no longer support the analog wireless network beginning early 2008. Effective January 1, 2008, OnStar(R) service in the United States and Canada will be available only through vehicles that are capable of operating on the digital network. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006H for information about upgrading certain vehicles to digital service. Details were covered in both the November 2006 and December 2007 issues of TechLink, which are available in the Archives of the TechLink website. Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within the OnStar(R) Canada Online Enrollment site that can be accessed from the OnStar(R) Brand Resources in GlobalConnect. Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8852 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8853 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8854 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8855 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8856 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8857 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8858 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8859 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8860 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8861 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8862 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8863 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8864 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8865 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8866 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8867 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8868 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8869 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8870 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8871 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8872 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8873 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8874 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8875 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8876 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 8877 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-010F Date: March 09, 2009 Subject: Navigation Radio Diagnostic Tips Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Equipped with Navigation Radio Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years involved, the radio part number list, remove the PQC parts restriction and revise the diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-010E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Recent part reviews indicate that the majority of Navigation Radios returned for analysis do not test as defective. In many cases, published SI documents were available to correct the condition without the need for an exchange unit. The following Diagnostic Tips may assist with the proper diagnosis and repair of Navigation Radio Concerns. Note For U.S. dealers the 2009 and 2010 Model Year Navigation Radios are currently on restriction through the Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Refer to PI PIC5102. To order Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC) for 2008 and prior model year vehicles, please continue to follow the normal process and contact an authorized Electronic Service Center (ESC) for assistance. For any Navigation Radio replaced, a copy of the Repair Order (RO) must be included with the returned radio. Be sure to document the customer's concern in detail, including unusual noises and what functions are affected. List any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) on the RO. Ensure the radio is sufficiently protected during shipping to prevent damage to the radio assembly. Note Navigation Radios with physical damage (for example: shattered displays, impact damage to the radio face and fluid damage) must be reviewed with the District Service Manager for appropriate coverage prior to replacing the radio. The dealership must note the District Service Manager's approval on the Repair Order, along with the reason for the goodwill assistance. Do NOT disassemble the radio to try and retrieve stuck CDs/DVDs as this may result in a debit to the dealership. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-015, Information on Inappropriate Warranty Claims submitted for Damaged Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters. Getting Started Retrieve the Navigation Radio part number using the Tech 2(R). Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-44-005C - Utilizing Tech 2 to Retrieve Part Numbers for Radios, Compact Disc (CD) Changers and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC). Use the table below to determine the appropriate Diagnostic Tips Review to follow based on the radio part number. Scroll down the bulletin to find the corresponding Diagnostic Tips Review. Printing This Document To print the applicable Diagnostic Tips Review pages, select File then Print Preview. Use the arrows at the top of the screen to scroll left and right through the bulletin to identify the correct pages containing the questions. With the pages identified, click on the Print button at the top left. In the pop-up box, select "Pages" in the "Print Range" and type in the pages. For example, to print pages 19 through 22, type in the box provided "19-22". Once the page range has been filled in, click the Print box at the bottom of the pop-up box. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8882 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8883 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8884 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8885 Diagnostic Tips Review Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8886 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8887 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8888 Diagnostic Tips Review # 1 - Delphi Super Nav and Black Tie Nav Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8889 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8890 Diagnostic Tips Review # 2 - Delphi Legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8891 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8892 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8893 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8894 Diagnostic Tips Review # 3 - Denso Navigation Radios Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8895 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8896 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8897 Diagnostic Tips Review # 4 - Denso legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8898 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 8899 Diagnostic Tips Review # 5 - Alpine Silver Box Navigation Radio Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8904 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8905 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8906 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8907 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8908 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8909 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8910 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8911 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8912 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8913 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8914 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8915 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8916 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8917 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8918 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8919 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8920 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8921 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8922 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8923 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8924 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8925 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8926 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8927 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8928 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8929 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8930 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8931 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8932 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8933 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8934 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8935 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8936 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 8937 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006Q Date: 081028 OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-006Q Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Information on Upgrading Certain OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready Systems to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable System Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the upgrade kit installation information for the 2001 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006P (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and procedures to follow should an owner wish to upgrade their OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready system to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Disclaimer Program Overview Program Overview To upgrade their vehicle to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system, all that a customer must do is: ^ Take their vehicle to their dealer for the system upgrade. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8942 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8943 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8944 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8945 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8946 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8947 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8948 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8949 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8950 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8951 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8952 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 8953 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 8958 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-023 > Jun > 08 > Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-023 Date: June 18, 2008 Subject: Information On Navigation Radio Not Displaying Accurate Vehicle Location After Radio Replacement, Power Loss Or Battery Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Navigation Radio The purpose of this bulletin is to inform technicians and customers that the Navigation Radio may not display the vehicle location icon on the map accurately after a radio or battery has been replaced or after battery power has been removed from the radio. The vehicle location icon accuracy may be degraded if the GPS signal is not available and the GPS displayed icon has a red line through it. The Navigation Radio does not keep learned GPS information or gyroscope and vehicle speed signals stored when the battery power is removed from the radio. The Navigation radio continually uses GPS, gyroscope and vehicle speed data to maintain the vehicle location icon positioned accurately on the displayed map. There may be periods of time during a drive cycle when the GPS signal may not be available and the vehicle location icon still appears to be accurate. This is due to the radio having internal gyroscopes and receiving a vehicle speed signal to maintain accuracy if the radio had received a good GPS signal earlier in the drive cycle. Normal driving will improve the accuracy of the vehicle location icon on the displayed map. It may be necessary for the vehicle to be driven up to 40 km (25 mi) with 15 left and 15 right turns while the vehicle location icon is matched to roads on the displayed map. Do not replace the radio for this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 8975 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 07-08-44-007 > Apr > 07 > Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Bulletin No.: 07-08-44-007 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Obtaining Replacement Navigation Discs When Radios are Exchanged Order Replacement Navigation Disc Through Navigation Disc Center Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X with a Navigation Radio Attention: The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealership personnel of a new procedure for obtaining a replacement navigation disc for radios that are sent to an ESC for exchange. This bulletin applies to U.S. and Canadian dealers only and is not intended for use by export dealers. When a navigation radio warranty exchange is performed, the customer must have a navigation disc to operate the new radio. If the customer's navigation disc was damaged or is stuck in the failed radio, the customer would have to wait for an excessive period of time for the disc to be returned or replaced. The Electronic Service Centers (ESC) are not authorized to remove stuck navigation discs from cores, as the cores must be returned to the supplier for analysis prior to any disassembly. The time it would take for the supplier to return the navigation disc would significantly delay the completion of the repair at the dealership. If the customer's navigation disc is damaged or cannot be removed from the radio, the dealership is to obtain an exchange radio through an ESC and a new navigation disc through the GM Navigation Disc Center. Both items can be shipped overnight to the dealership upon request. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information Via the web through gmnavdisc.com The GM Navigation Disc Center is also the center of expertise for navigation system questions. Warranty Information Include the part number and cost of the new navigation disc on the warranty claim for the navigation radio exchange. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 8985 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-08-44-006 > Oct > 10 > Navigation Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-006 Date: October 11, 2010 Subject: Reporting Missing or Inaccurate Navigation Radio Map Disc Information - Complete and Submit Feedback Form at GM Navigation Disc Center Website Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Navigation Radio Some customers may notice that some navigation radio map discs may have missing or incorrect information. The following list contains some examples: - Missing or incorrect roads, road names or road shapes - Missing or incorrect addresses - Missing or incorrect highway labeling - Missing or incorrect highway exit numbers - Missing or incorrect traffic restrictions - Missing points of interest (POI) or incorrect details, such as location, category or phone number General Motors uses a map database from two different suppliers. The two map suppliers are consistently updating their map database and will gladly accept any input regarding missing or incorrect information on the navigation radio map disc. To report any missing or incorrect information, please access the GM Navigation Disc Center at the following web site: http://www.gmnavdisc.com. At the GM Navigation Disc Center home page, select the tab: Your Feedback. In the Navigation Data Feedback form, fill in the appropriate information as required and then select: Submit, to send the form. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-44-012E Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: DVD Navigation Update Program, Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid, AVN Software Update Discs and Ordering Information Models: 2002-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please direct this information to your Sales Consultants, Service Consultants, Parts Personnel and Used Car Department. This bulletin ONLY applies to North American dealers/retailers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2010 model year and update the usage table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). DVD Navigation Update Program The data on the DVD map disc ages at a rate of 15-20% per year. As the data ages, the functionality of the navigation system declines. Offering GM customers new navigation DVDs will ensure that the customers have the latest information for their system. General Motors offered a Navigation Disc Update Program for 2006 and 2007 model year vehicles. This program concluded on December 31, 2009. The DVD Navigation Update Program policy has changed and customers are no longer eligible for free annual updates, however, a navigation DVD update disc can be purchased for $199 (USD) + shipping. If the navigation disc is needed for a warranty situation, the disc can be purchased for $120 (USD). The dealer must provide a VIN and RO# to qualify for the reduced price. The dealer must call the GM Navigation Disc Center, as this option is not available on the website. The GM Navigation Disc Center launched on March 15, 2006. There are two ways to obtain an updated disc: - Via the web through gmnavdisc.com - GM Navigation Disc Center Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid The following table can be used to identify acceptable discs for testing the navigation unit's map drive functionality. This should only be used to verify the map drive's ability to read the map disc properly and to determine if there is an issue with the unit's map drive or the disc. Some functions, such as voice recognition, may not work properly with some of the discs in the list. If the disc is found to be defective always contact the GM Navigation Disc Center to obtain the most recent disc for the vehicle. AVN Software Update Discs Technical Service Bulletins are sometimes generated to address specific navigation radio operational or performance issues. When a navigation radio bulletin is issued, it may contain instructions to utilize an advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update with a specific part number. GM dealers must order advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update discs as directed in the specific bulletin. AVN software update discs are for the dealer to update the navigation radio software only. They do NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. AVN software update discs can be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). To obtain an AVN software update disc, follow the specific ordering information provided in the bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program > Page 8994 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-46-001 Date: 090409 OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-46-001 Date: April 09, 2009 Subject: Servicing Vehicles Upgraded to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital‐Capable System (Follow Information Below) Models Attention: This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and the procedures to diagnose an upgraded OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Program Overview Since it was launched in 1996, OnStar® has relied on an analog wireless network to provide communication to and from OnStar-equipped vehicles. As part of an industry wide change in the North American wireless telecommunications industry, wireless carriers are transitioning to digital technology and will no longer support the analog wireless network beginning early 2008. Effective January 1, 2008, OnStar(R) service in the United States and Canada will be available only through vehicles that are capable of operating on the digital network. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006H for information about upgrading certain vehicles to digital service. Details were covered in both the November 2006 and December 2007 issues of TechLink, which are available in the Archives of the TechLink website. Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within the OnStar(R) Canada Online Enrollment site that can be accessed from the OnStar(R) Brand Resources in GlobalConnect. Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9003 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9004 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9005 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9006 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9007 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9008 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9009 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9010 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9011 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9012 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9013 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9014 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9015 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9016 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9017 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9018 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9019 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9020 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9021 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9022 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9023 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9024 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9025 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9026 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9027 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9028 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-010F Date: March 09, 2009 Subject: Navigation Radio Diagnostic Tips Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Equipped with Navigation Radio Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years involved, the radio part number list, remove the PQC parts restriction and revise the diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-010E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Recent part reviews indicate that the majority of Navigation Radios returned for analysis do not test as defective. In many cases, published SI documents were available to correct the condition without the need for an exchange unit. The following Diagnostic Tips may assist with the proper diagnosis and repair of Navigation Radio Concerns. Note For U.S. dealers the 2009 and 2010 Model Year Navigation Radios are currently on restriction through the Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Refer to PI PIC5102. To order Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC) for 2008 and prior model year vehicles, please continue to follow the normal process and contact an authorized Electronic Service Center (ESC) for assistance. For any Navigation Radio replaced, a copy of the Repair Order (RO) must be included with the returned radio. Be sure to document the customer's concern in detail, including unusual noises and what functions are affected. List any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) on the RO. Ensure the radio is sufficiently protected during shipping to prevent damage to the radio assembly. Note Navigation Radios with physical damage (for example: shattered displays, impact damage to the radio face and fluid damage) must be reviewed with the District Service Manager for appropriate coverage prior to replacing the radio. The dealership must note the District Service Manager's approval on the Repair Order, along with the reason for the goodwill assistance. Do NOT disassemble the radio to try and retrieve stuck CDs/DVDs as this may result in a debit to the dealership. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-015, Information on Inappropriate Warranty Claims submitted for Damaged Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters. Getting Started Retrieve the Navigation Radio part number using the Tech 2(R). Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-44-005C - Utilizing Tech 2 to Retrieve Part Numbers for Radios, Compact Disc (CD) Changers and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC). Use the table below to determine the appropriate Diagnostic Tips Review to follow based on the radio part number. Scroll down the bulletin to find the corresponding Diagnostic Tips Review. Printing This Document To print the applicable Diagnostic Tips Review pages, select File then Print Preview. Use the arrows at the top of the screen to scroll left and right through the bulletin to identify the correct pages containing the questions. With the pages identified, click on the Print button at the top left. In the pop-up box, select "Pages" in the "Print Range" and type in the pages. For example, to print pages 19 through 22, type in the box provided "19-22". Once the page range has been filled in, click the Print box at the bottom of the pop-up box. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9033 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9034 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9035 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9036 Diagnostic Tips Review Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9037 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9038 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9039 Diagnostic Tips Review # 1 - Delphi Super Nav and Black Tie Nav Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9040 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9041 Diagnostic Tips Review # 2 - Delphi Legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9042 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9043 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9044 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9045 Diagnostic Tips Review # 3 - Denso Navigation Radios Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9046 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9047 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9048 Diagnostic Tips Review # 4 - Denso legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9049 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9050 Diagnostic Tips Review # 5 - Alpine Silver Box Navigation Radio Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006Q Date: 081028 OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-006Q Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Information on Upgrading Certain OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready Systems to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable System Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the upgrade kit installation information for the 2001 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006P (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and procedures to follow should an owner wish to upgrade their OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready system to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Disclaimer Program Overview Program Overview To upgrade their vehicle to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system, all that a customer must do is: ^ Take their vehicle to their dealer for the system upgrade. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9055 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9056 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9057 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9058 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9059 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9060 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9061 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9062 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9063 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9064 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9065 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9066 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital System Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital System Information > Page 9071 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) Aftermarket Device Interference Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-023 > Jun > 08 > Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-023 Date: June 18, 2008 Subject: Information On Navigation Radio Not Displaying Accurate Vehicle Location After Radio Replacement, Power Loss Or Battery Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Navigation Radio The purpose of this bulletin is to inform technicians and customers that the Navigation Radio may not display the vehicle location icon on the map accurately after a radio or battery has been replaced or after battery power has been removed from the radio. The vehicle location icon accuracy may be degraded if the GPS signal is not available and the GPS displayed icon has a red line through it. The Navigation Radio does not keep learned GPS information or gyroscope and vehicle speed signals stored when the battery power is removed from the radio. The Navigation radio continually uses GPS, gyroscope and vehicle speed data to maintain the vehicle location icon positioned accurately on the displayed map. There may be periods of time during a drive cycle when the GPS signal may not be available and the vehicle location icon still appears to be accurate. This is due to the radio having internal gyroscopes and receiving a vehicle speed signal to maintain accuracy if the radio had received a good GPS signal earlier in the drive cycle. Normal driving will improve the accuracy of the vehicle location icon on the displayed map. It may be necessary for the vehicle to be driven up to 40 km (25 mi) with 15 left and 15 right turns while the vehicle location icon is matched to roads on the displayed map. Do not replace the radio for this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 9088 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 07-08-44-007 > Apr > 07 > Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Bulletin No.: 07-08-44-007 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Obtaining Replacement Navigation Discs When Radios are Exchanged Order Replacement Navigation Disc Through Navigation Disc Center Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X with a Navigation Radio Attention: The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealership personnel of a new procedure for obtaining a replacement navigation disc for radios that are sent to an ESC for exchange. This bulletin applies to U.S. and Canadian dealers only and is not intended for use by export dealers. When a navigation radio warranty exchange is performed, the customer must have a navigation disc to operate the new radio. If the customer's navigation disc was damaged or is stuck in the failed radio, the customer would have to wait for an excessive period of time for the disc to be returned or replaced. The Electronic Service Centers (ESC) are not authorized to remove stuck navigation discs from cores, as the cores must be returned to the supplier for analysis prior to any disassembly. The time it would take for the supplier to return the navigation disc would significantly delay the completion of the repair at the dealership. If the customer's navigation disc is damaged or cannot be removed from the radio, the dealership is to obtain an exchange radio through an ESC and a new navigation disc through the GM Navigation Disc Center. Both items can be shipped overnight to the dealership upon request. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information Via the web through gmnavdisc.com The GM Navigation Disc Center is also the center of expertise for navigation system questions. Warranty Information Include the part number and cost of the new navigation disc on the warranty claim for the navigation radio exchange. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program > Page 9102 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9111 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9112 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9113 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9114 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9115 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9116 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9117 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9118 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9119 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9120 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9121 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9122 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9123 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9124 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9125 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9126 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9127 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9128 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9129 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9130 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9131 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9132 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9133 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9134 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9135 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9136 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9141 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9142 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9143 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9144 Diagnostic Tips Review Table Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9145 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9146 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9147 Diagnostic Tips Review # 1 - Delphi Super Nav and Black Tie Nav Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9148 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9149 Diagnostic Tips Review # 2 - Delphi Legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9150 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9151 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9152 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9153 Diagnostic Tips Review # 3 - Denso Navigation Radios Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9154 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9155 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9156 Diagnostic Tips Review # 4 - Denso legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9157 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 9158 Diagnostic Tips Review # 5 - Alpine Silver Box Navigation Radio Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9163 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9164 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9165 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9166 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9167 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9168 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9169 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9170 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9171 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9172 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9173 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9174 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9175 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9176 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9177 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9178 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9179 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9180 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9181 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9182 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9183 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9184 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9185 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9186 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9187 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9188 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9189 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9190 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9191 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9192 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9193 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9194 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9195 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9196 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9201 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9202 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9203 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9204 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9205 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9206 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9207 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9208 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9209 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9210 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9211 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9212 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) Analog/Digital System Information > Page 9217 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams Amplifier: Diagrams Amplifier C1 (With RPO Code U65) Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9238 Amplifier C1 (With RPO Code U65) Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9239 Amplifier C2 (With RPO Code U65) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9240 Amplifier: Service and Repair AMPLIFIER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat. 2. Remove the fasteners that hold the amplifier. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the amplifier. 4. Remove the amplifier from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the amplifier in the vehicle 2. Install the electrical connectors to the amplifier. 3. Install the fasteners to the amplifier. Tighten the fasteners to 3 N.m (26 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the rear seat. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations Steering Wheel Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 9249 Remote Control: Diagrams Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO code UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 9250 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Left (With RPO Code K34/UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 9251 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34 Without RPO Code UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 9252 Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right (With RPO Code K34/UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Speaker: Customer Interest Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Bulletin No.: 03-08-45-003D Date: February 24, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Reduced Power, Stuck in High Gear, SES Light On, DTCs P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 Set, Speaker Buzz Noise, HVAC Inoperative (Inspect/Replace Corroded or Bent Terminals) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2003 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update an illustration. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-45-003C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle is exhibiting one or more of the following conditions: ^ Reduced power ^ Transaxle not down shifting ^ SES light on ^ Buzz noise from door speaker(s) ^ Speaker(s) inoperative ^ HVAC blower motor inoperative ^ A/C compressor commanded OFF with vehicle speed (evaporator temperature sensor circuit 719 and/or 731 may be open) These conditions may be intermittent. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 may also be present. Cause The instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector), located behind the left hinge pillar garnish molding, may have bent or corroded terminals. Correction Disconnect and inspect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). If necessary, replace damaged terminals and apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 9261 1. Starting at the left hinge pillar garnish, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Reach under the instrument panel and pull upwards to disengage the additional clips and remove the molding from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 4. Inspect the connector for bent or corroded terminals. Important: If no corrosion or bent terminals are found, proceed to Step 7 and follow trouble code diagnostics in the service manual or SI. 5. Remove any bent or corroded pins from the connector. 6. Install the new terminal cut lead (verify correct size using connector/harness face views and electrical schematics in the appropriate service manual or SI). 7. Pack the connector terminals with dielectric grease in order to prevent any further corrosion. 8. Connect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 9. Install the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 9262 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 9263 Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 9264 To receive credit for any repairs during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim for the information shown. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Speaker: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON Bulletin No.: 03-08-45-003D Date: February 24, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Reduced Power, Stuck in High Gear, SES Light On, DTCs P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 Set, Speaker Buzz Noise, HVAC Inoperative (Inspect/Replace Corroded or Bent Terminals) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 2002-2003 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update an illustration. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-45-003C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle is exhibiting one or more of the following conditions: ^ Reduced power ^ Transaxle not down shifting ^ SES light on ^ Buzz noise from door speaker(s) ^ Speaker(s) inoperative ^ HVAC blower motor inoperative ^ A/C compressor commanded OFF with vehicle speed (evaporator temperature sensor circuit 719 and/or 731 may be open) These conditions may be intermittent. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) P0223, P0504, P0700, P1228, P1271, P1280, P1599, P1779, P1791, P2119, P2101, P2128, P2135, or P2138 may also be present. Cause The instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector), located behind the left hinge pillar garnish molding, may have bent or corroded terminals. Correction Disconnect and inspect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). If necessary, replace damaged terminals and apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 9270 1. Starting at the left hinge pillar garnish, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Reach under the instrument panel and pull upwards to disengage the additional clips and remove the molding from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 4. Inspect the connector for bent or corroded terminals. Important: If no corrosion or bent terminals are found, proceed to Step 7 and follow trouble code diagnostics in the service manual or SI. 5. Remove any bent or corroded pins from the connector. 6. Install the new terminal cut lead (verify correct size using connector/harness face views and electrical schematics in the appropriate service manual or SI). 7. Pack the connector terminals with dielectric grease in order to prevent any further corrosion. 8. Connect the instrument panel/body inline connector (black 40-pin electrical connector). 9. Install the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 9271 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 9272 Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 03-08-45-003D > Feb > 06 > Electrical - Numerous System Concerns/DTC's/SES Lamp ON > Page 9273 To receive credit for any repairs during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim for the information shown. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF Speaker - LF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9276 Speaker - LF (Tweeter) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9277 Speaker - LR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9278 Speaker - RF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9279 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker - LF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9280 Speaker - LF (Tweeter) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9281 Speaker - LR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9282 Speaker - RF Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9283 Speaker - RF (Tweeter) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9284 Speaker - RR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF > Page 9285 Speaker - Subwoofer (With RPO Code U65) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 9288 Speaker: Service and Repair Front Side Door Upper SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - FRONT SIDE DOOR UPPER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the upper extension of the door trim panel. 1. Pull at the top of the trim panel to disengage the trim clip. 2. Lift up to remove the lower tabs from behind the door trim. 3. Disconnect the speaker wiring harness. 2. Rotate and remove the tweeter from the trim panel. 3. Remove the speaker. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 9289 1. Position the speaker on the trim panel and twist to install the speaker. 2. Connect the speaker wiring harness. 3. Install the upper extension of the door trim panel. 1. Insert the tabs behind the door trim. 2. Push to engage the clip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 9290 Speaker: Service and Repair Rear Door SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - REAR DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. 4. Remove the speaker from the rear door. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the speaker. 2. Install the speaker to the rear door. 3. Install the screws to the speaker. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the rear door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 9291 Speaker: Service and Repair Rear SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the rear speaker fasteners. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the speaker. 4. Remove the speaker from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the speaker into the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the speaker. 3. Install the fasteners to the speaker. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the rear quarter trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 9292 Speaker: Service and Repair Front Door SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - FRONT DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. 4. Remove the speaker from the front door. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the speaker. 2. Install the speaker to the front door. 3. Install the screws to the speaker. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the front door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Accessory Delay Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9298 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9299 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9301 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9302 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9303 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9304 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9305 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9306 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9307 Accessory Delay Module: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9308 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9309 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9310 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9311 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9312 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9313 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9314 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9315 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9316 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9317 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9318 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9319 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9320 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9321 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9322 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9323 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9324 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9325 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9326 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9327 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9328 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9329 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9330 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9331 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9332 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9333 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9334 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9335 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9336 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9337 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9338 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9339 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9340 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9341 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9342 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9343 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9344 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9345 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9346 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9347 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9348 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9349 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9350 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9351 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9352 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9353 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9354 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9355 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9356 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9357 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9358 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9359 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9360 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: - The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9361 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9362 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9363 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9364 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9365 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9366 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9367 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9368 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9369 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9370 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9371 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9372 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9373 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9374 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9383 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9384 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9385 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9386 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9387 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9388 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9389 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9390 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9391 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9392 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9393 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9394 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9395 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9396 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9397 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9398 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9399 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9400 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9401 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9402 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9403 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9404 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9405 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9406 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9407 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9408 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9409 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9410 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9411 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9412 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9413 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9414 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9415 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9416 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 9422 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 9427 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 9432 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 9433 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 9439 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-46-001 Date: 090409 OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-46-001 Date: April 09, 2009 Subject: Servicing Vehicles Upgraded to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital‐Capable System (Follow Information Below) Models Attention: This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and the procedures to diagnose an upgraded OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Program Overview Since it was launched in 1996, OnStar® has relied on an analog wireless network to provide communication to and from OnStar-equipped vehicles. As part of an industry wide change in the North American wireless telecommunications industry, wireless carriers are transitioning to digital technology and will no longer support the analog wireless network beginning early 2008. Effective January 1, 2008, OnStar(R) service in the United States and Canada will be available only through vehicles that are capable of operating on the digital network. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006H for information about upgrading certain vehicles to digital service. Details were covered in both the November 2006 and December 2007 issues of TechLink, which are available in the Archives of the TechLink website. Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within the OnStar(R) Canada Online Enrollment site that can be accessed from the OnStar(R) Brand Resources in GlobalConnect. Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9448 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9449 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9450 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9451 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9452 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9453 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9454 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9455 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9456 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9457 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9458 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9459 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9460 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9461 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9462 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9463 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9464 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9465 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9466 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9467 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9468 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9469 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9470 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9471 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9472 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9473 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9478 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9479 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9480 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9481 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9482 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9483 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9484 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9485 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9486 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9487 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9488 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9489 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9490 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9491 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9492 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9493 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9494 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9495 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9496 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9497 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9498 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9499 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9500 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9501 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9502 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9503 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9504 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9505 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9506 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9507 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9508 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9509 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9510 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9511 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006Q Date: 081028 OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-006Q Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Information on Upgrading Certain OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready Systems to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable System Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the upgrade kit installation information for the 2001 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006P (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and procedures to follow should an owner wish to upgrade their OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready system to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Disclaimer Program Overview Program Overview To upgrade their vehicle to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system, all that a customer must do is: ^ Take their vehicle to their dealer for the system upgrade. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9516 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9517 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9518 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9519 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9520 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9521 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9522 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9523 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9524 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9525 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9526 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9527 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 9532 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 9545 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 9550 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 9551 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 9557 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-46-001 Date: 090409 OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-46-001 Date: April 09, 2009 Subject: Servicing Vehicles Upgraded to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital‐Capable System (Follow Information Below) Models Attention: This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and the procedures to diagnose an upgraded OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Program Overview Since it was launched in 1996, OnStar® has relied on an analog wireless network to provide communication to and from OnStar-equipped vehicles. As part of an industry wide change in the North American wireless telecommunications industry, wireless carriers are transitioning to digital technology and will no longer support the analog wireless network beginning early 2008. Effective January 1, 2008, OnStar(R) service in the United States and Canada will be available only through vehicles that are capable of operating on the digital network. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006H for information about upgrading certain vehicles to digital service. Details were covered in both the November 2006 and December 2007 issues of TechLink, which are available in the Archives of the TechLink website. Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within the OnStar(R) Canada Online Enrollment site that can be accessed from the OnStar(R) Brand Resources in GlobalConnect. Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9566 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9567 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9568 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9569 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9570 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9571 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9572 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9573 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9574 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9575 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9576 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9577 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9578 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9579 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9580 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9581 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9582 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9583 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9584 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9585 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9586 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9587 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9588 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9589 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9590 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9591 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006Q Date: 081028 OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-006Q Date: October 28, 2008 Subject: Information on Upgrading Certain OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready Systems to OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable System Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the upgrade kit installation information for the 2001 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-006P (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer personnel with information and procedures to follow should an owner wish to upgrade their OnStar(R) Analog/Digital-Ready system to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system. Disclaimer Program Overview Program Overview To upgrade their vehicle to an OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digital-Capable system, all that a customer must do is: ^ Take their vehicle to their dealer for the system upgrade. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9596 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9597 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9598 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9599 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9600 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9601 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9602 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9603 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9604 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9605 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9606 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9607 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-008C Date: September 18, 2008 Subject: Information on OnStar(R) Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Systems Models Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to correct the model year range for the Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo and update the reference to GM Dealerworld. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). All 2000-2003 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar® from the list above were built with Analog/Digital-Ready OnStar(R) Hardware. Some of these vehicles may have been upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital). Certain 2004-2005 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) from the list above may have been either: ^ Originally built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware OR ^ Upgraded to Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) Hardware All 2006 model year and newer vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) were built at the factory with Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware. If a vehicle has Dual-Mode (Analog/Digital) OnStar(R) Hardware, then the system is capable of operating on both the analog and digital cellular Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 9612 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 9625 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 9630 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 9631 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9641 If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. General Information 1. The first step is to verify if the OnStar(R) account is active or not. This can be done by pressing the blue OnStar(R) button and connecting to the OnStar(R) call center. Analog only accounts are no longer active. Only digital upgraded accounts will be active. On Gen 6 digital systems, a clear, or "dark" LED may indicate that the OnStar(R) system has been deactivated or may possibly have a no power/no communication condition. 2. If the account isn't active, the next step is to verify what version of OnStar(R) module is in the vehicle. This can be done via the Tech 2 (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by using www.onstarenrollment.com. 3. A Generation 5 or older analog module can be diagnosed by following the original electronic Service Information developed for the model year of the vehicle. Note: If the customer has an old analog module, the vehicle can be repaired by replacing the module, but the customer cannot have an active account without upgrading to a digital module. 4. Modules, antennas, brackets, and other equipment are in the same location, whether original analog production or digital upgrade. 5. An upgraded vehicle may also have a new vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) bracket. If it does, order the new bracket when replacing the bracket. Don't order the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, this jumper will be required for a new module replacement. Do not discard. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9642 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9643 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9644 Vehicles Built with Upgradeable OnStar(R) System Analog Modules Note: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9645 2007 Model Year Vehicles and Newer all have Digital OnStar(R) Modules. Part 1 OnStar(R) Description and Operation This OnStar(R) digital system consists of the following components: ^ Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) ^ OnStar(R) button assembly ^ Microphone ^ Cellular antenna ^ Navigation antenna Note This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system. Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) is a cellular device that allows the user to communicate data and voice signals over the national cellular network. Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The ignition state is determined by the VCIM through serial data messaging. Dedicated circuits are used to connect the VCIM to a microphone, the button assembly, and to command the status LED. The VCIM communicates with the rest of the vehicle modules using the serial data bus. The module houses 2 technology systems, one to process GPS data, and another for cellular information. The cellular system connects the OnStar(R) system to the cellular carrier's communication system by interacting with the national cellular infrastructure. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over the cellular antenna and cellular antenna coax. GPS satellites orbiting earth are constantly transmitting signals of their current location. The OnStar(R) system uses the GPS signals to provide location on demand. The module also has the capability of activating the horn, initiating door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the OnStar(R) Call Center per: a customer request. OnStar(R) Button Assembly The OnStar(R) button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is comprised of 3 buttons and a status LED. The buttons are defined as follows: ^ The answer/end call button, which is black with a white phone icon, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition. ^ The blue OnStar(R) call center button, which displays the OnStar(R) logo, allows the user to connect to the OnStar(R) call center. ^ The emergency button, which displays a white cross with a red background, sends a high priority emergency call to the OnStar(R) call center when pressed. The VCIM supplies 10 volts to the OnStar(R) button assembly on the keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM on the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned the VCIM is able to identify which button has been pressed. The OnStar(R) status LED is located with the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and operating normally. When the status LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the OnStar(R) system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStar(R) subscription is not active or has expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status. Each LED is controlled by the VCIM over dedicated LED signal circuits. Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9646 OnStar(R) Microphone The OnStar(R), or cellular microphone, can be a part of the rearview mirror assembly, or on some vehicle lines, a separate, stand alone unit. In either case, the VCIM supplies approximately 10 volts to the microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit, and voice data from the user is sent back to the VCIM over the same circuit. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the microphone. Cellular and GPS Antennas The vehicle will be equipped with one of the following types of antennas: ^ Separate, stand-alone cellular and navigation (GPS) antennas. ^ A combination cellular and navigation (GPS) antenna, which brings the functions of both into a single part. ^ A cellular, GPS, and digital radio receiver (DRR) antenna, which also incorporates the functionality of the DRR satellite antenna (XM). The cellular antenna is the component that allows the OnStar(R) system to send and receive data using electromagnetic waves by means of cellular technology. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The antenna is connected at the base to a coax cable that plugs directly into the VCIM. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. The OnStar(R) Call Center also has the capability of communicating with the vehicle during an OnStar(R) call to retrieve the latest GPS location and transmit it to the OnStar(R) Call Center. A history location of the last recorded position of the vehicle is stored in the module and marked as aged, for as long as the module power is not removed. Actual GPS location may take up to 10 minutes to register in the event of a loss of power. Audio System Interface When the OnStar(R) requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions and transmit OnStar(R) originated audio. The OnStar(R) audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with the radio ON. On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStar(R) system is active to aid in reducing interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting. OnStar(R) Steering Wheel Controls Some vehicles may have a button on the steering wheel, that when pushed can engage the OnStar(R) system. The button may be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through it. By engaging the OnStar(R) system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the information is not available for reference, at any command prompt, the user can say "HELP" and the VCIM will return an audible list of available commands. The steering wheel controls consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a resistor network. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value. When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network. This produces a specific voltage value unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by the radio or the body control module (BCM). OnStar(R) Power Moding (DRX or Sleep Cycle) The OnStar(R) system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in the OFF position and retained accessory power (RAP) mode has ended. A green status LED on the OnStar(R) keypad normally indicates an active OnStar(R) account. The OnStar(R) system will stay powered up after ignition off for an extended time in order to allow for remote services like door unlock, horn honk, light flash, etcetera to take place as requested by the customer. Power cycle (also referred to as DRX) times vary depending on the generation of the OnStar(R) system. Technicians may identify the OnStar(R) system generation by using a Tech 2 and following this menu path: (Body>VCIM>Module ID Information>Module Information 2) or by accessing www.onstarenrollment.com All Generation 6 digital systems are powered up continuously for 48 hours from ignition OFF. After 48 hours, the Generation 6 systems will enter a 9 minute OFF, 1 minute ON power cycle for an additional 72 hours. At the beginning and end of the 1 minute ON stage, you may or may not experience a short spike of current at the beginning and at the end. This allows for calls from OnStar to be received by the system. After 120 hours from ignition OFF, Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9647 these systems will then completely power OFF. OnStar(R) Module Expected Current Draw The expected current draw of the OnStar(R) module in various ignition modes are as follows: ^ Ignition ON ‐ 240 to 400 mA ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 3 to 20 mA for 48 hours ^ Ignition OFF ‐ 0.2 to 0.8 mA after 48 hours (120 hours on specified vehicle communication platforms (VCPs)). Note During extended voltage testing for battery parasitic draw, it is possible to observe a voltage spike caused by the following: ^ A cellular registration call that was triggered by the local cellular system. ^ The OnStar(R) system has set a monthly trigger for a vehicle data upload call for the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic E‐mail upload. OnStar(R) System States of Readiness The OnStar(R) system will use the following 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when the ignition is turned OFF. ^ High power ^ Low power ^ Sleep ^ Digital standby The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, retained accessory power (RAP) is enabled, and/or the OnStar(R) system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function. The low power state is in effect when the OnStar(R) system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or with RAP enabled. The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut OFF and the RAP has timed out. At a predetermined time recorded within the VCIM, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStar(R) Call Center for 1 minute. After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute interval, the OnStar(R) system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any requested functions. If a call is not received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStar(R) system will turn OFF until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the RAP has timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStar(R) module is able to perform all remote functions as commanded by an OnStar(R) advisor at any time, for a continuous 48 hours. After 48 hours, the OnStar(R) module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the CIM. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals, this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received. If the OnStar(R) system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position. Deactivated OnStar(R) Accounts In the event that a customer has not upgraded their vehicle to a digital system, the account has been deactivated. The customers have been previously notified of the steps required to upgrade their vehicles. After the OnStar(R) account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following: ^ The OnStar(R) status LED will not illuminate ^ The OnStar(R) system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center in the event of a collision or if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason. ^ An emergency button press will result in a demo message being played, indicating the service has been deactivated and needs to be upgraded. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9648 ^ An OnStar(R) Call Center button press WILL NOT connect the vehicle with OnStar(R). The vehicle must be upgraded to reactivate the account. The customer will hear a demo message stating that there is not a current OnStar(R) subscription for the vehicle. The message will also instruct the customer how to upgrade and reactivate services. ^ OnStar(R) personal calling (OPC) will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current OnStar(R) account. Attempts to use this feature will result in cellular connection failure messages and the inability to connect to the number dialed. Note For deactivated vehicles, a no connect response should be considered normal system operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary should the customer elect to become an active OnStar(R) subscriber and upgrade the account subscription. OnStar(R) Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations The proper operation of the OnStar(R) System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the network, and the GPS. The cellular operation of the OnStar(R) system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from a digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making an OnStar(R) key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers for the module, station identification number (STID), electronic serial number (ESN) or manufacturers electronic ID (MEID), are not recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers. The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStar(R) call which has reached the Call Center without vehicle data. During diagnostic testing of the OnStar(R) system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where digital cellular calls have been successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStar(R) keypress in a known good OnStar(R) equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStar(R) Call Center advisor. Such places can be used as a permanent reference for future OnStar(R) testing. Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call routing and connection. They are: ^ A mobile identification number (MIN) ^ A mobile directory number (MDN) Note The MIN represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes. The MDN represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device. Diagnostic Information Symptoms - Cellular Communication The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle, before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that the following are true: ^ There are no DTCs set. ^ The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation in SI. Diagnostic Starting Point - Displays and Gages Begin the displays and gages system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle or the audible warning system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9649 Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: ^ The identification of the control modules which command the system ^ The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit ^ The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Visual/Physical Inspection Perform the following visual inspections; ^ Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. ^ Inspect the easily accessible and visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Conditions Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. Symptom List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9650 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC U1000 and U1255 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. When a module does not associate an identification number with at least one critical parameter within 5 seconds of beginning serial data communication, DTC U1000 or U1255 DTC is set. When more than one critical parameter does not have an identification number associated with it, the DTC will only be reported once. The Class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle are in a hybrid ring and star configuration. Each module on the ring has 2 serial data circuits connected to it, except the following modules which have only 1 serial data circuit connected them: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9651 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Radio antenna module (listed as remote function actuation in scan tool display) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ TV antenna module ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) The star has 4 splice packs: ^ SP200 located in the left side of the instrument panel, near the steering column , taped to the instrument panel harness ^ SP201 located in the center of the instrument panel, near the radio ^ SP300 located in the left side middle of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, near the carpet seam ^ SP303 located in the right rear of the passenger compartment, taped to the body harness, approximately 24 cm (9.5 in) from the fuse block - right rear. Refer to Data Communication Schematics in SI. The following modules, components, and splice packs are connected to the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ Dash integration module (DIM) ^ Electronic brake control module (EBCM) ^ Engine control module (ECM) ^ Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) ^ Instrument panel cluster (IPC) ^ HVAC control module ^ Radio ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) OR ^ Communication interface module (CIM) ^ SP200 ^ SP201 ^ SP300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9652 ^ SP303 The following modules, components, and splice pack are connected to the star portion of the class 2 serial data circuit: ^ SP300 ^ Audio amplifier ^ Driver door module (DDM) ^ Driver door switch assembly (DDSA) ^ Memory seat module (MSM) ^ Left rear door module (LRDM) AND ^ SP303 ^ Antenna module ^ Front passenger door module (FPDM) ^ Rear integration module (RIM) ^ Right rear door module (RRDM) ^ Theft deterrent module (TDM) ^ Vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). Refer to Data Communication Schematics and Data Link Communications Description and Operation in SI. Part 2 Conditions for Running the DTC Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range of 9 - 16 volts. DTCs B1327, B1328, U1300, U1301, U1305 are not set as current. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A message containing a critical operating parameter has not been received within the last 5 seconds after establishing class 2 serial data communication. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When a malfunction such as an open fuse to a module occurs while modules are communicating, a DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is set current. When the modules stop communicating the current DTC U1001-1254 Loss of XXX Communications is cleared but the history DTC remains. When the modules begin to communicate again, the module with the open fuse will not be learned by the other modules so U1000 or U1255 is set current by the other modules. If the malfunction occurs when the modules are not communicating, only U1000 or U1255 is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9653 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9654 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9655 Test Description DTC U1001 and U1254 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. When a module receives a message for a critical operating parameter, the module records the identification number of the module which sent the message for State of Health monitoring. A critical operating parameter is one which, when not received, requires that the module use a default value for that parameter. Once an identification number is learned by a module, it will monitor for that module's Node Alive message. Each module on the class 2 serial data circuit which is powered and performing functions that require detection of a communications malfunction is required to send a Node Alive message every 2 seconds. When no message is detected from a learned identification number for 5 seconds, a DTC U1XXX where XXX is equal to the 3-digit identification number is set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9656 The control module ID number list above provides a method for determining which module is not communicating. A module with a class 2 serial data circuit malfunction or which loses power during the current ignition cycle will have a Loss of Communication DTC set by other modules that depend on information from that failed module. The modules that can communicate will set a DTC indicating the module that cannot communicate. Diagnostic Order When more than one Loss of Communication DTC is set in either one module or in several modules, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: 1. Current DTCs before history DTCs unless told otherwise in the diagnostic table. 2. The DTC which is reported the most times. 3. From the lowest number DTC to the highest number DTC. Conditions for Running the DTC The following DTCs do not have a current status: ^ B1327 ^ B1328 ^ U1300 ^ U1301 ^ U1305 AND ^ The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTC A node alive message has not been received from a module with a learned identification number within the last 5 seconds. Action Taken When the DTC Sets Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9657 The module uses a default value for the missing parameter. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat of the malfunction. Diagnostic Aids When multiple Loss of Communication DTCs are set concurrently, the cause is likely to be 2 opens in the ring portion of the class 2 serial data circuit. Use the Control Modules and Devices ‐ Description and Identification Number table in order to determine which modules are not communicating. Use the class 2 serial data circuit schematic in order to determine the location of the opens. Test Description Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9658 The number above refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. DTC U0073 or U2100 DTC Descriptors DTC U0073 00: Control Module Communication Bus Off DTC U0073 71: ECU HS Bus Off DTC U0073 72: ECU LS Bus Off DTC U2100 00: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication DTC U2100 47: Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus Communication Circuit/System Description The serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the control modules. The serial data circuits also connect directly to the data link connector (DLC). Conditions for Running the DTCs Supply voltage at the modules are in the normal operating range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications. Conditions for Setting the DTC The module setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3 times. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9659 Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. This DTC cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U0140 - U0184 Circuit Description Modules connected to the GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the GMLAN serial data circuit, a DTC will set. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the GMLAN serial data circuit. Conditions for Setting the DTCs Diagnostic algorithms are designed so that a single point failure within a particular node shall result in a single DTC/FTB combination being set. Any recognized faults shall generate one DTC. Recognized faults may include but are not limited to the following: ^ Open or shorted condition on an I/O Circuit outside of normal operation of that circuit. ^ Erratic signal of a circuit, outside of normal operation, which can be readily and repeatedly recognized as erratic. ^ A condition, outside of normal operation, which causes a customer perception of a performance problem. ^ A condition whether hardware or data link error, which causes a device to operate in a default or fail soft mode. ^ A condition which changes or limits system performance. ^ Network supervision/signal supervision errors. ^ ECU Internal errors. ^ Criteria determined by legislation. An initialization or shutdown self-test shall be performed and may include but is not limited to the following: ^ RAM check ^ ROM/EEPROM/Flash check Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9660 ^ I/O check Any faults detected during the initialization self-test shall generate a DTC. All nodes also continuously perform a self-test while in an active state. DTCs and their associated telltales will set as a result of unprogrammed or unlearned information. DTCs, which are defined for system configuration (e.g. Vehicle Option Content not programmed) do not support the history status bit (set =0). Warning indicator bit is also set, when applicable, while this DTC is present. Action Taken When the DTCs Sets The module suspends all message transmission. The module uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits. The module inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present. A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a repeat of the malfunction. Circuit/System Verification Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data system is used for a specific module. The DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the following symptom procedures: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device in SI. OR Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device in SI. DTC U1300, U1301, or U1305 Circuit Description Modules connected to the Class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. In addition to this, Node Alive messages are transmitted by each module on the Class 2 serial data circuit about once every 2 seconds. When the module detects one of the following conditions on the Class 2 serial data circuit for approximately 3 seconds, the setting of all other Class 2 serial communication DTCs is inhibited and a DTC will set. Conditions for Running the DTCs Voltage supplied to the module is in the normal operating voltage range. The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur. Conditions for Setting the DTCs No valid messages are detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit. The voltage level detected on the Class 2 serial data circuit is in one of the following conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9661 High OR Low The above conditions are met for more than 3 seconds. Circuit/System Verification These DTCs cannot be retrieved with a current status. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. An intermittent condition is likely to be caused by a short on the Class 2 serial data circuit. To diagnose use the Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with a Class 2 Device. Refer to SI. DTC B2455 DTC Descriptors DTC B2455 01: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Battery DTC B2455 02: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground DTC B2455 04: Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open Circuit Circuit/System Description Without RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) uses the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R). With RPO UAV The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) and navigation radio use the cellular phone microphone to allow driver communication with OnStar(R), as well as to operate the voice recognition/voice guidance feature of the navigation radio. Conditions for Running the DTC The ignition is in RUN or ACC position. System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 10 seconds. Conditions for Setting the DTC B2455 01: A short to battery is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 02: A short to ground is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. B2455 04: An open circuit is detected on the cellular microphone signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The VCIM and/or navigation radio (RPO UAV) will not receive any signal from the microphone. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Voice recognition will not function. Conditions for Clearing the DTC Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9662 A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Without RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. Circuit/System Testing With RPO UAV 1. Turn OFF the ignition and all electrical components, including the scan tool. 2. Disconnect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio and the harness connector at the cellular microphone. 3. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the low reference circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 4. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the signal circuit terminal B and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. ^ If less than the specified range, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the VCIM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the cellular microphone. 6. Connect the X4 harness connector at the navigation radio. 7. With a scan tool, verify that DTC B2455 is not set as current in the navigation radio. ^ If DTC B2455 is set as current, replace the navigation radio. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2462, B2483, or B2484 Circuit/System Description The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) receives information from a specific navigation antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The navigation antenna is connected to the VCIM via a shielded coaxial cable. The antenna cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. DTC Descriptors DTC B2462 02: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2462 04: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9663 DTC B2483: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Short to Ground DTC B2484: Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna Malfunction Open Circuit Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2462 02: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2462 04: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2483: The CIM detects a short to ground on the navigation antenna signal circuit. B2484: The CIM detects an open/high resistance on the navigation antenna signal circuit. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. The OnStar(R) Call Center cannot locate the vehicle. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Circuit/System Testing Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Disconnect the navigation antenna coax cable from the VCIM. 2. Ignition ON, test for 4.5-5.5 volts between the VCIM coax cable center conductor terminal at the VCIM and ground. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the VCIM. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. 3. Reconnect the coax cable to the VCIM. 4. Disconnect the coax cable from the navigation antenna. 5. Test for 4.55.5 volts between the coax cable center conductor and the outer shield. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the coax cable. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the navigation antenna. Refer to the appropriate vehicle in SI. DTC B2470 DTC Descriptor DTC B2470 04: Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit Circuit/System Description The cellular antenna is connected to the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) with an RG-58 coax cable. The VCIM collects the data from the cellular antenna once every second. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9664 Conditions for Running the DTC Ignition is in RUN or ACC position System voltage is between 9.5 - 15.5 volts. The above conditions are met for more than 1 second. Conditions for Setting the DTC The VCIM does not detect the presence of a cellular antenna for more than 1 second. Action Taken When the DTC Sets The vehicle is unable to connect to the OnStar(R) Call Center. The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The VCIM detects the presence of a cellular antenna. A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles. Circuit/System Testing Perform a visual inspection as shown above in order to verify that the cellular antenna and the cellular antenna coupling assembly are not damaged. If any components are damaged replace the assembly. DTC B2476 or B2482 DTC Descriptors Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9665 DTC B2476 04: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open Circuit DTC B2476 59: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Stuck Button DTC B2482 00: Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground Open / High Resistance Short to Voltage Signal Performance Circuit/System Description The OnStar(R) button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStar(R) Call Center, and OnStar(R) Emergency. The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) supplies the OnStar(R) button assembly with 10 volts via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the VCIM over the keypad signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the VCIM is able to identify which button has been activated. Conditions for Running the DTCs The ignition is ON. System voltage is between 9 - 16 volts. Conditions for Setting the DTCs B2476 04: The VCIM detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply voltage circuit. B2482 and B2476 59: The VCIM detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for more than 15 seconds. If one of the OnStar(R) buttons is held or stuck for 15 seconds or more, the VCIM will set these DTCs. Action Taken When the DTCs Set The OnStar(R) status LED turns red. No calls can be placed. The VCIM will ignore all inputs from the OnStar® button assembly. Conditions for Clearing the DTCs The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists. A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 09-08-46-001 > Apr > 09 > OnStar(R) - Generation 6 Service Procedures > Page 9666 Circuit/System Testing Component Testing Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 08089C Date: 081118 Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) # 08089C: Special Coverage Adjustment - Analog OnStar Deactivation (Nov 18, 2008) Subject: 08089C -- SPECIAL COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - ANALOG ONSTAR(R) DEACTIVATION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9671 Models The service procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Step 11 in the procedure for the 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) Convertible has been revised. Discard all copies of bulletin 08089B, issued September 2008. Condition In November 2002, the U.S. Federal Commissions (FCC) ruled that wireless carriers would no longer be required to support the analog wireless network beginning in 2008. As a result, On Star(R) is unable to continue analog service. OnStar(R) has deactivated most of the systems operating in the analog mode; however, there are some vehicles that OnStar(R) could not deactivate. Although the analog OnStar(R) hardware in these vehicles can no longer communicate with OnStar(R), the hardware in the vehicle is still active. If the OnStar(R) emergency button is pressed, or in the case of an airbag deployment, or near deployment, the customer may hear a recording that OnStar(R) is being contacted. However, since analog service is no longer available, the call will not connect to OnStar(R). To end the call, the customer must press the white phone or white dot button. If the call is not ended, the system will continue to try to connect to OnStar(R) until the vehicle battery is drained. Special Policy Adjustment At the customer's request, dealers/retailers are to deactivate the OnStar(R) system. The service will be made at no charge to the customer. This special coverage covers the condition described above until December 31, 2008 for all non-Saab vehicles; April 30, 2009 for all Saab vehicles. Vehicles Involved Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9672 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9673 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9674 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9675 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9676 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9677 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9678 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9679 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9680 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9681 Involved are certain vehicles within the VIN breakpoints shown above. PARTS INFORMATION -- Saab US Only Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this special coverage on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9682 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9683 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9684 Claim Information - GM, Saturn Canada and Saab Canada Only Claim Information - Saturn US Only Customer Reimbursement Claims - Special Attention Required Customer reimbursement claims must have entered into the "technician comments" field the CSO # (if repair was completed at a Saturn Retail Facility) date, mileage, customer name, and any deductibles and taxes paid by the customer. Claim Information - Saab US Only Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9685 1. To receive credit, submit a claim with the information above. Disclaimer 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2001 and Older Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: 2001 and older model year vehicles require the removal of the battery power from the OnStar(R) vehicle interface unit (VIU) to eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. 1. Locate and gain access to the OnStar® VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. Important: Complete removal of the VIU is usually not required. Perform only the steps required to gain access to the C2 32-way blue connector. Residing in the C2 connector are the battery positive (+) circuits. Removal of the C2 connector will deactivate the unit and eliminate the possibility of an inadvertent OnStar(R) or emergency/airbag call. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9686 2. Disconnect the C2 32-way blue connector from the VIU and tape the connector to a secure location. Refer to Cellular Communications Connector End Views and related schematics in SI, if required. Important: DO NOT perform the OnStar(R) reconfiguration and/or programming procedure. 3. Secure the VIU in its original brackets and/or mounting locations and reinstall the VIU and interior components that were removed to gain access to the VIU. Refer to OnStar Vehicle Interface Unit Replacement in SI. 2002 Through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) 2002 through 2006 Model Year Vehicles (Except Saab Vehicles) Important: The Tech 2 diagnostic tool must be updated with version 28.002 or later in order to successfully perform the VCIM setup procedure and disable the analog system. 1. Connect the Tech 2 to the data link connector (DLC), which is located under the instrument panel of the vehicle. 2. Turn the Tech 2 ON by pressing the power button. Important: Tech 2 screen navigation to get to the setup procedure depends on the year and make of the vehicle. The actual name of the setup procedure (Setup New OnStar or VCIM Setup) depends on model year and vehicle make as well. Example Tech 2 navigation to the setup procedure Tech 2 screen is provided below. ^ Diagnostics >> (2) 2002 >> Passenger Car >> Body >> C >> OnStar >> Special Functions >> Setup New OnStar >> ^ Diagnostics >> (5) 2005 >> Passenger Car >> (4) Buick >> C >> Body >> Vehicle Comm. Interface Module >> Module Setup >> VCIM Setup >> 3. Setup VCIM using the Tech 2. Follow on-screen instructions when you have reached the setup Tech 2 screen. 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2000-2002 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2000-2003 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 2. Apply the handbrake brake. 3. Detach the floor console. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 3.1. Twist loose the immobilizer unit (A), bayonet fitting. Unplug the unit's connector. 3.2. Remove the ignition switch cover (B) by first undoing the rear edge of the cover and then unhooking the front edge. Unplug the ignition Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9687 switch lighting connector. 3.3. Undo the floor console's retaining bolts (C). 3.4. Take out the rear ashtray/cover (D). 3.5. Remove the screw (E) for the rear cover. 3.6. Remove the floor console's retaining nuts (E). 3.7. Detach the floor console (G) by pulling it straight back and lifting it slightly. 3.8. If required, detach the switch for the rear seat heater and unplug the connector. 4. Remove the switch and the floor console: 4.1. Detach the window lift module (A) by loosening it in the front edge (snap fastener). Unplug the window lift module's connector. 4.2. Detach the switch for the roof lighting (B) and unplug its connector. Lift away the floor console. 5. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: 5.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9688 5.2 Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C) and pull out the connecting rail (D). 5.3. Remove pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 5.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 5.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 6. Install the floor console over the handbrake. Do not press the console down into place, but instead allow it to fit loosely. 7. Install the switch: 7.1. Install the switch for the roof lighting (B) and plug in its connector. 7.2. Guide the connectors for the window lift module and rear seat heater, if equipped, through the hole for each respective unit. Plug in the window lift module's connector and install the module (A). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9689 7.3. If equipped, connect the rear seat heater's connector and install the switch. 8. Install the floor console: 8.1. Install the floor console's retaining bolts (C) and retaining nuts (F). 8.2. Align the rear cover; make sure that the air duct connects firmly to the air nozzle. Screw in the cover (E). 8.3. Install the ashtray/cover (D). 8.4. Install the ignition switch cover (B). 8.5. Plug in the immobilizer unit (A) connector. Install the unit, bayonet fitting. 9. Remove the OnStar(R) control modules and secure the wiring: 9.1. Remove the right-hand rear luggage compartment trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 9.2. Unplug the connectors (A) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 9.3. Remove the console (B) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9690 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 9.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 9.5. Install the right-hand rear luggage compartment in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 10. Install the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 11. Clear the diagnostic trouble codes. 12. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID_ - Technical description. 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9400) CV 2003-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) 4D/5D; 2004-2005 Saab 9-3 (9440) CV Notice: Handle the fiber optic cables with care or the signal may be distorted. ^ It is very important that the two leads in the connector are not confused with one another. ^ Do not splice the cables. ^ Do not bend the cable in a radius smaller than 25 mm (1 in). ^ Do not expose the cable to temperatures exceeding 185°F (85°C). ^ Keep the cable ends free from dirt and grime. ^ Do not expose the cable to impact as this may cause the transparent plastic to whiten, thereby reducing the intensity of the light and causing possible communication interruptions. ^ The cable should not lie against any sharp edges as this may cause increased signal attenuation. 1. Remove the ECU CU with a Tech 2(R) according to the following: Fault diagnosis - Select model year - Select Saab 9-3 Sport (9440) - All - Add/Remove - Control Module - CU/PU - Remove. 2. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative terminal. 3. Remove the floor console in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 4. Pry out the signal line from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure it: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9691 4.1. Unplug the SRS control module's connector (A). 4.2. Cut off the cable tie (B), detach the connector's rear end face (C), and pull out the connecting rail (D). 4.3. Extract pin 15, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end with tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure it with tape (F). 4.4. Fit the connecting rail and end face. 4.5. Plug in the connector (A) and secure the cables with cable ties (B). 5. Remove the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6. M03: Replace the optic cable on the right-hand side Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9692 Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing or rattling. 6.1. Remove the passenger seat in accordance with WIS 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.2. Remove the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.3. Remove the right-hand C pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.4. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 6.5. Remove the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.6. Remove the A-pillar's lower side piece. 6.7. Open the cover on the right-hand wiring harness channels. 6.8. Loosen the locking strip (A) on the 2-pin connector (H2-11) for the optic cable, located by the right-hand A-pillar. 6.9. Loosen the catch (B) and remove the optic cable that runs backward in the car. 6.10. Dismantle the end cap from the new optic cable (12 783 577) and connect it to the connector H2-11. Push in the optic cable and make sure the catch (B) locks and refit the locking strip (A). 6.11. Secure the connector and the old optic cable using the cable tie for the existing wiring harness (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9693 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.12. Place the optic cable in the wiring harness channels on the right-hand side. Thread through the existing cable ties (C) if possible, otherwise, secure with a cable tie to the existing one. Close the cover on the channels. Ensure the catches lock. 6.13. Secure the optic cable along the right-hand rear wheel housing, next to the ordinary wiring harness securing points and by the SRS unit (D). 6.14. Thread the optic cable up next to the safety belt by the old optic cable and place on the parcel shelf. 6.15. Unplug the connectors (E) from the OnStar(R) control modules. 6.16. Remove the console (F) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9694 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 6.17. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (G). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (H). 6.18. Secure the new optic cable on the parcel shelf along the existing wiring harness by the ordinary securing points and by the speaker (I). 6.19. Thread the optic cable down next to the old cable from the parcel shelf to the left-hand wheel housing, next to REC. The cable is secured in the existing clips. 6.20. Fit the right-hand C-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.21. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.22. Fit the passenger seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats - Adjustment/Replacement. 6.23. Fit the right-hand side bolster in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Seats Adjustment/Replacement. 6.24. Fold up the rear seat backrest. 6.25. Fit the right-hand B-pillar trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 6.26. Fit the A-pillar's lower side piece. 7. M04-05, 4D: Removing the OnStar® control modules and securing the wiring: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9695 7.1. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 7.2. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 7.3. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). 7.4. Fit the parcel shelf trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. 8. CV: Removing the OnStar(R) control modules and securing the wiring: Adjustment/Replacement. 8.1. Open the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9696 8.2. Remove the console (A) together with the OnStar(R) control modules. 8.3. Remove the connectors (B). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 8.4. Fold back the wiring harness and tape over the connectors (C). Fold back the wiring harness once more and secure with cable ties (D). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9697 8.5. Close the luggage compartment floor. 9. Fold down the left-hand rear side hatch in the luggage compartment. 10. M03: Replace the optic cable on the left-hand rear side: 10.1. Place the optic cable so that it is positioned behind the terminal housing on top of REC (A). 10.2. Remove the locking strip (B) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9) for the optic cable. 10.3. Open the terminal housing (C) with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (D) on the connector and disconnect the optic cable coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9698 10.4. Remove the end cap from the new optic cable, connect to the connector and refit the secondary catch (D). Fit the terminal housing (C) to the connector and refit the locking strip (B). 10.5. Secure the old optic cable together with the new one (E). Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). Important: Secure the wiring harness so that there is no risk of chafing and rattling. 11. CV: Remove the rear seat in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment Adjustment/Replacement. The O-bus connector H2-9 is located behind the left speaker. 12. M04-05: Disconnect the optic cables on the OnStar(R) control modules and join the cables: 12.1. Cut off the cable tie holding the connector (H2-9) against REC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9699 12.2. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Remove the pin strap (A) from the bracket and remove the tape (B) holding the optic cables. 12.3. Remove the locking strip (C) on the 2-pin connector (H2-9). Open the terminal housing with a screwdriver. Remove the secondary catch (E) on the connector and remove the optic cables coming from the OnStar(R) control modules. 12.4. Loosen one of the optic cables remaining in H2-9 (F), connect it to the connector and fit the secondary catch (E). Connect the connector so that the optic cables are opposite each other (G). Connect the terminal housing (D) and refit the locking strip (C). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9700 Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.5. Cars with brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Fit the cable tie (11 900 515) to the wiring harness approx. 100 mm (4 in) from H2-9, fit the cable tie (H) to the bracket. Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (I) and then place the loop behind the bracket. Important: The optic cable must not be bent with a radius less than 25 mm (1 in). 12.6. Cars without brackets for e.g. an amplifier: Gather the optic cable in a gentle loop (J) and secure with cable tie. 13. CV: Fit the left-hand, rear side hatch trim in accordance with WIS - 8. Body - Interior equipment - Adjustment/Replacement. 14. Fit the ground cable to the battery's negative terminal. 15. Carry out procedures after disconnecting the battery, see WIS - 3. Electrical System - Charging system - Adjustment/Replacement. Important: Follow Tech 2(R) on-screen instructions. 16. Add ECU ICM, choose without OnStar(R). See WIS-General-Tech 2(R) - Description and Operation - Add/Remove. 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 2000-2004 Saab 9-5 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9701 1. Remove the ground cable from the battery's negative cable. 2. Remove the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 3. Loosen the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Disconnect the 6-pin connector (B) to improve access to the gear shift housing screws. 4. Disconnect the signal cable from the SRS control module to the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable. 4.1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the SRS control module and cut the cable tie (B). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9702 4.2. Release the back end of the connector (C) and remove from the contact rail (D). 4.3. M00-01: Disconnect pin 39, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.4. M02-04: Disconnect pin 58, cut off the cable terminal and insulate the end using tape (E). Fold back the cable and secure using tape (F). 4.5. Assemble the contact rail and end. 4.6. Connect connector (A) and secure the cable using a cable tie (B). 5. Assemble the gear shift housing (A). AUT: Connect connector (B). 6. Assemble the center console, see WIS - Body - Interior. 7. Remove the OnStar(R) control module and secure the cable harness: 7.1. 5D: Remove the right-hand cover from the luggage compartment floor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9703 7.2. Remove the console (A). 7.3. Disconnect the connector (B) from the OnStar(R) control module. Important: Secure the cable harness to prevent the risk of scraping and rattling. 7.4. Fold back the cable harness and tape down the connector (C). Fold back the cable harness again and secure with cable ties (D). 7.5. 5D: Assemble the right-hand cover for the luggage compartment floor. 8. Fit the ground cable on the battery's negative cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08089C > Nov > 08 > Campaign - Deactivation Of Analog OnStar(R) > Page 9704 9. Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. 10. Set the date and time, see WIS - 3. Electrical system - Information display (SID) - Technical description. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9709 ^ Pay the dealer the regular retail price (no discounts are available) for one of the following 1-year, non-refundable OnStar(R) Analog-to-Digital Transition (ADT) Service Subscription Plans: ^ 1-year Safe & Sound Subscription: $199 ($289 in Canada) ^ 1-year Directions & Connections Subscription: $399 ($579 in Canada) ^ Pay the dealer the applicable state and local sales taxes on the subscription: ^ U.S. Dealers: Taxes only apply in these states: CT, DC, FL, HI, ND, NJ, NM, NY, SC, SD, TX, and WV ^ Canadian Dealers: All applicable taxes ^ Pay the dealer a one-time charge of $15 for the upgrade: ^ U.S. Dealers: Do not collect taxes on the $15 ^ Canadian Dealers: Collect all applicable taxes on the $15 Note: Dealers should NOT remit OnStar(R) ADT-related taxes to their taxing authority as OnStar(R) is responsible for tax remittance. Please Be Sure To Read these Important Points: ^ The 1-year OnStar(R) subscription is not refundable or transferable to another person. Upgraders can apply unused subscription months to a new or Certified Pre-Owned digital OnStar-equipped GM vehicle purchase or lease. As noted above, the digital upgrade program requires the subscriber to purchase a one-year prepaid OnStar(R) subscription. Assuming the subscriber intends to keep their vehicle, but subsequently purchases or leases a 2006 model year or newer OnStar(R)-equipped new or certified used GM vehicle, in the interest of subscriber satisfaction, they may apply remaining unused whole months of the subscription to the new vehicle. The subscription may not be applied to another person's vehicle. Important: This is a customer satisfaction measure that would usually occur several months after an upgrade. It is not intended to be leveraged as part of a new/used vehicle purchase or lease transaction. ^ The $15 charge is not refundable. ^ Dealer ADT kit orders are VIN specific. Dealer kit orders require a VIN and must be exchanged with the OnStar(R) unit in the vehicle with that VIN. Proper activation and enrollment depends on this step. ^ You must put the actual miles on the Repair Order. Do not estimate. ^ Customers will receive a Hands-Free Calling number once the digital hardware is installed and configured. ^ Any nametags that were stored in the old system will need to be re-set by the subscriber once the new hardware is installed. ^ Customers are responsible for the charges described above regardless of whether their vehicle is in or out of the New Vehicle Warranty period. In addition, customers should not be charged labor costs. Dealers can charge GM the labor for the upgrade as specified at the end of this bulletin using the listed labor operation. ^ Vehicles eligible for an OnStar(R) hardware upgrade are listed in this bulletin. Vehicle upgradeability can also be determined by typing the VIN into the field entitled "Determine VIN Hardware Functionality" on the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website, located in the sales or service workbench tab of GM GlobalConnect. Canadian Dealers can use a similar tool that is available within InfoNET. ^ Access to the sales and/or service workbench in the GM GlobalConnect website can be granted by the dealership's Partner Security Coordinator (PSC). If you are unsure who the PSC is, check with the Sales Manager. Ordering the Upgrade Kit/Upgrade kit Installation Ordering the Upgrade Kit 1. To order a kit, you will need to access the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage, located under the sales or service workbench of GM GlobalConnect (infoNET for Canadian upgrade orders). These kits cannot be ordered from GMSPO. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9710 2. Click on the Analog-to-Digital Program link to start the ordering process. 3. To order a kit, you will need the information shown above. 4. After submitting the order, the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page will display. This is your confirmation that the upgrade kit order has been created. U.S. Dealers will also receive an e-mail from Autocraft within several hours of ordering an upgrade kit (Canadian Dealers will receive an e-mail from MASS Electronics). 5. Print the "Terms and Conditions of Your OnStar(R) Service" page, and have the customer sign a copy. 6. A copy of this form should be stapled to the customer's copy of the Repair Order and one copy should be retained in the customer service folder. 7. If the kit you ordered is available, you will receive the upgrade kit within 4 business days of entering your order through the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment webpage. 8. To check on kit availability or the status of your order, U.S. Dealers can log onto the distributor's website at www.autocraft.com. Canadian dealers can call MASS Electronics at 877-410-6277. Upgrade Kit Installation 1. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9711 2. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not shown above. 3. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not a 2005 Cadillac STS. The 2005 Cadillac STS kit may include a new inside rearview (ISRV) mirror assembly and a new ISRV mirror wiring cover. If the kit you receive includes these parts, please remove the existing ISRV mirror and wire cover from the vehicle and install the ones provided in the kit per the instructions in SI. 4. Skip this step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below. ^ 2003-2004 Saturn L-Series ^ 2003 Saturn ION ^ 2002-2003 Saturn VUE 1. Locate and remove the Right Audio output signal terminal 7 from Connector C2 at the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). 2. Remove the terminal end and strip the wire. 3. Locate the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1 in Connector C2. 4. Splice the Right Audio output signal wire from terminal 7 with the Left Audio output signal wire from terminal 1. 5. See Wiring Repairs in SI for approved splicing methods. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9712 6. See wiring diagram shown above for details. 5. Replace the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in the vehicle with the provided Digitally-Capable VCIM. Refer to the Communication Interface Module Replacement procedure in the Cellular Communication section of SI. This kit may include a new VCIM bracket. If it does, use this new bracket on the vehicle and discard the original bracket. The kit may also include a small wiring jumper cable. If it does, plug the wiring jumper cable into the connector on the VCIM and the other end to the corresponding vehicle wiring harness connector. ^ For 2001, 2002 and 2003 Chevrolet Impala and Monte Carlo, do not reinstall the black plastic OnStar(R) module cover onto the vehicle after the VCIM and module bracket have been installed. This black plastic cover will no longer fit on the vehicle. ^ The upgrade kit for 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, and some 2003 Sevilles and DeVilles, will contain a large bracket. To install the new VCIM into this bracket you'll need to carefully line up the notch in the VCIM with the tab in the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9713 ^ On 2002 Sevilles and DeVilles, the GPS jumper cable MUST be unclipped from the back seat cross brace, or unplugged from the VCIM first. DO NOT pull back on the mounting bracket until the GPS antenna jumper cable is unclipped from the back seat cross brace or unplugged from the VCIM. The short length of jumper cable does not allow the VCIM mounting bracket to be pulled back very far, and could lead to a break at the VCIM connector. ^ On 2000-2002 Bonnevilles and LeSabres and 2001-2002 Auroras you will need to follow these steps: 1. Remove the 4 nuts that secure the VCU/VIU bracket assembly to the rear seat back brace. Note: Save these nuts for later use. 2. Remove and discard the plastic VCU/VIU bracket assembly from the vehicle. 3. Remove the upper right stud (1) from the rear seat back brace and re-install in the middle lower slot (2) on the brace. Tighten the fastener to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 4. Position the new VCIM in the vehicle over the studs on the rear seat back brace. 5. Install two of the nuts saved from step (1). Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (36 lb in). 6. Connect the new OnStar jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors) and the body wiring harness (C345 connector). 7. Connect the small coaxial jumper cable supplied in the kit, to the VCIM, with the end that has a blue plastic housing connector. Plug the other end of this coaxial jumper cable to the OnStar Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the right angle connector. Note: The GPS cable in the new OnStar jumper harness is not utilized. 8. Connect the cellular coaxial cable to the OnStar VCIM. On 2001 Impala and Monte Carlos you will need to follow these steps: 9. Remove the Vehicle Communications Unit (VCU) and Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) following the procedures listed in SI. Save the bracket nuts for later use. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9714 10. Disconnect and remove the OnStar(R) jumper harness. Note: You will need to remove the short GPS cable from this jumper harness. 11. Untape the cell antenna coax from the body harness in the trunk. This will be necessary to provide adequate length to connect to the new VCIM. 12. Fasten three retainer clips (1) from the kit to the new bracket that is included in the kit, and position the VCIM to the bracket (2). 13. Install the three bolts from the kit. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 14. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness supplied in the kit to the VCIM (two white connectors on module). 15. Connect small GPS coax cable jumper harness supplied in the kit (end with blue plastic housing) to VCIM GPS connector. 16. Position the VCIM / bracket assembly to the studs. 17. Install the bracket nuts saved from the Removal Procedure above to the VCIM / bracket assembly mounting studs. Tighten the nuts to 4 Nm (35 lb in). 18. Connect the new OnStar(R) jumper harness to the body wiring harness (C410 connector). 19. Connect small coax cable jumper from VCIM to the OnStar(R) Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) antenna coaxial cable at the connector previously left in the vehicle (short jumper removed from old harness in step 5.10). 20. Connect the cellular coaxial cable previously left in vehicle to the OnStar(R) VCIM. 21. Verify that all harnesses are properly secured in vehicle. 6. After replacing the VCIM, it is essential to configure the new OnStar(R) system. Failure to configure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. DO NOT press and hold the white dot or phone button on the keypad as it will not reset this version of the OnStar(R) system and may result in a DTC being set. Use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications, along with the Tech2(R), are required in order to perform the VCIM configuration and setup procedure for this vehicle. The configuration and set-up procedure is now a two-step process which enables an automated activation by the OnStar(R) Center, without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. 1. Connect the Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9715 2. Connect the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal to the Tech2(R). 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Controller List, and select the "ONSA TIS2WEB Pass-Thru OnStar(R) Activation (Replaced/Upgraded Units Only)" option using the Service Programming System (SPS). Important: Do not use the clear DTC function. This will only temporarily turn the LED to green. 4. Upon completion of the OnStar(R) TIS2WEB step, disconnect the TIS terminal from the Tech2(R) and perform the VCIM/OnStar(R) Set-up Procedure using the Tech2(R). The set up procedure is located under the special function menu option. Important: Failure to perform the above steps will result in a red LED, DTC being set and limited or incomplete OnStar(R) services, and will require a customer return visit to the dealership. 5. The default language for the new VCIM will be English. To change to French or Spanish, access the special functions menu on the Tech 2(R), and follow the instructions accordingly. 7. Skip to the next step if the vehicle to be upgraded is not listed below: ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac DeVille ^ 2002-2004 Cadillac Seville ^ 2005 Cadillac STS Set up the Dash Integration Module (DIM) using the following procedure: 1. On the Tech2(R) select the correct Year, Make and Model. 2. Enter Dash Integration Module (DIM) > Special Functions > Set Options > Misc. Options 1 > and turn off phone (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 option). 3. Enter Nav Radio Present and set to "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 4. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. 5. Turn the ignition on and enter the Vehicle Comm. Interface Module > Special Functions > Set Up OnStar /VCIM. 6. When prompted select "No Phone" (if the vehicle does not have the UV8 phone) and "No Nav" (if the vehicle does not have a navigation radio). 7. Turn the ignition off and open the door to turn off the RAP. Important: OnStar(R) Emergency Services are immediately available after these steps, however, full configuration, including activation of Hands-Free Calling, may take up to 24 hours to complete. Processing the Module Exchange Processing the Module Exchange For this program, submitting a credit request for the removed OnStar(R) VCIM (the core) will be performed through a website. When this process is followed, the removed Analog / Digital-Ready VCIM, in most cases, will not be mailed back to the distributor, but can be scrapped by the dealership. U.S. Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto www.autocraft.com. 3. Select Account Maintenance. 4. Select Outstanding Cores. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9716 5. Choose the outstanding core you wish to process, by selecting the Virtual Core Button on the far right side of the screen. 6. Enter the information in the required fields and select the submit button. Record the confirmation number. Canadian Dealers 1. Return the removed Analog / Digital-Ready OnStar(R) VCIM to the Parts Manager. 2. The Parts Manager will log onto https://adt.onstar.gm.mass.ca and enter information as prompted. All Dealers If the website indicates that the VCIM needs to be physically returned to the distributor, please use the pre-paid shipping label that was included in the kit to return the removed VCIM. Important: To avoid a $250 core non-return charge, you must do one of the following within 30 days of kit shipment: 1. Submit the necessary VCIM data through the website, as indicated above. 2. Mail the removed core from the customer's vehicle back to the distributor. 3. Return the unused digital upgrade kit back to the distributor using the pre-paid shipping label that is included in the kit box. Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer Returning the Upgraded Vehicle to the Customer 1. Place the new OnStar Subscriber Information (Owner's Manual kit) in the customer's vehicle where they can review some of the new features of the Digital-Capable system. The continuous digit dialing feature should be highlighted to the customer to avoid a return to the dealership for dialing instructions. Advise the customer to discard any existing OnStar(R) Owner's Manuals that may be in the vehicle. 2. Have the Service Advisor, Service Manager or Sales Consultant review the new OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling procedure with the customer. The customer is uses to their analog OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling system, which uses individual digit dial to make a call. The Generation 6 Digital-Capable system uses continuous digit dial, and the customer needs to be made aware of this change. 3. U.S. Dealers Only: Staple the "Tip Sheet - OnStar(R) Generation 6 Digitally-Capable System", that was included in the kit, to the customer's copy of the repair order. This tip sheet will help your customer better understand their new OnStar(R) system. 4. Canadian Dealers Only: Refer the customer to the Hands-Free Calling Quick Review Card from the new OnStar(R) Owner's Manual kit for help with the new dialing procedure. 5. Fill out the form entitled "GM Limited Warranty for Upgraded OnStar(R) Digital Equipment Program Participants" and staple a copy of this to the customer's repair order. You may want to keep a copy for your records. 6. Encourage your customer to press their blue OnStar(R) button the next day. The OnStar(R) Advisor will be able to review some of the new features of their digital OnStar(R) system. Closing the Onstar(R) Upgrade Exchange Closing the OnStar(R) Upgrade Exchange 1. Collect payment from the customer. Your dealership's open account (sales) will be charged for the cost of the chosen subscription plan, any applicable subscription taxes, and the $15 upgrade charge after the vehicle has been configured through the TIS2WEB process. 2. None of the costs associated with the OnStar Digital Upgrade program may be claimed as a GM goodwill event. These costs must be paid by the customer, and may not be included in any goodwill offered to the customer. GM employees or representatives or field personnel are not able to offer goodwill for this program. If the dealership decides to pay for the upgrade for their customer, be aware that your GM or OnStar(R) contact will not be able to reimburse you for this cost. 3. Use labor code Z2096 to submit your claim for the labor time published below plus 0.2 hr Administrative Allowance and an additional $20.00 Net Amount. ^ For all dealer claim submissions (excluding U.S. Saturn), use Complaint Code MH - Technical Bulletin, and Failure Code 93 - Technical Service Bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9717 ^ For U.S. Saturn retailer claim submission, use Net Item code "M" and Case Type VW. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9718 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9719 Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-006Q > Oct > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital Ready System Digital Upgrade > Page 9720 Labor Time Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 06-08-46-008C > Sep > 08 > OnStar(R) - Analog/Digital System Information > Page 9725 networks, and will not require an upgrade in connection with the cellular industry's transition to the digital network. In order to verify the type of OnStar(R) Hardware in a vehicle, type the VIN into the VIN look-up tool, which is available at the OnStar(R) Online Enrollment website within GM GlobalConnect (for U.S. dealers) or InfoNet (for Canadian dealers). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations VCIM Location Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9737 Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9738 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9739 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) C3 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9740 Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fastener located on the bottom of the OnStar(R) bracket. IMPORTANT: The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) has a specific set of unique numbers that tie the module to each vehicle. These numbers, the 10-digit station identification and the 11-digit electronic serial number, are used by the National Cellular Network and OnStar(R) to identify the specific vehicle. Because these numbers are tied to the vehicle identification number of the vehicle, you must never exchange these parts with those of another vehicle. 2. Tilt the module inboard to the center of the vehicle and pull down the communication interface module (CIM) 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9741 4. Remove the bolts from the OnStar(R) bracket assembly. 5. Lower the bracket and remove the CIM from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. If replacing the VCIM, record the 10-digit STID number, and the 11-digit ESN number from the labels on the new module. 2. Install the OnStar(R) CIM bracket. 3. Connect the electrical connectors, the GPS antenna, and the cellular coax cable. 4. Tilt the CIM inboard and install the CIM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9742 5. Install the CIM fastener. Tighten the fastener to 10 N.m (89 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Refer to OnStar Reconfiguration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning IMPORTANT: After replacing the vehicle communication interface module, you must reconfigure the OnStar(R) system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. In addition, pressing and holding the white dot button on the keypad will NOT reset this version of the OnStar(R) system. This action will cause a DTC to set. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9751 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9752 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9753 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9759 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9760 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9761 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9770 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9771 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9772 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9778 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9779 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9780 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9785 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9786 Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Control Switch Assembly Replacement Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the screws from the steering wheel shroud. 2. Notice: Cruise control switches must be removed from the rear. Do not attempt to pry them out from front as damage to steering wheel may occur. If the vehicle is equipped with cruise control, push the switches out from the rear of the steering wheel. Assembly Procedure 1. If the vehicle is equipped with cruise control, install the switches by pushing them in place from the front of the wheel. 2. Install the screws in the steering wheel shroud. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Trailer Connector (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Trailer Connector (With RPO Code V92) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: Customer Interest Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 9811 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 9812 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set Bulletin No.: 05-08-47-003 Date: August 30, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: SVS "Wrench" Lamp Illuminated with DTC B1372 Set and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 Also Set (Active or in History) (Reprogram BCM on 2004 Vehicles, Clear DTC Codes on 2005 Vehicles) Models: 2004-2005 Saturn VUE Vehicles with 3.5L V-6 Engine VIN 4 - RPO L66) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Condition For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922, some customers may comment that the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) "wrench" lamp is illuminated. Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1372 may be set. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, the SVS lamp may not be illuminated, but DTC B1372 may be stored in history. If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), DTC B1372 may have been falsely set. Cause The 3.5L V-6 (L66)/5AT (MJ7/MJ8) powertrain control module (PCM) may not be communicating properly with the body control module (BCM). Correction Verify the condition and reprogram the BCM on any 2004 Saturn VUE vehicle built up to and including VIN 4S860922. On 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, verify the condition and clear DTC codes only (reprogramming the BCM is not necessary). Do NOT replace the BCM, or any electrical components. Service Procedure 1. Verify that vehicle is a 2004 or 2005 Saturn VUE with 3.5L V-6 (L66) engine. 2. Connect the Tech 2 scan tool to the vehicle and check diagnostic codes. ^ For 2004 vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), proceed to step 3 to reprogram the BCM. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and all 2005 vehicles: - If DTC B1372 is stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history), clear the codes from the BCM. Reprogramming is NOT necessary for 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922 and any 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles. - If DTC B1372 is stored in history and DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 are not set (active or in history), proceed with standard B1372 diagnostics. ^ For 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built after VIN 4S860922, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Body Control System subsection of the Body section of the 2004 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 2. ^ For all 2005 Saturn VUE vehicles, refer to "DTC B1372" in the Computer/Integrating Systems subsection of the Vehicle Control Systems Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 9818 section of the 2005 Saturn VUE Service Manual, Vol. 4. Important: Perform reprogramming procedure on 2004 Saturn VUE vehicles built up to and including VIN 4S860922 only if needed per Step 2 in this bulletin. Important: Before installing new BCM calibration, make sure the Saturn Service Stall (SSS) version is TIS 8.0 2005 or later. Important: While ignition is OFF, apply parking brake to disable daytime running lights (DRLs) prior to starting reprogramming procedures. 3. Reprogram the BCM with the latest available service calibration using the Saturn Service Stall system. 4. Clear any DTCs from BCM. Quick Reference Charts 2004-2005 Vehicles with DTC B1372 stored in history with DTCs U2105, U2106, and/or U2108 also set (active or in history): Claim Information To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim through the Saturn Dealer System for N9518 - BCM Reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 05-08-47-003 > Aug > 05 > Body Controls - SVS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set > Page 9819 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Bulletin No.: 04-08-47-001 Date: March 02, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: BCM, PSCM and On-Star DTC's B1372, B1377, B1382, U10001, U1016, U1096, U1064, C0000, U1500 Stored in History Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician of DTCs that may be stored in history for the Body Control Module (BCM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and/or On-Star Module. The DTCs shown will not affect functionality of the vehicle and will not turn on the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) light. Diagnostics and/or repairs for any other DTCs that may be set should be made based on the appropriate Strategy Based Diagnostic information found in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's > Page 9824 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's Bulletin No.: 04-08-47-001 Date: March 02, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: BCM, PSCM and On-Star DTC's B1372, B1377, B1382, U10001, U1016, U1096, U1064, C0000, U1500 Stored in History Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician of DTCs that may be stored in history for the Body Control Module (BCM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) and/or On-Star Module. The DTCs shown will not affect functionality of the vehicle and will not turn on the Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) light. Diagnostics and/or repairs for any other DTCs that may be set should be made based on the appropriate Strategy Based Diagnostic information found in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 04-08-47-001 > Mar > 04 > Body Control Module - PSCM or OnStar Module DTC's > Page 9830 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9831 Center Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9834 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9835 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9836 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9837 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9838 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9839 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9840 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9841 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9842 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9843 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9844 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9845 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9846 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9847 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9848 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9849 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9850 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9851 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9852 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9853 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9854 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9855 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9856 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9857 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9858 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9859 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9860 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9861 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9862 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9863 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9864 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9865 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9866 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9867 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9868 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9869 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9870 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9871 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9872 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9873 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9874 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9875 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9876 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9877 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9878 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9879 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9880 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9881 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9882 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9883 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9884 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9885 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9886 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9887 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9888 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9889 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9890 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9891 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9892 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9893 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9894 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9895 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9896 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9897 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9898 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9899 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9900 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9901 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9902 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9903 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9904 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9905 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9906 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9907 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9908 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9909 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9910 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9911 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9912 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9913 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9914 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9915 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Part 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9916 Body Control Module (BCM) C4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM OVERVIEW The main features of the body control module (BCM) are: The BCM is the gateway between class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. - The BCM controls multiple functions. - The BCM is the power mode master. GATEWAY The body control module (BCM) communicates functionally on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data buses. The BCM is the gateway between the buses and transfers serial data messages from one subnet to another. Physical communication of the BCM with the scan tool is through class 2 serial data circuit. BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data messages received from other vehicle systems connected to the class 2 serial data link - GMLAN serial data messages received from other vehicles systems connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link or high speed GMLAN serial data link. The system capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM messages. Some of the other system functions that BCM controls or contributes to are: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. - Exterior lighting control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Keyless entry-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Theft deterrent-Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Wipers/washers-Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in Wipers/Washer Systems. - Rear defogger-Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation in Heated Glass Element. - Horn-Refer to Horns System Description and Operation in Horns. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run), and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) message from the engine control module (ECM) in order to determine the present power mode. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals - The sequence of switch closures received by the BCM - The status of the engine run flag The chart indicates the power modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 9919 The power mode message is a periodic with event message type and is transmitted by the PMM at every 2 seconds on class 2 link and at every 250 ms on high speed GMLAN link. The power modes are identical transmitted on both class 2 and high speed GMLAN serial data circuits with the exception of retained accessory power (RAP). RAP is transmitted only on class 2 and it is mapped on high speed GMLAN as Off Awake. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 9920 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The communication among modules is performed through the class 2 serial data circuit and high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time communication are attached to the high speed GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the networks. The purpose of the gateway is to transfer information from one network to another. The gateway will interact with each network according to that network's transmission model. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for more information about the gateway. GMLAN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500 Kbps. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohm resistors, one is internal to the ECM and the other is internal to the BCM. The resistors are used to reduce noise on the high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level which is approximately 2.5 volts is considered a recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to their extremes adds 1 volt to high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts 1 volt from high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. This dominant state is interpreted as a logic 0. GMLAN network management supports selective start up and is based on virtual networks. A virtual network is a collection of signals started in response to a vehicle event. The starting of a virtual network signifies that a particular aspect of the vehicles's functionality has been requested. A virtual network is supported by virtual devices which represents a collection of signals owned by a single physical device. So, any physical device can have one or more virtual devices. The signal supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not. Failsofting is the ability to substitute a signal with a default value or a default algorithm, in the absence of a valid signal. Some messages are also interpreted as a "heartbeat" of a virtual device. If such a signal is lost, the application will set a no communication code against the respective virtual device. This code is mapped on the Tech 2 screen as a code against the physical device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The interaction between high speed GMLAN and class 2 is assured by BCM, which is the gateway. Any message from the class 2 modules to the high speed GMLAN modules is translated by BCM without carrying the original transmitter ID. Therefore the GMLAN modules consider the BCM as being the originator of all class 2 messages that they receive. CLASS 2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the class 2 serial data circuit. Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 Kbps. The bus is active at 7.0 volts nominal and inactive at ground potential. Each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the body control module (BCM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1064. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. The BCM emulates the GMLAN modules on the class 2, embedding the original transmitter ID in GMLAN messages to class 2. Therefore the class 2 modules can set specific non communications DTCs against GMLAN modules. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 signal at terminal 2 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) at terminal 6 - High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) at terminal 14 GMLAN SERIAL DATA LINE The GMLAN serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a linear topology. The following modules are connected to the link, in order from DLC to the end of the linear configuration: The body control module (BCM) - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The transmission control module (TCM) - The engine control module (ECM) VCIM communicates functionally and physically on class 2 only. The high speed GMLAN circuits just pass through the module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 9921 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data communications circuit on this vehicle is in a star configuration. The star has one splice pack, located nearby the DLC. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: The body control module (BCM) - The digital radio receiver (DRR) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The power steering control module (PSCM) - The radio - The vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 9922 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERIAL DATA CONTROL OF RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door or liftgate is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its shut-off limit. The class 2 RAP power mode is mapped to GMLAN serial data circuit as Off Awake power mode. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation for more information on data link communications. The BCM monitors the ignition switch signals, battery condition and the doors status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. The modules that support the RAP power mode will operate the systems under their control as required by their RAP power mode strategy. RAP will end when one of the following conditions is met: The BCM detects the opening of a passenger compartment door. - The RAP timer expires. - The battery capacity decreases below a prescribed limit. - Any other ignition switch state is chosen. The function supported in the RAP power mode is the operation of the radio. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9925 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With High Speed GMLAN Device - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9926 Steps 1 - 6 Steps 1 - 6 Power Mode Mismatch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9927 POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The body control module (BCM) is the power mode master responsible for sending the power mode message on the data buses. The BCM monitors Ignition 1 (Run/Crank), Ignition 2 (Acc/Run) and Ignition 3 (Run) signals from the ignition switch, and the engine run flag (ERF) in order to determine the present power mode. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1 - 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9928 Steps 8 - 14 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 6. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 7. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 8. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 9. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9929 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS Battery 1: The scan tool displays 0-25.5 volts. The state of the battery voltage supplied to the body control module (BCM). Driver Door Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the driver door switch. Ignition 1 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 1 Run/Crank input to the BCM. Ignition 2 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 2 Acc/Run input to the BCM. Ignition 3 Input: The scan tool displays the state of the ignition 3 Run input to the BCM. Key In Ignition: The scan tool displays Yes/No. The BCM receives an input from the ignition switch indicating whether the key is in the ignition or not, with Yes meaning the key is in the ignition. Liftgate Ajar Switch: The scan tool displays the status of the liftgate switch. Pass Door Switches: The scan tool displays the status of the passenger doors switches. Scan Tool Data List Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION The procedures below are designed to set-up the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: 1. Programming the BCM. 2. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components. 3. Program Key Fobs Programming the BCM IMPORTANT: The BCM can be programmed using only Pass-Thru procedure. - After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Pass-Thru programming allows the scan tool to remain connected to the terminal and to the vehicle throughout the programming process. The vehicle must be in close proximity to the terminal while using Pass-Thru. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup for more information. Programming Theft Deterrent System Components Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the PASSLOCK system. - The engine will not crank or start. Program Key Fobs Refer to Transmitter Programming in Keyless Entry for the proper procedure. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9932 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Rotate the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the radio bezel. 3. Disconnect the body control module (BCM) electrical harnesses. 4. Remove the BCM from the instrument panel (I/P) retainer: 1. Pry the BCM tabs from the locking tabs on the underside of the restraint. 2. Slide the BCM out of the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM. 2. Install the radio bezel. 3. Slide the BCM tabs into the slots in the I/P retainer until the tabs lock into place. 4. Connect the electrical connectors. 5. Program a new or a remanufactured BCM. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Grille Replacement Fascia Grille Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia assembly (3). Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper) . 2. Remove the front fascia support. Refer to Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper) . 3. Remove the radiator grille strap (2) from the back of the grille by depressing the grille strap fingers and pushing through the front of the grille. 4. Remove the screw from the bottom center of the grille. 5. Remove the grille from the front fascia by releasing the retainers around the perimeter of the grille. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement > Page 9941 1. Position the grille to the front fascia. 2. Install the grille to the front fascia by pushing in to secure the retainers around the perimeter of the grille. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the screw to the bottom center of the grille. Tighten the screw to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 4. Install the radiator grille strap into the front fascia and grille by pushing the fingers on the strap into the grille and fascia until fully secured. 5. Install the front fascia support. Refer to Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper) . 6. Install the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement > Page 9942 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 2. Remove the fascia to fender screw from inside the wheelhouse. 3. Remove the fascia to wheelhouse liner push-in retainers (1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement > Page 9943 4. Remove the fascia to vehicle push-in retainers (3, 5). 5. Gently pull the fascia away from the vehicle, near the headlamps, to disengage the radiator grille strap to headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement > Page 9944 6. Pull the fascia away from the vehicle, by the fender, to disengage. 7. Slide the fascia forward off the vehicle. 8. Disconnect the fog lamp from the fog lamp housing, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Position the front fascia assembly (3) to the vehicle. 2. Connect the fog lamp to the fog lamp housing, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement > Page 9945 3. Push the fascia in at the fender to secure. 4. Secure the radiator grille strap retainer to the headlamp by pushing inward until secure. 5. Install the fascia to vehicle push-in retainers (3, 5). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement > Page 9946 6. Install the fascia to the wheelhouse liner push-in retainers (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 7. Install the fascia to fender screw from inside the wheelhouse. Tighten the screw to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 8. Install the fascia to the tie bar push-in retainers (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement > Page 9947 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement - Front Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper) . 2. Remove the fascia support to grille screws (1). 3. Remove the fascia support from the fascia assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Position the fascia support to the fascia assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Grille Replacement > Page 9948 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the fascia support to grille screws (1). Tighten the screw to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Front Bumper Reinforcement: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Bulletin No.: 07-08-63-001 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Repair of Polypropylene Energy Absorbers Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 63-20-02 (Section 8 - Body and Accessories). Because the energy absorbers are relatively low in cost to replace, it is now more cost efficient to replace the energy absorbers whenever they are damaged. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9953 Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Impact Bar Replacement - Front Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper) . 2. Remove the energy absorber. Refer to Energy Absorber Replacement - Front (See: Front Bumper Shock Absorber/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the bolts (2). 4. Remove the impact bar from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the impact bar to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9954 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the energy absorber. Refer to Energy Absorber Replacement - Front (See: Front Bumper Shock Absorber/Service and Repair) . 4. Install the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Energy Absorber Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper) . 2. Remove the push-in retainers. 3. Remove the energy absorber from the impact bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the energy absorber to the impact bar. 2. Install the push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9958 3. Install the front fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear fascia bolt covers. 2. Remove the rear fascia bolts. 3. Remove the screw from inside the rear wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper > Page 9966 4. Remove the wheelhouse liner to rear fascia push-in retainers (1). 5. Remove the push-in retainers (1) from the bottom of the fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper > Page 9967 6. Pull the fascia out at the rear wheelhouse liner to disengage. 7. Pull rearward from the vehicle to remove. Installation Procedure 1. Position the rear fascia to the vehicle. 2. Install the push-in retainers (1) to the bottom of the fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper > Page 9968 3. Install the wheelhouse liner to the fascia push-in retainers (1). 4. Install the screws from inside the rear wheelhouse. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Install the rear fascia screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 6. Install the rear fascia bolt covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper > Page 9969 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Reflector Replacement - Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement - Rear Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: ) . 2. Remove the reflector to fascia nut. 3. Remove the reflector from the fascia. Installation Procedure 1. Position the reflector to the rear fascia. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper > Page 9970 2. Install the reflector to fascia nut. Tighten the nut to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 3. Install the rear fascia. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: ) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Bulletin No.: 07-08-63-001 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Repair of Polypropylene Energy Absorbers Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 63-20-02 (Section 8 - Body and Accessories). Because the energy absorbers are relatively low in cost to replace, it is now more cost efficient to replace the energy absorbers whenever they are damaged. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9975 Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Impact Bar Replacement - Rear Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the energy absorber. Refer to Energy Absorber Replacement - Rear (See: Rear Bumper Shock Absorber/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the bolts. 4. Remove the impact bar from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the impact bar to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9976 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the energy absorber. Refer to Energy Absorber Replacement - Rear (See: Rear Bumper Shock Absorber/Service and Repair) . 4. Install the rear fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Energy Absorber Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the push-in retainers. 3. Remove the energy absorber from the impact bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the energy absorber to the impact bar. 2. Install the push-in retainers. 3. Install the rear fascia assembly. Refer to Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper (See: Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. 2. Remove the right side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 3. Remove the right side air inlet grille from the vehicle. 4. Remove the left side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 5. Lift up the left side air inlet grille and disconnect the front washer nozzle hose from the front nozzles. 6. Depress the nozzle retaining tabs on the under side of the air inlet grille and pull front nozzles up. 7. Remove the left side air inlet grille. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9984 1. Install the front washer nozzles into the air inlet grille. 2. Connect the washer nozzle hose to the front washer nozzles. 3. Install the left side air inlet grille. 4. Install the right side air inlet grille. 5. Install the push-in retainers. 6. Install the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 04-08-64-011 > May > 04 > Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch Front Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch Bulletin No.: 04-08-64-011 Date: May 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Handle Sticks Out, Door Will Not Latch (Lubricate Door Handle Pawl) Models: 2004 Chevrolet Malibu, Malibu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment that the exterior door handle sticks out after opening the door, or the door will not latch when closed. Cause This condition may be caused by the handle not returning to the closed position. Correction Pull the door handle to its full open position and apply Super Lube to the top and bottom of the door handle pawl as seen in the illustration above. Cycle the handle several times and reapply lubricant, if necessary. Parts Information Parts are currently from GMSPO. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 04-08-64-011 > May > 04 > Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch > Page 9997 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 04-08-64-011 > May > 04 > Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch Front Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch Bulletin No.: 04-08-64-011 Date: May 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Handle Sticks Out, Door Will Not Latch (Lubricate Door Handle Pawl) Models: 2004 Chevrolet Malibu, Malibu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment that the exterior door handle sticks out after opening the door, or the door will not latch when closed. Cause This condition may be caused by the handle not returning to the closed position. Correction Pull the door handle to its full open position and apply Super Lube to the top and bottom of the door handle pawl as seen in the illustration above. Cycle the handle several times and reapply lubricant, if necessary. Parts Information Parts are currently from GMSPO. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 04-08-64-011 > May > 04 > Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch > Page 10003 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 10004 Front Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 04-08-64-011 Date: 040527 Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch Bulletin No.: 04-08-64-011 Date: May 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Handle Sticks Out, Door Will Not Latch (Lubricate Door Handle Pawl) Models: 2004 Chevrolet Malibu, Malibu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment that the exterior door handle sticks out after opening the door, or the door will not latch when closed. Cause This condition may be caused by the handle not returning to the closed position. Correction Pull the door handle to its full open position and apply Super Lube to the top and bottom of the door handle pawl as seen in the illustration above. Cycle the handle several times and reapply lubricant, if necessary. Parts Information Parts are currently from GMSPO. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 10005 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 04-08-64-011 Date: 040527 Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch Bulletin No.: 04-08-64-011 Date: May 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Handle Sticks Out, Door Will Not Latch (Lubricate Door Handle Pawl) Models: 2004 Chevrolet Malibu, Malibu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment that the exterior door handle sticks out after opening the door, or the door will not latch when closed. Cause This condition may be caused by the handle not returning to the closed position. Correction Pull the door handle to its full open position and apply Super Lube to the top and bottom of the door handle pawl as seen in the illustration above. Cycle the handle several times and reapply lubricant, if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 10006 Parts Information Parts are currently from GMSPO. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 04-08-64-011 Date: 040527 Body - Door Handle Sticks Out/Door Won't Latch Bulletin No.: 04-08-64-011 Date: May 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Handle Sticks Out, Door Will Not Latch (Lubricate Door Handle Pawl) Models: 2004 Chevrolet Malibu, Malibu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment that the exterior door handle sticks out after opening the door, or the door will not latch when closed. Cause This condition may be caused by the handle not returning to the closed position. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 10007 Pull the door handle to its full open position and apply Super Lube to the top and bottom of the door handle pawl as seen in the illustration above. Cycle the handle several times and reapply lubricant, if necessary. Parts Information Parts are currently from GMSPO. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10008 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door handle bolt cap. 2. Remove the door handle screw through the door shut face. 3. Remove the door handle cap. 4. Remove the door handle by sliding rearward and pulling away from the door. 5. Remove the gasket, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10009 1. Install the gasket, if necessary. 2. Install the handle by placing into position and sliding rearward ensuring to engage the outside handle lever. 3. Install the door handle cap. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the door handle screw through door shut face. Tighten the screw to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Install the door handle bolt cap. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Handle Switch > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Handle Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Handle Switch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10013 3. Remove the power mirror switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Handle Switch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10014 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Inside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screw from the center of the inside handle pocket. 2. Slide the handle forward and pull outward to expose the lock rods. 3. Using a thin-bladed tool, disengage the rods from the retaining clips. 4. If the vehicle is equipped with power windows, disconnect the electrical connector from the switch by depressing the retaining tabs. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the power window switch. 2. Position the inside handle to the door trim and partially seat the rear tangs. 3. Lift the lock rods into the retaining clips. Secure the rods into the handle by latching the clips over the rods. 4. Push the handle into the trim panel and slide rearward to fully engage the tangs. Verify that the rods clear the water deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10018 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Install the screw in the handle. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 6. Verify the correct installation of the lock rods by testing for smooth movement of the lock button and of the inside handle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Hinge Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Remove the front fender. Refer to Fender Replacement - Front (See: Fender/Front Fender/Service and Repair/Fender Replacement - Front) in Body Front End. 2. Mark around the hinge location with a soft marker for installation alignment purposes. 3. Support the door. 4. With the door fully latched on the striker, remove the hinge to door bolts. 5. Remove the hinge to body bolts and remove the hinges one at a time. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10022 1. Position the hinge to the vehicle with the marks made prior to removal. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the hinge to door bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the hinge to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Inspect the door for proper alignment. Refer to Door Adjustment - Front (See: Adjustments) . 5. Install the front fender. Refer to Fender Replacement - Front (See: Fender/Front Fender/Service and Repair/Fender Replacement - Front) in Body Front End. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Front Door Latch: Recalls Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Inventory Upgrade - Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures # 05016 - (Jan 31, 2005) Models: 2005 Buick Allure - Canada Only 2005 Buick LaCrosse - US Only 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS, SRX 2005 Cadillac STS 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style), Mailbu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This correction should be performed on all 2005 Buick Allure and LaCrosse; 2004- 2005 Cadillac CTS and SRX; 2005 Cadillac STS; 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style) and Malibu Maxx; and 2005 model year Equinox vehicles currently in your inventory. This service should be performed prior to sale or delivery, but no later than March 31, 2005. On January 7, 2005, the plants began lubing latches so any vehicles received after January 28, 2005 will not require lubrication. Condition Water from a car wash or off the road may enter the latch and freeze, causing the door latch to freeze. Correction Apply Super Lube to the latch detent lever. 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw out and spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Apply lube to all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. 3. Repeat this procedure on all doors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing > Page 10031 Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Front Door Latch: Customer Interest Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 10037 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Front Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 10043 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Front Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Inventory Upgrade - Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures # 05016 - (Jan 31, 2005) Models: 2005 Buick Allure - Canada Only 2005 Buick LaCrosse - US Only 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS, SRX 2005 Cadillac STS 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style), Mailbu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This correction should be performed on all 2005 Buick Allure and LaCrosse; 2004- 2005 Cadillac CTS and SRX; 2005 Cadillac STS; 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style) and Malibu Maxx; and 2005 model year Equinox vehicles currently in your inventory. This service should be performed prior to sale or delivery, but no later than March 31, 2005. On January 7, 2005, the plants began lubing latches so any vehicles received after January 28, 2005 will not require lubrication. Condition Water from a car wash or off the road may enter the latch and freeze, causing the door latch to freeze. Correction Apply Super Lube to the latch detent lever. 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw out and spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Apply lube to all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. 3. Repeat this procedure on all doors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing > Page 10048 Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 10054 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-008B Date: November 11, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Groan/Hiss/Grind Noise While Turning Steering Wheel at Low Speeds OR Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Replace Necessary Components) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to VIN Breakpoints 56073267 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information to correct the front suspension noise concerns. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition The purpose of this bulletin is to address various front suspension noises. Some customers may comment on a groan, hiss or grind type noise while turning the steering wheel at low speeds or when the vehicle is stopped. Or, some customers may comment on a popping noise from the front suspension while driving over bumps. The type of noise will determine the corrective action to be taken. Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Noise While Turning at Low Speeds": 1. Install Chassis Ears (J 39570) to the following locations on the vehicle (refer to diagram): 1. Front Spring 2. Wheel-Well 3. Stabilizer Bar Link 2. Drive the vehicle, simulating parking lot maneuvers/turns, to determine the source of the noise. If the noise is heard most predominantly through: ^ the Front Spring, refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. ^ the Wheel-Well ,the noise is caused by a body creak and no repair is available at this time. A field product report should be submitted to document the concern. ^ the Stabilizer Shaft Link, refer to the Stabilizer Shaft Link in the "correction" section of this bulletin. Note, to confirm replacing the stabilizer link will correct the customer's concern, disconnect the links to verify the noise is eliminated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 10059 Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Popping Noise From Suspension While Driving Over Bumps". 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events and the technician should refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. 5. To confirm the noise source, hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 6. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram and repeat steps 1 - 4. Correction Important: Repair only the affected side. Strut Replacement: Replace the strut assembly. Important: The complete strut assembly part number has been revised from bulletin 04-03-08-008. Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement: Replace the front stabilizer link. Part Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 10060 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps Bulletin No.: 04-03-08-012A Date: January 04, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Popping Noise From Front Suspension While Driving Over Bumps (Refer to Bulletin # 04-03-08-008A) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being replaced by Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-008A. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-08-012 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may notice a "popping" noise while driving over bumps. The popping noise typically occurs over a sharp bump or a large road swell that could unload the front suspension. Cause To verify this bulletin pertains to the customer's concern, try to reproduce the concern using the following procedure: Replication Procedure: 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. 5. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events. 6. If no noise is heard, continue to diagnose the customer's concern using the diagnostic information found in SI. Engineering has determined that the noise comes from "rubbing contact" between the lower spring seat and the front suspension spring. To confirm the noise source, do the following steps: Confirmation Procedure 1. Hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 2. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram. Repeat the "replication" procedure to confirm the isolator prevented the noise. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps > Page 10065 Correction Refer to bulletin 04-03-08-008A for repair procedure. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 10071 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 10076 Procedure for Duplicating Customer Concern of "Popping Noise From Suspension While Driving Over Bumps". 1. Lift the vehicle on a hoist until the front wheels are off the ground. 2. Slowly lower the vehicle back to the ground. 3. Listen for a "popping" noise as the weight of the vehicle settles back on the suspension. 4. If no noise is heard, push down on the front bumper to bounce the suspension and listen for a "popping" noise. Vehicles with this concern will "pop" during one of the two events and the technician should refer to the Strut Replacement in the "correction" section of this bulletin. 5. To confirm the noise source, hoist the vehicle until the wheels are hanging in full rebound. 6. Insert a piece of paper or piece of plastic between the spring and the spring seat as indicated in the above diagram and repeat steps 1 - 4. Correction Important: Repair only the affected side. Strut Replacement: Replace the strut assembly. Important: The complete strut assembly part number has been revised from bulletin 04-03-08-008. Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement: Replace the front stabilizer link. Part Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 04-03-08-008B > Nov > 05 > Suspension - Groan/Hiss/Pop On Low Speed Turns > Page 10077 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 04-03-08-012A > Jan > 05 > Suspension - Popping Noises on Bumps > Page 10082 Correction Refer to bulletin 04-03-08-008A for repair procedure. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 10083 Front Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 10084 The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05016 Date: 050131 Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Inventory Upgrade - Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures # 05016 - (Jan 31, 2005) Models: 2005 Buick Allure - Canada Only 2005 Buick LaCrosse - US Only 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS, SRX 2005 Cadillac STS 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style), Mailbu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This correction should be performed on all 2005 Buick Allure and LaCrosse; 2004- 2005 Cadillac CTS and SRX; 2005 Cadillac STS; 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style) and Malibu Maxx; and 2005 model year Equinox vehicles currently in your inventory. This service should be performed prior to sale or delivery, but no later than March 31, 2005. On January 7, 2005, the plants began lubing latches so any vehicles received after January 28, 2005 will not require lubrication. Condition Water from a car wash or off the road may enter the latch and freeze, causing the door latch to freeze. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 10085 Apply Super Lube to the latch detent lever. 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw out and spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Apply lube to all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. 3. Repeat this procedure on all doors. Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 10086 Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 10087 on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10088 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Latch Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement Front Door (See: Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual)) . 2. Disconnect the outside handle rod from the latch. 3. Remove the outside handle bracket. 4. Disconnect the lock cylinder rod from the latch. 5. Disconnect the latch electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10089 6. Disconnect the latch arm from the window regulator module by depressing the tab and sliding rearward. 7. Disconnect the inside handle rod and lock button rod by twisting the latch. 8. Remove the latch from the latch arm by twisting. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10090 1. Install the latch to the latch arm by twisting. 2. Connect the inside handle rod and lock button rod by aligning the rods with clips and twisting the latch. 3. Connect the latch arm to the window regulator module by depressing the table and sliding rearward. 4. Connect the latch electrical connector. 5. Connect the lock cylinder rod to the latch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10091 6. Install the outside handle bracket. 7. Connect the outside handle rod to the latch. 8. Install the front door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door (See: Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual)) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Limiter: Service and Repair Door Check Link Replacement - Front Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 3. Remove the check link bolts at the hinge pillar. 4. Remove the check link nuts from the door frame. 5. Remove the check link from the door through the speaker opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10095 Installation Procedure 1. Install the check link to the door frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the nuts to the check link. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the check link bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 5. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Panel Replacement Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the trim panel upper extension. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension (See: Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension) . 2. Remove the armrest trim cover. 3. Remove the door handle bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10100 4. Remove the door trim panel fasteners. 5. Remove the door trim panel Installation Procedure 1. Align the door trim panel to the door. Press firmly to seat all trim panel fastners. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10101 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the door trim panel fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the door handle bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10102 4. Install the armrest trim cover. 5. Install the trim panel upper extension. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension (See: Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension) . Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension Trim Panel Replacement - Upper Extension Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10103 1. Gently pull at the top end of the extension panel cover to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Lift the extension panel out from behind the door trim panel. 3. While holding the extension panel, disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. 4. While holding the extension panel, disconnect the electrical connector from the speaker. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10104 1. Connect the electrical connector to the speaker. 2. Position the extension panel over the door trim panel with the extension panel mounting tabs behind the door trim panel. 3. Gently push on the extension panel to engage the attaching clips. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10105 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer toTrim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: ) . 2. Remove the front door water deflector, starting at the top rear corner, pull downward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the locating tabs near the top edge of the water deflector to the door structure. 2. Stretch the water deflector tight across the top edge and set in place. 3. Wet-out adhesive around the entire perimeter of the water deflector to ensure proper sealing. 4. Install the front door trim panel front. Refer toTrim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: ) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments Door Striker Adjustment - Front Door To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows: Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 2. Close the door onto the striker and note if the door drags on the striker causing the door to move upward or downward upon contact with the striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the latch. 3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the striker. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door latch and to achieve the proper door position within the door opening. Start with the up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to the door opening. Set the in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure the door closing efforts are correct. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 10109 Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Door Striker Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for installation purposes. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the striker. Installation Procedure 1. Loosely install the striker with the bolts. 2. Align the striker with the marks made prior to removal. 3. Tighten the bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 10110 4. Inspect the door closing and align the striker as required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Front Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the front door weatherstrip seal from the door flange by starting at the seal joint at the bottom of the door opening. 3. Separate the seal at the joint, note the position for installation. 4. Remove the seal from the door flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal over the flange in the position noted in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10114 2. Press the seal over the flange firmly to fully secure. 3. Locate an exposed end of the ripcord at the seal joint and pull the ripcord around the door opening. If the seal lip is positioned under any door trim, this process will bring the seal lip over the door trim and headliner. 4. Secure the seal lip under the end of the instrument panel. 5. Install the front door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Channel Window Channel Replacement Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Remove the outside rearview mirror. 4. Remove the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 5. Remove the window run channel bolts. 6. Remove the front door window run channel. Starting from the rear corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10120 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the window run channel seal to the door header flange, starting from the rear corner. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 2. Install the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Install the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 4. Install the outside rearview mirror. 5. Install the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement Front Door (See: Service and Repair) . Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10121 1. Lower the front door window. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Door Window Sealing Strip/Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure 1. Install the window weatherstrip run channel assembly. 1. Starting at the lower rear corner of the window opening, press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Door Window Sealing Strip/Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement) . 3. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10122 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10123 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Front Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the rear edge of the door. 2. Remove the outside rearview mirror. 3. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10124 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. 3. Install the outside rearview mirror. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR REPLACEMENT - FRONT DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the water deflector. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the front door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the window from the regulator. 1. Raise the window. 2. Tape the window into position. 5. Remove the front door window regulator motor screws. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10128 1. Align the front door window regulator motor assembly to the front door window regulator. 2. Install the front door window regulator motor to regulator screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the front door window regulator motor to door screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the front door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. 5. Install the front door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside (See: Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door (See: Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Door Window Channel/Window Channel Replacement) . 3. Remove the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 4. Disconnect the mirror electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the 4 electrical connector rosebuds (2 at the mirror and 2 under the speaker). 6. Loosen the 2 rear module bolts. 7. Remove the 4 remaining module bolts. 8. Remove the 3 latch bolts from the door shut face. 9. Disconnect the door harness at the door jamb. 10. Remove the window regulator module from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) > Page 10133 1. Install the window regulator module into the door. 2. Connect the door harness at the door jamb. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the 3 latch bolts to the door shut face. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the 4 module bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Connect the 4 electrical connector rosebuds (2 at the mirror and 2 under the speaker). 6. Connect the mirror electrical connector. 7. Install the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 8. Install the front door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door (See: Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Door Window Channel/Window Channel Replacement) . 9. Install the front door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside (See: Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) > Page 10134 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement Window Regulator Motor Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the front door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the window from the regulator. 1. Raise the window. 2. Tape the window into position. 5. Remove the front door window regulator motor screws. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) > Page 10135 1. Align the front door window regulator motor assembly to the front door window regulator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the front door window regulator motor to regulator screws. Tighten the front door window regulator motor to door screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the front door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door handle bolt cap. 2. Remove the door handle screw through the door shut face. 3. Remove the door handle cap. 4. Remove the door handle by sliding rearward and pulling away from the door. 5. Remove the gasket, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10141 1. Install the gasket, if necessary. 2. Install the handle by placing into position and sliding rearward ensuring to engage the outside handle lever. 3. Install the door handle cap. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the door handle screw through the door shut face. Tighten the screw to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Install the door handle bolt cap. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Hinge Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Mark around the hinge location with a soft marker for installation alignment purposes. 2. Support the door. 3. With the door fully latched on the striker, remove the hinge to door bolts. 4. Remove the hinge to body bolts and remove the hinges one at a time. Installation Procedure 1. Position the hinge to the vehicle with the marks made prior to removal. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10145 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the hinge to door bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the hinge to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Inspect the door for proper alignment. Refer to Door Adjustment - Rear (See: Adjustments) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Rear Door Latch: Recalls Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Inventory Upgrade - Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures # 05016 - (Jan 31, 2005) Models: 2005 Buick Allure - Canada Only 2005 Buick LaCrosse - US Only 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS, SRX 2005 Cadillac STS 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style), Mailbu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This correction should be performed on all 2005 Buick Allure and LaCrosse; 2004- 2005 Cadillac CTS and SRX; 2005 Cadillac STS; 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style) and Malibu Maxx; and 2005 model year Equinox vehicles currently in your inventory. This service should be performed prior to sale or delivery, but no later than March 31, 2005. On January 7, 2005, the plants began lubing latches so any vehicles received after January 28, 2005 will not require lubrication. Condition Water from a car wash or off the road may enter the latch and freeze, causing the door latch to freeze. Correction Apply Super Lube to the latch detent lever. 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw out and spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Apply lube to all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. 3. Repeat this procedure on all doors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing > Page 10154 Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Rear Door Latch: Customer Interest Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 10160 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Rear Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 10166 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Rear Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Inventory Upgrade - Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures # 05016 - (Jan 31, 2005) Models: 2005 Buick Allure - Canada Only 2005 Buick LaCrosse - US Only 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS, SRX 2005 Cadillac STS 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style), Mailbu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This correction should be performed on all 2005 Buick Allure and LaCrosse; 2004- 2005 Cadillac CTS and SRX; 2005 Cadillac STS; 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style) and Malibu Maxx; and 2005 model year Equinox vehicles currently in your inventory. This service should be performed prior to sale or delivery, but no later than March 31, 2005. On January 7, 2005, the plants began lubing latches so any vehicles received after January 28, 2005 will not require lubrication. Condition Water from a car wash or off the road may enter the latch and freeze, causing the door latch to freeze. Correction Apply Super Lube to the latch detent lever. 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw out and spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Apply lube to all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. 3. Repeat this procedure on all doors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing > Page 10171 Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Rear Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 10177 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Rear Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Inventory Upgrade - Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures # 05016 - (Jan 31, 2005) Models: 2005 Buick Allure - Canada Only 2005 Buick LaCrosse - US Only 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS, SRX 2005 Cadillac STS 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style), Mailbu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This correction should be performed on all 2005 Buick Allure and LaCrosse; 2004- 2005 Cadillac CTS and SRX; 2005 Cadillac STS; 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style) and Malibu Maxx; and 2005 model year Equinox vehicles currently in your inventory. This service should be performed prior to sale or delivery, but no later than March 31, 2005. On January 7, 2005, the plants began lubing latches so any vehicles received after January 28, 2005 will not require lubrication. Condition Water from a car wash or off the road may enter the latch and freeze, causing the door latch to freeze. Correction Apply Super Lube to the latch detent lever. 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw out and spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Apply lube to all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. 3. Repeat this procedure on all doors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05016 > Jan > 05 > Campaign - Door Latch Freezing > Page 10183 Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 10184 Rear Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 10185 The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05016 Date: 050131 Campaign - Door Latch Freezing Inventory Upgrade - Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures # 05016 - (Jan 31, 2005) Models: 2005 Buick Allure - Canada Only 2005 Buick LaCrosse - US Only 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS, SRX 2005 Cadillac STS 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style), Mailbu Maxx 2005 Chevrolet Equinox This correction should be performed on all 2005 Buick Allure and LaCrosse; 2004- 2005 Cadillac CTS and SRX; 2005 Cadillac STS; 2004-2005 Chevrolet Malibu (New Style) and Malibu Maxx; and 2005 model year Equinox vehicles currently in your inventory. This service should be performed prior to sale or delivery, but no later than March 31, 2005. On January 7, 2005, the plants began lubing latches so any vehicles received after January 28, 2005 will not require lubrication. Condition Water from a car wash or off the road may enter the latch and freeze, causing the door latch to freeze. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 10186 Apply Super Lube to the latch detent lever. 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw out and spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Apply lube to all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. 3. Repeat this procedure on all doors. Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 10187 Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 10188 on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10189 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Latch Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement Rear Door . 2. Disconnect the outside handle rod from the latch. 3. Remove the outside handle bracket. 4. Disconnect the latch electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10190 5. Disconnect the latch arm from the window regulator module by depressing the tab and sliding rearward. 6. Disconnect the inside handle rod and lock button rod by twisting the latch. 7. Remove the latch from the latch arm by twisting. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10191 1. Install the latch to the latch arm by twisting. 2. Connect the inside handle rod and lock button rod by aligning the rods with clips and twisting the latch. 3. Connect the latch arm to the window regulator module by depressing the table and sliding rearward. 4. Connect the latch electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10192 5. Install the outside handle bracket. 6. Connect the outside handle rod to the latch. 7. Install the rear door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement - Rear Door Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Limiter: Service and Repair Door Check Link Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer toTrim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Remove the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 3. Remove the check link bolts at the hinge pillar. 4. Remove the check link nuts from the door frame. 5. Remove the check link from the door through the speaker opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10196 Installation Procedure 1. Install the check link to the door frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the nuts to the check link. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the check link bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 5. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Panel Replacement Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the armrest cover. 2. Remove the door handle bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10201 3. Remove the door trim panel fasteners. 4. Remove the door trim panel. Installation Procedure 1. Align the door trim panel to the door. Press firmly to seat all trim panel fasteners. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10202 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the door trim panel fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the door handle bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10203 4. Install the armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel Replacement > Page 10204 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Water Deflector Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door. 2. Remove the rear door water deflector, starting at the top rear corner, pull the water deflector away from the door structure. Installation Procedure 1. Align the locating tabs near the top edge of the water deflector to the door structure. 2. Stretch the water deflector tight across the top edge and set in place. 3. Wet-out adhesive around the entire perimeter of the water deflector to ensure proper sealing. 4. Install the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments Door Striker Adjustment - Rear Door To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows: Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 2. Close the door onto the striker and note if the door drags on the striker causing the door to move upward or downward upon contact with the striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the latch. 3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the striker. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door latch and to achieve the proper door position within the door opening. Start with the up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to the door opening. Set the in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure the door closing efforts are correct. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 10208 Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Door Striker Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for installation purposes. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the striker. Installation Procedure 1. Install the striker loosely with the bolts. 2. Align the striker with the marks made prior to removal. 3. Tighten the bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 10209 4. Inspect the door closing and align the striker as required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the rear door weatherstrip seal from the door flange by starting at the seal joint at the bottom of the door opening. 3. Separate the seal at the joint, note the position for installation. 4. Remove the seal from the door flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal over the flange in the position noted in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10213 2. Press the seal over the flange firmly to fully secure. 3. Locate an exposed end of the ripcord at the seal joint and pull the ripcord around the door opening. If the seal lip is positioned under any door trim, this process will bring the seal lip over the door trim and headliner. 4. Install the rear door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Channel Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer toWindow Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Remove the rear door window run channel and fixed window assembly. 1. Starting from the front corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. 2. Remove the seal assembly from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10219 1. Install the window run channel seal assembly. 1. Place the seal assembly into the door frame. 2. Place the seal assembly on the door header. 3. Install the seal to the door header flange, starting from the front corner. 2. Install the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear (See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Install the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Service and Repair) . Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10220 1. Lower the rear door window. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: ) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure 1. Align the notch in the window weatherstrip seal to the fixed window post and press the weatherstrip onto the window flange. 1. Press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: ) . 3. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10221 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Rear Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10222 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Rear Door See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Rear Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the front edge of the door. 2. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 10223 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Window Regulator Motor Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Remove the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws. 5. Remove the rear door window regulator motor assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the rear door window regulator motor assembly to the rear door window regulator. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10227 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws. Tighten the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the rear door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 5. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside (See: Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Door Window Channel/Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door) . 3. Remove the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector rosebuds. 5. Loosen the 2 rear module bolts. 6. Remove the 4 remaining module bolts. 7. Remove the 3 latch bolts from the door shut face. 8. Disconnect the door harness at the door jamb. 9. Remove the window regulator module from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10231 1. Install the window regulator module into the door. 2. Connect the door harness at the door jamb. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the 3 latch bolts to the door shut face. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the 4 module bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connector rosebuds. 6. Install the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 7. Install the rear door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door (See: Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Door Window Channel/Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door) . 8. Install the rear door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside (See: Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door: Service and Repair Fuel Filler Door Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Loosen the bolts from the fuel tank filler door. 2. Disconnect the fuel cap strap from the fuel filler door. 3. Remove the fuel tank filler door by sliding it out of the slots in the quarter panel. Installation Procedure 1. Align fuel tank filler door to quarter panel and slide into slots in the quarter panel. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10235 2. Install the bolts to the fuel tank filler door. Tighten the fuel tank filler door bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the fuel cap strap to the fuel filler door. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Hood Hinge Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When a hood hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Using a grease pencil, mark the position of the hood hinge. 3. With an assistant to support the hood, remove the hinge bolts and the hinge. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10240 1. With an assistant, position the hood hinge to the alignment marks on the vehicle. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the hinge to hood bolts. Tighten the hinge to hood bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Slowly lower the hood. 4. Inspect the hood alignment. Align the hood if necessary. Refer to Hood Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Insulator / Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Insulator / Pad: Service and Repair Hood Insulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the hood with the prop rod. 2. Remove the hood insulator push-in retainers (3) from the hood (1). 3. Remove the hood insulator (2). Installation Procedure 1. Align the hood insulator (2) to the hood (1). 2. Install the hood insulator push-in retainers (3). 3. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When a hood hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open and support the hood. 2. Mark the hood latch location to the support bracket with a grease pencil. 3. Remove the hood latch bolts. 4. Disconnect the release cable from the hood latch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10247 1. Install the hood latch release cable to the hood latch. 2. Position the hood latch to the alignment marks on the support bracket. 3. Install the hood latch bolts. 4. Tighten the hood latch bolts. 5. Slowly close the hood and inspect latch operation. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Open the hood. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the hood latch. Refer to Hood Latch Replacement (See: Hood Latch/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the release cable from the structure. Note the routing of the hood cable in the engine compartment for installation. 4. Inside the vehicle, remove the left front carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front) in Interior Trim. 5. Reposition the carpet aside to expose release handle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10251 6. Pull release handle to up position. 7. Pry back front of handle slip to disengage from the hinge pillar. 8. Remove the hood hinge cable grommet from the front of the dash and remove the cable from the core support. Installation Procedure 1. Install the hood hinge cable and grommet through the front of the dash. 2. Slide the hood release handle into the hinge pillar and secure into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10252 3. Reposition the carpet and install the front carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front) in Interior Trim. 4. Route the hood cable through the body structure. 5. Install the hood latch. Refer to Hood Latch Replacement (See: Hood Latch/Service and Repair) . 6. Inspect the hood latch cable for proper operation. 7. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Hood Hold-Open Rod Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When a hood hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open and support the hood. 2. Push the rod toward the engine and twist rod out of the bushing. 3. Remove rod from vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. If removed, install bushing into upper tie bar. 2. Install rod by using rod end into bushing and twisting. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10256 3. Remove the hood support. 4. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the hood rear seal from the cowl panel flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the hood rear seal to the vehicle. 2. Push the hood rear seal onto the cowl panel flange in order to fully seat the seal. 3. Verify hood seal fits flush against the hood rear side seals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear > Page 10261 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Side Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Side Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the rear side hood seal, located at the end of the hood seal, from the fender. 3. Remove the seal from the vehicle. 4. To clean the area use a lint-free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naptha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water to remove any adhesive. Installation Procedure 1. Prepare the body surface by wiping with isopropyl alcohol. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear > Page 10262 2. Remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the rear side hood seal. 3. Install the rear side hood seal. 4. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Replacement - Liftgate Tools Required * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 or Equivalent * Isopropyl Alcohol or equivalent * Cartridge-Type Caulking Gun * Commercial-Type Utility Knife * Razor Blade Scraper * Suction Cups * Plastic Paddle Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Cracked Window Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) in Body Rear End. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the liftgate window defogger bus bar. Caution: Refer to Defroster Outlet Caution in Cautions and Notices. 4. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10267 5. Remove the liftgate window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A , J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window. 6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the liftgate window into the opening. Refer to Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Windshield) (See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Windshield))Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Liftgate) (See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Liftgate)) . 2. Connect the liftgate window defogger electrical connectors to the bus bar. 3. Install the liftgate trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) in Body Rear End. 4. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 5. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations Liftgate Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Liftgate Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Hinge: Service and Repair Hinge Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure Caution: When a lift gate hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open the liftgate and support. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Mark the location of the liftgate hinges with a grease pencil. 4. Remove the liftgate struts. Refer to Strut Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support/Service and Repair) . 5. Remove the hinge to liftgate bolts. 6. Remove the hinge to body nuts. 7. Remove the hinges one at a time. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10277 Important: New hinge to body nuts must be used to ensure a proper seal. 1. Align the hinge to body alignments marks made in the removal process and install the nuts. 2. Align the hinge to liftgate alignment marks made in the removal process and install the bolts. 3. Install the liftgate struts. Refer to Strut Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support/Service and Repair) . 4. Lower the liftgate slowly and inspect the alignment. Align as needed. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Tighten the nuts to the liftgate hinges. Tighten the hinge to body nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 6. Tighten the hinge to liftgate bolts. Tighten the hinge to liftgate bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 7. Install the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Handle Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the outside handle swing over clip from the outside handle rod. 4. Remove the liftgate outside handle nuts. 5. Remove the liftgate handle from the liftgate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10281 1. Position the liftgate handle to the liftgate. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the nuts to the liftgate handle. Tighten the liftgate handle nuts to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Reconnect the outside handle swing over clip to the outside handle rod. 4. Install the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 5. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim, beginning with the top. 3. Remove the liftgate trim fasteners. 4. Pull to release and remove the trim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10285 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the bottom trim and the fasteners. Tighten the trim screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Diagrams Liftgate Latch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lock Plate and Rod Replacement - Liftgate Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Lock Plate and Rod Replacement - Liftgate Lock Plate and Rod Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the liftgate latch. 4. Remove the outside handle rod from the outside handle. 5. Remove the bell crank bolts. 6. Remove the bell crank by sliding the latch to crank rod out of the bell crank. 7. Remove the latch bolts. 8. Remove the latch from the liftgate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lock Plate and Rod Replacement - Liftgate > Page 10291 1. Position the latch to the liftgate. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bolts to the liftgate latch. Tighten the liftgate latch bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the crank by sliding the latch to crank rod into the crank. 4. Install the crank bolts. Tighten the crank bolts to 12 N.m (9 lb ft). 5. Install the outside handle rod to the latch and the outside handle. 6. Inspect the function of the latch by performing the following: 1. Reset the liftgate latch by inserting a screwdriver into the mouth of the latch. 2. Pull the outside handle. 7. Connect the electrical connector to the liftgate latch. 8. Install the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 9. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lock Plate and Rod Replacement - Liftgate > Page 10292 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Wedge Replacement - Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the bolts from the wedge plate. 3. Remove the wedge plate from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the wedge plate to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Lock Plate and Rod Replacement - Liftgate > Page 10293 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bolts into the wedge plate. Tighten the wedge bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Close the liftgate. 4. Inspect for proper engagement of the wedge plate to the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation Technical Service Bulletin # 04084 Date: 041122 Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation Customer Satisfaction - Liftgate Strut Attachment Bracket # 04084 - (Nov 22, 2004) 04084 -- Liftgate Strut Attachment Bracket Model: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition On certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles, the liftgate strut attachment bracket may deform and allow the strut to contact the metal body surface. Continued contact during liftgate operation may cause the strut to twist and detach. If this were to occur, the remaining strut may not be capable of retaining the liftgate in the open position. Correction Dealers are to replace both liftgate brackets. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles equipped built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: Dealers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning program repairs. [Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] For US For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld, Recall Information website. Dealers that have no involved vehicles currently assigned, will not have a report available in GM DealerWorld. For Canada For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers that have no involved vehicles currently assigned, will not receive a Campaign Initiation Detail Report. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10302 and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this program MUST be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin BEFORE customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. This could be done by mailing to such customers a copy of the customer letter shown in this bulletin. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure The following procedure provides instructions for replacing the brackets that attach the liftgate struts to the rear body opening. Caution: When a liftgate hold-open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10303 personal injury. 1. Open the liftgate and support as necessary. Important: The spring clip should not be completely removed from the strut in the next step. 2. Slightly rotate the left support on the ball stud (2) located on the body bracket. 3. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, lift the spring clip partially outward and remove the support strut end from the ball stud on the bracket. 4. Remove the two 10 mm hex head bolts (1) that attach the bracket to the body and remove the bracket. 5. Position the new bracket to the body and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the two bolts to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 6. Return the spring clip to its original seated position on the support strut end. Important: There should be adequate lubricant remaining in the opening of the support strut and therefore, additional lubricant should not be required. 7. Align and press the support strut end onto the ball stud on the new bracket until fully seated. 8. Repeat the procedure on the opposite side bracket. 9. Close, open and close the liftgate to confirm proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10304 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10305 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-002A > Jan > 10 > Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Is Hard to Open in Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation Technical Service Bulletin # 04084 Date: 041122 Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation Customer Satisfaction - Liftgate Strut Attachment Bracket # 04084 - (Nov 22, 2004) 04084 -- Liftgate Strut Attachment Bracket Model: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition On certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles, the liftgate strut attachment bracket may deform and allow the strut to contact the metal body surface. Continued contact during liftgate operation may cause the strut to twist and detach. If this were to occur, the remaining strut may not be capable of retaining the liftgate in the open position. Correction Dealers are to replace both liftgate brackets. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles equipped built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: Dealers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning program repairs. [Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] For US For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld, Recall Information website. Dealers that have no involved vehicles currently assigned, will not have a report available in GM DealerWorld. For Canada For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers that have no involved vehicles currently assigned, will not receive a Campaign Initiation Detail Report. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10328 and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this program MUST be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin BEFORE customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. This could be done by mailing to such customers a copy of the customer letter shown in this bulletin. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure The following procedure provides instructions for replacing the brackets that attach the liftgate struts to the rear body opening. Caution: When a liftgate hold-open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10329 personal injury. 1. Open the liftgate and support as necessary. Important: The spring clip should not be completely removed from the strut in the next step. 2. Slightly rotate the left support on the ball stud (2) located on the body bracket. 3. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, lift the spring clip partially outward and remove the support strut end from the ball stud on the bracket. 4. Remove the two 10 mm hex head bolts (1) that attach the bracket to the body and remove the bracket. 5. Position the new bracket to the body and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the two bolts to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 6. Return the spring clip to its original seated position on the support strut end. Important: There should be adequate lubricant remaining in the opening of the support strut and therefore, additional lubricant should not be required. 7. Align and press the support strut end onto the ball stud on the new bracket until fully seated. 8. Repeat the procedure on the opposite side bracket. 9. Close, open and close the liftgate to confirm proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10330 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10331 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Hard To Open In Cold Weather TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-002A Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Liftgate Hard to Open in Cold Weather (Replace Both Liftgate Struts) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the liftgate is hard to open in cold weather (below 0°C (32°F)). Cause The valve in the strut may be the cause. Correction Replace BOTH liftgate struts. The new strut has a temperature compensating valve that will improve cold weather performance. Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation Technical Service Bulletin # 04084 Date: 041122 Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation Customer Satisfaction - Liftgate Strut Attachment Bracket # 04084 - (Nov 22, 2004) 04084 -- Liftgate Strut Attachment Bracket Model: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition On certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles, the liftgate strut attachment bracket may deform and allow the strut to contact the metal body surface. Continued contact during liftgate operation may cause the strut to twist and detach. If this were to occur, the remaining strut may not be capable of retaining the liftgate in the open position. Correction Dealers are to replace both liftgate brackets. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles equipped built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Important: Dealers should confirm vehicle eligibility through GMVIS (GM Vehicle Inquiry System) prior to beginning program repairs. [Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.] For US For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared and will be loaded to the GM DealerWorld, Recall Information website. Dealers that have no involved vehicles currently assigned, will not have a report available in GM DealerWorld. For Canada For dealers with involved vehicles, a Campaign Initiation Detail Report containing the complete Vehicle Identification Number, customer name and address data has been prepared, and is being furnished to involved dealers. Dealers that have no involved vehicles currently assigned, will not receive a Campaign Initiation Detail Report. The Campaign Initiation Detail Report may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering requirements. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10342 and involved in a product recall is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information Submit a Product Recall Claim with the information shown. Customer Notification -- For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this program MUST be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin BEFORE customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. This could be done by mailing to such customers a copy of the customer letter shown in this bulletin. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure The following procedure provides instructions for replacing the brackets that attach the liftgate struts to the rear body opening. Caution: When a liftgate hold-open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10343 personal injury. 1. Open the liftgate and support as necessary. Important: The spring clip should not be completely removed from the strut in the next step. 2. Slightly rotate the left support on the ball stud (2) located on the body bracket. 3. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, lift the spring clip partially outward and remove the support strut end from the ball stud on the bracket. 4. Remove the two 10 mm hex head bolts (1) that attach the bracket to the body and remove the bracket. 5. Position the new bracket to the body and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the two bolts to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 6. Return the spring clip to its original seated position on the support strut end. Important: There should be adequate lubricant remaining in the opening of the support strut and therefore, additional lubricant should not be required. 7. Align and press the support strut end onto the ball stud on the new bracket until fully seated. 8. Repeat the procedure on the opposite side bracket. 9. Close, open and close the liftgate to confirm proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10344 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 04084 > Nov > 04 > Campaign - Liftgate Strut Bracket Deformation > Page 10345 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10346 Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Strut Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure Caution: When a lift gate hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open and support the liftgate. Important: Spring clips should not be removed from the struts. 2. Lift up and partially remove the spring clips on the strut using a small flat-bladed tool. 3. Remove the upper end of the strut from the ball joint. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10347 4. Remove the lower end of the strut from the ball joint. 5. Remove the strut from the liftgate. Installation Procedure 1. Position the strut to the liftgate. 2. Install the upper end of the strut to the ball joint. Press in to place until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10348 3. Install the lower end of the strut to the ball joint. Press in to place until fully seated. 4. Remove the support from the liftgate. 5. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Stop > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Stop: Service and Repair Bumper Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the tail lamp. Refer to Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement in Lighting Systems. 3. Remove the liftgate bumper bolts. 4. Remove the bumper. Installation Procedure 1. Position the liftgate bumper on the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Stop > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10352 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the bumper bolts. Tighten the bumper bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Install the tail lamp. Refer to Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement in Lighting Systems. 4. Close the liftgate. 5. Inspect for proper engagement of the liftgate bumper. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Adjustments Lock Striker Adjustment Important: Make certain the lift gate is properly aligned within the lift gate opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 1. Close the lift gate onto the striker and note if lift gate drags on striker causing the lift gate to move side to side upon contact with the striker. Also note closing efforts to fully engage latch. 2. Mark around the striker with a grease pencil for reference of original position. 3. Loosen striker bolts. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on striker and lift gate latch and to achieve proper lift gate position within the lift gate opening. 5. Align the left/right lift gate position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to lift gate opening. 6. Align the in/out adjustment for proper lift gate seal engagement making sure the lift gate closing efforts are correct. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 7. Verify correct alignment of striker and tighten striker bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 10356 Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Service and Repair Lock Striker Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the lift gate. 2. Mark the location of the striker with a grease pencil for installation purposes. 3. Remove bolts from lift gate striker. 4. Remove lift gate striker from vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Align the striker to the marks made in the removal procedure. Notice: Refer toFastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 10357 2. Install the lift gate striker bolts. Tighten the lift gate striker retaining bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Check lift gate closing efforts and align striker as required. Refer to Lock Striker Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . 4. Close the lift gate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10366 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10367 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10368 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10369 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10370 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10376 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10377 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10378 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10379 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 10380 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > 06-08-111-004B - BULLETIN CANCELLATION NOTIFICATION Body Emblem: Technical Service Bulletins 06-08-111-004B - BULLETIN CANCELLATION NOTIFICATION TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-111-004B Date: September 25, 2009 Subject: Information on Discoloration, Blistering, Peeling or Erosion of Various Exterior Emblems Including Chevy Bowtie (Bulletin Cancelled) Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being cancelled. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-111-004A (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). This bulletin is being cancelled. The information is no longer applicable. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10386 Body Emblem: Service and Repair Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. When replacing an emblem/nameplate do the following: 1. Use tape to protect the mounting surface during removal. 2. Use tape for alignment marks for installation of the emblem/nameplate. 2. To remove an emblem/nameplate, heat the emblem/nameplate using a heat gun. 3. Apply the heat using a circular motion for about 30 seconds holding the heat gun approximately 152 mm (6 in) from the surface. Notice: Refer to Exterior Trim Emblem Removal Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Use a plastic, flat-bladed tool to remove the emblem/nameplate from the panel surface. 5. When replacing, remove all adhesive as follows: * For body panels use a 3M(TM) Scotch Brite molding adhesive remover disk 3M(TM) P/N 07501 or equivalent. * For plastic panels use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water to remove the adhesive. Installation Procedure Important: Apply the emblem/nameplate in an environment that is free from dust or other dirt that could come into contact with the sticky backing. Foreign material may cause improper adhesion. 1. Clean the area where the emblem/nameplate will be installed. Use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water to clean the area. 2. Dry the area thoroughly. 3. If the location of the emblem/nameplate has not been marked, apply tape and mark the location as shown below. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10387 4. For the EQUINOX emblem/nameplate install to the following dimensions: Important: All dimensions are arc length measurements. * Dimension (a) is 11 mm (0.043 in) from the side of the emblem/nameplate to the left edge of the lift gate. * Dimension (b) is 160 mm (6.30 in) from the center of the emblem/nameplate to the bottom of the lift gate. 5. For the CHEVROLET emblem/nameplate install to the following dimensions: Important: All dimensions are arc length measurements. * Dimension (a) is 31 mm (1.22 in) from the side of the emblem/nameplate to the right edge of the lift gate. * Dimension (b) is 160 mm (6.30 in) from the center of the emblem/nameplate to the bottom of the lift gate. 6. Heat the mounting surface to approximately 27-41°C (80-105°F) using the heat gun, if necessary. 7. Ensure that the temperature of the emblem/nameplate is approximately 29-32°C (85-90°F). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10388 Important: Do not touch the adhesive backing on the emblem/nameplate. 8. Remove the protective liner from the back of the emblem/nameplate. 9. Position the emblem/nameplate to the location marks and press the emblem/nameplate to the mounting surface. 10. Apply equal pressure along the emblem/nameplate to uniformly bond the item to the mounting surface. 11. Remove the protective tape from the mounting surface. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. 2. Remove the right side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 3. Remove the right side air inlet grille from the vehicle. 4. Remove the left side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 5. Lift up the left side air inlet grille and disconnect the front washer nozzle hose from the front nozzles. 6. Depress the nozzle retaining tabs on the under side of the air inlet grille and pull front nozzles up. 7. Remove the left side air inlet grille. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10392 1. Install the front washer nozzles into the air inlet grille. 2. Connect the washer nozzle hose to the front washer nozzles. 3. Install the left side air inlet grille. 4. Install the right side air inlet grille. 5. Install the push-in retainers. 6. Install the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair License Plate Pocket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear license plate screws. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the nuts that secure the license pocket to the liftgate. 4. Remove the rear license plate pocket from the liftgate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10396 1. Position the rear license plate pocket to the liftgate. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the nuts that secure the license pocket to the liftgate. Tighten the nuts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the liftgate trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 4. Install the rear license plate screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Applique Replacement - Windshield Frame Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws from the windshield pillar applique. 2. Remove applique from the vehicle by carefully pulling from the front of the molding rearward to disengage the retainers. Installation Procedure 1. Position the windshield pillar applique to the vehicle and push in to secure the retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws that secure the applique to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10400 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Wheelhouse Liner Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the push-in retainers from the front wheelhouse liner. 2. Remove the wheelhouse liner to rocker molding screw. 3. Remove the wheelhouse liner from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the front wheelhouse liner to the vehicle. 2. Install the push-in retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10406 3. Install the wheelhouse liner to rocker molding screw. Tighten the screw to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Wheelhouse Liner Panel Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear wheelhouse liner push-in retainers. 2. Remove the rear wheelhouse liner from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the rear wheelhouse liner to the vehicle. 2. Install the push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Firewall > Component Information > Service and Repair Firewall: Service and Repair Plenum Panel Replacement - Upper Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Caution in Cautions and Notices. 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones in SIR. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure in Engine Electrical. 3. Remove all related panels and components. 4. Repair as much of the damage as possible to factory specifications. Refer to Dimensions - Body () . 5. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair () in Paint/Coatings. Important: Do not damage any inner panels or reinforcements. 6. Locate and drill out all factory welds. Note the number and location of the welds for installation of the plenum top panel. 7. Remove the damaged plenum top panel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Firewall > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10414 Important: If the location of the original plug weld holes can not be determined, space the plug weld holes every 40 mm (1 1/2 in) apart. Some panels may have structural weld-thru adhesive. It is necessary to replace the weld-thru adhesive with an additional spot weld between each factory spot weld. 1. Drill 8-mm (5/16-in) plug weld holes in the service part as necessary in the locations noted from the original panel. 2. Prepare all mating surfaces as necessary. 3. Apply 3M Weld-Thru Coating P/N 05916 or equivalent to all mating surfaces. 4. Position the plenum top panel to the vehicle using 3-dimensional measuring equipment. Clamp the plenum top panel into place. 5. Plug weld accordingly. 6. Clean and prepare all welded surfaces. 7. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials to the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair () in Paint/Coatings. 8. Paint the repair area. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems) in Paint/Coatings. 9. Install all related panels and components. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnect/Connect Procedure in Engine Electrical. 11. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones in SIR. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member Bushing > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Cross-Member Bushing: Service and Repair Support Rear Drive Module Mounting Bushing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 44866 Support Bushing Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the production muffler and resonator as an assembly. 3. Remove the rear stabilizer shaft. 4. Remove the rear drive module bracket to support bolt and nut. Discard the nut. 5. Remove the rear drive module to rear drive module bolts and nuts. Discard the nuts. 6. Remove the rear drive module bracket from the vehicle. 7. Install the J 44866 to the support assembly in the following procedure. 1. Position the large part of the tool over the bushing flange and against the frame. 2. Install the bolt and washer. 3. Install the small part of the tool against the bushing. 4. Lube the threads of the J 44866 with extreme pressure (EP) lube. 5. Important: Ensure the small end of the tool is aligned with the bushing. Install the bearing, washer and nut. 6. Tighten the J 44866 in order to remove the bushing from the support assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member Bushing > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10420 1. Install the J 44866 to the support assembly in the following procedure. 1. Place the bolt washer and large portion of the J 44866 against the frame. 2. Position the bushing against the support assembly. Align the bushing with the slots in the rubber portion straight up and down. 3. Position the small part of the J 44866 against the bushing flange area. 4. Lube the threads of the J 44866 with EP lube. 5. Install the bearing, washer and nut. 6. Important: The bushing must be fully seated. Tighten the J 44866 in order to install the bushing into the support assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the rear drive module bracket to the rear drive module, using new nuts. ^ Tighten the drive module bracket to drive module bolts and nuts to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rear bracket to support bolt, using a new nut. ^ Tighten the drive module bracket to support assembly bolt and nut to 125 Nm (92 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the rear stabilizer shaft. 5. install the production muffler and resonator as an assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe: Service and Repair Frame Replacement (LNJ) Tools Required * J 43828 Ball Joint Remover * SA9140E Torque Angle Gage Removal Procedure 1. Secure the radiator to the upper radiator support. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in General Information. 3. Remove the front wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Tires and wheels. 4. Remove the side splash shield-to-frame fasteners. 5. Remove the front air dam-to-frame fasteners. 6. Remove the rear transaxle mount-to-frame bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10425 7. Remove the front transaxle mount through bolt. 8. Remove the steering gear-to-frame bolts. 9. Using mechanics wire, secure the steering gear to the exhaust. 10. Remove the stabilizer shaft clamp-to-frame bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10426 11. Remove the lower ball joint cotter pins. Discard the cotter pins. 12. Loosen the lower ball joint castle nut until the nut is level with the top of the ball stud. Notice: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 13. Using the J 43828 , separate the lower control arm from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10427 14. Remove the frame-to-body bolts. Discard the bolts. 15. Carefully lower the frame from the vehicle. 16. Remove the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement in Front Suspension. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement in Front Suspension. 2. Raise the frame to the body. Important: Do not tighten the fasteners at this time. 3. Loosely install new frame-to-body bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10428 4. Connect the ball joint stud to the steering knuckle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Using the SA9140E , install the ball stud castle nut. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in) + 180 degrees. Important: * Do not loosen the castle nut in order to align the cotter pin slots. * Ensure the cutter pin ends do not contact the wheel speed sensor harness. 6. Continue to tighten the castle nut to align the slots with the opening in the ball stud and install the ball stud cotter pin. 7. Remove the mechanics wire and install the steering gear to the frame. Tighten the bolts to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10429 8. Install the front transaxle mount through bolt. Tighten the bolt to 110 N.m (81 lb ft). 9. Install the rear transaxle mount-to-frame bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 10. Install the stabilizer shaft clamp. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 11. Tighten the frame-to-body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 155 N.m (114 lb ft). 12. Install the front air dam fasteners. 13. Install the side splash shield-to-frame fasteners. 14. Install the front wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Tires and Wheels. 15. Lower the vehicle. 16. Unsecure the radiator from the upper radiator support. 17. Align the front suspension. Refer to Front Toe Adjustment . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-110-001 Date: March 30, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Use of Floor Mats Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X GM's carpeted and all-weather (rubber) floor mats are especially designed for use in specific GM vehicles. Using floor mats that were not designed for the specific vehicle or using them incorrectly may cause interference with the accelerator or brake pedal. Please review the following safety guidelines regarding proper driver's side floor mat usage with the customer. Warning If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. - Do not flip the driver's floor mat over (in an effort to keep the floor mat clean) - Do not place anything on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. carpet remnant, towel) - Do not place another mat on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. do not place all-weather rubber mats over carpeted floor mats) - Only use floor mats that are designed specifically for your vehicle - When using replacement mats, make certain the mats do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal before driving the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a floor mat retaining pin(s) or clip(s), make certain the mat is installed correctly and according to the instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 10435 After installing floor mats, make certain they cannot move and do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedals. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 10436 Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 10437 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 10438 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Carpet: Procedures Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator, GM P/N 12378554, US ACDelco 88900909, Canadian P/N 88901678, may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. This non-toxic, biodegradable, odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove the following types of odor: * Objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks * Customer created odors, such as smoke You may safely use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet, and sound deadening materials. You may also induce this product into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts for the control of non-bacterial related odors. Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be used as an air freshener. This product may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers whose allergies make them sensitive to perfumes. This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. In cases such as water leaks, use this product with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the primary cause of the odor. Then use further applications on the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. How to Use this Product * Spray GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator directly or as an additive with carpet shampoo in steam cleaners. * Do not use on any interior surface that plain water would deteriorate, because this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. * Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10441 Carpet: Removal and Replacement Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Starting at the rear of the door sill plate, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Reach under the instrument panel and pull inward to disengage the additional attaching clips. 3. Remove the door sill plate from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Rotate the door sill plate under the instrument panel. 2. Position the part over the frame. 3. Push at the clip locations to secure the plate to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10442 Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Starting at the front of the retainer, pull upward to disengage the attaching clips. 2. Slide the retainer out from beneath the quarter trim. 3. Remove the carpet retainer from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the carpet retainer to the vehicle with the rear tabs installed under the cargo trim panel. 2. Push at the clip locations to secure the carpet retainer to the vehicle. Carpet Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10443 Carpet Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seats. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) in Seats. 2. Remove the rear seats. Refer to Seat Replacement - Rear (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Rear) in Seats. 3. Remove the front carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front) . 4. Remove the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) . 5. Remove the center console trim panels and the center console. Refer to Console Replacement (See: Console/Service and Repair) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 6. Remove the floor carpet by pulling the carpet from under the center pillar assemblies and lifting the carpet out of the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the carpet in the vehicle. 2. Tuck the carpet under the center pillar assemblies. 3. Install the center console trim panels and the center console. Refer to Console Replacement (See: Console/Service and Repair) in Instrument Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10444 Panel, Gages, and Console. 4. Install the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) . 5. Install the front carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front) . 6. Install the rear seats. Refer to Seat Replacement - Rear (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Rear) in Seats. 7. Install the front seats. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) in Seats. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation Console: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING KEY IDENTIFICATION AND USAGE The keys are double sided and reversible. The master key and valet key contain transponders that are read by the theft deterrent system when the keys are used in the ignition. The keys have 10 cut positions (1) with five different depths (2). Two master keys are supplied with the vehicle which contain a transponder (3). These keys will operate all of the locks on the vehicle. CUTTING KEYS The key code can be obtained by translating the five-character identification code on the key tag or the original Ignition Lock Cylinder. The keys have 10 cut positions (1) and five cut depths (2). Key cut positions are numbered 1 to 10, counting from the head of the key to the tip. The key cut depths are 1 to 5. The master key contains a transponder (3). If the body control module (BCM) does not recognize a valid key transponder, the BCM will disable the vehicle. For programing the keys to the vehicle, refer to Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent. 1. Cut a blank key to the proper depth and sequence of each of the tumbler positions. 2. Inspect the mechanical operation of the key in the lock cylinders in the doors, the ignition switch, the rear compartment lid and any storage compartments: Turn the key both directions in each lock cylinder. - Turn the key with each side of the key pointing upward in each lock cylinder. 3. If replacing a master key, program the key transponder to the vehicle. Refer to Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent. LOCK CYLINDER TUMBLERS Each of the five key cut depths have a corresponding tumbler. The tumbler depth number (1-5) is stamped on the tumblers for identification. ASSEMBLING AND CODING IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER tools required J 41340 Lock Cylinder Staking and Holding Fixture IMPORTANT: If the key code cannot be obtained no identification code is available, proceed to step 1. If the key code is known or a new key code will be used, proceed to step 6. 1. Remove all of the tumblers by rotating the lock cylinder so that the tumbler slots are facing down. IMPORTANT: Be careful to observe and record each tumbler and it's relative position in the lock cylinder as the tumblers are removed. 2. Hold the lock cylinder close to a flat surface. 3. Pull the lock cylinder side bar out with your fingers. It may be necessary to tap the lock cylinder on a hard surface to remove all of the tumblers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10448 4. Determine the tumbler numbers and their respective positions. To determine the current key code perform the following steps: 1. Starting with position (1) the open end of the lock cylinder, find and record the lowest level (tumbler number) that is visible. 2. Repeat the previous step for positions (2) through 10. 5. Starting with position (1), insert the tumblers (2) into their corresponding slots in the coded order. 6. Using your fingers, pull out the side bar (8) until the tumblers fall completely into the lock cylinder. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (3) above each tumbler (2). 8. Lubricate the tumblers using GM P/N 12346241 or equivalent. 9. Insert the spring retainer (4) into the lock cylinder. 10. Use a flat bladed tool to firmly press the retainer (1) down until the lock cylinder is fully seated in the lock cylinder. 11. Inspect for proper tumbler installation: 1. Hold the spring retainer (2) in position. 2. Insert the key (1) into the lock cylinder. The side bar (3) should drop down to the level of the lock cylinder. If the side bar does NOT drop down to the level of the lock cylinder, proceed to the previous step 2. 12. Remove the key from the lock cylinder. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10449 13. Secure the lock cylinder in the J 41340. 1. Inspect that the spring retainer is facing up and positioned directly under the punch slots. 2. Insert the lock cylinder completely into the J 41340 until the lock cylinder bezel contacts the J 41340. 3. Tighten the J 41340 holding screw. 14. Stake the bezel end of the spring retainer: 1. Hold the flat side of the punch squarely against the face of the lock cylinder bezel. 2. Stake the lock cylinder metal over the spring retainer prong. 15. Stake the opposite end of the spring retainer: 1. Remove the J 41340 punch. 2. Rotate the J 41340 punch 180 degrees. 3. Hold the J 41340 punch squarely against the end of the punch slot. 4. Stake the lock cylinder metal over the spring retainer prong. 16. Loosen the J 41340 holding screw. 17. Remove the lock cylinder from the J 41340. 18. Inspect that the spring retainer is properly staked. Repeat staking as needed. 19. Lubricate the lock cylinder retainer slot and the lock cylinder retainer with GM P/N 12345996 or equivalent. 20. Orient the lock cylinder retainer to the tapered notch in the lock cylinder housing. 21. Insert the ignition lock cylinder into the ignition lock cylinder housing. 22. Inspect for proper ignition lock cylinder rotation using the key. ASSEMBLING AND CODING THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER The door lock cylinder uses seven tumblers (positions 3 through 9). The tumbler positions are staggered on both sides of the lock cylinder (five on one side and three on the other). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10450 1. Hold the cylinder (6) so that the side with five tumbler openings are up. IMPORTANT: The lock cylinder tumblers are not self-retaining. Hold the tumblers in place when the key is not in the lock cylinder. Hold the lock cylinder tumblers (8) in place when performing this procedure. 2. Insert five tumbler springs (7) into the five spring wells. 3. Install the tumbler (8) for position 4 in the slot nearest to the front of the lock cylinder. 4. Install the 3 remaining tumblers (8) for positions 6, 8 and 10 in the lock cylinder. 5. Press the tumblers into place with light hand pressure. 6. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. 7. Rotate the lock cylinder (6) so that the side with 3 tumbler openings are up. IMPORTANT: Hold the tumblers in place before removing the key. 8. Insert 3 tumbler springs (7) into the 3 spring wells. 9. Install the tumbler for position 5 into the slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder. 10. Install the 2 remaining tumblers for positions 7 and 9 in the lock cylinder. 11. Press the tumblers into place with light hand pressure. 12. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. 13. Lubricate the tumblers using GM P/N 12346241 or equivalent. 14. If necessary, perform the following steps to install the shudder door. - Install the 2 plate springs (3) into the 2 spring wells in the head of the lock cylinder (6). - Press the shutter (2) into the lock cylinder until it snaps into place. 15. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the lock cylinder does not rotate in the lock cylinder housing, disassemble the lock cylinder and perform the coding procedure again. 16. Partially remove the lock cylinder core to install the spring and ball. 17. Place the detent spring (5) into the spring well located on the side of the lock cylinder (6). 18. Apply the heavy grease to end of spring to retain the detent ball. Carefully place the detent ball (4) on the detent spring (5). 19. Using a small flat bladed tool to hold the ball in place. Simultaneously insert the lock cylinder core into the lock cylinder housing. 20. Depress the detent ball and spring and insert the cylinder (6) into the lock cylinder housing (9). CAUTION: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 21. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the lock cylinder does not rotate in the lock cylinder housing, disassemble the lock cylinder and perform the coding procedure again. 22. Install the lock pawl (10) to the lock cylinder (6). 23. Install the lock pawl E-clip (12) in order to retain the lock pawl. 24. Remove the key from the lock cylinder (5). 25. Install the lock cylinder cap (1) by pressing the cap onto the lock cylinder with light hand pressure. ASSEMBLING AND CODING THE ENDGATE LOCK CYLINDER The endgate lock cylinder uses seven tumblers positions 3 through 9. The tumbler positions are staggered on both sides of the lock cylinder five on one side and three on the other. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10451 1. Hold the cylinder (6) so that the side with five tumbler openings are up. IMPORTANT: The lock cylinder tumblers are not self-retaining. Hold the tumblers in place when the key is not in the lock cylinder. Hold the lock cylinder tumblers (8) in place when performing this procedure. 2. Insert five tumbler springs (7) into the five spring wells. 3. Install the tumbler (8) for position 4 in the slot nearest to the front of the lock cylinder. 4. Install the 3 remaining tumblers (8) for positions 6, 8 and 10 in the lock cylinder. 5. Press the tumblers into place with light hand pressure. 6. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. 7. Rotate the lock cylinder (6) so that the side with 3 tumbler openings are up. IMPORTANT: Hold the tumblers in place before removing the key. 8. Insert 3 tumbler springs (7) into the 3 spring wells. 9. Install the tumbler for position 5 into the slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder. 10. Install the 2 remaining tumblers for positions 7 and 9 in the lock cylinder. 11. Press the tumblers into place with light hand pressure. 12. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. 13. Lubricate the tumblers using GM P/N 12346241 or equivalent. 14. If necessary, perform the following steps to install the shudder door. - Install the 2 plate springs (3) into the 2 spring wells in the head of the lock cylinder (6). - Press the shutter (2) into the lock cylinder until it snaps into place. 15. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the lock cylinder does not rotate in the lock cylinder housing, disassemble the lock cylinder and perform the coding procedure again. 16. Install the lock cylinder spring (9) to the lock cylinder. 17. Install the lock cylinder spring retainer (8) to the lock cylinder. 18. Remove the key from the lock cylinder (5). 19. Install the lock cylinder cap (1) by pressing the cap onto the lock cylinder with light hand pressure. ASSEMBLING AND CODING IP STORAGE COMPARTMENT LOCK CYLINDER The IP storage compartment lock uses five tumbler positions 7-10. The IP storage compartment lock cylinder also uses a retainer tumbler. The retainer tumbler is not moved by the key. The purpose of the retainer tumbler is to retain the lock cylinder in the lock. The retainer tumbler occupies the slot closest to the head of the IP storage compartment lock cylinder and should come already installed in the cylinder. 1. Hold the cylinder (4) so that the side with five tumbler openings is facing up. 2. Insert tumbler springs (2) into the five spring wells. 3. Install the tumbler (1) for key cut position 7 into the slot nearest to the front of the lock cylinder. 4. Install the 3 remaining tumblers for positions 8, 9 and 10 into the cylinder. 5. Firmly press the tumblers until they snap in place. 6. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (4). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor Console: Service and Repair Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor Removal Procedure 1. Move the front seats rearward and open the center armrest cover. 2. Remove the screws from the hinge holding the armrest cover to the center console. 3. Remove the armrest cover. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10454 1. Align the armrest cover with the hinge positioned correctly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the hinge holding the armrest cover to the center console. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for proper alignment and operation. 4. Return the front seat to the proper position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10455 Console: Service and Repair Console Compartment Door - Latch Replacement LATCH REPLACEMENT - CONSOLE COMPARTMENT DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lift the armrest cover to expose the armrest hinge and insert. 2. Remove the screws from the armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10456 3. Remove the console latch cover to expose the latch screws. 4. Remove the latch screws from the center console armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10457 5. Remove the latch from the armrest cover. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the new latch to the armrest cover. 2. Install the latch screws to the armrest cover. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10458 3. Install the screws that secure the armrest cover to the center console. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the console insert to the armrest cover. 5. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for alignment and operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10459 Console: Service and Repair Console Replacement Console Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. 2. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 3. Remove the console screws. 4. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 6. Slide the center floor console rearward to access the upper console screws. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10460 7. Remove the bolts which hold the console to the center stack. 8. Remove the floor console. Installation Procedure 1. Position the console with the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10461 3. Connect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 4. Reposition the center console. 5. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 6. Install the center console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 7. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10462 Console: Service and Repair Console Storage Bin Replacement Console Storage Bin Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the console lid to expose the hinge. 2. Remove the screws that retain the console hinge to the base. Remove the console hinge. 3. Remove the console storage bin. Installation Procedure 1. Insert the new storage bin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10463 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Fasten the storage bin cover with the hinge screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Inspect the lid for alignment and operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10464 Console: Service and Repair Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor Removal Procedure 1. Move the front seats rearward and open the center armrest cover. 2. Remove the screws from the hinge holding the armrest cover to the center console. 3. Remove the armrest cover. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10465 1. Align the armrest cover with the hinge positioned correctly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the hinge holding the armrest cover to the center console. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for proper alignment and operation. 4. Return the front seat to the proper position. Console Compartment Door - Latch Replacement LATCH REPLACEMENT - CONSOLE COMPARTMENT DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10466 1. Lift the armrest cover to expose the armrest hinge and insert. 2. Remove the screws from the armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10467 3. Remove the console latch cover to expose the latch screws. 4. Remove the latch screws from the center console armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10468 5. Remove the latch from the armrest cover. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the new latch to the armrest cover. 2. Install the latch screws to the armrest cover. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10469 3. Install the screws that secure the armrest cover to the center console. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the console insert to the armrest cover. 5. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for alignment and operation. Console Replacement Console Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10470 2. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 3. Remove the console screws. 4. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 6. Slide the center floor console rearward to access the upper console screws. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10471 7. Remove the bolts which hold the console to the center stack. 8. Remove the floor console. Installation Procedure 1. Position the console with the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10472 3. Connect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 4. Reposition the center console. 5. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 6. Install the center console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 7. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Console Storage Bin Replacement Console Storage Bin Replacement Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10473 1. Raise the console lid to expose the hinge. 2. Remove the screws that retain the console hinge to the base. Remove the console hinge. 3. Remove the console storage bin. Installation Procedure 1. Insert the new storage bin. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10474 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Fasten the storage bin cover with the hinge screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Inspect the lid for alignment and operation. Console Trim Panel Replacement - Left Console Trim Panel Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10475 2. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. 3. Remove the screws from the left console trim panel. 4. Remove the push-in fastener from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10476 5. Remove the trim panel from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the left console trim panel. 2. Install the push-in fastener. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the screws to the left console trim panel. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10477 4. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 5. Push until the trim clips engage. 6. Install the center trim panel. 7. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Console Trim Panel Replacement - Right Console Trim Panel Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10478 2. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. 3. Remove the screws from the right console trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10479 4. Remove the push-in fastener from the trim panel. 5. Remove the trim panel from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10480 1. Position the right console trim panel. 2. Install the push-in fastener. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the screws to the right console trim panel. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 5. Push until the trim clips engage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10481 6. Connect the electrical connectors to the center trim panel. 7. Snap the center trim panel into place. 8. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front CUP HOLDER REPLACEMENT - FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the arm rest on the console. 2. Remove the cupholder cover. 3. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. 4. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10482 5. Pull to separate the cup holder from the track. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the cup holder to the track. 2. Position the track in the console assembly. 3. Install the console track screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the cupholder cover in place. 5. Inspect the cupholder for correct operation. Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10483 CUP HOLDER REPLACEMENT - FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull all the way out on the cup holder. 2. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. 3. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the console track screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10484 2. Verify the rear cup holder for correct operation. Key and Lock Cylinder Coding KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING KEY IDENTIFICATION AND USAGE The keys are double sided and reversible. The master key and valet key contain transponders that are read by the theft deterrent system when the keys are used in the ignition. The keys have 10 cut positions (1) with five different depths (2). Two master keys are supplied with the vehicle which contain a transponder (3). These keys will operate all of the locks on the vehicle. CUTTING KEYS The key code can be obtained by translating the five-character identification code on the key tag or the original Ignition Lock Cylinder. The keys have 10 cut positions (1) and five cut depths (2). Key cut positions are numbered 1 to 10, counting from the head of the key to the tip. The key cut depths are 1 to 5. The master key contains a transponder (3). If the body control module (BCM) does not recognize a valid key transponder, the BCM will disable the vehicle. For programing the keys to the vehicle, refer to Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent. 1. Cut a blank key to the proper depth and sequence of each of the tumbler positions. 2. Inspect the mechanical operation of the key in the lock cylinders in the doors, the ignition switch, the rear compartment lid and any storage compartments: Turn the key both directions in each lock cylinder. - Turn the key with each side of the key pointing upward in each lock cylinder. 3. If replacing a master key, program the key transponder to the vehicle. Refer to Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent. LOCK CYLINDER TUMBLERS Each of the five key cut depths have a corresponding tumbler. The tumbler depth number (1-5) is stamped on the tumblers for identification. ASSEMBLING AND CODING IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER Tools Required J 41340 Lock Cylinder Staking and Holding Fixture IMPORTANT: If the key code cannot be obtained no identification code is available, proceed to step 1. If the key code is known or a new key code will be used, proceed to step 6. 1. Remove all of the tumblers by rotating the lock cylinder so that the tumbler slots are facing down. IMPORTANT: Be careful to observe and record each tumbler and it's relative position in the lock cylinder as the tumblers are removed. 2. Hold the lock cylinder close to a flat surface. 3. Pull the lock cylinder side bar out with your fingers. It may be necessary to tap the lock cylinder on a hard surface to remove all of the tumblers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10485 4. Determine the tumbler numbers and their respective positions. To determine the current key code perform the following steps: 1. Starting with position (1) the open end of the lock cylinder, find and record the lowest level (tumbler number) that is visible. 2. Repeat the previous step for positions (2) through 10. 5. Starting with position (1), insert the tumblers (2) into their corresponding slots in the coded order. 6. Using your fingers, pull out the side bar (8) until the tumblers fall completely into the lock cylinder. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (3) above each tumbler (2). 8. Lubricate the tumblers using GM P/N 12346241 or equivalent. 9. Insert the spring retainer (4) into the lock cylinder. 10. Use a flat bladed tool to firmly press the retainer (1) down until the lock cylinder is fully seated in the lock cylinder. 11. Inspect for proper tumbler installation: 1. Hold the spring retainer (2) in position. 2. Insert the key (1) into the lock cylinder. The side bar (3) should drop down to the level of the lock cylinder. If the side bar does NOT drop down to the level of the lock cylinder, proceed to the previous step 2. 12. Remove the key from the lock cylinder. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10486 13. Secure the lock cylinder in the J 41340. 1. Inspect that the spring retainer is facing up and positioned directly under the punch slots. 2. Insert the lock cylinder completely into the J 41340 until the lock cylinder bezel contacts the J 41340. 3. Tighten the J 41340 holding screw. 14. Stake the bezel end of the spring retainer: 1. Hold the flat side of the punch squarely against the face of the lock cylinder bezel. 2. Stake the lock cylinder metal over the spring retainer prong. 15. Stake the opposite end of the spring retainer: 1. Remove the J 41340 punch. 2. Rotate the J 41340 punch 180 degrees. 3. Hold the J 41340 punch squarely against the end of the punch slot. 4. Stake the lock cylinder metal over the spring retainer prong. 16. Loosen the J 41340 holding screw. 17. Remove the lock cylinder from the J 41340. 18. Inspect that the spring retainer is properly staked. Repeat staking as needed. 19. Lubricate the lock cylinder retainer slot and the lock cylinder retainer with GM P/N 12345996 or equivalent. 20. Orient the lock cylinder retainer to the tapered notch in the lock cylinder housing. 21. Insert the ignition lock cylinder into the ignition lock cylinder housing. 22. Inspect for proper ignition lock cylinder rotation using the key. ASSEMBLING AND CODING THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER The door lock cylinder uses seven tumblers (positions 3 through 9). The tumbler positions are staggered on both sides of the lock cylinder (five on one side and three on the other). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10487 1. Hold the cylinder (6) so that the side with five tumbler openings are up. IMPORTANT: The lock cylinder tumblers are not self-retaining. Hold the tumblers in place when the key is not in the lock cylinder. Hold the lock cylinder tumblers (8) in place when performing this procedure. 2. Insert five tumbler springs (7) into the five spring wells. 3. Install the tumbler (8) for position 4 in the slot nearest to the front of the lock cylinder. 4. Install the 3 remaining tumblers (8) for positions 6, 8 and 10 in the lock cylinder. 5. Press the tumblers into place with light hand pressure. 6. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. 7. Rotate the lock cylinder (6) so that the side with 3 tumbler openings are up. IMPORTANT: Hold the tumblers in place before removing the key. 8. Insert 3 tumbler springs (7) into the 3 spring wells. 9. Install the tumbler for position 5 into the slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder. 10. Install the 2 remaining tumblers for positions 7 and 9 in the lock cylinder. 11. Press the tumblers into place with light hand pressure. 12. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. 13. Lubricate the tumblers using GM P/N 12346241 or equivalent. 14. If necessary, perform the following steps to install the shudder door. - Install the 2 plate springs (3) into the 2 spring wells in the head of the lock cylinder (6). - Press the shutter (2) into the lock cylinder until it snaps into place. 15. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the lock cylinder does not rotate in the lock cylinder housing, disassemble the lock cylinder and perform the coding procedure again. 16. Partially remove the lock cylinder core to install the spring and ball. 17. Place the detent spring (5) into the spring well located on the side of the lock cylinder (6). 18. Apply the heavy grease to end of spring to retain the detent ball. Carefully place the detent ball (4) on the detent spring (5). 19. Using a small flat bladed tool to hold the ball in place. Simultaneously insert the lock cylinder core into the lock cylinder housing. 20. Depress the detent ball and spring and insert the cylinder (6) into the lock cylinder housing (9). CAUTION: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 21. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the lock cylinder does not rotate in the lock cylinder housing, disassemble the lock cylinder and perform the coding procedure again. 22. Install the lock pawl (10) to the lock cylinder (6). 23. Install the lock pawl E-clip (12) in order to retain the lock pawl. 24. Remove the key from the lock cylinder (5). 25. Install the lock cylinder cap (1) by pressing the cap onto the lock cylinder with light hand pressure. ASSEMBLING AND CODING THE ENDGATE LOCK CYLINDER The endgate lock cylinder uses seven tumblers positions 3 through 9. The tumbler positions are staggered on both sides of the lock cylinder five on one side and three on the other. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10488 1. Hold the cylinder (6) so that the side with five tumbler openings are up. IMPORTANT: The lock cylinder tumblers are not self-retaining. Hold the tumblers in place when the key is not in the lock cylinder. Hold the lock cylinder tumblers (8) in place when performing this procedure. 2. Insert five tumbler springs (7) into the five spring wells. 3. Install the tumbler (8) for position 4 in the slot nearest to the front of the lock cylinder. 4. Install the 3 remaining tumblers (8) for positions 6, 8 and 10 in the lock cylinder. 5. Press the tumblers into place with light hand pressure. 6. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. 7. Rotate the lock cylinder (6) so that the side with 3 tumbler openings are up. IMPORTANT: Hold the tumblers in place before removing the key. 8. Insert 3 tumbler springs (7) into the 3 spring wells. 9. Install the tumbler for position 5 into the slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder. 10. Install the 2 remaining tumblers for positions 7 and 9 in the lock cylinder. 11. Press the tumblers into place with light hand pressure. 12. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. 13. Lubricate the tumblers using GM P/N 12346241 or equivalent. 14. If necessary, perform the following steps to install the shudder door. - Install the 2 plate springs (3) into the 2 spring wells in the head of the lock cylinder (6). - Press the shutter (2) into the lock cylinder until it snaps into place. 15. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (6). If the lock cylinder does not rotate in the lock cylinder housing, disassemble the lock cylinder and perform the coding procedure again. 16. Install the lock cylinder spring (9) to the lock cylinder. 17. Install the lock cylinder spring retainer (8) to the lock cylinder. 18. Remove the key from the lock cylinder (5). 19. Install the lock cylinder cap (1) by pressing the cap onto the lock cylinder with light hand pressure. ASSEMBLING AND CODING IP STORAGE COMPARTMENT LOCK CYLINDER The IP storage compartment lock uses five tumbler positions 7-10. The IP storage compartment lock cylinder also uses a retainer tumbler. The retainer tumbler is not moved by the key. The purpose of the retainer tumbler is to retain the lock cylinder in the lock. The retainer tumbler occupies the slot closest to the head of the IP storage compartment lock cylinder and should come already installed in the cylinder. 1. Hold the cylinder (4) so that the side with five tumbler openings is facing up. 2. Insert tumbler springs (2) into the five spring wells. 3. Install the tumbler (1) for key cut position 7 into the slot nearest to the front of the lock cylinder. 4. Install the 3 remaining tumblers for positions 8, 9 and 10 into the cylinder. 5. Firmly press the tumblers until they snap in place. 6. Insert the key into the lock cylinder (4). If the tumblers are not flush with the lock cylinder, remove the tumblers and perform the coding procedure again. Latch Replacement - Console Compartment Door Latch Replacement - Console Compartment Door Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10489 1. Lift the armrest cover to expose the armrest hinge and insert. 2. Remove the screws from the armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10490 3. Remove the console latch cover to expose the latch screws. 4. Remove the latch screws from the center console armrest cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10491 5. Remove the latch from the armrest cover. Installation Procedure 1. Align the new latch to the armrest cover. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the latch screws to the armrest cover. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10492 3. Install the screws that secure the armrest cover to the center console. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the console insert to the armrest cover. 5. Close the armrest cover. Inspect the cover for alignment and operation. Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch Replacement Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10493 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Trim Bezel Replacement - Center) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10494 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. Installation Procedure 1. Position the switch assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10495 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Trim Bezel Replacement - Center) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. Trim Plate Replacement - Console Trim Plate Replacement - Console Removal Procedure 1. Position the front seats rearward. 2. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 3. Remove the console screws. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10496 4. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 6. Slide the center floor console rearward. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10497 7. Remove the center trim panel by pulling outward. Installation Procedure 1. Position the center trim plate to the front console. 2. Push until the trim clips engage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10498 3. Lift the rear of the center floor console. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the auxiliary power outlet. 5. Reposition the center console. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console Armrest Replacement - Front Floor > Page 10499 6. Reach under the front seats to access the lower console screws. 7. Install the center console screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 8. Position the front seat forward to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10505 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10506 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10507 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10508 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10509 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10510 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10511 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10512 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10513 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10514 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10515 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10516 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10517 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10518 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10519 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10520 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10521 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10522 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10523 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10524 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10525 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10526 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10527 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10528 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10529 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10530 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10531 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10532 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10533 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 10534 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drink Holders: Procedures Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front CUP HOLDER REPLACEMENT - FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the arm rest on the console. 2. Remove the cupholder cover. 3. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. 4. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. 5. Pull to separate the cup holder from the track. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10539 1. Install the cup holder to the track. 2. Position the track in the console assembly. 3. Install the console track screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the cupholder cover in place. 5. Inspect the cupholder for correct operation. Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Rear CUP HOLDER REPLACEMENT - FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull all the way out on the cup holder. 2. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10540 3. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the console track screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Verify the rear cup holder for correct operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10541 Drink Holders: Removal and Replacement Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Front Removal Procedure 1. Open the arm rest on the console. 2. Remove the cupholder cover. 3. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. 4. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. 5. Pull to separate the cup holder from the track. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10542 1. Install the cup holder to the track. 2. Position the track in the console assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the console track screws. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 4. Snap the cupholder cover in place. 5. Inspect the cupholder for correct operation. Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Rear Cup Holder Replacement - Front Floor Console - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Pull all the way out on the cup holder. 2. Remove the screws from the cup holder track. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10543 3. Remove the cup holder and the track from the console. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the console track screws. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Verify the rear cup holder for correct operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Glove Compartment Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair Glove Compartment Lock: Service and Repair LATCH REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the I/P compartment door. 2. Remove the compartment latch screws. 3. Remove the latch and rod assembly from the compartment door. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the latch and rod assembly to the handle. 2. Install the latch screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Glove Compartment Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10548 3. Install the I/P compartment door. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when working around the head curtain inflator module. Sharp tools may puncture the curtain airbag. If the head curtain inflator module is damaged in any way, it must be replaced. Notice: If a vehicle is equipped with a head curtain inflator module ensure that the inflator module and tether are undamaged. If tether or curtain airbag are damaged in any way, they must be replaced. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. 2. Remove the sunshade. Refer to Sunshade Replacement (See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunshade Replacement) . 3. Remove the optional reading lamp cover. Refer to Reading Lamp Replacement in Lighting Systems. 4. Disconnect the optional OnStar(R) microphone harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10552 5. Disconnect the optional sunroof switch. 6. Remove the windshield upper garnish molding. Refer to Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement) . 7. Remove the upper center pillar molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower) . 8. Remove the dome lamp. Refer to Dome Lamp Replacement in Lighting Systems. 9. Remove the lock pillar garnish molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper) . 10. Remove the rear corner garnish molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 11. Remove the coat hooks. Refer to Coat Hook Replacement (See: Service and Repair) . 12. Remove the rear pushpin. 13. Pull back the quarter trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 14. Remove the door seal from the headliner edge. 15. Disconnect the headliner electrical connector behind the trim panel. 16. Fold the passenger seat flat and the driver seat forward. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10553 17. Carefully disengage the Velcro(R) and the magnet attachments from the headliner and remove the headliner out from the liftgate opening. Installation Procedure 1. Position the headliner into the vehicle through the liftgate opening. 2. Push on the Velcro(R) and the magnet attachments to partially secure the liner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10554 3. Install the pushpin fastener at the rear of the headliner. 4. Secure the weatherstrip over the edge of the headliner. 5. Connect the sunroof switch electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10555 6. Connect the OnStar(R) microphone electrical connector. 7. Install the reading lamp cover. Refer to Reading Lamp Replacement in Lighting Systems. 8. Connect the OnStar(R) electrical connector. 9. Install the sunshades. Refer to Sunshade Replacement (See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunshade Replacement) . 10. Install the windshield upper garnish molding. Refer to Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement) . 11. Install the center pillar molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower) . 12. Install the dome lamp. Refer to Dome Lamp Replacement . 13. Connect the headliner electrical connectors behind the cargo area trim panel. Connect the clips holding the wire to the metal. 14. Install the driver side quarter trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 15. Install the lock pillar garnish moldings. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper) . 16. Install the rear garnish molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner (See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair) . 17. Install the coat hooks. Refer to Coat Hook Replacement (See: Service and Repair) . 18. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Remove the cargo hooks in the rear sill plate. 2. Remove the load floor from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10559 3. Lift the sill plate to release the fasteners. 4. Remove the sill plate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the sill plate. Snap the sill plate into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10560 2. Install the load floor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the cargo hooks to the sill plate. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sun Visor: Procedures Sunshade Replacement SUNSHADE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Unsnap the sunshade from the inner retainer clip. 2. Remove the sunshade fasteners and remove the sunshade. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the sunshade to the headliner. 2. Install the sunshade with the fasteners. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10565 Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Snap the sunshade into the inner retainer clip. Sunshade Anchor Replacement SUNSHADE ANCHOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Unsnap the sunshade from the inner retainer clip. 2. Remove the inner retainer fastener and the retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the retainer and install the retainer fastener. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10566 Tighten the fastener to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Snap the sunshade into the retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10567 Sun Visor: Removal and Replacement Sunshade Replacement Sunshade Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Unsnap the sunshade from the inner retainer clip. 2. Remove the sunshade fasteners and remove the sunshade. Installation Procedure 1. Position the sunshade to the headliner. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10568 2. Install the sunshade with the fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Snap the sunshade into the inner retainer clip. Sunshade Anchor Replacement Sunshade Anchor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Unsnap the sunshade from the inner retainer clip. 2. Remove the inner retainer fastener and the retainer. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10569 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Position the retainer and install the retainer fastener. Tighten the fastener to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Snap the sunshade into the retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - CENTER PILLAR LOWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. 2. Move the front seat to the forward position. 3. Remove the rear most clip from the hinge pillar garnish molding. 4. Remove the rear carpet retainer. 5. Remove the center pillar upper molding. 6. Starting at the top of the lower garnish molding, pull at the clip locations to disengage the clips. 7. Remove the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10574 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the molding to the frame. CAUTION: Striking the vehicle near the side air bag impact sensor can cause an air bag deployment if the ignition switch is not OFF. To help avoid personal injury and damage to the vehicle from a deployment. Always turn the ignition switch OFF during body repairs. 2. Push at the clip locations to secure the attaching clips. 3. Position the weatherstrip over the edge of the garnish molding. 4. Install the hinge pillar garnish molding. 5. Install the rear carpet retainer. 6. Install the center pillar upper molding. 7. Position the weatherstrip over all of the moldings. 8. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10575 GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - CENTER PILLAR UPPER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Unsnap the fastener cover from the D-ring bolt. 2. Remove the D-ring bolt. 3. Remove the shoulder belt from the center pillar. 4. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the height adjuster button from the shoulder belt, by prying at the top and the bottom slots and pulling on the button. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10576 5. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the attaching clips. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the center pillar garnish molding over the lower garnish molding with the bottom tabs behind the lower molding. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. 3. Insert the weatherstripping over the trim edge. 4. Install the fastener cover to the garnish molding. 5. Install the height adjuster knob. 6. Install the shoulder belt assembly and fasteners. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Press on the shoulder belt fastener cover until the cover snaps closed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10577 8. Ensure proper operation of the seat belt. Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - LOCK PILLAR UPPER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear quarter trim. 2. Open the shoulder belt guide loop cover. 3. Remove the shoulder belt guide and fastener. 4. Remove the lock pillar upper garnish molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10578 1. Align and push to seat the garnish molding. 2. Install the shoulder belt guide loop to the lock pillar. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the shoulder belt guide loop bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Install the rear quarter panel. Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - REAR CORNER REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10579 1. Remove the rear door sill. 2. Remove the cargo hook from the rear quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10580 3. Remove the push pins from the rear quarter trim. 4. Pull the quarter trim away from the rear corner garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10581 5. Pull the corner garnish molding to release. 6. Remove the corner molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Push the rear corner garnish molding until the fasteners are seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10582 2. Push the quarter trim until the fasteners are seated. 3. Install the push pins to the quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10583 4. Install the cargo hooks. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the rear sill plate. 6. Close the liftgate. Garnish Molding Replacement - Windshield Upper WINDSHIELD UPPER GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, remove the fastener cover from the windshield upper garnish molding, by prying at the bottom edge. NOTE: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10584 - Use care when working around the head curtain inflator module. Sharp tools may puncture the curtain airbag. If the head curtain inflator module is damaged in any way, it must be replaced. - If a vehicle is equipped with a head curtain inflator module ensure that the inflator module and tether are undamaged. If tether or curtain airbag are damaged in any way, they must be replaced. 2. Remove the fastener from the garnish molding. 3. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the clips. 4. Remove the molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the windshield upper garnish molding to the top of the instrument panel. Align the molding to the body structure. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. IMPORTANT: If the vehicle is equipped with a side inflator module, position the module tether rearward of the molding attaching clips. 3. Install the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10585 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fastener to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 4. Install the fastener plug to the garnish molding. 5. Replace the door seal over the edge of the garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10586 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. 2. Move the front seat to the forward position. 3. Remove the rearmost clip from the hinge pillar garnish molding. 4. Remove the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) . 5. Remove the center pillar upper molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Garnish Molding Replacement Center Pillar Upper) . 6. Starting at the top of the lower garnish molding, pull at the clip locations to disengage the clips. 7. Remove the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10587 Installation Procedure Caution: Striking the vehicle near the side air bag impact sensor can cause an air bag deployment if the ignition switch is not OFF. To help avoid personal injury and damage to the vehicle from a deployment. Always turn the ignition switch OFF during body repairs. 1. Position the molding to the frame. 2. Push at the clip locations to secure the attaching clips. 3. Position the weatherstrip over the edge of the garnish molding. 4. Install the hinge pillar garnish molding. 5. Install the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) . 6. Install the center pillar upper molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper) . 7. Position the weatherstrip over all of the moldings. 8. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10588 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Removal Procedure 1. Unsnap the fastener cover from the D-ring bolt . 2. Remove the D-ring bolt. 3. Remove the shoulder belt from the center pillar. 4. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the height adjuster button from the shoulder belt, by prying at the top and the bottom slots and pulling on the button. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10589 5. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the attaching clips. Installation Procedure 1. Position the center pillar garnish molding over the lower garnish molding with the bottom tabs behind the lower molding. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. 3. Insert the weatherstripping over the trim edge. 4. Install the fastener cover to the garnish molding. 5. Install the height adjuster knob. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Install the shoulder belt assembly and fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10590 7. Press on the shoulder belt fastener cover until the cover snaps closed. 8. Ensure proper operation of the seat belt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10591 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear quarter trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: ) . 2. Open the shoulder belt guide loop cover. 3. Remove the shoulder belt guide and fastener. 4. Remove the lock pillar upper garnish molding from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10592 1. Align and push to seat the garnish molding. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the shoulder belt guide loop to the lock pillar. Tighten the shoulder belt guide loop bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Install the rear quarter panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: ) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10593 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - CENTER PILLAR LOWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. 2. Move the front seat to the forward position. 3. Remove the rear most clip from the hinge pillar garnish molding. 4. Remove the rear carpet retainer. 5. Remove the center pillar upper molding. 6. Starting at the top of the lower garnish molding, pull at the clip locations to disengage the clips. 7. Remove the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10594 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the molding to the frame. CAUTION: Striking the vehicle near the side air bag impact sensor can cause an air bag deployment if the ignition switch is not OFF. To help avoid personal injury and damage to the vehicle from a deployment. Always turn the ignition switch OFF during body repairs. 2. Push at the clip locations to secure the attaching clips. 3. Position the weatherstrip over the edge of the garnish molding. 4. Install the hinge pillar garnish molding. 5. Install the rear carpet retainer. 6. Install the center pillar upper molding. 7. Position the weatherstrip over all of the moldings. 8. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in Restraint Systems. Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10595 GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - CENTER PILLAR UPPER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Unsnap the fastener cover from the D-ring bolt. 2. Remove the D-ring bolt. 3. Remove the shoulder belt from the center pillar. 4. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the height adjuster button from the shoulder belt, by prying at the top and the bottom slots and pulling on the button. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10596 5. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the attaching clips. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the center pillar garnish molding over the lower garnish molding with the bottom tabs behind the lower molding. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. 3. Insert the weatherstripping over the trim edge. 4. Install the fastener cover to the garnish molding. 5. Install the height adjuster knob. 6. Install the shoulder belt assembly and fasteners. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Press on the shoulder belt fastener cover until the cover snaps closed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10597 8. Ensure proper operation of the seat belt. Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - LOCK PILLAR UPPER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear quarter trim. 2. Open the shoulder belt guide loop cover. 3. Remove the shoulder belt guide and fastener. 4. Remove the lock pillar upper garnish molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10598 1. Align and push to seat the garnish molding. 2. Install the shoulder belt guide loop to the lock pillar. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the shoulder belt guide loop bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Install the rear quarter panel. Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - REAR CORNER REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10599 1. Remove the rear door sill. 2. Remove the cargo hook from the rear quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10600 3. Remove the push pins from the rear quarter trim. 4. Pull the quarter trim away from the rear corner garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10601 5. Pull the corner garnish molding to release. 6. Remove the corner molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Push the rear corner garnish molding until the fasteners are seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10602 2. Push the quarter trim until the fasteners are seated. 3. Install the push pins to the quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10603 4. Install the cargo hooks. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the rear sill plate. 6. Close the liftgate. Garnish Molding Replacement - Windshield Upper WINDSHIELD UPPER GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, remove the fastener cover from the windshield upper garnish molding, by prying at the bottom edge. NOTE: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10604 - Use care when working around the head curtain inflator module. Sharp tools may puncture the curtain airbag. If the head curtain inflator module is damaged in any way, it must be replaced. - If a vehicle is equipped with a head curtain inflator module ensure that the inflator module and tether are undamaged. If tether or curtain airbag are damaged in any way, they must be replaced. 2. Remove the fastener from the garnish molding. 3. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the clips. 4. Remove the molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the windshield upper garnish molding to the top of the instrument panel. Align the molding to the body structure. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. IMPORTANT: If the vehicle is equipped with a side inflator module, position the module tether rearward of the molding attaching clips. 3. Install the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10605 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fastener to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 4. Install the fastener plug to the garnish molding. 5. Replace the door seal over the edge of the garnish molding. Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Lower Removal Procedure 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. 2. Move the front seat to the forward position. 3. Remove the rearmost clip from the hinge pillar garnish molding. 4. Remove the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) . 5. Remove the center pillar upper molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Garnish Molding Replacement Center Pillar Upper) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10606 6. Starting at the top of the lower garnish molding, pull at the clip locations to disengage the clips. 7. Remove the molding. Installation Procedure Caution: Striking the vehicle near the side air bag impact sensor can cause an air bag deployment if the ignition switch is not OFF. To help avoid personal injury and damage to the vehicle from a deployment. Always turn the ignition switch OFF during body repairs. 1. Position the molding to the frame. 2. Push at the clip locations to secure the attaching clips. 3. Position the weatherstrip over the edge of the garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10607 4. Install the hinge pillar garnish molding. 5. Install the rear carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) . 6. Install the center pillar upper molding. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper) . 7. Position the weatherstrip over all of the moldings. 8. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 in SIR. Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper Removal Procedure 1. Unsnap the fastener cover from the D-ring bolt . 2. Remove the D-ring bolt. 3. Remove the shoulder belt from the center pillar. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10608 4. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the height adjuster button from the shoulder belt, by prying at the top and the bottom slots and pulling on the button. 5. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the attaching clips. Installation Procedure 1. Position the center pillar garnish molding over the lower garnish molding with the bottom tabs behind the lower molding. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. 3. Insert the weatherstripping over the trim edge. 4. Install the fastener cover to the garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10609 5. Install the height adjuster knob. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Install the shoulder belt assembly and fasteners. Tighten the fasteners to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Press on the shoulder belt fastener cover until the cover snaps closed. 8. Ensure proper operation of the seat belt. Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper Garnish Molding Replacement - Lock Pillar Upper Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10610 1. Remove the rear quarter trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: ) . 2. Open the shoulder belt guide loop cover. 3. Remove the shoulder belt guide and fastener. 4. Remove the lock pillar upper garnish molding from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Align and push to seat the garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10611 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the shoulder belt guide loop to the lock pillar. Tighten the shoulder belt guide loop bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Install the rear quarter panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower (See: ) . Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Corner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door sill. Refer to Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate (See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10612 2. Remove the cargo hook from the rear quarter trim. 3. Remove the push pins from the rear quarter trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10613 4. Pull the quarter trim away from the rear corner garnish molding. 5. Pull the corner garnish molding to release. 6. Remove the corner molding from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10614 1. Push the rear corner garnish molding until the fasteners are seated. 2. Push the quarter trim until the fasteners are seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10615 3. Install the push pins to the quarter trim. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the cargo hooks. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10616 5. Install the rear sill plate. Refer to Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate (See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair) . 6. Close the liftgate. Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower Trim Panel Replacement - Rear Quarter Lower Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear sill plate. Refer to Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate (See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair) . 2. Move the rear seat forward. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10617 3. Remove the load floor. 4. Disconnect the cargo hooks in the rear side trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10618 5. Remove the push pins from the side trim. 6. If necessary, remove the jack to access the driver side rear side trim panel. 7. Remove the rear side trim panel. Installation Procedure 1. Align the rear side trim panel. Snap the panel into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10619 2. Install the push pins to the side trim. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the cargo hooks. Tighten the cargo hooks to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10620 4. Install the load floor. 5. Install the rear sill plate. Refer to Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate (See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair) . Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement Windshield Upper Garnish Molding Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when working around the head curtain inflator module. Sharp tools may puncture the curtain airbag. If the head curtain inflator module is damaged in any way, it must be replaced. Notice: If a vehicle is equipped with a head curtain inflator module ensure that the inflator module and tether are undamaged. If tether or curtain airbag are damaged in any way, they must be replaced. 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, remove the fastener cover from the windshield upper garnish molding, by prying at the bottom edge. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10621 2. Remove the fastener from the garnish molding. 3. Starting at the top, gently pull on the garnish molding to disengage the clips. 4. Remove the molding from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the windshield upper garnish molding to the top of the instrument panel. Align the molding to the body structure. Important: If the vehicle is equipped with a side inflator module, position the module tether rearward of the molding attaching clips. 2. Gently push at the clip locations to install the garnish molding. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the fastener. Tighten the fastener to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement > Page 10622 4. Install the fastener plug to the garnish molding. 5. Replace the door seal over the edge of the garnish molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Locks: Service and Repair Lock Cylinder Replacement - Door Removal Procedure Important: Do not attempt repairs in order to correct lock cylinder discrepancies. Replace the lock cylinder. 1. Remove the front door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual)) . 2. Remove the lock cylinder retainer clip (1). 3. Remove the lock cylinder from the outside door handle housing (2). Installation Procedure 1. Install the lock cylinder to the outside door handle housing (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10627 2. Install the lock cylinder retainer clip (1). 3. Install the front door window regulator module. Refer to Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual)) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 10632 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 10633 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 10634 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 10640 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT NOTE: - Use of the wrong battery size may damage the transmitter. - When removing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. IMPORTANT: If the transmitter won't work, perform the RKE System Check before replacing the battery. Also, before replacing the battery in the transmitter, make sure that the battery is touching both the negative and positive contacts inside of the transmitter. For battery replacement, use a Panasonic type CR2032 3-volt battery, or equivalent. 1. Use a small coin, or flat-head screwdriver, to separate the bottom of the transmitter from the top. 2. Remove the circuit board from the transmitter housing and key pad by pressing on the LOCK button. NOTE: Do not use sharp objects to help slide the battery out of the clip. This may result in damage to the circuit board. 3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery out of the battery clip. This may require a push from the back side of the clip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10645 4. Replace the battery with the new one making sure that the (+) side of the battery faces away from the circuit board. 5. Reassemble the circuit board and key pad, and replace them in the transmitter housing which does not contain the key pad openings. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to pinch the key pad while closing the housing. 6. Line up and replace the lower housing by snapping the upper and lower housings together. 7. Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle by pressing and holding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for 7 or more seconds. This is required to reestablish communications with the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10650 Door Lock Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10651 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push inward to seat the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10652 3. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time Heated Element: Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-64-011A Date: February 25, 2010 Subject: Information on Heated Electrochromatic Outside Rearview Mirror Performance Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-64-011 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Defrosting Time/Performance Concern The electrochromatic (auto-dimming) outside rearview mirror used on the driver's side of many GM vehicles is slower to defrost than the passenger side outside rearview mirror. This is a normal condition. The glass on the driver's side electrochromatic mirror is twice as thick as the traditional glass on the passenger side mirror. The heating elements for the mirrors on both sides draw the same wattage, therefore the driver's side mirror will take approximately twice as long to defrost as the passenger mirror (approximately four minutes versus two minutes). Should a customer indicate that the driver's side heated mirror is not functioning correctly, verify it's function based upon this information prior to replacing the mirror. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Personalization PERSONALIZATION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Personalization features may be set for the vehicle or the driver. Vehicle features do not change with each driver. For more information on vehicle personalization features for this vehicle, refer to Vehicle Personalization. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization > Page 10662 Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Vehicle Personalization VEHICLE PERSONALIZATION PROGRAMMING FEATURES WITH TECH 2 Enter Programming To enter Programming with the Tech 2, perform the following actions: 1. Install the scan tool. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Select the correct vehicle and model year. 4. Select F1: Body Control Module 5. Select F2: Special Functions 6. Select F2: Personalization SETTING OPTIONS Select an option with the UP/DOWN ARROW keys. The selected option will be highlighted. Use the SIDE TO SIDE ARROW keys to activate or deactivate the highlighted options, an ASTERISK will be displayed when an option has been ACTIVATED. Use the SOFT keys to save the selected options or use the EXIT key to leave the options unchanged. After all options have been selected press the SOFT key to continue. The following is a list of the selectable options: F0: Pre-alarm Option - F1: CTD Operation - F2: Door Lock Operation - F3: Fob Feedback - F4: Afterblow Option Pre-alarm Option Refer to Theft Systems Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. CTD Operation Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. Door Lock Operation Automatic Door Lock and Automatic Door Unlock can be configured with the Tech 2. Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors for more information. Fob Feedback Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry for information. Afterblow Option Refer to SIR Syste Description and Operation in Restraint Systems for information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10666 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10667 3. Remove the power mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10668 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Paint: Customer Interest Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page 10678 Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page 10684 Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 08-08-51-002 > Mar > 08 > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 04-08-51-004A > Aug > 05 > Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Info - Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Tips and Techniques #04-08-51-004A - (Aug 11, 2005) Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Tips and Techniques 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 1991-2006 Saturn Vehicles Technician This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-51-004 (Section 08 -- Body & Accessories). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide service information regarding the proper installation of pinstripes and vinyl graphics. Pinstripe Installation Procedures Surface Preparation Important: The vehicle surface must be properly prepared prior to installation of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. All surfaces must be cleaned prior to any application of pinstripe/vinyl graphic products. 1. For best results, the pinstripe/vinyl graphic application should be done in temperatures ranging between 16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F). Do not install pinstripes/vinyl graphics outdoors if winds exceed 16 km/h (10 mph). Dirt, dust or other contaminants can interfere with the bonding of the adhesive to the vehicle during installation. 2. Wash the vehicle surface with an approved vehicle detergent, Saturn P/N 21112715 (in Canada, GM P/N 993279), or equivalent, and water, then thoroughly rinse the surface with water and dry completely. Notice: Do not use any aromatic solvents such as acetone, methylethylketone (M.E.K.), toluene, paint thinner, lacquer thinner, gasoline or ammonia-based cleaners to clean the vehicle surface. Use of these solvents may result in damage to vehicle finish. 3. Saturate a clean cloth with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol and wipe the surface of the vehicle where the graphic is to be applied to remove any contaminants such as silicone, wax, or adhesives. Important: Isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol evaporates quickly and must be wiped off the surface before it evaporates to effectively clean the surface. 4. Dry surface with a lint free paper towel. Application Procedure 1. For best results, make sure the pinstripes/vinyl graphics and vehicle temperatures are between 16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F). 2. Position the pinstripes/vinyl graphics as desired on the vehicle. Use one of the following methods - For large pieces or stripes, use masking tape to position and hold the pinstripes/vinyl graphics on the vehicle. Apply a masking tape "hinge" to the piece or stripe, if necessary, to further stabilize the piece or stripe. - For small pieces, freely position and apply the pinstripes/vinyl graphics after liner removal. 4. Remove the liner by flicking a corner of the film away from the liner and pulling the liner away from the pinstripes/vinyl graphics at a 180° angle. 5. Remove the application tape from the pinstripes/vinyl graphics by pulling it directly back upon itself at a 180° angle to the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. Use a slow, constant speed, taking care to avoid pulling against the graphic areas that contain points or sharp corners. 6. Using a plastic squeegee, 3M(R) P/N 71602 squeegee with 3M(R) P/N 71603 squeegee sleeve, or equivalent, press the pinstripes/vinyl graphics firmly to the vehicle. Use vertical, firm, overlapping strokes. Hold the end of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics off the vehicle with light tension to prevent it from pre-adhering and forming air bubbles. If narrow striping is applied with thumb pressure to avoid stretching the stripe, a second pass with a squeegee will avoid post-application film bubbling. Notice: A light touch must be used when trimming the striping to avoid cutting into and damaging the painted surface of the vehicle. 7. Using a specialized trim knife or razor knife, trim the pinstripes/vinyl graphics back approximately 3 mm (1/8 in) from the edge to help avoid lifting. 8. Re-squeegee the entire surface to obtain maximum adhesion to the surface and to remove all air bubbles and wrinkles. 9. Inspect application for bubbles and/or areas not completely adhered. Remove bubbles as follows: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 04-08-51-004A > Aug > 05 > Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation > Page 10693 A. Use an air release tool, 3M(R) P/N 71604, or equivalent, or straight pin to puncture the bubble at its edge. B. Use finger or squeegee to force air out through the hole made in the film. Pinstripe Care - DO wash the pinstripe with an approved car wash detergent, Saturn P/N 21112715 (in Canada, GM P/N 993279), or equivalent, and rinse thoroughly. - DO keep high pressure car wash nozzles at least 0.46 m (1.5 ft) from the edge of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. High pressure spray may cause the edge of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics to peel. - DO test any cleaning solution on a small section of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics before using the solution. - DON T use any aromatic solvents such as acetone, M.E.K., toluene, paint thinner, lacquer thinner on the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. Any solvent may soften or smear colors. - DON T overcoat the pinstripes/vinyl graphics with clear paint. - DON T apply wax over pinstripes/vinyl graphics, especially if the wax contains any petroleum distillates such as silicone. Wax that has dried along the edges of pinstripes and graphics can be removed by softening it with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol and cotton swabs. Be sure to rinse the area after cleaning. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 08-08-51-002 > Mar > 08 > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 04-08-51-004A > Aug > 05 > Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Info - Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Tips and Techniques #04-08-51-004A - (Aug 11, 2005) Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation Tips and Techniques 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent 1991-2006 Saturn Vehicles Technician This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-51-004 (Section 08 -- Body & Accessories). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide service information regarding the proper installation of pinstripes and vinyl graphics. Pinstripe Installation Procedures Surface Preparation Important: The vehicle surface must be properly prepared prior to installation of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. All surfaces must be cleaned prior to any application of pinstripe/vinyl graphic products. 1. For best results, the pinstripe/vinyl graphic application should be done in temperatures ranging between 16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F). Do not install pinstripes/vinyl graphics outdoors if winds exceed 16 km/h (10 mph). Dirt, dust or other contaminants can interfere with the bonding of the adhesive to the vehicle during installation. 2. Wash the vehicle surface with an approved vehicle detergent, Saturn P/N 21112715 (in Canada, GM P/N 993279), or equivalent, and water, then thoroughly rinse the surface with water and dry completely. Notice: Do not use any aromatic solvents such as acetone, methylethylketone (M.E.K.), toluene, paint thinner, lacquer thinner, gasoline or ammonia-based cleaners to clean the vehicle surface. Use of these solvents may result in damage to vehicle finish. 3. Saturate a clean cloth with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol and wipe the surface of the vehicle where the graphic is to be applied to remove any contaminants such as silicone, wax, or adhesives. Important: Isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol evaporates quickly and must be wiped off the surface before it evaporates to effectively clean the surface. 4. Dry surface with a lint free paper towel. Application Procedure 1. For best results, make sure the pinstripes/vinyl graphics and vehicle temperatures are between 16°C - 32°C (60°F - 90°F). 2. Position the pinstripes/vinyl graphics as desired on the vehicle. Use one of the following methods - For large pieces or stripes, use masking tape to position and hold the pinstripes/vinyl graphics on the vehicle. Apply a masking tape "hinge" to the piece or stripe, if necessary, to further stabilize the piece or stripe. - For small pieces, freely position and apply the pinstripes/vinyl graphics after liner removal. 4. Remove the liner by flicking a corner of the film away from the liner and pulling the liner away from the pinstripes/vinyl graphics at a 180° angle. 5. Remove the application tape from the pinstripes/vinyl graphics by pulling it directly back upon itself at a 180° angle to the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. Use a slow, constant speed, taking care to avoid pulling against the graphic areas that contain points or sharp corners. 6. Using a plastic squeegee, 3M(R) P/N 71602 squeegee with 3M(R) P/N 71603 squeegee sleeve, or equivalent, press the pinstripes/vinyl graphics firmly to the vehicle. Use vertical, firm, overlapping strokes. Hold the end of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics off the vehicle with light tension to prevent it from pre-adhering and forming air bubbles. If narrow striping is applied with thumb pressure to avoid stretching the stripe, a second pass with a squeegee will avoid post-application film bubbling. Notice: A light touch must be used when trimming the striping to avoid cutting into and damaging the painted surface of the vehicle. 7. Using a specialized trim knife or razor knife, trim the pinstripes/vinyl graphics back approximately 3 mm (1/8 in) from the edge to help avoid lifting. 8. Re-squeegee the entire surface to obtain maximum adhesion to the surface and to remove all air bubbles and wrinkles. 9. Inspect application for bubbles and/or areas not completely adhered. Remove bubbles as follows: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 04-08-51-004A > Aug > 05 > Paint - Info On Pinstripe/Vinyl Graphic Installation > Page 10703 A. Use an air release tool, 3M(R) P/N 71604, or equivalent, or straight pin to puncture the bubble at its edge. B. Use finger or squeegee to force air out through the hole made in the film. Pinstripe Care - DO wash the pinstripe with an approved car wash detergent, Saturn P/N 21112715 (in Canada, GM P/N 993279), or equivalent, and rinse thoroughly. - DO keep high pressure car wash nozzles at least 0.46 m (1.5 ft) from the edge of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. High pressure spray may cause the edge of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics to peel. - DO test any cleaning solution on a small section of the pinstripes/vinyl graphics before using the solution. - DON T use any aromatic solvents such as acetone, M.E.K., toluene, paint thinner, lacquer thinner on the pinstripes/vinyl graphics. Any solvent may soften or smear colors. - DON T overcoat the pinstripes/vinyl graphics with clear paint. - DON T apply wax over pinstripes/vinyl graphics, especially if the wax contains any petroleum distillates such as silicone. Wax that has dried along the edges of pinstripes and graphics can be removed by softening it with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol and cotton swabs. Be sure to rinse the area after cleaning. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10704 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622 Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10705 Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622 Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10706 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10707 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Paint: Technician Safety Information Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems CAUTION: - Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. - Approved safety glasses and gloves should be worn when performing this procedure to reduce the chance of personal injury. All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N GM4901M-D identifies the paint systems you may use. Always refer to the latest revision of the 4901M-D book. All approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations are listed in the system approach recommended by the individual manufacturer. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for the detailed procedures for materials used in the paint system in the painting repairs of rigid exterior surfaces. All components of an approved paint system have been engineered in order to ensure proper adhesion between layers.If necessary, spot repairs or color blending in an open panel can be done. However, do not blend clear coat in an open panel. Always apply clearcoat to the next break point (body side molding, feature line, or the next panel) Do not mix paint systems or substitute a product of one manufacturer for another manufacturer's product. If incompatible products are used together the following problems may occur: - Lifting of primer coats caused by overly aggressive solvents in subsequent layers - Loss of adhesion between layers due to incompatibility of resin systems - Solvent popping or pin holing due to inappropriate solvent selection - Poor through-curing due to incompatible hardener resins or insufficient reactivity - Gloss reduction due to incompatible resins and/or solvents - Poor color accuracy due to pigment interactions with incompatible resins and/or solvents - Film defects (craters, blisters, orange peel loss of gloss) due to the use of inferior quality raw materials in incompatible products. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 10710 Paint: Vehicle Damage Warnings Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems CAUTION: - Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. - Approved safety glasses and gloves should be worn when performing this procedure to reduce the chance of personal injury. All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N GM4901M-D identifies the paint systems you may use. Always refer to the latest revision of the 4901M-D book. All approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations are listed in the system approach recommended by the individual manufacturer. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for the detailed procedures for materials used in the paint system in the painting repairs of rigid exterior surfaces. All components of an approved paint system have been engineered in order to ensure proper adhesion between layers.If necessary, spot repairs or color blending in an open panel can be done. However, do not blend clear coat in an open panel. Always apply clearcoat to the next break point (body side molding, feature line, or the next panel) Do not mix paint systems or substitute a product of one manufacturer for another manufacturer's product. If incompatible products are used together the following problems may occur: - Lifting of primer coats caused by overly aggressive solvents in subsequent layers - Loss of adhesion between layers due to incompatibility of resin systems - Solvent popping or pin holing due to inappropriate solvent selection - Poor through-curing due to incompatible hardener resins or insufficient reactivity - Gloss reduction due to incompatible resins and/or solvents - Poor color accuracy due to pigment interactions with incompatible resins and/or solvents - Film defects (craters, blisters, orange peel loss of gloss) due to the use of inferior quality raw materials in incompatible products. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) Paint: Application and ID Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) COLOR COMPATIBILITY GUIDE (Paint Codes) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10713 WA130B/46 - WA214M/26 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10714 WA214M/26 - WA215M/38 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10715 WA215M/38 - WA228M/64 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10716 WA228M/64 - WA379E/86 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10717 WA379E/86 - WA397E/25 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10718 WA397E/25 - WA519F/12 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10719 WA526F/72 - WA5456/43 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10720 WA5456/43 - WA703J/22 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10721 WA703J/22 - WA722J/25 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10722 WA722J/25 - WA722J/25 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10723 WA800J/98 - WA805K/62 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10724 WA805K/62 - WA811K/87 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10725 WA811K/87 - WA812K/88 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10726 WA812K/88 - WA815K/91 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10727 WA816K/92 - WA817K/63 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10728 WA817K/63 - WA817K/63 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10729 WA817K/63 - WA8265/61 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10730 WA8265/61 - WA8554/40 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10731 WA8554/40 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10732 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10733 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10734 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10735 WA8555/41 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10736 WA8624/50 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10737 WA8624/50 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10738 WA8624/50 - WA9088/94 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10739 WA9088/94 - WA913L/56 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10740 WA913L/56 - WA9260/74 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10741 WA9260/74 - WA9260/74 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10742 WA9260/74 - WA926L/59 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10743 WA926L/59 - WA928L/46 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10744 WA928L/46 - WA929L/15 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10745 WA929L/15 - WA929L/15 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10746 WA929L/15 - WA930L/68 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10747 WA930L/68 - WA937L/34 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10748 WA9414/34 - WA9539/47 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10749 WA9539/47 - WA9792/39 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10750 WA9792/39 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10751 WA994L/67 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10752 WA994L/67 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10753 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10754 Paint: Application and ID Paint Identification Precautions PAINT IDENTIFICATION Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Important Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM PIN 4901 MD This book identities the paint systems you may use. The basecoat/clearcoat paint is factory applied in the following 4 layers in order to give the finish a high gloss look: 1. A cathodic immersion primer 2. A primer/surfacer 3. A basecoat 4. A clear top coat (clearcoat) Refer to the Service Parts ID Label to identify the type of top coat on the vehicle. This label contains all paint related information for the vehicle. This includes paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10755 Paint: Application and ID Parts ID Label Location The vehicle service parts identification label is located inside the instrument panel I/P compartment. The label is used to help identify the vehicle original parts and options. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10756 Paint: Application and ID Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) COLOR COMPATIBILITY GUIDE (Paint Codes) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10757 WA130B/46 - WA214M/26 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10758 WA214M/26 - WA215M/38 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10759 WA215M/38 - WA228M/64 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10760 WA228M/64 - WA379E/86 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10761 WA379E/86 - WA397E/25 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10762 WA397E/25 - WA519F/12 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10763 WA526F/72 - WA5456/43 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10764 WA5456/43 - WA703J/22 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10765 WA703J/22 - WA722J/25 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10766 WA722J/25 - WA722J/25 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10767 WA800J/98 - WA805K/62 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10768 WA805K/62 - WA811K/87 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10769 WA811K/87 - WA812K/88 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10770 WA812K/88 - WA815K/91 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10771 WA816K/92 - WA817K/63 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10772 WA817K/63 - WA817K/63 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10773 WA817K/63 - WA8265/61 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10774 WA8265/61 - WA8554/40 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10775 WA8554/40 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10776 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10777 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10778 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10779 WA8555/41 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10780 WA8624/50 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10781 WA8624/50 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10782 WA8624/50 - WA9088/94 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10783 WA9088/94 - WA913L/56 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10784 WA913L/56 - WA9260/74 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10785 WA9260/74 - WA9260/74 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10786 WA9260/74 - WA926L/59 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10787 WA926L/59 - WA928L/46 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10788 WA928L/46 - WA929L/15 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10789 WA929L/15 - WA929L/15 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10790 WA929L/15 - WA930L/68 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10791 WA930L/68 - WA937L/34 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10792 WA9414/34 - WA9539/47 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10793 WA9539/47 - WA9792/39 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10794 WA9792/39 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10795 WA994L/67 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10796 WA994L/67 - WA994L/67 Paint Identification Precautions Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10797 PAINT IDENTIFICATION Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Important Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM PIN 4901 MD This book identities the paint systems you may use. The basecoat/clearcoat paint is factory applied in the following 4 layers in order to give the finish a high gloss look: 1. A cathodic immersion primer 2. A primer/surfacer 3. A basecoat 4. A clear top coat (clearcoat) Refer to the Service Parts ID Label to identify the type of top coat on the vehicle. This label contains all paint related information for the vehicle. This includes paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors. Parts ID Label Location The vehicle service parts identification label is located inside the instrument panel I/P compartment. The label is used to help identify the vehicle original parts and options. Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. Refer to the latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N GM4901M-D to identify the paint systems you may use that have been engineered to meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book supplies all approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations recommended by the individual manufacturer, and detailed procedures for materials used in their paint system. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 10798 Paint Identification Paint Identification Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Important: Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N 4901M-D. This book identifies the paint systems you may use. Use the service parts identification label to identify the type of paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors on the vehicle. Refer to Label - Vehicle Certification, Tire Place Card, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID in General Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Driver Heated Seat Module - Driver C1 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 10805 Heated Seat Module - Driver C2 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 10806 Heated Seat Module - Driver C3 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 10807 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C1 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 10808 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C2 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 10809 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C3 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Control Module: Procedures HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10812 3. Remove the module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10813 Seat Heater Control Module: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Control Module Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10814 3. Remove the module. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Bulletin No.: 05-08-67-010A Date: October 18, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof will Not Close from Vent, Partly Opened, or Fully Opened Position (Replace Sunroof Control Module) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2005 Saturn VUE with Sunroof (RPO CF5) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-67-010 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the sunroof will no longer respond to the control switch while in a vented, partially opened, or fully opened position. Cause A software issue with the sunroof control module may cause the sunroof control module to incorrectly indicate a "closed" position, which may result in no power to the sunroof motor. Correction Verify the customer concern. If a condition is present, replace the sunroof control module with a new sunroof control module, P/N 15847643. Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure 1. Verify the customer concern by opening and closing the sunroof. ^ If the sunroof will not open , check the power windows. - If the power windows are also inoperative, check the fuse. If the fuse has opened, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-004 to install 30A circuit breaker. - If the power windows are fully functional, refer to "Power Sunroof Inoperative" diagnostics (SI Document ID# 1392967) in the Body section of the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. ^ If the sunroof will open (or is already open), but will not close proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the sunroof control module. 3. Open and close the sunroof in order to confirm that the customer concern has been resolved. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions > Page 10823 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Bulletin No.: 05-08-67-010A Date: October 18, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof will Not Close from Vent, Partly Opened, or Fully Opened Position (Replace Sunroof Control Module) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2005 Saturn VUE with Sunroof (RPO CF5) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-67-010 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the sunroof will no longer respond to the control switch while in a vented, partially opened, or fully opened position. Cause A software issue with the sunroof control module may cause the sunroof control module to incorrectly indicate a "closed" position, which may result in no power to the sunroof motor. Correction Verify the customer concern. If a condition is present, replace the sunroof control module with a new sunroof control module, P/N 15847643. Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure 1. Verify the customer concern by opening and closing the sunroof. ^ If the sunroof will not open , check the power windows. - If the power windows are also inoperative, check the fuse. If the fuse has opened, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-004 to install 30A circuit breaker. - If the power windows are fully functional, refer to "Power Sunroof Inoperative" diagnostics (SI Document ID# 1392967) in the Body section of the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. ^ If the sunroof will open (or is already open), but will not close proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the sunroof control module. 3. Open and close the sunroof in order to confirm that the customer concern has been resolved. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions > Page 10829 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10830 Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10831 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10832 Sunroof Control Module C2 (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10833 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Depress the tab on the side of the control module. 3. With the tab depressed, slide the sunroof control module toward the sunroof motor. This will release the control module from the sunroof module. 4. Remove the control module from the sunroof module and disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10834 1. Connect the electrical connector to the sunroof control module. 2. Insert the control module tabs into the sunroof module slots. 3. Slide the sunroof express module away from the sunroof motor until it is fully engaged. 4. Verify the proper operation of the sunroof before securing the headliner. 5. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Luggage Rack: Procedures LUGGAGE CARRIER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the luggage carrier side rail front covers using a trim tool or equivalent. 2. Remove the luggage carrier side rail rear covers using a trim tool or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10840 3. Remove the luggage carrier center rails by flipping up the side retainers and sliding the center rails rearward off the side rails. 4. Remove the nuts that attach the front of the side rails to the roof. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10841 5. Remove the nuts that attach the rear of the side rails to the roof. 6. Remove the side rails from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10842 7. Remove the rubber gasket from the side rails. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the rubber gasket to the side rails. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10843 2. Install the side rails to the vehicle. 3. Install the nuts that attach the rear of the side rails to the roof. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10844 4. Install the nuts that attach the front of the side rails to the roof. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Install the luggage carrier center rails by sliding into the side rails from the rear. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10845 6. Install the rear side rail covers. 7. Install the front side rail covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10846 Luggage Rack: Removal and Replacement Luggage Carrier Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the luggage carrier side rail front covers using a trim tool or equivalent. 2. Remove the luggage carrier side rail rear covers using a trim tool or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10847 3. Remove the luggage carrier center rails by flipping up the side retainers and sliding the center rails rearward off the side rails. 4. Remove the nuts that attach the front of the side rails to the roof. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10848 5. Remove the nuts that attach the rear of the side rails to the roof. 6. Remove the side rails from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10849 7. Remove the rubber gasket from the side rails. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rubber gasket to the side rails. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10850 2. Install the side rails to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the nuts that attach the rear of the side rails to the roof. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10851 4. Install the nuts that attach the front of the side rails to the roof. Tighten the nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Install the luggage carrier center rails by sliding into the side rails from the rear. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10852 6. Install the rear side rail covers. 7. Install the front side rail covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations Technical Service Bulletin # 06-08-58-001 Date: 060131 Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations Bulletin No.: 06-08-58-001 Date: January 31, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: General Windnoise Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Condition # 1 For vehicles built prior to October 7, 2005: Windnoise from around the outside rear view mirror. Cause The mirror gasket may not be making enough compression to the sheet metal and allowing noise to come in through the trim panel extension cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10861 Parts Information Disclaimer Correction Gently pull at the top end of the trim panel extension cover to disengage the attaching clip. Install the insulator behind the extension cover. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 2 Wind noise coming from the window seal (front and rear doors). Cause The door glass seal contact with the glass may be light. Correction Correction for vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66032861 (for Chevrolet) and 66038652 (for Pontiac): Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10862 1. Remove the door glass seal from all the doors. Refer to the illustration above. 2. Check the gap between the glass and the metal flange. The gap should be 10 to 12 mm (3/8 in) for good contact pressure of the seal to the glass. Refer to the illustration above. If the gap is greater than 12 mm (1/2 in), refer to the next step. 3. To protect the sheet metal finish, use duck bill pliers and bend the flange slightly to achieve 10 to 12 mm (1/2 in). Correction for vehicles built AFTER VIN breakpoints 66032861 (for Chevrolet) and 66038652 (for Pontiac) without secondary seal two lip design: - Replace all the window seals. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 3 Wind noise coming from the roof rack area. Cause Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10863 ^ The position of the roof rack is not the optimum position for wind rush. ^ The lock tab is not seated properly. Correction For Pontiac Torrent 1. The position of the front crossmember needs to be aligned to the plastic cover as shown in the illustration above. 2. The position of the rear (second) crossmember needs to be at the far rear position of the roof racks bar. Refer to the illustration above. 3. Make sure that all tabs are in "lock" position and the arrow (shown in red) in both bars is pointing forward. Refer to the illustration above. Correction For Chevrolet Equinox Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10864 1. The position of the front crossmember needs to be aligned to the second slot of the roof rack (front to back). The position of the rear (second) crossmember needs to be at the last position (slot) of the roof racks bar as shown in the illustration above. 2. Make sure that all tabs are in "lock" position and the arrow in both bars is pointing forward. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 4 For vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66053314 (for Chevrolet) and 66051985 (for Pontiac): Wind noise coming from the B pillar area in the front doors. Cause The B pillar applique' has a gap to the door. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Replace the B pillar applique' on the front & rear doors. Condition # 5 For vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66079786 (for Chevrolet) and 66077742 (for Pontiac): Wind noise coming from the C pillar area in the rear doors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10865 Cause The C pillar trim has a gap to the door. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Replace the C pillar trim. Condition # 6 The applique' inner is separating from the rest of the applique'. Cause The applique' inner is separating from the rest of the applique'. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Remove the "A" pillar molding 1. Remove all the screws. 2. Pull outboard on the molding at the top rear to disengage. 3. Push the plastic extension back in place and hot melt the extension from the back side to secure. 4. Reinstall the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations Technical Service Bulletin # 06-08-58-001 Date: 060131 Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations Bulletin No.: 06-08-58-001 Date: January 31, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: General Windnoise Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Condition # 1 For vehicles built prior to October 7, 2005: Windnoise from around the outside rear view mirror. Cause The mirror gasket may not be making enough compression to the sheet metal and allowing noise to come in through the trim panel extension cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10871 Parts Information Disclaimer Correction Gently pull at the top end of the trim panel extension cover to disengage the attaching clip. Install the insulator behind the extension cover. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 2 Wind noise coming from the window seal (front and rear doors). Cause The door glass seal contact with the glass may be light. Correction Correction for vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66032861 (for Chevrolet) and 66038652 (for Pontiac): Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10872 1. Remove the door glass seal from all the doors. Refer to the illustration above. 2. Check the gap between the glass and the metal flange. The gap should be 10 to 12 mm (3/8 in) for good contact pressure of the seal to the glass. Refer to the illustration above. If the gap is greater than 12 mm (1/2 in), refer to the next step. 3. To protect the sheet metal finish, use duck bill pliers and bend the flange slightly to achieve 10 to 12 mm (1/2 in). Correction for vehicles built AFTER VIN breakpoints 66032861 (for Chevrolet) and 66038652 (for Pontiac) without secondary seal two lip design: - Replace all the window seals. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 3 Wind noise coming from the roof rack area. Cause Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10873 ^ The position of the roof rack is not the optimum position for wind rush. ^ The lock tab is not seated properly. Correction For Pontiac Torrent 1. The position of the front crossmember needs to be aligned to the plastic cover as shown in the illustration above. 2. The position of the rear (second) crossmember needs to be at the far rear position of the roof racks bar. Refer to the illustration above. 3. Make sure that all tabs are in "lock" position and the arrow (shown in red) in both bars is pointing forward. Refer to the illustration above. Correction For Chevrolet Equinox Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10874 1. The position of the front crossmember needs to be aligned to the second slot of the roof rack (front to back). The position of the rear (second) crossmember needs to be at the last position (slot) of the roof racks bar as shown in the illustration above. 2. Make sure that all tabs are in "lock" position and the arrow in both bars is pointing forward. Refer to the illustration above. Condition # 4 For vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66053314 (for Chevrolet) and 66051985 (for Pontiac): Wind noise coming from the B pillar area in the front doors. Cause The B pillar applique' has a gap to the door. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Replace the B pillar applique' on the front & rear doors. Condition # 5 For vehicles built prior to VIN breakpoints 66079786 (for Chevrolet) and 66077742 (for Pontiac): Wind noise coming from the C pillar area in the rear doors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Roof Rack Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Roof Rack Frame: > 06-08-58-001 > Jan > 06 > Body - Wind Noise From Various Locations > Page 10875 Cause The C pillar trim has a gap to the door. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Replace the C pillar trim. Condition # 6 The applique' inner is separating from the rest of the applique'. Cause The applique' inner is separating from the rest of the applique'. Refer to the illustration above. Correction Remove the "A" pillar molding 1. Remove all the screws. 2. Pull outboard on the molding at the top rear to disengage. 3. Push the plastic extension back in place and hot melt the extension from the back side to secure. 4. Reinstall the molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair Sun Shade: Service and Repair SUNROOF SUNSHADE PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof window. 2. Remove the screws from the sunroof drip channel. 3. Remove the sunroof drip channel. 4. Slide the sunshade forward to the closed position. 5. Push the spring retainer clips on the right side of the sunshade inward to disengage them from the track using an upward lifting motion. 6. Remove the sunshade from the sunroof module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Engage one side of the sunshade by positioning the spring clips into the track. 2. Push the spring retainer clips inward on the opposite side of the sunshade to engage them into the track. 3. Slide the sunshade back and forth to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10880 4. Slide the sunshade to the half closed position. 5. Install the rear drain drip channel. 6. Install the sunroof window. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10887 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Diagrams Sunroof Motor C1 (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10888 Sunroof Motor C2 (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10889 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair SUNROOF MOTOR/ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the sunroof window. 3. Disconnect the sunroof motor harness. 4. Remove the screws securing the sunroof actuator to the sunroof module. 5. Remove the sunroof motor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Manually adjust the track to achieve a distance of (a) 44.5 mm (1.75 in)between the left slide and track bracket. 2. Manually adjust the track to achieve a distance of (a) 44.5 mm (1.75 in)between the right slide and track bracket. 3. Install the sunroof motor to the sunroof module. 4. Install the sunroof motor screws. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10890 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connectors to the sunroof motor. 6. Secure the electrical harness to the sunroof module. 7. Verify the sunroof operation. 8. Install the sunroof window. 9. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof Switch (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Procedures SUNROOF SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10896 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10897 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Removal and Replacement Sunroof Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10898 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 09-08-67-001 > Jan > 09 > Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Customer Interest Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-67-001 Date: January 06, 2009 Subject: Sunroof Frame Tox Rivet Rattle (Install Flocking Tape) Models: 2006-2009 Buick Lucerne 2003-2007 Cadillac CTS 2005-2009 Cadillac STS 2006-2009 Cadillac DTS 2005-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Equinox 2006-2009 Chevrolet HHR 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2009 Pontiac G5 2004-2007 Saturn VUE Condition Some customers may comment of a rattling noise coming from the sunroof or roof area. Cause This condition may be caused by the inboard tox rivets, which retain the sunroof center support beam to the side rails, pulling through the side rail track on one or both sides. This may cause the support beam to rattle against the side rail track. Correction Important: Once the sunroof module is bolted into the roof ring of the vehicle, the support provided by the center beam is no longer necessary. DO NOT replace the sunroof frame when the above condition is noted. Install flocking tape between the sunroof center support beam and the side rail track. 1. Following SI, lower the front portion of the headliner enough to gain access to the sunroof module center support beam through the opening in the headliner. 2. Check both sides of the center support beam for loose rivets (2) by inserting a trim stick (1) between the center support and the side rail track. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 09-08-67-001 > Jan > 09 > Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area > Page 10907 3. Look for separation of the center support beam and the side rail track. 4. Cut a piece of Kent-Automotive(TM) 30 mm wide BRS Flocking tape, or equivalent, approximately 152 mm (6 in) in length. 5. Install the flocking tape (1) underneath the center support beam using the trim stick (2) to separate the center support beam and the side rail track. 6. Ensure that the flocking tape is positioned underneath the complete width of the center support beam. 7. Reinstall the headliner. Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 09-08-67-001 > Jan > 09 > Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area Sunroof / Moonroof Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-67-001 Date: January 06, 2009 Subject: Sunroof Frame Tox Rivet Rattle (Install Flocking Tape) Models: 2006-2009 Buick Lucerne 2003-2007 Cadillac CTS 2005-2009 Cadillac STS 2006-2009 Cadillac DTS 2005-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Equinox 2006-2009 Chevrolet HHR 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2009 Pontiac G5 2004-2007 Saturn VUE Condition Some customers may comment of a rattling noise coming from the sunroof or roof area. Cause This condition may be caused by the inboard tox rivets, which retain the sunroof center support beam to the side rails, pulling through the side rail track on one or both sides. This may cause the support beam to rattle against the side rail track. Correction Important: Once the sunroof module is bolted into the roof ring of the vehicle, the support provided by the center beam is no longer necessary. DO NOT replace the sunroof frame when the above condition is noted. Install flocking tape between the sunroof center support beam and the side rail track. 1. Following SI, lower the front portion of the headliner enough to gain access to the sunroof module center support beam through the opening in the headliner. 2. Check both sides of the center support beam for loose rivets (2) by inserting a trim stick (1) between the center support and the side rail track. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 09-08-67-001 > Jan > 09 > Body - Rattling Noise From The Sunroof Area > Page 10913 3. Look for separation of the center support beam and the side rail track. 4. Cut a piece of Kent-Automotive(TM) 30 mm wide BRS Flocking tape, or equivalent, approximately 152 mm (6 in) in length. 5. Install the flocking tape (1) underneath the center support beam using the trim stick (2) to separate the center support beam and the side rail track. 6. Ensure that the flocking tape is positioned underneath the complete width of the center support beam. 7. Reinstall the headliner. Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: > 06-08-67-010 > Jul > 06 > Body - Buffeting Noise With Sunroof Opened Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Customer Interest Body - Buffeting Noise With Sunroof Opened Bulletin No.: 06-08-67-010 Date: July 28, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof Buffeting Noise (Install New Deflector) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment on a buffeting type noise when the sunroof is fully opened at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) and above. Correction A new air deflector has been designed to change the air flow across the roof and will help to eliminate this noise. Follow the procedure below to install the new deflector. 1. Open the sunroof. 2. Remove the original air deflector following the procedures in SI. Important: The gauge block has two arrows that point to the front of vehicle when positioned with the proper RH or LH designation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: > 06-08-67-010 > Jul > 06 > Body - Buffeting Noise With Sunroof Opened > Page 10922 3. The gauge block should be placed initially forward of the wind deflector pivot bracket. Slide the gauge block rearward until the locating arm contacts the pivot bracket. With the gauge block touching the pivot bracket, apply pressure to the gauge block in an outboard direction, with the locating arm pointing to the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the illustration above. 4. Using a 2 mm (5/64 in) drill, it is CRITICAL to drill a hole straight up and down through the appropriate hole in the gauge block, penetrating the track by a maximum of 5.0 mm (1/4 in). 5. Clean the channel of drill shavings. 6. Install the new deflector. 7. Upon installation of the air deflector, the sunroof should be cycled closed. There will be a slightly noticeable difference in the speed of the glass movement. The glass should then be cycled fully open then fully closed 10 times. This will break in the spring and mechanism, returning the sunroof to normal smooth operation. In some cases, the sunroof may stop at the air deflector attaching point. Cycling the sunroof will overcome this and return to normal operation. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: > 06-08-67-010 > Jul > 06 > Body - Buffeting Noise With Sunroof Opened > Page 10923 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: > 06-08-67-010 > Jul > 06 > Body - Buffeting Noise With Sunroof Opened Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Buffeting Noise With Sunroof Opened Bulletin No.: 06-08-67-010 Date: July 28, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof Buffeting Noise (Install New Deflector) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Condition Some customers may comment on a buffeting type noise when the sunroof is fully opened at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) and above. Correction A new air deflector has been designed to change the air flow across the roof and will help to eliminate this noise. Follow the procedure below to install the new deflector. 1. Open the sunroof. 2. Remove the original air deflector following the procedures in SI. Important: The gauge block has two arrows that point to the front of vehicle when positioned with the proper RH or LH designation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: > 06-08-67-010 > Jul > 06 > Body - Buffeting Noise With Sunroof Opened > Page 10929 3. The gauge block should be placed initially forward of the wind deflector pivot bracket. Slide the gauge block rearward until the locating arm contacts the pivot bracket. With the gauge block touching the pivot bracket, apply pressure to the gauge block in an outboard direction, with the locating arm pointing to the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the illustration above. 4. Using a 2 mm (5/64 in) drill, it is CRITICAL to drill a hole straight up and down through the appropriate hole in the gauge block, penetrating the track by a maximum of 5.0 mm (1/4 in). 5. Clean the channel of drill shavings. 6. Install the new deflector. 7. Upon installation of the air deflector, the sunroof should be cycled closed. There will be a slightly noticeable difference in the speed of the glass movement. The glass should then be cycled fully open then fully closed 10 times. This will break in the spring and mechanism, returning the sunroof to normal smooth operation. In some cases, the sunroof may stop at the air deflector attaching point. Cycling the sunroof will overcome this and return to normal operation. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: > 06-08-67-010 > Jul > 06 > Body - Buffeting Noise With Sunroof Opened > Page 10930 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10931 Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair SUNROOF AIR DEFLECTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Cycle the sunroof window to the rear. 2. Push down on the right front side of the air deflector. 3. Do the following while holding the right side down: - Push the left front side of the air deflector towards the right side. - Pull up on the left side until the lower tab clears the roof opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10932 4. Swing the air deflector in an upward arc, rearward, to disengage air deflector from the hooks on both sides of the sunroof module. 5. Remove the air deflector from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Engage the rear of the air deflector into the side hooks on the sunroof module. 2. Arc the air deflector in a forward motion. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10933 3. Push the right side of the air deflector down into the roof opening. 4. Push the left front side of the air deflector inward and down so the tab clears the roof opening. 5. Close the sunroof window. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Procedures Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement (Rear) Sunroof Drain Inspection and Cleaning Drain Hose Routing A drain trough encircles the sunroof window panel and water is drained off by the drain hoses located at each corner of the housing. A drain channel spans across the sunroof module at the rear of the window panel and directs water into the trough. 1. Ensure the front drain hoses are routed down the windshield pillars and out the center of the pillar between the door hinges. Ensure the hoses are not kinked. Replace any torn or cracked hose. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front) . 2. Ensure the rear drain hoses are routed through the rear pillars and out of the rocker panel. Ensure the rear hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and taped in place. Replace any torn or cracked hoses. Plugged Drain Hose If a waterleak has occurred inspect for a plugged drain hose at each corner of trough. 1. Open the sunroof window. 2. To test for blockage, pour a small container of water into the module housing trough. Inspect each corner to confirm the drain hose is draining water. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 3. Use compressed air, 35 psi or less to blow out any drain hose that is plugged. 4. Test the system again. 5. If the hose remains plugged, inspect to see it is properly routed and does not have a kink. 6. Remove any hoses that remain plugged. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front) or to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear. 7. Remove the blockage. 1. Push mechanics wire through the hose to remove the obstruction. 2. Use compressed air in order to blow out any remaining debris. 8. Install the hose. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front) or to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear. Disconnected Drain Hose Inspect the drainage system for disconnected drain hoses. Complete the following steps in order to obtain partial access to the drain hoses and to inspect for disconnected hoses. 1. Open the sunroof window panel. 2. Lower the headliner as needed. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 3. Connect any disconnected hoses. 4. Ensure that the drain hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and secured into place. Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front SUNROOF DRAIN HOSE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lower the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10938 2. Remove the front drain hose from the sunroof module. 3. Remove tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the front drain hose from the retaining clips. 5. Pull the front drain hose out of the front hinge pillar. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10939 1. Push the drain hose into the hole in the front hinge pillar. 2. Connect the front drain hose to the retaining clips. 3. Connect the drain hose to the sunroof module. 4. Install the headliner. Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear SUNROOF DRAIN HOSE REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10940 2. Remove the rear drain hoses from the sunroof module. 3. Remove the tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the upper portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 5. Remove the rear side trim panels. 6. Remove the lower portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 7. Pull the rear drain hoses up through the side rail. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Route the rear drain hose down through the access hole in the side rail. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10941 2. Push the end of the rear drain hoses down into the rear compartment opening. 3. Clip the lower portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 4. Install the rear side trim panels. 5. Clip the upper portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 6. Install the rear drain hoses to the sunroof module. 7. Install the headliner. Sunroof Drain Inspection and Cleaning Sunroof Drain Inspection and Cleaning Drain Hose Routing A drain trough encircles the sunroof window panel and water is drained off by the drain hoses located at each corner of the housing. A drain channel spans across the sunroof module at the rear of the window panel and directs water into the trough. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10942 1. Ensure the front drain hoses are routed down the windshield pillars and out the center of the pillar between the door hinges. Ensure the hoses are not kinked. Replace any torn or cracked hose. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front) . 2. Ensure the rear drain hoses are routed through the rear pillars and out of the rocker panel. Ensure the rear hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and taped in place. Replace any torn or cracked hoses. Plugged Drain Hose If a waterleak has occurred inspect for a plugged drain hose at each corner of trough. 1. Open the sunroof window. 2. To test for blockage, pour a small container of water into the module housing trough. Inspect each corner to confirm the drain hose is draining water. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 3. Use compressed air, 35 psi or less to blow out any drain hose that is plugged. 4. Test the system again. 5. If the hose remains plugged, inspect to see it is properly routed and does not have a kink. 6. Remove any hoses that remain plugged. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front) or to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear. 7. Remove the blockage. 1. Push mechanics wire through the hose to remove the obstruction. 2. Use compressed air in order to blow out any remaining debris. 8. Install the hose. Refer to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front) or to Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear. Disconnected Drain Hose Inspect the drainage system for disconnected drain hoses. Complete the following steps in order to obtain partial access to the drain hoses and to inspect for disconnected hoses. 1. Open the sunroof window panel. 2. Lower the headliner as needed. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 3. Connect any disconnected hoses. 4. Ensure that the drain hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and secured into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10943 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Removal and Replacement Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Lower the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the front drain hose from the sunroof module. 3. Remove tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the front drain hose from the retaining clips. 5. Pull the front drain hose out of the front hinge pillar. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10944 Installation Procedure 1. Push the drain hose into the hole in the front hinge pillar. 2. Connect the front drain hose to the retaining clips. 3. Connect the drain hose to the sunroof module. 4. Install the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10945 2. Remove the rear drain hoses from the sunroof module. 3. Remove the tape from the drain hose. 4. Remove the upper portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 5. Remove the rear side trim panels. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper) in Interior Trim. 6. Remove the lower portion of the rear drain hoses from the retaining clips. 7. Pull the rear drain hoses up through the side rail. Installation Procedure 1. Route the rear drain hose down through the access hole in the side rail. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10946 2. Push the end of the rear drain hoses down into the rear compartment opening. 3. Clip the lower portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 4. Install the rear side trim panels. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Garnish Molding Replacement - Center Pillar Upper) in Interior Trim. 5. Clip the upper portion of the rear drain hoses into position. 6. Install the rear drain hoses to the sunroof module. 7. Install the headliner. Refer to Headliner Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Bulletin No.: 05-08-67-010A Date: October 18, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof will Not Close from Vent, Partly Opened, or Fully Opened Position (Replace Sunroof Control Module) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2005 Saturn VUE with Sunroof (RPO CF5) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-67-010 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the sunroof will no longer respond to the control switch while in a vented, partially opened, or fully opened position. Cause A software issue with the sunroof control module may cause the sunroof control module to incorrectly indicate a "closed" position, which may result in no power to the sunroof motor. Correction Verify the customer concern. If a condition is present, replace the sunroof control module with a new sunroof control module, P/N 15847643. Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure 1. Verify the customer concern by opening and closing the sunroof. ^ If the sunroof will not open , check the power windows. - If the power windows are also inoperative, check the fuse. If the fuse has opened, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-004 to install 30A circuit breaker. - If the power windows are fully functional, refer to "Power Sunroof Inoperative" diagnostics (SI Document ID# 1392967) in the Body section of the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. ^ If the sunroof will open (or is already open), but will not close proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the sunroof control module. 3. Open and close the sunroof in order to confirm that the customer concern has been resolved. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions > Page 10955 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions Bulletin No.: 05-08-67-010A Date: October 18, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Sunroof will Not Close from Vent, Partly Opened, or Fully Opened Position (Replace Sunroof Control Module) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox 2005 Saturn VUE with Sunroof (RPO CF5) Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-67-010 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the sunroof will no longer respond to the control switch while in a vented, partially opened, or fully opened position. Cause A software issue with the sunroof control module may cause the sunroof control module to incorrectly indicate a "closed" position, which may result in no power to the sunroof motor. Correction Verify the customer concern. If a condition is present, replace the sunroof control module with a new sunroof control module, P/N 15847643. Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin. Service Procedure 1. Verify the customer concern by opening and closing the sunroof. ^ If the sunroof will not open , check the power windows. - If the power windows are also inoperative, check the fuse. If the fuse has opened, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-004 to install 30A circuit breaker. - If the power windows are fully functional, refer to "Power Sunroof Inoperative" diagnostics (SI Document ID# 1392967) in the Body section of the 2005 Chevrolet Equinox or Saturn VUE Service Manual. ^ If the sunroof will open (or is already open), but will not close proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace the sunroof control module. 3. Open and close the sunroof in order to confirm that the customer concern has been resolved. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Module: > 05-08-67-010A > Oct > 05 > Body - Sunroof Won't Close From Vent/Open Positions > Page 10961 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10962 Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10963 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10964 Sunroof Control Module C2 (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10965 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Depress the tab on the side of the control module. 3. With the tab depressed, slide the sunroof control module toward the sunroof motor. This will release the control module from the sunroof module. 4. Remove the control module from the sunroof module and disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10966 1. Connect the electrical connector to the sunroof control module. 2. Insert the control module tabs into the sunroof module slots. 3. Slide the sunroof express module away from the sunroof motor until it is fully engaged. 4. Verify the proper operation of the sunroof before securing the headliner. 5. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair SUNROOF WINDOW REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Cycle the sunroof window to the vent position. NOTE: In order to prevent damage to the paint, mask the roof panel in front of the sunroof opening using masking tape and paper. 2. Slide the sunshade rearward. 3. Remove the sunroof window screws on both sides. 4. Lift the sunroof window from the sunroof opening. IMPORTANT: If operating the sunroof without the window, refer to Sunroof Air Deflector Replacement. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10970 1. Position the sunroof window into the opening. 2. Install the sunroof window screws. Do not tighten the screws. 3. Carefully close the sunroof window from the vent position to the full closed position. 4. Adjust the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Height and Opening Fit Adjustment. 5. Tighten the screws to 5 N.m (44 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Head Rest: Procedures Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat HEAD RESTRAINT REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the head restraint to the full-up position. 2. Insert an awl into the guide hole. 3. Pull up to remove the head restraint. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the restraint in the head restraint guides. 2. Push downward to install the head restraint. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10976 3. Pull up on the restraint to ensure that the restraints are locked in place. Head Restraint Guide Replacement - Front Seat HEAD RESTRAINT GUIDE REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headrest. 2. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. 3. Carefully pull up the trim cover, disengaging the hoop and loop retainers, until the headrest guides are exposed. 4. Squeeze the locking tabs on the headrest guide and pull the guides up and out of the seat back pad. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat back trim cover over the top of the seat back. 2. Install the headrest guides by pressing the guides into position until the locking tabs engage. 3. Install the headrest. Head Restraint Replacement - Rear Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10977 HEAD RESTRAINT REPLACEMENT - REAR SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the head restraint to the full-up position. 2. Insert an awl into the guide hole. 3. Pull up to remove the head restraint. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the restraint in the head restraint guides. 2. Push downward to install the head restraint. 3. Pull up on the restraint to ensure that the restraints are locked in place. Head Restraint Retainer Replacement - Rear Seat HEAD RESTRAINT RETAINER REPLACEMENT - REAR SEAT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10978 REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headrest. 2. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. 3. Carefully pull up the trim cover, disengaging the hoop and loop retainers, until the headrest guides are exposed. 4. Squeeze the locking tabs on the headrest guide and pull the guides up and out of the seat back pad. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat back trim cover over the top of the seat back. 2. Install the headrest guides by pressing the guides into position until the locking tabs engage. 3. Install the headrest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10979 Head Rest: Removal and Replacement Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat Removal Procedure 1. Raise the head restraint to the full-up position. 2. Insert an awl into the guide hole. 3. Pull up to remove the head restraint. Installation Procedure 1. Position the restraint in the head restraint guides. 2. Push downward to install the head restraint. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10980 3. Pull up on the restraint to ensure that the restraints are locked in place. Head Restraint Guide Replacement - Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement - Front Seat Removal Procedure 1. Remove the headrest. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . 2. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Fold Flat))Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat)) . 3. Carefully pull up the trim cover, disengaging the hoop and loop retainers, until the headrest guides are exposed. 4. Squeeze the locking tabs on the headrest guide and pull the guides up and out of the seat back pad. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10981 1. Install the seat back trim cover over the top of the seat back. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Fold Flat))Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat)) . 2. Install the headrest guides by pressing the guides into position until the locking tabs engage. 3. Install the headrest. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . Head Restraint Replacement - Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement - Rear Seat Removal Procedure 1. Raise the head restraint to the full-up position. 2. Insert an awl into the guide hole. 3. Pull up to remove the head restraint. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10982 1. Position the restraint in the head restraint guides. 2. Push downward to install the head restraint. 3. Pull up on the restraint to ensure that the restraints are locked in place. Head Restraint Retainer Replacement - Rear Seat Head Restraint Retainer Replacement - Rear Seat Removal Procedure 1. Remove the headrest. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . 2. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Fold Flat))Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat)) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10983 3. Carefully pull up the trim cover, disengaging the hoop and loop retainers, until the headrest guides are exposed. 4. Squeeze the locking tabs on the headrest guide and pull the guides up and out of the seat back pad. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat back trim cover over the top of the seat back. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Fold Flat))Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) (See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat)) . 2. Install the headrest guides by pressing the guides into position until the locking tabs engage. 3. Install the headrest. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Personalization PERSONALIZATION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Personalization features may be set for the vehicle or the driver. Vehicle features do not change with each driver. For more information on vehicle personalization features for this vehicle, refer to Vehicle Personalization. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Description and Operation > Personalization > Page 10992 Memory Positioning Systems: Description and Operation Vehicle Personalization VEHICLE PERSONALIZATION PROGRAMMING FEATURES WITH TECH 2 Enter Programming To enter Programming with the Tech 2, perform the following actions: 1. Install the scan tool. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Select the correct vehicle and model year. 4. Select F1: Body Control Module 5. Select F2: Special Functions 6. Select F2: Personalization SETTING OPTIONS Select an option with the UP/DOWN ARROW keys. The selected option will be highlighted. Use the SIDE TO SIDE ARROW keys to activate or deactivate the highlighted options, an ASTERISK will be displayed when an option has been ACTIVATED. Use the SOFT keys to save the selected options or use the EXIT key to leave the options unchanged. After all options have been selected press the SOFT key to continue. The following is a list of the selectable options: F0: Pre-alarm Option - F1: CTD Operation - F2: Door Lock Operation - F3: Fob Feedback - F4: Afterblow Option Pre-alarm Option Refer to Theft Systems Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. CTD Operation Refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent for information. Door Lock Operation Automatic Door Lock and Automatic Door Unlock can be configured with the Tech 2. Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors for more information. Fob Feedback Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry for information. Afterblow Option Refer to SIR Syste Description and Operation in Restraint Systems for information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Power Seat Motor: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Subject: Left Power Seat Inoperative/Grinding Noise (Replace Power Seat Motor) # 06-08-50-011 (10/12/2006) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a grinding noise when moving the driver power seat. Cause This cause may be due to the customer pulling on the motor assembly by mistake. Correction Replace the power seat motor assembly using the following procedure: 1. Release the seat belt from the seat. 2. Remove the two retaining bolts and move the seat back. 3. Tilt the seat forward to release it from the floor and disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the recliner handle by pulling it off the mechanism. 5. Remove the left side outer seat trim panel and connector from the power seat switch. 6. If the motor works but is noisy proceed to step 8. If the seat motor is inoperative, remove the two bolts that retain the track to the worm gear as see in the illustration above. 7. Slide the track back to gain access to the four T-20 TORX screws. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 11001 8. Remove the four T-20 TORX screws at the actuators and cables. 9. Remove the lock from the wire harness connector. 10. With a small pick or screwdriver, remove the red wire from cavity C and the black wire from cavity F. Remove the motor assembly. 11. Install the red wire into cavity C and the black wire into cavity F and install the lock. Install the motor assembly. 12. Install the motor assembly and tighten the four T-20 TORX screws. If the motor works but is noisy, proceed to step 13. Tighten Tighten the T-20 TORX Screws to 3 Nm (19 lb-in). 13. Slide both tracks back in line with the worm gear and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 14. Install the left side outer seat trim panel and switch connector. 15. Install the recliner handle. 16. Install the seat assembly into vehicle. Connect the electrical connector and install the seat track bolts. Tighten Tighten the seat bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 17. Install the seat bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 11002 18. Verify proper operation of the seat. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Power Seat Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise Subject: Left Power Seat Inoperative/Grinding Noise (Replace Power Seat Motor) # 06-08-50-011 (10/12/2006) Models: 2005-2007 Chevrolet Equinox 2006-2007 Pontiac Torrent Condition Some customers may comment on a grinding noise when moving the driver power seat. Cause This cause may be due to the customer pulling on the motor assembly by mistake. Correction Replace the power seat motor assembly using the following procedure: 1. Release the seat belt from the seat. 2. Remove the two retaining bolts and move the seat back. 3. Tilt the seat forward to release it from the floor and disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the recliner handle by pulling it off the mechanism. 5. Remove the left side outer seat trim panel and connector from the power seat switch. 6. If the motor works but is noisy proceed to step 8. If the seat motor is inoperative, remove the two bolts that retain the track to the worm gear as see in the illustration above. 7. Slide the track back to gain access to the four T-20 TORX screws. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 11008 8. Remove the four T-20 TORX screws at the actuators and cables. 9. Remove the lock from the wire harness connector. 10. With a small pick or screwdriver, remove the red wire from cavity C and the black wire from cavity F. Remove the motor assembly. 11. Install the red wire into cavity C and the black wire into cavity F and install the lock. Install the motor assembly. 12. Install the motor assembly and tighten the four T-20 TORX screws. If the motor works but is noisy, proceed to step 13. Tighten Tighten the T-20 TORX Screws to 3 Nm (19 lb-in). 13. Slide both tracks back in line with the worm gear and install the two bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 14. Install the left side outer seat trim panel and switch connector. 15. Install the recliner handle. 16. Install the seat assembly into vehicle. Connect the electrical connector and install the seat track bolts. Tighten Tighten the seat bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 17. Install the seat bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Seat Motor: > 06-08-50-011 > Oct > 06 > Interior - Driver's Power Seat Inop./Grinding Noise > Page 11009 18. Verify proper operation of the seat. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11010 Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11011 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver (With RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11012 Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver (With RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11013 Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair LUMBAR ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT - MANUAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the lumbar cable from the actuator: 1. Adjust the knob until the lumbar basket is in the position of least support. 2. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 3. Remove the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly on the knob. 4. Drill out the rivets from the lumbar actuator, if necessary. 5. Remove the lumbar actuator screws. 6. Remove the actuator from the seat. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11014 1. Install the lumbar actuator to the seat cushion frame with screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 2. Install the lumbar knob. 3. Install the lumbar cable in the actuator: 1. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 2. Install the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Adjust the knob to ensure that the cable is properly installed. 4. Install the front seat. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11018 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (With RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Seat Switch Bezel Replacement SEAT SWITCH BEZEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Seat Switch Replacement - Power Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11021 SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11022 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11023 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11024 Seat Switch Replacement - Power Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11025 Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11026 2. Remove the lumbar cable from the actuator: 1. Adjust the knob until the lumbar basket is in the position of least support. 2. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 3. Remove the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly on the knob. 4. Drill out the rivets from the lumbar actuator, if necessary. 5. Remove the lumbar actuator screws. 6. Remove the actuator from the seat. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11027 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the lumbar actuator to the seat cushion frame with screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 2. Install the lumbar knob. 3. Install the lumbar cable in the actuator: 1. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 2. Install the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Adjust the knob to ensure that the cable is properly installed. 4. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Seat Back Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Back Frame: Service and Repair SEAT BACK FRAME REPLACEMENT - FRONT The seat back frame is exposed after you remove the seat back trim cover and pad. Refer to Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement Front (Non-Fold Flat). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-005D Date: July 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Cushion Cover Loose (Secure J-Strip to Seat Frame With Hog Rings) Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5 2002-2009 Saturn VUE 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add the 2010 Cobalt and G5 models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-005C (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the seat cushion cover (cover on the lower part of the seat) is loose. Cause This condition may be caused by the J-strip seat cover retaining feature releasing from the seat frame. Correction 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket in SI. Tip The seats do not have to be removed on 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models. (For 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models, the tray under the passenger seat should be removed prior to performing Step 2.) 2. Reattach the J-strip to the seat frame. 3. Secure the J-strip to the seat frame with hog rings. Snap the hog rings through each end of the J-strip and around the seat frame. 4. Reinstall the seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement Front Bucket in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose > Page 11040 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-08-50-006D Date: September 09, 2010 Subject: Minor Wrinkles/Creases, Discoloration, Cigarette Burns and Customer Induced Cuts and Stains on Front and Rear Driver and Passenger Seats with Leather, Vinyl or Cloth Seat Covers Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-50-006C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). If a customer comes in to your dealership due to certain conditions of the seat covers (splits, wrinkles, loose stitching, etc.), you must examine the seat cover in order to determine the validity of the customer claim. Some components from the above listed vehicles have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) and analysis of these parts showed "customer induced damage" or No Trouble Found (NTF). The dealer should pay particular attention to the following conditions: - Cigarette burns Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 11046 - Customer induced cuts (knife cuts, cut by customer tools, etc.) - Paint stains (customer should have cleaned paint stains while paint was still wet) - Coffee stains and other removable dirt These should be cleaned as described in the Owner's Manual under Appearance Care. Also, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029A or later. - Evidence of chemicals used for cleaning, other than those specified in the Owner's Manual - Other chemical spills - Minor and normal leather wrinkles as a result of use - Other defects to the seat cover not detected during the pre-delivery inspection (PDI). Inform the customer that the above issues were not present when the vehicle was purchased and cannot be replaced under warranty. The covers, however, may be repaired or replaced at the customer's expense. The following conditions are not caused by the customer and should be covered by warranty: - Split seams Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-08-50-006D > Sep > 10 > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 11047 - Wear/cracking/peeling - Discoloration/dye transfer from customer clothing (if discoloration/dye transfer is not removed after using GM Leather and Vinyl Plastic Cleaner, P/N 88861401 (in Canada, P/N 88861409), replace the covers.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-005D Date: July 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Cushion Cover Loose (Secure J-Strip to Seat Frame With Hog Rings) Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5 2002-2009 Saturn VUE 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add the 2010 Cobalt and G5 models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-005C (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the seat cushion cover (cover on the lower part of the seat) is loose. Cause This condition may be caused by the J-strip seat cover retaining feature releasing from the seat frame. Correction 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket in SI. Tip The seats do not have to be removed on 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models. (For 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models, the tray under the passenger seat should be removed prior to performing Step 2.) 2. Reattach the J-strip to the seat frame. 3. Secure the J-strip to the seat frame with hog rings. Snap the hog rings through each end of the J-strip and around the seat frame. 4. Reinstall the seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement Front Bucket in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose > Page 11052 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors > Page 11057 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-00-89-027E > Sep > 08 > Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors > Page 11058 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel Bulletin No.: 04-09-41-005A Date: October 26, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Scraping Noise from Upper Steering Column Behind Steering Wheel (Reposition Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Wires) Models: 2004 Saturn VUE Built Up To and Including VIN Breakpoints 4S885734 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox 2006 Pontiac Torrent Attention: Fixed Operations Manager and Technician Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-09-41-005 (Section 09 - Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on noise from the steering column and/or noise from behind the steering wheel when turning the steering wheel. Cause The inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires that go between the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) coil and the inflatable restraint steering wheel module are applying a downward force where the wires come out of the SIR coil. This force may be causing the top cover of the SIR coil to make contact with the SIR coil housing which creates a scraping noise. This force is primarily due to the routing of the wires during installation of the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Correction On vehicles with this condition, follow the service procedure below to reposition the inflatable restraint steering wheel module wires in order to eliminate the noise condition. 1. Disable the SIR system (Zone 3). 2. Remove the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 3. If both yellow airbag wires are taped together, then remove both pieces of black tape (only 2004 Saturn VUE should have tape condition). 4. Straighten out the yellow wires to remove kinks. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 11064 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 11065 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 11071 5. Orient the yellow wires as if they have never been taped together. Yellow wires should be separate, starting from the SIR coil connector. Refer to the illustration. 6. Reconnect both yellow wires to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. For Saturn VUE only, do not connect the horn switch connector at this time. 7. Rotate the inflatable restraint steering wheel module one revolution clockwise while keeping the steering wheel from turning. 8. Connect the horn switch connector from the steering wheel to the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. Important: When reinstalling the inflatable restraint steering wheel module, pull the airbag leads (yellow wires) in an upward direction, towards the top of the steering wheel hub. This will prevent the wires from pressing down on the SIR coil connector. Then make sure the wires go back into "pocket" area behind the SIR coil. 9. Reinstall the inflatable restraint steering wheel module. 10. Enable the SIR system (Zone 3). 11. Start the vehicle and verify that the noise has been eliminated. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 04-09-41-005A > Oct > 05 > Steering - Scraping Noise From Behind Steering Wheel > Page 11072 To receive credit for this repair during the warranty coverage period, submit a claim, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cushion: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose Seat Cushion: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-005D Date: July 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Cushion Cover Loose (Secure J-Strip to Seat Frame With Hog Rings) Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5 2002-2009 Saturn VUE 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add the 2010 Cobalt and G5 models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-005C (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the seat cushion cover (cover on the lower part of the seat) is loose. Cause This condition may be caused by the J-strip seat cover retaining feature releasing from the seat frame. Correction 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket in SI. Tip The seats do not have to be removed on 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models. (For 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models, the tray under the passenger seat should be removed prior to performing Step 2.) 2. Reattach the J-strip to the seat frame. 3. Secure the J-strip to the seat frame with hog rings. Snap the hog rings through each end of the J-strip and around the seat frame. 4. Reinstall the seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement Front Bucket in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cushion: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose > Page 11081 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cushion: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose Seat Cushion: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-005D Date: July 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Cushion Cover Loose (Secure J-Strip to Seat Frame With Hog Rings) Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit (Canada Only) 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5 2002-2009 Saturn VUE 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add the 2010 Cobalt and G5 models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-005C (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the seat cushion cover (cover on the lower part of the seat) is loose. Cause This condition may be caused by the J-strip seat cover retaining feature releasing from the seat frame. Correction 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket in SI. Tip The seats do not have to be removed on 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models. (For 2008-2009 Saturn VUE models, the tray under the passenger seat should be removed prior to performing Step 2.) 2. Reattach the J-strip to the seat frame. 3. Secure the J-strip to the seat frame with hog rings. Snap the hog rings through each end of the J-strip and around the seat frame. 4. Reinstall the seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement Front Bucket in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cushion: > 06-08-50-005D > Jul > 10 > Interior - Seat Cushion Cover Loose > Page 11087 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Cushion: Procedures Seat Cushion Heater Element Replacement - Front SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 2. Place the seat on a clean work bench. 3. Remove the seat cushion cover and pad. 4. Gently pull on the heater element to remove the element from the seat foam. Be careful not to damage the foam pad. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Peel off the self-stick tape from the back of the heater element. 2. Position the heater element over the seat foam pad. Press firmly to engage the adhesive. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11090 3. Route the heating element wiring harness under the seat pad and connect the harness to the heater module. Secure the wire with tie straps. 4. Install the seat cushion cover and pad. 5. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front SEAT CUSHION COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 2. If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support, perform the following procedure: 1. Adjust the lumbar knob until the lumbar is in the setting of the least support. 2. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11091 3. Remove the seat cushion pan bolts and remove the seat cushion assembly. 4. Disconnect the J-hook retainers. 5. Disengage the J-strip at the rear of the cushion. 6. Remove the seat cushion cover from the pad by carefully disengaging the hook and loop retainers. NOTE: Use care when disengaging the hook and loop fasteners. The hook end may pull from the seat foam pad, requiring foam pad replacement. 7. Remove the seat cushion pad from the frame. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11092 1. Position the seat cushion pad to the frame. 2. Engage the hook and loop retainers by pressing down on the retainers. 3. Engage the J-strip at the rear of the cushion cover to the seat pan. 4. Connect the J-hook retainers. 5. Position the seat cushion pan over the seat adjusters. 6. Install the frame bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (9 lb ft). 7. If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support, perform the following procedure: 1. Pull the lumbar cable sleeve forward. 2. Using a sharp-bladed tool, make a small slit where the lumbar actuator meets the cover. 3. Install the lumbar knob by pushing firmly. 4. Adjust the lumbar knob to ensure that the lumbar is operating correctly. 8. Install the front seat into the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11093 Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Rear SEAT CUSHION COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the anchor bolts from the rear seat buckle. 3. Turn the seat over. 4. Disconnect the remaining cushion cover retainers from the rear seat cushion frame. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11094 5. Feed the anchor through to the top of the seat cushion. 6. Pull the seat cushion cover and pad over the latch locations. 7. Remove the seat cushion cover and pad from the frame. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11095 8. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the seat cushion cover from the pad by carefully disengaging the hook and loop fasteners. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the trim cover to the pad. Engage the hook and loop locations by pressing firmly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11096 2. Position the seat cushion cover and pad to the frame. 3. Tuck the seat cushion cover into the seat belt buckle opening. 4. Insert the anchor plates for the seat belt buckle through the cushion. 5. Attach the cushion cover retainers to the seat frame. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11097 6. Install the anchor bolts to the rear seat buckle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Install the rear seat. Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) SEAT CUSHION OUTER TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT (2-WAY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the trim cover screws from the outer cover of the seat back recliner. 3. Remove the seat back recliner trim cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11098 4. Remove the outer trim panel screws from the seat cushion. 5. Remove the trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the trim panel and secure with the trim panel screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11099 2. Position the outboard recliner trim cover on the seat and secure with the trim cover screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the front seat. Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) SEAT CUSHION OUTER TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT (4-WAY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the riser handle trim by pulling firmly on the trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11100 3. Remove the recliner handle trim by pulling firmly on the trim. 4. Remove the trim panel screws. 5. Remove the trim panel from the seat. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11101 1. Position the outer trim panel on the seat. Secure the panel with the panel screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Position the cover over the recliner handle. Push firmly to lock the handle into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11102 3. Position the cover over the seat riser handle. Push firmly to lock the handle into place. 4. Install the front seat. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11103 Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Remove the trim cover screws from the outer cover of the seat back recliner. 3. Remove the seat back recliner trim cover. 4. Remove the outer trim panel screws from the seat cushion. 5. Remove the trim panel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11104 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the trim panel and secure with the trim panel screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Position the outboard recliner trim cover on the seat and secure with the trim cover screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11105 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Remove the riser handle trim by pulling firmly on the trim. 3. Remove the recliner handle trim by pulling firmly on the trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11106 4. Remove the trim panel screws. 5. Remove the trim panel from the seat. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Position the outer trim panel on the seat. Secure the panel with the panel screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11107 2. Position the cover over the recliner handle. Push firmly to lock the handle into place. 3. Position the cover over the seat riser handle. Push firmly to lock the handle into place. 4. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Rear Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. Refer to Seat Replacement - Rear (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Rear) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11108 2. Remove the anchor bolts from the rear seat buckle. 3. Turn the seat over. 4. Disconnect the remaining cushion cover retainers from the rear seat cushion frame. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11109 5. Feed the anchor through to the top of the seat cushion. 6. Pull the seat cushion cover and pad over the latch locations. 7. Remove the seat cushion cover and pad from the frame. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11110 8. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the seat cushion cover from the pad by carefully disengaging the hook and loop fasteners. Installation Procedure 1. Install the trim cover to the pad. Engage the hook and loop locations by pressing firmly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11111 2. Position the seat cushion cover and pad to the frame. 3. Tuck the seat cushion cover into the seat belt buckle opening. 4. Insert the anchor plates for the seat belt buckle through the cushion. 5. Attach the cushion cover retainers to the seat frame. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11112 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Install the anchor bolts to the rear seat buckle. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Install the rear seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Rear (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Rear) . Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11113 2. If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support, perform the following procedure: 1. Adjust the lumbar knob until the lumbar is in the setting of the least support. 2. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly. 3. Remove the seat cushion pan bolts and remove the seat cushion assembly. 4. Disconnect the J-hook retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11114 5. Disengage the J-strip at the rear of the cushion. Notice: Use care when disengaging the hook and loop fasteners. The hook end may pull from the seat foam pad, requiring foam pad replacement. 6. Remove the seat cushion cover from the pad by carefully disengaging the hook and loop retainers. 7. Remove the seat cushion pad from the frame. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seat cushion pad to the frame. 2. Engage the hook and loop retainers by pressing down on the retainers. 3. Engage the J-strip at the rear of the cushion cover to the seat pan. 4. Connect the J-hook retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11115 5. Position the seat cushion pan over the seat adjusters. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 6. Install the frame bolts. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (9 lb ft). 7. If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support, perform the following procedure: 1. Pull the lumbar cable sleeve forward. 2. Using a sharp-bladed tool, make a small slit where the lumbar actuator meets the cover. 3. Install the lumbar knob by pushing firmly. 4. Adjust the lumbar knob to ensure that the lumbar is operating correctly. 8. Install the front seat into the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Heater: Description and Operation HEATED SEATS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION HEATED SEAT SYSTEM COMPONENTS The driver and front passenger heated seat systems each consists of the following components: Driver Heated Seat Switch-Controls off and hi/low temperature settings - Driver Heated Seat Module-Regulates the heated seats modes of operation - Driver Seat Cushion Heater Element-Incorporated in the seat cushion - Driver Seat Back Heater Element-Incorporated in the seat back - Driver Seat Temperature Sensor-Incorporated in the seat cushion - Passenger Heated Seat Switch-Controls OFF and hi/low temperature settings - Passenger Heated Seat Module-Regulates the heated seats modes of operation - Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Element-Incorporated in the seat cushion - Passenger Seat Back Heater Element-Incorporated in the seat back - Passenger Seat Temperature Sensor-Incorporated in the seat cushion - HTD Seats 10 A fuse-Located in the I/P fuse block and supplies voltage in the RUN position only - HTD Seats 20 A fuse-Located in the underhood fuse block and supplies battery positive voltage at all times HEATED SEAT SYSTEM CONTROLS The heated seat system will operate any time the ignition is the RUN position. The heated seat switch controls the OFF or temperature settings to low or high. HEATED SEAT OPERATION Ignition voltage is supplied to the heated seat switches from the HTD Seats 10 A fuse only with the ignition in the RUN position. Battery voltage is supplied to the heated seat modules from the HTD Seats 20 A fuse at all times. Ground is supplied to the heated seat switches and modules from G301. The driver and front passenger seats are heated using electric heater elements located in the seat cushions and seat backs. Battery positive voltage to the heater elements is controlled by the heated seat modules using inputs from the heated seat switches and the heated seat thermistors. When the heated seat switch is in the high or low position, voltage is supplied through the heated seat high/low signal circuit to the heated seat module. Voltage to the high/low signal circuit is reduced by the resistors within the heated seat switch to signal the heated seat module that a high or low temperature setting is requested. Voltage to the high/low signal circuit from the heated seat switch is removed to request the off setting. TEMPERATURE REGULATION The heated seat module monitors the seat temperature through the temperature sensor (thermistor) that is located in the seat cushion. The temperature sensor is a variable resistor, its resistance changes as the temperature of the seat changes. When the temperature sensor resistance indicates to the heated seat module that the seat has reached the desired temperature, the module will cycle supply voltage as necessary to the seat heating element in order to maintain the desired temperature. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Remove the screws from the outboard recliner trim panel. Remove the trim panel. 3. Remove the screws from the inboard recliner trim panel. Remove the trim panel. 4. Remove the head restraint. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Rest/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . 5. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater element. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11121 6. Remove the bolts from the seat back frame. Remove the seat back assembly. 7. Remove the screws from the back panel. Remove the back panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11122 8. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. 9. Lift the trim cover, carefully disengaging the hook and loop retainers until the heater element is exposed. 10. Gently pull to remove the element from the seat back pad. Be careful not to damage the pad. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11123 1. Peel off the self-stick paper backing from the heater element. 2. Position the element on the pad and press firmly to install the element. 3. Lower the seat back trim cover. Press on the hook and loop retainers to engage the retainers. 4. Connect the lower J-hook retainer on the seat back trim cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11124 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Position the seat back panel. Secure the panel with the screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 6. Position the seat back assembly between the fold-flat recliners. Secure with the seat back bolts. Tighten the bolts to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the seat heater element. 8. Install the head restraint. Refer to Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat (See: Head Rest/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11125 9. Position the inboard recliner trim panel. Secure with the panel screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 10. Position the outboard recliner trim panel. Secure with the panel screws. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 11. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11126 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Non-Fold Flat) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heat module. 4. Disconnect the lower J-hook retainer from the seat back trim cover. 5. Carefully lift the trim cover, disengaging the hook and loop retainers until the heater element is exposed. 6. Gently pull on the heater element in order to remove the element from the seat foam. Be careful not to damage the foam pad. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11127 Installation Procedure 1. Peel off the self-stick tape from the back side of the heater element. 2. Position the heater element over the seat foam pad. Press firmly to engage the adhesive. 3. Lower the seat back trim cover, pressing on the hook and loop retainers in order to engage the retainers. 4. Connect the lower J-hook retainer to the seat back trim. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the heater element module. 6. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 7. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11128 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Heater Element Replacement - Front Seat Cushion Heater Element Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . 2. Place the seat on a clean work bench. 3. Remove the seat cushion cover and pad. Refer to Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Front (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front) . 4. Gently pull on the heater element to remove the element from the seat foam. Be careful not to damage the foam pad. Installation Procedure 1. Peel off the self-stick tape from the back of the heater element. 2. Position the heater element over the seat foam pad. Press firmly to engage the adhesive. 3. Route the heating element wiring harness under the seat pad and connect the harness to the heater module. Secure the wire with tie straps. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Heater Element Replacement - Front (Fold Flat) > Page 11129 4. Install the seat cushion cover and pad. Refer to Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Front (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement - Front) . 5. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Driver Heated Seat Module - Driver C1 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 11135 Heated Seat Module - Driver C2 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 11136 Heated Seat Module - Driver C3 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 11137 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C1 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 11138 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C2 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module - Driver > Page 11139 Heated Seat Module - Front Passenger C3 (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Control Module: Procedures HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11142 3. Remove the module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11143 Seat Heater Control Module: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Control Module Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the heated seat module retainer. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the heated seat module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11144 3. Remove the module. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the heated seat module. 2. Install the module with the retainer to the seat pan. 3. Test for proper operation of the seat heater. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11148 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Heated Seat Switch - Driver (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11149 Heated Seat Switch - Front Passenger (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Switch: Procedures HEATED SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat outer trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11152 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11153 Seat Heater Switch: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Switch Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11154 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11159 Door Lock Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11160 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push inward to seat the switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11161 3. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11165 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat blade tool to remove the left front air deflector. 2. Disconnect the electrical connection from the power mirror switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11166 3. Remove the power mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the power mirror switch to the air deflector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11167 2. Connect the electrical connection to the power mirror switch 3. Push the air deflector to the instrument panel until the air deflector is seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11171 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (With RPO Code AG1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Seat Switch Bezel Replacement SEAT SWITCH BEZEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Seat Switch Replacement - Power Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11174 SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11175 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11176 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Seat Switch Bezel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Move the seat to the most forward position. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove the bezel from the seat switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat switch bezel. Press into place. 2. Return the seat to the original position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11177 Seat Switch Replacement - Power Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . 2. Remove the outer trim panel from the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. Use a small flat-bladed tool to remove the switch from the trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11178 Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch into the trim panel. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the outer trim panel to the seat cushion. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 4. Install the seat switch bezel. Refer to Seat Switch Bezel Replacement (See: Seat Switch Bezel Replacement) . Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Lumbar Actuator Replacement - Manual Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11179 2. Remove the lumbar cable from the actuator: 1. Adjust the knob until the lumbar basket is in the position of least support. 2. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 3. Remove the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Remove the lumbar knob by pulling firmly on the knob. 4. Drill out the rivets from the lumbar actuator, if necessary. 5. Remove the lumbar actuator screws. 6. Remove the actuator from the seat. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11180 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the lumbar actuator to the seat cushion frame with screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 2. Install the lumbar knob. 3. Install the lumbar cable in the actuator: 1. Pull back on the lumbar cable sleeve. 2. Install the barrel end of the cable from the lumbar actuator. 3. Adjust the knob to ensure that the cable is properly installed. 4. Install the front seat. Refer to Seat Replacement - Front Bucket (See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Replacement - Front Bucket) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Liftgate Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Under The LF Seat Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11187 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Heated Seat Switch - Driver (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11188 Heated Seat Switch - Front Passenger (With RPO Code KA1) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Heater Switch: Procedures HEATED SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat outer trim. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11191 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11192 Seat Heater Switch: Removal and Replacement Heated Seat Switch Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the seat heater switch. 3. Remove the heater switch from the trim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11193 1. Install the heater switch to the seat trim. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the heater switch. 3. Install the seat outer trim. Refer to Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (2-Way))Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way) (See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Seat Cushion Outer Trim Panel Replacement - Front Seat (4-Way)) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations Right Side Of The Headliner Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof Switch (With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Procedures SUNROOF SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11202 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11203 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Removal and Replacement Sunroof Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Pull gently at front of reading lamp cover to disengage retaining clips. 2. Rotate cover rearward until rear attaching hooks are released. 3. Disconnect sunroof switch harness from sunroof switch. 4. Remove sunroof switch fasteners and remove sunroof switch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11204 1. Install sunroof switch with fasteners. Tighten sunroof switch to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) 2. Connect sunroof switch harness to sunroof switch. 3. Position front reading lamp cover into rear attaching hooks. 4. Rotate front reading lamp cover into lamp assembly forward, then snap cover into place. 5. Function sunroof switch to ensure proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spare Tire Carrier: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Spare Tire Carrier: Customer Interest Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Bulletin No.: 06-08-66-005A Date: September 13, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Rear of Vehicle (Replace Spare Tire Well) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information under Correction and Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-66-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise in the rear of the vehicle over rough roads. Correction Raise the vehicle. Inspect the sheet metal above the muffler for a sheet metal crack in the spare tire well. This crack will run left to right, just under the spare tire hold down bracket. Do not attempt to repair or reinforce the floor area around the spare tire hold-down bracket. It is recommended that the entire Panel, Spare Tire Well be replaced to maintain the integrity of the spare tire hold-down bracket Procedure Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear fascia, energy absorber, and impact bar. Remove the trailer hitch if equipped. Remove the exhaust. Open the rear hatch and remove the spare tire cover and cargo net. Remove the rear sill plate. Remove the rear seat. Remove the right and left door sill plate. Remove the right and left rear quarter trim. Remove the rear speakers. Pull the rear carpet forward. Move the rear harness. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the spare tire well area. Locate and drill out all the factory welds that attach the spare tire well. Note the number and location of the welds for the installation of the new part. Remove the damaged part. Drill out the welds around the perimeter of the spare tire well. Fit the new tire well in the vehicle. Mark the location of the welds. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spare Tire Carrier: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 11213 Remove the panel and drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in all the marked locations on the new panel. Apply weld-thru coating to all mating surfaces. Position the new panel in the vehicle. Plug weld accordingly. Clean and prepare all welding surfaces. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials as necessary per the GM 4901M-D-2006 Approved Refinish Materials online at: Go to www.gmgoodwrench.com. Click on GM Parts & Accessories link. Click on GM Technical Repair Information. Click on Paint Shop. Refinish the inside using materials compliant to GM4901M standards. Clean the back side of the repair and apply an epoxy undercoat per GM4901-D-2006. Reinstall the rear harness. Reinstall the rear carpet forward. Reinstall the rear speakers. Reinstall the right and left rear quarter trim. Reinstall the right and left door sill plate. Reinstall the rear seat. Reinstall the rear sill plate. Reinstall the spare tire cover and cargo net. Reinstall the exhaust. Reinstall the trailer hitch if equipped. Reinstall the rear fascia. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spare Tire Carrier: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 11214 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spare Tire Carrier: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Spare Tire Carrier: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle Bulletin No.: 06-08-66-005A Date: September 13, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Rattle Noise in Rear of Vehicle (Replace Spare Tire Well) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information under Correction and Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-66-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle noise in the rear of the vehicle over rough roads. Correction Raise the vehicle. Inspect the sheet metal above the muffler for a sheet metal crack in the spare tire well. This crack will run left to right, just under the spare tire hold down bracket. Do not attempt to repair or reinforce the floor area around the spare tire hold-down bracket. It is recommended that the entire Panel, Spare Tire Well be replaced to maintain the integrity of the spare tire hold-down bracket Procedure Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the rear fascia, energy absorber, and impact bar. Remove the trailer hitch if equipped. Remove the exhaust. Open the rear hatch and remove the spare tire cover and cargo net. Remove the rear sill plate. Remove the rear seat. Remove the right and left door sill plate. Remove the right and left rear quarter trim. Remove the rear speakers. Pull the rear carpet forward. Move the rear harness. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the spare tire well area. Locate and drill out all the factory welds that attach the spare tire well. Note the number and location of the welds for the installation of the new part. Remove the damaged part. Drill out the welds around the perimeter of the spare tire well. Fit the new tire well in the vehicle. Mark the location of the welds. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spare Tire Carrier: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 11220 Remove the panel and drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in all the marked locations on the new panel. Apply weld-thru coating to all mating surfaces. Position the new panel in the vehicle. Plug weld accordingly. Clean and prepare all welding surfaces. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials as necessary per the GM 4901M-D-2006 Approved Refinish Materials online at: Go to www.gmgoodwrench.com. Click on GM Parts & Accessories link. Click on GM Technical Repair Information. Click on Paint Shop. Refinish the inside using materials compliant to GM4901M standards. Clean the back side of the repair and apply an epoxy undercoat per GM4901-D-2006. Reinstall the rear harness. Reinstall the rear carpet forward. Reinstall the rear speakers. Reinstall the right and left rear quarter trim. Reinstall the right and left door sill plate. Reinstall the rear seat. Reinstall the rear sill plate. Reinstall the spare tire cover and cargo net. Reinstall the exhaust. Reinstall the trailer hitch if equipped. Reinstall the rear fascia. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spare Tire Carrier: > 06-08-66-005A > Sep > 06 > Body - Rattle From Rear of Vehicle > Page 11221 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Splash Guard: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing Splash Guard: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing Bulletin No.: 05-08-111-003 Date: April 12, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Rear Door Stone Guards Turn Yellow (Replace Rear Door Stone Guards) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to September 02, 2004 Production Date Condition Some Equinox vehicles that are equipped with urethane stone guards on the rear doors may have a yellow coloring. This condition is more prevalent on vehicles that are Summit White, Galaxy Silver Metallic and Sandstone Metallic in color. Correction Replace the protective film following the procedure listed below. 1. Remove the existing protective film. 2. Use an alcohol-based cleaner to clean the area where the part is to be applied. Refer to the illustration above. 3. Remove the liner (the bottom film), starting at the tab, by rolling the liner away from the part while keeping the part flat. Refer to the illustration above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Splash Guard: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 11230 4. Hold the part upright, spray the application solution (20% Isopropyl alcohol, 80% water) on both sides of the part and on the vehicle in the area where the part is to be installed. Refer to the illustration above. 5. Hold the bottom tab and align the notch to the vehicle while using your fingers against the vehicle to steady the location. Refer to the arrow in the illustration above. 6. Lay the part on the door, the flatter the initial application the easier it is to remove the trapped air. Use the wheel arch as a guide for the application. 7. Hold the squeegee as shown in the illustration above. Using firm pressure in a downward motion, squeegee out the air bubbles starting at the top and moving along the wheel arch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Splash Guard: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 11231 8. Once the center has been adhered, squeegee from the center outward, using overlapping strokes. 9. Illustration A Illustration B Slowly pull the outer tab straight down starting at the top. Refer to illustration A above. Ensure that the protective film is not pulling away from the vehicle along with the film. Completely remove the remaining outer film with a "quick snap" in a downward motion. Refer to illustration B above. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Splash Guard: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 11232 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Splash Guard: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing Splash Guard: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing Bulletin No.: 05-08-111-003 Date: April 12, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Rear Door Stone Guards Turn Yellow (Replace Rear Door Stone Guards) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to September 02, 2004 Production Date Condition Some Equinox vehicles that are equipped with urethane stone guards on the rear doors may have a yellow coloring. This condition is more prevalent on vehicles that are Summit White, Galaxy Silver Metallic and Sandstone Metallic in color. Correction Replace the protective film following the procedure listed below. 1. Remove the existing protective film. 2. Use an alcohol-based cleaner to clean the area where the part is to be applied. Refer to the illustration above. 3. Remove the liner (the bottom film), starting at the tab, by rolling the liner away from the part while keeping the part flat. Refer to the illustration above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Splash Guard: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 11238 4. Hold the part upright, spray the application solution (20% Isopropyl alcohol, 80% water) on both sides of the part and on the vehicle in the area where the part is to be installed. Refer to the illustration above. 5. Hold the bottom tab and align the notch to the vehicle while using your fingers against the vehicle to steady the location. Refer to the arrow in the illustration above. 6. Lay the part on the door, the flatter the initial application the easier it is to remove the trapped air. Use the wheel arch as a guide for the application. 7. Hold the squeegee as shown in the illustration above. Using firm pressure in a downward motion, squeegee out the air bubbles starting at the top and moving along the wheel arch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Splash Guard: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 11239 8. Once the center has been adhered, squeegee from the center outward, using overlapping strokes. 9. Illustration A Illustration B Slowly pull the outer tab straight down starting at the top. Refer to illustration A above. Ensure that the protective film is not pulling away from the vehicle along with the film. Completely remove the remaining outer film with a "quick snap" in a downward motion. Refer to illustration B above. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Splash Guard: > 05-08-111-003 > Apr > 05 > Body/Frame - Rear Stone Guards Discolored/Yellowing > Page 11240 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11241 Splash Guard: Service and Repair Splash Shield Replacement - Engine Removal Procedure 1. Remove the splash shield to structure push-in retainers. 2. Slide the splash shield forward to remove. Installation Procedure 1. Position the splash shield to the vehicle by sliding rearward and aligning holes. 2. Install the splash shield to structure push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Dam: Service and Repair Air Deflector Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the air deflector to fascia push-in retainers. 3. Remove the air deflector to engine cradle push-in retainers (3). 4. Remove the air deflector from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the air deflector to the vehicle. 2. Install the air deflector to engine cradle push-in retainers (3). 3. Install the air deflector to fascia push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11246 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the screws (2). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-08-66-007 > Jun > 04 > Body - Spoiler Not Properly Fastened On Rear Hatch Spoiler: Customer Interest Body - Spoiler Not Properly Fastened On Rear Hatch Bulletin No.: 04-08-66-007 Date: June 14, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Rear Spoiler is not Properly Fastened on Rear Hatch (Install New Clips) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56002661 Condition Some customers may comment that the rear spoiler has a poor fit and/or makes contact with the inner body when the hatch is in the fully open position. This is most noticeable in hot weather. Cause The spoiler retaining clips may allow the spoiler to move as it expands in hot weather. This allows the water deflector weatherstrip to extend past the flange and get caught at the outer portion of the roof when the hatch is in the open position. Correction Install new clips to retain the spoiler. Parts Information Dealers are instructed to set a SPAC case to process the order. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-08-66-007 > Jun > 04 > Body - Spoiler Not Properly Fastened On Rear Hatch Spoiler: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Spoiler Not Properly Fastened On Rear Hatch Bulletin No.: 04-08-66-007 Date: June 14, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Rear Spoiler is not Properly Fastened on Rear Hatch (Install New Clips) Models: 2005 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint 56002661 Condition Some customers may comment that the rear spoiler has a poor fit and/or makes contact with the inner body when the hatch is in the fully open position. This is most noticeable in hot weather. Cause The spoiler retaining clips may allow the spoiler to move as it expands in hot weather. This allows the water deflector weatherstrip to extend past the flange and get caught at the outer portion of the roof when the hatch is in the open position. Correction Install new clips to retain the spoiler. Parts Information Dealers are instructed to set a SPAC case to process the order. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 08-09-41-004 > Mar > 08 > Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - AIr Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1000 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-004 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Airbag Light On, DTC B1000 Set (Reprogram Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave 2005-2008 Cadillac SRX 2005-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2006-2008 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2007-2008 Suzuki XL-7 Condition Some customers may comment on the airbag light being illuminated. Upon investigation, the technician may find DTC B1000 with symptom code 37 set as current or in history. Correction Important: You must contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. New software for the Passenger Presence System (PPS) has been released to disable this diagnostic check to prevent false setting of DTC B1000. Reprogram the PPS module with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Perform a PPS rezero/preload procedure upon a successful module reprogramming event. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11270 Spoiler: Service and Repair Spoiler Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate upper interior trim panel to expose the center bolt. 3. Remove the spoiler to liftgate bolts (3). 4. Disconnect the stop lamp harness (2). 5. Disconnect the rear washer hose. 6. Lift the spoiler to disengage the locating retainers and remove the spoiler from the liftgate. Installation Procedure 1. Position the spoiler loosely over the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11271 2. Connect the rear washer hose. 3. Connect the stop lamp harness (2). 4. Push down the spoiler to the liftgate to secure the locating tab retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 5. Install the spoiler to liftgate bolts. Tighten the bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 6. Install the liftgate upper interior trim panel. 7. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Front Strut / Shock Tower: Customer Interest Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11281 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11282 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11283 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11284 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11285 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Front Strut / Shock Tower: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11291 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11292 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11293 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11294 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11295 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11296 Front Strut / Shock Tower: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-08-57-001A Date: 081008 Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11297 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11298 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11299 Condition 6 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11300 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11301 Parts Information Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-08-57-001A Date: 081008 Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11302 Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11303 Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11304 Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11305 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 11306 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. 2. Remove the right side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 3. Remove the right side air inlet grille from the vehicle. 4. Remove the left side air inlet grille push-in retainers. 5. Lift up the left side air inlet grille and disconnect the front washer nozzle hose from the front nozzles. 6. Depress the nozzle retaining tabs on the under side of the air inlet grille and pull front nozzles up. 7. Remove the left side air inlet grille. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 11312 1. Install the front washer nozzles into the air inlet grille. 2. Connect the washer nozzle hose to the front washer nozzles. 3. Install the left side air inlet grille. 4. Install the right side air inlet grille. 5. Install the push-in retainers. 6. Install the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm Replacement in Wipers/Washer Systems. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Front Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the front door weatherstrip seal from the door flange by starting at the seal joint at the bottom of the door opening. 3. Separate the seal at the joint, note the position for installation. 4. Remove the seal from the door flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal over the flange in the position noted in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11317 2. Press the seal over the flange firmly to fully secure. 3. Locate an exposed end of the ripcord at the seal joint and pull the ripcord around the door opening. If the seal lip is positioned under any door trim, this process will bring the seal lip over the door trim and headliner. 4. Secure the seal lip under the end of the instrument panel. 5. Install the front door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Front) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Channel Window Channel Replacement Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Remove the outside rearview mirror. 4. Remove the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 5. Remove the window run channel bolts. 6. Remove the front door window run channel. Starting from the rear corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11322 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the window run channel seal to the door header flange, starting from the rear corner. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 2. Install the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Install the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 4. Install the outside rearview mirror. 5. Install the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair) . Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11323 1. Lower the front door window. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Door Window Sealing Strip/Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure 1. Install the window weatherstrip run channel assembly. 1. Starting at the lower rear corner of the window opening, press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Door Window Sealing Strip/Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement) . 3. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11324 Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11325 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11326 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Front Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Front Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the rear edge of the door. 2. Remove the outside rearview mirror. 3. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11327 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. 3. Install the outside rearview mirror. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the hood rear seal from the cowl panel flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the hood rear seal to the vehicle. 2. Push the hood rear seal onto the cowl panel flange in order to fully seat the seal. 3. Verify hood seal fits flush against the hood rear side seals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear > Page 11332 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Side Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Side Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the rear side hood seal, located at the end of the hood seal, from the fender. 3. Remove the seal from the vehicle. 4. To clean the area use a lint-free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naptha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water to remove any adhesive. Installation Procedure 1. Prepare the body surface by wiping with isopropyl alcohol. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Rear > Page 11333 2. Remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the rear side hood seal. 3. Install the rear side hood seal. 4. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) in Interior Trim. 2. Remove the rear door weatherstrip seal from the door flange by starting at the seal joint at the bottom of the door opening. 3. Separate the seal at the joint, note the position for installation. 4. Remove the seal from the door flange. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal over the flange in the position noted in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11337 2. Press the seal over the flange firmly to fully secure. 3. Locate an exposed end of the ripcord at the seal joint and pull the ripcord around the door opening. If the seal lip is positioned under any door trim, this process will bring the seal lip over the door trim and headliner. 4. Install the rear door carpet retainer. Refer to Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Carpet Retainer Replacement - Rear) in Interior Trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Channel Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Glass/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer toWindow Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Remove the rear door window run channel and fixed window assembly. 1. Starting from the front corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. 2. Remove the seal assembly from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11342 1. Install the window run channel seal assembly. 1. Place the seal assembly into the door frame. 2. Place the seal assembly on the door header. 3. Install the seal to the door header flange, starting from the front corner. 2. Install the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear (See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Install the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Glass/Service and Repair) . Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11343 1. Lower the rear door window. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: ) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure 1. Align the notch in the window weatherstrip seal to the fixed window post and press the weatherstrip onto the window flange. 1. Press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: ) . 3. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11344 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Rear Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11345 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Rear Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the front edge of the door. 2. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 11346 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11355 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11356 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11357 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11358 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11359 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-57-001A Date: October 08, 2008 Subject: General Waterleak Diagnostic Guide Models: 2005-2009 Chevrolet Equinox LS, LT 2006-2009 Pontiac Torrent LS, LT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-57-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Water may be entering from the top of the strut tower into the driver side and or passenger side floor. Pull the carpeting back and check for water entering the vehicle. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Reseal the strut tower. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 2 Water may be entering through the seams in the floor pan on the driver side and/or passenger side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11365 Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the carpet and reseal the sheet metal seam. Condition 3 Water may be entering through the liftgate weatherstrip (between a gap in the sheet metal at the bottom). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the weatherstrip and reseal the sheet metal. Condition 4 Water may be entering between the liftgate and the weatherstrip. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11366 Cause The liftgate may not be tight enough to the weatherstrip. Correction Adjust the liftgate. Refer to Liftgate Adjustment in SI. Condition 5 Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer at the rear D-pillar (roof to body). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the roof rack and inspect for any voids in the sealant. Refer to Luggage Carrier Replacement Equinox or Torrent in SI. Use 3M(TM) Ultrapro Autobody Sealant Clear or equivalent. Condition 6 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11367 Water in spare tire compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sealer behind the rear fascia (left or right side). Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the rear fascia and reseal the sheet metal seam. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement in SI. Condition 7 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11368 Water in the rear compartment. Water may be entering through a gap in the sheet metal behind the tail lamps. Cause Insufficient body sealer may be the cause. Correction Remove the tail lamps. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement in SI and reseal the sheet metal seam. Important: IF A MILDEW ODOR IS PRESENT IN THE VEHICLE, REFER TO PIT4535. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: > 08-08-57-001A > Oct > 08 > Body - General Water Leak Diagnostic Guide > Page 11369 Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams Cruise/Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11374 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Adjustments CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch harness connector. NOTE: Improper cruise control release switch adjustment may cause brake damage such as brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11375 5. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 7. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11376 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch connector. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Gently compress the locking tabs on the cruise brake retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access of the retainer locking tabs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11377 1. Install the cruise brake switch retainer into the upper hole of the brake pedal assembly with the retainer arrow pointing in the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the indexing arrow is facing to the right and the ears on the retainer are fully extended on the back side of the bracket to prevent the retainer from being pushed out. 2. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the cruise brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal during the cruise brake switch installation will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11378 3. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 4. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 5. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the switch assembly from the steering wheel. 2. Disconnect the cruise switch electrical harness connector from the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the switch electrical harness connector to the switch. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 2. Insert the cruise switch into the steering wheel and gently apply pressure to fasten the switch in the opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams Cruise/Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11386 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Adjustments CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch harness connector. NOTE: Improper cruise control release switch adjustment may cause brake damage such as brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11387 5. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 6. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 7. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11388 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair CRUISE RELEASE SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 2. Disconnect the cruise brake switch connector. 3. Rotate the cruise brake switch counterclockwise and remove the cruise brake switch from the switch retainer. 4. Gently compress the locking tabs on the cruise brake retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access of the retainer locking tabs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11389 1. Install the cruise brake switch retainer into the upper hole of the brake pedal assembly with the retainer arrow pointing in the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the indexing arrow is facing to the right and the ears on the retainer are fully extended on the back side of the bracket to prevent the retainer from being pushed out. 2. Install the cruise brake switch. - Position the switch into the retainer with the electrical connector index notch pointing to the 1 o'clock position. - Slide the switch in the retainer until the plunger is fully depressed into the barrel. - Rotate the switch clockwise until the travel stop has been reached, approximately 60 degrees. - Inspect the cruise brake switch to ensure the switch is properly locked into the switch retainer with the cruise brake switch electrical connector index notch pointing to the 3 o'clock position. IMPORTANT: Do not depress the brake pedal assembly during the cruise brake switch installation. Depressing the brake pedal during the cruise brake switch installation will cause a brake drag condition. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11390 3. Connect the cruise brake switch harness connector. 4. Install the instrument panel left lower closeout panel. 5. Use the scan tool to monitor CRUISE BRAKE SWITCH in the engine control module (ECM) General Information data table, while depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Verify the APPLIED and RELEASED states read correctly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the switch assembly from the steering wheel. 2. Disconnect the cruise switch electrical harness connector from the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the switch electrical harness connector to the switch. Push in the connector until a click is heard and pull back to confirm a positive engagement. 2. Insert the cruise switch into the steering wheel and gently apply pressure to fasten the switch in the opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11399 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11400 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11401 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11402 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11403 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11404 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11405 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11406 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11407 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11408 Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11409 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11410 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11411 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11412 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11413 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11414 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11415 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11416 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11417 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11418 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11419 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11420 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11421 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11422 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11423 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11424 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11425 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11426 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11427 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11428 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11429 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11430 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11431 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11432 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11433 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11434 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11435 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11436 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11437 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11438 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11439 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11440 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11441 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11442 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11443 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11444 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11445 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11446 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11447 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11448 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11449 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11450 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11451 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11452 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11453 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11454 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11455 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11456 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11457 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11458 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11459 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11460 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11461 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11462 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11463 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11464 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11465 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11466 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11467 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11468 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11469 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11470 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11471 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11472 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11473 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11474 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11475 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11476 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation AUDIBLE WARNINGS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The audible warnings alert the driver of a system concern or a critical vehicle condition. The body control module (BCM) generates the audible warnings. The BCM receives audible warning requests via the class 2 serial data line or the controller area network (CAN) data line. If the BCM receives multiple audible warning requests, the warning with the highest priority sounds first. The following lists the audible warning priority and the pulse rate: 1. Fast rate chime-200 pulses per minute 2. Medium rate chime-150 pulses per minute 3. Slow rate chime-50 pulses per minute 4. Single chime Fasten Safety Belt Warning The BCM activates the fasten safety belt audible warning as requested by the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). The SDM sends a class 2 message to the BCM. The fasten safety belt warning sounds and the fasten safety belt indicator illuminates when the following occurs: The ignition switch transitions to ON. - The inflatable restraint SDM detects that the driver seat belt is not buckled and or the signal is low. The BCM receives a class 2 message from the SDM indicating the driver seat belt status. If the seat belt is buckled when the ignition is turned ON, the chime does not sound. If the seat belt is buckled while the chime is sounding, the chime stops. If the seat belt is unbuckled after the initial transition to ON, the chime does not sound. Key in Ignition Warning The BCM monitors the signal circuit of the ignition switch. The BCM activates the key-in-ignition audible warning. The key-in-ignition warning sounds when the following occurs: The ignition switch is OFF. - The BCM determines that the driver door is open and the signal circuit is low. - The BCM determines that the key-in-ignition switch is closed and the signal circuit is low. Lights On Warning The BCM activates the lights on warning. The BCM chimes a frequency of a fast rate and a continuous duration. The lights on warning sounds when the following occurs: The ignition is OFF. - The BCM determines that the driver door is open and the signal circuit is low. - The BCM determines that the headlamp switch is in the park or head position. Park Brake Warning The BCM activates the park brake audible warning. The park brake warning sounds and the BRAKE indicator illuminates when the following occurs: The ignition is ON. - The vehicle speed is greater than 5 km/h (3.1 mph). The BCM receives a CAN serial message from the ECM indicating the vehicle speed. - The BCM determines that the park brake is engaged and the signal circuit is low. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams Cigar Lighter Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11485 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11486 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11487 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11488 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11489 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11490 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11491 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11492 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11493 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11494 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11495 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11496 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11497 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11498 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11499 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11500 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11501 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11502 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11503 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11504 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11505 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11506 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11507 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11508 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11509 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11510 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11511 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11512 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11513 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11514 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11518 Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11519 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) DIMMER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side air deflector from the instrument panel (I/P). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the dimmer switch. 3. Remove the screw from the I/P dimmer switch. 4. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dimmer switch to the left side air deflector panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11520 Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Install the electrical connector to the dimmer switch. 3. Install the left side air deflector panel to the I/P. 4. Test the dimmer switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation DOOR AJAR INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION DOOR AJAR INDICATOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS The door ajar indicator system consists of the following components: The body control module (BCM) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The driver information center (DIC) - The driver door jamb switch - The passenger door jamb switch - The left rear door jamb switch - The right rear door jamb switch - The liftgate actuator/ajar switch DRIVER AND PASSENGER DOOR AJAR OPERATION The body control module (BCM) receives a discrete input from the respective jamb switch to indicate the status of the door. The BCM then communicates this status to the instrument panel cluster (IPC) via a class 2 message. The IPC, upon receipt of this class 2 message, will illuminate the appropriate ajar message in the driver information center (DIC) and also send a class 2 message to the radio to activate the door ajar audible warning when the following conditions are met: The transmission is removed from PARK. - The vehicle speed is greater then 8.05 km/h (5 mph). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Gauge: Specifications FUEL LEVEL SPECIFICATIONS The information in this table is intended for use with the J 33431-C Signal Generator and Instrument Panel Tester. The fuel level sensor values represent the test values to be used on the Signal Generator to drive the fuel gage display to the indicated positions. Vehicles that require more than one fuel level sensor calculate gage position from many possible resistance combinations of fuel levels between the two tanks. Therefore, the values in the table may not correlate directly to readings taken from the vehicle primary or secondary sending units. The values in the table are approximate values based on information obtained from properly operating vehicles. Actual results may vary slightly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11527 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation FUEL GAGE The PCM sends fuel level percent to the BCM via CAN serial data. The IPC displays the fuel level as determined by the BCM. The fuel gage defaults to E (empty) if: - The PCM detects a malfunction in the fuel level sensor circuit. - The IPC detects a loss of class 2 communications with the BCM. - The BCM detects a loss of CAN communications with the PCM. When the fuel level is less than a pre-determined value, the Low Fuel indicator message illuminates. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11531 Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11537 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11538 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11539 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11540 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11541 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11542 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11543 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11544 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11545 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11546 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11547 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the SIR Fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Open the front hood. Locate the front end sensor, also known as electronic frontal sensor (EFS) (1). 7. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (2) from the EFS connector (3). 8. Remove the EFS connector (3) from the EFS (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11548 2. Connect the EFS connector (3) to the EFS (1). 3. Install the CPA (2) into the EFS connector (3). 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse and fuse center cover. 5. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 6. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 2 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 2 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11549 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - left, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - left connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11550 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - LF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - LF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - left, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - LF and the seat belt pretensioner - LF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11551 3. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11552 10. Connect the SIS - LF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11553 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center then remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module coil connector. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11554 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center, then remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11555 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the I/P module connector. 7. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11556 2. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 4. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 5. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 6. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 7. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 6 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11557 5. Locate And Remove The Air Bag Fuse From The Body Control Module Fuse Center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. To disable the roof rail module - right, perform steps 7-13. To disable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, perform steps 14-18. 7. Remove the upper rear window molding. 8. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 9. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 10. Remove the rear coat hooks. 11. Gently pull down the right rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 13. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. 14. Remove the lower center pillar trim. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11558 15. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 16. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 17. Remove the CPA (2) from the SIS - RF connector. 18. Disconnect the SIS - RF (1) from the vehicle harness connector (3). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. To enable the roof rail module - right, continue to step 3. To enable both the side impact sensor (SIS) - RF and the seat belt pretensioner - RF, continue to step 9. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11559 3. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 4. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 5. Install the rear coat hooks. 6. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. 7. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Install the upper rear window molding. 9. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11560 10. Connect the SIS - RF (1) to the vehicle harness connector (3) and install the CPA (2). 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 13. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 14. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 15. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 8 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11561 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Locate the body control module fuse center. Remove the fuse center cover. 5. Locate and remove the AIR BAG fuse from the body control module fuse center. IMPORTANT: With the AIR BAG fuse removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the upper rear window molding. 7. Remove both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 8. Remove the rear headliner push-in retainers. 9. Remove the rear coat hooks. 10. Gently pull down the right rear corner to access the roof rail module - right connector. 11. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the roof rail module - right connector. 12. Disconnect the roof rail module - right connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11562 13. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 14. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector. 15. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 16. Remove the CPA from the I/P module connector. 17. Disconnect the I/P module connector from the vehicle harness connector. 18. Remove the CPA from the steering wheel module coil connector. 19. Disconnect the steering wheel module coil connector from the vehicle harness connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11563 20. Remove the lower center pillar trim. 21. Remove the CPA from the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector. 22. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector from the vehicle harness connector. 23. Gently pull down the left rear corner of the headliner to access the roof rail module - left connector. 24. Remove the CPA from the roof rail module - left connector. 25. Disconnect the roof rail module - left connector from the vehicle harness connector. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11564 2. Connect the steering wheel module coil connector to the vehicle harness connector. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module coil connector. 4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - LF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 5. Install the lower center pillar trim. 6. Connect the roof rail module - left connector to the vehicle harness connector. 7. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - left connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11565 8. Connect the I/P module connector to the vehicle harness connector. 9. Install the CPA to the I/P module connector. 10. Connect the seat belt pretensioner - RF connector to the vehicle harness connector and install the CPA. 11. Install the lower center pillar trim. 12. Connect the roof rail module - right connector to the vehicle harness connector. 13. Install the CPA to the roof rail module - right connector. 14. Install the rear coat hooks. 15. Install the rear headliner push-in retainers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 11566 16. Install both the left and right rear corner garnish moldings. 17. Install the upper rear window molding. 18. Install the AIR BAG fuse into the body control module fuse center. 19. Install the body control module fuse center cover. 20. Use caution while reaching in and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 21. Perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Map Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Courtesy/Map Lamp Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation SERVICE VEHICLE SOON INDICATOR Also known as "SERVICE", "SERVICE VEHICLE" or "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON" lamps, these lamps are used to inform the technician that a Non-Emissions releated malfunction of the Computerized Engine Control System or Body Control System has occurred, (a DTC has occurred). The "SERVICE TELLTALE" lamps are checked for proper operation while the engine is cranking, and will turn off after the engine is running. Depending on the trouble code set, the "SERVICE TELLTALE" lamp will come on and stay on while the malfunction is taking place. If a malfunction is intermittent, the service lamp that came on will go out when the malfunction is no longer detected by the computer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ALWAYS ON CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the diagnostic. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS If the problem is intermittent, refer to Intermittent Conditions. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Strategies/Intermittent Conditions TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1-7 The number refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 11576 2. This step determines if the condition is with the MIL control circuit or the PCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 11577 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Inoperative MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) INOPERATIVE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the PCM. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 11578 Steps 1-12 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 11579 Steps 13-16 The number refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests for a short to voltage on the MIL control circuit. With the fuse removed there should be no voltage on the MIL control circuit. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 11580 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair SERVICE VEHICLE SOON INDICATOR The "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON" light will come on if there are certain non-emission related vehicle problems. These problems may not be obvious and may affect vehicle performance or durability. The light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly. This light does NOT come on at certain mileage intervals. There is probably a PCM or a BCM Code set that will aid you in diagnosis. RESET PROCEDURE The only way to get the light to go off is to clear the PCM or BCM code(s). This light can NOT be reset or shut off any other way. PCM/BCM codes should be read & repaired before clearing them. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide Odometer: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-49-020D Date: December 06, 2010 Subject: IPC Odometer Programming Method Quick Reference Guide Models: 2003-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold in the U.S. and Canada Only. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information for the 2011 model year and add new 2011 vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-49-020C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide to help identify which season odometer programming method to use after replacing the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The three season odometer programming methods in use today are listed below. In addition, this reference guide lists the component where the season odometer value is stored. The season odometer value may be stored in the IPC, the driver information center (DIC) or the integrated body control module (IBCM), also commonly called a body control module (BCM). Season Odometer Programming Methods in Use Today 1. IPC reprogramming and setup using the service programming system (SPS). 2. Odometer setup at the electronic service center (ESC) when using an exchange IPC/DIC. 3. Tech 2(R) - The Tech 2 is used to set up a replacement BCM, which includes loading the odometer value that is displayed and stored in the IPC. A replacement IPC will display the previously stored vehicle odometer value, communicated from the BCM, after cycling the ignition or driving the vehicle. *The odometer programming is integrated as part of the BCM programming procedure. It is not a stand-alone event. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 11585 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 11586 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 11587 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11588 Odometer: Description and Operation ODOMETER The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either miles (domestic) or kilometers (export). The odometer is shown on display when any of the following occur: - Ignition is in ACC - Ignition is in RUN, with no messages on - The trip reset stem is pressed with the ignition OFF Odometer readings are displayed in the IPC based on a class 2 message from the BCM. The PCM calculates the distance traveled from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) input. The BCM receives a CAN serial data message from the PCM and stores the current mileage. The IPC stores the last valid odometer reading from the BCM in non-volatile memory. When a new valid odometer reading is received from the BCM, the IPC will update the display and store the new reading. The IPC also receives class 2 messages from the BCM regarding VIN and Vehicle content information. Valid information is stored in non-volatile memory at the first key-up with a new IPC. If the VIN or option content do not match the stored information, the odometer will display ERROR. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM WHEN TO CHANGE ENGINE OIL Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A change engine oil light will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11592 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM HOW TO RESET THE ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil light being turned on, reset the system. 1. Turn the ignition key to "RUN" with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. The "change engine oil" light will flash while the system is resetting. 3. Turn the key to "LOCK". If the change engine oil light comes back on and stays on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. WHAT TO DO WITH USED OIL Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Front Of The Engine Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11596 Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (With RPO Code DH3/DF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11601 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Remove the push-in retainer that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Remove the sensor from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient air temperature sensor. 2. Install the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar and with the push-in retainer. 3. Install the front fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11605 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11606 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11611 Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11612 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) DIMMER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side air deflector from the instrument panel (I/P). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the dimmer switch. 3. Remove the screw from the I/P dimmer switch. 4. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dimmer switch to the left side air deflector panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11613 Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Install the electrical connector to the dimmer switch. 3. Install the left side air deflector panel to the I/P. 4. Test the dimmer switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Primary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11617 Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (With RPO Code DH3/DF5) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11621 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Remove the push-in retainer that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Remove the sensor from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient air temperature sensor. 2. Install the ambient air temperature sensor to the impact bar and with the push-in retainer. 3. Install the front fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Brake Warning System Components Brake Warning System Components 1 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11625 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11626 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to Restraint Systems. 2. Remove the front floor console. 3. Disconnect the warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the park brake warning lamp switch locating tab to the locating hole on the park brake lever assembly. 2. Install the switch to the park brake lever. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting screw (1). ^ Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). 4. Connect the park brake warning lamp switch electrical connector (2). 5. Install the front floor console. 6. Enable the SIR system. 7. Verify correct park brake warning lamp operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Indicator: Description and Operation SHIFT INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The shift indicator, located in the console, displays the selected gear position. The body control module (BCM) controls the LEDs in the PRNDL display of the shift indicator through 4 control circuits. The parameters of the 4 control circuits to the shift indicator are bits A, B, C, and parity. These outputs are available for display on the scan tool. The BCM has 8 DTCs for these 4 control circuits. These DTCs diagnose a short or an open for each circuit. The BCM receives selected gear position information from the transmission control module (TCM) via serial data. The TCM receives the gear position through four inputs from the park/neutral position switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11630 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Shift Indicator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws holding the shift indicator to the center console trim bezel and disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the shift indicator from the center trim bezel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11631 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Align the shift indicator with the center trim bezel and fasten with the screws. ^ Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 2. Connect the electrical connection to the center trim bezel. 3. Attach the center trim bezel to the center stack. Verify proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation Tachometer: Description and Operation TACHOMETER The IPC displays the engine speed as determined by the BCM via a class 2 message. The PCM determines the engine speed and sends a CAN serial data message to the BCM indicating the engine speed. The tachometer will default to 0 RPM if: - The PCM detects a malfunction in the engine speed sensor circuit. - The BCM detects a loss of CAN communications with the PCM. - The IPC detects a loss of class 2 communications with the BCM. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 11648 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Reduced PRNDL Display Visibility Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Reduced PRNDL Display Visibility Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-004A Date: March 30, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: PRNDL Display Reduced Visibility For Approximately One Minute Models: 2007 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Automatic Headlamp Control and Vacuum Fluorescent PRNDL Indicator Instrument Panel Cluster Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-0004 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). After backing the vehicle out of a garage or dark environment into a daylight environment, the PRNDL display has reduced visibility for approximately one minute. While the vehicle is parked in a dark environment, the sensor for the automatic headlamp/driving lamps senses that it is dark. When the key is turned to the run/start position, the automatic headlamp module will turn all driving lamps, the instrument panel cluster and PRNDL display ON in the night-time mode. The night-time mode intensity of the instrument panel lamps and PRNDL display is controlled by the automatic headlamp module and can be dimmed further by the customer using the dimming control of the headlamp switch. When the customer then moves the vehicle from the dark environment into the bright sunlight, it will take approximately one minute before the headlamp control module recognizes this as true daylight and not just a bright overhead street lamp shining on the sensor. The headlamp control module will then turn the headlamps off and restore the instrument panel and PRNDL display to full brilliance. Without the time delay, the automatic headlamp control module would switch to the night mode (turn on all driving lamps, instrument panel lamps and PRNDL display would dim) each time the vehicle was driven under an overpass or other darkened environment. This is a normal condition and no repair should be attempted. Ensure the instrument panel backlighting control is in the full bright position. This will help alleviate the condition. You may demonstrate to the customer what happens by placing a repair order over the automatic headlamp control light sensor, which will cause the automatic headlamp control module to switch to the night mode in approximately one minute. All driving lamps will come ON, the instrument panel backlight will be dim, and the PRNDL display will also dim to the night setting in conjunction with the position of the headlamp switch dimming control. Demonstrate to the customer the variance in the instrument panel backlighting and PRNDL display while adjusting the headlamp switch dimming control to both ends of its allowable range. Advise the customer to keep the headlight switch dimming control in the highest position to allow viewing of the PRNDL display in a bright environment. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11653 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair TRANS FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the PRNDL assembly. 3. Remove the screws that retain the PRNDL assembly to the I/P bezel. Remove the PRNDL assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the PRNDL assembly with the trim bezel and fasten in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the PRNDL assembly. 3. Install the I/P trim bezel. 4. Test the PRNDL assembly for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11658 Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11659 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the access panel covers from the upper trim pad. 2. Remove the I/P cluster trim panel. 3. Remove the windshield garnish moldings. 4. Remove the upper trim pad bolts. 5. Lift the upper trim pad to disengage the clips. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11660 6. Twist the ambient light sensor to remove the sensor from the upper trim pad. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient light sensor. 2. Align the sensor to the upper trim pad and twist into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11661 3. Align the upper trim pad to the I/P and fasten the bolts in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the windshield garnish moldings. 5. Install the I/P cluster trim panel. 6. Install the access panel covers to the upper trim pad. 7. Test the ambient light sensor for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11666 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11667 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11672 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11673 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Switches Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11677 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11678 Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11679 Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11680 Brake Light Switch: Adjustments STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 2. Rotate the switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. 5. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11681 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the stop lamp switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Gently compress the locking tabs on the switch retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access to the locking tabs on the stop lamp retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11682 1. Connect the electrical connectors on the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. - Inspect the retainer to insure that the locking tabs have locked into position and the retainer is in place. 2. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. 3. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp Replacement Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair Cargo Lamp Replacement CARGO LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a flat-bladed tool, unsnap the lens from the cargo lamp assembly. 2. Using a flat-bladed tool, disengage the cargo lamp attaching clips by gently prying inboard, being careful not to break the attaching clips. 3. Pull downward and rearward on the cargo lamp to disengage the lamp from the headliner. 4. Disconnect the electrical harness from the cargo lamp. 5. Remove the cargo lamp. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp Replacement > Page 11687 1. Position the cargo lamp to the headliner and connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the cargo lamp into place. 3. Snap the cargo lamp clips back into the closed position. 4. Snap the lens into the cargo lamp assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp Replacement > Page 11688 Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair Cargo Lamp Bulb Replacement CARGO LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cover from the dome lamp/cargo lamp. 2. Remove the bulb from the lamp. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install a new bulb to the lamp. 2. Install the cover to the lamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11692 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the spoiler from the liftgate. 2. Remove the spoiler to high mounted stop lamp screws. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the washer hose. 5. Remove the stop lamp from the spoiler. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the high mounted stop lamp to the spoiler. 2. Connect the washer hose. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11693 3. Connect the electrical connector. 4. Install the spoiler to the high mounted stop lamp screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the spoiler to the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Cornering Lamp: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11697 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11698 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11699 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11700 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11701 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Courtesy/Map Lamp Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11706 Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation COURTESY/ILLUMINATED ENTRY LAMPS The following lamps may be manually turned ON by placing the interior lamp switch in the ON position, or by opening a door while the switch is in the AUTO position. - The dome lamp - The liftgate lamps - Courtesy/map lights The courtesy lamp supply voltage circuit of the body control module (BCM) supplies battery positive voltage to the dome lamp, the liftgate lamps, and the map lamps. When any door is opened, the door jamb switch contacts close providing a door open input to the BCM. The BCM then provides a ground to the interior lamps with the switch in the AUTO position. The interior lamps receive a ground at G401 with the switch in the ON position. If the driver inadvertently leaves any interior lamp ON, the BCM will turn it OFF after a 20 minute time-out. The courtesy lamps will turn OFF immediately if the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or approximately 20 seconds after all doors are closed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) Technical Service Bulletin # 08050 Date: 080331 Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) # 08050: Special Coverage - Daytime Running Lamps May Become Inoperative (Canada Only) (Mar 31, 2008) Subject: 08050 -- DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS MAY BECOME INOPERATIVE Models: 2005-2006 CHEVROLET EQUINOX 2006 PONTIAC TORRENT 2002-2007 SATURN VUE CANADIAN VEHICLES Condition On some 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles, the daytime running lamp (DRL) resistor may crack. If water and road salt enters the crack, it could corrode the resistor. A corroded resistor could result in a loss of DRL illumination, and therefore, vehicles may be less visible to other motorists and pedestrians during daylight hours. Correction This bulletin covers the condition described above for a period of 7 years or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first, from the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, regardless of ownership. Dealers/retailers are to verify the condition and install a new resistor, if necessary. The repairs will be made at no charge to the customer. For vehicles covered by Vehicle Service Contracts, all eligible claims with repair orders on or after March 31, 2008 are covered by this special coverage and must be submitted using the labor operation codes provided with this bulletin. Claims with repair orders prior to March 31, 2008 must be submitted to the Service Contract provider. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Service Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11716 1. Verify that the DRLs are not working. If they are not, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Important: The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 2. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). 3. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamp resistor for cracks or corrosion. ^ If the resistor is cracked or corroded, the resistor requires replacement. Remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 4. ^ If the resistor appears to be in good condition, the vehicle does not have this condition. Follow normal SI diagnostics. Diagnosis and repairs for any other conditions are not covered under this program. 4. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 5. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the DRL resistor bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 Nm (53 lb in). 6. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11717 7. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the terms of this program, submit a claim with the information shown. Customer Reimbursement Customer requests for reimbursement of previously paid repairs to correct a corroded DRL resistor are to be submitted to the dealer/retailer prior to or by March 31, 2009. Repairs must have occurred within the 7 years of the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first. When a customer requests reimbursement, they must provide the following: ^ Proof of ownership at time of repair. ^ Original paid receipt confirming the amount of unreimbursed repair expense(s) (including Service Contract deductibles), a description of the repair, and the person or entity performing the repair. If the work was done by someone other than a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility, the amount of reimbursement will be limited to the amount that the repair would have cost GM to have it completed by a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. GM dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Saturn retailers should refer to applicable Home Office letter on this subject. Daytime Running Lamp Inspection Procedure Perform the following procedure in daylight hours and with the vehicle parked outside. 1. Turn the headlamp switch to the "ON" position. Ensure that you do not have your bright lights (High Beams) on. 2. Standing in front of the vehicle, check the headlamps to ensure that both the left and right bulbs are working. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11718 3. If either bulb is not working, replace it before proceeding to Step 4. 4. Enter the vehicle and turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position. 5. Place your foot on the brake pedal and release the parking/emergency brake (if it is on). 6. Start your vehicle, and with your foot still on the brake, shift your vehicle out of "PARK" while monitoring the upper left corner of the instrument cluster for the green DRL indicator lamp. 7. If the DRL lamp comes on and stays on, your DRLs are working normally and no further action is required. 8. If the DRL lamp flashes rapidly and then turns off, your DRL lamps are not working. Make an appointment with your dealer/retailer. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, your dealer/retailer will replace it at no cost to you. Diagnosis or repair for conditions other than a cracked resistor are not covered under this program. Important: You may continue to drive your vehicle without DRLs; however, we suggest that you turn your headlamps to the ON position while driving until you have had the DRL resistor replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11719 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: Customer Interest Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-42-002A Date: April 03, 2008 Subject: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) May Not Work or DRL Indicator on IP Cluster Flashes and Then Goes Out, DTC B2600 (Inspect DRL Resistor and Replace, If Necessary) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox (U.S. Only) 2006 Pontiac Torrent (U.S Only) 2002-2007 Saturn VUE (U.S Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models affected, change the procedure and Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-42-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold and registered in the U.S. ONLY. Vehicles sold and registered in Canada should refer to Special Coverage Bulletin 08050. Condition Some customers may comment that the daytime running lamps (DRL) may not work or that the DRL indicator on the IP cluster flashes and then goes out. A technician may find DTC B2600 (Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit) set. Cause The DRL resistor may be cracked. Correction Inspect the DRL resistor using the steps below. 1. Verify that the daytime running lamps are not illuminated by following the steps below: 1. Park the vehicle outside or hold a shop trouble light over the ambient light sensor for 30 seconds. 2. Position the headlamp switch to the "Auto" position. 3. Make sure the parking brake is not applied or set. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. 6. Shift the transmission out of "Park" position or place the vehicle into gear if equipped with a manual transmission. 7. Visually watch the green DRL telltale lamp on the IP cluster and note the operation of the DRL lamps. ^ If the DRL telltale lamp stays on and both DRL lamps are on, then the DRLs are functioning properly. No further action is required. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and one DRL lamp flashes rapidly a DRL bulb may be burned out. Inspect the DRL bulb and replace if necessary. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and no DRL lamps come on then proceed to the next step. 8. Check for DTCs and verify DTC B2600-Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit is present. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 11725 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2007 Saturn Model shown. Tip The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 3. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). Proceed to Step 4. 4. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamps resistor for cracks or corrosion. 1. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 5. 2. If the resistor appears to be in good condition, follow normal SI diagnostics. ^ If DTC B2600 is set, refer to DTC B2600 in SI. ^ If no codes were set, refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inoperative in SI. 5. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 6. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 N.m (53 lb in). 7. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. 8. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Lower the vehicle and unhoist. 10. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 11726 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-42-002A Date: April 03, 2008 Subject: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) May Not Work or DRL Indicator on IP Cluster Flashes and Then Goes Out, DTC B2600 (Inspect DRL Resistor and Replace, If Necessary) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox (U.S. Only) 2006 Pontiac Torrent (U.S Only) 2002-2007 Saturn VUE (U.S Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models affected, change the procedure and Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-42-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold and registered in the U.S. ONLY. Vehicles sold and registered in Canada should refer to Special Coverage Bulletin 08050. Condition Some customers may comment that the daytime running lamps (DRL) may not work or that the DRL indicator on the IP cluster flashes and then goes out. A technician may find DTC B2600 (Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit) set. Cause The DRL resistor may be cracked. Correction Inspect the DRL resistor using the steps below. 1. Verify that the daytime running lamps are not illuminated by following the steps below: 1. Park the vehicle outside or hold a shop trouble light over the ambient light sensor for 30 seconds. 2. Position the headlamp switch to the "Auto" position. 3. Make sure the parking brake is not applied or set. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. 6. Shift the transmission out of "Park" position or place the vehicle into gear if equipped with a manual transmission. 7. Visually watch the green DRL telltale lamp on the IP cluster and note the operation of the DRL lamps. ^ If the DRL telltale lamp stays on and both DRL lamps are on, then the DRLs are functioning properly. No further action is required. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and one DRL lamp flashes rapidly a DRL bulb may be burned out. Inspect the DRL bulb and replace if necessary. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and no DRL lamps come on then proceed to the next step. 8. Check for DTCs and verify DTC B2600-Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit is present. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 11732 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2007 Saturn Model shown. Tip The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 3. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). Proceed to Step 4. 4. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamps resistor for cracks or corrosion. 1. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 5. 2. If the resistor appears to be in good condition, follow normal SI diagnostics. ^ If DTC B2600 is set, refer to DTC B2600 in SI. ^ If no codes were set, refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inoperative in SI. 5. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 6. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 N.m (53 lb in). 7. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. 8. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Lower the vehicle and unhoist. 10. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 11733 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) Technical Service Bulletin # 08050 Date: 080331 Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) # 08050: Special Coverage - Daytime Running Lamps May Become Inoperative (Canada Only) (Mar 31, 2008) Subject: 08050 -- DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS MAY BECOME INOPERATIVE Models: 2005-2006 CHEVROLET EQUINOX 2006 PONTIAC TORRENT 2002-2007 SATURN VUE CANADIAN VEHICLES Condition On some 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles, the daytime running lamp (DRL) resistor may crack. If water and road salt enters the crack, it could corrode the resistor. A corroded resistor could result in a loss of DRL illumination, and therefore, vehicles may be less visible to other motorists and pedestrians during daylight hours. Correction This bulletin covers the condition described above for a period of 7 years or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first, from the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, regardless of ownership. Dealers/retailers are to verify the condition and install a new resistor, if necessary. The repairs will be made at no charge to the customer. For vehicles covered by Vehicle Service Contracts, all eligible claims with repair orders on or after March 31, 2008 are covered by this special coverage and must be submitted using the labor operation codes provided with this bulletin. Claims with repair orders prior to March 31, 2008 must be submitted to the Service Contract provider. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Service Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11738 1. Verify that the DRLs are not working. If they are not, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Important: The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 2. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). 3. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamp resistor for cracks or corrosion. ^ If the resistor is cracked or corroded, the resistor requires replacement. Remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 4. ^ If the resistor appears to be in good condition, the vehicle does not have this condition. Follow normal SI diagnostics. Diagnosis and repairs for any other conditions are not covered under this program. 4. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 5. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the DRL resistor bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 Nm (53 lb in). 6. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11739 7. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the terms of this program, submit a claim with the information shown. Customer Reimbursement Customer requests for reimbursement of previously paid repairs to correct a corroded DRL resistor are to be submitted to the dealer/retailer prior to or by March 31, 2009. Repairs must have occurred within the 7 years of the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first. When a customer requests reimbursement, they must provide the following: ^ Proof of ownership at time of repair. ^ Original paid receipt confirming the amount of unreimbursed repair expense(s) (including Service Contract deductibles), a description of the repair, and the person or entity performing the repair. If the work was done by someone other than a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility, the amount of reimbursement will be limited to the amount that the repair would have cost GM to have it completed by a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. GM dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Saturn retailers should refer to applicable Home Office letter on this subject. Daytime Running Lamp Inspection Procedure Perform the following procedure in daylight hours and with the vehicle parked outside. 1. Turn the headlamp switch to the "ON" position. Ensure that you do not have your bright lights (High Beams) on. 2. Standing in front of the vehicle, check the headlamps to ensure that both the left and right bulbs are working. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11740 3. If either bulb is not working, replace it before proceeding to Step 4. 4. Enter the vehicle and turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position. 5. Place your foot on the brake pedal and release the parking/emergency brake (if it is on). 6. Start your vehicle, and with your foot still on the brake, shift your vehicle out of "PARK" while monitoring the upper left corner of the instrument cluster for the green DRL indicator lamp. 7. If the DRL lamp comes on and stays on, your DRLs are working normally and no further action is required. 8. If the DRL lamp flashes rapidly and then turns off, your DRL lamps are not working. Make an appointment with your dealer/retailer. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, your dealer/retailer will replace it at no cost to you. Diagnosis or repair for conditions other than a cracked resistor are not covered under this program. Important: You may continue to drive your vehicle without DRLs; however, we suggest that you turn your headlamps to the ON position while driving until you have had the DRL resistor replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11741 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-42-002A Date: April 03, 2008 Subject: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) May Not Work or DRL Indicator on IP Cluster Flashes and Then Goes Out, DTC B2600 (Inspect DRL Resistor and Replace, If Necessary) Models: 2005-2006 Chevrolet Equinox (U.S. Only) 2006 Pontiac Torrent (U.S Only) 2002-2007 Saturn VUE (U.S Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models affected, change the procedure and Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-42-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold and registered in the U.S. ONLY. Vehicles sold and registered in Canada should refer to Special Coverage Bulletin 08050. Condition Some customers may comment that the daytime running lamps (DRL) may not work or that the DRL indicator on the IP cluster flashes and then goes out. A technician may find DTC B2600 (Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit) set. Cause The DRL resistor may be cracked. Correction Inspect the DRL resistor using the steps below. 1. Verify that the daytime running lamps are not illuminated by following the steps below: 1. Park the vehicle outside or hold a shop trouble light over the ambient light sensor for 30 seconds. 2. Position the headlamp switch to the "Auto" position. 3. Make sure the parking brake is not applied or set. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. 6. Shift the transmission out of "Park" position or place the vehicle into gear if equipped with a manual transmission. 7. Visually watch the green DRL telltale lamp on the IP cluster and note the operation of the DRL lamps. ^ If the DRL telltale lamp stays on and both DRL lamps are on, then the DRLs are functioning properly. No further action is required. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and one DRL lamp flashes rapidly a DRL bulb may be burned out. Inspect the DRL bulb and replace if necessary. ^ If the DRL telltale flashes rapidly, goes out and no DRL lamps come on then proceed to the next step. 8. Check for DTCs and verify DTC B2600-Daytime Running Lamp Control Circuit is present. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 11747 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2007 Saturn Model shown. Tip The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 3. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). Proceed to Step 4. 4. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamps resistor for cracks or corrosion. 1. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 5. 2. If the resistor appears to be in good condition, follow normal SI diagnostics. ^ If DTC B2600 is set, refer to DTC B2600 in SI. ^ If no codes were set, refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Inoperative in SI. 5. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 6. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 N.m (53 lb in). 7. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. 8. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Lower the vehicle and unhoist. 10. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 07-08-42-002A > Apr > 08 > Lighting - DRL Inop./DRL Indicator Flashes/DTC B2600 > Page 11748 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) Technical Service Bulletin # 08050 Date: 080331 Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) # 08050: Special Coverage - Daytime Running Lamps May Become Inoperative (Canada Only) (Mar 31, 2008) Subject: 08050 -- DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS MAY BECOME INOPERATIVE Models: 2005-2006 CHEVROLET EQUINOX 2006 PONTIAC TORRENT 2002-2007 SATURN VUE CANADIAN VEHICLES Condition On some 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles, the daytime running lamp (DRL) resistor may crack. If water and road salt enters the crack, it could corrode the resistor. A corroded resistor could result in a loss of DRL illumination, and therefore, vehicles may be less visible to other motorists and pedestrians during daylight hours. Correction This bulletin covers the condition described above for a period of 7 years or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first, from the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, regardless of ownership. Dealers/retailers are to verify the condition and install a new resistor, if necessary. The repairs will be made at no charge to the customer. For vehicles covered by Vehicle Service Contracts, all eligible claims with repair orders on or after March 31, 2008 are covered by this special coverage and must be submitted using the labor operation codes provided with this bulletin. Claims with repair orders prior to March 31, 2008 must be submitted to the Service Contract provider. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2005-2006 model year Chevrolet Equinox, 2006 model year Pontiac Torrent, and 2002-2007 model year Saturn VUE vehicles built within the VIN breakpoints shown. Parts Information Parts required to complete this program are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicles (see copy of typical customer letter shown in this bulletin - actual divisional letter may vary slightly). Service Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11754 1. Verify that the DRLs are not working. If they are not, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Important: The DRL resistor (1) is located on the left front bumper support and may require cleaning before inspection. 2. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, loosen the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia to gain access to the DRL resistor. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models do not require the removal of the left front wheel or inner wheel liner to gain access to the DRL resistor (1). 3. Use a mirror and light to visually inspect the daytime running lamp resistor for cracks or corrosion. ^ If the resistor is cracked or corroded, the resistor requires replacement. Remove the resistor. Refer to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Resistor Replacement in SI. Proceed to Step 4. ^ If the resistor appears to be in good condition, the vehicle does not have this condition. Follow normal SI diagnostics. Diagnosis and repairs for any other conditions are not covered under this program. 4. Install the new DRL resistor assembly to the left front bumper support with the washer (1) between the resistor and bumper support. 5. Tighten the new DRL resistor bolt. Tighten Tighten the DRL resistor bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb in). DO NOT EXCEED 6 Nm (53 lb in). 6. Connect the DRL electrical connector to the DRL resistor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11755 7. For Chevrolet and Pontiac models, install the left front corner of the inner wheel liner to front fascia. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement in SI. Saturn models did not require the inner wheel liner to be removed. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Clear any DTCs and verify the operation of the daytime running lamps. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the terms of this program, submit a claim with the information shown. Customer Reimbursement Customer requests for reimbursement of previously paid repairs to correct a corroded DRL resistor are to be submitted to the dealer/retailer prior to or by March 31, 2009. Repairs must have occurred within the 7 years of the date the vehicle was originally placed in service, or 112,000 km, whichever occurs first. When a customer requests reimbursement, they must provide the following: ^ Proof of ownership at time of repair. ^ Original paid receipt confirming the amount of unreimbursed repair expense(s) (including Service Contract deductibles), a description of the repair, and the person or entity performing the repair. If the work was done by someone other than a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility, the amount of reimbursement will be limited to the amount that the repair would have cost GM to have it completed by a GM dealership or Saturn retail facility. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. GM dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Saturn retailers should refer to applicable Home Office letter on this subject. Daytime Running Lamp Inspection Procedure Perform the following procedure in daylight hours and with the vehicle parked outside. 1. Turn the headlamp switch to the "ON" position. Ensure that you do not have your bright lights (High Beams) on. 2. Standing in front of the vehicle, check the headlamps to ensure that both the left and right bulbs are working. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11756 3. If either bulb is not working, replace it before proceeding to Step 4. 4. Enter the vehicle and turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position. 5. Place your foot on the brake pedal and release the parking/emergency brake (if it is on). 6. Start your vehicle, and with your foot still on the brake, shift your vehicle out of "PARK" while monitoring the upper left corner of the instrument cluster for the green DRL indicator lamp. 7. If the DRL lamp comes on and stays on, your DRLs are working normally and no further action is required. 8. If the DRL lamp flashes rapidly and then turns off, your DRL lamps are not working. Make an appointment with your dealer/retailer. If the resistor is cracked or corroded, your dealer/retailer will replace it at no cost to you. Diagnosis or repair for conditions other than a cracked resistor are not covered under this program. Important: You may continue to drive your vehicle without DRLs; however, we suggest that you turn your headlamps to the ON position while driving until you have had the DRL resistor replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: > 08050 > Mar > 08 > Campaign - DRL Warranty Extension (Canada) > Page 11757 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11758 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11762 Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11763 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) DIMMER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side air deflector from the instrument panel (I/P). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the dimmer switch. 3. Remove the screw from the I/P dimmer switch. 4. Remove the switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dimmer switch to the left side air deflector panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11764 Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Install the electrical connector to the dimmer switch. 3. Install the left side air deflector panel to the I/P. 4. Test the dimmer switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair DOME LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cover from the dome lamp/cargo lamp. 2. Remove the bulb from the lamp. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install a new bulb to the lamp. 2. Install the cover to the lamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair FOG LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the push-in retainers (1) that hold the front flap of the front wheelhouse liner to the fascia. 2. Bend the front flap of the wheelhouse liner out of the way to gain access to the fog lamp. 3. Turn the fog lamp socket (1) counterclockwise in order to release the fog lamp socket from the fog lamp housing. 4. Remove the bulb from the socket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11773 1. Install the fog lamp bulb into the socket. 2. Install the fog lamp bulb socket (1) into the housing. 3. Position the front flap of the wheelhouse liner back into place. 4. Install the wheelhouse liner push-in retainers (1). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11777 Fog Lamp Switch (With RPO Code T96) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11778 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel from the center stack. 2. Remove the screw that retains the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. Remove the air deflector assembly. 3. Use a flat-bladed tool to release the fasteners on the fog lamp switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11779 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fog lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the fog lamp switch with the center air deflector assembly and snap into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11780 2. Install the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the fog lamp switch. 4. Install the I/P trim bezel. 5. Test the fog lamp switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11785 Hazard Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11786 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD FLASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws that retain the hazard flasher switch to the I/P center stack. Remove the switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the hazard flasher switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11787 1. Align the switch with the trim bezel and fasten in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the hazard flasher switch. 3. Install the I/P center trim bezel. 4. Test the flasher switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11792 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11793 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11794 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11795 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11796 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Lens > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention Headlamp Lens: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-001D Date: June 21, 2010 Subject: Headlamp Lens Overheating When Covered and Chemical Damage to Exterior Polycarbonate Headlamp Lenses Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and to revise the warning statements. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-001C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The bulletin is being issued to make dealers and customers aware of chemical damage that may be caused to exterior polycarbonate headlamp lenses. Most late model vehicles have these types of headlamp lenses. This material is used because of its temperature and high impact resistance. A variety of chemicals can cause crazing or cracking of the headlamp lens. Headlamp lenses are very sensitive. Care should be exercised to avoid contact with all exterior headlamp lenses when treating a vehicle with any type of chemical, such as those recommended for rail dust removal. Rubbing compound, grease tar and oil removers, tire cleaners, cleaner waxes and even car wash soaps in too high a concentration may also attribute to this condition. This could result in the need to replace the entire headlamp housing. Warning Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Also, crazing or deformations of the lens may occur if a shop mat or fender cover is draped over the fender and covers a portion or all of the headlamp assembly while the DRL or headlamps are on. This action restricts the amount of heat dissipated by the headlamps. Warning Care should be taken to not cover headlamps with shop mats or fender covers if the vehicle is being serviced with the headlamps or DRL illuminated. Covering an illuminated lamp can cause excessive heat build up and crazing/deformation of the lens may occur. The degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually become hairline cracks in the lens. In extreme cases, it could cause the lens to deform. This damage can also be caused by aftermarket shields that are often tinted in color. Once a heat buildup is generated by the headlamp, a degradation of the headlamp lens begins. This degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually manifest as spider cracks. In more extreme cases, it will begin to melt the lens of the headlamp. Notice Headlamps damaged by chemicals, improper cleaning, or overheating due to being covered are not covered under the new vehicle warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11804 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11805 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair LICENSE LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screws (2) attaching the rear license plate lamp assembly to the rear license plate lamp bezel. 2. Lower the license plate lamp assembly (1) from the bezel. 3. Rotate the license plate lamp bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it from the housing. 4. Pull the license plate lamp bulb out of the bulb socket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Press the license plate lamp bulb into the lamp socket until seated. 2. Install the license plate lamp bulb socket assembly (1) in the license plate lamp lens and rotate clockwise until seated. 3. Align license plate lamp assembly with the license plate lamp bezel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11814 4. Install the license plate lamp assembly to license plate lamp bezel screws (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws (2) to 4 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair READING LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Insert a small flat-bladed tool at the front of the reading lamp. Disengage the reading lamp. 2. Pull the reading lamp down. 3. Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11819 1. Install the reading lamp bulb. 2. Install the reading lamp cover, begining with the back of the cover. 3. Push the front of the lamp cover up until seated. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11825 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11826 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11827 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11828 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11829 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11830 Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11831 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11832 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11837 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11838 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11839 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11840 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11841 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Behind The Center Of The I/P - Turn Signal Relay Location Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11846 Turn Signal Relay Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11851 Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11852 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the access panel covers from the upper trim pad. 2. Remove the I/P cluster trim panel. 3. Remove the windshield garnish moldings. 4. Remove the upper trim pad bolts. 5. Lift the upper trim pad to disengage the clips. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11853 6. Twist the ambient light sensor to remove the sensor from the upper trim pad. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the ambient light sensor. 2. Align the sensor to the upper trim pad and twist into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11854 3. Align the upper trim pad to the I/P and fasten the bolts in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the windshield garnish moldings. 5. Install the I/P cluster trim panel. 6. Install the access panel covers to the upper trim pad. 7. Test the ambient light sensor for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Switches Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11858 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Stop Lamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11859 Stop Lamp Switch - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11860 Stop Lamp Switch - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11861 Brake Light Switch: Adjustments STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. 2. Rotate the switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. 5. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11862 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the stop lamp switch. 2. Rotate the stop lamp switch counterclockwise and remove the switch from the switch retainer. 3. Gently compress the locking tabs on the switch retainer and remove the switch retainer from the brake pedal assembly. IMPORTANT: Depressing the brake pedal will allow easier access to the locking tabs on the stop lamp retainer. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11863 1. Connect the electrical connectors on the stop lamp switch. NOTE: Proper stoplamp switch adjustment is essential. Improper stoplamp switch adjustment may cause brake drag, heat buildup and excessive brake lining wear. IMPORTANT: Do NOT depress the brake pedal assembly during the stop lamp switch installation. This will cause a drag condition on the brake. - Inspect the retainer to insure that the locking tabs have locked into position and the retainer is in place. 2. Install the switch to the bracket by turning and pushing the switch until the switch bottoms on the brake pedal. 3. Inspect the stop lamps for proper operation Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11867 Fog Lamp Switch (With RPO Code T96) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11868 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) trim bezel from the center stack. 2. Remove the screw that retains the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. Remove the air deflector assembly. 3. Use a flat-bladed tool to release the fasteners on the fog lamp switch. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11869 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fog lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Align the fog lamp switch with the center air deflector assembly and snap into place. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11870 2. Install the center air deflector assembly to the I/P trim bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the fog lamp switch. 4. Install the I/P trim bezel. 5. Test the fog lamp switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11874 Hazard Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11875 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD FLASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel (I/P) center trim bezel. 2. Remove the screws that retain the hazard flasher switch to the I/P center stack. Remove the switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the hazard flasher switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11876 1. Align the switch with the trim bezel and fasten in place. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the hazard flasher switch. 3. Install the I/P center trim bezel. 4. Test the flasher switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11880 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11881 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The I/P Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the steering column trim covers. 2. Disconnect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the multifunction turn signal switch to the steering column. 2. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Connect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Tail Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 11892 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11893 Tail Lamp: Description and Operation PARK, TAIL AND MARKER LAMPS The park lamps consist of the park, tail, marker and license lamps. These lamps are illuminated any time the headlamp switch is in the PARK, ON position, or anytime the body control module (BCM) illuminates the headlamps. The PARK fuse in the fuse block - instrument panel (I/P) supplies voltage to both the coil and switch input side of the park lamp relay. The BCM controls the park lamp relay by grounding the park lamp control circuit energizing the relay. For automatic lamp control (ALC) the BCM receives a signal from the ambient light sensor indicating a low or high ambient (outside) light level. Under low light conditions the BCM grounds the park lamp relay control circuit energizing the park lamp relay. The now closed relay supplies voltage on the park lamp supply voltage circuit directly to the lamps. The BCM always turns ON the park lamps and headlamps together when in the ALC mode. For manual operation, when the headlamp switch is in the PARK position, the headlamp switch supplies ground to the BCM on the park lamp switch signal circuit. In response, the BCM grounds only the park lamp relay control circuit, and the lamps illuminate as stated above. The conditions necessary for the BCM to activate the ACL mode are as follows: - The ignition switch is in the RUN position. - The headlamps are in the OFF position. - The park brake is released. If the park brake is applied after the ignition key is placed in the RUN position the ALC is not effected. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11894 Tail Lamp: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11895 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11896 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 3. Gently pull the top of the fascia assembly several inches away from the vehicle to release the radiator grille strap from the headlamp. 4. Place a piece of tape over the radiator grille strap to headlamp retaining clip to prevent scratching of the headlamp lens. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11903 5. Remove the headlamp bolts (1, 2). 6. Pull gently on the bottom outboard corner of the headlamp to disengage the lower rear headlamp retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11904 7. Remove the bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5) from the backside of the headlamp. 8. Remove the headlamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the headlamp into the headlamp opening. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11905 2. Install the headlamp bulbs (2, 3, 4, 5). 3. Push the headlamp back into position until the lower rear retainer is fully engaged. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11906 4. Install the headlamp bolts (1, 2) NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the headlamp bolts to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 5. Remove the tape from the radiator grille strap retainer. 6. Position the fascia assembly and engage the radiator grille strap retainer into the headlamp. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11907 7. Install the fascia to tie bar push-in retainers (1). 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11908 Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the tail lamp bolt covers. 2. Remove the tail lamp bolts (3). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11909 3. Pull outward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to disengage the retainers from the body side. 4. Remove the bulbs from the tail lamp assembly. 5. Remove the tail lamp assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bulbs into the tail lamp assembly. 3. Push inward at the front of the tail lamp assembly to engage the retainers into the body side. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 11910 4. Install the tail lamp bolts (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the tail lamp bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the tail lamp bolt covers (4). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Behind The Center Of The I/P - Turn Signal Relay Location Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11914 Turn Signal Relay Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the steering column trim covers. 2. Disconnect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Depress the lock tabs on the left and right multifunction levers. 4. Remove the multifunction levers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the multifunction turn signal switch to the steering column. 2. Important: Ensure both locking tabs are seated. Connect the multifunction turn signal switch harness connectors. 3. Install the steering column trim covers. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Heated Glass Element: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 11927 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 11928 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 11929 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Heated Glass Element: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 11935 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 11936 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 11937 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11938 Stationary Window Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Heated Glass Element: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11941 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11942 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11943 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11944 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11945 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11946 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11947 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11948 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11949 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11950 Heated Glass Element: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11951 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11952 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11953 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11954 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11955 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11956 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11957 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11958 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11959 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11960 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11961 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11962 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11963 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11964 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11965 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11966 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11967 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11968 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11969 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11970 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11971 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11972 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11973 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11974 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11975 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11976 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11977 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11978 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11979 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11980 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11981 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11982 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11983 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11984 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11985 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11986 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11987 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11988 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11989 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11990 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11991 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11992 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11993 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11994 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11995 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11996 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11997 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11998 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11999 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12000 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12001 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12002 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12003 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12004 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12005 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12006 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12007 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12008 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12009 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12010 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12011 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12012 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12013 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12014 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12015 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12016 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12017 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12018 Heated Glass Element: Connector Views Rear Defogger C1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12019 Rear Defogger C2 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Description and Operation > Rear Window Defogger Heated Glass Element: Description and Operation Rear Window Defogger REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM COMPONENTS The rear window defogger system consist of the following components: The HVAC control module - The body control module (BCM) - The REAR DEFOG relay - The rear window grid REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OPERATION Battery positive voltage is supplied through the REAR DEFOG fuse, in the underhood fuse block, to the REAR DEFOG relay switched input. Ground for the coil of the REAR DEFOG relay is provided by the BCM. Battery voltage is supplied from the IGNITION 30A MaxiFuse to the supply voltage on the rear defog relay coil side. When you depress the rear defogger switch, the rear defogger switch pulls the signal circuit low as an input to the BCM. The BCM interprets this as a request for the rear defogger system. The BCM enables the rear defogger system by supplying ground to the REAR DEFOG relay coil. The relay coil ground is also spliced off to the ground circuit of the rear defogger indicator. The REAR DEFOG relay is energized and the rear defogger indicator is illuminated. With the relay energized, battery positive voltage is allowed from the relay switched input through the switch contacts and out the relay switched output to the rear defogger grid. Ground for the rear defogger grid is provided by G401. When you start the engine and press the rear defogger switch for the first time, the defogger cycle lasts for 15 minutes. Further operation results in 7.5 minute defogger cycles. The defogger cycle resets to 15 minutes when you cycle the ignition to the off position and then to the on position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Description and Operation > Rear Window Defogger > Page 12022 Heated Glass Element: Description and Operation Compass Calibration and Variance Procedure COMPASS CALIBRATION AND VARIANCE PROCEDURE COMPASS CALIBRATION Before calibrating the compass, drive the vehicle to an open area that is magnetically clean or free of large metallic objects such as high tension power lines or large steel buildings. Verify there are no magnetized roof antennas, magnets on or hanging from the mirror, or any other magnetized objects on the inside or outside of the vehicle close to the mirror. 1. Start the engine. 2. Press and hold the on/off switch for the compass until the letter "C" or "CAL" is displayed. IMPORTANT: Before calibrating the compass, make sure the mirror has the correct zone number. Refer to Compass Magnetic Variation Adjustment mentioned below. 3. Drive the vehicle in circles at a speed of less than 8 km/h (5 mph) until the "C" or "CAL" is replaced by a proper vehicle heading. The calibration procedure is now complete. COMPASS MAGNETIC VARIATION ADJUSTMENT Magnetic variation adjustments are required when the compass displays a constant error in heading. Variation is the difference between magnetic north and true north due to geographical location. World Magnetic Variation Map 1. Locate your current geographic location on the World Magnetic Variation Map. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Press and hold the on/off switch for the compass until a zone number appears on the compass display. 4. Depress the switch for the compass to select the desired zone number. 5. Wait 5 seconds. The display will return to a compass heading. The variance procedure is now complete. 6. Calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration mentioned above. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Heated Glass Element: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT For the inside rearview mirror with the automatic day-night feature, begin the diagnosis by reviewing the system Description and Operation. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will help you determine the correct symptom diagnostic procedure when a malfunction exists. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will also help you determine if the condition described by the customer is normal operation. Refer to Symptoms - Heated Glass Element in order to identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures For the rear window defogger, begin the diagnosis with the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which command the system - The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12025 Heated Glass Element: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: - For the inside rearview mirror with the automatic day-night feature, review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Automatic Day-Night Mirror Description and Operation. - For the rear window defogger system, the following steps must be performed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the rear window defogger system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation. Visual/physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the rear window defogger or the automatic day-night feature of the inside rearview mirror. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: Defogger Inoperative - Rear Window - Defogger Grid Lines Diagnosis - Mirrors - Automatic Day-Night Inoperative - Mirrors - Temperature Displays SC or OC - Mirrors - Compass Display Inoperative or Inaccurate Automatic Day/Night Mirror Inoperative - Mirrors MIRRORS - AUTOMATIC DAY-NIGHT INOPERATIVE DIAGNOSTIC AIDS The automatic day-night feature of the inside rearview mirror may not operate properly or become inoperative due to an intermittent short to battery positive voltage in the backup lighting system. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12026 Steps 1-11 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12027 Step 12 Steps 1-10 Defogger Inoperative - Rear Window DEFOGGER INOPERATIVE - REAR WINDOW TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12028 Steps 1-13 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12029 Steps 14-20 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 8. Listen for an audible click when the relay operates. Command both the ON and OFF states of the REAR DEFOG relay. Repeat the commands, as necessary. Temperature Displays SC or OC - Mirrors MIRRORS - TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS SC OR OC AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR RESISTANCE TABLE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12030 The table will be used to measure the resistance of the sensor and compare it with the actual ambient temperature. The mirror's temperature accuracy should be within 5 degrees of the actual temperature. The actual temperature should not be taken from a radio station, a sign displaying the temperature, etc. A temperature measuring tool such as a thermometer should be used. Some temperature measuring tools may be within 5 degrees of the actual temperature. Make sure to consult the manufacturer for the accuracy of the tool. This comparison can make the mirror seem off by 5-10 degrees of the actual temperature when it is not. TEST Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12031 Steps 1-12 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12032 Steps 13-17 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12033 Heated Glass Element: Component Tests and General Diagnostics DEFOGGER GRID LINES DIAGNOSIS IMPORTANT: This test is for reference only. A grid line fault requires rear window replacement. Refer to Window Replacement - Liftgate. 1. Start the engine. 2. Activate the rear window defogger system. 3. Connect a test lamp to a good ground. 4. Move the test lamp probe from the positive to the negative wire. - If the test lamp shows full brilliance at both ends of the grid lines, inspect for an open or poor connection in the ground circuit of the rear window defogger grid. - If the test lamp goes out, test the grid line in at least 2 places to eliminate the possibility of bridging the open in the grid line. IMPORTANT: The test lamp brilliance will decrease proportionately to the increased resistance in the grid line as the probe is moved from the battery positive bus wire to the ground bus wire. The test lamp brilliance may vary from one window to another. 5. Once the open is located, replace the rear window. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 12034 Heated Glass Element: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS Rear Defog Relay Cmd.: The scan tool displays On/Off. The body control module will indicate if it is commanding the rear defog relay On or Off. Rear Defog Relay Fdbk.: The scan tool displays High/Low. This input to the BCM displays the state of the rear defog relay feedback circuit. Low is displayed when the BCM is providing a ground to the rear defog relay control circuit. Rear Defog Switch: The scan tool displays On/Off. The BCM receives an input from the HVAC control head indicating On when the rear defog system is turned On. Accessory Body Control Module (BCM) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection Bulletin No.: 04-08-48-001B Date: June 28, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Rear Window Defogger - Broken Heating Grid Detection Method Models: 2006 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2006 model year and additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-48-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The addition of vertical grid lines to the heated back window defogger circuits has made it difficult to detect broken defogger grid lines. In the past, it was a simple matter to use a voltmeter to check the continuity of each grid line in order to locate a non-functional line. Some new design back windows have two vertical grid lines that connect all of the horizontal grid lines together, thereby providing alternate routes for the electrical current to follow. This makes the old test method ineffective. If the vehicle does not have the vertical lines, the old (line-by-line) test methods can be used. Materials Required ^ Permatex(R) Quick Grid, GM P/N 12346001, or equivalent ^ A small ball of fine steel wool Type 00, or ^ Optional - A strip of liquid crystal heat sensitive paper, 51 mm x 305 mm (2 in x 12 in) or similar size (Contact Edmund Scientific at 800-728-6999 for part number CR30723-70 or go to www.scientificsonline.com), or ^ Optional-A portable infrared thermometer, GE-46819, available from Kent-Moore (1-800-345-2233), or equivalent. Correction There are three distinct zones across the back window that must be checked. They are: ^ the driver's side outboard of the two vertical lines ^ the passenger side outboard of the two vertical lines ^ the central zone that falls between the two vertical lines To detect a broken grid line in any of the above three zones and to isolate the exact location of the break, perform the following steps: Caution: ^ Approved safety glasses and gloves should be worn when performing this procedure to reduce the chance of personal injury. ^ Cover the rear shelf area to prevent damage to the interior trim material. 1. Start the engine and turn on the back window defogger. 2. Take the ball of fine steel wool and twist one end to a point. Move the point slowly across each grid line. Be sure to start at the far side of the zone and move it to the opposite side of the zone. When you bridge the grid line break with the steel wool, you will see a small spark. Repeat the test over the same area to be sure you have accurately located the break. Mark the exact location of the grid line break. Repeat this portion of the test for each grid line. If you do not see a spark at any point, it is possible that there are two breaks in the same line and zone. Close visual inspection using a magnifying glass may be the only way to locate breaks in this case. 3. The following are provided as an alternative way to detect a non-functional grid line. If available, use in addition to the steel wool. 3.1. Method using liquid crystal heat sensitive paper: Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection > Page 12039 Important: The first part of the test must be completed quickly before the entire surface of the back window becomes warm. 3.1.1. From outside the vehicle, place the heat sensitive paper (dull surface in contact with the glass) against the top driver side grid line. Start the engine and turn on the back window defogger. A distinct color change will take place at each conductive grid line. Repeat for the bottom grid lines until they have all been checked in the driver side zone. 3.1.2. Repeat the process for the passenger side and center area zones. 3.1.3. If no color change is noted for a grid line, place a crayon or china marker check mark beside it. Mark each grid line in the zone where it is non-conductive and, therefore, not heating up. More than one broken grid line may be found. 3.2. Method using portable infrared thermometer: 3.2.1. Start the engine and turn on the rear back window defogger. 3.2.2. From inside the vehicle, start at the top driver side grid line and slowly run the portable infrared thermometer vertically down the rear window contacting each grid line. You should be able to see a district variation in temperature readings. 3.2.3. Mark each grid line in the zone where it is non-conductive and, therefore, not heating up. More than one broken grid line may be found. 3.2.4. Repeat the process for the passenger side and center area zones. 4. Use Permatex(R) Quick Grid, GM P/N 12346001, or equivalent, to repair each broken grid line. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Wait 24 hours before turning the defogger on, or the repair can be fast cured using a heat gun, 260°C - 371°C (500°F - 700°F). Hold the heat gun within 25 - 51 mm (1-2 in) from the repair point for 2 to 3 minutes. 6. Recheck the grid line with the heat sensitive paper or portable infrared thermometer to ensure that the line is now functional and that the repair was successful. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Rear Defogger: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12042 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12043 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12044 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12045 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12046 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12047 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12048 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12049 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12050 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12051 Rear Defogger: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12052 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12053 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12054 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12055 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12056 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12057 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12058 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12059 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12060 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12061 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12062 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12063 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12064 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12065 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12066 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12067 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12068 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12069 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12070 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12071 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12072 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12073 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12074 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12075 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12076 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12077 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12078 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12079 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12080 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12081 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12082 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12083 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12084 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12085 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12086 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12087 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12088 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12089 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12090 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12091 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12092 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12093 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12094 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12095 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12096 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12097 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12098 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12099 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12100 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12101 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12102 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12103 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12104 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12105 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12106 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12107 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12108 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12109 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12110 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12111 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12112 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12113 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12114 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12115 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12116 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12117 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12118 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations RF Of The Passenger Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12125 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12126 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12127 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12128 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12129 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12130 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12131 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12132 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12133 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12134 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12135 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12136 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12137 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12138 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12139 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12140 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12141 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12142 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12143 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12144 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12145 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12146 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12147 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12148 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12149 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12150 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12151 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12152 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12153 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12154 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12155 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12156 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12157 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12158 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12159 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12160 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12161 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12162 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12163 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12164 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12165 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12166 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12167 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12168 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12169 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12170 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12171 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12172 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12173 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12174 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12175 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12176 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12177 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12178 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12179 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12180 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12181 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12182 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12183 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12184 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12185 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12186 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12187 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12188 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12189 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12190 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12191 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12192 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12193 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12194 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12195 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12196 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12197 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12198 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12199 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12200 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12201 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12202 Power Window Switch: Connector Views Power Window Switch - Main Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12203 Window Switch - LR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12204 Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Trim Bezel Replacement - Center) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 12207 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. Installation Procedure 1. Position the switch assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 12208 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Trim Bezel Replacement - Center) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 12209 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch.. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 12210 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push in the switch to seat. 3. Install the door trim panel assembly. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR REPLACEMENT - FRONT DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the water deflector. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the front door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the window from the regulator. 1. Raise the window. 2. Tape the window into position. 5. Remove the front door window regulator motor screws. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12216 1. Align the front door window regulator motor assembly to the front door window regulator. 2. Install the front door window regulator motor to regulator screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the front door window regulator motor to door screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the front door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. 5. Install the front door trim panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Window Regulator Motor Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Remove the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws. 5. Remove the rear door window regulator motor assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12220 1. Align the rear door window regulator motor assembly to the rear door window regulator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws. Tighten the rear door window regulator motor to regulator screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the rear door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Rear Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 5. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations RF Of The Passenger Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Utility/Van Zoning UTILITY/VAN ZONING All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The table explains the numbering system. Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12226 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12227 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12228 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12229 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12230 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12231 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12232 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12233 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12234 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12235 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids Basic Knowledge Required BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service data. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Checking Aftermarket Accessories CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. NOTE: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice in Service Precautions. - OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: Power feeds connected to points other than the battery - Antenna location - Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring - Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line - Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS TOOLS REQUIRED J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: Wiggling the harness - Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting - Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector - Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation - Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12236 necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. SALT WATER SPRAY Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. HIGH TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. LOW TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. DUPLICATING FAILURE CONDITIONS - If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. - Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. - An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency MEASURING FREQUENCY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. IMPORTANT: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage MEASURING VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12237 The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: - Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. - Turn ON the engine. - Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. - Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS IMPORTANT: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12238 Refer to the shown table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors. Backprobe IMPORTANT: Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. - Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. - Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. - After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE Snapshot is a recording of the parameters of a control module while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition recur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. There are many different scan tools that have varying functions. For example, the Tech 2 Scan Tool can also graph parameters separately or in combinations of parameters for comparison. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. It can trigger a Snapshot manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or be set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. The Tech 2 Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: Snapshot-taken from the Snapshot menu choice - Quick Snapshot-taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1,200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Tech 2 Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12239 VEHICLE DATA RECORDER The J 42598 is connected to the data link connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information. Testing For a Short To Voltage TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 Volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity TESTING FOR CONTINUITY NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the. position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp IMPORTANT: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing For Electrical Intermittents TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. - Testing for Short to Ground - Testing for Continuity - Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. IMPORTANT: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on connecting the J 39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 msRECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12240 IMPORTANT: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 Volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. - If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 Volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing For Intermittent and Poor Connections TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS TOOLS REQUIRED - J 35616-C GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit - J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit - J 42675 Flat-Wire Probe Adapter When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: Wiring broken inside the insulation - Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector. - Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. - Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. - Wire insulation which is rubbed through.This causes an intermittent short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. - Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required in order to verify the complaint. - Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. - Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. TESTING FOR PROPER TERMINAL CONTACT It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616- C when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. ROUND WIRE CONNECTORS Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of Metri-Pack or 56 series terminals. Refer to the J 38125-D or the J 38125-4 Instruction Manual for terminal identification. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J 38125-D, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. FLAT WIRE (DOCK AND LOCK) CONNECTORS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12241 There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact. 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675 on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. CONTROL MODULE/COMPONENT VOLTAGE AND GROUNDS Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. - Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY - An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. - Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. - If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. - If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. - Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. - If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTRICAL NOISE Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. - Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. - Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. - Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. - The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. INCORRECT CONTROL MODULE - There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing For Short to Ground Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12242 TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect 1 lead of the DMM to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect 1 lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to 1 end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). - When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. - If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting With A Digital Multimeter TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the PCM, should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200. The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: - Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. - Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. - If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP TOOLS REQUIRED Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12243 J 34142- B 12-Volt Unpowered Test Lamp NOTE: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Service Precautions. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. The J 34142- B is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach 1 lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach 1 lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS NOTE: Do not insert test equipment probes into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal can cause a poor connection, which can result in system failures. Always use the J 35616- B Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect measurements. Using Fused Jumper Wires USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES TOOLS REQUIRED J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire IMPORTANT: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. Connector Position Assurance Locks CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR mating terminals. Terminal Position Assurance Locks TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE LOCKS The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Bosch Connectors (BSK) BOSCH CONNECTORS (BSK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12244 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Bosch Connectors (0.64) BOSCH CONNECTORS (0.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12245 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12246 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Never insert the same terminal back into the connector once it is removed. Crimp on a new terminal. 2. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the coding lugs align with the coding grooves on the connector. 3. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector 4. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 5. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) BOSCH CONNECTORS (2.8 JPT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12247 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) DELPHI CONNECTORS (WEATHER PACK) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). IMPORTANT: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12248 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PUSH TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12249 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. REINSTALLING TERMINAL 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) DELPHI CONNECTORS (PULL TO SEAT) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal (1) out the front of the connector body (3). IMPORTANT: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. TERMINAL REPAIR 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. TERMINAL INSTALLATION 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO-PACK 100W) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12250 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. IMPORTANT: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12251 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12252 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12253 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. TERMINAL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12254 locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) DELPHI CONNECTORS (MICRO.64) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro 64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. 5. If the connector has a nose piece, use a small flat-blade tool to remove the nose piece by inserting the blade into the slot on the front of the connector and prying up on the nose piece. 6. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12255 IMPORTANT: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. IMPORTANT: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-13A tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. REPAIR PROCEDURE Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. IMPORTANT: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12256 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (CM 42-WAY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12257 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12258 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Repairing Connector Terminals REPAIRING CONNECTOR TERMINALS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: - Push to Seat terminals - Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate terminal repair. The J 38125-D contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used.Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100 .64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (SENSOR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12259 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12260 TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Tyco/AMP Connectors (025 Cap) TYCO/AMP CONNECTORS (025 CAP) TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. IMPORTANT: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12261 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to replace the terminal. Yakazi Connectors YAKAZI CONNECTORS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-DTerminal Repair Kit TERMINAL REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12262 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J 38125-D to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. TERMINAL REPAIR PROCEDURE Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J 38125-D. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker: This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12263 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link IMPORTANT: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. Flat Wire Repairs FLAT WIRE REPAIRS NOTE: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN WIRING REPAIRS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12264 TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: Duraseal splice sleeves - A wire stripping tool - J 38125-8 (12085115) crimping tool - J 38125-5 (12085116) ultratorch The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN REPAIRS IMPORTANT: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR IMPORTANT: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J 38125-D. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12265 - Use the duraseal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. - Do not use the duraseal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12266 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Wiring Repairs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit NOTE: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: - Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. - Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. - Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. - To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J 38125-D. High Temperature Wiring Repairs HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. - Replace any heat shielding that is removed. - Cover any duraseal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). - After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. IDENTIFYING HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRING Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12267 The J 38125-D contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections - High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves - A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J 38125-D does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. HIGH TEMPERATURE WIRE REPAIR IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the duraseal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice.Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the duraseal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12268 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D in order to position the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. 8. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the duraseal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the duraseal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12269 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the duraseal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation REPAIRING DAMAGED WIRE INSULATION If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. Sir/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS WIRING REPAIRS TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS system wiring, and the wiring components (such as connectors and terminals). IMPORTANT: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals unless specifically indicated by the terminal package. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12270 The tool kit J 38125-D contains the following items: Duraseal splice sleeves-In order to repair the SIR/SRS system wiring - A wire stripping tool - A special crimping tool - A heat torch - An instruction manual The duraseal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. - A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J 38125-D also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: A large sampling of common electrical terminals - The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires - The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS CONNECTOR (PLASTIC BODY AND TERMINAL METAL PIN) REPAIR Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to repair the damaged SIR/SRS wire harness connectors and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices. Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires, connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the splices from the J 38125-D. You must use the splice crimping tool in order to apply these splices. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are only available in the connector repair assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the assembly packs. If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector, use one of the following 2 components in order to replace the SDM harness connector: The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly - The SDM harness connector replacement kit If the individual terminals are damaged on any other SIR/SRS connection, use the appropriate connector repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire connection. Replace the entire SIR/SRS wiring harness, if needed, in order to maintain Restraint Systems/SRS circuit integrity. SIR/SRS WIRE PIGTAIL REPAIR IMPORTANT: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component (with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS WIRE REPAIR Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from the J 38125-D. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12271 IMPORTANT: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: - Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. - Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. - Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in)away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: - When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. - Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. - Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. - If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-D to crimp splice sleeve. In order to position the splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool, refer to the table at the beginning of this repair procedure. 6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12272 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. SIR/SRS SYSTEM WIRE SPLICE REPAIR Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 38125-D if damage occurs to any of the original equipment splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR/SRS wiring harness. Carefully follow the instructions included in the kit for proper splice clip application. CONNECTOR POSITION ASSURANCE (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the SIR/SRS system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the SIR/SRS mating terminals. TERMINAL POSITION ASSURANCE (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE CLIPS IMPORTANT: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12273 bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J 38125-D in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. - Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. - Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12274 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves SPLICING COPPER WIRE USING SPLICE SLEEVES TOOLS REQUIRED J 38125-D Terminal Repair Kit IMPORTANT: Use only GM splice sleeves, other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and coaxial where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12275 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. - Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. - Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. - The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. - The wire's insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. IMPORTANT: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. - Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. - Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. - Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (12085115) until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. - Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. - Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes SPLICING INLINE HARNESS DIODES Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12276 1. Open the harness. - If the harness is taped, remove the tape. - To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. - If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. IMPORTANT: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service data wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. IMPORTANT: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable SPLICING TWISTED OR SHIELDED CABLE Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. IMPORTANT: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12277 4. Re-assemble the cable. - Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. - Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). - Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. - Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with mylar tape. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12278 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12279 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12280 Arrow And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12281 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12282 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12283 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12284 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12285 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12286 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12287 The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12288 A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12289 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12290 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERs All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12291 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12292 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12293 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12294 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12295 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12296 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12297 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12298 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12299 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12300 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12301 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12302 Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12303 Power Window Switch: Connector Views Power Window Switch - Main Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12304 Window Switch - LR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12305 Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Trim Bezel Replacement - Center) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. 2. Remove the screws from the power window switch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 12308 3. Remove the switch assembly from the bezel. Installation Procedure 1. Position the switch assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws to the switch assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 12309 3. Install the console shift lever bezel. Refer to Trim Bezel Replacement - Center (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Trim Bezel Replacement - Center) in Instrument Panel, Gages, and Console. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 12310 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Power Window Switch Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to pry the switch from the door handle assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch.. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 12311 2. Position the switch on the door handle assembly. Push in the switch to seat. 3. Install the door trim panel assembly. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 12321 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 12322 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 12323 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 12329 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 12330 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 12331 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Front Corner Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Channel Window Channel Replacement Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Front Door (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Remove the outside rearview mirror. 4. Remove the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 5. Remove the window run channel bolts. 6. Remove the front door window run channel. Starting from the rear corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12350 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 1. Install the window run channel seal to the door header flange, starting from the rear corner. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 2. Install the front door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front) . 3. Install the front door frame applique. Refer to Door Frame Applique Replacement - Front () . 4. Install the outside rearview mirror. 5. Install the front door window. Refer to Window Replacement Front Door (See: Service and Repair) . Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Front Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12351 1. Lower the front door window. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Door Window Sealing Strip/Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure 1. Install the window weatherstrip run channel assembly. 1. Starting at the lower rear corner of the window opening, press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner (See: Door Window Sealing Strip/Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement) . 3. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12352 Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12353 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Front Side Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12354 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Front Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the rear edge of the door. 2. Remove the outside rearview mirror. 3. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12355 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. 3. Install the outside rearview mirror. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 4. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Window Replacement - Liftgate Tools Required * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 or Equivalent * Isopropyl Alcohol or equivalent * Cartridge-Type Caulking Gun * Commercial-Type Utility Knife * Razor Blade Scraper * Suction Cups * Plastic Paddle Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Cracked Window Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) in Body Rear End. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the liftgate window defogger bus bar. Caution: Refer to Defroster Outlet Caution in Cautions and Notices. 4. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12359 5. Remove the liftgate window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A , J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window. 6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the liftgate window into the opening. Refer to Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Windshield) (See: Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Windshield))Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Liftgate) ( See: Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows (Liftgate)) . 2. Connect the liftgate window defogger electrical connectors to the bus bar. 3. Install the liftgate trim. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and Repair) in Body Rear End. 4. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 5. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Quarter Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12364 Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Quarter Window Replacement Tools Required * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 or Equivalent * Isopropyl Alcohol or equivalent * Cartridge-type Caulking Gun * Commercial-type Utility Knife * Razor Blade Scraper * Suction Cups * Plastic Paddle Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Cracked Window Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: Before cutting out a quarter window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the inside garnish molding. Caution: Refer to Defroster Outlet Caution in Cautions and Notices. 3. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Cautions and Notices. Important: When cutting out the quarter window use care not to damage the encapsulation around the perimeter of the quarter window. If the encapsulation is damaged, the window must be replaced. Important: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the quarter window. Do this from inside the vehicle to protect the outer painted surface. 4. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12365 * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use the J 24402-A , J 39032 , or equivalent in order to remove the quarter window. 5. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window (1) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Important: The molded encapsulation surrounding the quarter window is made using PVC plastic materials. Use a specific PVC primer application prior to applying the urethane adhesive bead to the window. 1. Install the quarter window into the opening. Refer to Urethane Adhesive Installation of Encapsulated Stationary Windows (See: Service and Repair/Urethane Adhesive Installation of Encapsulated Stationary Windows) . 2. Install the inside garnish molding. 3. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 4. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Channel Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer toWindow Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear ( See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Remove the rear door window run channel and fixed window assembly. 1. Starting from the front corner of the door, remove the seal from the door header flange. 2. Remove the seal assembly from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12371 1. Install the window run channel seal assembly. 1. Place the seal assembly into the door frame. 2. Place the seal assembly on the door header. 3. Install the seal to the door header flange, starting from the front corner. 2. Install the rear door window weatherstrip run channel assembly. Refer to Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear (See: Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear) . 3. Install the rear door window. Refer to Window Replacement - Rear Door (See: Service and Repair) . Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Window Weatherstrip Run Channel Assembly Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12372 1. Lower the rear door window. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 3. Remove the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: ) . 4. Starting at one end, carefully pull the window weatherstrip run channel assembly from the door frame. Installation Procedure 1. Align the notch in the window weatherstrip seal to the fixed window post and press the weatherstrip onto the window flange. 1. Press the weatherstrip run channel onto the door flange. 2. Ensure the channel is fully secured into the upper corners of the door frame. 2. Install the inner belt seal. Refer to Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner (See: ) . 3. Install the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12373 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Rear Door Window Belt Inner Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair 2. Remove the inner belt seal from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12374 1. Install the inner belt seal. 2. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement Side Rear Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair Rear Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Window Belt Outer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the belt seal retaining screw at the front edge of the door. 2. Remove the outer belt seal by lifting up on the seal starting at the rear and working forward. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Channel > Page 12375 1. Align the outer belt seal fastener location with the hole in the door structure and outer panel retaining tabs. 2. Starting at the rear of the belt seal, push the belt seal down onto the flange until fully seated. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the outer belt seal retaining screw. Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Window Handle: Service and Repair Window Regulator Handle Replacement - Door Removal Procedure 1. Using a standard handle tool, disengage the retention spring from the window regulator handle. 2. Remove the handle and the bearing plate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the retention spring on the window regulator handle. 2. Install the bearing plate on the regulator spindle. 3. Install the handle to the regulator spindle at a position 60 degrees forward of the up position. The illustration shows the proper angle for both the right and the left side doors. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the front door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door (See: Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Door Window Channel/Window Channel Replacement) . 3. Remove the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 4. Disconnect the mirror electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the 4 electrical connector rosebuds (2 at the mirror and 2 under the speaker). 6. Loosen the 2 rear module bolts. 7. Remove the 4 remaining module bolts. 8. Remove the 3 latch bolts from the door shut face. 9. Disconnect the door harness at the door jamb. 10. Remove the window regulator module from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) > Page 12384 1. Install the window regulator module into the door. 2. Connect the door harness at the door jamb. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the 3 latch bolts to the door shut face. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the 4 module bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Connect the 4 electrical connector rosebuds (2 at the mirror and 2 under the speaker). 6. Connect the mirror electrical connector. 7. Install the front door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Front Door in Entertainment. 8. Install the front door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Front Door (See: Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Door Window Channel/Window Channel Replacement) . 9. Install the front door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) > Page 12385 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement Window Regulator Motor Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the front door window regulator motor. 4. Remove the window from the regulator. 1. Raise the window. 2. Tape the window into position. 5. Remove the front door window regulator motor screws. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Regulator Replacement (Manual) > Page 12386 1. Align the front door window regulator motor assembly to the front door window regulator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the front door window regulator motor to regulator screws. Tighten the front door window regulator motor to door screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the front door window regulator motor. 4. Install the water deflector. Refer to Water Deflector Replacement - Front Door See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Install the front door trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the rear door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door (See: Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Door Window Channel/Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door) . 3. Remove the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector rosebuds. 5. Loosen the 2 rear module bolts. 6. Remove the 4 remaining module bolts. 7. Remove the 3 latch bolts from the door shut face. 8. Disconnect the door harness at the door jamb. 9. Remove the window regulator module from the door. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12390 1. Install the window regulator module into the door. 2. Connect the door harness at the door jamb. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 3. Install the 3 latch bolts to the door shut face. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Install the 4 module bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connector rosebuds. 6. Install the rear door lower speaker. Refer to Speaker Replacement - Rear Door in Entertainment. 7. Install the rear door window run channel assembly. Refer to Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door (See: Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Door Window Channel/Window Run Channel Replacement - Rear Door) . 8. Install the rear door outside handle. Refer to Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Applique Replacement - Windshield Frame Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws from the windshield pillar applique. 2. Remove applique from the vehicle by carefully pulling from the front of the molding rearward to disengage the retainers. Installation Procedure 1. Position the windshield pillar applique to the vehicle and push in to secure the retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and Notices. 2. Install the screws that secure the applique to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12395 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12401 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12402 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12406 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer HOSE REPLACEMENT - WINDSHIELD WASHER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air inlet grill. 2. Separate the front washer nozzle hose from the front washer solvent container hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. 3. Remove the front washer nozzle hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the front nozzle hose to the front washer solvent container hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. 2. Position the washer hoses into the vehicle. 3. Install the air inlet grille. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer > Page 12411 Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Hose Replacement - Rear WASHER HOSE REPLACEMENT - REAR REAR WASHER HOSE ROUTING The rear washer hose is a component of the main body wire harness assembly. The rear washer hose is a hard plastic convoluted tube that is wrapped in the electrical tape along with the main body wiring harness. It starts underhood where it connects to the rear washer solvent container hose, this is rubber tubing. The rear washer hose routes into the main body wire harness underhood and passes through the front of the dash. The rear washer hose runs inside the vehicle interior along the left side rocker and over the left rear wheel housing. The rear washer hose is then routed up the left side pillar where it connects to the rear washer nozzle hose , where it is rubber tubing, at the top of the lift gate opening. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Locate the damaged section of the rear washer hose, this will be hard plastic convoluted tubing. 2. If the leak is located inside the main body wire harness, cut back the wire harness electrical tape to expose the damaged section. 3. Cut out the damaged section of the rear washer hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Replace the damaged section of the rear washer hose. - Use a 9.5 mm (3/8 in) vacuum hose to replace damaged section. - Overlap the rear washer hose, the plastic tubing, by 10 mm (0.39 in) on each end. - Retain each end of the vacuum hose with a 100 mm (4 in) cable tie. 2. Verify the repair by activating the washer system and checking for leaks. 3. If the leak was located inside the main body wire harness, use electrical tape to retain the repaired section to the wire harness. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer > Page 12412 4. If the leak requires the rear washer hose to be removed in the front of dash grommet do the following: - Cut out the auxiliary washer hose hole from the grommet. - Pass new section of the rear washer hose through the new grommet hose. - Repair the hose on either side of the grommet. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Windshield Washer Fluid Pump Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump/Reservoir Replacement Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump/Reservoir Replacement WASHER PUMP/RESERVOIR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the coolant surge tank bolts. IMPORTANT: Allow the coolant surge tank sufficient cooling time before handling. 2. Disconnect the surge tank level sensor and set surge tank aside in engine compartment. IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the coolant hoses from the coolant surge tank. 3. Remove the front washer solvent container bolts. 4. Disconnect the front washer solvent container hose from the front washer nozzle hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump/Reservoir Replacement > Page 12421 5. Angle the washer solvent container to the rear of the vehicle and pull out of the mounting hole. 6. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 7. Pull the washer solvent pump from the solvent container. IMPORTANT: Contain any solvent the may spill while removing pump and hoses. 8. Disconnect the front and rear washer solvent hoses from the washer pump. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the front and rear washer solvent hoses to the washer pump. IMPORTANT: Do not reuse washer solvent as debris may clog the system. 2. Install the washer pump into the washer solvent container. Ensure the washer pump filter is installed, if removed. 3. Connect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. Insert the front and rear washer solvent container hoses into the grooves in the solvent container. 5. Install the washer solvent container into the motor compartment. Ensure that the washer solvent container's mounting peg, with grommet installed, is seated into the mounting hole in the body structure. A lubricant may be used to ease installation. IMPORTANT: Washer solvent container grommet must be installed between container and body structure to prevent squeaks and rattles. 6. Connect the front washer solvent container hose to front nozzle hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump/Reservoir Replacement > Page 12422 7. Install the washer solvent container screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 8. Position coolant surge tank back into correct location. 9. Install the coolant surge tank bolts. Tighten the bolts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 10. Fill the washer solvent container with washer solvent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump/Reservoir Replacement > Page 12423 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump Filter Grommet Replacement WASHER PUMP FILTER GROMMET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the washer solvent pump. 2. Remove the washer solvent filter grommet from the pump. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the washer solvent filter grommet to the pump. 2. Install the washer solvent pump. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair WASHER PUMP/RESERVOIR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the coolant surge tank bolts. IMPORTANT: Allow the coolant surge tank sufficient cooling time before handling. 2. Disconnect the surge tank level sensor and set surge tank aside in engine compartment. IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the coolant hoses from the coolant surge tank. 3. Remove the front washer solvent container bolts. 4. Disconnect the front washer solvent container hose from the front washer nozzle hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. 5. Angle the washer solvent container to the rear of the vehicle and pull out of the mounting hole. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12427 6. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 7. Pull the washer solvent pump from the solvent container. IMPORTANT: Contain any solvent the may spill while removing pump and hoses. 8. Disconnect the front and rear washer solvent hoses from the washer pump. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the front and rear washer solvent hoses to the washer pump. IMPORTANT: Do not reuse washer solvent as debris may clog the system. 2. Install the washer pump into the washer solvent container. Ensure the washer pump filter is installed, if removed. 3. Connect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. Insert the front and rear washer solvent container hoses into the grooves in the solvent container. 5. Install the washer solvent container into the motor compartment. Ensure that the washer solvent container's mounting peg, with grommet installed, is seated into the mounting hole in the body structure. A lubricant may be used to ease installation. IMPORTANT: Washer solvent container grommet must be installed between container and body structure to prevent squeaks and rattles. 6. Connect the front washer solvent container hose to front nozzle hose that runs along the upper motor compartment rail. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12428 7. Install the washer solvent container screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 8. Position coolant surge tank back into correct location. 9. Install the coolant surge tank bolts. Tighten the bolts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 10. Fill the washer solvent container with washer solvent. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Nozzle Replacement - Front Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Washer Nozzle Replacement - Front WASHER NOZZLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air inlet grille panel. 2. Depress the washer nozzle tabs to disengage the nozzle from the air inlet grille. 3. Remove the nozzle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Push the washer nozzles into the air inlet grille panel until the tabs engage with the panel. 2. Install the air inlet grille panel. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Nozzle Replacement - Front > Page 12433 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Washer Nozzle Replacement - Rear WASHER NOZZLE REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp (CHMSL). 2. Disconnect the rear washer nozzle hose from the rear washer nozzle. 3. Rotate the rear washer nozzle 45 degrees counterclockwise and remove the nozzle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the rear washer nozzle into the CHMSL and rotate 45 degreesclockwise to lock the nozzle into position. 2. Connect the rear washer nozzle hose to the rear nozzle. Soapy water may be used as a lubricant to aid in assembly. 3. Install the CHMSL. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12437 Left Side Of The I/P, Steering Column Connections Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12438 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Replacement WIPER ARM REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open hood to access wiper arm nut. 2. Remove wiper arm nut. 3. Lift wiper arm assembly away from windshield and remove wiper arm from pivot shaft. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position wiper blade assembly at the dot in lower portion of windshield blackout strip on driver side of vehicle. 2. Position wiper blade assembly at the dot in windshield pillar portion of windshield blackout strip on passenger side of vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement > Page 12443 3. Install the wiper arm nut. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nut to 28 N.m (21 lb ft). 4. Operate the windshield wipers and inspect for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement > Page 12444 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Replacement - Rear WIPER ARM REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wiper arm finish cap to expose the wiper arm nut. 2. Remove the rear wiper arm nut. 3. Lift the rear wiper arm assembly away from the rear window and remove the wiper arm from the pivot shaft. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position wiper blade assembly on the blackout strip as shown in the illustration. 2. Install the rear wiper arm nut. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement > Page 12445 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nut to 21 N.m (16 lb ft). 3. Install the rear wiper arm finish cap. 4. Operate the windshield wipers and inspect for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 12450 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Blade Replacement WIPER ARM BLADE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the wiper arm to the service up position 2. Depress the wiper blade attachment clip and slide blade out of wiper arm hook. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the hook of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade. IMPORTANT: Passenger and driver side wiper blades are different lengths. Ensure that the longer blade is installed on the driver side. 2. Press the wiper blade pivot into the wiper arm hook until the pivot locks into the hook. 3. Operate the windshield wipers and inspect for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 12453 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blade Element Replacement WIPER BLADE ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lift the wiper arm up to the service position. 2. Remove the wiper blade element by squeezing the metal tabs and pulling on the end of the insert at the heel claw. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the wiper blade element into the wiper blade, starting with the heel claw, so that the claw engages in the groove of the wiper blade element. IMPORTANT: Passenger and driver side wiper blades are different lengths. Ensure that the longer blade is installed on the driver side. - Do not remove the retainer clips from the new wiper blade element until installed. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 12454 2. Guide the wiper blade element through the wiper blade claw sets. 3. Push the wiper blade insert so that the metal tabs fully engage into the heel claw. NOTE: If the metal clip on the wiper blade insert is not completely engaged to the heel claw, the wiper blade insert will not be sufficiently retained and may result in windshield damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 12455 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Blade Element Cleaning BLADE ELEMENT CLEANING Lift each blade assembly off of the windshield and clean the element with a cloth saturated with full strength washer solvent. Hold the blade in one hand and wipe the element with the saturated cloth until the black residue disappears. Then rinse the blade assembly elements with clean drinkable water. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 12456 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Blade Replacement - Rear WIPER ARM BLADE REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the wiper arm to the service up position 2. Depress the wiper blade attachment clip and slide blade out of wiper arm hook. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the hook of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade. 2. Press the wiper blade pivot into the wiper arm hook until the pivot locks into the hook. 3. Operate the windshield wipers and inspect for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 12457 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Blade Element Replacement - Rear BLADE ELEMENT REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lift the wiper arm up to the service position. 2. Remove the wiper blade element by squeezing the metal tabs and pulling on the end of the insert at the heel claw. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the wiper blade element into the wiper blade, starting with the heel claw, so that the claw engages in the groove of the wiper blade element. IMPORTANT: Do not remove the retainer clips from the new wiper blade element until installed. 2. Guide the wiper blade element through the wiper blade claw sets. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 12458 3. Push the wiper blade insert so that the metal tabs fully engage into the heel claw. NOTE: If the metal clip on the wiper blade insert is not completely engaged to the heel claw, the wiper blade insert will not be sufficiently retained and may result in windshield damage. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations Wiper Motor: Locations Wiper/Washer System Components Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12462 Liftgate Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Wiper Motor: Connector Views Windshield Wiper Motor Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 12465 Wiper Motor - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper motor module. 2. Remove the wiper motor to crank nut. 3. Remove the two wiper motor to wiper module frame bolts. 4. Remove the wiper motor from the wiper module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the wiper motor to the wiper module. 2. Install the two wiper motor to wiper module frame bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 12468 Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 3. Install the wiper motor crank arm and crank arm nut. Tighten the screws to 14 N.m (10 lb ft). 4. Install the wiper motor module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 12469 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Module Replacement WIPER MOTOR MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper arms. 2. Remove the air inlet grille. 3. Remove the wiper module bolts. 4. Lift the wiper motor module away from the cowl. 5. Disconnect the wire harness rosebud clip from the wiper module frame. 6. Disconnect the wiper module electrical connector at the motor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the wiper module electrical connector to the motor. 2. Connect the wire harness rosebud clip to the wiper module frame. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 12470 3. Install the wiper module assembly into the plenum. 4. Install the fasteners attaching the wiper module assembly to the plenum. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fasteners to 12 N.m (9 lb ft) 5. Turn the key to RUN position and cycle wiper system to ensure motor is in the park position. 6. Install the air inlet screens. 7. Install the wiper arms. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 12471 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Module Grommet Replacement WIPER MOTOR MODULE GROMMET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front wiper motor. 2. Remove the grommets and the bushings from the module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the grommets and the bushings to the module. IMPORTANT: The metal bushing inserts need to be installed with the flat side underneath the module bolts. 2. Install the front wiper motor. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 12472 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement - Liftgate WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT - LIFTGATE REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wiper arm. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 3. Remove the rear wiper motor bolts. 4. Remove the motor by sliding the pivot shaft out of the rear window grommet. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 12473 2. Install the rear wiper motor through the rear window grommet. 3. Install the wiper motor bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 4. Install the liftgate trim panel. 5. Install the wiper motor module. Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.4L VIN F (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer System Components